Loading...
18-013 (7) .R Blank Page f#11 dw Mw 16925-2 Wal-Mart 92901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 W UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 16925 - HVAC WIRING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Power and control wiring for HVAC systems. B. Related Work: 1. Division 15 sections: Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment including ductwork and exhaust fans, provided under Division 15 sections. 2. Division 15 sections: Motor starters and control devices for each rooftop unit provided under Division 15 sections, including mechanical control terminations. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Furnish electrical interface items indicated on Drawings. Sizes shown are nominal. Coordinate requirements with Division 15 sections and provide electrical items with proper rating to match requirements of equipment supplied. B. If air duct smoke detectors are indicated on Drawings or required by local code except in roof top units, provide control wiring for duct smoke detector operation. If local governing code permits, connect power to nearest general purpose receptacle. If smoke detectors are required in the new roof top units, they will be factory mounted and wired in the roof top unit. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit for rooftop units within curb perimeter. Penetrations of roof membrane with electrical conduits will not be permitted without prior Wal-Mart approval. If roof penetration is approved, it shall be made in accordance with other portions of these Specifications. B. Install control wiring for duct smoke detector operation if air duct smoke detectors are indicated on Drawings or required by local codes. Verify requirements with Division 15 sections. Connect control wiring under provisions of Division 15 sections. wo END OF SECTION 16925-1 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 4W 2.2 TELEPHONE SYSTEM A. Telephone cable equipment will be furnished and installed by Wal-Mart under separate contract. B. Telephone System Grounding Conductors: Provide #6 AWG, copper grounding conductor from telephone service equipment to electrical service grounding electrode system or dry type •• transformer grounding electrode system. C. Telephone Conduit System: Provide conduit system as indicated on Drawings, including: I. Telephone service conduit. 2. Other conduits as indicated on Drawings. Provide#14 AWG soft iron pull wire or heavy nylon cord in each conduit for pulling the telephone cable to each termination point. 3. Provide outlet boxes conforming to requirements of"Outlet Boxes and Conduit Fitting" of these Specifications; include cover plates. 2.3 SIGNAL SYSTEMS .. A. Provide Hubbell Catalog No. 1281MO momentary switch in flush switch box with Hubbell Cat. No. 1795 weatherproof cover at truck dock personnel door and Edwards Cat.No. 1065-N5, 120 volt AC buzzer in flush switch box with Slater Cat. No. S-771N louvered cover plate in Stockroom as indicated on Drawings. Signal system wiring shall be No. 12AWG unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install telephone conduit system, telephone grounding conductor, and signal systems as indicated on Drawings. B. Install satellite dish electrical conduit, power to satellite dish mounting, and satellite cable conduit system as indicated on Drawings. C. Install signal system as indicated on Drawings. Provide flush mounted, single gang masonry boxes for mounting of push buttons and bells. END OF SECTION ** 16700-2 Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 16700- COMMUNICATIONS No PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Satellite Dish Equipment. 2. Telephone and Signal System Equipment. 3. Signal System: Door buzzer at truck dock and stockroom. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 2. Section 16405 - Electrical Service and Distribution Center: Prefabricated Electrical Distribution Center. 1.2 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Satellite Dish Milestone Completion Date: Install conduit, power, and interface work for satellite dish mounting on or before Delivery date specified in Section 01600, "Products Furnished By Others Schedule." B. Telephone Milestone Completion Date: Complete installation of telephone/FACP system ground conductor, telephone/FACP conduit system, and interface work on or before Delivery date specified in Section 01600, "Products Furnished By Others Schedule." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SATELLITE DISH EQUIPMENT A. Equipment: Furnished and installed by Wal-Mart under separate contract. B. Cabling: Satellite Dish Communication (IFL)Cable will be furnished, installed, and terminated by Wal-Mart under separate contract. C. Raceway System: 1. Provide raceways for satellite dish communication cable as indicated on Drawings. 2. Provide 414 AWG soft iron pull wire or heavy nylon cord in each conduit for pulling satellite cable to each termination point. 3. Provide outlet boxes conforming to requirements of"Outlet Boxes and Conduit Fitting" of these Specifications; include cover plates. 16700-1 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 Blank Page 16500-4 Wal-Mart 92901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 w OR END OF SECTION 16500-3 Wal-Mart #2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 1. Manufacturing Defects: Manufacturer will provide full one year warranty, from Date of Substantial Completion, against manufacturing defects. 2. Installation Defects: Provide full one year warranty, from Date of Substantial Completion, against installation defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHT FIXTURES(OWNER FURNISHED) A. Owner's selected lighting vendor: 1. Malmstrom White Co., Little Rock, AR. (501)224-2775. B. Install lighting fixtures and lamps as indicated on Drawings. C. Verify ceiling and wall details. Install fixtures complete with proper mounting arrangements for ceiling or wall construction encountered. D. Where indicated on Drawings, install Protect-A-Lamp covers and caps. 2.2 EXTERIOR BUILDING ILLUMINATED SIGNAGE A. Provide electrical circuits and connections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install lighting fixtures, lamps, and sign circuits and connections in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. B. Coordinate exact mounting location of light fixtures with building structure and other trades prior to installation. Refer to Drawings for locations of ductwork and diffusers. C. Recessed fixtures installed in lay-in ceiling grid systems shall have four to six feet of flexible •• conduit from outlet boxes supported from building structural system to fixtures. Fixtures shall be attached to ceiling grid. D. Fixtures shall not be installed until ceiling grid system has been leveled to assure level plane. E. Strip lights shall be attached and wired as indicated on Drawings. Rows shall be straight, true. F. Contractor shall maintain all light fixtures and lamps furnished by Owner during construction, and coordinate replacement of any defective lamps with Owner's selected vendor prior to Certification of Substantial Completion (Possession by Wal-Mart). Contractor shall notify selected vendor immediately of any damaged fixtures or lamps delivered to the jobsite and make arrangements to have them replaced. 16500-2 Wal-Mart 92901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 an an UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 16500- LIGHTING on PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior lighting fixtures. 2. Exterior building security lighting fixtures. 3. Circuit and connection to illuminated canopy, automotive, roadside, or mall entrance signs. B. Work Installed but not Furnished under this Section: 1. Owner's selected lighting vendor will furnish light fixtures, lamps and Protect-A-Lamp covers, as indicated on Drawings, for installation by Contractor. Contact selected vendor at least 4 weeks prior to desired delivery date,to arrange for delivery of Owner Furnished items. 2. Contractor is responsible for providing related products required to complete installation. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. w. 2. Division 2.1, Sitework, Section 16525 - Site Lighting. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fixtures and their electrical components shall bear the UL Label. 4W B. Installation: In compliance with National Electrical Code(NFPA-70). r 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Keep materials dry, fully protected from weather. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Section 00800- Supplementary Conditions: Procedures and requirements for warranties. on B. Warranty for Owner Furnished Items: 16500-1 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 D. Contractor shall pay all utility company charges associated with providing service to this project including, but not limited to, charges for service, demand meter pulse generator, and utility line work including temporary up and down costs. 3.3 TEMPORARY POWER A. Provide temporary power during construction in accordance with Section 01 500. 3.4 GROUNDING A. Provide grounding electrodes as indicated on Drawings, as required by NFPA 70 and local authority having jurisdiction. B. Ground dry-type transformers in accordance with NEC 250-26, table 250-94, as indicated on Drawings and as required by local authority having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 16402-6 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 W D. Enclosures: NEMA 1, code gauge sheet steel with hinged cover, except where exposed to weather. If exposed to weather, provide NEMA 3R enclosure. 2.10 IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT A. Laminated plastic nameplates with 3/4 inch minimum, contrasting color engraved letters for each panelboard, switch, contactor panel, or individually mounted contactor will be provided and pre-installed. B. The nameplates will be permanently attached to equipment and shall clearly identify equipment or equipment served, such as "PANEL LD, HA, Transformer TD" as indicated on drawings. 2.11 GROUNDING a A. General: Ground all metallic conduits, supports, cabinets, equipment, system neutrals, metal building structures, and other items required to be grounded in accordance with the NEC and other applicable codes. Furnish and install additional grounding as indicated on Drawings. B. Metal Underground Cold Water Pipe: Connect to electrical system if available and permitted by local codes. Install jumpers around water meters, valves, or other devices which might cause an interruption of continuity during service. C. Concrete Encased Electrodes: Where indicated on the Drawings, furnish and install electrodes,- jumpers, and approved fittings in accordance with Grounding Electrode Detail. D. Ground Rods: If ground rods are required, install two 5/8 inch minimum diameter Copperweld rods driven not less than 12 feet apart and each with 8 feet of length in contact with the soil. PART 3 -EXECUTION X* 3.1 INSTALLATION ON A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, power company requirements, and as indicated on Drawings. 3.2 ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Provide all required material and labor, in accordance with utility company's requirements, necessary to provide complete electric service as indicated on Drawings. B. Required items include, but are not limited to, trenching and backfilling, primary and secondary conduits, service conductors (including primary conductors where required), C.T. cabinet, bussed enclosure, other associated metering hardware, and grounding system. "o C. Perform Work in strict compliance with local utility's requirements, with any applicable local codes and latest edition of NFPA 70. go 16402-5 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 .» B. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide fuses as manufactured by one of the "m following: 1. Bussmann. Im 2. Gould-Shawmut. 3. Littlefuse. Ow C. Acceptable Fuse Types: Size Manufacturer Model No. UL Listed 601 Amperes and Above,480 Volt Bussman Hi-Cap, KRP-C Class L Gould-Shawmut A4BY Class L Littlefuse KLLU Class L 600 Amperes and Below, 480 Volt Bussman LPS-R-SP RK1 Gould-Shawmut A613 RK1 ., Littlefuse KLSR RK 1 600 Amperes and Below, 250 Volt Bussman LPN-RK-SP RK1 Gould-Shawmut A21) RK1 Littlefuse KLNR RK1 Motor Loads,Transformers Bussman FRN-R, 250V RK5 (Circuits with Heavy Inrush), FRS-R, 600V RK5 600 Amperes and Below Gould-Shawmut TR,250V RK5 TRS, 600V RK5 Littlefuse FLNR, 250V RK5 FLSR, 600V RK5 2.8 CONTACTORS A. Termination for parking lot lighting circuits shall accommodate a wire range of#10 AWG to#4 AWG. B. Contactors shall be manufactured by one of the following: 1. Asco 2. Cutler Hammer/Challenger 3. Seimens 4. Square D 2.9 SAFETY SWITCHES A. Switch Interior: Dead-front construction with hinged arc suppressor and switch blades which are fully visible in the off position and with door open. 4W B. Switch Mechanism: Quick-make and quick-break operating handle and mechanism with a de- lete dual cover interlock to prevent unauthorized opening of the switch door in the "on" position or closing the switch mechanism while the door is open. Provide electrical interlock switch to de-energize control wiring as required. Line and load terminals of the device rated 100 amperes or less shall be rated for 75 degrees C. Provide operating handle with provisions for installation ... of a padlock in "off' or "on" positions. C. Ratings: Switches horsepower rated for 600 volts, 60 Hz, heavy-duty type. Where switches are MW indicated to be fused, furnish with provisions for fuses. 16402-4 "" Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 C. Service entrance switchboards and panelboards with main circuit breakers, main fusible switches or branch devices rated 1000 amperes or above shall be equipped with ground fault protection. 2.4 SWITCHBOARDS A. Switchboard(s) shall be configured as scheduled on Drawings, including voltage,amperage,bus bracing, and interrupting ratings. 2.5 PANELBOARDS A. Panelboards: Install as scheduled on Drawings, including voltage, amperage, bus bracing, and interrupting ratings. 1. Branch Circuit Protective Devices: Plug-on or bolted type thermal magnetic center-trip circuit breakers for alternating current, each with single-handle common trip. Tandem or half-sized circuit breakers or load center type construction not permitted. Circuit breaker Amp Interrupting Capacity (AIC) no less than values indicated on Drawings. Circuit no breakers feeding emergency lights, night lights, time clock motors, etc. will be equipped with handle-locks where indicated on drawings, or required by NFPA 70. 2. Cabinets: Zinc-coated sheet steel with knock-outs, UL listed and labeled. Trims and MR doors to have suitable primer coat and finish coat of manufacturer's standard color. Trims to be fitted with hinged doors having combined lock and latch. Locks will be keyed alike and furnished with two keys for each panelboard. no 3. Directory Holder: Contractor shall provide legible typewritten circuit directory properly identifying load(s) on each circuit mounted under clear plastic cover. Branch circuits connected exactly as indicated on Panel Schedule. go 2.6 TRANSFORMERS No A. Transformers for general use at 600 volts and below shall be metal enclosed, two winding dry-type, with provisions for conduit connections. Transformers shall be rated for full-load operation at maximum of 150°C temperature rise above a 40°C ambient, unless otherwise 110 indicated on Drawings. B. Transformers shall have (2) 2-1/2 percent, voltage taps above and below, on primary windings and will conform to NEMA Standard. Transformers shall be manufactured by one of the 40 following: 1. Cutler Hammer/Challenger 2. General Electric. 3. Seimens(ITE). 4. Sorgel (Square D). 5. Hevi-Duty. 2.7 FUSES A. Install fuses as indicated on Drawings. 16402-3 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to pre- vent damage. Keep materials dry, fully protected from weather. 1.5 WARRANTY •�+ A. Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions: Procedures and requirements for warranties. B. Warranty for Owner Furnished Items: 1. Manufacturing Defects: Manufacturer will provide full one year warranty, from Date of Substantial Completion, against manufacturing defects. 2. Installation Defects: Provide full one year warranty, from Date of Substantial Comple- tion, against installation defects. welt 1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. The responsibility of Work under this Section includes, but is not limited to,the following: 1. Contact the Owner's Electrical Equipment Supplier to coordinate and schedule delivery to site. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 OWNER'S ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER A. Hill Phoenix-Conyers, Georgia. Contact Ernie Northern or Darline Casey at(800) 899-6973. .,. 2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Items of electrical distribution system shall be manufactured by one of the following unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: 1. Cutler Hammer/Challenger 2. General Electric. 3. Seimens (ITE). 4. Square D. B. Equipment shall bear name and trademark of manufacturer as listed above. Substitutions not permitted. 2.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE EQUIPMENT A. Service entrance equipment shall be U.L. labeled as suitable for use as service equipment. 00 B. Equip main fusible switches or fusible switch type branch devices with rejection type fuse holders and current limiting fuses as indicated on Drawings. No substitutions permitted. 16402-2 "" Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 .. UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 16402 - LOW VOLTAGE SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner-Furnished electrical distribution equipment. 2. Grounding. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Owner's Electrical Equipment Supplier will furnish electrical distribution equipment including the following: a. Switchboards. b. Panelboards. C. Transformers. d. Safety Switches. e. Contactors. f. Motor Starters. g. Fuses. C. Related Sections: pe I. Section 01500- Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary Power. 2. Section 01600 - Summary: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. ON 1.2 REFERENCES A. Work under this Section shall comply with the following: 1. Latest edition of the National Electrical Code (NFPA-70), and interim amendments in effect. 2. Comply with local and state, utility regulations and laws. 40 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Electrical System Voltages: The following voltages shall apply unless otherwise noted. wI. Main Service: 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire wye, 60 Hz, grounded neutral. 2. Receptacle and Small Power Systems: 208Y/120 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire wye, 60 Hz, grounded neutral. 3. Interior Lighting: 277 volt, I phase. 4. Parking Lot Lighting: 480 volt, I phase unless changed by Owner. 5. Energy Management System: 24 VAC. 16402-1 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 Blank Page 16128-4 .. Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 *" END OF SECTION w 16128-3 Wal-Mart #2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 ow C. Delivery Date Revisions: Wal-Mart contact will revise delivery date for products if Milestone no Delivery date does not conform to Contractor construction scheduling: Wal-Mart Store Planning Order Group (501) 277-6737. "' 1.6 Product Packaging: Cable will be packaged in cartons on reels. Product identification mark- .m ings will be on each component. Identification markings on product components will coordi- nate with identification markings for components indicated on Drawings. no A. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided by Wal-Mart with ow products. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart Store Planning Order Group immediately. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. Note description of product quantity dis- crepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. B. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Con- .�. struction Manager. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of product manufactur- ing defects. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions: Procedures and requirements for warranties. B. Manufacturing Defects : Special Systems Cable Supplier will provide one year warranty from Substantial Completion Date for product manufacturing defects. C. Installation Defects: Provide on year warranty from Date of Substantial Completion for instal- lation defects. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DATA SYSTEMS A. Data System: Cable, equipment, and devices will be furnished by Wal-Mart under separate contract. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DATA SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Installed by Wal-Mart under separate contract. "" 16128-2 Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 w 00 UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 16128 - SPECIAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Data Systems B. Work Furnished and Installed Under Separate Contract (NIC): Under provisions of Section 01600, Wal-Mart will furnish and install Data System, including cable, equipment, and devices under separate contract. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 2. Section 16100- Wiring Methods: Related products required for complete installation. so 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code(NEC). 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Special Systems Cable Supplier: Manufacturer of product, separately contracted by Wal-Mart. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation: In compliance with requirements of NFPA 70. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Milestone Delivery Date: Wal-Mart will deliver cable to jobsite for Contractor to receive in ac- cordance with Delivery date specified in Section 01600, "Products Furnished By Others Sched- ule". 16128-1 Wal-Mart 92901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 D. Maintain wire phase color code per Section 16050 throughout system wiring. END OF SECTION .. 16121-4 Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 W on B. Distribution Box Connector: Injection molded thermoplastic compound with up to six copper alloy contact sleeves/pins for positive contact. Furnish connectors with two(2)positive locking latches, rated for 20 amps, and designed to make or break under load. Provide connectors *■ capable of being installed in standard 1/2" knock-out and shall not decrease the area for wiring connections. C. Fixture Connector: Metal enclosure with input and through feed connectors. Connector shall serve as interface between manufactured wiring system and individual light fixtures. Fixture connection shall be via white, 16/3 or 16/4, rubber cord rated for 600V at 105 degree C. PART 3 - EXECUTION 4W 3.1 OWNER/VENDOR ADMINISTRATION A. Upon Notice of Award from Owner, selected vendor will begin production of product and product documentation in order to assure timely delivery of items. Coordination of exact delivery schedule shall be between Vendor and Contractor. Product documentation will include detailed drawing depicting entire installation with appropriate cable identification and installation details. on 3.2 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Selected vendor will deliver to light fixture manufacturer, as soon as possible following Notice 1110 of Award, an adequate supply of fixture connectors, along with installation instructions, for installation by light fixture manufacturer. Quantity will be as determined from Drawings. 10 B. Upon completion of product documentation, selected vendor will immediately forward such information to Contractor for his review prior to beginning actual installation. w. C. Upon notice by Contractor, selected vendor will schedule delivery of installation drawings and product to jobsite to arrive on date requested by Contractor. D. Product will be packaged in cartons and components will be clearly identified. Identification will correlate with identification scheme shown on installation drawing(s). 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install Products in accordance with product documentation and the Drawings. Provide junction boxes of sufficient size as necessary where transitions are made from rigid raceways to the manufactured wiring system. B. Support cable by means of straps and clamps at intervals not exceeding T-6" and as required by NEC. C. Arrange cable to avoid interference with access to other work. Installation shall be in neat and workmanlike manner. 16121-3 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 C. Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage. Keep materials dry and fully protected from weather. D. Upon receipt of shipment, check contents of shipment against bill of material furnished by the selected vendor. Report any shortages or damage to the selected vendor immediately so that replacements can be ordered and/or freight claims can be filed. Note damage on Bill of Lading in order to substantiate freight claims. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions: Procedures and requirements for warranties. B. Manufacturing Defects: Vendor(manufacturer) will provide full one year warranty, from Date of Substantial Completion, against manufacturing defects. C. Installation Defects: Provide full one year warranty, from Date of Substantial Completion, against installation defects. D. Prior to commencement of remedial work, contact the selected vendor to properly arrange for repair of suspected manufacturing deficiencies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Prefabricated flexible cable assemblies and associated accessories as manufactured by the following, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: •� 1. Dual-Lite: EZ-Flex. 2. Substitutions: Only Owner approved substitutions will be permitted. 2.2 MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS 4W A. Prefabricated Flexible Cable Assemblies: Factory pre-assembled units consisting of pre-wired cable assemblies and appropriate connectors. Units will comply with the following: 4W 1. Cable Assemblies: Flexible armor jacket with thermoplastic insulated, #12 AWG, solid, copper conductors. Number of conductors in each cable assembly shall be as indicated on Drawings or as required by application. Allow minimum of 12 inch extra length, in ,w addition to required length to reach point to point, for each cable assembly. 2. Connectors: Injection molded thermoplastic compound with up to six copper alloy contact sleeves/ pins for positive contact. Furnish connectors with two (2) positive ..s locking latches, rated for 20 amps, and designed to make or break under load. Attachment to cable shall be set screw type. 3. Cable assemblies will be white in color. 4. Wire phase colors will match colors as as specified in Section 16100. 16121-2 Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 M ON UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 16121 - MANUFACTURED WIRING SYSTEMS PARTI - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated flexible cable assemblies. 2. Cable accessories. 3. Vendor(manufacturer)administrative services. wr B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Owner's national account vendor will furnish prefabricated flexible cable assemblies and o,„ required accessories for wiring between individual Sales Floor and Stockroom area lighting fixtures as indicated on Drawings, for installation by Contractor. 2. Contractor is responsible for providing related products required to complete installation. w C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 2. Section 16500- Lighting. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Work under this Section shall comply with the following: 1. Latest edition of National Electrical Code (NFPA 70)and interim amendments in effect. 2. Applicable state and local laws,codes and regulations. B. Prefabricated flexible cable assemblies and their related accessories shall bear the UL Label. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. National Account Vender: Supplier of product, separately contracted by Wal-Mart. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide for delivery of installation drawings and product at such stage of construction as will expedite the Work. B. Contact selected vendor for product delivery. Allow minimum of four weeks for delivery. 16121-1 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 .. Blank Page .w .. On Ow am am wo 16100-12 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 Ow on A. Locate outlets and devices mounted on finished surfaces with regard to paneling, furring, trim, etc. Where necessary, set long dimension of plate horizontally or gang devices in tandem. so B. Coordinate outlets and devices so as not to detract from aesthetic effect of surface in which outlets and devices are mounted. OR C. Repair or replace, at Contractor's expense, outlets or devices improperly located or installed. Set outlets and devices plumb or horizontal and extend to, but not project ON above, finished surface. D. Back-to-back mounting of receptacles, switches, and other wiring devices is not permitted. E. Mounting Heights: Measure height from finished floor to center of device. Comply NO with heights indicated on Drawings regarding device mounting heights. 3.6 WIRE CONNECTIONS 4• A. Run conductors without splices from outlet to outlet, except within junction boxes. 4W B. Make final electrical wiring connections to lighting control relay contact terminals using solid conductors. Where stranded conductors are used for branch circuit wiring, connect 3 inch solid pigtails to end of conductors using compression fittings with heat shrink insulation equivalent to 600 volt rating. C. MC Cable: Provide manufacturer's approved connectors at device and junction boxes. D. Make final connection of motors, starters, disconnects, and other items furnished under other Sections. END OF SECTION 16100-11 Wal-Mart 4290 1 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 11. Use flexible metal conduit or liquid tight flexible metal conduit for final connections to dry-type transformers, baler, air compressors, HVAC equipment, motors and other vibrating equipment. 12. Coordinate installation of conduit in masonry work. 13. Do not run conduit under slab unless indicated by legend on Drawings. Conduit installed below slab shall be galvanized rigid metal (GRC), intermediate metal conduit(IMC), or Schedule 80 PVC. Provide coated GRC bends and elbows. �. 14. Route exposed conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. 15. Allow minimum of 6 inches clearance at flues and heat sources. .w► B. Location: 1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit (GRC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. In accordance with NEC 346-1c, apply 6 mil coat of PVC or Asphaltum paint to galvanized rigid conduit prior to installation below grade. 2. Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit: Permitted for general exposed or concealed work if installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Not permitted embedded in concrete or below grade. 3. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above or below grade. In accordance with NEC 346-1c, apply 6 mil coat of PVC or Asphaltum paint to galvanized rigid conduit prior to installation below grade. �. 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Permitted for general exposed or concealed work above grade. 5. PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC) Unless Noted Otherwise on Drawings: „r Permitted for below-grade use outside of building lines, and for service entrance feeders and EDC to EDC feeders, when permitted by governing codes. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Conduits penetrating above grade outdoors or penetrating concrete slabs shall be GRC including elbow. 6. Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted in attic spaces and exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to equipment in dry areas. Not permitted for general exposed or concealed work. 7. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Permitted exposed in lengths of 6 feet or less for connections to rooftop units, baler, and other vibrating equipment where rigid connections are not suitable. 8. MC Cable: Permitted only where concealed inside partitions and above finished ceilings. Cable exposed on walls or in open bar joist areas will not be permitted. .. Cut cable with manufacturer's recommended armor stripping tool. Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 334, for concealed areas in partitions. Do not use MC cable for isolated ground branch circuits. 3.4 FLOOR BOXES A. Install floor boxes in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and as required by NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 3.5 WIRING DEVICES 16100-10 Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 H. Aluminum Alloy Conductors: Allowed at Contractor's option, where permitted by local utility company and governing officials. Limit use of aluminum conductors to service entrance and feeders to #6 AWG and larger. Splices in service entrance and feeders will not be permitted. Provide oxidation inhibiting compound (Penctrox, De- ox) at conductor terminations. Maintain 7.5 inch center to center horizontal and vertical spacing at service entrance conduits. Install service entrance in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 3.2 WIRE A. Make conductor length for parallel feeders identical. B. Lace or clip groups of feeder conductors at distribution centers and wireways. C. Provide copper grounding conductors and straps. D. Use wire pulling lubricant for pulling 44 AWG and larger wire. E. Install wire in conduit runs after building pad compaction, concrete and masonry work is complete, and after moisture is swabbed from conduits. go 3.3 CONDUIT A. Installation: w� 1. Install wiring in conduit, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or Specifications. 2. Install conduits concealed, except in unfinished areas and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Securely support conduit and piping by means of approved hangers. Provide support spacing in accordance with NEC. Make necessary provisions for expansion of conduit and securely anchor conduit where necessary to properly distribute stresses. 4. Flexible Metal Conduit: Support every 4'-6" and within 12 inches of terminations, with Caddy Clips or equal. 5. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit: Support every 4'-6" and within 12 inches of terminations. 6. Keep openings in conduits closed during progress of work. Swab conduits clean before pulling wire. 7. Clean PVC conduit per manufacturer's recommendations before application of solvent cement. 8. Furnish and install flashings where conduits penetrate roof membrane. 9. Firestop openings around electrical penetrations through fire-resistance rated • walls, partitions, floors, or ceilings using approved methods to maintain fire-resistance rating. 10. Paint metallic conduits concealed under concrete poured on grade or where 4" installed in contact with earth with two heavy continuous coats of asphaltic paint after assembly of conduit and fittings. Do not run conduit in concrete poured on grade. 16100-9 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 5. Twistlock (UPS) Isolated ground receptacles: Black nylon cover plates with circuit number engraved in plate. F. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Wiring devices and plates as manufactured by above specified manufacturers,are acceptable. 2. Devices or plates found to be not as specified shall be removed and replaced with specified device or plate at Contractor's expense. 2.8 WIRE CONNECTIONS A. Splices: 1. #8 AWG and Smaller: Ideal Wingnut, 3M Scotchlok, or equal connectors of proper size. 3M No. 567 in-line self-stripping connectors will be permitted only at ballast lead connections in fluorescent light rows. 2. 96 AWG and Larger: Solderless lugs and connectors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. B. Existing Electrical Lines: If existing power, telephone, or other electrical lines and appurtenances are encountered which interfere with proper installation of new work and which will not be used in connection with new work, close such items in proper manner and, if necessary, move or remove lines as directed by Owner. ., C. Cutting and Patching: Where cutting is required through walls, floors, or ceilings, make openings no larger than required and repair affected surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. D. Equipment Pads: Furnish and install concrete equipment pads, if required, and where indicated on Drawings. E. Access to Equipment: Locate control devices, specialties, pull boxes, etc., so as to provide for easy access of operation, repair, and maintenance and, if concealed, furnish and install access doors. F. Painting: Touch-up items of equipment whose factory finish has been marred or damaged during installation, restoring it to its original appearance. Other painting shall be provided under Section 09900. G. Trenching: Perform trenching and backfilling in accordance with the Site Utilities Section of these Specifications. 16100-8 Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 R" 1) Hubbell CS6369. 2) Pass and Seymour CS6369. 3) Arrow Hart CS6369. 4) Leviton CS63-69. 5) Bryant CS-6369. ► C. Plugs: Cord mounted grounding-type to match receptacle as follows: 1. UPS Plug 50A 125/250V 3 Pole 4 Wire Grounding: a. Hubbell CS6365C. b. Pass and Seymour CS6365. C. Arrow Hart CS6365. ' d. Leviton CS63-65. e. Bryant CS-6369. 2. Corrosion Resistant Twist-Lock Connector 20A 125/250V 1 PH (L5-20R-IG): a. Hubbell24CM13. b. Pass and Seymour CRL 1420-C. 3. Corrosion Resistant Twist-Lock Connector 20A 250V 3PH (L15-20R): a. Hubbell24CM23. 4. Corrosion Resistant Twist-Lock Connector 30A 250V 3PH (L-15-30R): a. Hubbell28CM13. 4M 5. Corrosion Resistant Twist-Lock Connector 50A 250V 3PH (50A-3P): a. Hubbell 8364C. D. Cover Plates: 1. Provide nylon cover plates for flush mounted devices. 2. Where devices are installed on exposed fittings or boxes, provide galvanized steel plates. 3. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast or stamped metal with gasketed device cover. Plastic weatherproof plates will not be permitted. 4. Temperature Sensor Boxes: Nylon blank cover plates. E. Colors: I. Unless otherwise noted, wiring devices and cover plates for flush mounting shall be ivory nylon except on walls having prefinished brown paneling, where they shall be brown nylon. 2. Blank Cover Plates: On boxes without devices or fixtures, provide same type and color as those installed on devices in that same room or area. 3. Where devices are installed on exposed boxes, device shall be ivory. 4. Straight blade isolated ground receptacles: Ivory nylon cover plates. 40 16100-7 Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 3) General Electric 5362-2. 4) Arrow Hart 5362-I. 5) Leviton 5362-I. 6) Bryant 5362-1. b. Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V Isolated Ground: 1) Hubbell IG 5362. 2) Pass and Seymour IG 5362. 3) General Electric 5362-2. 4) Arrow Hart 53624G. 5) Leviton 53624G. 6) Bryant 53624G. C. Clock Receptacle 15A 125V: 1) Hubbell 5233. 2) Pass and Seymour 53713-1. 3) General Electric 4234-2. 4) Arrow Hart 5708. 5) Leviton 5261-CH. 6) Bryant 2828-G. d. GFCI Receptacle 15A 125V Weatherproof: 1) Hubbell GF5252-1. 2) Pass and Seymour 1591-SI. 3) General Electric GF 5242-2. 4) Arrow Hart GF5242-I. 5) Leviton 6599-1. 6) Bryant GFR52FT-I. e. Single Twist-Lock Receptacle 15A 125V Isolated Ground: ° 1) Hubbell IG4710. 2) Pass and Seymour IG4710. 3) General Electric GL 0510-IG. 4) Arrow Hart IG4710. 5) Leviton 47104G. 6) Bryant 4710 4G. f. Duplex Twist-Lock Receptacle 15A 125V Isolated Ground: 1) Hubbell IG4700. 2) Pass and Seymour IG4700. 3) General Electric GLO-5164G. 4) Arrow Hart IG4700. 5) Leviton 4700 4G. 6) Bryant 4700 4G. g. UPS Receptacle 50A 125/250V 3 pole 4 Wire Grounding: 16100-6 Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 E. Provide boxes for use with Schedule 40 or Schedule 80 PVC conduit connection. 2.7 WIRING DEVICES A. Branch Circuit Switches: Specification grade rated 20A 120/277V AC as follows: 1. Single Pole: a. Hubbell 1221I. b. Pass and Seymour 20AC1-I. C. General Electric GE 5951-2G. d. Arrow Hart 1221I. e. Leviton 1221-2I. f. Bryant 4901-I. 2. Double Pole: a. Hubbell 12221. b. Pass and Seymour 20AC2-I. C. General Electric GE 5952-2G. d. Arrow Hart 12221. e. Leviton 1222-2I. f. Bryant 4902-I 3. Three Way: a. Hubbell 1223I. b. Pass and Seymour 20AC34 C. General Electric GE 5953-2G. d. Arrow Hart 1223-I. e. Leviton 1223-2I. f. Bryant 4903-1. 4. Dimmers: a. Lutron NT-600-S-NFB-IV-120. b. Lutron NT-1000-S-NFB-I V-120. so 5. Where switches operating at 277 volts are on same circuit and are ganged, provide permanently installed barriers between switches in accordance with the NEC. Where switches operating at 277 volts are on separate circuits and are ganged, provide separate boxes and separate coverplates for each circuit. B. Receptacles: 1. Nylon Grounding-Type Outlet Devices: Specification grade as follows: a. Duplex Receptacle 20A 125V: I) Hubbell 5362-I. 2) Pass and Seymour 5362-1. 16100-5 Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 F. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide brass Metallic Boxes with floor box a" ring by one of the following manufacturers. 1. Hubbell. 2. T&B. 3. Steel City. 2.5 METALLIC FLOOR BOXES (FOR VISION CENTER ONLY) A. Comply with U.L. Standard 514 A. B. Provide boxes that are concrete-tight, designed for use with power and communication services. 1. Three(3)service floor boxes combining power,data and communication services in a single floor box. 2. Adjustable boxes before and after concrete is poured to be flush with finished floor. 3. Overall height 3". 4. Material: Cast Iron. 5. Color: Gray. C. Cover protects and conceals all wiring connections and accepts carpet for applications where discrete placement is required. D. Manufacturer: Hubbell. 1. Floor Box—Cat. # 3SFBC (fully adjustable). 2. Cover—Cat. # 3SFBCGY. 3. Duplex Receptacle Plate—Cat. # 3SFBRP. 4. Comm/Data Plate—Cat. # 3SFBTP. 2.6 NONMETALLIC FLOOR BOXES A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Non-Metallic floor boxes with (caramel) Non-Metallic (thermoplastic) or (brass) Aluminum Metallic box ring by the following manufacturer. 1. Carlon 4E976RFB. B. Boxes shall be concrete-tight, designed for use with power and communication .� services. 1. Boxes shall be modular rectangular gangable to form two (2) or three (3) gang boxes with dividers. 2. Gasket for metallic covers shall be included. C. Non-Metallic boxes shall comply with U.L. Standard 514 C. D. Boxes shall be designed with device yoke for mounting power or low voltage devices. 16100-4 Wal-Mart 92901 -Northampton. Massachusettes 3/10/00 low 4. Other Uses: 1/2 inch minimum. 2.3 OUTLET BOXES AND CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Outlet boxes and conduit fittings shall bear UL or ETL label. B. Interior Boxes: Hot-dip galvanized, 4 inches minimum octagon or square, unless otherwise noted. Provide single or multiple gang outlet boxes as required for flush installation in drywall construction. Provide masonry boxes for outlets installed flush in concrete unit masonry. Provide single surface-mounted outlet boxes for utility type boxes. C. Boxes: Comply with NEC in regard to maximum allowable number of conductors. ap D. Outlet Boxes: Suitable for supporting lighting fixtures if intended for that purpose. E. Conduit Fittings: 1. Indoor EMT Fittings: Diecast or steel set screw type. 2. Outdoor EMT Fittings: Compression type. 3. Outdoor GRC, IMC, or EMT Box Connections: Made with weather-tight hubs. 4. Threadless GRC or IMC Fittings: Not permitted. Provide indoor GRC or IMC connections with double locknuts and bushings. 5. PVC Fittings: Solvent weld type for PVC conduit. 2.4 METALLIC FLOOR BOXES go A. Provide Metal Floor Boxes which comply with U.L. Standard 514 A. B. Provide boxes that are concrete-tight, designed for use with power and communication services. 1. Boxes shall be multi-gang, with internal compartment partitions for separation of services. 2. Provide water-tight cast iron boxes for use at grade level and below. Stamped steel concrete tight boxes may be used above grade. 3. Each box shall be provided with removable, watertight lid to allow placement of concrete over box. C. Boxes shall have a minimum of four (4) threaded legs used for leveling. A threaded on adjusting sleeve for flange height adjustment shall be used after concrete is placed. D. Provide grounding pig-tail, minimum #12 AWG copper, for each device. E. Accessories: 1. Cover plate and gasket for wiring device. 2. Carpet or tile flange. 3. Adjusting flange. 16100-3 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 D. MC (Interlocked Armor Metal Clad)Cable: 1. Aluminum MC-Lite or Standard MC. 2. Minimum size conductor, #12 AWG copper, including green insulated �* equipment ground, sized in accordance with the NEC. 3. Overall moisture resistant tape. 4. Galvanized steel or aluminum interlocked cladding. 5. Manufactured in accordance with UL 1569. 6. ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 334. E. Wire smaller than 412 AWG not permitted, unless otherwise noted. 914 AWG, type MTW or TFF permitted for signal and pilot control circuits, unless otherwise noted. F. Color code conductors in accordance with NEC 210-5 and the following: .� NEUTRAL PHASE CONDUCTOR EQUIP. GROUND SYSTEM VOLTAGE COLOR COLORS COLOR 208/120V white A-black, B-red, C-blue green 480/277V It. grey or A-brown, B-orange, C-yellow green white with colored stripe G. Color code 96 AWG and smaller phase and neutral conductors by continuous outer ,R covering. Conductors#4 AWG and larger may be color coded by tape or paint. H. Identify circuit numbers with synthetic cloth labels. ow 2.2 CONDUIT RACEWAYS 00 A. Conduit Types Permitted (Must bear UL or ETL label): 1. Galvanized Rigid Metal Conduit(GRC): Hot-dip galvanized. 2. Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit: Above grade use only. 3. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC): Hot-dip galvanized. 4. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): Hot-dip galvanized. 5. PVC Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit(PVC): Schedule 40 heavy-wall PVC; Schedule 80 for service entrance and EDC to EDC underground feeders. 6. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel or Aluminum. 7. Liquid tight Flexible Steel Conduit with PVC jacket. 8. MC Cable: ANSI/NFPA 70, Article 334, Steel or Aluminum Cladding. B. Conduit Sizes: Size conduits in accordance with NEC unless noted otherwise on Drawings, but in no case less than the following: 1. Security. Data, and Telephone Systems: 1/2 inch minimum, unless otherwise noted. 2. Flexible Metal Conduit: For connection of recessed light fixtures in suspended ceilings. 3/8 inch minimum. For connection of equipment subject to vibration: 1/2 inch minimum. 3. Underground Conduits in Parking Lot: 3/4 inch minimum. 16100-2 Wal-Mart#2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 UniSpec Il 062499 SECTION 16100- WIRING METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conductors and Cables. 2. Raceways and boxes. 3. Wiring devices. 4. Wire connections. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code(NEC). w 2. NFPA 72 -National Fire Alarm Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRE AND CABLE A. Wire and cable as indicated on Drawings shall bear UL label and stamping indicating wire size, type, voltage, and grade, and shall meet standard specifications and tests established for such materials and construction by ASTM, NEMA, ANSI, and IPCEA where applicable. B. Provide code gauge, soft annealed copper wire, not less than 98 percent conductivity and of 600 volt class. 1. Aluminum alloy conductors: Compact, stranded stabiloy AA-8000 series. Allowed at Contractor's option, where permitted by local utility company and governing officials. Limit use of aluminum alloy conductors to service entrance and feeder conductors#6 AWG and larger. C. Conductors: 1. Size #10 AWG and Smaller: Stranded or solid with insulation type THHN or THWN. 2. Size #8 AWG and Larger Overhead Feeders: Stranded with insulation type THW, THHN, THWN, or XHHW or XHHW-2. 3. Size 96 AWG and Larger for Service Entrance: Stranded with insulation type USE-2, RHW, RHW-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, or THWN. 16100-1 Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 Blank Page 16050-4 .. Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton. Massachusettes 3/10/00 on go connections. Torque test conductor connections terminations to manufacturer's recommended values. OF B. Inspect panelboards for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. I'w C. Measure ground resistance from system neutral connection at service entrance to convenient ground point on building water pipe using suitable ground testing equipment. Resistance shall not exceed 10 ohms. D. Test integrity of isolated grounding system for cash register panels by measuring resistance from system neutral to isolated ground bar and from conduit system to isolated ground bar before and after isolated grounding conductor, neutral conductor, grounding conductor, and transformer case are bonded together. E. Test receptacles with circuit tester to ensure proper polarity, grounding, and continuity of circuits. V. END OF SECTION 16050-3 Wal-Mart #2901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install specified materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated on Drawings. B. Cutting and Patching: Where cutting is required through walls, floors, or ceilings, make openings no larger than required and repair affected surfaces to match adjacent surfaces. 3.2 GROUNDING A. General: 1. Ground all metallic conduits, supports, cabinets,equipment, system neutrals,metal build- ing structures, and other items required to be grounded in accordance with the NEC and other applicable codes. 2. Provide additional grounding as indicated on drawings or required by NFPA 70. B. Equipment Grounding: 1. Make conduits electrically continuous using proper fittings, connections, grounding- bushings, etc. 2. Provide insulating grounding bushings on all conduit connections 1 1/4 inch larger and where indicated on Drawings. 3. Provide an insulated equipment ground wire with all feeders to panelboards. 4. Provide an insulated equipment ground wire with branch circuits to receptacles and to equipment within 8 feet of floor. Overhead lighting circuits do not require an equipment ground wire. 5. Run insulated equipment ground wires from the ground bar in the serving panelboard to ..� ground lug on equipment served. 3.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Cut openings no larger than required for installation; grout sleeves and/or frames in place. Leave smooth surfaces around openings and finish to match surrounding surface. B. Extend floor sleeves one inch above finished floor in concealed and unfinished location. Extend other sleeves approximately 1/4 inch above surface or as required to allow for placement ° of escutcheons. 3.4 TESTING A. Upon completion of installation, perform continuity tests on power and equipment branch circuit conductors. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage. Verify proper phasing dw 16050-2 Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 am UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grounding and Bonding 2. Identification of Equipment. 3. Hangers and Supports. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Furnish laminated plastic nameplates with 3/4 inch minimum contrasting-color engraved letters for each safety switch, contactor, time switch, pushbutton and other similar equipment. Bolt or pop-rivet nameplates to equipment; clearly identify equipment or equipment served, such as_ "BALER", "COMPACTOR," etc. 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS e� A. Electrical Equipment Supports: Support electrical equipment with Unistrut Channel, Minerallac Pipe Hangers,Caddy Fasteners or in another approved manner where details are not indicated. B. Sleeves: Install conduits passing through concrete floors in galvanized, black steel or Schedule 40 PVC pipe sleeves of adequate size. Sheet metal sleeves: Not permitted. Caulk sleeves through outside walls above grade with sealant as specified in Section 07900. C. Plates and Escutcheons: For exposed pipe through walls, floors, and ceilings where exposed to view, provide chrome-plated floor or ceiling plate of size required. Cut openings and install w sleeves or frames in neat workmanlike manner. D. Conduit Supports: Hangers shall be Unistrut Series P3000 or P3300 channels depending on load and span involved. Use Minerallac Pipe Hangers, Beam Clamps, or Caddy Clips only where impractical to install Unistrut Hangers. E. Anchors, Bolts and Screws: Fasten conduit straps, disconnect switches, panelboards, and other w. equipment secured to walls and slabs with cadmium plated screws or bolts and lead cinch anchors, expansion bolts and fitted in holes drilled with proper size masonry drill. Wood plugs will not be permitted. Properly size anchors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for load to be supported. 16050-1 Wal-Mart 92901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 ROUND DUCTWORK(Minimum Hanger Size) Maximum Diameter Spacing Rod Strap 24" and less 12' 1/4" 1" x 22 ga 25"-36" 12' 3/8" 1" x 20 ga B. Do not use fasteners which penetrate roof deck. C. Provide sway bracing to comply with seismic requirements per local codes and authorities hav- ing jurisdiction. 3.3 TESTING A. Prepare systems for Test and Balance as outlined in Section 01411. B. In coordination with Section 01411, make changes-in pulleys, belts, ductwork, and dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by air balance and testing agency at no additional cost to Owner. END OF SECTION an 15800-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 em 2.8 FLUES A. Where flues are indicated on Drawings, furnish and install Metalbestos type QC or RV gas vent flues from various items of gas-fired equipment up to Metalbestos flue caps above roof. Flue: Complete with necessary fittings, connectors, flashing cone, storm collar, supports, and other accessories. Install flues as recommended by manufacturer, and in conformance with code. Flues shall be flashed and watertight at roof line. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FABRICATION A. Fabricate, erect and install ductwork for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in first-class manner, per state and local requirements, and SMACNA duct construction standards (latest edition). B. Make joints air tight on supply, return, and exhaust ducts. Seal transverse and longitudinal joints with duct sealer unless otherwise noted. Seal exhaust ducts with exterior seal as required to assure positive seal. C. Insulate all rectangular supply ductwork and supply air plenums with 1 inch liner per latest edi- tion of SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standards. D. Insulate all rectangular return ductwork and return air boots(excluding exhaust ductwork)with 1/2 inch liner per latest edition of SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standards. E. Insulate concealed round supply ductwork above finished ceilings(excluding exhaust ductwork) with 1-1/2 inch wrap. Overlap facing and staple securely, leaving clean looking job. F. Exposed Round Supply and Return Ductwork in Stockroom Receiving Areas (Excluding Ex- haust Ductwork): Insulate with 1-1/2 inch wrap. Overlap facing and staple securely, leaving clean looking job. 3.2 DUCT SUPPORTS A. Support horizontal and vertical sheet metal duct work in accordance with the appropriate latest SMACNA Duct Construction Standards and the schedule following. RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK(Minimum Hanger Size) Maximum Half of ! Pair at 10 ft Pair at 8 ft Pair at 5 ft Pair at 4 ft Duct Perimeter* Spacing Spacing Spacing Spacing Strap Rod Strap Rod Strap Rod Strap Rod P/2=30" 1" x 22 ga 10 ga 1" x 22 ga 10 ga 1" x 22 ga 12 ga I" x 22 ga 12 ga P/2=72" 1" x 18 ga 3/8" V x 20 ga 1/4" 1" x 22 ga 1/4" V x 22 a 1/4" * Perimeter= Sum of Sides 15800-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 ow am 2.5 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS A. Grilles, registers, ceiling outlets, and ceiling inlets to be as indicated on Drawings. All wall mounted and hard ceiling mounted air inlets and outlets shall be provided with heavy-duty sponge, or soft felt gaskets. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements and Section 01600, provide air outlets and inlets as scheduled on Drawings. B. Locations of outlets indicated on Drawings are approximate; coordinate with other trades to make symmetrical patterns. Govern locations by established pattern of lighting fixtures or Ar- chitectural reflected ceiling plan. C. Install fire radiation dampers and other devices at air inlets and outlets where required by codes and reguations of governing authorities. Dampers: UL labeled, constructed and installed in ac- cordance with NFPA 90A and UL instructions. sm D. Air Inlets and Outlets: Titus, Carnes, Krueger, Metal-Aire,Tuttle and Bailey,Nailor Industries, or E. H. Price. 2.6 DROP BOX DIFFUSERS A. Where indicated on the drawings, furnish and install drop box diffusers as manufactured by .. AES Industries,Tallassee,AL; (800)786-0402. B. Drop boxes shall be constructed of 18 gauge galvanized steel,with fully welded corners and in- �. sulated air diverters. Diffusers shall be fully adjustable double deflection drum louvers. C. Install drop boxes in strict accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions and as de- tailed on the drawings. D. Drop box diffusers shall be guaranteed against defects in material and/or workmanship for a pe- riod of one year. 2.7 DUCT SEALERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide duct sealers of the following manufacturers: 1. Kingco 11376 or 10526. 2. United McGill Duct-Sealer. 3. Trans-Continental Equipment Co. - Multipurpose Duct Sealant. 4. Hardcast#601 Iron-Grip. 5. Hardcast Aluma-Grip Tape. r. B. Substitutions: None accepted. 15800-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 go 2. Galvanized, ASTM A653 and A924 prime grade, lock-forming quality, G-90 galvanized sheet steel. C. Fittings: 1. SPIROsafe as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. 2. End gaskets EPDM rubber, factory installed, U-profile, double lipped. 3. Provide fittings of same construction as SPIROvent. D. Control Dampers: SPIROsafe DSU as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. E. Supply Grilles: SPIROcomfort RGS-3 as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. �. 2.3 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Round Dampers: Provide volume-control dampers where indicated on Drawings. Dampers to have end bearings and lever-type control handle with position indicator. Provide extension to protect insulation. Provide access panels where required. AES #WM-VCO, Nailor Industries #1090-HWM, Ruskin #WMRS-25, Sisneros Brothers #SBWM-VCO, Metro #RMBD, United Air#WM-CD. B. Rectangular Dampers: Provide volume-control dampers where indicated on Drawings. Damp- ers to have single blade or multiple inter-locked opposed blades with shaft bearings, 3/8 inch W square control shaft with locking quadrant. Frame and blades to be galvanized steel. Provide access panels where required. AES #ARVCO, Nailor Industries #1021, Ruskin #WMD-25, Sisneros Brothers#SBR-VCO. !�e C. Motorized Control Dampers: Provide motorized control dampers where indicated on drawings. Dampers to be extruded aluminum, low leakage, parallel blade design,with nylon bearings and blade and frame sales on all mating surfaces. Damper leakage shall not exceed 6 CFM per ' square foot at 4.0"water column, tested in accordance with AMCA Standard 500. Ruskin CD- 50, or equal. D. No field fabricated dampers. E. No substitutions allowed. F. Contractor shall secure control damper after Test and Balance as directed by ITBA. 2.4 FIRE DAMPERS A. Install approved fire dampers in air ducts or air inlets and outlets where required by codes and regulations of governing authorities. Install access doors in ducts for inspection of fusible links. Dampers: UL labeled, constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA 90 A and UL in- structions. Size dampers to provide free area equal to duct dimensions. B. Provide hanger design, and methods of hanging and supporting compatible with the structure. 15800-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 .. or B. Round Sheet Metal Ductwork (Exposed in Sales, and Stock Areas - Not Insulated): Prime grade, continuous hot dip galvanized, lock forming quality steel sheets, equal to United Sheet Metal Spiral Duct& Fittings. Longitudinal seam duct round duct allowed in stock area. C. Round Sheet Metal Ductwork(Concealed- Insulated): Galvanized, longitudinal or spiral seam. 1. Minimum Gauges for Round Duct: a. 14 inches and smaller, 26 gage. b. 15 inches and larger, 24 gage. D. Duct Liner: ASTM C1071, C518, C177, E84, C423 and NFPA 90A, 90B. 1. Material fibers shall be bonded with thermosetting resin, with smooth air stream surface. 2. Maximum flame spread rating of 25. 3. Maximum smoke developed rating of 50. 4. Density: 2 lb. per cu.ft. with following minimum R values at 75 degrees F. a. 1/2 inch thick liner: R=3.3. b. 1 inch thick liner: R=3.7. C. 1 1/2 inch thick liner: R=5.6. d. 2 inch thick liner: R=7.4 5. Subject to compliance with requirements and Section 01600, provide duct liner of one of the following manufacturers: ' a. CertainTeed. b. Knauf. C. Schuller(Manville). d. Owens/Corning. 6. Substitutions: Not permitted. E. Duct Wrap: ASTM C553, C1136, C518, C177, E96, E84, and NFPA 90A, 90B. 1. Material Facing: Type II FSK or vinyl. 2. Maximum flame spread rating: 25. 3. Maximum smoke developed rating: 50. 4. Density: 1 lb. per cu.ft.with following minimum R values at 75 degrees F. a. 2 inch thick duct wrap: R=7.4(minimum out-of-package value),R=6.0(minimum installed value). 5. Subject to compliance with requirements and Section 01600, provide duct wrap of one of the following manufacturers: a. CertainTeed. b. Knauf. C. Schuller(Manville). d. Owens/Corning. e. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 SELF-SEALING DUCTWORK SYSTEM MW A. Self-sealing ductwork system: 1. Meet or exceed SMACNA's Leakage Class 3 requirements with no additional sealants. 2. Install as a complete system. Do not interchange components specified herein with .. materials specified elsewhere in Section 15800. B. Round Spiral Sheet Metal Ductork(Exposed in Sales Stock Areas-Not Insulated): 1. SPIROvent as manufactured by Lindab, Inc. (203)325-4666 or(800)797-7476. 15800-2 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 W wo UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ductwork,dampers, inlets and outlets for HVAC systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01411 - Mechanical Equipment Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Testing and balance of HVAC systems. 2. Section 15700- Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: 10 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A653 - Standard Specifications for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated(Galvannealed)by the Hot Dip Process. 2. ASTM A924 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM E84- Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM C 1071 - Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation(Mineral Fiber,Dust Lining Material). s 5. ASTM C518 - Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Insulations. 6. ASTM C177 - Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. 7. ASTM C423 - Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B. National Fire Code(NFPA): 1. NFPA 90A-Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. C. SMACNA- Low Pressure Duct Construction Standards. 1.3 SCHEDULING A. Schedule testing and balancing in accordance Section 01411 after completion of system start-up requirements. 1.4 WARRANTY PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK A. Rectangular Sheet Metal Ductwork: Continuous hot-dip mill galvanized, minimum coating of G60, lock-forming quality steel sheets, in accordance with ASTM A653and ASTM A924. 15800-1 IF Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install radiant heaters in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, NFPA 54, and as indicated on Drawings. 1. Connect to electrical service. 2. Connect to gas service. .� B. Maintain specified clearances to combustibles, and to heat-sensitive materials, equipment and work stations. • C. Provide approved heat-radiation shielding or barriers where required by NFPA 54. D. Suspension system shall be sufficiently flexible to accommodate thermal expansion which occurs as system heats up. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect radiant heater installation, suspension and attachment to building structure, control system, and connection to electrical and gas service. ' B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract requirements. END OF SECTION AM aw ow 15765-4 Wal-Mart Store 92901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 �, 2.3 BURNER ASSEMBLY A. Each burner shall have nameplate that bears seal of American Gas Association. Manufacturer, on request of Wal-Mart, will supply copy of current design certification to cover entire system. B. Each burner assembly have pre-wired gas controls with electric ignition and combustion air filters. 2.4 RADIANT PIPE A. Radiant Pipe: Four-inch O.D. steel tubing, 16 gauge for a distance of 10 feet downstream from last burner. For remainder of pipe, provide four-inch O.D. steel tubing. Provide aluminum reflectors above radiant pipe, manifold pipe, and tail pipe. Provide heat exchange (pipe) connections made with stainless steel coupling assemblies. + ' 2.5 CONTROLS A. Provide complete control system including step-down transformers for 24 VAC control, relays, relay boards, relay bases, printed circuit boards, thermostats, timers, and other necessary devices required for complete installation including enclosures for equipment. Locations and types of thermostats,timers, and other control equipment are indicated on Drawings. 2.6 WIRING A. Pre-wire 120V, 1 phase. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions !" conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify that space is ready for installation of units. 2. Verify that proper fuel supply is available for connection. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Before installation begins, manufacturer shall provide an installation, operation, and service manual containing a complete set of data for use in installing system. Include manual as part of the Operation and Maintenance Data portion of Contract Closeout requirements specified in Document 00800. w 15765-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS (PRE-NEGOTIATED SUPPLIERS) A. Radiant heaters are Contractor Furnished - Contractor Installed, under provisions of Section 01600, Pre-Negotiated Suppliers. B. Pre-Negotiated Suppliers: 1. Roberts-Gordon Incorporated, Buffalo,NY. 2. Advanced Radiant Systems Incorporated, Fishers, IN. 3. Space-Ray Infrared Gas Heaters, Indianapolis, IN. C. Pre-Negotiated Supplier Contact: 1. Roberts-Gordon: Arnie Mazurkiewicz,National Accounts Sales Manager. a. Phone: (800) 828-7450 or(716) 852-4400, Extension 202. b. FAX: (716) 852-0854. 2. Advanced Radiant Systems: Michael Hale,National Accounts Representative. a. Phone: (800) 874-3285 or(317) 577-0337. b. FAX: (317) 842-3989. 3. Space-Ray: Evelyn Kelch, Director National Accounts. a. Phone: (888) 383-5965 or(317)255-6145. b. FAX: (317)255-6245. D. Product Procurement: 1. Obtain equipment pricing, purchasing instructions, and name of manufacturer's local representative through Pre-Negotiated Supplier contact. 2. Send purchase orders to Pre-Negotiated Supplier contact. 3. Coordinate and schedule release of equipment for delivery to site with manufacturer's local representative. Obtain installation instructions from manufacturer's local representative. E. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 UNITARY RADIANT HEATERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements unitary radiant heaters which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Roberts-Gordon: Vantage II Heaters. 2. Advanced: PT Heaters. 3. Space-Ray: LT Heaters. B. Provide B-vent(double-wall)pipe and fittings to vent combustion gas from heaters, as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. C. Unit type,model number, location, and gas requirements indicated on Drawings. 15765-2 Wal-Mart Store 42901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 UniSpec II 102999 vil SECTION 15765 - INFRARED HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Gas fired infrared radiant tube heaters. B. Related Documents: 1. Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions: Operation and maintenance data requirements. 2. Section 15196- Gas Systems: Heater fuel supply. 1.2 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 54 -National Fuel Gas Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Document 00800- Supplementary Conditions: Procedures for Closeout Submittals. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: 1. Heating System: Design certified by American Gas Association per American National Standard Z83.66 latest revision. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. 1.6 WARRANTY on A. Document 00800- Supplementary Conditions: Requirements for warranties. B. Manufacturer: 1. Provide three year manufacturer's warranty on components(parts only). 2. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty on emitter tubes(parts only). no C. Contractor: Provide 1 year labor warranty. 15765-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEMS START-UP REPORT Page of PROJECT UNIT NO.* LOCATION ALTITUDE IN FEET Am MANUFACTURER SIZE MODEL NO. SERIAL NO. am CONDENSER TEST DATA ACTUAL ELECTRIC HEATING DATA ACTUAL Low Amb. Control - set point EAT/LAT / Degrees F Degrees F Suction Pressure - Stage 1/2 / Voltage - Stage 1/2 Head Pressure - Stage 1/2 / T1 -T2 / Crank case Htr. Amps - No. 1/2 / T2 -T3 Compr. Amps - Stage 1/2 T3 - T4 / T1 / Amps - Stage 1/2 T2 / T1 / T3 / T2 / Compr. Voltage - Stage 1/2 T3 / T1 -T2 / GAS HEATING DATA ACTUAL T2 -T3 / EAT/LAT / T3 -T4 / Degrees F Cond. Fan Volts - Number 1/2 / Verify Ignition-Stage 1/2 / Cond. Fan Amps - Number 1/2 / Gas Line Pressure, In. WC * Unit Number shall correspond to Upstream of Unit Control ** marked number on Drawings. Gas Manifold Pressure, ** Most remote unit only. Read gas In. WC Downstream of pressure when equipment in Appliance Regulator ** building is in full operation. Burner Orifice Size START-UP DATE TIME READINGS BY VERIFIED BY (General Contractor) REMARKS: 15700-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 B. Roof Top Air Conditioning Units: Manufactured by,Lennox, Inc. 1. Contact: Monme Morrow or Kate Koestner, Account Specialists; Doug Nevil or Alan Bennett, Technical Coordinators; and Monte Brotnov, Manager Technical Support. (800) 367-6285. Bill Dulle, Wal-Mart National Account Executive can be reached at(314) 926-2760. 2. Warranty Contact: Doug Nevi or Alan Bennett,Technical Coordinators: (800) 367-6285. C. Record designated start-up data on form "Air Conditioning Start-up Report" attached at end of this Sec- tion. D. Where required for roof top units, factory mount and wire smoke detectors in roof top unit unless noted otherwise on RTU schedule on Drawings. E. RTU size and capacities shall be as scheduled on Drawings. 2.2 ROOF EXHAUST FANS A. Roof Fans: Low contour, spun aluminum hood and base sections with curb cap, bird screen, and other accessories as scheduled on Drawings. Provide centrifugal fans with direct or belt drive motor, mounted on resilient supports with isolators between support and base. Provide motor with thermal overloads. Locate motor out of exhaust air stream. Provide UL listed and AMCA rated fans, of capaci- ties and electrical characteristics as scheduled on Drawings. Rw B. Roof Exhaust Fans: Acme, Cook, Carnes, Penn, Greenheck, or Breidert. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment at locations indicated on Drawings and in accordance with these Specifications,manu- facturer's published directions,National Electric Code, and local regulations. a* B. Coordinate Work of this Section with energy management system installer for installation dates,testing dates, and completion dates. C. Label roof-top units with 6 inch black permanent paint stencil. Number units as indicated on Drawings. Locate label for each unit so it can be read from the roof hatch. END OF SECTION 4W 15700-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 am MW 1.4 SCHEDULING A. Milestone Completion Date: Complete Work of this Section on or before Delivery date specified in Section 01 100, "Items Furnished By Others Schedule." "� B. Coordinate Contract interface Work of this Section to provide for energy management system operation and testing in accordance with energy management system Completion Milestone date. No C. Schedule testing and balancing in accordance Section 01411 after completion of system start-up re- quirements. +w D. Do not set roof top equipment on curbs until installation of roofing base flashing has been completed. am 1.5 WARRANTY A. After acceptance by Owner, supply materials and labor warranty for components supplied under this Section, except as specifically noted for Owner furnished equipment. B. Owner furnished equipment shall be turned over to Owner in good working order. Prior to acceptance by Owner, equipment failures are under manufacturer's warranty. Notify equipment warranty contact specified herein for replacement or reimbursement information prior to beginning repairs. After accep- tance by Owner,Contractor is not responsible for warranty repair. 1.6 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Follow unit manufacturer's printed installation and start-up instructions. Provide final connections for , rotation sensitive compressors if motor leads are shipped unconnected. Mechanical failure,prior to ac- ceptance by Owner, shall be repaired by Contractor through warranty agreement with manufacturer. Record designated start-up data on forms attached at end of this Section. Retain completed form on site and submit to Wal-Mart Independent Test and Balance Agency prior to start of balancing; refer to Sec- tion 01411. B. Prior to test and balance, complete Work of this Section and Contract interface Work of Section 13810- Energy Management Systems. Refer to Section 13810 for testing of energy management controls by energy management system installer. C. Schedule start-up, allowing Owner's representative to be present unless Owner directs otherwise. If start-up and testing cannot be completed due to seasonal weather conditions,perform remaining start-up at an appropriate time. Payment may be withheld until Work is complete. During start-up,operate each unit in every mode, separately and in conjunction with other units for sufficient period of time, demon- strating to Owner's satisfaction that each unit is operating properly. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF TOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (OWNER FURNISHED- CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Roof top air conditioning units will be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. .w 15700-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 �• UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 15700-HEATING, VENTILATING,AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT me PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Owner will furnish heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment as follows under provisions of Section 01600. a. Roof top air conditioning units. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01100 - Summary: Procedures for Owner furnished products. 2. Section 01411 -Mechanical Equipment Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing: Test and balance. 3. Section 07721 - Manufactured Curbs: Curbs for roof top heating, ventilating, and air conditioning equipment. 4. Section 13810 - Energy Monitoring and Control Systems: Cable sets and conduit for remote temperature sensor, control wiring, and related components for energy management system. 5. Section 13812-Energy Management System Wiring 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE w. A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Exhaust Hood Fire Suppression Systems: Contractor shall obtain permits and provide testing required by authorities having jurisdiction. a. Submittals for Permitting: Provide to authorities having jurisdiction within 30 days of Contract award. B. Certifications: 1. Each item of equipment available with capacity ratings certified by AMCA, and/or ARI, shall be furnished with capacity ratings so certified. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Equipment Furnished By Owner and Installed By Contrac- tor: Include in Contract Amount costs incurred for receiving, storage, and labor. Contractor shall be re- sponsible for costs arising when replacement materials must be reshipped due to loss or damage on job site after acceptance of original shipment. Immediately upon award of Contract, coordinate release of units for delivery to site with contacts specified in this Section. Provide crane service to hoist HVAC units directly from truck to roof. 15700-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 Im B. Provide adequate number of qualified personnel for start-up period. Complete system balance and start- up by the end of the fifth day. If the Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator determines that the schedule cannot be met,provide additional start-up personnel for completion in that time frame. ..r C. Fill out start-up reports and send to manufacturer(if applicable) indicated on condensing units. D. After compressor is started, continue charging until system has sufficient refrigerant for proper ®" operation. Do not overcharge. During start-up, do not leave compressor operating unattended and unwatched until system is properly charged with refrigerant and oil. Charge receivers to 50 percent or more with unit in heat reclaim in 100 percent condenser all condenser fan controls set properly. a„ Maintain these levels throughout warranty period. If at end of warranty period, receiver level has dropped, completely re-check system for leaks with G.E. HIOB leak detector. Repair leaks and bring system back to specified charge level at no cost to Owner. WN E. Do not add refrigeration oil while system is short of refrigerant unless oil level is dangerously low. If oil has been added during charginh, carefully check compressor crank case sight glass after reaching normal operating condition to be sure system does not contain excessive amount of oil which can cause as slugging or loss of refrigeration capacity. F. Start-up consists of the following: ,■„ 1. Adjustment of E.P.R. valves, T.X. valves, liquid hold-back valves, compressor high and low pressure switches. 2. Tightening electrical connections. 3. Checking electrical load balances. 4. Complete refrigerant and oil charge. 5. Adjusting oil float levels, replacement of liquid, suction and oil line filter dryers, etc. 6 Pressure and temperature gages shall be accurate. .. 3.8 OPERATION AND CHECK-OUT A. Set expansion valve superheat at 6 degrees on medium and low temperatures. This setting will be at the bottom of valve swing. B. Verb and reset superheat after cases and walk-ins have been loaded with product, and temperature and humidity levels have been reached. C. Change liquid line filter dryers, oil system dryers, and suction lineflter dryers after 24 hours of run time. ... Filters to be rated for wax removal. END OF SECTION w,. 15600-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 �. 3.5 TESTING, EVACUATION, AND CHARGING A. Notify Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator 72 hours in advance of tests so that Owner's representative may be present for test if desired. Failure to notify Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator will result in having to repeat test. # B. When refrigeration connections have been completed, test system at minimum of 150 psig, but not to exceed 200 psig, with compressor suction and discharge valves closed, and all other valves in system open, with exception of transducers which must be kept closed during pressure testing and evacuation procedures. Comply with requirements of local codes if higher test pressures are required. Refrigeration piping will not be acceptable unless it is gas tight. If leaks are found, isolate leaks, discharge gas and repair leaks, and then repeat test. When testing has been completed, release pressure using safe procedure. C. Evacuate system with vacuum pump specifically manufactured for vacuum duty, having capability of pulling vacuum of 50 microns or less. Do not evacuate system by use of refrigeration compressor. Connect pump to both low and high side evacuation valves with copper tube. Compressor service valves shall remain open. Attach high vacuum gage, capable of registering pressure in microns, to system for pressure readings. Do not operate hermetic or semi-hermetic motor compressors during evacuation because of reduced electric strength of atmosphere within motor chamber. To check system pressure, provide hand valve between pressure gage and vacuum pump which can be closed to isolate system and check pressure. D. Evacuate each rack to an absolute pressure not exceeding 1,500 microns. Break vacuum to 2 psig with dry nitrogen. Repeat evacuation process, again breaking vacuum with dry nitrogen. Install drier of required size in liquid line. Evacuate to absolute pressure not exceeding 500 microns. Leave vacuum no running for not less than two hours without interruption, valve off, and remove vacuum pump. System shall hold 500 microns for twenty-four hours. Contact Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator for verification of system performance. Raise system pressure to 2 psig with refrigerant, and remove ow vacuum. NOTE: DO NOT PULL HIGH PRESSURES AND LOW VACUUMS ON TRANSDUCERS. E. Refrigerants normally used shall be R-22. Use only refrigerant in equipment for which that equipment was designed by manufacturer. Use only one type of refrigerant in system. F. Charge refrigerant directly from original drums. Charge system by means of charging fitting in liquid line. 3.6 CLEAN-UP A. Promptly remove all rubbish or debris resulting from the Work. !1� B. During course of the Work, the area in which the Contractor is working shall be kept in an orderly, reasonably clean condition. Keep gang boxes off sales floor. Tools, supplies, etc. shall remain only as long as they are in use. Abide by site cleanliness policies of contractor for general construction. C. Thoroughly clean Work furnished and installed under this Contract, ready for Owner's use. 3.7 START-UP A. Refrigeration equipment start-up and documentation of operation shall be in accordance with Wal-Mart Specifications. Final payment will not be made until start-up reports are received and job notebook is turned over to store management. 15600-11 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 P. Make final electrical connections, including wiring, to refrigerated cases, evaporators, power defrost heaters, cooler and freezer box door lights and anti-sweat heaters, and compressor houses. Obtain services of electrical contractor experienced in electrical installation of refrigeration equipment. Make connections per wiring diagrams and instructions from equipment supplier. Wiring beyond the case or evaporator junction box shall be the responsibility of Refrigeration Contractor. Installation shall be in conformance with electrical sections of these Specifications, and with all applicable codes. Refrigeration controls and sensors will be furnished by Wal-Mart for installation under Owner's general contract for .. construction. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide engraved plastic identification 2 inch by 3 inch tags, attached with screws or pop rivets. B. Provide job notebook with model and serial numbers, warranty expiration date, emergency service telephone numbers in plastic envelope. Work performed after start-up, warranty or non-warranty, shall be logged in joy notebook and referred to by designation number. Locate job notebook in mechanical refrigeration house. C. Identify refrigeration equipment with matching numbers. Refer to Drawings: 1. Examples: a. Compressor rack B, low temperature: LTB; evaporator coils, LTB-1.1, LTB-1.2, LTB- 2.1, LTB-2.2,etc. b. Compressor rack A, medium temperature: MTA; evaporator coils, MTA-1.1, MTA-1.2, MTA-2.1,MTA-2.2,etc. .. 2. Tag circuits connecting to these condensing units or racks with corresponding number and circuit. 3. Identify refrigeration equipment, including compressor houses, racks, walk-ins, sensor or .. thermostat locations, chiller tanks, heat reclaim coils, and hot water tanks. 3.3 CASE SETTING A. Set cases level and in line with transit. Shim at every vertical support or at maximum 4 foot intervals with galvanized plates where floor condition requires(both front and rear of case). B. Apply ample amounts of Butle caulking compound at case joints. Caulking in low temperature and meat cases is especially critical. Manufacturer's seal is not sufficient. Once equipment is jointed, do not shift or move without breaking and resealing joints. C. Do not cut bottom case rails without Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator approval. D. Hang case shelving and place pans in refrigeration cases, including door shelving in Dairy cooler. •r 3.4 CUTTING, PATCHING,AND DIGGING A. Perform cutting,fitting, or patching necessary for complete installation of the Work. Costs incurred due to defective or ill timed work shall be borne by responsible party. B. Contractor shall not endanger any work by cutting, digging, or otherwise, and shall not cut or alter work of any other contractor without consent of Wal-Mart. C. Owner's contractor for general construction will cut opening through outside building wall and provide ow weather hood. 15600-10 w. Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 O PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Support cooler and freezer evaporators with 318 inch galvanized all-thread, double nutted through flat washers with galvanized Unistrut bridging three ceiling panels. B. Suspend refrigeration piping by Unistrut hangers or equal, space to prevent sagging. Fasten securely. Install exposed piping to provide easy access in case of leaks. Slope suction lines downward toward compressor end. Insure no oil traps are formed in piping. C. Under no condition shall copper pipes touch each other when necessary to cross pipes. Offset or insulate to insure no copper-to-copper contact. Refrigerant piping shall not come in contact with electrical conduit or other dissimilar grounded metals. D. Install oil traps before vertical risers and as recommended by Refrigeration equipment manufacturer. On risers above 16 feet, double oil traps equally spaced are required. Install oil trap in hot gas line to air heat reclaim coil. E. Where refrigerant pipes penetrate building or cooler walls, insulate pipes and seal opening by caulking with suitable material. >R F. Seal penetrations into walk-ins (refrigerant pipe, condensate drains) with urethane foam and seal over ► with silicone caulk. G. Mount TXV valves, pump down solenoids, thermostats, and heat exchangers. Allow enough pipe at ow evaporator outlet to mount TXV feeler bulb insuring 100%contact. H. Trap evaporators at coil outlet and vertical suction line risers over 4 feet tall. Traps shall be one piece type at bottom of risers. Size P traps to match horizontal pipe or coil outlet pipe. Do not reduce to riser on type Take vertical risers as high as possible(just below structure). ow I. Pitch horizontal suction lines minimum of one inch per twenty feet of run in direction of refrigerant flow. J. Install trapeze hangers no farther than two feet on each side of 90 degree turns and clamp to hangers. �► K. Install unions on condensate drains in walk-ins close to drain pan, allow clearance for pans to hinge open. Provide heat tape on condensate lines inside walk-ins with temperature 32 degrees or less and insulate. Install common condensate line outside the walk-in. Paint non-insulated copper drain lines to match walk-in box. L. Maintain slope of one inch per ten feet of horizontal run for condensate lines. Provide traps in condensate lines outside of walk-ins just before entering common condensate line. M. Do not deviate pipe routing, case, condenser, and compressor rack location from Drawings without approval from contractor for general construction and Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator. on N. Seal and pressure test each individual refrigerant circuit before connecting to condensing unit or refrigeration compressor rack. Line shall hold pressure without drop for 24 hour period. Testing shall be verified by Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator. Repair leaks and repeat test until line is totally leak- '" free. O. Provide Schrader valve access on each suction line leaving evaporators. 15600-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 C. Run 314 inch copper condensate line from evaporator directly to outside of walk-in walls, and adapt to individual PVC trap and stub into common 2 inch diameter Schedule 40 white PVC condensate header. Clean markings off of PVC with solvent. Insulate condensate drains inside walk-ins below 32°with 314 inch AP Armaflex, Halstead, or Rubatex or approved equal. Do not insulate PVC piping. D. Provide drain line heater for walk-in below 32° Provide self-regulating type heater(no thermostat)such as Frostex-RSI, Rachem, or equal. Ensure drain line and drain line heater are operating properly. Insulate freezer drain lines with 314 inch pipe insulation. E. Support overhead refrigeration lines at 10 feet maximum intervals on Unistrut hung on galvanized all- thread rod. Attach hangers to top of bar joint only. Support suction and liquid lines at each hanger with 10 inch length of Schedule 40 PVC pipe with an I.D. equal to insulation O.D. surrounding pipe insulation, and secure to Unistrut with Panduit strap (or equal), 120 lbs. tensile strength (see support detail on Drawings). F Secure vertical refrigerant piping installed outside buildiag walls to Unistrut fastening system with #022 Cush-a-Clamps. Fasten clamps directly to copper pipe, not to outside of insulation. Butt insulation +w� tightly against clamp. Cover exterior refrigerant pipe insulation (including heat reclaim lines) and interior prep room lines with .020 inch thickness PV jacketing and fitting covers, Proto or Zeston. Jacketing shall be vapor and weather sealed. G. Provide 314 inch wall thickness AP Armaflex, Halstead, or Rubatex on low temperature suction lines; provide 112 inch thickness on medium temperature suction lines. Provide 112 inch thickness on produce and seafood case drain lines. Insulate liquid lines with 112 inch AP Armaflex, Halstead, or Rubatex. If local code calls for thicker insulation, comply with local code. Slip insulation over pipe before making joints. Split type insulation is acceptable on fittings only. Install insulation in conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, including glued joints. H. Install heat reclaim lines with 314 inch thickness Certainteed one-piece fiberglass covering with fire- resistant jacket with self-sealing lap, or Owens-Corning or Armstrong. Cover fittings with Zeston, Knauf, or equal premolded insulating fittings. Install insulation in professional, neat appearing manner. Poor workmanship shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Size refrigeration piping in accordance with Refrigeration Schedule indicated on Drawings and as specified. B. Perform cutting of tubing with wheel-type cutter where possible, and reamed to original bore. Where necessary to sawcut, drag tubing clean after reaming. Before using, drag clean tubing left open on job after cutting and sanding. C. Make joints with use of brazing alloy containing minimum of 15 percent silver. Clean joints thoroughly before brazing and have dry nitrogen at 112 psi pressure flowing through tubing while joints are being .. brazed to avoid internal scale. If brazing alloy of less than 15 percent silver is found on job, Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator will require all fittings be cut out and replaced with new fittings using 15 percent alloy. D. Install replacement parts (i.e. expansion valves, heat exchangers, sight glasses) using Harris Stay Brite #8, excluding parts in hot gas lines. Use heat dams in all instances. .ru 15600-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 00 D. As equipment is received verb Owner and Wal-Mart Purchase Order Receipts and foward to the Owner for processing. we E. Note Owner of equipment received from carrier in damaged condition andshortages. Obtain verification of damage from carrier's truck driver. 1.23 SPECIFICATIONS FOR REFRIGERATION INSTALLATION A. Contractor Responsibilities: �w 1. Tubing,fittings, insulation for refrigerant lines, unistrut,fasteners, bolts, hangers, etc. 2. Install all refrigeration equipment scheduled or shown on Drawings and described in this Section. 3. Coordinate release of Owner and Wal-Mart furnished equipment with Wal-Mart Refrigeration Department. Obtain copy of Purchase Order from Wal-Mart Refrigeration Department so that crane service (provided by Refrigeration Contractor) is available to hoist directly from truck to mounting position. Provide supervision and labor for setting Owner and Wal-Mart furnished equipment. The Wal-Mart contact is: Contract Administrator/Technical Services, (501) 273- ��„ 8524. 4. Provide labor to unload and set refrigeration equipment scheduled or shown on Drawings and described in this Section. 5. Make final electrical connections to Owner and Wal-Mart furnished equipment. B. Refrigeration Equipment Furnished by Owner and Wal-Mart for Installation by Contractor: Refrigeration equipment scheduled or shown on Drawings and described in this Section will be furnished by Owner and Wal-Mart for installation by Contractor. 1. Include incurred cost for receiving and labor in installation contract price. C. Work Furnished and Installed Under Seperate Contracts(NIC): 1. Unloading, uncrating, setting and assembly of walk-in coolers and freezers will be performed by Owner's cooler/freezer supplier. 2. All electrical wiring except terminations will be provided under Owner's general contract for construction. 3. Refrigeration controls and sensors will be furnished by Owner for installation under Owner's general contract for construction. 4. Roof curbs will be provided under Owner's general contract for construction. See Section 07721. 1.24 DRA WINGS A. Provide as built piping drawings, after job completion, in 18 inch by 24 inch glass frame. Install on compressor room interior. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS e A. Provide refrigeration piping of Type L hard drawn copper tubing. In portions of installation where it is necessary to use soft drawn copper tubing and such use is approved in writing by Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator,provide Type L. All tubing shall be factory sealed ACR tubing. B. Refrigeration Piping Elbows: Wrought copper, 90 degree long radius type. 45 degree elbows will not be permitted. 15600-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 am ow B. Make request for payment for work in accordance with the following procedures: 1. Contractor will be furnished Pay Applications from Wal-Mart Contracts Administration. When ready to request a draw, send 2 originals (faxes are acceptable) of each Pay Application only(no invoice) to: .w Contract Administrator/Technical Sevices at(510) 273-8524 Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. �* 701 S. Walton Blvd. Bentonville,AR. 72716-8716 Do not send to Contracts Administration, Dept. 8702 2. Only 4 draws will be allowed. a. Draw 1: 50 percent of total Contract,provided all materials are on the jobsite. b. Draw 2: 20 percent of total Contract at the end of week 5. C. Draw 3: 20 percent of total Contract at Substantial Completion. d. Draw 4: 10 percent retainer may be billed 30 days after Grand Opening. 3. The final 10 percent will not be released without written confirmation from all subcontractors that they have been paid in full, and 30 day punch list is completed. 4. The final 10 percent Pay Application should be sent at end of the 30 day warranty period. The10 percent will not be automatically released. C. Execute a final Release of Lien upon request of Pay Application Number 3. D. The Owner's representative will promptly make final acceptance inspection when notified by Contractor. +� E. Additional work shall be done via Change Order form. Negotiate Change Order first with Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator using Bid Form. When Change Order amount has been finalized, complete Change Order and send to Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator with self-addressed stamped envelope. Coordinator will sign and return pink and yellow copy to Contractor. Attach yellow copy of approved Change Order to next draw request. No Change Orders will be paid without signed yellow Change Order copy. 1.21 SPECIAL DAYS nMo A. Keep one qualified mechanic available to handle emergencies connected with refrigeration work from time start-up begins through "Grand Opening Day." The Owner reserves the right to have the Contractor replace the mechanic if the Owner feels that present mechanic is failing to respond or is unqualified. .�. B. Upon start-up, submit to the Owner the name or names of local refrigeration service companies that will be authorized to handle warranty service. 1.22 UNLOADING EQUIPMENT .r. A. Contractor will be held liable for back charges from trucking company due to Contractor's failure to meet the Owner's equipment delivery schedule. B. Provide labor and equipment to unload, uncrate, set and assemble quipment and supplies connected with these Documents. C. Equipment shall remain crated until ready for installation. Provide protection from damage and rw elements. Protect equipment stored outdoors with polyethelene. .rr 15600-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 to advance its own funds to pay the fees associated with such permits, licenses, and approvals, the Contractor shall be entitled to no additional compensation for its services under this Paragraph. Applications shall be made in the name of the Owner, by agent(Name of Contractor). 1.15 PROTECTION A. Protect the Work from damage until final acceptance by the Owner. Damaged or defective work shall be replaced at Contractor's expense. B. Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by his own forces or by his subcontractors'forces C. Replace damaged work at no expense to the Owner 1.16 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK A. Should the Contractor neglect to execute the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other remedy it may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. 1.17 USE OF PREMISES A. Confine apparatus, storing of materials, and operations of workmen to limits indicated by the Owner. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with materials. B. Promptly remove material interfering with work of other contractors, if directed by the Owner. C. Enforce the Owner's policies regarding signs, advertisements, and smoking. 1.18 SUBCONTRACTORS A. Provide list of subcontractors on envelope for this Bid. w B. As soon as practical after receipt of the Contract, notes the Owner in writing of the names of the subcontractors. Do not contract with any subcontractor to whom the Owner, within a reasonable time, has made objection. C. Contractor agrees that he is fully responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of his subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons employed directly by him. _ 1.19 TAXES 40 A. Contractor shall include in his bid cost of state or local sales or use taxes and Federal taxes, charges, or duties of arty nature applicable to the Work incorporated under this Contract. 1.20 FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND PAYMENT A. The Work shall be complete and installations shall be operating in compliance with the Documents before final acceptance. 15600-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, W 0311012000 B. If Specifications, Instructions, Inspection Coordinators, or laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or any public authority require a portion of the Work to be tested, approved or inspected, Contractor shall give the Owner timely notice of its readiness for inspection. C. In order to verify use of dry nitrogen during brazing operations as specified, Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator may require Contractor to cut out five randomly selected joints. Joints will be inspected for oxidation. For each joint which shows evidence of oxidation and non-compliance, another joint will be .. cut out. If four fittings are found oxidized, it will be assumed that all joints are defective, therefore all joints will be reworked. Rework joints removed for inspection. .�w 1.10 CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Do not make changes, perform additional work, or pay for additional work unless authorized in writing by the Owner. 1.11 DEDUCTIONS FOR WORK NOT CORRECTED A. If the Owner deems it expedient to correct work not conforming to the Contract or defective work, an equitable deduction from the Contract price will be made. 1.12 CORRECTION OF WORK BEFORE FINAL PAYMENT A. If the Owner rejects a portion of the Work due to failure to conform to the Contract, the Owner will promptly note the Contractor of such failure. w* B. Upon receipt of such notice, replace or remedy (whichever the Owner requires) the rejected work, so as to conform to the Contract. C. Contractor shall bear all expenses incident to correction of non-conforming work including cost of transportation, removal of non-conforming work, correction of the work, and repairs to work of other contractors necessitated by remedial work. 1.13 SEPARATE CONTRACTS A. The Owner reserves the right to let separate contracts in connection with this Work. B. Inspect work performed under separate contracts where work of this contract must interface. Promtly report, to the Owner in writing, defects that may prevent work of this Contract from being performed in accordance with the Documents. Contractor's failure to inspect the work or report defects shall constitute an acceptance of the work performed under separate contracts. Contractor will not be held liable for defects that could not have been detected at time of inspection. 1.14 PERMITS rte, A. The Owner hereby appoints the Contractor as Owner's agent for the limited purpose of applying for and obtaining in Owner's name all permits, licenses, approvals, and certificates of inspection that may be required by governing authorities or agencies for the Project. Contractor hereby accepts the appointment to act as Owner's agent for the stated purpose. The Contractor is authorized to advance its ... own funds to pay all fees associated with such permits, licenses approvals, and certificates. The Contractor shall provide Owner with proper verification of the actual cost thereof- and following receipt of proper verifications and approval, the Contractor will be reimbursed by Owner for the actual cost for the advances. The 'Contractor Fee'for change orders will not apply to these items. Any single fee that is greater than 51000.00 shall be brought to the attention of the Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator for his review prior to payment by the Contractor. Parties agree that although the Contractor is authorized 15600-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 go repair or replacement of materials and parts during the warranty period. Additional costs attributed to equipment failures shall be handled directly with manufacturer. 1. In the event the Contractor fails to respond to emergency calls or fails to perform required !! maintenance or repairs during warranty period, the Owner will have the right to have the repair or maintenance performed by another contractor. In this case, the Contractor agrees to pay the Owner the invoiced amount of the services performed plus 15 percent. Minimum response time to emergency calls is two hours. 2. If the Contractor subcontracts the warranty work, the 30 day warranty responsibility remains with the primary Contractor. The Contractor shall resolve all payments between the two parties. The Owner will not involve themselves in resolving payment issues. If the service contractor discontinues or drops their service level because the Contractor has failed to make payment on completed warranty work, Wal-Mart will remove that Contractor from New Stores Bid List until such time when all disputes or claims are settled. aft B. Make an inspection of installed Work 30 days after store Grand Opening date. Make necessary corrections and adjustments. Complete refrigeration punchlist. Send completed punchlist to Wal-Mart 14% Stores, Inc., 701 S. Walton Blvd., Bentonville, AR 72716-8716, Attention: Contract Administrator/Technical Services at (501) 273-8524, for verification of completion. Notes Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator 48 hours prior to inspection. 1. At 30 day inspection, include necessary lubrication, leak tests of all joints, flare nuts, and tightening o f strapping as m ay be necessary. Per f orm leak test on small leak setting of GE H10B leak detector. No other leak detector is acceptable. 2. At 30 day inspection, change suction, liquid and oil filters. Leave oil filters and driers in motor room for inspection by Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator. C. At the end of warranty period, Contractor shall certify in a letter to the Owner that all equipment and_ %* materials installed or connected by him are functioning properly. 1. Contractor shall specifically certify that systems are free of leaks and are maintaining satisfactory temperatures at normal control adjustments. 1.7 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTIES AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Nothing shall be done by the Contractor which will void any manufacturer's warranty. B. Complete warranty acknowledgments or application forms supplied with equipment and forward them to Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., Attention: Refrigeration Department,for return to manufacturers. wR 1.8 LAWS AND ORDINANCES A. Comply with laws, ordinances, rules, and regulations bearing on the Work. If Contractor observes that Drawings or Specifications, or both, are at variance therewith, he shall promptly note the Owner in writing. If Contractor, without written notice to the Owner,performs Work which is not in conformance with such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, he shall bear all costs arising from correction thereof. B. Compliance with laws, rules, and regulations shall not be used as means of justifying installation or application of parts, assemblies, or methods inferior to those specified. C. Comply with OSHA Hazard Communication Standard 29CFR1910.1200 and 29 CFR 1926.59. A copy of Hazard Communication Program and all appropriate M.S.D.S. sheets shall be on the job at all times. 1.9 INSPECTION OF WORK A. The Owner shall have access to the Work at all times for purpose of inspection. 15600-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 low D. Grand Opening is defined as the date set by the Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator to coincide with the actual retail purchase of refrigerated products. 1.3 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS "" A. The Drawings and Specifications are complimentary; what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by both. Should the Drawings and Specifications be contradictory or should there be any am apparent errors, discrepancies, or omissions, or should there be any doubt as to the meaning of either, the Contractor shall refer the matter to the Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator whose decision thereon shall be binding on all parties. ,W B. Neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall be responsible for oral instructions. C. Addenda, corrections, or letters issued during time of bidding shall take precedence over Drawings and Aw Specifications. 1.4 EXAMINATION OF THE PREMISES .w A. The Contractor's bid shall take into consideration all conditions which may affect the Work under this Contract. so B. Take field measurements and verb field conditions; compare such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Drawings and Specifications before commencing activities. Errors, inconsitencies, or ommissions discovered shall be reported to the Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator at once. 1.5 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES A. Contractor shall agree to undertake all Work contained within the Contract and complete the Work according to the approved construction schedule. .w► B. The Owner's schedule is critical. The Contractor shall be responsible for meeting the schedule. Set equipment received in any given week in it's final location by Friday of that week. This includes compressors, cases, condensers, etc. Complete the following items prior to scheduled Substantial 1e4 Completion date. 1. Refrigeration cases cleaned. 2. Walk-in coolers and freezers thoroughly cleaned. w 3. Refrigeration tools and material moved out of the store. C. Furnish necessary supervision to coordinate activities of all trades to insure complete installation. Contact Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator to report problems or anticipated problems which may MW impede progress of the Project. D. Check new equipment against Wal-Mart Specifications and report discrepancies to Wal-Mart am Refrigeration Coordinator. 1.6 WARRANTY ..w A. Provide warranty and service on equipment and materials installed. Warranty shall include failures during installation and for 30 days beyond store Grand Opening date. Warranty shall include labor, parts, and refrigerant for repairs to equipment covered under the Specifications. Owner will require equipment manufacturer to furnish replacement parts for failures of OEM parts during installation period and for one year beyond store Grand Opening date. Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining replacement parts from equipment manufacturer. Owner will not pay additional costs associated with 15600-2 Wal-Mart Store 42901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 OR on UniSpec 11123199 SECTION 15600-REFRIGERATION EQUIPMENT NOTE. Wx This section is included herewith for INFORMATION ONLY and is NOT A PART OF THIS CONTRACT. The specifications contained hereafter are requirements for the refrigeration contractor assigned the contract by the Wal-Mart Refrigeration Department. otter For purposes of scheduling and coordination of other trades in connection with refrigeration installation and start- up, contact Wal-Mart Refrigeration Department, (501) 273-8784 to obtain name and phone number of the refrigeration contractor for this project. go PART GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. The Work of this Section is controlled by Wal-Mart Refrigeration Department and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract for Construction issued by Architect of Record, the Special Conditions issued by Wal-Mart Construction Department, this Specification Section, and Contract Drawings. B. The responsibility for purchasing equipment is defined in Section 01010 - Summary of Work. The Refrigeration Contractor shall receive, install, and adjust all refrigeration equipment scheduled or shown on the Drawings and described in this Section. C. Section Includes: on 1. Refrigerant piping. 2. Drain Piping. 3. Pipe Insulation. 4. Charging and lubricating of systems. 5. Adjustment of controls. 6. Identification of systems. 7. Refrigeration alarm systems. 8. Evaporator coils. 9. Compressor houses. 10. Refrigerated cases. 11. Self-contained cases(where indicated). 12. Ice flakers 13. Produce misting system. 1.2 DEFINITION OF TERMS A. Work shall mean complete installation of equipment and devices in accordance with applicable Specifications and as described in the Drawings, Application Sheets, Manufacturer's Legend Sheets and Instructions, Request for Bids, and Purchase Orders. B. The Owner is Wal-Mart and is identified in the Agreement as Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., Bentonville Arkansas. The term Wal-Mart as used within this Section is defined as Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., Attention: Refrigeration Department, 701 S. Walton Blvd. Bentonville, AR, 72716-8716. The term Wal-Mart is used where Wal-Mart will furnish portions of the Work, and where Wal-Mart personnel and representatives will be interfacing with the Work of the Refrigeration Contractor. The Owner's authorized representative is defined as the Wal-Mart Refrigeration Coordinator. C. Refrigeration Contractor (or Contractor) shall mean company awarded the bid. Refrigeration Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with applicable codes, ordinances, and work permits. 15600-1 Wal-Mart Store 42901 North Hampton, MA 0311012000 am so C. Expansion Tanks: Closed type, welded steel, design working pressure of 125 psi, with internal diaphragm to separate water from air charge. Set air charge, mount, and install in accordance .o with manufacturer's published instructions. Provide expansion tanks with water heaters as scheduled on Drawings and as manufactured by one of the following: 1. General Merchandise Expansion Tanks: Watts Det- 12 EPD#67438 or Amtrol ST- 12. D. Thermostatic Mixing Valves(Food Service Tenant): Heavy cast bronze body tempering valve: 1. Capacity: 6 gpm. 2. Temperature Range: 65 degrees to 115 degrees. 3. Checkstops: Straight, 1/2 inch sweat. 4. Products: Provide thermostatic mixing valve as manufactured by one of the following: a. Model TA-SB,by Leonard Water Temperature Controls, (401)461-1200. b. Series 420,by Powers Process Controls, (708) 673-6700. PART 3 -EXECUTION "` 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install to requirements of governing authorities, and recommendations of equipment manufac- turer. B. Should recommendations of manufacturer of equipment not be available prior to time of instal- lation, contact manufacturer directly and obtain necessary recommendations in writing. END OF SECTION AM 0" an 15480-2 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 ••• UniSpec 1I 092499 SECTION 15480- DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Domestic water heaters. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: 1. Under provisions of Section 01600, Owner's water heater supplier will furnish water heaters as indicated on Drawings for installation by Contractor. Contact Mike Kerby, Hcjoca Corporation, (800)459-7099. 2. Contractor is responsible for providing related products required to complete installation. C. Related Sections: Comply with other Division 15 Sections, as applicable. Refer to other Divi- sions for coordination of Work. Am PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.1 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS (OWNER FURNISHED- CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) P A. Manufacturer: Owner will furnish water heaters as manufactured by A. O. Smith Water Prod- ucts Company. B. Glass-lined electric storage-type water heater of size and capacity indicated on Drawings. 1. Heating elements will be suitable for electrical current having characteristics indicated on Drawings, and complete with necessary operating and safety controls. 2. Each tank will be equipped with magnesium anodes for corrosion protection. 3. Heaters will be UL listed and labeled, meeting efficiency requirements of ASHRAE 90.1 b-1992. a. Water heaters will be California Energy Commission certified for projects in State of California. 2.2 ACCESSORIES (OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Wall Bracketed Platform (Water Heaters 20 Gallon Capacity and Less): Owner will furnish manufacturer's standard wall bracketed platform. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Relief Valves: Provide temperature and pressure relief valves,unless valves are furnished as in- tegral part of water heater. Provide valves ASME and/or AGA stamped, of the sizes and types required to meet ASME and/or AGA Code temperature steam rating for discharge capacity. B. Wall Bracketed Platform (Waterheaters Greater Than 20 Gallon Capacity): Provide water heater wall bracketed platform as indicated on Drawings. 4 15480-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 low .. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Operate and adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise or overflow. 1. Replace malfunctioning units. 2. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops. B. Clean fixtures, trim, and accessories of foreign materials, including labels, before final accep- tance. END OF SECTION .r► *W .w am .o Am 15410-4 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 me G. Provide trim, as required, to permit scheduled lavatory to be installed for handicap use. H. Provide bolt caps with retainer clips on water closets. OR PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where Products will be installed. Verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements and installation conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify that walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. 4" 2. Verify that plumbing piping for fixture is in the correct location and of the correct type. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated on Drawings for particular fixtures. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures and trim in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Make final connections. B. Install each fixture with trap,easily removable for servicing and cleaning. C. Install components level and plumb. Install toilet seats on water closets. D. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports or carriers, as indicated, and bolts. E. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. F. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07900, color to match fixture. �w 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect plumbing fixture and trim installation, attachment to building, operation, and connec- tions. Ensure that fixtures are installed and operate in conformance with disabled access re- `"' quirements. 1. Prior to final acceptance, inspect faucets, flush valves,stop valves,and similar devices,to determine that they operate properly and discharge proper quantities of water. Correct any deficiencies as directed by Owner's representative. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract re- quirements. 15410-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 A" am 2.3 FIXTURE TRIM A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements, furnish and install compatible fixture trim as "" follows: 1. Water Closets: a. Power assisted: Sloan (Flushmate)Flushometer-tank system. am b. Seat: Beneke 527, Bemis 1655C, Centoco 1500-CC, Church 9400-KNSSC, Olsonite 95, Sperzel 150-ECH. 2. Urinals: O a. Flush Valve(Standard): Sloan 186-1, Delaney F451-1,Zurn 6003-WS1. b. Flush Valve(Handicap): Sloan 180-1, Delaney F451-1,Zurn 6001-WS 1. C. Carrier: Jay R. Smith 637,Josam 17800, Wade W-400-AMII,Zurn 1222. oft 3. Lavatories: a. Faucet (Standard): American Standard 5402.102H, Crane C-1042, Kohler 7404 - KCP w/16010- 2 & 7715, Eljer 5591500, Briggs 402, Chicago 1802A, Delta 523 so HDF. b. Faucet (Handicap): American Standard 7402.172H, Crane CH-8006, Kohler K- 7404-5A, E1jer 559-0255,Briggs 115WB,Chicago 895317. C. Carrier: Jay R. Smith 700, Josam 17100, Wade W-520,Zurn 1231. 4. Sink(Employee Lounge): a. Faucet: Delta#100, Kohler k15171, Just J900,Elkay LK-4101. b. Drain: Elkay LK-35, Kohler K8801,Just J-35. ■» 5. Sink(Pharmacy): a. Faucet: American Standard 6275.000, Kohler K13328-5, Crane CH-8034, Elkay LK-2442. b. Drain: American Standard 43I1.023,Kohler 7715, Just J-35SS. 6. Service Sink: a. Faucet: Fiat 830AA, Stern Williams T-10-VB, Florestone MR-371. .w b. Hose/Bracket: Fiat 832AA, Stern Williams T-35, Florestone MR-370. C. Mop Hanger: Fiat 889CC, Stern Williams T-40, Florestone MR-372. B. Support each fixture in rigid manner which permits no perceptible movement of fixture by manually applied forces. Seal space between fixtures and floor or walls with silicone sealant. C. Furnish each fixture complete with required trim; exposed piping and trim to be polished chrome-plated brass. Furnish each fixture with chrome angle stop valves having metal-to-metal seats. D. Provide for each sink (except service and 3-compartment sinks), flow-limiting device which limits flow to not more than 2.2 gpm. Furnish devices integral with fixture trim, wherever pos- sible, and products of same manufacturer as fixture trim. E. Provide for each lavatory, flow-limiting device which limits flow to not more than 0.5 gpm. Furnish devices integral with fixture trim, wherever possible, and products of same manufac- turer as fixture trim. F. Flush Valves: Subject to compliance and compatible with plumbing fixtures as scheduled on Drawings. Provide flush valves that do not exceed code requirements for maximum gallons per flush. 15410-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 OR UniSpec I1 092499 SECTION 15410- PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing fixtures. 2. Plumbing fixture trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions: Operation and maintenance data requirements. 2. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant for fixtures at wall and floors. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Document 00800- Supplementary Conditions: Procedures for Closeout Submittals. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature,operating instructions,maintenance and repair data, and parts listing for plumbing fixtures. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Disabled Access: Conform to applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation,mounting heights, and operation of plumbing fixture. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING w A. Section 01600- Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect products. B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. so C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS so A. Subject to compliance with Project requirements,furnish and install plumbing fixtures of manu- facturers indicated on Drawings. 2.2 FIXTURES W A. Fixture types and model numbers indicated on Drawings. 'o 15410-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 aft FM BLANK PAGE am am .m «w 15196-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 go no 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: After installation, pressure test the entire system. 1. Leak test at pressure of 60 psig, or as required by local authority if more stringent. 2. Maintain full test pressure for a period of 30 minutes, and make visual inspection for tightness of system. END OF SECTION ow ter, 15196-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 Aft 2.2 GAS VALVES A. Valves 2 inches and smaller: McDonald Model No. 559B, Homestead Model No. 611, Rock- well Nordstrom Model No. 142, or Dezurik Model No. 425-SIRS49. 175 PSI black iron body, flat head cock,with brass plug. B. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger: McDonald Model No. 10685, Homestead Model No. 612, Rockwell Nordstrom Model No. 143, or Dezurik Model No. 425-SIRS49. 175 PSI WOG, semi-steel, lubricated,wrench operated, and flange ends. 2.3 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Gas Pressure Reducing Regulators: Provide commercial style regulator manufactured by .� Equimeter or Fisher. Capacity ranges specified in schedule below are general ranges. Contrac- tor shall verify with regulator manufacturer the capacity of a given regulator and select specific components(i.e. spring size, orifice, etc.)based on site specific critera. Contractor shall not as- AN sume that a given regulator model is appropriate for all capacities within the general range specified. Provide internal relief on all regulators. .. B. Provide regulators for natural gas(meter outlet of 2 to 5 psi)as follows: 1. Regulator sized on inlet pressure of 1.5 psi; outlet pressure of 7 inches water column. General Capacity Range Valve Size Equimeter No. Fisher No. „■, 0 to 700 CFH 1" 143-80-2 5102 701 to 1,400 CFH 1 1/4"- 1 1/2" 243-12-2 S202 > 1,401 CFH * For Capacity greater than 1400 CFH, use larger orifice. 2. Regulator capacities based on 1/2" orifice. 2.4 FINISHING A. Prime and paint gas piping before installation. See Section 09900 for paint type and for touch- .. up on the job site. Paint piping on roof OSHA Safety Yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION am 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Extend gas piping to gas appliances and install shut-off valve, dirt leg, and union at each appli- ance. B. Pipe welders shall be certified and bear evidence of certification 30 days prior to commencing No work on this project. When directed,welders shall be retested at Contractor's expense when evi- dence indicates a lack of welder proficiency. Certification will be by Pittsburgh Testing Labo- ratories or other approved authority. am C. Conform to NFPA 54, and applicable local codes. 40 D. Protection of Roofing Membrane: Protect single ply roofing membrane with welding blankets. 15196-2 Am Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 AM 10 UniSpec II 020200 SECTION 15196 GAS PIPING "s PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Natural and propane gas piping systems, piping, valves and regulators. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09900- Paints and Coatings: Paint types and touch-up. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI B31.9 - Building Services Piping Code. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. �e• C. American Standards for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234 - Specification for Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures. NO D. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code. " 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certifications: Provide Manufacturer's Certification for gas regulators if required by local jurisdictions. 1.4 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish Owner two wrenches. PART 2 -PRODUCTS op 2.1 GAS PIPING(ABOVE GRADE) eo A. Piping: Black steel, standard weight, Schedule 40 ASTM A 53. 1. Piping 2-1/2 inches and larger: Welded,with butt-welding fittings. 2. Piping 2 inches and smaller: Welded or threaded with malleable iron fittings (including couplings). B. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welded type. C. Joints: NFPA 54,threaded or welded to ANSI B31.9,ASME Section I. 15196-1 Wal-Mart Store 42901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 Aft BLANK PAGE '" .. M .. am .. oft «. .o am ,. am .. Im .. im 15100-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 ON 3.4 PIPING INSULATION- INSTALLATION A. Domestic Hot and Cold Water Lines: Insulate with specified insulation. Insulate fittings with PVC fitting covers with glass fiber inserts. Insulate lines above slab,and exposed lines under handi-cap lavatories. B. Drain Lines: Insulate drain lines under handicap lavatories with same insulation as used for domestic water lines. Insulate piping in insulated toilet room walls. C. Condensate Piping: Insulate metallic condensate piping below roof with specified insulation. D. Roof Drain Piping: Insulate piping with specified insulation. Adhere insulation with 6 inch wide adhesive strips on 16 inch centers. Provide 16 gage annealed tie wire, spiral wound, or tied at 16 foot centers for securing insulation until adhesive sets. Butt insulation and seal joints with 2 inch wide foil tape, adhered over joints. Insulate drain bodies, vertical connections between drains and horizontal piping,and horizontal piping. no 3.5 PIPE TESTS A. Test piping before installing equipment and before insulation is applied, using specified methods and conditions. Subject piping to test for not less than 24 hours under inspection by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Make necessary replacements and repairs and repeat tests until entire system is accepted as satisfactory. Work includes testing equipment. After installation of equipment, operate systems, clean out scale, dirt, oil, waste, and foreign matter,and correct additional leaks. Test underground piping prior to backfilling. B. Test plumbing drainage systems under 10 foot static head. Test water systems under 150 psig hydrostatic pressure. C. Sterilize domestic water system to meet regulatory agency requirements. Flush system thoroughly of dirt and foreign matter, then fill with water treated with 50 ppm of chlorine. During filling process, open valves and !!! " faucets several times to assure treatment of entire system. Leave treated water in system for 24 hours after which time system may be flushed; if residual chlorine is not less than 10 ppm, repeat flushing. After sterilization, receive approval by regulatory agency on samples of water in system. D. Condensate Piping: Upon completion of condensate system, contact Wal-Mart HVAC Department at(501)273- 4476 for inspection. 40 END OF SECTION 4W 15100-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 Aft 1. Install horizontal soil, waste, and vent pipe with grade of 1/4 inch per foot where possible and required by code, and not less than 1/8 inch per foot. mm 2. (Colorado Stores Only) Install horizontal soil, waste, and vent pipe with a grade of 1/4 inch per foot for pipe 3 inches diameter and smaller, and not less than 1/8 inch per foot for pipe 4 inches diameter and larger. „w B. Conceal piping in chases, walls, furred spaces and above ceiling in sales area, stockrooms with ceilings, vestibules,garden center with ceilings and office areas. sm C. When required by code or local regulations install condensate drain piping from units with condensate discharge. D. Coordinate routing of Auto Center piping such that it does not interfere with light fixture layout. om E. Cap pipe openings during construction. .a F. Identification of Potable and Nonpotable Water: Identify potable and nonpotable water systems by color markings or metal tags in accordance with ASME A 13.1. G. Should conditions arise which would cause piping or ductwork to be exposed in finished areas, it shall be called to the Owner's attention immediately. Make correction in accordance with Owner's instructions. H. For items to be installed in split face CMU, grind surface of CMU to a smooth finish for tight installation. Seal • with sealant. 3.2 CONDENSATE PIPING SYSTEMS A. Drain Traps: 1 inch galvanized or larger if roof top unit drain pan will accept it. If rooftop unit drain pan is less than 1 inch, install an increasing bushing in first elbow on trap assembly. B. Run feeder lines at 45 degrees or parallel to roof slope. Condensate lines running perpendicular to roof slope or with negative slope will not be permitted. .. C. Except for connection to RTU,condensate lines will not be permitted within 5 feet of roof top unit. D. Make changes in direction using wye fitting;provide clean out at elbow. E. Make connections to main line at 45 degree angle using wye fitting;90 degree connections will not be permitted. F. Connect no more than 8 feeder lines to 1 main line. When necessary, feeder lines not over 30 feet in length may ... discharge into building gutter. If sanitary sewer connection is required,comply with local codes. G. Turn main lines down 90 degrees and discharge in to building gutter, unless prohibited by local jurisdictions. If .. sanitary sewer connection is required,comply with local codes. 3.3 PIPE SUPPORTS(ABOVE ROOF) A. Supports: Install gas and condensate piping on preservative pressure treated wood blocks; sizes as indicated on Drawings. B. Clamps: Anchor clamp to blocking with wood screw fastener;fasten one side only. C. Isolation Pads: Refer to Section 07530. ,... 15100-6 Wal-Mart Store 92901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 AM No B. Manufacturers: wW 1. Series 75000-S,by Josam. 2. Mil-D-82036,by Precision Plumbing Products(PPP). 3. Hydra-Rester,by Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company. 4. Hydrotrol Junior,by Jay R. Smith. 5. Model 1200 Series,by Wilkins. 2.15 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE A. Design Requirements: Field verify supply pressure. When the water system static pressure is greater than 80 psi, provide a pressure reducing valve ahead of all fixtures and located in an accessible place. so B. Pressure Reducing Valve: Watts 223,Wilkins 500, or Spence D34;bronze body. C. Provide shut-off valve at each side of pressure reducing valve. D. Set valve pressure to provide minimum 55 psi at Branded Food Tenant and 25 psi at water closet most remote from service entrance. 2.16 FLOOR DRAINS Nw A. Floor Drains: As scheduled on Drawings. 2.17 ROOF DRAINS w A. Roof Drains: Zum Z-100-E, Jay R. Smith 1015, Josam 21500, or Wade W-3010. Coated cast iron body,bottom outlet, no hub drains with polyethylene dome, membrane clamp, adjustable extension collar, sump receiver, underdeck clamp,and 2 inch external water dam(water dam at secondary drains only). 2.18 TRENCH DRAINS A. Trench Drain: Polyethylene concrete trench drain with sloped radius bottom and interconnecting modules. Refer to Drawings and Fixture Schedule for trench drain length and grate types. B. Accessories: Trench drain system to include end caps, catch basin, strainer, manufacturer's recommended sealer/adhesive(for water,oil,and gas),and other miscellaneous components required for complete installation. 2.19 GREASE INTERCEPTORS A. Precast Concrete Grease Traps: Precast concrete in accordance with local requirements. Provide gas and watertight gasketed non-skid cover. Minimum size is shown on the Drawings;field verify actual requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Install piping neatly and parallel with, or perpendicular to, lines of the structure. Install pipe hangers to maintain accurately aligned piping systems, adequately supported both laterally and vertically. Where practical, connect two or more vents together and extend as one vent through roof. Make vent connections to stacks by appropriate use of 45 wyes, long sweep quarter bends, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends, except that sanitary tees may be used on the vertical stacks. 15100-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 mom 2.7 FLASHINGS A. Refer to Section 07530 and Section 07620 for flashing of roof penetration. Extend vent piping 12 inches above roof line,or more if required by Code. Coordinate installation with roofing. 2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTER(Domestic Water Service/Ground Hydrant) A. If water service backflow preventer is located remote from building, the General Contractor shall coordinate installation between subcontractors. Refer to civil drawings for location and details. B. Backflow Preventer: Watts 007QT or 709,Hersey FDC or Model 2,or Febco 805Y. 1. Double-check valve assembly for backflow prevention in each domestic water service where required by MW local authority having jurisdiction. 2. Include two independent-acting check valves, two shut-off valves, and required means for testing for each assembly. am 3. Where local code requires use of reduced pressure type backflow preventer, provide Watts 909 Series, Hersey FRP II or 6CM, or Febco 825Y, with shut-off valves and test cocks. Install drain line to approved receptor. no 2.9 TRAPS A. Provide deep seal P-traps for floor drains, including drains furnished as integral parts of floor-type mop basins, am and similar fixtures. 2.10 TRAP PRIMERS so A. Zurn Z-1022, Wade W-2400, Josam 88250, or Jay R. Smith 2699. Provide all bronze primer valve with removable operating parts, integral vacuum breaker, and gasketed access cover for installation in a cold water service line to plumbing fixture with piping to fixture required trap seal. 2.11 WALL HYDRANTS(FREEZE PROOF) A. Refer to Schedule on Drawings. .. 2.12 HOSE BIBBS A. Refer to Schedule on Drawings. 2.13 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts as follows. Dura-coated cast iron,adjustable to finish surface. 1. Exposed Cast Iron Pipe: Zurn Z-1403-A,Jay R. Smith 4420,Josam 58490,or Wade W-8530A. 2. Threaded Drainage Fittings: Zurn Z-1470-A,Jay R. Smith 4470,Josam 58540,or Wade W-8590A. 3. In Wall: Zurn ZANB-1468,Jay R. Smith 4472,Josam 58890,or Wade W-8470-R6. 4. In Floors: Zurn ZN-1400-HD,Jay R. Smith 4100,Josam 56050-2,or Wade W-6000Z-1. 5. In Yard: Zurn Z-1474, Jay R. Smith 4880, Josam 58680, Wade W-8300-MF, cast iron clean-out with double flanged housing and heavy duty secured scoriated cast iron cover with lifting device. 2.14 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Install Water Hammer Arrestors where indicated on Drawings and as required by local jurisdictions. Conform to requirements of Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI) WH-201, ANSI A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010; pre-charged suitable for operation in temperature range of-40 to 450 degrees F and maximum 250 psig working pressure. 15100-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 C. Photo Lab Sanitary Sewer: PVC pipe and fittings if permitted by local codes. If PVC is not permitted, provide high-silicon iron pipe and fittings,ASTM A 861,as manufactured by Duriron, Dayton,OH. Location as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 STORM WATER PIPING A. Storm Water Piping: Pipe as specified for sanitary drainage. B. Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, maximum K factor at 75 degrees F of 0.27,3 lb/ft density,minimum of 1 inch thick with factory applied reinforced aluminum foil vapor barrier. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation as manufactured by one of the to following: a. CertainTeed. b. Knauf. C. Owens-Corning. d. Schuller. 2.4 CONDENSATE PIPING A. Provide condensate piping system for rooftop units if required by code. P► B. Condensate trap and condensate piping at unit: Schedule 40 galvanized steel. Pipe fittings at unit: Galvanized malleable iron. Condensate piping inside store: Schedule 40 PVC-DWV. C. When condensate piping to sanitary sewer is required by local codes, PVC-DWV plastic, schedule 40, NSF Seal CS-272, with solvent welded joints may be used from roof penetration to DWV connection point if local codes permit. D. Insulation: Rigid glass fiber, type ASJ/SSL,maximum K factor at 75 degrees F of 0.23,3 lb/ft density,minimum of 1/2 inch thick with white all-service jacket(vapor retarder). Insulate fittings with PVC covers with glass fiber inserts. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation as manufactured by one of the following: a. CertainTeed. b. Knauf. 4` C. Owens-Corning. d. Schuller. Aw 2.5 PIPE SUPPORTS(ABOVE ROOF) A. Wood Blocking: CCA pressure treated lumber Type C complying with requirements of Section 06100. Provided ww diminsioned lumber of nominal sizes and lengths as indicated on Drawings. B. Pipe Clamps: Two sided, 20 gage galvanized sheet metal strap with pre-drilled screw holes; provide clamp one size larger than pipe. 40 C. Isolation Pads: Refer to Section 07530 for isolation pads. 40 2.6 VALVES A. Valves for Domestic Water Piping Systems: Red and White 5044 or 5049,Crane 9302 or 9322,NIBCO T-580 or ON S-580,or Apollo 70 Series brass ball valves with plastic jacketed lever type handle. 15100-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 16. ASTM D2609- Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene(PE)Plastic Pipe(and tubing). .e� D. Federal Specifications(FS): FS WW-T-799, FS WW-T-791,and FS WW-P-401. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A. Water Piping Above Grade: Type "L" hard drawn, seamless copper water tube, ASTM B88 and Federal Specification WW-T-799. Join with wrought copper pressure fittings, ANSI B16.22. Make joints using "lead free"solder and a non-corrosive,paste-type flux. Core solder is not permitted. Solder shall be solid string or wire type. Where soldered copper piping is connected to threaded brass piping,use cast brass adaptor. B. Water Piping Below Grade(Under Slab): 1. 2 Inches and Under: Type "K" soft copper without joints beneath slab. If joints are necessary,bring pipes above slab in wall,make joints,and turn back down under slab. 2. 2-I/2 Inches and Up: Type"K"hard drawn with brazed fittings. C. Make piping connections to fixtures and equipment with chrome-plated seamless brass tube with cleanout plug and escutcheon, ASTM B135 and Federal Specification WW-T-791. No ferrous piping or materials are allowed in water piping smaller than 4 inches. D. Insulation: At Contractor's option,provide one of the following: 1. Rigid Glass Fiber: Type ASJ/SSL, maximum K factor at 75 degrees F of 0.23, 3 lb/ft density with white all-service jacket(vapor retarder). Insulate fittings with PVC covers with glass fiber inserts. ar. 2. Polyolefin Foam Insulation: Maximum K factor at 75 degrees F of 0.24, 1.5 lbs/cu. ft. density,maximum flame spread and smoke development of 25 and 50 respectively. Insulate fittings with pre-formed foam covers. Foam insulation color: white. 3. Insulation thickness: Provide minimum insulation thickness in compliance with ASHRAE 90.1 as listed below. a. Branch runouts up to 2" in diameter and less than 12 feet in length: '/2"insulation. b. Pipes 2"in diameter and less: 1"insulation. C. Pipes 2-1/2"to 4": 1-1/2"insulation. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide insulation as manufactured by one of the following: a. CertainTeed. b. Imcoa. C. Knauf. d. Owens-Corning. e. Schuller. 2.2 SANITARY DRAINAGE A. Sanitary Drainage Lines(Soil,Waste,and Vent): Provide one of the following: 1. Cast Iron: Cast iron soil pipe and fittings, coated inside and outside,ASTM A74 and Federal Specification WW-P-401. Label with Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institutes "Mark of Quality and Permanence". Weight of pipe as required by code for location and duty. 2. PVC Pipe: Where permitted by local codes, PVC-DWV Plastic Schedule 40; NSF Seal CS-272 may be used for sanitary drainage pipes(soil,waste,and vent). B. Joints: 1. Cast Iron Pipe: Provide "push-on" gasketed type joint above and below grade. "No-hub" mechanical joints permitted above grade only. 2. PVC Pipe: Provide solvent-welded joint. sm 15100-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 UniSpec II 022500 SECTION 15100-BUILDING SERVICES PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Water piping. 2. Sanitary drainage. 3. Vent piping 4. Storm water piping. 5. Condensate piping. A 6. Connection of miscellaneous equipment furnished under other Sections. 7. Testing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Preservative pressure treatment for wood blocking pipe supports. 2. Section 07530-Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: Isolation pads for pipe supports on roofing. 3. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing of roof penetration. 4. Section 15050-Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Piping hangers and supports 5. Other Division 15 Sections,as applicable. Refer to other Divisions for coordination of work. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers(ASME): 1. ASME A 13.1 -Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. eA 2. ASME SA249 - Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes. B. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): ANSI B 16.22. C. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): Applicable to the extent referenced thereto. 1. ASTM A 74-Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 40 2. ASTM A 53 -Specification for Pipe,Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless 3. ASTM A 249 - Specification for Welded Austenitic Steel Boiler, Superheater, Heat Exchanger, and Condenser Tubes. N 4. ASTM A 269 - Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. 5. ASTM B 88- Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 6. ASTM B 135-Specification for Seamless Brass Tube. 7. ASTM D1785 -Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80,and 120. 8. ASTM D2466-Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 9. ASTM D 2564 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and ! Fittings. 10. ASTM D2855 - Specification for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Pipe and Fittings. 40 11. ASTM D2846 - Specification for Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC)Pipe, Fittings, Solvent Cements and Adhesives for Potable Hot Water Systems. 12. ASTM F493 - Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 13. ASTM D3309-Specifications for Polybutylene(PB)Plastic Hot Water Distribution System. 14. ASTM F845 -Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polybutylene(PB)Pipe. 15. ASTM F876-Specification for Crosslinked Polyethylene Tubing. 15100-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 law BLANK PAGE .m am am Mw am .w am aw an sw Am 15050-4 Wal-Mart Store 42901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 9W oft I. Piping Support: 1. Support horizontal piping as follows: MAXIMUM SPACING (IN FEET) go Pipe I D Copper Steel Cast Iron PVC Up to 1" 8' 8' 10' max. & min. one 4' maximum po hanger at each joint 1-1/4" - 3" 10' 10' 411 - 8" 16' 16' so 10" - 14" - 20' J. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch clear space between finished covering and adjacent No work. K. Place a hanger within one foot of each horizontal elbow. L. Support horizontal soil pipe near each hub,with 10 feet maximum spacing between hangers. M. Support PVC piping per manufacturer's recommendations with 4 feet maximum spacing be- tween hangers. 3.2 ELECTRICAL WIRING OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT A. Except as otherwise specified in Division 15, field power and power control wiring shall be provided under Division 16. 3.3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Comply with requirements of Division 2 for excavation and backfill. 3.4 TESTS A. Field test mechanical equipment installed under this Contract as required by Owner. Test in presence of Wal-Mart Construction Manager. w B. Perform tests required by governing authorities, in addition to tests specified in individual Sec- tions. C. Complete final installation and testing 14 days prior to Contract Substantial Completion Date. END OF SECTION so w 15050-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 am be scaled for exact measurements. Where specific detail and dimension for mechanical Work ®. are not shown on Drawings, take measurements and make layouts as required for proper instal- lation of mechanical Work in coordination with other Work on project. am 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Follow manufacturer's published directions in the delivery, storage,protection, installation, pip- no ing, and wiring, and start-up of equipment and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS am Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION AM 3.1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Adequately support pipes throughout building, both horizontal and vertical. Securely attach to am structure overhead by methods approved at job site. 1. For Projects in Seismic Zones 2, 3 or 4: Provide sway bracing to comply with code seismic requirements. ■• B. Hanger Schedule: Service Pine Size Hanger Type B-Line No. Globe No. Grinnell No. PHD e.. Uninsulated 2"&smaller Split Ring B-3173 with 721 108 with 114 500 with 114 Steel or PVC B-3224 2-1/2"&larger Clevis B-3100 404/407 260 450 Uninsulated 2"&smaller Ring B-3107-CT 301 CT 99 152 Copper 2-1/2"&larger Clevis B-3104-CT 407 CT 65 442 Cast Iron All Clevis B-3102 404 260 420 Soil Pipe +�*► Insulated 4"&smaller Clevis B-3100 with 408 with 260 with 550 with Steel or PVC shield shield shield shield Insulated 4"&smaller Clevis B-3104 411 CT 65 442 �1e Copper 1/2"&larger Clevis B-3100 with 408 with 260 with 550 with shield shield shield shield C. Insulation shields in areas without ceiling to be secured with pressure sensitive tape to insula- tion at each end of shield. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with angles or unistrut spacers and hanger rods. E. Wall Support: Pipe sizes to 3 inches, cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp, adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll for hot pipe sizes 6 inches and over. G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. H. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping or provide sheet plastic tape .� wrapping between hanger or support and piping. 15050-2 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 kw UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 15050- BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE A. When any equipment is operable, and it is advantageous for the Contractor to operate the equipment, the operation may be performed provided that the operation is properly supervised 40 and the Contractor retains full responsibility for the equipment operated. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has been operated, the Contractor shall properly clean the equipment, in- stall clean filter media equal in quality to the factory installed filters (Filters: Class 1, 30 per- cent efficiency, radial design with 15 pleats per linear foot), make required adjustments, and complete punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner. 1.2 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Comply with rules and regulations of public utilities and municipal department affected by con- nection of services. B. Laws, codes, and ordinances take precedence except where work called for by Drawings and Specifications exceeds code requirements in quality or quantity. C. In addition to codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders, and other legal requirements with which compliance is required by Division 1 or by governing authorities, industry standards pub- lished by the following organizations apply: 1. AABC -Associated Air Balance Council. 2. ADC -Air Diffusion Council. 3. AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association. 4. ANSI-American National Standards Institute. 5. ARI -Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute. 6. ASA- Acoustical Society of America. 7. AGA-American Gas Association. 8. ASHRAE-American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. 9. ASME-American Society of Mechanical Engineers. 10. ASTM-American Society for Testing and Materials. 11. MCAA-Mechanical Contractors'Association of America. 12. NEBB -National Environmental Balancing Bureau. 13. NBS-National Bureau of Standards. 14. SMACNA- Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association. 15. UL-Underwriters Laboratories. 16. ASPE-American Society of Plumbing Engineers. 17. AWWA-American Water Works Association. 18. NSF-National Sanitation Foundation. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and Specifications show pipe and duct sizes, general routing and location, and de- ,w.• scribe various systems. These documents describe and size equipment, its general location, us- age, support, and auxiliary requirements. Contract Documents do not, however, detail certain job requirements. Drawings are intended to cover layout and design of the Work and are not to 15050-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 BLANK PAGE xft Mw sm Mw am oft No .w go .. .. am Oft 13900-16 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 PM B. Site Tests-Above Ground Fire Protection Piping: 1. Test pressure piping for leakage in presence of authority having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. Test to consist of holding the test pressure at the high end for a period of two hours. Test pressure: 200 psi or 50 psi over normal operating pressure,whichever is greater. Conduct test in accordance with NFPA. Send completed copy of the material and test certificate to Property Manager, 702 SW 8 St. Dept 9360, Bentonville, AR 72716-9078, (501) 273-8992. 2. All required tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner's representative. 3. Inspection of welds, and/or verification of welder's qualifications may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall comply with all requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, including but not limited to : w a. Provide written documentation of welders qualifications and certification. b. Stamp imprint of welders identification adjacent to all welds. C. Provide provisions for, schedule and conduct inspection of all welds . Inspection 4" shall be scheduled at project site, with pipe at grade level,prior to installation. END OF SECTION on 4" 13900-15 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 U. Sprinkler piping that passes through unheated spaces in or under structures and are exposed to freezing shall be protected from freezing as indicated or in accordance with applicable methods in NFPA 13. V. Provide valves where indicated on the Drawings and elsewhere as specified or required to com- ply with NFPA Standards and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide back- flow prevention devices, check valves,and drains where required by authorities having Jurisdic- tion. Main control valves for risers shall be through wall post indicator valves. W. Anti-freeze Systems(where required): Install "Loop", concealed, above ceilings where ceilings .� are used, or as required by Wal-Mart and authorities having jurisdiction. X. Make reductions in pipe sizes with one-piece reducing fittings. Bushings not acceptable. Use flanged fittings at base of risers. Y. Use full 20 foot lengths of pipe, except where needed to accommodate changes in direction or for space limitations. MW 3.4 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect work from danger of freezing, breakage, dirt, foreign materials, etc., and replace work so damaged. Use every precaution to protect work of others. 3.5 IDENTIFICATION A. Apply signs to control, drain, test and alarm valves to identify their purposes and functions. Provide lettering sizes and styles selected by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager from NFPA's suggested styles. Provide hydraulic placard for each sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 113. Stencil riser/zone numbers on risers. 3.6 CLEANING AND FLUSHING A. Prior to connecting overhead system piping to underground supply system piping, flush under- ground supply system piping per NFPA 13 and 24. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests-Under Ground Fire Protection Piping: 1. Test pressure piping for leakage in presence of authority having jurisdiction and Owner's representative. Test to consist of holding the test pressure in each section of line tested for a period of two hours. Test pressure at the high end of each test section shall be 200 psi or 50 psi over normal operating pressure whichever is greater. Conduct test in accordance with NFPA 24. 2. Flush underground mains and lead-in connections thoroughly before connection is made to above ground system piping to remove foreign material. Minimum flow rate shall not be less than the maximum water flow demand rate of the system and not less than necessary to provide a velocity of 10 feet per second. Continue flushing for sufficient time to ensure thorough cleaning. Provide proper disposal of water from flushing operation. •� 3. All required tests shall be witnessed by authorities having jurisdiction, and Owner's representative. 13900-14 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 rich primer to welding. Apply masking tape or paper cover to ensure sprinkler do not receive field paint finish. Remove tape or paper after painting. Replace sprinklers having paint other than factory finish with new sprinklers. Cleaning and reuse of painted sprinklers is prohibited. I. Do not penetrate building structural members. Examine other work indicated on the Drawings and conditions at job site. Coordinate routing of work with other construction trades to avoid interference with other installations. Do not cut building structural members,beams,joists, etc. for routing of sprinkler piping. In the event of conflicts, consult Wal-Mart representative, and his decision shall govern. J. Provide sleeves when penetrating floors and walls. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to achieve fire resistance equivalent to fire separation required. Provide wall plates at all penetrations. K. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads with non-toxic joint compound ap- plied to male threads only. Re-Coat threads on galvanized pipe with galvanized coating. L. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. Remove protective coatings prior to installation. 00 M. Route piping and locate sprinklers as required to avoid building structure,equipment,plumbing piping, heating and air conditioning piping, ductwork, lighting fixtures, electrical conduits and bus ducts, and similar work. 1. Final location of lighting and exposed ductwork shall have priority over pipe routing and final sprinkler locations. Piping and sprinklers shall not create shadows. 2. Height of sprinkler piping in sales area without a ceiling and stockroom shall be 6 inches w� minimum below roof deck and shall be located above bottom of joists. Minimum height of sprinkler piping in sales area with a ceiling shall be 15'-0" AFF or V-0" above ceiling for new and existing. so 3. Mezzanines: Maintain sprinkler piping minimum of T-6" AFF under mezzanines. N. Piping drops below beams are not permitted. an O. Provide pipe offsets as required to complete installation. Modify shop prefabricated piping, pipe hangers, and other components as required to fit the job site conditions. so P. Shop drill and weld weld-o-lets on piping. Q. Conceal piping in chases,walls, furred spaces and above ceiling in areas with dropped ceilings. R. Inspector's Test Valves: Install inspector's test valves at five feet (minimum) to seven feet (maximum) above finish floor to facilitate bi-monthly tests. Coordinate test valve locations with Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Provide one inspector's test valve for each systems at end-of-the-line,piped to non-public areas. 0* S. Dry Pendent Sprinklers (Locations other than Freezers/Coolers): Install concealed above ceil- ings where ceilings are used. T. Piping shall maintain clearance from electrical equipment as required by code and authorities 4" having jurisdiction. Drains and Inspector's test connection shall not be piped into or through electrical rooms/areas. 13900-13 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 am C. Lay pipe to lines and grades as required. ""o D. Keep interior of pipe free from dirt and other foreign material as installation progresses. Plug open ends when work is stopped. Join lengths with couplings in accordance with pipe manufac- "® turer's instructions. Join to fittings and valves that have rubber ring bells with same groove di- mensions and tolerance as pipe. Im E. Provide post indicators and fittings as necessary. F. Install concrete thrust blocks as required. Place concrete between undisturbed soil with fittings .� anchored. Do not cover coupling flanges or other joints with concrete. 3.3 INSTALLATION-ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13. Install sprinkler piping products in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that fire protection sprinkler piping complies with re- quirements and serves intended purposes. B. Locate hangers at or directly adjacent to the joist panel points. Support piping as listed below. �* Pipe Size Routing of Pipe Hanging Method Hanger Location less than 4" parallel to joists top beam clamp see hanger spacing table 41,611, 8" parallel to joists trapeze hanger see hanger spacing table 4"and less perpendicular to joists top beam clamp every other joist& per NFPA 13 6" perpendicular to joists top beam clamp every joist 8" perpendicular to joists top beam clamp 2 per joist, 1 on each side C. Hanger Spacing: Space hangers for piping running parallel to joist as follows: Pipe Size Hanger Spacing 3"and less 15'-0" 4" 13'-0" 5" 9'-6" "■"` 6" 6'-6" 8" 4'-6" D. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure. Maintain gradient. Use eccentric reducers to maintain top of pipe level. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain. Size drain piping as required to drain sprinkler system properly. Provide drain valves at main shut-off valves, and at low points of piping and apparatus. .� E. Install piping to conserve building space. Do not interfere with use of building space and other work. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe,joints,or connected equipment. H. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. Where pipe support mem- bers are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc 13900-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 me 40 F. Flushing Connections: Provide threaded, capped nipple or mechanical groove end cap on ends of cross mains. G. Auxiliary Drains: I. 5 gallons or greater: provide minimum 1 inch globe valve with hose adapter and cap. on 2. Less than 5 gallons: provide minimum 1 inch nipple and cap. 3. All auxiliary drain facilities shall be placed to allow easy access. H. Relief Valves: For gridded sprinkler systems, provide a relief valve not less than 1/4 inch size 40 set to operate at pressure not greater than 175 psi Location of relief valves to be in accordance with NFPA 13. I. Indicator Posts: 1. No. A-20805,with tamper switch(double contact),by Mueller. 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. J. If inspector test valve and auxiliary drain valve are piped together then test drain assembly shall be an approved manufactured assembled unit. Subject to compliance with requirements, pro- vide valves of one of the following manufacturers: 1. "Test Master",by Victaulic. 2. "Sure Test",by Central Sprinkler Corp. 3. "TestanDrain",by AGF Manufacturing,Inc. 2.13 FIRE PUMP A. Fire Pump not permitted. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside,before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Install system and equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions, and NFPA Stan- dards. E. Coordinate work of this Section with other affected work and construction schedule. �s 3.2 INSTALLATION-BELOW GROUND PIPING A. Install piping and system components in accordance with NFPA 24. Verify that main feed from water supply source to building is as specified. B. Provide underground sprinkler lead-in from 5 feet outside of building with minimum 8 inch di- """ ameter pipe. Provide pipe restraint as necessary to comply with NFPA 2C.Support barrel of pipe for entire length on compacted pipe bedding. Excavate for couplings,fittings and valves. 13900-11 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 MW B. Escutcheon plates to be installed where exposed piping passes through walls, ceilings, and floors of building shall be approved "FPPI" white plastic. Split type escutcheon plates are not acceptable. 2.12 ACCESSORIES A. Electric Bell: Provide 8 inch diameter, 24 volt AC, electric bell, Model No. PBA248,by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Bell shall be weather proof for exterior use. Locate bell on exterior of building, adjacent to sprinkler system riser. B. Wet Sprinkler System Water Flow Detectors: Equip sprinkler system risers with double pole vane type flow detector, Model No. VSR-F, by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Set adjustable delayed signal at 30 seconds. Vane-type flow detector shall be for use of Wal- Mart, Inc. Wal-Mart, Inc. will connect to alarm system. Additional flow detectors will be re- quired if other's intend to utilize water flow detection information. Mount waterflow indicators no higher than 10 feet above finish floor. MR 1. Substitutions: None permitted. C. Control Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Equip post indicator valves with tamper switches, Model No. PCVS, as manufactured by am Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Wal-Mart, Inc. will connect to alarm system. 2. Equip outside screw and yoke valves with tamper switches, Model No. OSYSU-A2 as Am manufactured by Potter Electric Signal of St. Louis, Missouri. Wal-Mart, Inc. will connect to alarm system. 3. All other valves capable of controlling water to the Fire Protection Sprinkler systems dw shall have tamper switches when required by local authority. Wal-Mart Fire Alarm Division will connect to alarm system. 4. Provide a 3/4 inch conduit with pull string from any remote Fire Protection System valve 4M equipped with a tamper switch into the building at the nearest electrical room. 5. Substitutions: None permitted. D. Fire Department Connections: Provide Fire Department connections in accordance with NFPA .■ 13 and authority having jurisdiction. Equip with threads/connections compatible with hoses utilized by the local fire department. 1. Drain: 3/4 inch automatic drip,piped to outside, or approved drainage location. 2. Label: "Auto Sprinkler". 3. Finish: Red enamel. 4. Thread/Connection: NST ,verify with authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Hangers and Supports: Provide hangers and supports as required by Construction Documents, Drawings, NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide seismic bracing in accordance with NFPA 13, as required by state and local codes,and authorities •* having jurisdiction. E. Wire Cage Sprinkler Guards: Fig. 6160,by Potter-Roemer or acceptable substitute. 1. Provide sprinkler guards on sprinkler pendants that are located below 8 feet above finished floor, except at semi-recessed sprinklers. 2. Paint sprinkler guards "white" in Offices and Restrooms; "red" at other locations. MM 3. Provide sprinkler guards at sprinklers in coolers and freezers. 13900-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 2.9 ALARM CHECK VALVES A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one alarm check valve supplying manifold riser of one of the following manufacturers: 1. ASCOA 2. Central. 3. Grinnell. 4. Reliable. 5. Viking. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.10 SPRINKLERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide automatic sprinklers, with 1/2 inch or 17/32 inch orifice; 0.64 inch(extra large) orifice permitted in Stockroom. Sidewall sprinklers are not acceptable,unless noted otherwise. 1. Areas With Exposed Structure Above: a. Standard Sprinklers: Model A, upright sprinkler, bronze, by Central Sprinkler Corp. b. Extra Large Orifice Sprinklers: Central ELO-231, bronze, by Central Sprinkler Corp. 2. Areas With Finished Ceilings,Not Visible To The Public: Model GB,pendent sprinkler, chrome,with two-piece white escutcheon plate,by Central Sprinkler Corp. 3. Areas With Finished Ceilings 10 Feet Above Finish Floor or Higher, Visible to the Public: Model GB, pendent sprinkler, chrome, with two-piece white escutcheon plate, by Central Sprinkler Corp. 40 4. Areas With Finished Ceilings Below 10 Feet Above Finish Floor, Visible to the Public: Model GB, pendent sprinkler, chrome, with two-piece GB 1/2 inch recessed white escutcheon plate,by Central Sprinkler Corp. B. Substitutions: Under the provisions of Section 01600, UL listed and FM approved, one of the following manufacturer's (including glass bulb type) may be substituted for standard sprinklers specified above. 1. ASCOA. 2. Firematic Sprinkler Devices,Inc. 3. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corp. 4. Grinnell. 5. Reliable Fire Equipment Co. 6. Star Sprinkler Corp. 7. The Viking Corp. 2.11 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. Sleeves through structural concrete members and sleeves for walls below grade and floors on grade shall be standard weight galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe. Sleeves through other than structural components of the building shall be 20 gage galvanized sheet metal with lock seam 'o joints. Sleeves through floors shall extend two inches past finished surface. USG Thermafiber safing insulation shall be installed between sleeve and pipe. 13900-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 ..p C. Cast or ductile iron body; chrome plated ductile iron disc,resilient replaceable EPDM seat; wa- fer, lug, or grooved ends; extended neck; hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating de- vice; built-in tamper proof switch. XW 2.7 GLOBE OR ANGLE VALVES A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide globe or angle valves of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Central. 2. Grinnell. 3. Mueller. 4. Nibco. 5. Stockham. .. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. C. Up to 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable composition disc, solder or screwed ends, with backseating capacity. D. Over 2 Inches (50 mm): Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug-type disc, flanged ends,renewable seat and disc. E. Provide drain valves with bronze compression stop with hose thread,nipple and cap. Use hose �* thread, nipple and cap only where piping to outside or other approved drainage facility is not readily available. 2.8 CHECK VALVES A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide check valves of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Central. 2. Grinnell. 3. Mueller. 4. Nibco. 5. Stockham. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. C. Up to and including 2 Inches (50 mm): Bronze swing disc, solder or screwed ends. D. Larger than 2 inches(50 mm)iron body,bronze trim, stainless steel spring,renewable composi- tion disc, screwed,wafer, flanged,or grooved ends. 13900-8 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 2.4 BACKFLOW PREVENTER ASSEMBLIES A. Subject to compliance with design and jurisdictional requirements,provide Backflow Preventer Assembly as follows: 1. 2 Inch Connections and Smaller: If local authority requires double check, double 40 detector check, or reduced pressure type devices use ASSE approved device. 2. 2-1/2 Inch Through 8 Inch Connections: a. Double check type,use: Model#2000SS, double check type,by Ames. No b. Double detector check type, use: Model #3000SS, double detector check type,by Ames. C. Reduced pressure type,use: Model 4000RP,reduced pressure type,by Ames. on 3. Use friction losses stated in manufacturer's literature. 4. When utilizing a reduced pressure backflow preventer, equip backflow preventer with air gap drain piped to an approved outside location or interior floor drain. 5. Install backflow preventer assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, authorities having jurisdiction requirements and Wal-Mart requirements. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.5 GATE VALVES A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide gate valves of one of the following manufac-_ turers: 1. Central. 2. Grinnell. 3. Mueller. 4. Nibco. 5. Stockham. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. C. Gate Valves (Up to and including 2 Inches(50 mm)): Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, solder or threaded ends. D. Gate Valves(Over 2 Inches (50 mm)): Iron body,bronze trim, rising stem,hand wheel, OS&Y, single wedge, flanged ends. 2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide butterfly valves of one of the following manufacturers: 1. Central. 2. Grinnell. 3. Mueller. 4. Nibco. 5. Stockham. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 13900-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 2.2 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING-BELOW GROUND A. Cast Iron Pipe: Class 200,with flanged joints,ASA 21.2 or bell and spigot ASA 21.6. Cement- mortar lined, ASA 21.4. 1. Fittings: Cast Iron Flanged, ASA B 16.1 Class 125; bell & spigot ASA 21.10; fittings to be cement mortar lined ASA 21.4. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: ASTM D1784-60T, ASTM D2241-64AT. Commercial Stan- dard CS 256-63. Designed for Maximum working pressure of 160 psi at 73 degrees F. .. 1. Rubber ring joints: Ring Tite PVC Pipe,by Schuller. 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. C. Ductile Iron Pipe: Class 50 2.3 FIRE PROTECTION PIPING-ABOVE GROUND A. Black Steel Pipe: ANSI/ASTM A53; ASTM A795; ASTM A135; ANSI B36.10M; Schedule 10 or 40 (Schedule 30 for 8 inch pipe and larger). Galvanized Schedule 40 required for Drypipe Systems(Schedule 10 not acceptable). 1. Steel Fittings: (Not acceptable for Drypipe systems) ANSI/ASME B16.9, factory made wrought steel, butt welded fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.25, buttwelding ends; ASTM A234, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel; ANSI/ASME B16.5, pipe flanges and .A fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.11, forged socket welding and threaded. 2. Cast Iron Fittings: (Not acceptable for Drypipe systems)ANSI/ASME B 16.1, flanges and fittings; ANSI/ASME B 16.4, threaded fittings. 3. Malleable Iron Fittings: ANSI/ASME B 16.3,threaded type. ANSI/ASTM A47. 4. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Roll groove only, cut groove unacceptable. Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts,nuts, and washers; Victaulic F1ushSeal gasket required for Drypipe systems. 5. Fitting type to match pipe. Galvanized required for Drypipe systems. B. Substitutions: Acceptable Alternatives to Schedule 10 and Schedule 40 pipe (not allowed for Drypipe systems). 1. "Superflow"Non-threadable Lightwall,by Allied. 2. "Dyna-Flow" Non-threadable Lightwall,by American Tube. 3. Schedule 5 pipe used in conjunction with Victaulic "Pressfit" system. 4. "Eddylite",by Bullmoose used in conjunction with roll grooved fittings. 5. "LS",by Century Tube used in conjunction with roll groove fittings. ..� 6. "XL",by Allied used in conjunction with roll grove fittings. C. Pipe must meet the following conditions: 1. Threads: Shop cut according to applicable ANSI standards. 2. Pipe Fittings: Specifically rated for use with pipe. 3. Threadable thinwall pipe shall be used only in conjunction with roll groove fittings. 13900-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sprinkler Systems: Perform work in accordance with NFPA 13 and other applicable NFPA standards. B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Perform in accordance with AWS D10.9 and NFPA 1C. C. Equipment and Components: UL listed and FM approved with appropriate labels or markings. D. Comply with applicable state and local codes and authorities having jurisdiction. E. Maintain two copies of approved documents on site. F. System to be guaranteed for a period of one year after completion of work and acceptance from Owner's Representative. G. Qualifications (Installer): Company specializing in performing work of this Section with mini- mum three year experience and a minimum of a NICET Certified Engineering Technician (Level III)Fire Sprinkler Designer on staff responsible for project. H. Sprinkler and fire alarm contractor license issued by the state or local jurisdiction. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Hydraulic Calculations, Product Data and Shop Drawings shall bear stamp of approval of authorities having jurisdiction and designated reviewer specified in Sec- tion 01300. Provide certificate of compliance from authorities having jurisdiction indicating approval of field acceptance tests. 1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra sprinklers under the provisions of NFPA 1B.Provide suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. B. Provide suitable metal storage cabinet per NFPA 13 in location designated by Wal-Mart Con- struction Manager. C. Provide hydraulic calculation placard attached to each riser. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store products in shipping containers and maintain in place until installation. Provide tempo- rary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide UL Listed and FM Approved materials complying with NFPA 13. 13900-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 E. Gun Room: w 1. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 165 degrees F. 2. Wire Guards: Provide wire guard around sprinkler to prevent mechanical damage. 3. Spacing: 130 sq. ft. per sprinkler, (maximum). Locate sprinkler, ceiling mounted, centered on gun room door. 4. Occupancy: Ordinary Hazard Group 2 per NFPA 1 F. Aerosol Rooms: 1. Density: 0.30 gpm/sq. ft. over entire area with 500 gpm outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 286 degrees F. Provide 12 inch sprinkler heat collector, if ceiling is of wire mesh construction. 3. Spacing: 100 sq. ft.per sprinkler, (maximum). 4. Occupancy: Ordinary Hazard Group 2 per NFPA 1 G. Offices: 1. Density: 0.10 gpm/sq. ft. for most hydraulically remote 1500 square feet, with 100 gpm .� outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 165 degrees F. 3. Spacing: 225 sq. ft.per sprinkler, (maximum). 4. Occupancy: Light Hazard,per NFPA 13. H. Freezers, and Coolers: In addition to ceiling sprinkler system over the top of walk-in freezers and coolers,provide supplied from wet system as follows. 1. Density: 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. for entire area, with 250 gpm hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 212 degrees F, dry pendent sprinklers, chrome plated. 3. Spacing: 130 sq. ft.per sprinkler, (maximum). .. 4. Occupancy: Ordinary Hazard Group 2 per NFPA 1. 1. Battery Storage: 1. Density: 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. over entire storage area, with 250 gpm outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 212 degrees F. 3. Spacing: 130 sq. ft.per sprinkler, (maximum). 4. Occupancy: Ordinary Hazard Group 2 per NFPA 13. 5. Protect sprinkler system in this area from freezing. Dry sidewall sprinklers are permitted in this area if appropriate. J. General Merchandising Dock/Receiving Area: 1. Density: 0.30 gpm/sq. ft. for most hydraulically remote 2000 sq. ft., with 500 gpm outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 286 degrees F. 3. Spacing: 100 sq. ft.per sprinkler, (maximum). 4. Occupancy: Solid Pile Storage of Class 1V Commodities. Maximum storage height is 12 feet. Extra Hazard Group 1 per NFPA 13. 5. If overhead doors open to a horizontal position, provide sidewall sprinklers on each side of door. Install sprinklers below door with door in horizontal position. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. General Contractor shall re- spond to all shop drawing review comments within 15 days of receipt. 13900-4 ' Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton, MA 03/10/2000 G. Local authorities having jurisdiction may require hydraulically calculated densities, areas of ap- plication, and hose allowance differing from those specified. Verify and provide hydraulic cal- culations as required by local authorities and these Construction Documents. H. Interface system with building fire and smoke alarm system. I. Provide fire department connections where indicated. J. If required by local authority having jurisdiction, Wal-Mart will provide a Fire Department lock-box, in size, type and location as directed. K. Areas of application shall be based on actual floor area protected by sprinklers. go L. Hose allowance required in schedule shall be included in hydraulic calculations at transition be- tween underground supply piping and overhead system piping. fa 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Retail Areas(general),Vestibule,Above Ceiling Panels in building with Combustible Construc- tion,Enclosed Lawn and Garden Center(Enclosed Seasonal): 1. Density: 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. for most hydraulically remote 1500 square feet, with 250 gpm outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 165 degrees F. 3. Spacing: 130 sq. ft.per sprinkler, (maximum). 4. Occupancy: Mercantile, Ordinary Hazard Group 2 per NFPA 13. 5. If overhead doors open in horizontal position,provide sidewall sprinklers on each side of door. Install sprinklers below door with door in horizontal position. B. Non-Enclosed Garden Center(Metal Canopy): 1. Density: 0.20 gpm/sq. ft. for most hydraulically remote 1500 square feet, with 250 gpm outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 212 degrees F. Sidewall sprinklers are not acceptable. 3. Spacing: 130 sq. ft.per sprinkler(maximum). 4. Occupancy: Mercantile,Ordinary Hazard Group 2 per NFPA 13. 5. Protect sprinkler system in this area from freezing. C. Stock Areas(without rolling racks- stationary racks): 1. Density: 0.30 gpm/sq. ft. for most hydraulically remote 2000 square feet, with 500 gpm outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 286 degrees F. 3. Spacing: 100 sq. ft. per sprinkler, (maximum). 4. Occupancy: Single and double row racks and solid pile storage of Class 1V commodities. Maximum storage height is 15 feet. D. Stock Areas, including rolling racks: 1. Density: 0.30 gpm/sq. ft. for most hydraulically remote 2000 square feet, with 500 gpm outside hose stream allowance. 2. Sprinkler Temperature Rating: 286 degrees F. 3. Spacing: 100 sq. ft.per sprinkler, (maximum). 4. Occupancy: Multiple row rack storage of Class 1V commodities. Maximum storage height is 12 feet. Extra Hazard Group 1 per NFPA 1 13900-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 E. Underwriters Laboratory(UL): 1. UL Fire Protection Directory- 1997. 2. UL 193 - Standard for Alarm Valves for Fire Protection Service. 3. UL 199 - Standard for Automatic Sprinklers for Fire Protection Service. 4. UL 346- Standard for Water Flow Indicators for Fire Protection Signaling Service. 5. UL 405 - Standard for Fire Department Connections. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System to provide coverage for all building areas including,but not limited to, areas scheduled in this Section. Any changes in design area, design criteria, pipe sizes, or deviation of water supply shall be approved by Wal-Mart prior to fabrication. See Section 01330 for submittal re- ... quirements. B. Provide system complying with NFPA 13, local authorities having jurisdiction, and Construc- tion Documents. Densities and areas of application required by this Section have been devel- oped based on NFPA requirements,engineering judgment and insurance carrier requirements. C. Base system design upon water flow test data shown on project Civil Drawings. Water flow test data may not include reductions for backflow preventers. If water flow test data does not include reductions for backflow preventers and backflow preventers are required,use reductions_ as specified in this Section. 1. Water Supply Requirements: Minimum acceptable water supply, at base of riser, for_ design use is 1200 gpm. Base system design on following criteria: a. Standard Design: If residual pressure at base of sprinkler riser is greater than 33 •.� psi after all losses are considered (including any backflow preventer), provide standard sprinkler design. It is acceptable to use extra large orifice sprinklers (ELO)in the stockroom and over automotive center to obtain safety factor required by Construction Documents;provide standard sprinkler design in all other spaces. b. Standard Design with Fire Pump: If residual pressure is 20-33 psi after all losses are considered (including any backflow preventer), provide standard sprinkler design with fire pump. Use of fire pump will not be permitted when residual .� pressure exceeds 33 psi. C. Standard Design with Fire Pump and Tank: If residual pressure is less than 20 psi after all losses are considered (including backflow preventer), provide standard sprinkler design with fire pump and suction tank. 2. Actual backflow preventer must be verified to ensure correct friction loss is calculated. D. Provide 5 psi safety factor between supply curve and demand point, including hose stream al- lowance. E. Local authorities having jurisdiction may require the following areas to have sprinkler protec- tion: Truck Dock Canopies, Wastepaper areas, Open Canopies at front and sides of building, Shade Cloth, and Trash Compactor Chute. Verify sprinkler requirements and provide protec- tion for these areas as required by local authorities. If sprinkler system in any area is subject to freezing, then use non-freeze system(Drypipe or anti-freeze). F. Limit each system to 52,000 square feet. �. 13900-2 Wal-Mart Store #2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 13900-FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Automatic sprinkler systems. 2. Fire protection sprinkler piping work with feed and cross main piping,branch line piping, test valves,test connections and sprinklers. Also include flow indicators,valves, gauges, alarms, drain piping,and supervisory switches. 3. System design, installation and certification. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 02510 -Water Distribution Systems. 40 2. Section 05210 - Steel Joists: Coordinate fire protection system design with steel joist's structural capacities to support fire protection piping. 3. Applicable Division 15 Sections: Refer to other Sections for coordination of work. 00 4. Section 07900-Joint Sealer. 5. Section 09900 -Paints and Coatings. on 1.2 REFERENCES A. Factory Mutual System(FM): No 1. Approval Guide, 1997 edition. B. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 0. 1. NFPA 13,- 1996 Edition-Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 24, 1992 Edition - Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and their Appurtenances. 3. NFPA 70, 1993 Edition-National Electrical Code. '0 4. American Welding Society (AWS): AWS D10.9 - Specification for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing. on C. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. on 2. ASTM A 135 - Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe. D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): go 1. ANSI A 21.10 - Gray Iron and Ductile Iron Fittings, 2 in. through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids. 2. ANSI A 21.51 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. 3. ANSI B 16.1 -Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125,250, and 800. 4. ANSI B 16.3 -Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings. 5. ANSI B 16.4-Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 13900-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North Hampton,MA 03/10/2000 49" Blank Page 13850-4 Wal-Mart 92901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 END OF SECTION 4M 13850-3 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 .r, 3. Provide outlet boxes conforming to requirements of"Outlet Boxes and Conduit Fitting" of these Specifications. 2.2 SMOKE DETECTORS (120 VOLT) A. Detectors shall be photoelectric type UL listed to standard 268, FM approved. 1. Low profile. 2. Two(2)wire operation. ., 3. Surface mounted to outlet box. 4. Locking tamper screw. 5. Pulsing power on indicator(LED). .., 6. LED alarm indicator. 7. Magnetically operated functions test. 8. Totally shielded electronics. ow 9. 120 Volt AC operation. 10. Relay module. 11. UL listed temperature range 32°F to 100°F(- 10°C to+ 50°C). 12. Humidity range 10%to 90% RH. 13. Color- off-white. 14. Sounder base with horn. B. Detectors shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to which they are con- nected. C. Detectors shall have#30 mesh insect screens and have completely closed backs to minimize en- try of dust and air turbulence. D. Relay modules shall have 2 DPDT contacts rated I at 30VDC, 0.5A at 120VAC. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 FIRE ALARM/BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEM A. Install fire alarm/burglar alarm conduit system, fire alarm grounding conductor, and signal sys- tems as indicated on Drawings. 3.2 SMOKE DETECTORS (120 VOLT) A. Install smoke detectors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as required by NFPA 72. B. Ensure that back box is of sufficient depth to accommodate relay in accordance with NEC Arti- cle 370. ow C. Provide recommended manufacturer adapter plates to back box as required. .w 13850-2 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 ow 1 UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 13850 - DETECTION AND ALARM W PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire Alarm/Burglar Alarm System 2. Smoke Detection. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installation: In compliance with requirements of NFPA 70. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 FIRE ALARM/BURGLAR ALARM SYSTEMS A. Fire Alarm/Burglar Alarm cable/equipment will be furnished and installed by Wal-Mart under separate contracts. B. Fire Alarm/Burglar Alarm System Grounding Conductors: Provide#6 AWG,copper grounding conductor from fire/burglar service equipment to electrical service grounding electrode system or dry type transformer grounding electrode system. If EDC is provided this will be included in EDC. C. Fire Alarm/Burglar Alarm Conduit System: Provide conduit system as indicated on Drawings, including: I. Remote conduit to fire pump, control valve supervisory switches (PIV valves) or tank as indicated on Drawings and outlined below. a. If shut off valve is located remote from store building, provide 3/4 inch conduit; with pull string, from remote location to rear Electrical Room. Wal-Mart, Inc. will pull signal cable and connect to alarm system. b. If pump and pump controls are located remote from store building, provide 3/4 inch conduit, with pull string, from the remote location to rear Electrical Room. Wal-Mart, Inc. will pull signal cable and connect alarm system. C. If tank and tank indicators are located remote from store building, provide 3/4 inch conduit, with pull string from remote location to rear Electrical Room. Wal-Mart, Inc. will pull signal cable and connect to alarm system. 2. Other conduits as indicated on Drawings. 13850-1 Wal-Mart#2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 2. Three Current Transducers: CTS-81-3. 3. Shorting Switch Assembly: SSA-82. 4. Isolation Relay Assembly: IRA-83. 5. Enclosure: ENC-84. .p PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 . INSTALLATION (OWNER INSTALLED) A. Owner's EMS contractor will install energy management system wiring and terminations. END OF SECTION ow aw 13812-2 Wal-Mart 42901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 am UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 13812 - ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM WIRING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY MP A. Section Includes: w 1. 24 volt energy management system wiring and terminations. B. Products Furnished and Installed Under Separate Contract (NIQ Under provisions of Secion 01600,Owner will furnish and install energy management system wiring. 1. Energy Management System (EMS) Wiring Supplier: Novar Controls Corporation, 114 South College Ave., Suite D, Fayetteville, AR 72702. Contact: Wal-Mart Support Ser- vice, (800)341-7795. 2. Energy Management System (EMS) Installer: For the purposes of scheduling and coor- dination of other trades in connection with energy management system installation and start-up, contact the Wal-Mart Energy Management Department, (501) 273-8670, to ob- tain name and phone number of the energy management system contractor who will be used on this Project. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Under provisions of Document 00800, secure permits, fees, de- posits etc. for demand meter pulse generator. Coordinate with Section 13810 and local Utility. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 13810- Energy Monitoring and Control Systems. OF 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Wal-Mart Support Service: Support service provided by energy management system supplier under the Energy Management System contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Manufacturer: Owner's EMS contractor will furnish energy management system components as manufactured by,Novar Controls Corporation, Fayetteville, AR. B. Owner's EMS contractor will provide following Novar Controls equipment if local electric power utility is unable to provide demand pulse generator. 1. Watt Transducer: WAT-80. 13812-1 Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 Blank Page Ow .�w 13810-4 Wal-Mart #2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 �w 4. Provide #12 AWG green grounding conductor at grounding location. Solidly ground system. 5. Run cable sets as indicated on Drawings, without splices or terminations except as indicated otherwise. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner's energy management system contractor will perform required system testing as specified by Wal-Mart. Testing and checkout will include but not be limited to the following: 1. Verify analog light sensor location and orientation. 2. Verify sales area light switching pattern. 3. Verify operation of RTU's and HVAC equipment in both first and second stage operation,and heat and cool modes. 4. Verify remote communication with Wal-Mart Support Service. 5. Verify KWH per pulse with utility company. 6. Verify energy management system components installation is in accordance with Novar Controls printed installation procedures. 7. Electronic Thermostat Modules: Verify proper electronic thermostat modules are installed in unit. Verify electronic thermostat modules are installed to Novar Controls printed installation and hardware mounting procedure. 8. Verify site emergency operation with Novar Controls printed operations sequence. END OF SECTION 13810-3 Wal-Mart 42901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 am PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 ENERGY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (OWNER FURNISHED) A. Manufacturer: Owner's EMS contractor will furnish energy monitoring and control system components indicated on Drawings, as manufactured by, Novar Controls Corporation, Fayetteville,AR. 2.2 MATERIALS(OWNER FURNISHED) A. Conduit: Owner's EMS contractor will provide 1/2 inch conduit for energy management system "* cable sets as indicated on Drawings and/or for the following conditions if: 1. Required by local electrical codes. .. 2. Crawl space is used for return air. 3. Cables are installed outside building. 4. Cables are installed less than 15 feet AFF. 5. Cables are subject to physical damage. 6. Cables pass through any fire wall. 7. Cables are installed underground. 8. Cables are installed in concealed area. 9. Cables are installed in finished area. 10. Cables are installed in finished wall. B. Nipples: Owner's EMS contractor will provide 1/2 inch conduit nipples for energy management system cable sets as indicated on Drawings and for the following conditions: 1. Required by local codes. 2. Cables pass through wall. 3. Cables pass through floor. C. Bushings: Owner's EMS contractor will provide properly bushed opening for raceways ending as open conduit. PART 3 - EXECUTION .�r 3.1 INSTALLATION (OWNER INSTALLED) A. Owner's EMS contractor will install energy monitoring and control components as indicated on Drawings. EMS contractor's responsibilities will include the following: 1. Temperature sensors will be identified with 1 inch high black permanent labels. Sensor designations will correspond to associated roof top units. 2. Input/Output Modules will be installed in accordance with Novar Controls printed installation and hardware mounting procedures. 3. Coordinate communications with Wal-Mart Support Service for final download of system parameters. Mr 13810-2 Wal-Mart 92901 -Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 a n� UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 13810- ENERGY MONITORING AND CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Energy Management System (EMS): Direct Digital Distributed Microprocessor based Energy Management Panel and related labor, materials, and equipment as indicated on Drawings and as specified for complete energy management system. B. Products Furnished and Installed Under Separate Contract (NIC): Under provisions of Section 01600, Owner will furnish and install energy monitoring and control systems. 1. Energy Management System (EMS) Supplier: Novar Controls Corporation, 114 South College Ave., Suite D, Fayetteville, AR 72702. Contact: Wal-Mart Support Service, (800)341-7795. 2. Energy Management System (EMS) Installer: For the purposes of scheduling and coordination of other trades in connection with energy management system installation and start-up, contact the Wal-Mart Energy Management Department, (501) 273-8670, to obtain name and phone number of the energy management system contractor who will be used on this Project. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 13812 - Energy Management System Wiring: 24 volt energy management system wiring and terminations. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Wal-Mart Support Service: Support service provided by energy management system supplier under the Energy Management System contract. 1.3 SCHEDULING A. Owner's EMS contractor will notify local electric utility and Wal-Mart Energy Management Department to coordinate connection of demand pulse circuit. EMS contractor will verify with utility KWH per pulse for demand shed scheme, and request from utility written confirmation of demand pulse ratio. EMS contractor will provide this information to Wal-Mart Support Service at time of system test. Upon receipt of utility confirmation, Wal-Mart Support Service will issue final system parameters. an B. Owner's EMS contractor will coordinate with Wal-Mart Support Service dates for remote system checkout. 13810-1 Wal-Mart #2901 - Northampton, Massachusettes 3/10/00 40. low ON 9w as a. am O BLANK PAGE 0& rw 13121-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,R 3.4 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface With Other Work: Coordinate installation of light fixtures to aluminum trusses at locations indicated on Drawings. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL fW A. Inspect aluminum truss and shade cloth installation and attachments. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 00 a . 9 13121-3 art Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 go PART 2-PRODUCTS a► 2.1 WAL-MART FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Quantity Finished: Product quantities required are determined by Aluminum Truss Supplier. B. Aluminum Trusses: 1. 12 inch high Enduro Truss System,by Hendee Enterprises,Incorporated,Houston,TX. .� 2. Lengths: Furnished in standard lengths in two foot increments. 3. Hardware: Mounting brackets,cross bracing,angle brackets,bolts,and washers. 4. Color: Clear Aluminum. C. Shade Cloth: Enduro Shade fabric,by Hendee Enterprises,Incorporated,Houston,TX. 1. Color: Deep Sea Blue. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements for in conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION-ALUMINUM TRUSSES A. Coordinate location and installation of steel post columns provided in Section 02821. B. Install aluminum trusses in accordance with suppliers published instructions. C. Attach mounting brackets to Garden Center truss support columns. D. Attach one end of truss to mounting bracket. Hold opposite end of truss to other mounting bracket to determine required truss length. Cut truss to required length. Repeat for each truss requiring field cutting. we E. Fit trusses into mounting brackets and attach. F. Install truss"X"bracing between trusses. ..� G. Install shade cloth attachment tubing between truss mounting brackets. 3.3 INSTALLATION-SHADE CLOTH A. Install shade cloth panels to aluminum truss system in accordance with suppliers published instructions. B. Each shade cloth panel installed individually to truss system by rope lacing in a zig-zag pattern on all four sides of panel. C. Install rope lacing through grommets in shade cloth panel and around truss top chords and attachment tubing be- tween trusses. 13121-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,. Pa UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 13121 -FABRIC STRUCTURES ow PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wal-Mart furnished Garden Center aluminum trusses and accessories. 2. Wal-Mart furnished shade cloth. 3. Contractor installation of Wal-Mart furnished items. B. Products Installed but Not Supplied Under This Section: Wal-Mart aluminum truss supplier will famish alumi- num trusses and shade cloth under provisions of Section 01600. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: General procedures related to Wal-Mart furnished products. 2. Section 02821 -Chain Link Fences and Gates: Shade cloth canopy truss support colunms. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Aluminum Truss Supplier: Manufacturer of products,separately contracted by Wal-Mart. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery: Aluminum Truss Supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. To establish product delivery date contact: Construction Purchasing Wal-Mart Construction Division (501)273-4217 B. Installation Drawings and Instructions: Delivered to Contractor with Wal-Mart furnished products. C. Product Packaging: Products will be packaged in manufacturer's standard cartons. 1. Trusses: Four trusses per bundle. Trusses weigh approximately 3 pounds 8 ounces per lineal foot. 2. Truss Hardware: Boxes approximately 24 inches x 8 inches x 20 inches. 3. Shade Cloth: Boxes approximately 30 inches x 20 inches x 25 inches. D. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided with Wal-Mart furnished products. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to Wal-Mart Construction Division immediately,(501)273-4217. 3. Upon notification by Contractor,Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 4. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. we E. Section 01600-Product Requirementst: Transport,Handle,Store,and Protect Products. F. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end. ON o , Or 13121-1 W Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PART 2-PRODUCTS .�. 2.1 EQUIPMENT A. Food service equipment and related items designated in the Equipment Schedule on Drawings to be furnished by �** Wal-Mart will be purchased by Wal-Mart under separate contract. B. Equipment not scheduled in this Section, which is incorporated into this Work, such as heating/cooling units, plumbing and electrical equipment: Provide under Division 15 and 16. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 COORDINATION A. Make shop drawings and manufacturer's rough-in requirements available to everyone involved. B. Verify that mechanical,plumbing,and electrical rough-ins have been properly located. C. Obtain necessary drawings, manufacturer's product data, and other necessary data to provide a complete and proper installation. D. Check field dimensions prior to installing equipment. Verify necessary clearances and means of access from s� equipment storage to final position. E. Rough-in's detailed on drawings will have equipment installed which needs to have final hook-ups by Division 15 and Division 16. F. Remove trash,crating and rubbish from job site. .r G. Provide the following equipment during set up: One forklift,four 4-wheel dollies,one Johnson bar. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Uncrate and set equipment in place plumb,level,and properly secured. B. Make appropriate mechanical, plumbing, and electrical connections in accordance with manufacturer's published no instructions. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING go A. Remove tape,wrapping,packing and such items used to facilitate shipping and handling from equipment. B. Remove and assimilate product data except permanent labels and plates and present to Owner. ow C. Remove packing and shipping materials from site. aw D. Thoroughly clean equipment with materials as specifically recommended by equipment manufacturer. E. Put equipment through full design cycle or operate for a sufficient time to verify that equipment is operating within manufacturer's specifications. Make necessary adjustments. END OF SECTION 11400-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,w .w� UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 11400-FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Food service equipment. 2. Equipment final connections. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Under provisions of Section 01600, Wal-Mart's food service supplier will furnish and install food service equipment as indicated in Equipment Schedule on Drawings. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 15100-Building Services Piping: Connections to plumbing systems. 2. Section 15600-Refrigeration Equipment: Connections to refrigeration systems. 3. Section 16100-Wiring Methods: Connections to electrical systems. , ► 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to job site. B. Install: Receive,unload,uncrate,set into final position,connect,test,and clean. C. Final Connections: Complete mechanical, plumbing, and/or electrical connections as required and recommended by manufacturer for optimum operation of scheduled equipment. D. Provide: Furnish and Install. 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Receive, unload and store Wal-Mart furnished equipment, as indicated in Equipment Schedule on Drawings, in a ► location that will not interfere with orderly completion of work. Protect equipment from damage. B. Transport equipment not in crates by hand only. C. Set Wal-Mart furnished equipment as indicated in Equipment Schedule and on Drawings. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide a 12 month warranty from store opening date on workmanship and Contractor furnished materials in- stalled under this Section. B. Return for replacement, Wal-Mart furnished failed parts under warranty to the manufacturer with unit model and serial numbers. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Unload Wal-Mart furnished equipment and coordinate the release of Wal-Mart furnished equipment with Wal- Mart Store Planning. Obtain copy of purchase order from Store Planning to determine receipt of complete order. Coordinate with Store Planning so that forklift equipment (provided by Contractor) is available to unload equip- ment from truck and place into position. 1. Wal-Mart Contact: Store Planning Coordinator,(501)273-4080. 11400-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 w Statement of Conformance: MW This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions, Paragraph 9.11. The undersigned hereby declares that the Product identified above by manufacturer's name and model number is (one of) the product(s) specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER: Phone Number: ( ) (Contact name of subcontractor/supplier offering above product) (Subcontractor/supplier name and address) CONTRACTOR: .w (Contact name of Contractor) (Contractor signature and Title of Signatory) END OF FORM Ak .w .r AW 11160-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. CONTRACTOR'S RECORD LETTER OF CONFORMANCE SECTION 11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT 0 Project Location: Date: (City) (State) Project Number: Store Number: ow The following product has been selected for use in this project from the list of acceptable products specified. Dock Seals: [] Model 160-Black-GP8,by Chalfant Sewing Fabricators,Inc. [] Series 1000,by Fairborn USA Inc. [] Model TP-901-NPV,by Frommelt Industries [] Model DSS-102-WP8-WF(on head pad),by Kelley Company,Inc. [] Model TS-181-DPS,by W.B.McGuire Company,Inc. [] Model S-600,by Serco Corporation [] Model C12-WAL,by Rotary Products Inc [] Model C 12,by Hugger Dock Seal Company [] WP Series,by Flexon [] Model PS-100,by Pentalift Equipment Corporation "' [] Series 0101,by Superseal Fabric covered pads: Side Pad: Height: inches. Depth Top: inches. Depth Bottom: inches. [] Beveled. [] Square,and Black. Top Pad: Length: inches. Depth: inches. Extra ounce reinforcing on face of head pad,Black. [] Guide Stripes: inches Wide,Yellow. (] Wear Pleats: 12 inches wide,40 ounce,Black. [] Frame: Kiln dried,pressure preservative treated wood. [] Galvanized steel mounting hardware. [] Cover fabric type and weight in ounces: Edge of Dock Leveler: 40 [] Model NL115X-72,by DLM;Malvern,AR [] Model EOD 7220,by Kelley Co.,Inc.;Milwaukee,WI [] Model AD-72M,by GENQUIP Corp. „ [] Model AE7220,by Serco Corporation [] Model EDM72-20,by Flexon,Inc. [] Model EDML7225,by Pentalift Equipment Corporation [] Model CEOD-7215,by Poweramp] sir Wheel Chocks: [] Fruehauf.. [] Durable Mat Co. 11160-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am Aw air BLANK PAGE or .r aw Am w► .r 11160-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Aw fP B. Verify size of pit and equipment anchorage requirements with dock leveler manufacturer.Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install loading dock equipment in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Attach dock seals to pit walls at sides and back plumb and level to provide weatherseal and rodent/insect barrier. C. Install edge-of-dock levelers square and level. Anchor unit securely,flush with dock. D. Install wheel chock at each new dock door on driver's side of door. General Contractor to furnish chain (20'-0" length) with attachment by expansion anchor to foundation wall on driver's side of door for each wheel chock. Chain to be standard 1/4"plated. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: B. Coordinate size and location of cast-in-place concrete dock leveler pits, reinforcement, frames, inserts, and formwork with Contractor before start of concrete placement. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect loading dock equipment installation,attachment,and operation. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION e A 06 so 11160-3 Iw Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 5. Model TS-181-DPS,by W.B.McGuire Company,Inc.;Hudson,NY;(800)624-8473. 6. Model S-600,by Serco Corporation;Dallas,TX;(972)466-0707. 7. Model C12-WAL,by Rotary Products Inc.;Ashley,OH;(800)457-5251. 8. Model C12,by Hugger Dock Seal Company;Columbus,OH;(800)837-4847. 9. V2240-WP8,by Flexon;Leetsdale,PA;(800)365-3667. *+� 10. Model PS-100,by Pentalift Equipment Corporation;Charlotte,NC;(800)561-0090 11. Series 0101,by Superseal;Woodbridge,Ontario,CN;(800)337 3239 C. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not permitted. r 2.2 EDGE OF DOCK LEVELERS A. Components: 1. 72 inch width,minimum 20,000 pound capacity(ANSI/MH14.1-87). 2. Recessed mounting as indicated on Drawings. 3. Two standard dock bumpers with 4 inch projection. 4. Pit size determined by Manufacturer's standard width. B. Manufacturers and Models: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dock levelers of one of the following: 1. Model NL 115X-72 Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler,by DLM;Malvern,AR;(800)643-5423. 2. Model EOD 7220 Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler, by Kelley Co., Inc.; Milwaukee, WI; (800) 558- , 6960. 3. Model AD-72M Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler,by GENQUIP Corp.(501)663-3039 4. Model AE7220 Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler by Serco Corporation(972)466-0707 5. Model EDM72-20 Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler,by Flexon,Inc.;Leetsdale,PA(800)365-3667 AW 6. Model EDML7225 Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler,by Pentalift Equipment Corporation;Charlotte,NC; (800)561-0090 7. Model CEOD-7215 Mechanical Edge of Dock Leveler,by Poweramp;Germantown,WI;(4140 255-1510 -4w C. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.3 WHEEL CHOCKS MW A. Components: 1. Laminated rubber pads assembled on 3/4 inch bolts and compressed between 1/4 inch plates. Unit will have eye bolt or loop for attachment of chain. 2. Meets OSHA and DOT requirements. 3. Furnish and install 20 foot long approved chain and attach to concrete wall at dock with expansion anchors. Locate on driver's side of truck trailer. ' B. Manufacturers and Models: Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide wheel chocks of one of the following: am 1. Fruehauf.,(800)438-9776. 2. Durable Mat Co.,(419)668-8138. C. Section 01600-Product Requirements;Product options and substitutions. Substitutions;Not Permitted. oft PART 3 EXECUTION am 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building elements required for product installation ow are ready to received work. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. am 11160-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 „A so UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 11160-LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dock seals. 2. Edge of dock levelers. * 3. Wheel chocks. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete pit for dock levelers. 2. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Steel angle frame around dock leveler pit. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Natrional Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI MH14.1 -Industrial Loading Dockboards(Ramps). �w 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING w A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store and protect products. B. Store and handle dock seals in a manner to avoid damage to fabrick. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for minimum and maximum temperature requirements for storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DOCK SEALS A. Components: 1. Side Pads: 12 inch width,length to be clear opening height,with maximum 12 inch projection. Profile of ► pad shall be square. 2. Head Pad: 12 inch height, length to be 2 feet longer than clear opening width, with maximum 12 inch projection. 3. Clear Opening Size: As indicated on Drawings. 4. All pads to have breather slots. 5. Core: High-density urethane foam core with supporting frame. 6. Cover Fabric: Vinyl coated nylon,22 oz/sq yd,black. 7. Wear Pleats: Full height of side pads,40 oz/sq yd vinyl coated nylon, with 8 inch exposure,black. Extra 40 ounce wearface on face of head pad,black. 8. Guide Stripes: Manufacturer's standard width stripe full height of side pads,yellow. 9. Supporting Frame: 2" Kiln-dried, preservative treated wood, fully encased with cover fabric, galvanized steel hardware. 10. Side pads shall taper 1" per percent (%) of grade of driveway approach, as necessary, from maximum projection. Head pad shall match depth of side pads. 11. Minimum Two Year Warranty Period B. Manufacturers and Models: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide dock seals of one of the following: I. Model 160-Black-GP8,by Chalfant Sewing Fabricators,Inc.;Cleveland,OH;(800)365-0389. 2. Series 1000,by Fairborn USA Inc.;Upper Sandusky,OH;(800)262-1188. 3. Model TP-901-NPV,by Frommelt Industries;Dubuque,IA;(501)663-3039. 4. Model DSS-102-WP8-WF(on head pad),by Kelley Company,Inc.;Milwaukee,WI;(800)558-6960. 11160-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 rw .r. O, .. "0 .. BLANK PAGE u► sw 10810-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .w 2. Manufacturer: Koala Corporation. a. Contact: Customer Service at(800)666-0363,Fax(303)574-9000. b. Changing Table: Horizontal Design. C. Diaper Dispenser: Koala Dispenser. d. Pad Dispenser: Integral to table. e. Waste Receptor: Koala 22 Gallon Waste Receptacle. 3. Substitutions: None accepted. PO G. Grab Bars: 18 gage stainless steel; 1-1/4 inch diameter, (1-1/2 inch diameter where required by Local Code)tex- tured grip surface;concealed mounting. Provide 42 inch grab bars on rear wall and 42 inch grab bars on side wall. Refer to Drawings for location and quantity. 1. Model No.UG20X,by A.J.Washroom. 2. Model No.3100 P,by American Specialties. 3. Model No.B5507.99,by Bobrick. 4. Model No. 832-2,by Bradley. 5. Model No. 125C-XT,by Gamco. 6. Model No.F-9603,by McKinney/Parker. 7. Model No.Q/CS-1/P,by Tubular Specialties. H. Mirrors: No. 1 quality 1/4 inch float glass electrolytically copper plated; coating guaranteed for ten years. Mi- tered stainless steel frame;concealed theft resistant wall hanger; 18 x 24 inch size,except 18 x 36 at handicap ac- cessible lavatory. 1. Model No.U711,by A.J.Washroom. 2. Model No.0620,by American Specialties. 3. Model No.B-165,by Bobrick. 4. Model No.781,by Bradley. 5. Model No.C-18,by Gamco. 6. Model No. 190,by McKinney/Parker. 7. Model No.M-21,by Tubular Specialties. END OF SECTION or an lw 10810-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2.3 FABRICATION r. A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components. B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock,free of joints. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. C. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building finishes. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices. D. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. .we E. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building-in. Use templates and rough-in measurements as required. B. Ensure that blocking is appropriately installed and ready to receive accessories. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install fixtures, accessories, and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as shown on Drawings. Use tamper-proof fasteners. B. Install true,plumb,and level,securely and rigidly anchored to wall framing. '' 3.3 SCHEDULE OF ACCESSORIES MW A. Toilet Paper Holder: Furnished by Wal-Mart for installation by Contractor. B. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: (One per each Women's water closet.) Furnished by Wal-Mart for installation by Contractor. C. Soap Dispensers: Furnished by Wal-Mart for installation by Contractor. D. Paper Towel Dispensers: Furnished and installed by Wal-Mart. E. Electric Hand Dryers: 1. Model No.DA1 by World Dryer Corporation. a. Color: Snow White PWHC. 2. Model No.76-W by Excel Dryer Corporation. a. Color: White. ..s 3. Substitutions: None accepted. F. Diaper Changing Table: Provide diaper changing tables as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Manufacturer: Four-D Incorporated. a. Contact: Mary Reilland at(800)524-7057 or(612)454-6095. b. Changing Table: Model#605W,Tidytots. C. Diaper Dispenser: Model#405W,Tidytots. ..� d. Pad Dispenser: Model#805W,Tidytots. e. Waste Receptor: Model#905W,Tidytots. MW 10810-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 10810-TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Toilet accessories and attachment hardware. B. Work Installed,But Not Furnished Under This Section: Under provisions of Section 01600,Wal-Mart will furnish toilet accessories for installation by Contractor as follows: 1. Toilet Paper Holders. 2. Sanitary Napkin Disposals. 3. Soap Dispensers. C. Products Furnished and Installed Under Separate Contract(NIC): Under provisions of Section 01600, Wal-Mart will furnish and install Paper Towel Dispensers. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. ■w 2. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Blocking for attachment of accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES �w A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): ANSI Al 17.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �w A. Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide toilet accessories as manufactured by one of the follow- ing,except as otherwise specified: 1. A.J.Washroom Accessories;New Windsor,NY;(914)562-3332. 2. American Specialties Co.,Inc.;Deer Park,NY;(914)476-9000. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment,Inc.;Jackson,TN;(901)424-7000. 4. Bradley Corporation;Milwaulkee,WI;(414)354-0100. 5. Gamco;Durant,OK;(800)451-5766. 6. McKinney/Parker;Scranton,PA;(717)346-7551. 7. Tubular Specialties Mfg.,Inc.;Los Angeles,CA;(800)421-2961. B. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.2 MATERIALS "W A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 302/304. B. Mounting Devices: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or of same material as accessory unit. C. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement. D. Finishes: 1. Chrome/Nickel Plating: Polished finish. 2. Stainless Steel: No.4 satin finish,unless specified otherwise. 3. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pretreat and clean,spray apply one coat primer and bake. 10810-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,M .. so No am M. ..M BLANK PAGE Iwo AM A* oft ,o► Mw OM Aw 10260-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 aw UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 10260-WALL AND CORNER GUARDS 0 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Corner Guards. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CORNER GUARDS A. Clear Acrylic Corner Guards, 16 gage,2-1/2 inches x 2-1/2 inches x 48 inches, 1/8 inch radius,by Pawling Corpo- ration(914)855-1005. ` B. Accessories: As recommended by corner guard manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION w, 3.1 INSTALLATION vl ow A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,square and plumb,secured rigidly in position. B. Position corner guard 4 inches above finished floor. Coordinate installation of resilient base and painting with corner guard installation. �s 3.2 SCHEDULE �w A. Corner Guards: Locate corner guards in sales areas accessible by public, including following areas,where damage may occur to corners of gypsum board,plastic laminate,wallcovering,or other wall finishes. 1. Vision Center. 2. Courtesy Desk area. 3. Layaway. END OF SECTION d ow 10260-1 ow Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 AM .. 'M Ow .. ... BLANK PAGE Mk .r® .n. .. 10170-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 r E. Conceal floor fastenings with pilaster shoes. F. Equip each door with hinges, one slide-type door latch, and one coat hook and bumper. Align hardware to uni- form clearance at vertical edges of doors,not exceeding 1/4 inch. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. In Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched. B. Out Swinging Doors: Adjust hinges to gently return doors to closed position. END OF SECTION �wr 10170-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Urinal Screens: Wall hung type,24"x 42"to match toilet compartments. .w C. Pilaster Shoes:4 inches high; one-piece stainless steel floor shoe. D. Headraill: Extruded brite anodized type 6463T5 aluminum channel;anti-grip design. "• E. Attachments: 1. Screws,and Bolts: Stainless steel;tamper proof type. 2. Wall Mounting Brackets: Continuous, full height, double ear extruded brite anodized type 6463T5 aluminum. 3. Side Panel to Pilaster Bracket: Continuous, full height, U-channel extruded brite anodized type 6463T5 aluminum. F. Hardware: Integral pivot hinges, gravity type, adjustable for door close positioning; nylon bearings; clear ano- dized aluminum slide-type door latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper; cast alloy chrome plated coat hook and bumper. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Solid Plastic: 1/4 inch radius beveled edges. B. Hardware and Attachments: Pre-drilled by manufacturer; provide for protection of dissimilar metals. 2.4 FINISHES A. Compartments and Screens: 1. Dark Blue#97 or S-3-16 Blue,by Capitol Partitions. 2. Royal Blue#S203,by Comtec Industries. 3. Royal Blue by Rockville. ..• 4. Navy Blue#290,by Santana. 5. Marine Blue 914,by Columbia Partitions 6. Navy Blue 40,By General Partitions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION •■ A. Take site dimensions. Verify correct spacing of plumbing fixtures. B. Verify correct location of built-in framing,anchorage,and bracing. 3.2 INSTALLATION .r► A. Install partitions secure,rigid,plumb,level,and square in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Provide for adjustment due to minor floor variations. 2. Install adjacent components for consistency of line and plane. B. Maintain 1/2 inch space between wall and panels,and between wall and pilasters. Attach continuous panel brack- ets securely to walls using anchor devices. C. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve, tamperproof bolts, and nuts. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines. D. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with continuous bracket in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to suit supporting wall construction. ws 10170-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,.� w UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 10170-PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compartments,floor mounted,head rail braced. 2. Solid plastic urinal screens,wall mounted. 3. Attachment hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications. 2. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Framing and plates within walls. 3. Section 10810 - Toilet Accessories: Coordinate compartment installation with subsequent accessory installation. PW 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A117.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible To and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Resource Management: 1. Recycled Content: Solid plastic compartments and screens manufactured with recycled plastic will be permitted. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide solid polyethylene or phenolic toilet compartments and screens,as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Poly-Stone,by Capitol Partitions,Inc. Contact: Mike Gill,(410)740-8870. 2. Designer Series D400,by Comtec Industries. Contact: Ed Smichowski,(717)348-0997. 3. Poly-Granite HD,by Santana Products,Inc. Contact: Joyce Swan,(901)645-9056. 4. PolyRock,by Rockville Partitions,Inc. Contact:Karl R.Henry,(301)424-12905. 5. Columbia Super HD-12 Phenolic Partitions,by Partition Systems,Inc.,Contact:Ed Bass,(803)765-9980. 6. Series 40 HDP,by General Partitions Mfg.Corp.,Contact:Mike Zehner,(814)833-1154. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Solid Plastic Compartments and Screens: High density polyethylene(HDPE)or Phenolic, water resistant; graffiti resistant;non-absorbent;with color and material homogenous throughout. 1. High density polyethylene: a. Panels: 1 inch thickness. b. Doors: 1 inch thickness. C. Pilasters: 1 inch thickness. 2. Phenolic: a. Panels: 1/2 inch thickness. b. Doors: 1/2 inch thickness. C. Pilasters: 1/2 inch thickness. 10170-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. no am am am BLANK PAGE ... as .% Am Ow am Now 09981-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ••► C. Manufacturer's Representative Inspection: At completion of application, obtain Manufacturer's Representative (must be same individual present at pre-construction conference) inspection of application and color. Compare application with sample panel. Provide Manufacturer's Representative Report of deficiencies to Contractor and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. go 3.5 COLOR SCHEDULE A. P 1 -Light Grey: 1. "Wal-Mart Dover Grey"by Sonneborn Building Products. 2. "New Light Grey" (72116)by Modac Products Company. 3. "Rainguard Light Grey"by Rainguard Products Company. B. P2-Dark Grey: 1. "Drum Hill Grey"(Q15-19T),by Sonneborn Building Products. 2. "Drum Hill Grey" (805040 for cold weather)(805042 for normal weather),by Modac Products Company. 3. "Dark Grey" (RG 4626),by Rainguard Products Company. C. Accent Stripe Coating System: 1. Provide the following as Accent Stripe colors: a. P3 -Blue:VALSPAR/House Beautiful#26333 b. P4-Red:VALSPAR/House Beautiful#26334. END OF SECTION ww 09981-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.3 APPLICATION ma A. General: 1. Begin system application at rear of building and work toward front. Begin system application at top of wall and work down. Begin application of system in the presence of Manufacturer's Technical Representative. 2. Sealer or filler: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Decorative Acrylic Coating: a. Apply material at rate recommended by manufacturer. b. Apply material by brush,roller,plaster type sprayer,or low pressure sprayer. C. Back roll brushed or sprayed material;cross roll roller-applied material. d. Finish material with brush and roller strokes in one direction. 4. Accent Color Stripes: a. Apply at a spread rate not to exceed 400 square feet per gallon over properly prepared and cured substrate per coating. b. Apply two coats at recommended spread rate via brush,roller,or HVLP spray then back-roll. B. Application: 1. Acrylic Block Filler: a. Apply only to dry,clean surfaces. b. Apply using brush, roller, or spray. For spray application,use airless equipment; backroll material into voids of substrate. Use manufacturer's recommended spray nozzle tip size as follows: 1) Sonneborn: 0.027 to 0.033. 2) Modac: 0.039. 3) Rainguard: 0.027 to 0.033. C. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate of 35 to 100 square feet per gallon. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for application rate appropriate for profile, texture, and porosity of substrate. 2. Decorative Acrylic Coating: a. Allow block filler to dry 24 to 48 hours before proceeding with acrylic coating. b. Apply using roller or spray. For spray application, use airless equipment; backroll material into voids of substrate. Use manufacturer's recommended spray nozzle tip size as follows: 1) Sonneborn: 0.027 to 0.032. 2) Modac: 0.039. 3) Rainguard: 0.027 to 0.035. C. Apply at manufacturer's recommended rate of 60 to 90 square feet per gallon. Comply with manufacturer's published instructions for application rate appropriate for profile, texture, and porosity of substrate. 3. Accent Colored Acrylic Coating: a. Accent color stripes: 1) Allow previous coating 24 to 48 hours to dry before applying addition coatings. 2) Do not thin. Apply two coats of coating in accordance with label directions allowing a minimum of 24 hours between coats. 3) Apply at a spread rate not to exceed 400 square feet per gallon on smooth substrate; 250 square feet on textured surfaces. C. Tolerances: Provide pinhole free finish coat. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AM A. Completely cover concrete masonry surfaces with specified coating system in colors as scheduled. B. Maintain schedule of application of system in field office for Owner's review. w Am 09981-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .m 40 C. Accent Stripe Coating System: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide by the following manufacturer: 1. VALSPAR/House Beautiful(800)734-4242 for product and ordering information. ON D. Substitutions:Not Permitted 2.2 COATINGS A. Normal Weather(Above 40°F)Coatings: 1. Acrylic Block Filler: a. Block Filler#749,by Sonneborn. b. Mo-Fil AQ,by Modac. C. Tec-Seal II,by Raingurad. 2. Decorative Acrylic Coating: a. Hydrocide Colorflex,Sonnebom. b. Motite Smooth,by Modac. C. Tec-Top,by Rainguard. 3. Accent Color Stripes: a. VALSPAR/House Beautiful Hi-Performance 100%Acrylic Accent Paint. 4. Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule at end of this Section. Color locations as indicated on Drawings. go B. Cold Weather(40°F to 20°F)Coatings: 1. Acrylic Block Filler: a. Mo-Fil,by Modac. 2. Decorative Acrylic Coating: a. Modac F,by Modac. 3. Colors: As indicated in Color Schedule at end of this Section. Color locations as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 MIXES A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Use manufacturer's approved mechanical mixer. Do not use frozen, caked, or lumped materials. Clean mechanical mixers and containers after each mixing; keep batch free of material and sealers from previous mixes. PART 3 EXECUTION �w 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where special coating is applied. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of application means acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Cure concrete/mortar 28 to 30 days before beginning special coating application.. B. Surfaces to receive system shall be free of defects such as honeycombs,form marks,tie holes,concrete droppings, laitance, dirt, dust, grease, form release treatments, efflorescence, curing compounds,paint and any other foreign material. C. Fill holes in excess of 3/8 inch. 09981-3 00 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 AM E. Post-Installation: 1. Upon completion, Manufacturer's representative will provide field service including site visit and observation of completed coating system installation. a. Manufacturer's representative/distributor shall be capable of providing field service at site as required. oft 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: " 1. Do not apply on frozen or frost-filled surfaces. 2. Normal Weather Coatings: Do not apply if temperature is below 40 degrees F or expected to fall below 40 degrees F within 24 hours. 3. Cold Weather Coatings: Do not apply if temperature is below 20 degrees F or expected to fall below 20 degrees F within 24 hours. 4. Protect special coating material from freezing. 5. Protect surfaces from rapid drying in windy,hot,and dry conditions. 6. Protect from moisture for 24 hours after application. 7. Do not apply material during rapid and extreme changes in temperature. 8. Apply moisture to surface prior to and during masonry weatherproofing application when the following conditions exist: a. Wind-caused rapid drying of surface. b. Excessive surface temperature. C. Excessive air temperature. ma d. Direct sun. e. Low humidity. 1.5 WARRANTY A. Field Coating System: Provide 5 year material and labor warranty to cover: 1. Waterproofing above grade. 2. Bonding. 3. Weathering. fa B. Accent Stripe Coating System:Provide 3 year material and labor warranty to cover: 1. Waterproofing above grade. 2. Bonding. 3. Weathering. 4. Fade Resistance. C. Obtain Manufacturer's"Intent to Warrant"issued to Contractor and Wal-Mart before beginning application. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Field Coating System of one of the following manufacturers: ... 1. Sonnebom Building Products,(800)433-9517. 2. Modac Products Company,(800)626-6322. 3. Rainguard Products Company,(800)272-4647 or(888)765-7070. AW B. Cold Weather (40°F to 20°F) Coating System: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide Field Coating System by the following manufacturer: 1. Modac Products Company,(800)626-6322.] 09981-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 09981 -ELASTOMERIC COATINGS FOR MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Acrylic masonry weatherproofing system. ' B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units: Exterior masonry walls to receive weatherproofing system as indicated on Drawings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM D 968-Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Falling Abrasive Tester. 2. ASTM D 822 - Operating Light and Water Exposure Apparatus (Carbon Arc Type) for Testing Paint, Varnish,Lacquer,and Related Products. 3. ASTM G 26 - Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Carbon Arc Type) With and With Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Properly trained and approved by the weatherproofing system manufacturer_and authorized to offer specified warranty. B. Letter of Certification: Submit installer letter of certification, signed by Technical Representative of system manufacturer. C. Field Sample: 1. Apply masonry weatherproofing system to sample panel at location determined by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. ow 2. Provide specified colors,texture,and workmanship. 3. Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager inspection and approval of sample panel. 4. Maintain approved sample panel during construction as a standard for judging completed Work. Do not alter,move,or destroy panel until Work is completed. D. Pre-installation Conference: 1. Convene a pre-installation conference at the site,one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. 2. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager two weeks prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. 3. Attendance: w a. Contractor. b. Coating subcontractor. C. Owner's Representative. d. Coating manufacturer's representative/distributor. o"' 4. Agenda: a. Substrate condition. b. Sequence and method of application of coating system. ww 5. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. 09981-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3. Paint exposed overhead structure including joists, girders, bridging, miscellaneous metal fabrications, and metal deck, in all areas accessible to the public,Color P7,Flat. 4. General Merchandise Areas(Paint the following items colors indicated in schedule below): a. Sales Areas and other areas not specifically indicated: 1) Gypsum Board Walls(White): P7,Eggshell. .. 2) Concrete Masonry Unit Walls(White):P7,Eggshell. 3) Columns(White):P7,Eggshell. 4) Wood Trim(Match Adjacent Wall Color): Semi-Gloss. 5) Gypsum Board Ceilings(White): P7, Semi-Gloss. b. Pharmacy: 1) Exterior Gypsum Board Walls(White): P7,Eggshell(Side Walls). 2) Exterior Gypsum Board Walls(White): P7,Semi-Gloss(Front Wall including Bulkhead). 3) Interior Gypsum Board Walls(White): P7,Semi-Gloss. C. Men and Women Toilets: 1) Gypsum Board Ceilings(White): P7,Semi-Gloss. d. Vision Center: ~" 1) Gypsum Board Walls(Grey): P6,Eggshell. 2) Concrete Masonry Unit Walls(Grey):P6,Eggshell. 3) Columns(Grey): P6,Eggshell. « e. Ductwork: 1) HVAC ductwork exposed to view by general public(White): P7 Eggshell enamel. 5. Corridors, Offices, Storage, and other areas indicated to be painted but generally not accessible to the public: a. Gypsum Board Walls(Grey): P6,Eggshell. b. Concrete Masonry Unit Walls(Grey):P6,Eggshell. C. Columns(Grey):P6,Eggshell. Aft d. Wood Trim(Match Adjacent Wall Color): Semi-Gloss 6. Garden Center(Paint the following items colors indicated in schedule below): a. Concrete Masonry Unit Walls(White):P7,Eggshell. .w b. Gypsum Board Walls(White):P7,Eggshell. END OF SECTION low .. 09900-18 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,.W K. Exposed Overhead Structure-Ferrous Metals: Flat,Alkyd Resin. 0^ 1. 1 st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Sweep-Up Alkyd Flat,272; MDF 1.9 mils. b. ICI Dulux:Devoe Coatings 1380 Alkyd Flat Dryfall;MDF 2.0 mils. 00 C. Pittsburgh: Super Tech Dry Fog Enamel Flat, Series 6-150; MDF 1.3 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Dryfall Flat,E34100;MDF 2.5 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Dryfall Flat Brilliant White,B48W60; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Hi-Hide Alkyd Dryfall,Z5923; MDF 2.0 mils. g. Frazee: Dry Fall Flat,500P 109; MDF 2.0 mils. h. DiamondNogel: HiHide Low Odor Dryfall,LB-1604; MDF 2.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1711 Kel-Guard White Rust-Inhibitive Primer; MDF 1.3 mils. 0 j. MAB: Dry Fall Flat,013-191; MDF 3.0 mils. k. Rodda: PMC-300 Industrial Alkyd Flat; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint: #DF-001 Dry Fall Flat; MDF 1.9 mils. �s M. Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd Dry Fog Flat Finish,93-830,White,MDF 3.8 mils 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Sweep-Up Alkyd Flat,272; MDF 1.9 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 1380 Alkyd Flat Dryfall;MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Super Tech Dry Fog Enamel Flat,Series 6-150; MDF 1.3 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Alkyd Dryfall Flat,E34100;MDF 2.5 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Dryfall Flat Brilliant White,B48W60; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Hi-Hide Alkyd Dryfall,Z5923; MDF 2.0 mils. g. Frazee: Dry Fall Flat,500P 109; MDF 2.0 mils. h. DiamondNogel: HiHide Low Odor Dryfall,LB i. MDF 2.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 380 Mill White Eggshell Maintenance Finish; MDF 2.2 mils. !+ j. MAB: Dry Fall Flat,013-191; MDF 3.0 mils. k. Rodda: PMC-300 Industrial Alkyd Flat; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#DF-001 Dry Fall Flat; MDF 1.9 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad Alkyd Dry Fog Flat Finish,93-830,White,MDF 3.8 mils. 3.11 PAINT COLOR SCHEDULE A. Paint Colors: 1. P1 -Light Grey:Refer to Section 09981. 2. P2-Dark Grey:Refer to Section 09981. w� 3. P3 - Blue: Refer to Section 09981 for color at masonry. Match Sherwin-Williams #SW 1504 "Nobility Blue"at all other areas. 4. P4 - Red: Refer to Section 09981 for color at masonry. Match Sherwin-Williams #SW 1602 "Theater Red"at all other areas.. 5. P5-Yellow:OSHA Standard"Safety Yellow". 6. P6-Grey:Match Pittsburgh Paints#2753 "Silver Lining". 7. P7-White:Match Pittsburgh Paints#2537'Blossom White". 8. PI I -Black: Match Sherwin Williams#SW 1238"Raven". B. Exterior Paint Color and Sheen Schedule: 1. Refer to Exterior Elevations on Drawings for paint color locations and substrate materials. +!!� 2. Paint metal doors and frames color to match color of wall surface adjacent to door. 3. Typical Pipe Bollards(Yellow):P5,Gloss. 4. Roof Hatch(Light Grey):P 1,Gloss. 5. Other Items:As indicated on Drawings and Exterior Painting and Finishing Schedule part of this Section. C. Interior Paint Color and Sheen Schedule: 1. Refer to Room Finish Schedule on Drawings for paint locations and substrate materials. 2. Paint metal doors and frames semi-gloss; color to match color of wall surface adjacent to door on room side. Where adjacent wall surface is unfinished,paint metal doors and frames P6(Grey). 09900-17 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 2.0 mils. g. Frazee: Pro Latex Gloss Enamel,041; MDF 2.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Architectural High Gloss Latex,022 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. .® k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Ultra Deluxe interior Acrylic Latex High-Gloss Enamel,25-series, MDF 1.5 mils. .w J. Concrete Floor Markings and Graphics: Eggshell,Urethane Alkyd Resin Modified Vinyl Acrylic Latex. 1. 1 st Coat: Reduce in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Benjamin Moore: Moore's Latex Floor and Patio Enamel, 122; MDF 0.8 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 3018 Ultra-Hide Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Floor Enamel;MDF 1.8 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Urethane-Latex Floor and Deck Enamel,Series 3-410; MDF 1.5 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Withstand Latex Floor Enamel-thinned,Z5100 series; 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Latex Floor Enamel,A24 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Vin-L-Stripe Acrylic Epoxy,W801; MDF 1.2 mils. g. Frazee: UGL Concrete Floor Paint; MDF 1.2 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Satin Acrylic Enamel,MS Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1350 Acry-Tred Acrylic Floor and Patio Paint; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Patio and Deck Enamel,077 Line; MDF 1.7 mils. k. Rodda: Tuff Deck Acrylic Floor Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#7930 Latex Floor Coating; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Bradley 100 percent Acrylic Latex Floor and Patio Paint, MDF 1.5 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: Reduce in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Benjamin Moore: Moore's Latex Floor and Patio Enamel, 122; 0.8 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 3018 Ultra-Hide Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Floor Enamel;MDF 1.8 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Urethane-Latex Floor and Deck Enamel,Series 3-410; MDF 1.5 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Withstand Latex Floor Enamel-thinned,Z5100 series; 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Latex Floor Enamel,A24 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Vin-L-Stripe Acrylic Epoxy,W801; MDF 1.2 mils. g. Frazee: UGL Concrete Floor Paint; MDF 1.2 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Satin Acrylic Enamel,MS Series; 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1350 Acry-Tred Acrylic Floor and Patio Paint; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Patio and Deck Enamel,077 Line; MDF 1.7 mils. k. Rodda: Tuff Deck Acrylic Floor Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#7930 Latex Floor Coating; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Bradley 100 percent Acrylic Latex Floor and Patio Paint, MDF 1.5 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: Reduce in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Benjamin Moore: Moore's Latex Floor and Patio Enamel, 122; 0.8 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 3018 Ultra-Hide Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Floor Enamel;MDF 1.8 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Urethane-Latex Floor and Deck Enamel,Series 3-410; MDF 1.5 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Withstand Latex Floor Enamel-thinned,Z5100 series; 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Latex Floor Enamel,A24 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Vin-L-Stripe Acrylic Epoxy,W801; MDF 1.2 mils. g. Frazee: UGL Concrete Floor Paint; MDF 1.2 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Satin Acrylic Enamel,MS Series; 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1350 Acry-Tred Acrylic Floor and Patio Paint; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Patio and Deck Enamel,077 Line; MDF 1.7 mils. k. Rodda: Tuff Deck Acrylic Floor Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#7930 Latex Floor Coating; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Not recommended. Xft 09900-16 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,410 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2310 Accu-Tone SG Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,24-series, MDF 1.3 mils. 00 3. 3rd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Semi-gloss Enamel,276; MDF 1.4 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1416 Ultra-Hide Latex Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel; 1.5 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel,5-510 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,Z9810 series; MDF 1.2 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Deco-Glo Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,W450; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: Acrysheen Acrylic Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel 025; MDF 1.5 mils. h. DiamondNogel: Hide Plus Semi-Gloss,DS-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,410 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2310 Accu-Tone SG Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,24-series, MDF 1.3 mils. I. Concrete Unit Masonry: Gloss,Water Base,Acrylic or Water Alkyd. 1. 1st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Interior and Exterior Block Filler, 173. b. ICI Dulux:Devoe Coatings 4000 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Latex Masonry Block Filler,5-7. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Latex Block Filler,Z98. ► e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar Interior/Exterior Block Filler,B25W25. f. Dunn-Edwards: Bloc-Fil,W305. g. Frazee: Acrylic Block Filler,262. h. DiamondNogel: Acrylic Block Filler,BF-1504. i. Kelley-Moore: 521 Acrylic Block Filler(Smooth Type). j. MAB: Block Kote#2000,064-140. k. Rodda: Smooth Acrylic Masonry Block Filler#19100. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#5890 Accu-Pro Block Filler. M. Duron: Craft Kote Latex Block Filler,White,08-125. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4308 Devflex Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel; 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Water Base Gloss Enamel,5 1-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel,B21W201; MDF 2.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 2.0 mils. g. Frazee: Pro Latex Gloss Enamel,041; MDF 2.0 mils. h. DiamondNogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Architectural High Gloss Latex,022 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Ultra Deluxe interior Acrylic Latex High-Gloss Enamel,25-series, MDF 1.5 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings Devflex 4218 Direct-To-Metal Gloss Interior/Exterior Waterborne Enamel;MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Water Base Gloss Enamel,51-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 200 Interior Latex Gloss Enamel,B21W201; MDF 2.0 mils. 09900-15 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Eggshell Enamel,274; MDF 1.3 mils. ' b. ICI Dulux: 1432 Ultra-Hide Latex Eggshell Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Eggshell Latex Enamel,5-411 Series; MDF 1.8 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Eggshell,Z9300 series; MDF 1.5 mils. .. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Eggshell Enamel,B20 Series; MDF 1.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Suprema Low Gloss Enamel,W411; MDF 1.25 mils. g. Frazee: Wally-Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Enamel, 123; MDF 1.75 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Eggshell,DE-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1640 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Low Lustre Latex,028 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Laysn Eggshell Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. �* 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2800 Accu-Tone Eggshell Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior latex Low sheen Enamel,23-series, MDF 1.3 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: .,r a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Eggshell Enamel,274; MDF 1.3 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1432 Ultra-Hide Latex Eggshell Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Eggshell Latex Enamel, 5-411 Series; MDF 1.8 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Eggshell,Z9300 series; MDF 1.5 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Eggshell Enamel,B20 Series; MDF 1.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Suprema Low Gloss Enamel,W411; MDF 1.25 mils. g. Frazee: Wally-Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell Enamel, 123; MDF 1.75 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Eggshell,DE-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1640 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Low Lustre Latex,028 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Laysn Eggshell Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. ,. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2800 Accu-Tone Eggshell Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior latex Low sheen Enamel,23-series, MDF 1.3 mils. H. Concrete Unit Masonry: Semi-Gloss,Water Base,Vinyl Acrylic Latex/Polyvinyl Acetate. 1. 1 st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Interior and Exterior Block Filler, 173. b. ICI Dulux:Devoe Coatings 4000 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Latex Masonry Block Filler,5-7. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Latex Block Filler,Z98. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar Interior/Exterior Block Filler,B25W25. f. Dunn-Edwards: Bloc-Fil,W305. g. Frazee: Acrylic Block Filler,262. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acrylic Block Filler,BF-1504. i. Kelley-Moore: 521 Acrylic Block Filler(Smooth Type). j. MAB: Block Kote#2000,064-140. k. Rodda: Smooth Acrylic Masonry Block Filler#19100. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#5890 Accu-Pro Block Filler M. Duron: Craft Kote Latex Block Filler,White,08-125. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Semi-gloss Enamel, 276; MDF 1.4 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1416 Ultra-Hide Latex Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.5 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel,5-510 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,Z9810 series; MDF 1.2 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Deco-Glo Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,W450; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: Acrysheen Acrylic Latex SG Enamel 025; MDF 1.5 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Semi-Gloss,DS-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.2 mils. 09900-14 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,, h. Diamond/Vogel: Latex Enamel Undercoat,DU-1508; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 975 Latex Enamel Undercoat; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer,037-100; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Lasyn Enamel Undercoat#390; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#0880 Latex Wall Primer; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Interior Acrylic Enamel Undercoater,White,04-123, MDF 1.6 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,274; MDF 1.3 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1436 Ultra-Wall Latex Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel,5-510 Series; MDF 1.6 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,Z9810 series; MDF 1.2 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31 Series; MDF 1.0 mils. f Dunn-Edwards: Deco-Glo Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,W 450; MDF 1.5. g. Frazee: Acrysheen Vinyl-Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,025; MDF 1.5 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Semi-Gloss,DS-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,410 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. ' 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2310 Accu-Tone SG Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel,24-series, MDF 1.3 mils. F. Wood-Transparent Finish: Clear Sealer only. 1. 1 st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moore's Interior Wood Finishes Quick Dry Sanding Sealer,413; MDF minimal. b. ICI Dulux: 1916 Woodpride Interior Quick Dry Sanding Sealer-Varnish;MDF varies. C. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Quick-Drying Interior Sanding Wood Sealer/Finish, 6-10 Clear; MDF 0.9 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Sanding Sealer,H40; MDF 0.8 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar Varnish Sanding Sealer,B26V3; MDF Varies. f Dunn-Edwards: Synseal,V 106; MDF 1.0 mils g. Frazee: Creative Sanding Sealer. h. Diamond/Vogel: Marshall Sanding Sealer,CW-0403; MDF 1.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 2164 E Z Sand Q.D. Sealer; MDF 1.0 mils. j. MAB: Minit Dri Sanding Sealer,037-005; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Quick Dry Sanding Sealer#482; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#47-000 VT Sanding Sealer; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Semi-Gloss Enamel,24-series, MDF 1.3 mils. G. Concrete Unit Masonry: Eggshell,Water Base,Acrylic Vinyl Acrylic. 1. 1st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Interior and Exterior Block Filler, 173. b. ICI Dulux:Devoe Coatings 4000 Bloxfil Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Latex Masonry Block Filler,5-7. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Latex Block Filler,Z98. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar Interior/Exterior Block Filler,B25W25. f. Dunn-Edwards: Bloc-Fill,W305. g. Frazee: Acrylic Block Filler,262. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acrylic Block Filler,BF-1504. i. Kelley-Moore: 521 Acrylic Block Filler(Smooth Type). j. MAB: Block Kote#2000,064-140. k. Rodda: Smooth Acrylic Masonry Block Filler#19100. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#5890 Accu-Pro Block Filler M. Duron: Craft Kote Latex Block Filler,White,08-125. 09900-13 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2. 2nd Coat: XW a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Eggshell Enamel,274; MDF 1.3 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1432 Ultra-Hide Latex Eggshell Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Eggshell Latex Enamel, 5-411 Series; MDF 1.6 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Eggshell,Z9300 series; MDF 1.5 mils. "" e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Eggshell Enamel,B20 Series; MDF 1.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Suprema Low-Gloss Enamel,W411; MDF 1.25 mils. g. Frazee: Wally-Vinyl Acrylic Eggshell, 123; MDF 1.75 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Eggshell,DE-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1640 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Latex Satin Eggshell,405 Line;MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Lasyn Eggshell Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2800 Accu-Tone Eggshell Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Latex Low Sheen Enamel,23-series, MDF 1.2 mils. D. Gypsum Board: Semi-Gloss,Water Base,Vinyl Acrylic Enamel. I. I st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Vinyl Latex Primer,273; MDF 0.7 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer-Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer; MDF 1.1 AM mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Latex Primer-Sealer,5-2; MDF 1.0 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus PVA Wall Primer,Z97; MDF 1.0 mils. Aw e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Wall Primer,B28W400; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Vinylastic Wall Primer,W 101; MDF 1.25 mils. g. Frazee: PVA Sealer,063; MDF 1.4 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: PVA Primer Sealer,DU-1504; MDF 1.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 975 Latex Enamel Undercoat; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer,037-100; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Heavy Body Scotseal#7800; MDF 1.5 mils. Ow 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#0880 Latex Wall Primer; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Craft Kote Interior Drywall Vinyl Primer Sealer,White,04-125, MDF 1.4 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,276; MDF 1.3 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1436 Ultra-Wall Latex Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel,5-510 Series; MDF 1.6 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,Z9810 series; MDF 1.2 mils. ..� e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31 Series; MDF 1.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Deco-Glo Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,W 450; MDF 1.5. g. Frazee: Acrysheen Vinyl-Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,025; MDF 1.5 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Semi-Gloss,DS-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,410 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. ,A. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2310 Accu-Tone SG Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,24-series,MDF 1.3 mils. E. Wood: Semi-Gloss,Water Base,Vinyl Acrylic Enamel. 1. I st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Vinyl Latex Primer,273; MDF 0.7 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer-Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer; MDF 1.2 •• mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Latex Primer-Sealer,5-2; MDF 1.0 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus PVA Wall Primer,Z97; MDF 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Wall Primer,B28W400; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Unikote Acrylic Undercoat,W 7078; MDF 1.5. g. Frazee: Acri-Prime Acrylic Undercoater,065; MDF 1.5 mils. ,e+ 09900-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ■* O OR f Dunn-Edwards:Corrobar Alkyd Primer, 43.5 MDF 2.0 mils. g. Frazee: Acrylic Metal Prime,561,MDF 1.7 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acrylic Maintenance Primer,MC-1501,White; MDF 3.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1725 Kel-Guard Acrylic Metal Primer; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O Lastic Hydro-Prime II,073-189; MDF 3.2 mils. k. Rodda: Metal Master Acrylic Metal Primer#4460; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#5860 All Purpose Acrylic Primer; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad Universal Acrylic Metal Primer,33-105,White,MDF 2.3 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,276; MDF 1.1 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1416 Ultra-Hide Latex Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.5 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel,5-510; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,Z9810; MDF 1.2 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31 Series; MDF 1.2g mils. 40 f Dunn-Edwards: Deco-Glo Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,W450; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: Acrysheen Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,025; MDF 1.5 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Semi-Gloss,DS-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,410 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2310 Accu-Tone SG Acrylic Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,24-series,MDF 1.4 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,276; MDF 1.1 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1416 Ultra-Hide Latex Semi-Gloss Interior Wall&Trim Enamel;MDF 1.5 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel,5-510; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,Z9810; MDF 1.2 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,B31 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Deco-Glo Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,W450; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: Acrysheen Vinyl-Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel,025; MDF 1.5 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Hide Plus Semi-Gloss,DS-1540 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1650 Acry-Plex Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Interior Latex Semi-Gloss,410 Line; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Semi-Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#2310 Accu-Tone SG Acrylic Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Pro Kote Supreme Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel,24-series,MDF 1.4 mils. C. Gypsum Board: Eggshell,Water Base,Acrylic Vinyl Acrylic Enamel. 1. 1st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Vinyl Latex Primer,273; MDF 0.7 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 1030 Ultra-Hide PVA Interior Primer-Sealer General Purpose Wall Primer; MDF 1.1 mils. sk C. Pittsburgh: Speedcraft Interior Latex Primer-Sealer,5-2; MDF 1.0 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus PVA Wall Primer,Z97; MDF 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Pro Mar 400 Latex Wall Primer,B28W400; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Vinylastic Wall Primer,W101; MDF 1.0 mils. ' g. Frazee: PVA Sealer 063; MDF 1.4 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: PVA Primer Sealer,DU-1504; MDF 1.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 975 Latex Enamel Undercoat; MDF 1.2 mils. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Vinyl Primer,037-100; MDF 1.6 mils. k. Rodda: Heavy Body Scotseal#7800; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#0880 Latex Wall Primer; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Craft Kote Interior Drywall Vinyl Primer Sealer,White,04-125, MDF 1.4 mils. 09900-11 � March 10,2000 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts 3.10 INTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Gloss,Water Base,Water Alkyd. 1. 1 st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: IronClad Retard-X Inhibitive Latex Primer, 162,White; MDF 1.6 mils. low b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4020 DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Enamel;MDF 2.2 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal Primer,6-712 White; MDF 2.0 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer,Z 190; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish,B66W 1,White; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Van-Prime Acrylic Primer,W711; MDF 2.0 mils. g. Frazee: Acrylic Metal Prime,561; MDF 1.7 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acrylic Maintenance Primer,MC-1501,White; MDF 3.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1725 Kel-Guard Acrylic Metal Primer; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime Il,073-189; MDF 3.2 mils. k. Rodda: Metal Master Acrylic Metal Primer#4460,Off White; MDF 1.5 mils. ,® 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#5860 All Purpose Acrylic Primer; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad Universal Acrylic Metal Primer,33-105,White,MDF 2.3 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. A" b. ICI Devoe Coatings Devflex 4218 Direct-To-Metal Gloss Interior/Exterior Waterborne Enamel; MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Water Base Gloss Enamel, 5 1-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. ow d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel;Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Perma-Gloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel,540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic DTM,043 Line; MDF 3.0 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: �*+ a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings Devflex 4218 Direct-To-Metal Gloss Interior/Exterior Waterborne Enamel;MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Water Base Gloss Enamel, 5 1-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel;Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel,540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic DTM,043 Line; MDF 3.0 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils. B. Ferrous Metals: Semi-Gloss,Water Base,Vinyl Acrylic Latex and Acrylic. 1. 1 st Coat: w a. Benjamin Moore: IronClad Retard-X Inhibitive Latex Primer, 162,White; MDF 1.6 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4020 DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish; MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal Primer,6-712 White; MDF 2.0 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer,Z190; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish,B66W 1,White: MDF 3.0 mils. 09900-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel W960; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel 540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. Ow i. Kelley-Moore: 1370 Kel-Color Acrylic Enamel Accent Base; MDF 1.5 mils. j. MAB: Rust-o-Lastic Acrylic Latex,043 Line;MDF 2.8 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. Ow 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#6300 Accu-Kote 100%Acrylic Flat Latex; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils.] E. Concrete Paving Markings and Graphics: Eggshell/Satin,Modified Acrylic Latex. 0 1. 1 st Coat: Reduce in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. a. Benjamin Moore: Moore's Latex Floor and Patio Enamel, 122; MDF 0.8 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 3018 Ultra-Hide Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Floor Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Urethane-Latex Floor and Deck Enamel,Series 3-410; MDF 1.5 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Withstand Latex Floor Enamel-thinned,Z5100; MDF 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Latex Floor Enamel,A24 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Tuff-Floor Acrylic Epoxy,W810; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: UGL Concrete Floor Paint; MDF 1.2 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Satin Acrylic Enamel,MS Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1350 Acry-tred Acrylic Floor and Patio Paint; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Patio and Deck Enamel,077 Line; MDF 1.7 mils. k. Rodda: Tuff Deck Acrylic Floor Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#7930 Latex Floor Coating; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Lead Free Latex Traffic Paint,95-100(White)or 95-109(Yellow),MDF 6.5 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moore's Latex Floor and Patio Enamel, 122; MDF 0.8 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 3018 Ultra-Hide Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Floor Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Urethane-Latex Floor and Deck Enamel,Series 3-410; MDF 1.5 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Withstand Latex Floor Enamel-thinned,Z5100; MDF 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Latex Floor Enamel,A24 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Tuff-Floor Acrylic Epoxy,W810; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: UGL Concrete Floor Paint; MDF 1.2 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Satin Acrylic Enamel,MS Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1350 Acry-tred Acrylic Floor and Patio Paint; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rich-Lux Patio and Deck Enamel,077 Line; MDF 1.7 mils. k. Rodda: Tuff Deck Acrylic Floor Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#7930 Latex Floor Coating; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Lead Free Latex Traffic Paint,95-1XX and 96-IXX series,MDF 6.5 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moore's Latex Floor and Patio Enamel, 122; MDF 0.8 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 3018 Ultra-Hide Interior/Exterior 100%Acrylic Floor Enamel;MDF 1.0 mils. CIA► C. Pittsburgh: Urethane-Latex Floor and Deck Enamel,Series 3-410; MDF 1.5 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Withstand Latex Floor Enamel-thinned,Z5100; MDF 1.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Acrylic Latex Floor Enamel,A24 Series; MDF 1.2 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Tuff-Floor Acrylic Epoxy,W810; MDF 1.5 mils. ' g. Frazee: UGL Concrete Floor Paint; MDF 1.2 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Satin Acrylic Enamel,MS Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1350 Acry-tred Acrylic Floor and Patio Paint; MDF 1.6 mils. i. MAB: Rich-Lux Patio and Deck Enamel,077 Line; MDF 1.7 mils. k. Rodda: Tuff Deck Acrylic Floor Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#7930 Latex Floor Coating; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Not recommended. 09900-9 OW Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils. C. Exterior Insulation and Finish System: Flat,Water Base,Alkyd Modified Acrylic-Latex. 1. 1 st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Flat Latex House Paint, 171; MDF 1.3 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 2250 Speedcote Exterior Acrylic Flat Finish,MDF 1.3 mils. «. C. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Acrylic Latex House Paint,6-610 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Latex Flat House Paint,Z9700; MDF 1.2 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Weather Perfect Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat,B36 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Acri-Flat 100 Percent Acrylic,W704; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: Acritec Acrylic Vinyl Flat,206; MDF 1.6 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acri Kote,BF-1530 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1240 Acry-Shield Acrylic Flat Finish; MDF 1.7 mils. �. j. MAB: Fresh Kote Latex House Paint,409 Line; MDF 1.8 mils. k. Rodda: AC-911 Exterior Latex Flat House Paint; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#6300 Series Accu-Kote 100%Acrylic Flat Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Ultra Deluxe Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat,34 Series,MDF 1.5 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Moorcraft Flat Latex House Paint, 171,MDF 1.3 mils. b. ICI Dulux: 2250 Speedcote Exterior Acrylic Flat Finish,MDF 1.3 mils. *� C. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Acrylic Latex House Paint,6-610 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Pro-Hide Plus Latex Flat House Paint,Z9700; MDF 1.2 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: Weather Perfect Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat,B36 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. .. f. Dunn-Edwards: Acri-Flat 100 Percent Acrylic,W704; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: Acritec Acrylic Vinyl Flat,206; MDF 1.6 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acri Kote,BF-1530 Series; MDF 1.5 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1240 Acry-Shield Acrylic Flat Finish; MDF 1.7 mils. *� j. MAB: Fresh Kote Latex House Paint,409 Line; MDF 1.8 mils. k. Rodda: AC-911 Exterior Latex Flat House Paint; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#6300 Series Accu-Kote 100%Acrylic Flat Finish; MDF 1.5 mils. .. M. Duron: Ultra Deluxe Exterior Acrylic Latex Flat,34 Series,MDF 1.5 mils. D. Signage,and Graphics: Gloss,Water Base,Acrylic or Water Alkyd. 1. 1 st Coat: • a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4208 Devflex Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel,51-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. ..a d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 1.5 mils. w g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel,540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1370 Kel-Color Acrylic Enamel Accent Base; MDF 1.5 mils. j. MAB: Rust-o-Lastic Acrylic Latex,043 Line;MDF 2.8 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#6300 Accu-Kote 100%Acrylic Flat Latex; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4208 Devflex Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel,5 1-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. 09900-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 AM d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel,540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic DTM,043 line; MDF 3.0 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Metal: Gloss,Water Base,Acrylic or Water Alkyd. 1. 1 st Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer, 155,White; MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4020 DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish; MDF 2.2 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal Primer,6-712 White; MDF 2.0 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer,Z190; MDF 2.0 mils. NCI► e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish,B66W 1,White; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: M-P Prime Acrylic Primer,W713; MDF 2.0 mils. g. Frazee: Acrylic Metal Prime,561; MDF 1.7 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acrylic Maintenance Primer,MC-1501,White; MDF 3.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1722 Kel-Guard Galvanized Iron Primer; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime lI,073-189; MDF 2.0 mils. k. Rodda: Metal Master Acrylic Primer#4460 Off White; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#5860 All Purpose Acrylic Primer; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad Acrylic Galvanized Metal Primer,33-100,White,MDF 1.4 mils. 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings Devflex 4218 Direct-To-Metal Gloss Interior/Exterior Waterborne Enamel;MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel,51-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel,540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic DTM,043 Line; MDF 3.0 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. M. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4208 Devflex Interior/Exterior Waterborne Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Water Base Gloss Enamel,5 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. 0% f. Dunn-Edwards: Permagloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel,540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 'o j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic DTM,043 Line; MDF 3.0 mils. 09900-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1. Exposed fire protection piping, hangers and supports (if exposed structure is scheduled to be ■,w painted). m. Exposed overhead structure including joists,girders,bridging, miscellaneous metal fabrications and deck(if scheduled to be painted). n. Exposed structure columns. 4W o. Wall accent stripes,signage,and graphics. P. Floor striping,graphics,and markings. q. Metal stair stringers and handrails. SM r. Exposed wood trim. B. Do not paint the following Items: 1. Aluminum,brass,bronze,stainless steel,and chrome plated steel. """ 2. Pre-finished items, such as toilet compartments, acoustical ceiling materials, mechanical, and electrical equipment. 3. UL,FM,and other code-required labels. 4. Equipment identification,performance rating,and name plates. 5. Finish hardware. 3.9 EXTERIOR PAINTING AND FINISHING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Gloss,Water Base,Water Alkyd. 1. 1 st Coat: .., a. Benjamin Moore: IronClad Retard-X Inhibitive Latex Primer, 162,White; MDF 1.6 mils. b. ICI Dulux; Devoe Coatings 4020 DTM Flat Interior/Exterior Waterborne Primer & Finish; MDF 2.2 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Speedhide Water Base Inhibitive Metal Primer,6-712 White; MDF 2.0 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Tech-Gard Acrylic Metal Primer,Z190; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish,B66W 1,White; MDF 3.0 mils. f. Dunn-Edwards: Corrobar Alkyd Primer,43-5; MDF 2.0 mils. • g. Frazee: Acrylic Metal Prime,561; MDF 1.7 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: Acrylic Maintenance Primer,MC-1501,White; MDF 3.0 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1725 Kel-Guard Acrylic Metal Primer-White; MDF 1.6 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Hydro-Prime II,073-189; MDF 3.2 mils. k. Rodda: Metal Master Primer#4460 Off White; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#5860 All Purpose Acrylic Primer; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Dura Clad Universal Acrylic Metal Primer,33-105,White,MDF 2.3 mils. ..► 2. 2nd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309; MDF 1.2 mils. b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings Devflex 4218 Direct-To-Metal Gloss Interior/Exterior Waterborne Enamel;MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh:, Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel,5 1-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. d. Pratt&Lambert: Enducryl Acrylic Maintenance Enamel,Z2900 series; MDF 2.0 mils. e. Sherwin-Williams: DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,B66 Series; MDF 3.0 mils. ... f. Dunn-Edwards: Perma-Gloss Acrylic Enamel,W960; MDF 1.5 mils. g. Frazee: DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel,540; MDF 3.0 mils. h. Diamond/Vogel: NuCling Gloss Acrylic Enamel,MH Series; MDF 1.75 mils. i. Kelley-Moore: 1780 Kel-Guard Acrylic Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.3 mils. j. MAB: Rust-O-Lastic Gloss Acrylic DTM,043 line; MDF 3.0 mils. k. Rodda: Unique II Gloss Latex Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. 1. Kwal-Hanley Paint:#8400 Series 100%Acrylic Latex Gloss Enamel; MDF 1.5 mils. m. Duron: Dura Clad DTM Acrylic Gloss Coating,95-05X series,MDF 2.0 mils. 3. 3rd Coat: a. Benjamin Moore: Impervex Hi Gloss Enamel,309,MDF 1.2 mils. .� b. ICI Dulux: Devoe Coatings 4218 Direct-To-Metal Gloss Interior/Exterior Waterborne Enamel; MDF 2.0 mils. C. Pittsburgh: Interior/Exterior Latex Gloss Enamel,51-110 Series; MDF 1.4 mils. 09900-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .� on 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect painting and coating application for scheduled material, color, sheen, specified thickness (MDF), and coverage. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract requirements. * 3.6 CLEANING A. As work proceeds and upon completion,promptly remove paint where spilled,splashed,or spattered. a ! B. During progress of work keep premises free from any unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials,and debris. C. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. D. Upon completion of work leave premises neat and clean. 3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect other surfaces from paint and damage. Repair damage as a result of inadequate or unsuitable protection. 3.8 SCHEDULE OF ITEMS TO BE PAINTED A. Painted finishes shall be provided for,but not limited to,the following items. Refer to Drawings and Paint Color Schedule at end of this Section for designated finishes and colors of areas. 1. Exterior: Paint exterior surfaces including,but not limited to: a. Hollow metal doors and frames. b. Metal opening frames and trim. C. Metal flashing(if exposed from ground level)and downspout. d. Metal gutters. e. Metal fascias(vertical face). f. Parapet walls,roof side(where roofing does not occur). g. Pipe Bollards at areas other than at Vestibule Entry areas. Pipe Bollards at the Vestibule Entry areas to have polyethylene bollard sleeves. Refer to Section 05500. h. Metal railings. i. Roof hatch. j. Canopy supporting steel structure. k. Wall signage,and graphics. 1. Paving graphics and markings. m. Exposed piping and conduit,hangers and supports. 2. Interior:Paint interior surfaces as scheduled on the Drawings including,but not limited to: a. Hollow metal doors and frames. b. Hollow metal window frames. on C. Overhead coiling doors. d. Metal opening frames and trim. e. Gypsum wallboard. OR f. Exposed concrete unit masonry. g. Pipe Bollards. h. Metal railings. i. Exposed plywood(except plywood wainscot). j. Exposed mechanical ductwork , hangers and supports (if exposed structure is scheduled to be painted). k. Exposed piping and conduit,hangers and supports (if exposed structure is scheduled to be painted). 09900-5 "f„ Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paint products in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions using application procedures approved for the particular application and substrate to the specified Minimum Dry Film Thickness (MDF). Apply each coat to uniform finish. B. Apply each coat slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Sand lightly between coats to achieve specified finish. .. C. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not dry. D. Number of coats and film thickness required is same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding .w coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat until paint film is of "° uniform finish,color, and appearance. Surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,welds, and exposed fasteners to receive minimum dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. Am F. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide minimum dry film thickness (MDF) of the entire coating system as indicated in Painting and Finishing Schedule at end of this Section. G. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry units at rate to provide complete coverage with pores filled. H. Prime Coats: Before application of finish coats, apply a prime coat of material as recommended by manufacturer to material scheduled to be painted or finished that has not been shop primed. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to assure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. I. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, laps,brush marks,runs, sags, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. J. Hollow Metal Doors: Paint each door edge. Am K. Completed Work: Match Wal-Mart Construction Manager approved field samples for color and sheen. 3.4 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT .. A. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted over or spattered. B. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas where it will be exposed to the public. ow Color and texture to match adjacent surfaces. C. Paint exposed piping occurring in finished areas where it will be exposed to the public. Color and texture to match am adjacent surfaces. D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical equipment before installing backboards and mounting equipment on them. ..R E. Prepaint Gas piping prior to installation. (Touch-up paint after installation.) 1. Color: a. Roof(Yellow): P5,OSHA Standard"Safety Yellow." b. Other Areas: Match adjacent surfaces. .w 09900-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "* PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of application indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION on A. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, and conditions otherwise detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 40 B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's published instructions for each particular substrate condition. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. 2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be painted or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Reinstall all removed items after completion of paint work. tew 3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint of surface treatment. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. C. Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces,that are not galvanized or shop-coated,of oil,grease,dirt,loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 1. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats, where damaged or bare. Clean and touch-up with same type shop primer. D. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent. Apply coat of etching primer if required by paint manufacturer. E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease,oils,and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. a. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct condition before application of paint. 2. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed instructions. 3. Clean floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial solution of muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid,and allow to dry before painting. 0 F. Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt,oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer,before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes, and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 1. Prime, stain,or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends faces,undersides,and backsides of such wood,including cabinets and counters. ! 2. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job. G. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair. 09900-3 on Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 so& 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS am A. Apply paint finishes only when moisture content of surfaces is within manufacturer's acceptable ranges for type of finish being applied. w B. Surface temperatures or surrounding air temperature to be above 40 degrees F before applying alkyd finishes; above 45 degrees F for interior latex, and 50 degrees F for exterior latex work. Minimum for varnish and transparent finishes is 65 degrees F. am C. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours prior to,during and 48 hours after application of finishes. am D. Do not apply paint in areas where dust is being generated. E. Provide lighting level in areas being painted of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. "* 1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish the following to Wal-Mart as part of contract closeout under provisions of Section 00800. am 1. Provide 2 gallons of each color for Pharmacy area. 2. Provide 5 gallons of each color,type and surface texture for General Sales Area. B. Label each container with color,type,texture,room locations,in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Benjamin Moore and Company,Montvale,NJ (201)573-9600. 2. ICI Dulux Paints Cleveland,OH(216)344-8000 3. Pittsburgh Paints,Pittsburgh,PA (800)441-9695. 4. Pratt and Lambert,Incorporated,Buffalo,NY (800)289-7728. 5. Sherwin-Williams Company,Cleveland,OH (800)321-8194. 6. Dunn-Edwards Corporation,Los Angeles,CA (800)733-3866. 7. Frazee Industries Incorporated, San Diego,CA (619)276-9500. 8. Diamond/Vogel Paint Company,Incorporated,Orange City,IA (712)737-4993. 9. Kelley-Moore Paint Company,Incorporated, San Carlos,CA (415)592-8337. 10. M.A.B. Paints and Coatings,Incorporated,Broomal,PA (800)622-1899. 11. Rodda Paint and Coatings,Portland,OR (503)286-0693. 12. Kwal-Hanley Paint Manufacturing Co.,Inc.;El Paso,TX;(800)456-2062 13. Duron Paints and Wallcoverings,Beltsville,MD (800)723-8766. ..0. B. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Paints: 1. Ready-mixed; pigments fully ground maintaining a soft paste consistency, capable of readily and uniformly dispersing to a complete homogeneous mixture. 2. Providing good flowing and brushing properties and be capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. B. Primers and Undercoaters: Manufactured by same manufacturer as finish coat materials. .•* C. Paint Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine and other materials not specifically indicated herein but required to achieve the finishes specified of high quality and approved manufacturer. 09900-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. yew UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 09900-PAINTS AND COATINGS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ws A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation and field application of paints and finishes for interior and exterior surfaces. 2. Schedule of Items to be painted. AM 3. Exterior painting and finishing schedule. 4. Interior painting and finishing schedule. 5. Paint color schedule. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Shop priming. 2. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Shop priming. 3. Section 05300-Metal Decking: Shop priming. 4. Section 05500-Metal fabrications: Shop priming. 5. Section 08110-Steel Doors and Frames: Shop priming. 6. Section 09981 -Elastomeric Coatings for Masonry: Cementitious and acrylic exterior masonry waterproof coating and accent stripes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E-84 for Class I or A finish: a. Flame Spread(Non-Combustible Surfaces): Less than 25. b. Smoke Density(Non-Combustible Surfaces): Less than 450. 04 2. Provide paint and coating materials that conform to Federal, State, and Local restrictions for Volatile Organic Compounds(VOC)content. B. Field Sample: Provide sample 2 foot square sample panel of each color and sheen at location indicated by Wal- Mart Construction Manager for color verification. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. au B. Deliver paint materials in sealed original labeled containers, bearing manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time , cleanup requirements, color designation,and instructions for mixing and/or reducing. C. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area,and as required by manufacturer's instructions. q0 D. Prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. of 09900-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 K. Extend wall covering from 2 inches above finish floor to ceiling line or above. Install wall covering secure, .. smooth,clean,without wrinkles,gaps and overlaps. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .o A. Inspect wall covering installation,pattern matching,and attachment to substrate. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. ow 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesives,dust,dirt,and other contaminants. M' B. Remove debris and leave area in neat and clean condition. AM 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work installed by other trades prior to beginning wall covering installation. .w END OF SECTION am ws ..R 09720-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. W B. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles. C. Wallboard Surfaces: Fasteners recessed, joints and fastener depressions taped, spackled and sanded level and smooth. 1. Fill nicks, gouges,and other minor imperfections of substrate surfaces with latex filler. Sand smooth flush with surface. 2. Apply prime coat of sealer recommended by wall covering manufacturer. D. Painted Surfaces: Wash down painted surfaces with trisodium phosphate,rinse with clear water. Sand glossy sur- faces and seal. 4 1. Remove bleeding paint,flaky paint,and wood stain. E. Metal Surfaces: Remove rust,dirt,and grease. Prime with recommended metal primer. F. Sizing: Size all walls prior to application of wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's published instruc- tions. G. Repair defects in substrate which appear in finish surface after application of wall covering. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Remove hardware, accessories,plates and similar items. Store items during wall covering application. Reinstall items at completion of each space.. B. Prime and seal substrates in accordance with wall covering manufacturer's recommendations for the type of sub- : strate being covered. C. Mix and apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. Apply adhesive to back of wall covering using roller or brush. D. Install wall covering panels in exact order cut from rolls; use rolls in consecutive order. Apply paste to the back using a roller or paste brush. E. Hang smooth, non-matching wall covering patterns by installing strips on wall, overlapping edges, and "double- cutting"through both thicknesses. 1. Use 0.04 inch or 0.06 inch zinc or aluminum strip between wall surface and wall covering material when cutting. OR F. Use stiff-bristled brush or flexible broad knife to eliminate air pockets and secure wall covering to wall surface. G. Fill spaces above and below doors and similar areas in sequence from roll. Do not install after full-length pieces 40 are installed. H. Remove excess adhesive from each seam immediately and before beginning next seam with sponge dampened with plain warm water. Wipe seam clean with dry cloth towel. 1. Examine each seam when completed. Trim additional selvage where required to achieve color and pattern match at seams. J. Wrap wall covering 6 inches beyond outside corners and 3 inches at inside corners. I. Do not cut wall covering at corners. 2. Do not install wall covering with horizontal seams other than as indicated or required for patt ern change. 09720-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain areas to receive wall covering at constant minimum temperature of 45 to 50 degrees F for minimum three days prior to and during installation. .. a. Comply with wall covering manufacturer's surface moisture requirements. b. Provide negative alkalinity at substrate. 2. Provide continuous ventilation during and after wall covering installation. B. Provide lighting levels of 80 foot candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1.6 SCHEDULING •.� A. Schedule wall covering installation to prevent damage to wall covering and to prevent movement of construction materials in area of wall covering. law PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 VISION CENTER WALL COVERING(WAL-MART FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Quantity Furnished: Contact Wal-Mart Store Planning to indicate quantity of wall covering required. Wall cov- ering furnished in 28 inch wide X 27 foot long rolls. .� B. Wall Covering: Class A wall covering,flame spread rating of 15,and smoke developed rating of 10. 1. Wall Covering-WC-1: Sellars&Josephson"Skye"#899-8123. 2.2 TOILET ROOM ALCOVE WALL COVERING(WAL-MART FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Quantity Furnished: Contact Wal-Mart Store Planning to indicate quantity of wall covering required. Wall cov- ering furnished in 54 inch wide x 52 foot long rolls. B. Wall Covering: Class A wall covering,flame spread rating 15,and smoke developed rating 30. 1. Wall Covering(WC-2): General Felt Industries"Basics"#2140-1516 Morning Mist. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. 1. Do not use wheat paste or cellulose paste with vinyl wall coverings. 2. Do not thin adhesives. B. Primer: Type recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturer;compatible with substrate. C. Sealer: Type recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturer;compatible with substrate. .. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been *� corrected. 1. Wall covering Substrate Surface: Clean,true,and free of irregularities. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. .. 09720-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 „� UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 09720-WALL COVERINGS PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall coverings. " B. Products Installed but not Furnished Under this Section: 1. Wal-Mart will furnish wall covering for Vision Center and Toilet Room Alcoves under provisions of Sec- tion 01600. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 0600 - Product Requirements: General procedures related to Wal-Mart and Portrait Studio fur- nished products. 2. Section 09250-Gypsum Board Systems: Substrate for attachment of wallcovering. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E84 for Class I or Class A finish: a. Flame Spread: Less than 25. b. Smoke Density: Less than 450. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Wal-Mart Furnished Wall Covering: 1. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. To establish product delivery date and quantity of wall covering required contact: Wal-Mart Store Planning Division 40 (501)273-4088 2. Product Packaging: Wall covering will be packaged in cartons on rolls. Manufacturer's published installa- tion instructions will be included in package. 3. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided with Wal-Mart furnished products. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart Store Planning Division immediately. Upon notification by Contractor,Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. B. Section 01600-Product Requirmentst: Transport,Handle,Store,and Protect products. C. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. Keep adhesives away from any igni- tion source. D. Do not store roll goods on end. 09720-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,. B. Corners: 1. Resilient Base: Premolded corner units. ow C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. 4W D. Scribe to fit door frames and other interruptions. 3.2 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor,base,and wall surfaces without damage. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE SCHEDULE *�* A. Sales Area and Ancillary Spaces(As Scheduled on Drawings): 1. Base: B-1. Unless noted otherwise,provide Resilent Base B-1 in spaces scheduled on the Drawings to re- ceive Resilient Base. B. Snack Bar Dining Area: 1. Base: B-4,unless noted otherwise. '!"■ 2. Base: B-5: Provide Plastic Base B-5 at areas indicated on the Drawings. END OF SECTION MW .. w MW .. .. am 09655-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,. 00 UniSpec II 092499 on SECTION 09655 -RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES w PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for flame/fueUsmoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperature required by resilient base adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS " A. Resilient Base - B-1 Blue/Grey: FS SS-W-40; vinyl or rubber; 4 inch high cove base, 1/8 inch thickness; with matching end stops and preformed corner units: 1. Color: Provide one of the following: IN a. Roppe Vinyl: No. 877 Steel Blue. b. Roppe Rubber: No. 75 Slate. C. Johnsonite Vinyl: No. CB48 Grey. d. Johnsonite Rubber: No.DC-28 Grey. fm e. Flexco Rubber: No. 14 Medium Grey. f. Kencove Vinyl: No.KC213 Granite. g. VPI Vinyl: No.336 Silver Sable. 40 h. VPI Rubber: No.736 Silver Sable. B. Resilient Base-B-4 Black: FS SS-W-40;vinyl or rubber;4 inch high cove base, 1/8 inch thickness;with match- ing end stops and preformed corner units: 1. Color: Provide one of the following: a. Armstrong Vinyl: No. 14100 Standard Black. b. Flexco Rubber: No.WF-0 1 Black Dahlia. C. Kencove Vinyl: No.KC-1 Black. d. Johnsonite Vinyl: No.CB-40 Black. e. Roppe Rubber: No.00 Black. C. Adhesive: As recommended by resilient base manufacturer for application intended. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints 09655-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ®. 3.3 STRIPPING A. Dust mop entire resilient tile floor area and remove dirt, gum, tar, glue, and any other material that would prevent application of floor finish from resilient tile floor. B. Mix one part Stripper to four parts hot water. C. Dip mop in stripping solution, let excess solution drain off, and apply stripper to floor. Let stripper set on floor five minutes before scrubbing. Do not allow stripper to dry on floor. D. With black stripping pad under the slow speed buffer,pass over each tile section at least twice. E. After a section is stripped,pick up the stripping solution immediately with automatic scrubber. F. Rinse thoroughly by mopping with clear water, removing remaining solution, finish, and dirt. Use automatic scrubber for water pickup. G. Move stripping operation to next area of resilient tile floor area and repeat procedure. H. Let floor dry completely. 3.4 FINISHING "° A. Pour floor finish into clean mop buckets. B. Prepare new or clean mop for applying floor finish. C. Dip mop in floor finish,place mop in wringer and tap lightly. The mop should be full but not dripping. D. Apply four coats of floor finish to floor. Under normal conditions, allow a minimum of 45 minutes drying time between coats. E. Air conditioning or heat shall be in operation during drying and curing of floor finish. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect floor finishing application for specified material and complete coverage. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract requirements. END OF SECTION .w. 09651-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �^ UniSpec II 102999 SECTION 09651 -FLOOR TREATMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Application of stripper and finish to resilient floor tile. B. Related Sections: Section 09650-Resilient Flooring.Resilient floor tile to receive floor stripper and finish. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. B. Stripper Applicator Crew Requirement: Four-man crew; one to apply solution ahead of buffer, one to run slow-speed buffer, two with mops and buckets to pick up dirty solution behind buffer and rinse floor prior to ap- plying finish. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Stripper: Bravo Stripper Plus,by Johnson Wax. B. Finish: Signature Floor Finish,by Johnson Wax. C. Resilient Floor Tile: Specified in Section 09650. W D. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Use the following equipment to perform work of this Section: 1. One automatic floor scrubber(with full charge.) 2. Two or three side-to-side slow speed buffers. 3. Five black stripping pads. 4. Five buckets with wringers. 5. Six mop head and handles. Soak new mops for 24 hours. ' 6. Two clean dust mops. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be applied and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until satisfactory conditions have been cor- rected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 APPLICATION 1. Provide floor treatment at new resilient flooring specified in Section 09650. 09651-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..m BLANK PAGE owl W* sm am .. Ow Mw .R 09650-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 aw 00 TILE ORDER FORM To: General Contractor In order to receive floor tile, complete this Form in full and FAX to Construction Purchasing at (501) 273- 1964. QUANTITY FROM CONTRACTORS CARPET TILE PLAN ORDER • FS 240 AZROCK 6" RED FEATURE STRIP sq.ft. sq.ft. • V-862 AZROCK 1/8 CLOUD WHITE • OTHER Required delivery date Additional material required beyond this original order will be back charged to the contractor. Order must be placed two weeks prior to delivery. The contractor shall verify quantity of material delivered and notify Construction Purchasing within 24 hours if delivered quantities do not match Tile Order Form. If you have any questions please contract the Construction Purchasing Department at(501)273-4653. Superintendent Date Please print Superintendent's name Store#and Location General Contractor M go 09650-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..E BLANK PAGE 09650-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �,„ OR 3.7 VINYL COMPOSITION TILE SCHEDULE 40 A. Sales Area: 1. Field Tile: VCT-1. �w 2. Feature Strip: VCT-2,pattern as indicated on Architectural Drawings. B. Ancillary Spaces(As Scheduled on Drawings): 1. Field Tile: VCT-1. END OF SECTION 40 40 00 s 09650-5 March 10,2000 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts B. Open number of floor tile cartons to provide quantity of flooring material required to cover each area; mix tile pieces within single shade lot to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. When working with more than one lot, plan lot placement and location taking advantage of feature strips to minimize possible shade differences. C. Respect adhesives open time by spreading only enough adhesive to permit installation of floor materials before initial set. Do not spread adhesive for overnight dry. Trowel notch for resilient tile adhesives shall be 1/32 inch deep, 1/16 inch wide, 1/32 inch apart. When ground down,replace trowels or appropriately re-notch. D. Set flooring into place, thoroughly cross roll with a 100-150 pound three-sectional roller before adhesive set time expires to attain full adhesion. oft E. Lay flooring from center marks established parallel to building walls. 1. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 2. Adjust the layout as required to avoid use of units less than 1/2 tile. .ft F. Install tile and feature strips to square grid pattern with all joints aligned and pattern grain alternating with adjacent unit to produce basket weave pattern unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 4M G. Install feature strips, edge strips, and threshold transitions at locations indicated on Wal-Mart Carpet/Tile Plan. Fit joints tightly. H. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Where flooring am continues through door opening,continue established pattern with no interruption. I. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. J. Scribe flooring to walls,columns,cabinets,floor outlets,and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. K. Continue flooring under movable type partitions without interrupting floor pattern. L. On installations involving tile placement over existing asphaltic based (black) adhesives, substitute solvent-free asphaltic emulsion adhesive (Azrock Black Thin Spread) for clear adhesive typically specified. Fast set Portland cement/latex based patch by the following manufacturers may be substituted: 1. Kwik Patch,by Azrock(as first preference,if unavailable,select items 2 or 3). 2. Plani-Patch,by Mapei. am 3. Featherfinish,by Ardex. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL am A. Inspect resilient flooring installation,pattern,layout,and attachment to substrate. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. sm 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor,base,and wall surfaces without damage. oft B. Broom clean resilient flooring after application. ow 3.6 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. m .w 09650-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..s W PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to the following requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify concrete floors are free of excessive moisture,hydrostatic pressure,alkalinity,scale,and dusting. 2. Verify concrete floors are plane to tolerances specified in Section 03300. 3. Verify concrete floors are free from oil,grease,dust,construction debris, Ioose or scaly paints or coatings, incompatible curing or sealing compounds,and other substances that may impair adhesion of adhesive and finish materials. 4. Verify temperature of conditioned space has been maintained at 60 - 80 degrees F for period of 7 days prior to installation. Maintain specified temperature range for duration of construction. No B. On remodel installations evaluate existing materials for suitability as a substrate. 1. Verify concrete subfloors are free of excessive moisture,hydrostatic pressure,and alkalinity. 2. Strip suitable existing floorcoverings of any wax, finishes, coatings, or other surface treatments that will impair adhesion. 3. Patch or replace any missing, loose,broken,or otherwise unacceptable areas of existing floor coverings. 4. Large amounts of cracked, craized,bleeding, shifting, or otherwise degraded resilient tile are indicative of excessive moisture, poor installation, or other problems. If this condition exists, further evaluate as to cause,and take appropriate corrective actions. C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION t A. Prepare substrate for product installation as outlined below. For additional information not addressed consult manufacturer's published instructions. ON B. Remove by sanding, grinding, or similar means ridges, bumps, protrusions, and other irregularities. Properly prepare expansion joints and fill control/construction joints, cracks, holes, and depressions with control/construction joint and subfloor filler, which upon cure is sanded smooth, to achieve a level, flat, hard surface. C. Provide finish concrete surface smooth by light sanding or grinding. D. Remove paint, oils, waxes, sealers and curing compounds not compatible with adhesive to be used. Avoid organic solvents or liquid adhesive removers. E. Bond and Moisture Tests: Determine suitability of concrete substrate for receiving resilient flooring with regard to moisture content and curing compounds. Conduct bond test by adhering 3 feet by 3 feet panels of specified floorcovering with specified adhesive. Test will be considered passed if after several days panels are well bonded, difficult to remove, and display no signs of moisture or adhesive degradation. Ensure that moisture content in concrete substrate does not exceed 5 percent as measured by the Calcium Carbide Hygrometer. Procedure, 5 pounds/1000 sq. ft./24 hours as measured by the Rubber Manufacturers Association Quantitative Calcium Chloride Test,or 5 percent as measured by the Protimeter Surveymaster Resistivity Meter. F. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. Thereafter,unnecessary traffic in work areas shall be kept to a minimum. 3.3 INSTALLATION-TILE FLOORING A. Install resilient tile flooring in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions at locations indicated on Wal-Mart Carpet/Tile Plan. 09650-3 NO Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2. Store resilient tile indoors and protect from excessive cold, heat, temperature fluctuations, humidity and moisture penetration. Store tile on original pallets with no multiple stacking of pallets. Check material for consistency of run item and shade numbers. Store resilient tile adhesive in same manner as tile and protect from freezing. 3. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart Store .., Planning Division immediately. 4. Upon notification by Contractor,Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 5. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. ow E. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,Handle,Store,and Protect Products. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS am A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. 2. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer(no less than 72 degrees F for 48 hours) ... three days prior to,during,and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.6 SCHEDULING ..� A. Schedule resilient flooring installation to prevent damage to resilient flooring and to prevent movement of construction materials over area of resilient flooring. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WAL-MART FURNISHED MATERIALS .� A. Quantity Furnished: General Contractor shall determine quantity of each type of resilient flooring, feature strips, and resilient flooring adhesive required,and complete the attached"TILE ORDER FORM"to indicate quantities. „ B. Vinyl Composition Tile-VCT-1: Vinyl composition tile, 12 x 12 x 1/8 inches. Color: Cortina No.V-862,Cloud White,by Azrock. C. Vinyl Composition Tile-VCT-2: Vinyl composition tile, 6 x 24 x 1/8 inches. Color: Feature Strip, FS240, Rio Red,by Azrock. D. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; clear; of types as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for specific material and substrates encountered. 2.2 CONTRACTOR FURNISHED ACCESSORIES A. Edge Strips: Resilient material;minimum width 1 inch, 1/8 inch thickness;tapered bullnose edge. Color: Black. B. Control/Construction Joint and Subfloor Filler: Portland cement based, latex modified joint filler and underlayment. Provide one of the following: 1. Ardex SD-F Feather Finish,by Ardex Engineered Cements;Contact:Jesse David,(412)264-4240. 2. Levelayer 1,by Dayton Superior. 3. No. 345,by W.W.Henry. 4. Masterfill 300 I,by Master Builders,Inc.,(800 227-3350) ow C. Aluminum Threshold Transition: Transition threshold between vinyl tile and concrete slab as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 08710. 09650-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �. 4M sm UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 09650-RESILIENT FLOORING on PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY on A. Section Includes: 1. Wal-Mart furnished resilient vinyl tile and adhesive. 2. Wal-Mart furnished feature strip and adhesive. 3. Preparation of surfaces to receive resilient flooring. 4. Contractor furnished resilient flooring accessories. 5. Preparation of Control/Construction Joints under provided floor finishes. B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section: Wal-Mart will furnish resilient flooring, feature strip, and resilient flooring adhesive under provisions of Section 01600. 0" C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: General procedures related to Wal-Mart furnished products. 2. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Floor substrate surface. 10 3. Section 08710-Door Hardware: Threshold transition between vinyl tile and concrete slab. 4. Section 09655-Resilient Base and Accessories: Resilient flooring base. 5. Section 09651 -Floor Treatment: Finishing of resilient flooring. 40 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 2. ASTM E 662-Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Critical Radiant Flux in Accordance with ASTM E 684: More than 0.45 Watts per square centimeter. 2. Specific Optical Smoke Density in Accordance with ASTM E 662: Less than 450. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by Contractor. To notify Wal-Mart of product delivery date and quantity of resilient tile, feature strips and resilient flooring adhesive required complete attached"TILE ORDER FORM" at end of this Section. Product will not be delivered without receipt of this Form. 00 B. Wal-Mart Carpet/Tile Plan: Issued to Contractor by Wal-Mart 90 days prior to Date of Substantial Completion. C. Product Packaging: Resilient flooring and accessories will be packaged in manufacturer's standard cartons. Each tile carton will contain 45 pieces. Each feature strip carton will contain 15,24 inch long pieces. Adhesive will be 010 packaged in manufacturer's standard 3-1/2 gallon bucket. D. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided with Wal-Mart furnished products. 09650-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..E BLANK PAGE ..w 09511-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ... e0 2. Fasten strut to main runner,extend to and fasten to structural member supporting roof. so 3. Compression strut and splayed hanger wires shall be provided as follows: a. One assembly per each light fixture. b. Locate at maximum of 12 feet on center in both directions with first point within 6 feet from each on partition. 3.3 INSTALLATION-ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. Fit acoustic units in place free from damaged edges or other defects. Install acoustic units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist,warp,and dents. 3.4 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, heating is provided, dust generating activities have terminated,and overhead work is completed,tested,and approved. 2. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is completed. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. !� ! 4. Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. B. Site Tolerances: M 1. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 12 feet. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL w A. Inspect acoustical panel placement,ceiling grid suspension system installation and connection to structure. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with contract requirements. 3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings including trim,edge moldings,and suspension system members 3.7 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING SYSTEM SCHEDULE so A. Sales Areas and Ancillary Spaces: 1. Acoustical Panel Ceiling System: Type 1. Unless noted otherwise, provide Acoustical Panel Ceiling System Type 1 in spaces scheduled on the Drawings to receive Acoustical Panel Ceiling. B. Vision Center: 1. Acoustical Panel Ceiling System: Type 3. !" C. Snack Bar Kitchen Area: 1. Acoustical Panel Ceiling System: Type 2. END OF SECTION 09511-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 f. Compression Struts: Telescoping compression strut designed to attach to main tees at each splayed wire location, preventing upward movement of ceiling grid system. Subject to compliance with .� requirements,provide compression struts as manufactured by one of the following: 1) Donn Compression Post,by USG. 2) Contractor's Option: At Contractor's option, provide field fabricated compression struts as .. detailed on drawings. B. Acoustical Panels: 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide acoustical panels from one of the following: a. Second Look II,#2767 White,by Armstrong. b. Auratone Two/24#3575 White,by USG. •. 2. Materials: a. Size: 24 x 48 x 3/4 inches. b. Edge: Angled tegular lay-in. C. Weight: 0.20 pounds per square foot. d. Surface Finish: Factory-applied vinyl latex paint,perforated,and scored. C. Substitutions: Not Permitted. .. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other Work. C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION-SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Install System in accordance with ASTM C636,ASTM E580 and manufacturer's published instructions. B. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. C. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, .. avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers,reinforce nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span extra distance. D. Locate system on room axis according to Reflected Ceiling Plan, where indicated on Drawings, or locate system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical panel size where Reflected Ceiling Plan not shown on Drawings E. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Do not eccentrically load system,or produce rotation of runners. F. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Secure at 16 inches on center. G. Install compression struts and secure system with tie wires. ... 1. Provide four 12 gage wires secured to main runner within 2 inches of cross runner intersection and splayed 90 degrees from each other at angle not exceeding 45 degrees from plane of ceiling. 09511-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ... on 2. Materials: on a. Size: 24 x 48 x 5/8 inches. b. Edge: Square. C. Surface Finish: Non perforated,abuse-resistant vinyl film facing. 00 C. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM-TYPE 2 A. Suspension System,Fire Rated-USDA Approved: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide suspension system from one of the following: a. Prelude Plus Fire Guard,by Armstrong. b. Environmental System 1830 Fire Front,by Chicago Metallic. C. Environmental System ZXA,by USG. 2. Materials: a. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, hot-dipped galvanized with aluminum face cap exposed T; nominal 1 inch width. b. Accessories: Stabilizer bars,clips,and splices. C. Grid Finish: White. d. Support System: Hot or cold rolled steel channels;galvanized hanger wire,minimum 12 gage. w e. Edge Moldings: Hot-dipped galvanized with aluminum face cap with exposed flange to match suspension system. f. Compression Struts: Telescoping compression strut designed to attach to main tees at each splayed wire location, preventing upward movement of ceiling grid system. Subject to compliance with 40 requirements,provide compression struts as manufactured by one of the following: 1) Donn Compression Post,by USG. 2) Contractor's Option: At Contractor's option, provide field fabricated compression struts as detailed on drawings. B. Acoustical Lay-in Panels-USDA Approved,Fire Rated: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide acoustical panels from one of the following: a. VL Fire Guard,Item#870,by Armstrong. b. Metal Face,Item 56094,by USG. 2. Materials: a. Size: 24 x 48 x 5/8 inches. b. Edge: Square. C. Surface Finish: Vinyl faced aluminum surface,nonperforated. C. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.4 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM-TYPE 3 A. Suspension System: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide non fire-rated suspension system from one of the following: a. Prelude 15/16 inch,XL#7300 Exposed Tee System,by Armstrong. b. 1200 System,by Chicago Metallic. C. Donn DX System,by USG. 2. Materials: a. Grid: ASTM C635,intermediate duty,steel exposed T;nominal 1 inch width;stab-in connections. b. Accessories: Stabilizer bars,clips,and splices. C. Grid Finish: White. d. Support System: Hot or cold rolled steel channels;galvanized hanger wire,minimum 12 gage. e. Edge Moldings: Metal channel with exposed flange to match suspension system. 09511-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain uniform temperature range of 60-85 degrees F, and humidity of no more than 70 percent relative humidity prior to,during,and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Suspension System: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide ceiling suspension system from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries Incorporated,Lancaster,PA (800)448-1405. .� 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation,Chicago,IL (800)323-7164. 3. USG Interiors,Chicago,IL (800)950-3839. B. Acoustical Panels: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide acoustical panels from one of the following manufacturers: 1. Armstrong World Industries Incorporated,Lancaster,PA (800)448-1405. 2. Capaul Corporation,Plainfield,IL (815)436-8500. no 3. Celotex Building Products Division,Tampa,FL (800)523-4684. 4. USG Interiors,Chicago,IL (800)950-3839. 5. Gold Bond Building Products,National Gypsum Company,Charlotte,NC (704)365-7300. C. Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL CEILING SYSTEM-TYPE 1 A. Suspension System: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide non fire-rated suspension system .. from one of the following: a. Prelude 15/16 inch,XL#7300 Exposed Tee System,by Armstrong. b. 1200 System,by Chicago Metallic. C. Donn DX System,by USG. 2. Materials: a. Grid: ASTM C635,intermediate duty,steel exposed T;nominal 1 inch width; stab-in connections. b. Accessories: Stabilizer bars,clips,and splices. C. Grid Finish: White. d. Support System: Hot or cold rolled steel channels;galvanized hanger wire,minimum 12 gage. e. Edge Moldings: Metal channel with exposed flange to match suspension system. f. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard retention clips to suit conditions specified. g. Compression Struts: Telescoping compression strut designed to attach to main tees at each splayed wire location, preventing upward movement of ceiling grid system. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide compression struts as manufactured by one of the following: 1) Donn Compression Post,by USG. 2) Contractor's Option: At Contractor's option, provide field fabricated compression struts as detailed on drawings. B. Acoustical Lay-in Panels: 1. Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide acoustical panels from one of the following: a. Standard Fiberglass Ceiling Panels,Random Fissured;Item#2911 by Armstrong. b. Kapok,unperforated,#7057G,Hi-Lite Panels,by USG. C. Vintage 1530-VIN-I,by Capaul. d. Coral 7010-01F Soft Touch Series,by Chicago Metallic. ow 09511-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 MW UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 09511 -ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY �w A. Section Includes: 1. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. 2. Acoustical panels. 3. Perimeter trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 13900-Fire Suppression: Sprinkler heads in ceiling system. 2. Section 15800-Air Distribution: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. 3. Section 16500-Lighting: Light fixtures attached to ceiling system. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 635 - Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. 2. ASTM C 636 - Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels. 3. ASTM E 84 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. ASTM E 580 - Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Rigidly secure acoustical ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE No A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E 84 for Class III or C finish: a. Flame Spread: Less than 200. b. Smoke Density: Less than 450. 2. Food Serving and Preparation Areas where Scheduled: a. United States Department of Agriculture(USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING 40 A. Section 01600- Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. B. Deliver acoustical units in manufacturer's original unopened containers with brand name and type clearly marked. !? C. Store under cover in dry,watertight conditions. D. Prior to installation, store acoustical units for 24 hours minimum at same temperature and relative humidity as W space where Work will be installed. 00 09511-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect tile installation,joints,grout line alignment,and attachment to substrate. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and grout from floor,base,and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean tile with cleaning materials recommended by tile manufacturer one day prior to Date of Substantial Com- pletion. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.7 TILE AND GROUT SCHEDULE w. A. Snack Bar: 1. Floor and Base: a. Tile: QT-31,QT-32,and QT-33,pattern as indicated on Drawings. b. Grout: G-10. END OF SECTION ow W so u. ow .W 09330-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,,,, PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. D. Prepare substrate surfaces with sealers or conditioners as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Installation Methods: Install quarry the in accordance with the TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. a. Concrete Subfloor,Interior: TCA F 113. b. Grout: Latex-portland cement(sanded for floor tile and base). B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit the tight to penetrations. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor and base joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids,cracks,excess mortar,or excess grout. E. Sound the after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. F. Control Joints: Provide tile control joints over control and construction joints in concrete slab. Remove all debris from concrete joint before starting installation of membrane. 1. Following manufacturer's printed recommendations for installation, provide continuous x minimum 24" wide membrane. 2. Set membrane in full bed of modified thin-set bond coat. 3. Lap membrane and make single cut,reducing total thickness to one membrane. 4. Following recommendation from thin-set mortar manufacturer, set tile in accordance with referenced TCA setting method. G. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. H. Grout tile joints. 1. Provide continuous elastomeric grout joints on each side of bridged concrete joint following recommenda- tion and requirements of TCA EJ 171. I. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials,and at tile penetrations. 09330-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Mortar and Grout: Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide mortar and grout as manufactured by the following: 1. American Olean Tile Company,Lansdale,PA. Contact: Shawn Campbell,(214)309-4083. 2. W.R. Bonsal Company,Charlotte,NC;(800)334-0784. 3. Bostik,Middleton,MA;(800)726-7845. no 4. Laticrete International,Bethany,CT;(800)243-4788. C. Substitutions: Not Permitted. ow 2.2 MATERIALS A. Quarry Tile-QT-31: Unglazed floor tile with abrasive aggregate embedded in surface, 6 x 6 x 1/2 inch. Provide matching 5 x 6 inch cove base,inside and outside corners,and trim. 1. Color: a. Q40 Red Blaze,by Dal-Tile. b. 10 Summitville Red,by Summitville Tiles. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Quarry Tile-QT-32: Unglazed floor tile with abrasive aggregate embedded in surface, 6 x 6 x 1/2 inch. Provide matching 5 x 6 inch cove base,inside and outside corners,and trim. 1. Color: a. Q46 Camel,by Dal-Tile. .. b. 66 Palomino,by Summitville Tiles. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Quarry Tile -QT-33: Unglazed floor tile with abrasive aggregate embedded in surface, 6 x 6 x 1/2 inch. Provide matching 5 x 6 inch cove base,inside and outside corners,and trim. 1. Color: a. Q45 Golden Flash,by Dal-Tile. b. 11 Sun Glo,by Summitville Tiles. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. D. Mortar: 1. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4 E. Grout: ANSI Al 18.6;Latex-Portland Cement Grout(sanded for floor tile and base). 1. Grout-G-10: a. Quarry Red#46,by Laticrete. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. "l* F. Control Joints: 1. Dal-Seal CIS membrane by DAL-TILE;Dallas,TX(800)933-8453 1 G. Sealant: See Section 07900. 2.3 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT on A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers for proportioning of materials, water or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, 1W and mixing time to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. ■ 09330-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,�. UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 09330-QUARRY TILE PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quarry floor tile. 2. Quarry tile base. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Flooring substrate finish and preparation. 2. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Sealant at tile penetrations and control/construction joints. 3. Section 09310-Ceramic Tile: Tile floor finish. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Ce- �, ment Mortar. 2. ANSI Al 18.1 -Dry-Set portland Cement Mortar. 3. ANSI A118.4-Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 4. ANSI Al 18.6-Ceramic Tile Grouts. B. Tile Council of America,Inc.(TCA): 1. TCA 137.1 -Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. WA 2. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to TCA 137.1. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING PW A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,Handle,Store,and Protect Products. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesives in a closed,unventilated environment. 94 B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide one unopened box of the with label indicating store number and date. Submit to Wal- Mart Construction Manager at Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Quarry Tile: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide quarry the as manufactured by the following: 1. Dal-Tile Corporation,Dallas,TX. Contact: Traci Storer,(918)627-5381. 2. Summitville Tiles,Inc.,Maumelle,AR. Contact: Phil White,(501)753-0220. 09330-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ., w am No ..R .A, am BLANK PAGE .R aw am 09310-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. 3.7 TILE AND GROUT SCHEDULE A. Toilets(As Scheduled on Drawings): 1. Floor and Base: a. Tile: CT-l. Provide two rows of tile above 2 inch cove base. b. Grout: G-1 2. Walls: a. Field Tile: CT-2. b. Accent Tile: CT-1. C. Grout: G-2. B. Snackbar(As Scheduled on Drawings): 1. Wall: a. Tile: CT-31,CT-32,and CT-33. b. Grout: 1) At locations where primary field tile is CT-31: G-10. 2) At locations where primary field tile is CT-33: G-11. END OF SECTION on ffim �s 00 I" 09310-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 OR C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness tolerances. on D. Prepare substrate surfaces with sealers or conditioners as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION am A. Installation Methods: Install ceramic tile in accordance with the TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A108.5. a. Concrete Subfloor,Interior: TCA F 113. b. Wood or Metal Stud Walls,Interior: TCA W243. C. Grout: Latex-portland cement(Sanded for floors and base,unsanded for walls). B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile tight to penetrations. Form corners and bases neatly. Align floor and base joints. .. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids,cracks,excess mortar,or excess grout. wr E. Sound the after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. F. Expansion Joints: Provide tile expansion joints at control/construction joints in concrete slab. Keep joints free of .. mortar or grout. 1. Installation Method: TCA EJ171. G. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting. H. Grout tile joints. I. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials,at tile penetrations,and at tile expansion joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect ceramic tile installation,joints,grout line alignment,and attachment to substrate. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and grout from floor,base,and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean tile with cleaning materials recommended by tile manufacturer one day prior to Date of Substantial Completion. �. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from floor finish for 48 hours after installation. .A 09310-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..� go � E. Ceramic Tile - CT-33: Wall tile, 6 x 6 inch (Crossville) or 2 x 2 inch (Dal-Tile). Provide matching inside and outside corners and trim. If 2 x 2 inch tiles are used,9 tiles must be installed for each 6 x 6 inch tile shown on the Drawings. 1. Color: Pw a. B410 Doges Gold,by Crossville Ceramics. b. 6547 Matte Mustard,by Dal-Tile. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. F. Mortar: 1. Dry Set Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI A118.1. 2. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar: ANSI Al 18.4 G. Grout: ANSI A118.6; Latex-Portland Cement Grout(sanded for floor the and base,unsanded for wall tile). 1. Grout-G-1: a. Dark Grey,by W.R. Bonsal. b. Charcoal#47,by Dal-Tile. C. Charcoal#47,by Mapai. 2. Grout-G-2: a. Sterling Silver,by W.R. Bonsal. b. Silver#27,by Dal-Tile. C. Silver#27,by Mapai. 3. Grout-G-10: a. Quarry Red#46- by Laticrete. 4. Grout-G-11: 0s a. Almond#85 - by Laticrete. H. Sealant: See Section 07900. r 1. Tile Backer Board: Water resistant gypsum board,see Section 09250. J. Substitutions: Not permitted. 23 MORTAR MIX AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturers for proportioning of materials, water or additive content; type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, and mixing time to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage or disfiguration. B. Vacuum clean existing substrate and damp clean. 09310-3 s Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Ceramic Tile: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide ceramic tile as manufactured by the following: 1. Dal-Tile Corporation,Dallas,TX. Contact: Traci Storer,(918)627-5381. 2. American Olean Tile Company,Lansdale,PA. Contact: Shawn Campbell(214)309-4083. 3. Crossville Ceramics,Crossville,TN(931)484-2110. B. Mortar and Grout: Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide mortar and grout as manufactured by the following: •� 1. W. R. Bonsal Company,Charlotte,NC;(800)334-0784. 2. Dal-Tile,Dallas,TX;(918)627-5381. 3. Mapei Corp.,Elk Grove Village,IL;(800)426-2734. Nam 4. Laticrete International,Bethany,CT;(800)243-4788. 2.2 MATERIALS ■W A. Ceramic Tile - CT-1: Mosaic floor tile, 2 x 2 x 1/4 inch. Provide matching 2 inch cove base, inside and outside corners,and trim. 1. Color: .. a. Dal-Keystone,DK-326 Dapple Gray,by Dal-Tile. b. Egyptstones,C 18 Chariot Gray,by American Olean. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. B. Ceramic Tile - CT-2: Glazed wall tile, 4-1/4 x 4-1/4 x 5/16 inch. Provide matching inside and outside corners and trim. 1. Color: a. Dal-Matte,D-714 Steel,by Dal-Tile. b. Bright and Matte,80 Sterling Silver,by American Olean. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Ceramic Tile - CT-31: Wall tile, 6 x 6 inch (Crossville) or 2 x 2 inch (Dal-Tile). Provide matching inside and outside corners and trim. If 2 x 2 inch tiles are used,9 tiles must be installed for each 6 x 6 inch tile shown on the Drawings. 1. Color: a. A634 Terra Rosata,by Crossville Ceramics. b. 6549 Matte Cotto,by Dal-Tile. 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. D. Ceramic Tile - CT-32: Wall tile, 6 x 6 inch (Crossville) or 2 x 2 inch (Dal-Tile). Provide matching inside and outside corners and trim. If 2 x 2 inch tiles are used,9 tiles must be installed for each 6 x 6 inch tile shown on the Drawings. 1. Color: a. A310 Bamboo,by Crossville Ceramics. b. 6536 Matte Spice,by Dal-Tile. so 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. ow 09310-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ... UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 09310-CERAMIC TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic floor tile. 2. Ceramic tile base. 3. Ceramic wall tile. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Flooring substrate finish and preparation. 2. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Sealant at tile penetrations and control/construction joints. 3. Section 09250-Gypsum Board Systems: Water resistant gypsum board for wall tile substrate. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 2. ANSI A118.1 -Dry-Set portland Cement Mortar. 3. ANSI A118.4-Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. 4. ANSI A118.6-Ceramic Tile Grouts. 5. ANSI A137.1 -Recommended Standard Specifications for Ceramic Tile. B. Tile Council of America,Inc. (TCA): 1. TCA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to ANSI A137.1. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,Handle,Store,and Protect Products. B. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. C. Prevent damage or contamination to materials by water,freezing,foreign matter,and other causes. 1.5 SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesives in a closed,unventilated environment. B. Maintain 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials. 1.6 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide one unopened box of wall and floor tile with label indicating store number and date. Submit to Wal-Mart Construction Manager at Date of Substantial Completion. 09310-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 2. Level 3: Joints and interior angles have tape embeded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. Surface smooth and free of tool .. marks and ridges. a. Sales Areas. b. Public Toiletrooms. aw C. Customer Service and Layaway Areas. d. Courtesy Desk Area. C. Employee Toiletrooms. f. Breakroom,Training,UPC/Merch, and Offices. 3.9 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door and window frames, sliding window, and overhead coiling door frames. 2. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building accessory items installed within framing. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL J A. Inspect metal framing erection,placement,spacing,fasteners,and connections to building. B. Inspect gypsum board installation, fastener type,spacing,and finish level. .� C. Inspect installation of firestopping penetrations of fire-restive rated partitions and at voids between top of partition and building structure. D. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION w 09250-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,�, F. Install fasteners from center of field of panel toward ends and edges. Install fasteners 3/8 inch from ends and edges of panels,and as follows: 1. Ceiling: 12 inches on center,perimeter and field. 2. Walls: a. Standard: 16 inches on center,perimeter and field. b. Water-Resistant: 12 inches on center,perimeter and field. 3.6 INSTALLATION-GYPSUM SHEATHING A. Install gypsum board sheathing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions, GA-201, GA-216 and GA-600. ON 1. Erect single layer gypsum board horizontally,with attachment to firm bearing. B. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. Use longest practical length. C. Using screws,attach panels in place at maximum 12 inches on center,perimeter and field,to supporting framing. D. Protect exposed gypsum core at perimeter edges,and penetrations by covering core with metal trim. 3.7 JOINT TREATMENT A. Reinforce interior and exterior corners at ceiling and wall surfaces. Apply 3 inch wide initial coating of joint compound, pressing tape firmly into joint compound. Wipe off excess joint compound. Apply second coat of joint compound with tools of sufficient width to extend beyond joint center, approximately 4 inches. Draw joint compound down to a smooth even plane. B. After drying or setting, sand or sponge joints, edges, and corners, eliminating high spots and excessive joint compound to produce smooth finish surface. Prepare surfaces to receive subsequent finishes to height of 6 inches above finish ceiling. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces resulting in maximum camber of 1/32-inch in 12. C. Sand after second and third applications of joint compound. Do not to raise nap of paper when sanding. 04 D. Install control joints full height of partition,consistent with lines of building spaces,with 1/2 inch between boards. Apply sealant at base of joint and control joint accessory piece at face. No 1. At pairs of doors, install vertical control joint at each jamb. At single doors, install control joint at latch side of jamb. In long expanses of partitions,install control joints spaced at maximum of 30 feet on center. E. Place corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts Am dissimilar materials. 3.8 FINISH A. Apply 1 gypsum board finish in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA-214 Finish Levels. B. Provide gypsum board finish levels at locations as follows: 0" 1. Level 1: Joints and interior angles have tape embedment in joint compound. Surface free of excess joint compound. Tool Marks and ridges are acceptable. a. Areas above ceilings. $0% b. Concealed areas. C. Areas where Customers do not have access. d. Stockroom Area and Stockroom Area Corridors. e. Areas not indicated to receive Level 3 Finish. 09250-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 V_ CONNECTION FASTENER No Floor Track to Concrete ...................................................I................ 1 -Pin at 32 inches on center. Partition Stud to Floor Track ............................................................ 1 -Screw each side at each flange. Stud Brace Web to Stud Web ........................................................... 2-Screws. Plates and Straps to Studs 2-Screws. law ................................................................. Stud Web to Stud Web ..................................................................... 2- Screws. Stud Brace Web to Attachment Angle .............................................. 2-Screws. Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using clip Angles ........................ 2- Screws to stud and 2-Screws to cold am rolled channel. Runner to Header .............................................................................. 1 -Screw at 16 inches on center,maximum 6 inches from each end. 3.3 INSTALLATION-FURRING A. Furring Channels: +*� 1. Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, to masonry and concrete surfaces with hammer set or powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. 2. Nest channels 8 inches at splices and anchor with 2 fasteners in each wing. B. Wall Furring: 1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2. Space metal studs at maximum 16 inches on center. .,.� 3. Furring for Fire Rating: Install metal furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, and to GA-600 requirements. 3.4 ACOUSTICAL ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION A. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces,around cut openings,behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions as specified in Section �.. 07210. 3.5 INSTALLATION-GYPSUM BOARD s A. Install gypsum board in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and GA-201, GA 216, and GA- 600. 1. Use water resistant gypsum board at each Men's and Women's Toilet Room ceiling,each Toilet Room wall .. and ceiling,and each Janitor Room wall and ceiling. 2. Use fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies indicated on Drawings. 3. Use water and fire resistant gypsum board at locations of fire-resistive rated assemblies where water resistant gypsum board is specified. 4. Use standard gypsum board at locations not indicated to be fire resistant or water resistant type. B. Where applicable,install ceiling panels before the installation of wall panels. C. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction, with attachment to firm bearing surfaces over framing members. Do not align panel joints with edges of openings. D. Treat cut edges,holes, fastener heads, and joints,including those at angle intersections, in water resistant gypsum board and exterior gypsum soffit board with specified joint compound. Treat prior to installation. .w. E. Place gypsum panels over supporting framing members with panel ends aligning and parallel with framing members. 09250-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 E. Construct corners using minimum three studs. F. Double stud at wall openings,door and window jambs,maximum 2 inches from each side of openings. G. Place studs as indicated on Drawings,minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. H. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing cee joists specified in Section 05400. go 1. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. J. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. K. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to building structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. L. Maintain clearance under structural members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 1. Where indicated,construct partition to accommodate vertical deflection. 2. Contractor Option: Provide framing clip in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. a. Position clip with bushing positioned at center of slotted hole. b. Use a minimum of two fasteners per clip leg to connect clip to structure and partition framing. No C. Attach clip to each stud by screwing through the center of each step bushing. M. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bend at each end, fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3. Position a cut-to-length stud(extending to top runner)at vertical panel joints over door frame header. N. Lateral Bracing for Metal Studs: 1. In metal stud partitions and bulkheads where length of metal studs is over 8 feet, install lateral bracing using one of the following methods: a. Install 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channel through stud web holes and screw attach in place with clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie together. b. Install field-cut runner for solid bridging at each end of wall, adjacent to wall openings, and 10 feet on center maximum. Install 1-1/2 inch wide, 20 gage strap bracing on both sides of stud. Fasten strap bracing to each solid bridging runner section with four screws. 2. Gypsum Board Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: 3. Provide bracing at ceiling line or at mid-span of studs at areas without ceilings. 4. Wire Mesh Partitions: Space lateral bracing at the following intervals: a. Stud Length Greater Than 8 Feet and Up To 10 Feet: Provide bracing at midpoint. b. Stud Length Greater Than 10 Feet and Up To 15 Feet: Provide bracing at third points. C. Stud Length Greater Than 15 Feet and Up To 20 Feet: Provide bracing at quarter points. O. Install braced framing of steel stud framing as indicated on Drawings. Use only screw attachments. P. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions,wall cabinets,toilet accessories and hardware. Q. Framing Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 09250-5 r Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 F. Gypsum Board Fasteners: .. 1. Metal Framing: ASTM C 954 and C 1002, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion-resistant self-drilling self- tapping steel screws. a. One Layer 1/2 Inch: 1 inch. b. One Layer 5/8 Inch: 1-1/8 inch. am C. Two Layers: 5/8 Inch: 1-7/8 inch. G. Wood Furring: ASTM C 1002, 1-1/4 inch,Type W bugle head,corrosion-resistant self-drilling steel screws. go H. Gypsum Board Accessories: 1. Corner Beads: No. 104 Dur-A-Bead galvanized steel corner bead. 2. Edge Trim: Galvanized steel casing. a. No.200-13,L shape for tight abutment at edges. b. No.200-A,J shape at other locations. 3. Control Joint: No.093 roll-formed zinc. 4. Joint Materials: a. Reinforcing Tape: Sheetrock Joint Tape. b. Joint Compound: Sheetrock Ready-Mixed All-Purpose Joint Compound. C. Adhesive: Commercial Adhesive complying with ASTM C 557. 5. Acoustical Insulation: Unfaced fiberglass batts specified in Section 07210. 6. Firestopping: Furnish and install at penetrations of fire-resistive rated gypsum board wall as specified in Section 07840. 2.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING BOARD A. ASTM C 79 and ASTM C 1177;water resistant gypsum core surfaced on face and back with inorganic glass fiber mats; 1/2 inch thick,maximum permissible lengths;ends square cut. 1. Dens-Glass Gold gypsum sheathing as manufactured by Georgia-Pacific. 2. Substitutions: Not Permitted. , B. Sheathing Board Fasteners: ASTM C 954 and ASTM C 1002, 1-1/8 inch, Type S-12 bugle head, corrosion- resistant self-drilling steel screws. am PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION IWA A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive Work. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of erection and installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. Im 3.2 INSTALLATION-PARTITION FRAMING ow A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions,ASTM C 754, GA-201, GA- 216 and GA-600. B. Metal Stud Spacing: 1. Unless otherwise noted,provide interior framing at maximum 24 inches on center. C. Align stud web openings horizontally. D. Splice studs with minimum 8 inch nested lap,fasten each stud flange with minimum two screws. 09250-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 • F. Ceiling Joists, Tracks, Headers at Partition Openings, Framing Attachment Angles, and Fasteners: Specified in Section 05400. G. Partition Framing Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. 1. 22 Gage Framing: ASTM C 1002;3/8 inch Type S pan head. 2. 20 Gage and Heavier Framing: ASTM C 954; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head. ON H. Bracing to Framing Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling screws. I. Partition Floor Track Anchorage Device: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins; minimum 0.140 inch shank diameter x 1-1/2 inch shank length with 7/8 inch diameter washer. 1. DX 451 System using X-DNI Pins with R23 washers,by Hilti,Tulsa,OK. (800)879-8000. 2. Ramset/Red Head System using 470OSD Pins,by ITW Ramset/Redhead,Wood Dale,IL(708)350-1858. J. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head sleeve anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment. I. Slv Anch HX 5/16X2-1/2,by Hilti,Tulsa,OK (800) 879-8000. 2. Dynabolt HN-1413,by ITW Ramset/Redhead,Wood Dale,IL(708)350-1558. K. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to suit application. L. Flat Straps and Plates: ASTM A 525; galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on Drawings. M. Wood Furring,Blocking,Plywood,and Fasteners Attached to Partition Framing: Specified in Section 06100. N. Metal Stud Header Wall Framing and Bracing Supported from Roof Structure: Specified in Section 05400. O. Metal Stud Wall Framing at Partition Between Stockroom and Sales Area: Specified in Sectiion 05400. low 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: United States Gypsum Company,Chicago,IL. (800)874-4968. 1. United States Gypsum gypsum wallboard designations are used within this Section to identify gypsum wallboard and accessory types,unless noted otherwise. 2. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements, gypsum board and accessories of one of the following alternate manufacturers is acceptable: a. Domtar Gypsum,Ann Arbor,MI. (800)366-8271. b. Georgia-Pacific,Atlanta,GA. (800)284-5347. C. National Gypsum Company,Gold Bond Building Products,Charlotte,NC.(800)628-4662. B. Standard Gypsum Board: Sheetrock,ASTM C 36; 1/2 inch and 5/8 inch thick,maximum permissible length;ends square cut,tapered edges. OR C. Water Resistant Gypsum Board: Sheetrock WR, ASTM C 630, 1/2 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut,tapered edges. D. Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: Sheetrock Firecode Core, ASTM C 36, Type X; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths; ends square cut, tapered edges; core material as required to comply with Underwriters Laboratories(UL)assemblies indicated on Drawings. E. Water and Fire Resistant Gypsum Board: Sheetrock Firecode Core, ASTM C 630, Type X; 5/8 inch thick, maximum permissible lengths;ends square cut,tapered edges. - 09250-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. B. Protect metal framing from corrosion,deformation,and other damage during delivery,storage,and handling. *•® C. Store and protect metal framing with weatherproof covering,and ventilate to avoid condensation. D. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. E. Stack gypsum board flat to prevent sagging. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board in conformance with GA-216. 2. Maintain minimum 50 degrees F for 48 hours before application and finishing of gypsum board. Maintain temperature continuously until dry. Do not exceed 95 degrees F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Prevent drafts during hot, dry weather to avoid finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Manufacturer: Unimast Incorporated,Franklin Park,IL(800)969-4110. 1. Unimast framing component designations are used within this Section to identify framing types. .� 2. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements metal framing materials of equal type to those specified,by alternate manufacturers are acceptable. B. Interior Nonload-Bearing Partition Framing: ASTM A 525 and ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped,punched for utility access,depth and gages as indicated below unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. 1. Partition having an unbraced length of 12 feet or Less: Minimum 25 gage. 2. Partition having an unbraced length greater than 12 Feet: Minimum 20 gage. « 3. Partition (bulkheads) suspended from overhead having an unbraced length of 10 Feet or Less: Minimum 25 gage. C. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM A 525 and ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped, same depth and gage as studs,tight fit;solid web. D. Capture Track: Deep Leg Track at Roof Deck or Structure to provide vertical travel as indicated: Specified in ..► Section 05400. 1. Contractor Option: Provide framing clip to accommodate vertical deflection as indicated. 2. VertiClip by Signature Industries,Raleigh,NC (918/845-1025). E. Wall Furring and Partition Bracing: ASTM A 525 and ASTM C 645;galvanized sheet steel. 1. Studs: ST25- 2-1/2 inch deep, 25 gage. 2. Studs: ST25 -3-5/8 inch deep, 25 gage. 3. Hat-Shaped Channels: 7/8 inch deep x 1-1/2 inch wide,25 gage. 4. Cold-Rolled Channels: 3/4 x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 x 17/32 inch, 16 gage. 5. Z Furring Channel: 1-1/2 inch deep,25 gage. 6. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud width. . 09250-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 WW UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 09250-GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior nonload-bearing steel stud partition framing 20 gage and lighter(designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition). 2. Gypsum board. 3. Acoustic treatment. 4. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 5. Gypsum sheathing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Load-bearing steel stud exterior and interior wall framing 20 gage and heavier. Cold formed deep leg track for interior nonload-bearing steel stud partitions (designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition). 2. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips,plywood,and blocking. w 3. Section 07210-Building Insulation: Thermal and acoustical insulation. 4. Section 07840-Firestopping: Installation of firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated partitions. 5. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Paint finish applied to gypsum board. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 525 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM C 36-Specification for Gypsum Wallboard. 3. ASTM C 79-Test Method for Gypsum Sheathing Board. 4. ASTM C 557-Specification for Adhesives for Fastening Gypsum Wallboard to Wood Framing. 5. ASTM C 630-Specification Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board. 6. ASTM C 645 - Specification for Non-Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid po Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 7. ASTM C 754 - Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Wallboard, Backing board,or Water-Resistant Backing Board. 8. ASTM C 954 - Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs From 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. 9. ASTM C 1002-Specification Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board. 10. ASTM C 1177-Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. B. Gypsum Association(GA): 1. GA-201 -Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. 2. GA-214-Recommended Specification for Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. 3. GA-216-Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. 4. GA-600-Fire Resistance Design Manual. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of light gage metal framing components and gypsum wallboard with minimum 5 years documented experience. 09250-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..s H. Provide filler rod where sealants are used in the following locations: 1. Head and jamb channels. 2. Colored glass over 75 united inches in size. 3. Clear glass over 125 united inches in size. I. Acrylic Sheet Glazing: Set acrylic sheet on setting blocks at quarter points of sill. Provide filler rod or spacers to hold acrylic sheet centered in rabbet ready to receive glazing compound. Fill glazing rabbet with glazing com- pound in accordance with manufacturers instructions. 1. Protect acrylic sheet from excess sealant smears with paperback adhesive tape at edges adjacent to rabbets. A.. 3.4 INSTALLATION-BUTT GLAZED METHOD A. Temporarily brace tempered glass in position for duration of glazing process. Mask edges of glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members. B. Temporarily secure a small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint. C. Apply silicone sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation;thoroughly fill the joint without displacing the foam rod. Tool the sealant surface smooth to concave profile. D. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod. Apply sealant to opposite side, tool smooth to concave pro- file. E. Remove masking tape. 3.5 HORIZONTAL SLIDING WINDOW INSTALLATION A. Set sliding window assembly in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately prior to Wal-Mart acceptance of Project,replace broken or otherwise damaged glass. Wash and pol- ish glass inside and out. END OF SECTION ..a Rw .M w. 08800-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,, B. Spacers: Resilient blocks of 40 to 50 Shore A durometer hardness; self adhesive on one side; compatible with glazing sealant. C. Filler Rods: Closed cell or jacketed foam rods of polyethylene, butyl, neoprene,polyurethane, or vinyl;compati- ble with glazing sealant. D. Joint Cleaners,Primers,and Sealers: As recommended by glazing sealant manufacturer. E. Gaskets: ASTM D2000,SBC 415 to 313C 620;extruded or molded neoprene or EPDM,black. 2.4 HORIZONTAL SLIDING WINDOWS A. Sliding Window Unit - UPC/Merch.: Zinc-plated steel sliding glass window track assembly including upper channel, shoe, ball-bearing carrier, lower track, and nickel finish adjustable lock. Provide sliding glass window tes assembly Model No.KV P992 and Lock KV 965,as manufacturedby Knape&Vogt Manufacturing Company. 1. Glazing: Tempered glass,6.0 mm(1/4 inch)thick,clear,as specified in this Section. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean,free of obstructions,and ready for work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces;prime or seal where recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended application. B. Inspect glass edges immediately prior to setting; discard those with edge damage that will contribute to glazing failure. 40 3.3 GLAZING A. Locate setting blocks at quarter points of sill;set in sealant if heel or toe bead is required. B. Install spacers inside and out except where preshimmed tape or glazing gaskets are to be used. C. Set each piece in a series to other pieces in pattern draw,bow,or other visually perceptible characteristics. D. Provide glazing sealants and gaskets as required for particular glazing application. Coordinate with other Sections for material compatibility. E. Gaskets: 1. Provide adequate anchorage,particularly for driven-in wedge gaskets. 0 2. Miter and weld ends of channel gaskets at corners to provide continuous gaskets. 3. Seal face gaskets at corners with sealant to close opening and prevent withdrawal of gaskets from corners. F. Do not leave voids in glazing channels except as specifically indicated or recommended by glass manufacturer. Force sealant into channel to eliminate voids. Tool exposed surfaces to slight wash away from joint. Trim and clean promptly. G. Do not allow sealant to close weeps of aluminum framing. wi 08800-3 !! !! Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am B. Tinted Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048,Kind FT(Fully Tempered),Condition A(Uncoated),Type I(Transparent am Glass,Flat),Class 2(Tinted Heat Absorbing and Light Reducing),Quality q3 (Glazing Select). Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm(1/4 inch),unless indicated otherwise. UM 2. Color: Gray tint. 3. Location: a. Exterior storefront doors. 4. Identification: Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The ,,w identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. C. Wire Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (Wired Glass Flat), Class 1 (Clear), Form 1 (Wired, Polished Both Sides), Quality q8(Glazing),Mesh m2(Square)woven stainless steel wire of 1/2 inch grid size. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm(1/4 inch),unless indicated otherwise. 2. Location: Provide at interior and exterior glazing locations in fire rated assemblies. D. Insulated Units - Tinted Tempered Glass: Double pane units with inner pane of clear tempered glass and outer pane of gray tinted tempered glass,as specified above. 1. Glass Thickness: 6.0 mm(1/4 inch),unless indicated otherwise. wr 2. Color: Gray/Clear. 3. Unit Thickness: 1 inch thick units. 6.0 m (1/4 inch) thick, clear inner panes. 6.0 mm (1/4 inch) thick, m tinted outer panes. 1/2 inch air space between. 4. Location: Exterior storefront except for the following locations: ... a. Where 1/4 inch tinted glazing is specified for exterior storefront doors. b. Where clear insulated glazing is specified for transoms above exterior entrance doors. 5. Identification: Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. E. Acrylic Sheet: Clear acrylic plastic sheet, "Plexiglass", by Rohm and Haas Company. Grind exposed edges smooth,free of chips and hairline cracks. " 1. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 2. Location: Pharmacy and Photo Bullpen(if indicated on Drawings). F. Insulated Units - Clear Tempered Glass: Double pane units with both inner and outer panes of clear tempered glass as specified above. 1. Glass Thickness: 6.0 mm(1/4 inch),unless indicated otherwise. 2. Unit Thickness: 1 inch thick units; 6.0 mm (1/4 inch) thick inner and outer panes, with 1/2 inch air space between. 3. Identification: Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. 4. Location: a. Transom glazing above exterior entrance doors. 2.2 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Polysulphide Sealant: Two component,chemical curing,non-sagging type;cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. B. Silicone Sealant: Single component,chemical curing;capable of water immersion without loss of properties;non- bleeding,non-staining;cured Shore A hardness of 15-25. 1. Color: Clear. w► C. Acrylic terpolymer compounded especially for glazing;non-hardening,non-staining,and non-bleeding. 2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES MR A. Setting Blocks: Resilient blocks of 70 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness;compatible with glazing sealant. saw 08800-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 No UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 08800-GLAZING PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass and glazing for aluminum entrances and storefronts. 2. Miscellaneous interior fixed glazing. 3. Glazing sealants. 4. Door Glazing. 5. Horizontal sliding windows. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08110-Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and fixed window frames. 2. Section 08411 -Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Aluminum storefront framing system. IR 3. Section 08462-Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Glazed doors. 4. Section 08710-Door Hardware: Hardware coordination. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM C920-Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 2. ASTM C 1036-Flat Glass. 3. ASTM C 1048-Heat-Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS,Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. 4. ASTM D2000-Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive Applications. C. Flat Glass Marketing Association(FGMA): 1. FGMA-Glazing Manual and Glazing Sealing Systems Manual. D. Consumer Product Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing. CPSC 16 CFR,Part 1201. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Conform to FGMA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. 4m B. Provide permanent labeling for safety glass indicating conformance with specified standards. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GLASS MATERIALS A. Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT(Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated),Type I (Transparent Glass,Flat),Class 1 (Clear),Quality q3 (Glazing Select). Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm(1/4 inch),unless indicated otherwise. 2. Thickness: 10.0 mm(3/8 inch),at Vision Center butt glazing(when shown on Drawings). 3. Location: a. Interior glazing except where insulated units are specified. 4. Identification: Each unit of tempered glass shall be permanently identified by the manufacturer. The identification shall be etched or ceramic fired on the glass and be visible when the unit is glazed. 08800-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 MISCELLANEOUS MM MISCELLANEOUS SET Garden Center Seasonal Box(Threshold Transition Between Vinyl Tile and Concrete Slab) am 1 ea. (T-4) Threshold P 18/IA* * Install threshold butted to adjacent vinyl tile at Garden Center Seasonal Box where tile transitions to concrete slab centered .. to Action Alley where indicated on Drawings and Carpet/Tile Plan. Install threshold before Possession Date. END OF SECTION ■ .w w. 08710-28 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. ±0 VISION CENTER SET VC2A Door VC2A-Lab: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-5) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"NRP 652 I ea. (L-6) Office Lock Sc D50PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 1 ea. (S-5) Overhead Stop Ri 9-336 626 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 2 ea. (K-5) Kick Plates I 8400 630 SET VCSA Door VCSA-Utility: (HM,Single) ear Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-7) Passage Latch Sc D l OS Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers 1 20 2 ea. (K-5) Kick Plates 1 8400 630 SET VC6A Door VC6A-Exam Room: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-7) Passage Latch Sc D l OS Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 2 ea. (K-5) Kick Plates I 8400 630 1 pw ON on oft 08710-27 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PHARMACY SET PH1A Door PH1A-Pharmacy Workroom: (HM,Single,Half Door) Each door type will have: 1 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-6) Office Lock Sc D50PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 2 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 SET PH1B Door PH1B-Pharmacy Workroom: (HM,Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-6) Office Lock Sc D50PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 SET PH3A Door PH3A-Pharmacy Checkout: (HM,Single,Half Door) Each door type will have: 1 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-6) Office Lock Sc D50PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 2 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 SET PH4A Door PH4A-Pharmacy Toilet: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-8) Bathroom Privacy Lock Sc D40S Rhodes 626 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 .. 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 .w r. 08710-26 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 SNACK BAR SET SB1A Door SB IA-Snack Bar Serving Area: (Flexible Alum, Single) Each door type to have: Hardware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08381. Oft err 08710-25 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 SET 186A Door 186A-Garden Center: (Chain Link Gate,Single) Each door type to have: ..a 1 ea. (E-6) Exit Device w/Alarm De ECL-8010W Wetlock 626 1 ea. (L-3) Cylinder for Alarm Sc 20-022 626 All other hardware furnished by fence manufacturer as specified in Section 02831. SET 186B Doors 186B-Garden Center: (Chain Link Gate,Pair) Each door type to have: 2 ea. (E-6) Exit Device w/Alarm De ECL-801 OW Wetlock 626 2 ea. (L-3) Cylinder for Alarm Sc 20-022 626 All other hardware furnished by fence manufacturer as specified in Section 02831. SET 186C Doors 186C-Garden Center: (Chain Link Gate,Pair) Each door type to have: 2 ea. (E-6) Exit Device w/Alarm De ECL-801OW Wetlock - 626 2 ea. (L-3) Cylinder for Alarm Sc 20-022 626 All other hardware furnished by fence manufacturer as specified in Section 02831. .etA w. 08710-24 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..� Alf 0-0 SET 180A Door 180A-Stockroom: (HM, Single,w/Exit Device) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-1) Butts S FBB191 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"NRP 626 1 ea. (E-2) Alarm Exit Po THPA-30* 1 ea. (M-4) One-Way Viewer I 700 626 1 ea. (T-6) Threshold P 171A 1 ea. (W-7) Door Shoe P 222AV 1 ea. (W-3) Door Bottom Weatherstrip P 315CN 1 set (W-1) Jamb&Head Weatherstrip P 303AV 1 ea. (M-9) Drip Cap P 346C x FW *Owner furnished,Contractor installed. SET 180B Door 180B_' Stockroom: (Sectional Overhead) Each door type to have: we Hardware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08360. ! "! SET 180C Door 180C-Stockroom: (Sectional Overhead) Each door type to have: Hardware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08360. SET 180D Door 180D-Stockroom: (Sectional Overhead) Each door type to have: Hardware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08360. SET 185H Doors 185H-Seasonal Shop: (Aluminum/Glass,Bi-Parting Automatic w/Breakaway) Each door type to have: �► 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder Sc 20-001 626 1 ea. (L4) Thumbturn CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. Locking Device - See Section 08462. 1 ea. Threshold - See Section 08462. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. 08710-23 No Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 SET 174C Door 174C-Corridor: (Accordion Folding Door,UL Label) Each door type to have: Hardware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08352. Connect electronic closing device to smoke detector. SET 174D Doors 174D-Corridor: (HM,Pair,w/Exit Device,UL Label) Each door type to have: 3 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 2 ea. (E-3) Exit Device and Trim VD 9927L-F-BE-LBR 626 1 set (W-5) Door Gaskets P S88D Series .� 1 pr. (W-4) Meeting Style Gaskets P 303AS 1 ea. (M-10) Electromechanical Assembly Ri 0600&2600 Series SA SET 175C w� Door 175C-Photo Storage: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-5) Storeroom Lock Sc D80PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 - 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers 1 20 SET 176C Door 176C-Pharmacy Records/Storage: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-5) Storeroom Lock Sc D80PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers 1 20 w� ..w 08710-22 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,,� fflo SET 168A Doors 168A-Claims: (Wood and Wire Mesh,Pair) V Each door type to have: 2 pr. (H-8) Butts S 808BP 3"x 3" US2H 1 ea. (M-1) Safety Hasp&Staple SSP917 3-1/2" 602 ! 1 ea. (M-3) Surface Bolt I 40 3" 626 SET 169A Door 169A-Electrical/Telephone: (Wood and Wire Mesh,Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-8) Butts S 808BP 3 110" US2H 1 ea. (M-1) Safety Hasp&Staple SSP917 3-1/2" 602 SET 169B Door 169B-Electrical/Telephone: (Wood and Wire Mesh,Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-8) Butts S 808BP 3"x3" US2H 1 ea. (M-1) Safety Hasp&Staple SSP917 3-1/2" 602 SET 174A Doors 174A-Corridor: (HM,Pair,w/Exit Device) Each door type to have: 3 pr. (H-1) Butts S FBB191 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"NRP 626 2 ea. (E-2) Alarm Exit Po THPA-30* 2 ea. (T-6) Threshold P 171A 2 ea. (W-7) Door Shoe P 222AV 2 ea. (W-3) Door Bottom Weatherstrip P 315CN 2 set (W-1) Jamb&Head Weatherstrip P 303AV 1 ea. (M-9) Drip Cap P 346C x FW *Owner furnished,Contractor installed. SET 174B Door 174B-Corridor: (Accordion Folding Door,UL Label) Each door type to have: ' Hardware furnished by door manufacturer per Section 08352. Connect electronic closing device to smoke detector. 08710-21 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 SET 157C Door 157C-Security: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-5) Storeroom Lock Sc D80PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers 1 20 SET 161A Doors 161A-Sprinkler Room: (HM,Single) Each door type to have: �" 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-7) Passage Latch Sc D l OS Rhodes 626 Aft 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 SET 164A Door 164A-Lay-away: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x4-1/2" 626 1 ea. (L-6) Office Lock Sc D50PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 �. 1 ea. (T-4) Threshold P 18/1A SET 166A Door 166A-Gun Room: (HM,Single,UL Label) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-5) Storeroom Lock Sc D80PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (M-12) Lock Guard I 180 630 •�. 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 1 set (W-5) Door Gaskets P S88D Series SET 167A Door 167A-Sprinkler Room: (Wood and Wire Mesh, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-8) Butts S 808BP 3"0" US2H 1 ea. (M-1) Safety Hasp&Staple SSP917 3-1/2" 602 08710-20 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 40 SET 147A Door 147A-Men: (HM,Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (P-1) Push I 8200 630 1 ea. (P-2) Pull I 8314-5 630 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 1 ea. (K-2) Kick Plate I 8400 10"x(DW-2") 630 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 1 ea. (T-8) Threshold P 274A SET 152A Door 152A-UPC/Merch: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-5) Storeroom Lock Sc D80PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 SET 153A Door 153A-Training: (HM,Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-2) Butts S F179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-6) Office Lock Sc D50PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop 1 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 SET 155A Doors 155A-Fixtures: (Wood and Wire Mesh,Pair) Each door type to have: 2 pr. (H-8) Butts S 808BP 3"x 3" US2H 1 ea. (M-1) Safety Hasp&Staple SSP917 3-1/2" 602 1 ea. (M-3) Surface Bolt I 40 3" 626 0a 08710-19 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 SET 142A Door 142A-Cash Room: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-5) Storeroom Lock Sc D80PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 1 ea. (M-4) One-Way Viewer I 700 626 SET 142B Door 142B-Cash Room: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-5) Storeroom Lock Sc D80PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 1 ea. (M-4) One-Way Viewer I 700 626 SET 143A Door 143A-Management Office: (HM,Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (L-6) Office Lock Sc D50PD Rhodes 626 �. 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 SET 146A Door 146A-Women: (HM, Single) Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 "■"R 1 ea. (P-1) Push I 8200 630 1 ea. (P-2) Pull I 8314-5 630 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 1 ea. (K-2) Kick Plate I 8400 10"x(DW-2") 630 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 1 ea. (T-8) Threshold P 274A 08710-18 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. SET 105J 1!0 Doors 105J- Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Single,Single Acting) Each door type to have: 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder SC 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbtum CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. Deadbolt Lock - See Section 08411. on 1 ea. Closer - See Section 08411. 1 set Pivots - See Section 08411. I ea. Door Holder - See Section 08411. 1 ea. (T-5) Threshold P 255A All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Sections 08411. Signage: When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with durable,permanent signs, 1 inch high block letters of contrasting background,located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". SET 105K an Doors 105K-Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass,Bi-Parting Automatic w/Breakaway) Each door type to have: 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder Sc 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbturn CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. Locking Device - See Section 08462. 1 ea. Threshold - See Section 08462. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Signage: Provide durable,permanent signs,on egress side of each active and inactive leaf,in one inch high letters,in contrasting color to background to read: "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." When required by local authority having WA jurisdiction,post doors with signs located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". SET 141A Door 141A-Breakroom: (HM, Single) P4 Each door type to have: 1-1/2 pr. (H-4) Butts S FBB179 4-1/2"x 4-1/2" 652 1 ea. (P-1) Push I 8200 630 1 ea. (P-2) Pull 1 8314-5 630 1 ea. (C-1) Closer CR DC2210 689 1 ea. (S-1) Wall Stop I 407 630 3 ea. (M-8) Silencers I 20 08710-17 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..A SET 105F Doors 105F-Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass,Bi-Parting Automatic w/Breakaway) Each door type to have: e.eu 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder Sc 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbturn CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. Locking Device - See Section 08462. I ea. Threshold - See Section 08462. MW All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Signage: Provide durable,permanent signs,on egress side of each active and inactive leaf,in one inch high letters,in . , contrasting color to background to read: "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with signs located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". SET 105G Doors 105G- Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass,Single,Single Acting) Each door type to have: 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder SC 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbturn CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. Deadbolt Lock - See Section 08411. 1 ea. Closer - See Section 08411. 1 set Pivots - See Section 08411. 1 ea. Door Holder - See Section 08411. 1 ea. (T-5) Threshold P 255A All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Sections 08411. Signage: When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with durable,permanent signs, 1 inch high block letters of contrasting background,located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED , DURING BUSINESS HOURS". SET 105H Doors 105H- Vestibule(Cart Access): (Aluminum/Glass,Single, 1/2 Door,Single Acting) Each door type to have: 1 ea. Keyed Cylinder Sc 20-001 626 1 ea. Thumbturn CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. (T-5) Threshold P 255A 1 ea. Closer - See Section 08411. Pivots - See Section 08411. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Sections 08411. .r. 08710-16 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 SET 105C Doors 105C-Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass,Pair,Single Acting) Each door type to have: PR I ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder Sc 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbtum CR 1300-118 626 an 1 ea. (T-2) Threshold P 271A 1 ea. Flush Bolt/Interlocking Device - See Section 08411. 2 ea. Closer - See Section 08411. 2 sets Pivots - See Section 08411. 2 ea. Door Holder - See Section 08411. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Sections 08411. No Signage: When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with durable,permanent signs, 1 inch high block letters of contrasting background,located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". SET 105D Doors 105D-Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Single-Slide Automatic w/Breakaway) Each door type to have: 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder Sc 20-001 626 4A 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbtum CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. (T-2) Threshold P 271A 1 ea. Locking Device - See Section 08462. All other hardware fumished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Signage: Provide durable,permanent signs,on egress side of each active and inactive leaf,in one inch high letters,in contrasting color to background to read: "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with signs located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". SET 105E Doors 105E- Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass,Single,Single Acting) go Each door type to have: 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder SC 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbtum CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. (T-2) Threshold P 271A 1 ea. Deadbolt Lock - See Section 08411. 1 ea. Closer - See Section 08411. u 1 set Pivots - See Section 08411. 1 ea. Door Holder - See Section 08411. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Sections 08411. Signage: When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with durable,permanent signs, 1 inch high block letters of contrasting background,located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". A 08710-15 March 10,2000 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts SET 100D Doors 100D-Sales Area: (HM,Pair,w/Exit Device) Each door type to have: 3 pr. (H-1) Butts S FBB191 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"NRP 626 2 ea. (E-2) Alarm Exit Po THPA-30* 2 ea. (T-6) Threshold P 171A 2 ea. (W-7) Door Shoe P 222AV "` 2 ea. (W-3) Door Bottom Weatherstrip P 315CN 2 set (W-1) Jamb&Head Weatherstrip P 303AV 1 ea. (M-9) Drip Cap P 346C x FW *Owner furnished,Contractor installed. SET 105A Doors 105A- Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Single,Single Acting) Each door type to have: 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder SC 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbturn CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. (T-2) Threshold P 271A 1 ea. Deadbolt Lock - See Section 08411. 1 ea. Closer - See Section 08411. 1 set Pivots - See Section 08411. 1 ea. Door Holder - See Section 08411. All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Sections 08411. Signage: When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with durable,permanent signs, 1 inch high block letters of contrasting background,located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". .,. SET 105B Doors 105B-Vestibule: (Aluminum/Glass, Single-Slide Automatic w/Breakaway) Each door type to have: .s. 1 ea. (L-1) Keyed Cylinder Sc 20-001 626 1 ea. (L-4) Thumbtum CR 1300-118 626 1 ea. (T-2) Threshold P 271A 1 ea. Locking Device - See Section 08462. *"* All other hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified in Section 08462. Signage: Provide durable,permanent signs,on egress side of each active and inactive leaf,in one inch high letters,in .. contrasting color to background to read: "IN EMERGENCY PUSH TO OPEN." When required by local authority having jurisdiction,post doors with signs located on header framing,reading"THESE DOORS MUST REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING BUSINESS HOURS". 08710-14 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. 3.4 HARDWARE SCHEDULE SET 100A Doors 100A-Sales Area: (HM,Pair,w/Exit Device) Each door type to have: 3 pr. (H-1) Butts S FBB 191 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"NRP 626 2 ea. (E-2) Alarm Exit Po THPA-30* 2 ea. (T-6) Threshold P 171A 2 ea. (W-7) Door Shoe P 222AV 2 ea. (W-3) Door Bottom Weatherstrip P 315CN 2 set (W-1) Jamb&Head Weatherstrip P 303AV 1 ea. (M-9) Drip Cap P 346C x FW ! ! *Owner furnished,Contractor installed. SET 100B Doors 100B-Sales Area: (Flexible Aluminum,Pair) Each door type to have: 1 ea. (T-4) Threshold P 18/1A 2"x DW x 1/8" Hardware furnished by door manufacturer,Section 08381. SET 100C Doors 100C-Sales Area: (HM,Pair,w/Exit Device) Each door type to have: 3 pr. (H-1) Butts S FBB191 4-1/2"x 4-1/2"NRP 626 2 ea. (E-2) Alarm Exit Po THPA-30* 2 ea. (T-6) Threshold P 171A 4'" 2 ea. (W-7) Door Shoe P 222AV 2 ea. (W-3) Door Bottom Weatherstrip P 315CN 2 set (W-1) Jamb&Head Weatherstrip P 303AV 1 ea. (M-9) Drip Cap P 346C x FW *Owner furnished,Contractor installed. PP 00 PP 08710-13 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 6. Type(W-6): Automatic Door Bottom Seal a. Seal 223A National Guard b. Seal 4131CRL Pemko. C. Seal 320C Reese. 7. Type(W-7): Door Shoe Weatherstripping. .. a. Door Shoe 222AV Pemko. C. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.12 FABRICATION A. Finish and Base Material Designations: Number indicate BHMA Code or nearest traditional U.S. commercial . finish. B. Where base material and quality of finish are not otherwise indicated, provide at least commercially recognized quality specified in applicable Federal Specifications. 2.13 SIGNAGE war A. When required by local jurisdiction having authority,provide signage in one inch high letters, in contrasting color to background to read: "This door to remain unlocked during business hours." Doors requiring signage will be indicated on either the hardware schedule or door schedule. slow B. Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Provide signage, on egress side of each active and inactive leaf, in one inch high letters, in contrasting color to background to read: "In Emergency Push To Open." Doors requiring signage will be indicated on either the hardware schedule or door schedule. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive Work and dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware Mounting Heights: Door and Hardware Institute Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames,except as otherwise indicated. 1. Conform to requirements of applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the ' installation and operation of door hardware. B. Install each hardware item to comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. .■. C. Thru-bolt closers on doors. No D. Vestibule Thresholds: Set and bolt into grout. 3.3 ADJUSTING oft A. Hardware Adjustment: Return to project one month after Owner's occupancy, and adjust hardware for proper operation and function. Instruct Wal-Mart personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment. 08710-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .er 4. Type (T-4): Aluminum threshold, beveled 1 side only. Transition threshold between Concrete slab and Vinyl Tile. a. Threshold 818CP 2"x DW x 1/8" National Guard. b. Threshold 18/1A 2"x DW x 1/8" Pemko. Set threshold in full bed of silicone sealant,butted to adjacent vinyl tile. Anchor into concrete slab with Hilti Kwik-Con II,#14-134 TFH fasteners spaced at 8 inch centers. 5. Type(T-5): a. Threshold 325 National Guard. b. Threshold 255A Pemko. C. Threshold S245A Reese. 6. Type(T-6): a. Threshold 525 National Guard. b. Threshold 171A Pemko. C. Threshold S205A Reese. 7. Type(T-7): Rubber or cast aluminum threshold,beveled 1 side only. Transition threshold between Vinyl Tile and Quarry Tile. a. Threshold SBR.5F 5-5/8"x DW x 1/2" Pemko. b. Threshold 815M 4"x DW x 1/2" American. C. Threshold FBR 4"x DW x 1/2" Safe-T-Metal. d. Threshold 115M 4"x DW x 1/2" Wooster. 8. Type(T-8): a. Threshold 274A Pemko. b. Threshold S814A Reese. C. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.11 WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Weatherstripping Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from one of the following manufacturers as specified below. 1. National Guard. 2. Pemko. 3. Reese. B. Weatherstripping by types: 1. Type(W-1): Jamb&Head Weatherstripping. a. Weatherstripping 155 National Guard. b. Weatherstripping 303AV Pemko. C. Weatherstripping 807A Reese. 2. Type(W-2): Door Shoe Weatherstripping. a. Door Shoe 35A National Guard. b. Door Shoe 217AV Pemko. C. Door Shoe DB596F Reese. 3. Type(W-3): Door Bottom Weatherstripping. a. Door Bottom 201NA National Guard. b. Door Bottom 315CN Pemko. C. Door Bottom 323A Reese. 4. Type(W-4): Meeting Stile Gaskets. a. Gasket 160S National Guard. b. Gasket 303AS Pemko. C. Gasket 807A Reese. 5. Type(W-5): Door Gaskets. a. Gasket 5050 National Guard. b. Gasket S88D Pemko. C. Gasket 797B Reese. 08710-11 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 b. Viewer 850 Quality. C. Viewer 620 Rockwood. 5. Type(M-5): UL. listed extention flu sh bolt. a. Flush Bolt(UL) 458 12" 626 Ives. b. Flush Bolt(UL) 1358 12" 626 Quality. .� C. Flush Bolt(UL) 3917 12" 626 Trimco. 6. Type(M-6): a. Automatic Flush Bolt F137 626 Glenn-Johnson. b. Automatic Flush Bolt 559 Ives. ... C. Automatic Flush Bolt 842 (DCI) 7. Type(M-7): a. Electric Strike FA712 Fail Secure Folger Adam. �• b. Electric Strike 1639- 10 Fail Secure Precision. C. Transformer: 40VA, 120VAC to 24VAC with provisions for mounting in a standard 1/2" knockout. No.599,by Edwards. d. Push Button: Single button with one normally open contact and one normally closed contact. No. KR3BH13,by Square D. 8. Type(M-8): a. Silencers 20 Ives. ww b. Silencers 1337-A Quality. C. Silencers 1229-A Trimco. 9. Type(M-9): a. Drip Cap 16AD National Guard. M b. Drip Cap 346C x FW Pemko. C. Drip Cap R201A Reese. 10. Type(M-10): a. Electromechanical assembly.Electromechanical Closer / Holder Device, when scheduled, shall consist of the following: (1)2600 Detectored unit x 120 VAC x SA and(1)0600 Non-detectored unit x 120 VAC x SA field wired in series as manufactured by Rixson. 11. Type(M-11):Provide device with mortise cylinder to control"ann/disarm"circuit with spare keys. a. Door Alarm PG20MS 626 Alarm Lock. b. Door Alarm 130 Series AL 626 Arrow. •■► 12. Type(M-12): a. Lock Guard 180 630 Ives. 2.10 THRESHOLDS A. Threshold Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from one of the following manufacturers as specified below. 1. Pemko. 2. National Guard. 3. Reese. 4. Wooster. 5. American Safety Tread. 6. Safe-T-Metal. B. Thresholds by types: 1. Type(T-1): Heavy-duty abrasive cast aluminum(Alumogrit). a. Threshold 114 5" Wooster. 2. Type(T-2): a. Threshold 513 National Guard. b. Threshold 271A Pemko. C. Threshold S405A Reese. 3. Type(T-3): Heavy-duty abrasive cast aluminum(Alumogrit). a. Threshold 115M 5" Wooster. 08710-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ... 3. Type(K-3): J101 ! a. Armor Plate 8400 34"x(DW-2") 630 Ives. b. Armor Plate No.48 34"x(DW-2") 630 Quality. C. Armor Plate 1025 34"x(DW-2") 630 Trimco. ,go d. Armor Plate J101 34"x(DW-2") 630 Rockwood. 4. Type(K-4): J101 a. Armor Plate 8400 36"x(DW-2") 630 Ives. b. Armor Plate No.48 36"x(DW-2") 630 Quality. C. Armor Plate 1025 36"x(DW-2") 630 Trimco. d. Armor Plate J101 36"x(DW-2") 630 Rockwood. 5. Type(K-5): J102 a. Kick Plate 8400 18"x(DW-2") 630 Ives. b. Kick Plate No.48 18"x(DW-2") 630 Quality. C. Kick Plate 1025 18"x(DW-2") 630 Trimco. d. Kick Plate J102 18"x(DW-2") 630 Rockwoo 2.9 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE A. Miscellaneous Hardware Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from the following manufacturers as specified below. 1. Alarm Lock. 2. Arrow. 3. (DCI) 4. Folger Adam. 5. Glenn-Johnson. ! ! 6. Hager. 7. Ives. 8. Lawrence. 9. LCN. 10. National Guard. 11. Pemko. 12. Precision. 13. Quality. 14. Reese. 15. Rixson. 16. Rockwood. 17. Stanley. 18. Trimco. B. Silencers: Provide in metal door frames, unless not permitted for fire rating, or unless bumper-type weatherstripping is provided;three for each single door frame,two for double-door frame. C. Miscellaneous Hardware by types: 1. Type(M-1): a. Hasp&Staple SP917 3-1/2" 602 Stanley. b. Hasp&Staple WS1920 3-1/2" 602 Hager. C. Hasp&Staple 930 602 Lawrence. 2. Type(M-2): a. Surface Bolt CD4060 4" 626 Stanley. b. Surface Bolt 144 4" 626 Ives. 3. Type(M-3): a. Surface Bolt 40 3" 626 Ives. b. Surface Bolt B 3" 626 Quality. 4. Type(M-4): Mounted/installed,centered at 5'-0"AFF. a. Viewer 700 Ives. 08710-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 w. 2.7 PULLS AND PUSHES MP A. Pulls and Pushes Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from one of the following manufacturers as specified below. 1. H.B. Ives. 2. Quality. 3. Trimco. 4. Rockwood. B. Materials: ANSI A156.6 for 0.050 inch thickness. C. Push and Pulls by types: 1. Type(P-1): a. Push 8200 630 Ives. b. Push 1001 -2 630 Trimco. C. Push 40 3-1/2 x 15 630 Quality. d. Push 70B 630 Rockwood. 2. Type(P-2): a. Pull 8314-5 630 Ives. .� b. Pull 1012-2 630 Trimco. C. Pull 4310 3-1/2 x 15 630 Quality. d. Pull 137 x 70B 630 Rockwood. 3. Type(P-3): 8" CTC x 3/4"diameter. a. Pull 8103-8 626 Ives. b. Pull 1194-2 626 Trimco. C. Pull 161 -8" 626 Quality. w d. Pull 107 626 Rockwood. D. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.8 DOOR PROTECTION PLATES A. Mop, Kick and Armor Plate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from one of the following manufacturers as specified below. I. Ives. 2. Quality. 3. Trimco. 4. Rockwood. B. Materials: J100 Protection Plates conforming to ANSI 156.6, stainless steel, 0.050" (1.2 mm) minimum thickness, beveled edges (B4E) four sides. Mount centered, flush with bottom of door. Screws: Phillips head sheet metal screws plated to match plate. C. Protection Plates by types: so 1. Type(K-1): J102 a. Kick Plate 8400 8"x(DW-2") 630 Ives. b. Kick Plate No.48 8"x(DW-2") 630 Quality. *" C. Kick Plate 1025 8"x(DW-2") 630 Trimco. d. Kick Plate J102 8"x(DW-2") 630 Rockwood. 2. Type(K-2): J102 ..s a. Kick Plate 8400 10"x(DW-2") 630 Ives. b. Kick Plate No.48 10"x(DW-2") 630 Quality. C. Kick Plate 1025 10"x(DW-2") 630 Trimco. d. Kick Plate J102 10"x(DW-2") 630 Rockwood. " 08710-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,�, 8. Type(E-8): Rim delay exit device,exit only with alarm assembly. a. Delay Exit Device w/Alarm CX99EO 626 Von Duprin b. Power Transfer#EPT-10 C. Mini-Power Booster#PS 871 an 9. Type(E-9): Owner Furnished;Rim exit device,exit only,with alarm. a. Alarm Exit THPA-70 600 Positive Lock. G. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.6 STOPS,HOLDERS AND BUMPERS A. Stop and Holder, Floor and Wall Stop, and Bumper Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide from one of the following manufacturers as specified below. 1. H.B.Ives. 2. Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co.,Inc. 3. Trimco. 4. Dor-O-Matic. 5. Glenn-Johnson. B. Materials: 1. Door stop mounting: Methods to suit substrates encountered (plastic anchor, drywall anchor, expansion shield). 2. Provide gray rubber exposed resilient parts. 3. Do not furnish aluminum floor stops. 4. For most doors, the preferred door stop is Wall Stop type (S-1) and is specified as such in the hardware schedule. However,if circumstances prevent a wall stop installation(door too far from perpendicular wall, door swing into adjacent glass, etc.) then substitute a type (S-3) or (S-4) floor stop as indicated for use intended. 5. Adjust height of floor stops to suit undercut of adjacent door. C. Stops,Holders and Bumpers by types: PW 1. Type(S-1): Install with appropriate anchors for substrate encountered. a. Wall Stop 407 630 Ives. b. Wall Stop W307TB 630 Quality. C. Wall Stop W 1276CS 630 Trimco. 2. Type(S-2): a. Stop&Holder 445 626 Ives. b. Stop&Holder 136 626 Quality. C. Stop&Holder 1207 626 Trimco. 3. Type(S-3): For doors without threshold. a. Stop 436 626 Ives. b. Stop 331 626 Quality. so C. Stop 1211 ES 626 Trimco. 4. Type(S-4): For doors with threshold or undercut doors. a. Stop 438 626 Ives. b. Stop 432 626 Quality. C. Stop 1212 3/4ES 626 Trimco. 5. Type(S-5): For doors where floor or wall stop is not approprate. a. Overhead Stop 9-336 626 Rixson. b. Overhead Stop 904S 626 Glynn-Johnson. C. Overhead Stop 594S 626 Sargent. D. Substitutions: None accepted. 08710-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 D. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.5 EXIT DEVICES A. Exit Devices: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide exit devices of one of the following manufacturers and as specified below. I. Adams Rite. 2. Corbin Russwin. .w 3. Monarch. 4. Yale. 5. Von Duprin. M0 B. Weatherproof Exit Device with Alarm: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide weatherproof exit device with alarm as manufactured by the following. 1. Detex. am C. Alarm Exit: Alarm exit as specified below will be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor. 1. Positive Lock- Contact: Phillip Murders,(800)342-7670. .k D. Delay Alarm Exit: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide delayed exit device with alarm as manufactured by the following. 1. Von Duprin Chexit device. E. Materials: 1. Provide exposed metal to match hardware. 2. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. F. Exit Devices by types: 1. Type (E-1): Owner Furnished; Rim exit device, exterior access, with alarm and removable core lock cylinder. a. Alarm Exit(Ext Acc) THPA(O/A)-30 600 Positive Lock. 2. Type(E-2): Owner Furnished;Rim exit device,exit only,with alarm. a. Alarm Exit THPA-30 600 Positive Lock. 3. Type(E-3): Surface vertical rod(top rod only)exit device,lever trim,blank escutcheon,UL listed for fire. a. Exit Device 3100T x 3077-91 626 Adams Rite. b. Exit Device F-18-V LE-LS/LK Dane 626 Monarch. C. Exit Device 9927L-F-BE-LBR 626 Von Duprin. 4. Type (E-4): Concealed vertical rod exit device, lever trim, blank escutcheon, UL listed for fire for ow oversized doors. a. Exit Device F-18-C LE-LS/LK Dane 626 Monarch. b. Exit Device 9948L-F-BE 626 Von Duprin. 5. Type(E-5): Rim exit device,lever trim,blank escutcheon,UL listed for fire. .., a. Exit Device 3700 x 3077-97 626 Adams Rite. b. Exit Device ED5200A x N710 626 Corbin Russwin. C. Exit Device F-18-R LE-LS/LK Dane 626 Monarch. d. Exit Device 7100-F x AU528F 626 Yale. e. Exit Device 99L-F-BE 626 Von Duprin. 6. Type(E-6): Rim exit device,weatherproof,exit only,with alarm. a. Exit Device w/Alarm ECL-8010W Wetlock 626 Detex .� 7. Type(E-7): Rim exit device,pull trim. a. Exit Device ED5200 x T1357 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Exit Device 18-R P Apollo 626 Monarch. C. Exit Device 7100 x 532 626 Yale. d. Exit Device 99NL x 697NL 626 Von Duprin. 08710-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,,, NOTE: Button pushes and turns,Corbin Russwin,Sargent and Yale. Push button only, Schlage,Falcon,and PDQ. 7. Type(L-7): ANSI F75 a. Passage Latch CL3410-NZD-217L13 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Passage Latch T 101 -D 626 Falcon. C. Passage Latch ST 126-PHL 626 PDQ. d. Passage Latch IOU 15 LL 626 Sargent. e. Passage Latch D10S-Rhodes- 10-025 626 Schlage. f Passage Latch 5401LN-AU-497 626 Yale. 8. Type(L-8): ANSI F76 a. Privacy Lock CL3420-NZD-217L13 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Privacy Lock T301 -D 626 Falcon. C. Privacy Lock ST 176-PHL 626 PDQ. d. Privacy Lock 10U65 LL 626 Sargent. e. Privacy Lock D40S-Rhodes- 10-025 626 Schlage. "M f. Privacy Lock 5402LN-AU-497 626 Yale. 9. Type(L-9): a. Dead Bolt Lock DL2011 626 Corbin Russwin b. Dead Bolt Lock D421 626 Falcon. C. Dead Bolt Lock 626 PDQ. d. Dead Bolt Lock 486 626 Sargent. e. Dead Bolt Lock B461P 626 Schlage f. Dead Bolt Lock 8532B 626 Yale D. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.4 CLOSERS A. Closers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide closers of one of the following manufacturers and as specified below. 1. Corbin Russwin. 2. LCN. 3. Norton. 4. Yale. B. Materials&Features: 1. ANSI A156.4,Grade 1. 2. ADA/ANSI A117.1 3. UL.listed. +M 4. Non-Handed,Non-Sized;adjustable 1-6. 5. 180 degree door opening. 6. Heavy Duty parallel arm. 7. Standard Cover. am 8. Multiple backcheck location valve. 9. Extreme temperature fluid. 10. Sex nuts and bolts(SNBs). 11. Provide exposed metal to match hardware. 12. Size and mount units indicated or, if not indicated, to comply with manufacturer's recommendations for exposure condition. Reinforce substrate as recommended. C. Closers by types: 1. Type(C-1): a. Closer DC2210-A3 689 Corbin Russwin. b. Closer 4110 689 LCN. C. Closer P7700 689 Norton. d. Closer 3501 689 Yale. 08710-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 4. Sargent. 5. Schlage. 6. Yale. B. Materials: 1. Cylindrical Locks: ANSI A156.2, Series 4000 Grade 1, equipped with 6-pin tumbler; "keyed alike". Provide 2-3/4 inch backset. Provide two keys for each lock. 2. Mortise Locks: ANSI A156.13, Grade 1, equipped with 6-pin tumbler; "keyed alike". Provide 2-3/4 inch ,111e backset. Provide two keys for each lock. 3. Latch Sets: Provide push-button releases by turning lever, closing door, or turning emergency release key through hole in outside knob. 4. Strikes: ANSI Strikes, 1-1/4 x 4-7/8 inches, with curved lip. Wrought box strikes, with extended lip for latch bolts,except open strike plates may be used in wood frames. Provide dustproof strikes for foot bolts. 5. Tactile Warning: Provide locks with tactile warning for handicapped codes when required by local jurisdiction having authority. .. C. Locks by types: 1. Type(L-1): Mortise Cylinder. a. Cylinder 1000-118-A03 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Cylinder 985 626 Falcon. C. Cylinder 41 626 Sargent. d. Cylinder 20-001 626 Schlage. e. Cylinder 2153 626 Yale. 2. Type(L-2): Mortise Cylinder. a. Cylinder 1000-114-A02 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Cylinder 986 626 Falcon. C. Cylinder 42 626 Sargent. d. Cylinder 20-001 - 1-1/4" 626 Schlage. e. Cylinder 2153 626 Yale. .. 3. Type(L-3): Rim Cylinder. a. Cylinder 3000-200 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Cylinder 951 626 Falcon. C. Cylinder 34 626 Sargent. d. Cylinder 20-022 626 Schlage. e. Cylinder 1109 626 Yale. 4. Type(L-4): M. a. Thumbturn 1300-118-A03 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Thumbtum 985-T 626 Falcon. C. Thumbturn 626 PDQ. d. Thumbturn 124-41 626 Sargent. e. Thumbturn S2053S 626 Yale. 5. Type(L-5): ANSI F86 a. Storeroom Lock CL3457-NZD-217L13 626 Corbin Russwin. b. Storeroom Lock T581 -D 626 Falcon. C. Storeroom Lock ST 115 -PHL 626 PDQ. d. Storeroom Lock 1OG04 LL 626 Sargent. e. Storeroom Lock D80PD-Rhodes-025 626 Schlage. f. Storeroom Lock 5405LN-AU-497 626 Yale. 6. Type(L-6): ANSI F82 a. Office Lock CL3451-NZD-217L13 626 Corbin Russwin. ., b. Office Lock T501 -D 626 Falcon. C. Office Lock ST 182-PHL 626 PDQ. d. Office Lock 1OG05 LL 626 Sargent. e. Office Lock D50PD-Rhodes- 10-025 626 Schlage. f. Office Lock 5407LN-AU-497 626 Yale. .ft 08710-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..� A OR 2.2 HINGES A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hinges of one of the following manufacturers and as specified below: ON 1. Hager. 2. McKinney. 3. Stanley. on B. Substitutions: None accepted. C. Material: 1. Provide full mortise-type hinges with stainless steel pins, except steel pins with steel hinges; non-removable for exterior and public interior exposure, non-rising for non-security exposure, flat button with matching plugs. 2. Ball-bearing Type: Swaged,inner leaf beveled,square corners. D. Hinges by types: 1. Type(H-1): Medium weight door,average frequency,bronze. a. Butts FBB191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 Stanley. b. Butts BB 1191 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 Hager. C. Butts TB2314 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 McKinney. 2. Type(H-2): Medium weight door,low frequency,steel. a. Butts F179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley. b. Butts 1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Hager. C. Butts T2714 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 McKinney. 3. Type(H-3): Medium weight door,low frequency,steel. a. Butts F179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 Stanley. b. Butts 1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 Hager. on C. Butts T2714 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 McKinney. 4. Type(H-4): Medium weight door,average frequency,steel. a. Butts FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Stanley. b. Butts BB 1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 Hager. C. Butts TB2714 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 McKinney. 5. Type(H-5): Medium weight door,average frequency,steel. a. Butts FBB179 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 Stanley. b. Butts BB 1279 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 Hager. C. Butts TB2714 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 McKinney. 6. Type(H-6): Heavy weight door,high frequency,bronze. a. Butts FBB168 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 Stanley. W_ b. Butts BB 1168 4-1/2 x 4 1/2 NRP 626 Hager. C. Butts T4133786 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 626 McKinney. 7. Type(H-7): Not Used. 8. Type(H-8): Surface mounted hinge. a. Hinge 808BP 3 x 3 US2H Stanley. b. Hinge 1808 3 x 3 US2H Hager. C. Hinge 705 3 x 3 US2H McKinney. v E. Substitutions: None accepted. 2.3 LOCKS,LATCHES,AND BOLTS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide locks, latches and bolts of one of the following manufacturers and as specified below: 1. Corbin Russwin. 2. Falcon. 3. PDQ. 08710-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors and frames. " 2. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 3. Conform to applicable local, State or Federal disabled access requirements for the installation and *�+ operation of door hardware. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Product Designations: Manufacturers indicated in the "Hardware Schedules" in Part 3 of this Section are the preferred manufacturers. Provide products of equivalent quality,design, and function by approved manufacturers listed in the respective Part 2 Article. B. Hardware Manufacturer Designations: 1. A Adams Rite. (213)699-0511 2. AL Alarm Lock Systems,Inc. (800)252-5625 3. AM American Safety Tread Co.,Inc. (800)245-4881 4. Ar Arrow (800)233-0478 5. Bo Bommer. (817)626-3182 6. CR Corbin Russwin. (203)225-7411 7. De Detex (800)729-3839 8. D Dor-O-Matic. (800)543-4635 9. DCIDoor Controls International (800)742-3634 10. F NT Falcon Lock (800)266-4456 11. FA Folger Adam Co. (708)739-3900 12. GJ Glynn-Johnson. (800)525-0336 13. H Hager Hinge Co. (800)325-9995 14. I H.B.Ives. (203)294-4837 15. L Lawrence Brothers,Inc. (815)625-0360 16. LCN LCN Closers (800)526-2400 17. Mc McKinney (717)346-7551 18. Mo NT Monarch Hardware (800)826-5792 19. Na National Guard Products,Inc. (800)647-7874 20. No Norton (800)438-1951 21. P Pemko Mfg.Co. (805)642-2600 22. PDQ PDQ Industries,Inc. (800)441-9692 23. Po Positive Lock (800)342-7670 24. Pr Precision. (313)843-1850 25. Q Quality Hardware Manufacturing Co.,Inc. (901)525-7847 26. Re Reese Enterprises,Inc. (800)328-0953 27. Ri Rixson. (312)671-5670 28. Ro Rockwood. (814)926-2026 29. Saf Safe-T-Metal Co. (800)886-7238 30. Sa Sargent. (203)562-2151 31. Sc Schlage.(415)467-1100 32. Si Simplex. (919)725-1331 33. S Stanley. (800)622-4393 34. T Trimco. (213)262-4191 35. VD Von Duprin. (317)897-9944 36. W Wooster Products Inc. (800)321-4936 37. Y Yale. (704)283-2101 38. Z Zero. (800)752-7325 08710-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 „� W UniSpec II-Base 123199 SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE on PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY on A. Section Includes: 1. Hardware for doors. 2. Thresholds. on 3. Weatherstripping,seals and door gaskets. B. Products Installed,But Not Furnished Under This Section: "1 1. Under provisions of Section 01600, Owner will furnish "Positive Lock" alarm exit device for installation by Contractor as described within this Section. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Provisions for Owner Furnished Items. 2. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Non-shrink grout for thresholds. 3. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Blocking for miscellaneous hardware mounting. 4. Section 06200-Finish Carpentry: Hardware for cabinetry and other finish carpentry. 5. Section 08110-Steel Doors and Frames: Hardware coordination. Louvers in doors. 6. Section 08360-Sectional Overhead Doors: Hardware and signage coordination. op 7. Section 08411-Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Hardware coordination. 8. Section 08462-Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Hardware coordination. 9. Section 16100-Wiring Methods: Electrified hardware coordination. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI Al 17.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. National Fire Protection Institute(NFiPA): ! ' 1. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. NFPA 252-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. go C. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL IOB-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 2. UL 305 -Panic Hardware. w. 1.3 SUBMITTALS OR A. Section 01300-Submittals: Procedures for submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE an A. Perform work in accordance with the following requirements: 1. ANSI A 117.1 2. NFPA 101. Ali 3. NFPA 80. 4. NFPA 252. 5. UL 10B. 6. UL 305. 08710-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 BLANK PAGE 08620-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work under this Section is to be performed. Do not proceed with Work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install skylights on manufactured curbs provided under Section 07721 in accordance with manufacturer's pub- lished instructions. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings. Provide weathertight in- stallation. B. Apply bituminous paint on aluminum surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals. C. Apply sealant between skylight frames and skylight curbs as specified in Section 07900. A D. Skylight Orientation: Unless noted otherwise,install skylight with long dimension perpendicular to steel bar joist. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate fabrication, dimensions, and attachment methods of skylight units to manufactured curb assemblies with manufactured curb manufacturers listed in Section 07721. 2. Provide skylight fabrication drawings to manufactured curb manufacturer for verification of exact dimensions and attachment methods prior to fabrication of manufactured curb assemblies. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect skylight installation and attachment to manufactured curbs. Verify that installation is weathertight. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. END OF SECTION 08620-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Section 01600-Material and Equipment: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Description: Plastic thermalized sealed double glazed dome skylights. Im B. Models: 1. Bristolite: Energy Star Model ES-CM-2-ESA-MF. 2. Sunoptics: Sunrise Arch Model 800-IBWMSC 5060-MF-DG-C/63WP-SW-ITB-SSG. 3. Naturalite: Model TLTW. C. Skylight Glazing Panels: 1. Minimum Energy Requirements: a. Clear Panel: 1) Light Transmittance: 92 percent. 2) Shading Coefficient: 0.89. b. White Panel: 1) Light Transmittance: 52 percent. 2) Shading Coefficient: 0.44. 2. Bristolite: a. Outer Panel: Acrylic clad fiberglass b. Inner Panel: Clear acrylic. aea 3. Sunoptics: a. Outer Panel: 3/16 inch clear acrylic. b. Inner Panel: SR25 white prismatic acrylic 6mm Clear Thermoclear. 4. Naturalite: a. Outer Panel: 3/16 inch 2067 acrylic high transmitting white. b. Inner Panel: 6mm Clear Thermoclear. D. Frame: 0.078 inch extruded aluminum with polyurethane thermal break design and 0.062 inch extended aluminum dome retaining angle. 1. Frame Finish: Manufacturer's standard mill finish. E. Inside Outside Curb Dimensions: Nominal 60 inches by 72 inches. Verify with selected skylight manufacturer. F. Mounting of skylight assembly to be adapted and coordinated with manufactured curbs. 2.3 SKYLIGHT CURBS A. Specified in Section 07721. 2.4 ACCESSORIES .�r A. Sealant: As recommended by skylight manufacturer. B. Fasteners: Stainless steel 300 series. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate skylights weathertight and free of visual distortions and defects. B. Seal glazing panels to base frame, allowing for sufficient expansion and contraction; provide weeping hole ar- rangement. 08620-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,� UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 08620-UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY RM A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated acrylic dome skylights and aluminum frames. 2. Installation of skylights on manufactured roof curbs. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07721 -Manufactured Curbs: Curbs for mounting of skylight assemblies. 2. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Application of sealant around skylights. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association(AA): 1. Specifications for Aluminum Structures. B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA): 1. AAMA 1605.1 - Voluntary Standard Uniform Load Test Procedure for Plastic Glazed Skylights by Uniform Static Pressure Differences. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Plastic unit skylights shall conform to recommendations of the AA Specifications for Aluminum Structures and AAMA Publication 1605.1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Skylight units and plastic glazing shall be approved by ICBO, SBCCI, or BOCA and possesscurrent Evaluation Report prepared by the respective evaluation service, where required by the authority having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Section 01600-Material and Equipment: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. B. Handle,deliver,and store in manufacturer's original packaging,following manufacturer's recommendations. C. Store in a dry area and in a manner to prevent damage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 1. Bristolite Skylights,Santa Anna,CA (800)854-8616. 2. Naturalite Skylight Systems,Terrell, TX Phone: (800) 527-4018 FAX: (972) 551-6420.Contact: Sharon Woods,Account Representative. 3. Sunoptics Prismatic Skylights,Sacramento,CA (800)289-4700. 08620-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .s 4w an am BLANK PAGE +wr .w. 08462-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION(BY OWNER) A. Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Owner's automatic entrance door supplier will install automatic entrance doors. 1. Install hardware using templates provided, and in accordance with ANSI A 117.1 requirements for hardware. a. Keyed Cylinder: Install at 48 inches above finish floor. END OF SECTION tai 00 08462-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 5. Stiles:2-1/4 inches. 6. Glass: a. Interior Doors and Transom Glazing Above Exterior Doors: Clear tempered glass; ASTM C1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated), Type I (Transparent Glass, Flat), Class 1 (Clear),Quality q3 (Glazing Select). Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201. 1) Thickness: 6.0 mm(1/4 inch). 2) Identification: Permanently identify by manufacturer. Etch or ceramic fire identification on glass visible when unit is glazed. b. Exterior Doors (But Not Including Transom Glazing): Tinted tempered glass; ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (Fully Tempered), Condition A (Uncoated), Type I (Transparent Glass, Flat), Class 2 (Tinted Heat Absorbing and Light Reducing), Quality q3 (Glazing Select). Conform to ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16CFR Part 1201. *■ 1) Thickness: 6.0 mm(1/4 inch). 2) Color: Specifed in Section 08800. 3) Identification: Permanently identify by manufacturer. Etch or ceramic fire identification on ... glass visible when unit is glazed. B. Finish: Match finish of aluminum entrances and storefronts specified in Section 08411. C. Door Hardware and Accessories: 1. Pivots: Allows sliding panel and sidelights to break away to full open position to provide immediate egress at any point in door movement. dbi 2. Top Door Arm: Door holders for all break-away door panels. 3. Quick disconnect wiring harness. 4. Power Switch: 5 position"On/Off/Hold Open"switch;full automatic,reduced automatic,and exit only. 5. Adjustable door sweeps(exterior doors only). 6. Finger Protection: Provide finger protection between sidelight and sliding door when door is in open position. 7. Lock: w. a. Cylinder: Slide doors shall include two point lock securing lead edges of door styles together and to hanger assembly. 8. "Watchdog"monitoring of microprocessor. 9. Keyed Cylinder: Furnished by Section 08710. Im 10. Thumbturn: Furnished by Section 08710. 11. Perimeter pile weatherstripping. 12. Panic break-away must be code approved,acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 00 13. Thresholds: a. Bi-Parting Slide Doors-Vestibule Exterior: Besam for entrance mat(surface installed)floor finish, opening width plus 2 inches minimum length. b. Bi-Parting Slide Doors - Garden Center: No. 114-5 inch, heavy duty abrasive cast aluminum no threshold,by Wooster Products,Inc. C. Single Slide Doors-Vestibule Interior: No threshold. 14. Glass Guards: Nominal 1/2 inch by 2 inch aluminum bar with 1 inch projection from mounting surface. an a. Bi-Parting Slide Doors - Vestibule Exterior: Center glass guard at 6 inches above finish floor on interior side of sliding doors and on exterior side of fixed sidelights; align with glass guards on storefront system entrance doors as indicated on Drawings. b. Bi-Parting Slide Doors - Garden Center: Center glass guard at 6 inches above finish floor on 400, exterior side of sliding door. C. Single Slide Doors-Vestibule Interior: Center glass guard at 6 inches above finish floor on interior side of sliding door and on exterior side of fixed sidelight; align with glass guards on storefront M, system entrance doors as indicated on Drawings. w■ .. 08462-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 sm PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Besam Incorporated,Hightstown,NJ. 2.2 AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS(OWNER FURNISHED-OWNER INSTALLED) A. Automatic Bi-Parting Entrance Doors: Overhead concealed slide door system with sidelights and transom, full breakout of doors and sidelights, and doorway monitoring device to control door opening, closing, and hold open functions installed within aluminum storefront system. I. Power-Glide AMD-2 as manufactured by Besam,in the following locations: a. Vestibule Exterior Doors B. Automatic Bi-Parting Entrance Doors: Overhead concealed slide door system with sidelights, full breakout of doors and sidelights, and doorway monitoring device to control door opening, closing, and hold open functions installed within a masonry opening. 1. Power-Glide AMD-2 as manufactured by Besam,in the following location: a. Garden Center Doors C. Automatic Single Slide Entrance Doors: Overhead concealed slide door system with sidelights and transom, full breakout of doors and sidelights, and doorway monitoring device to control door opening, closing, and hold open functions. 1. Power-Glide AMD as manufactured by Besam,in the following location: a. Vestibule Interior Doors. D. Door and Transom Sizes: Indicated on Drawings. 2.3 OPERATING SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. Activating Devices: 1. Eye-Cue doorway monitoring system door opening, closing, and hold open control center-mounted above doorway on each side of header. 2. Integral sensing device automatically reversing door when obstruction is detected during closing cycle, returning door to full open position. B. Motion Detection: Eye-Cue adjustable motion detection field covering area of full doorway width and 5 foot maximum out from doorway. no C. Presence Detection: 1. System constantly detects motionless persons or objects for area of full doorway width and extends 24 inches each side of door active leaf. 2. Microprocessor software self-adjusts to changes in floor conditions. D. Power Requirements: Dedicated 115V AC, 10 Amp, 60 Hz, single phase power with solid earth ground connection for each automatic door package; two 24V N.E.C. Class II wires from manual controls to door frame header. 2.4 DOORS,HARDWARE,AND ACCESSORIES A. Doors: Narrow stile aluminum doors. 1. Top Rail Active Leaf. 2-1/2 inches high. 2. Top Rail Sidelite: 3-13/16 inches high. 3. Bottom Rail: 10 inches high. 4. Horizontal Muntins: Provide two muntins, locate at 24 inches and 42 inches above finish floor. Align with bumper guards and push bars on aluminum storefront system entrance door as indicated on Drawings. 08462-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Design system to operate, hold open and close doors under design wind and suction loads calculated in accordance with applicable code. System shall perform to these criteria under a windload of 20 PSF. 2. Provide for thermal expansion and contraction of door and frame units,transmitted to operating equipment. 3. Provide for dimensional distortion of components during operation. 4. Provide for opening and closing operation of door panels in the event of power failure. 5. Operating Temperature Range: -20°F to 160°F ambient. 6. Eliminate system performance interference by ambient light and radio frequencies. 7. Provide for manual open and close operation of door leaves in the event of power failure. Sliding doors and side panels to have break-away capability. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for automatic release of control drive unit to permit manual opening of doors. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.1 and ANSI A117.1. B. Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Contractor shall convene a pre-installation conference at the site, one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section, including, but not a" limited to, Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Contractor Project Field Superintendent, Aluminum Storefront job foreman, Automatic Entrance Door Manufacturer's Technical Representative, electrical subcontractor field supervisory personnel,and any subcontractor,supplier,or installer directly affecting,or affected by Work of this Section. a` 2. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager two weeks prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. 3. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related 40 work. 4. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to automatic entrance door Work,including the following: ""�" a. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of door assembly openings, connections to building structure, electrical requirements,and other preparatory work performed by other trades. b. Review automatic entrance door system requirements (drawings, specifications and other contract ow documents). C. Review required submittals,both completed and yet to be completed. d. Review and finalize construction schedule related to automatic entrance door Work and verify availability of materials,installer's personnel,equipment and facilities needed to make progress and so avoid delays. e. Review required inspections,operational testing,and certifying procedures. f. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable .. conditions. 1.5 WARRANTY Aw A. Provide manufacturer's two year warranty under provisions of Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions. B. Include coverage for complete system for failure to meet specified requirements. Warranty shall include material ow and labor for repairs and adjustments. an MW 08462-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ow UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 08462-AUTOMATIC SLIDING ENTRANCE DOORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electric operated automatic sliding entrance doors with transom assemblies. 2. Control System: Motion detection and hold open safety system. 3. Doors,frames,glazing,and hardware. B. Products Furnished and Installed Under Separate Contract (NIC): Under provisions of Section 01600, Owner's Ipa automatic entrance door supplier will furnish and install automatic entrance doors as described within this Section. 1. Owner's Supplier: Besam,Inc., Hightstown,NJ. Contact: Keith Buckalew,National Sales Manager(800) 752-9290. 2. Supplier's Responsibilities: a. Furnish and install automatic entrance doors including doors, frames, glazing, transoms, hardware, and operating system. b. Attend pre-installation conference(Supplier's local authorized distributor). 00 3. Contractor's Responsibilities: a. Provide openings,size as scheduled on Drawings,with head and jambs as detailed. b. Convene a pre-installation Conference. C. Coordinate installation with automatic entrance door supplier and local authorized distributor. d. Provide power and make final electrical connection. e. Furnish thumbtums and cylinders as specified in Section 08710. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 08411 - Aluminum Framed Storefronts: Coordinate interface with aluminum entrances and storefront system. Match color of Storefront system. 2. Section 08800-Glazing: Storefront glass. 3. Sections in Division 16: Power to door operator controls. Coordinate for location of service to door operator. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI Al 17.1 - Specification for Making Building and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI Z97.1 -Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 1048- Heat Treated Flat Glass-Kind HS,Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. C. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA): 1. BHMA A156.10-American National Standard for Power Operated Pedestrian Doors. PP D. Consumer Products Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing: CPSC 16 CFR,Part 1201. E. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. F. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc. (UL): Re 1. UL 325 -Electric Door,Drapery,Gate,Louver,and Window Operators and Systems. 08462-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..s Ow •w A. wo 00 BLANK PAGE w Ow ww so dim am Ow 08411-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am H. Install hardware using templates provided and in accordance with disabled access regulatory requirements for hardware. Refer to Section 08710 for cylinders and installation requirements. 1. Cylinder and Thumb turn: 48 inches above finished floor. ±fir I. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. J. Adjust operating hardware and crash bars for smooth operation. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plane: 0.03 inches per foot maximum or 0.25 inches per 30 feet,whichever is less. B. Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 0.015 inches. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect storefront system installation and attachment to building structure. on B. Inspect entrance door operation and hardware installation. C. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.5 CLEANING A. Wash down exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warn water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. B. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. END OF SECTION oil !r 4^ 08411-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2.5 FABRICATION ow A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. am B. Rigidly fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints and connections flush,hairline,and weatherproof. C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. .• D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchorage items. Arrange fasteners, attachments, and jointing to ensure concealment from view. .w E. Prepare components with internal reinforcement for door hardware. F. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. lq"" 2.6 FINISHES A. Exposed Aluminum Surfaces: Architectural Class II anodic coating, AA-M12 C22 A31, #17 Clear, unless aw otherwise indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain same color range on all components. Do not mix light and dark shades. AW C. Concealed Steel Items: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A386 to 2.0 oz/sq ft. D. Apply two coats of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings are ready to receive work of this Section. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION wMe A. Install storefront system components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame assembly to structure. C. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. D. Break Metals: 1. Set sill flashing in full bed of sealant.Provide riveted end laps of not less than 3 inches. E. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. "f F. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 07900. G. Install glass in accordance with Section 08800,to glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. •s 08411-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Pivots: 1. Off-set Pivots: For single acting doors. 2. Intermediate Pivots: For single acting doors, adjustable, load bearing, surface applied; to match door finish. C. Push/Pulls: Type CP-2 push and type CO-9 pull, by Kawneer Company, Inc. Finish: #14 Clear Anodized. Mount push bar at 42 inches above finish floor. D. Door Holder(Exterior doors only): 1221-4 cast iron, finish to match door color,by Trimco-Triangle Brass Mfg. Co. E. Weatherstripping(Exterior doors only): 1. Head and Jamb: Replaceable wool, polypropylene, or nylon wool pile with aluminum strip backing, recessed in frame;AAMA 701.2. ,rr 2. Sill: Semi-rigid polymeric material on aluminum anodized to match door; EPDM sweep strip; 38-560 by Kawneer or similar by other named manufacturers. F. Threshold: See Section 08710. G. Bumper Guards: Nominal 1/2 inch by 2 inch aluminum bars, one centered 6 inches above finish floor, the other centered 24 inches above finish floor, flush mounted stile-to-stile. Coordinate with Section 08461 and Section 08462. 1. Install bumper guards both faces of interior and exterior Vestibule doors. 2. Install bumper guards both faces of Garden Center doors. H. Flush Bolt/Interlocking Device:- 1. Exterior Doors: Provide one of the following: a. Controller Locking System,by Kawneer. b. Model No. 6233-1063, 3 point lock (jamb, header, and threshold bolts), by Reflectolite Products Co.,Inc.,(818)834-2433. 2. Interior Doors: Provide one of the following: a. Model No. 6233-1063,2 point lock(jamb and header bolts only),by Reflectolite Products Co., Inc., ""' (818)834-2433. 3. Substitutions: None accepted. 4. Install flush bolt/interlocking device on pairs of storefront doors indicated as an exit in the Store. ear Coordinate with Section 08710,Hardware Schedule,for doors requiring flush bolt/interlocking device. I. Deadbolt Locks: Mortise type,Adams Rite MS-1850A with 4089 exit indicator, less cylinder. See Section 08710 for cylinders and thumbturns. 1. Install deadbolt lock on single doors. 2. Install deadbolt lock on pairs of storefront doors not indicated as an exit. J. Flush Bolts: Kawneer top and bottom flush bolts. 1. Install flush bolts in inactive leaf on pairs of storefront doors not indicated as an exit. K. Hardware Schedule: Provide hardware as scheduled for each exterior entry/exit double doors under this Section. Coordinate additional hardware requirements with Section 08710-Door Hardware. 1. Off-set pivot hinges,top and bottom 2. Intermediate Pivots wr 3. Closers 4. Decal 5. Weatherstripping 6. Threshold,coordinate with Section 08710 7. Push/Pull Sets 8. Deadbolt Locks,coordinate cylinder with Section 08710. 9. Flush Bolt/Interlocking device on pairs of doors. 08411-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Kawneer Company,Inc. 1. Manufacturer's National Accounts Contact: a. Central Area: Franklin,IN,(317)738-2600,FAX: (800)755-4639. b. Eastern Area:Bloomsburg,PA,(717)784-8000,FAX:(800)786-4097. , C. Southern Area:Jonesboro,GA,(770)478-8841,FAX: (800)800-4789. d. Western Area:Visalia,CA,(209)651-4000,FAX:(800)759-2810. B. Substitutions: Subject to compliance with requirements,one of the following manufacturers may also be provided. aw 1. EFCO Corporation;Monett,MO;(800)221-4169. 2. Southwest Aluminum Systems,Inc.;Chandler,AZ;(602)961-2000. 3. Tubelite,Inc.;Reed City,MI;(800)866-2227. AW 4. U.S.Aluminum Corporation;Waxahachie,TX;(800)627-6440. 5. Vistawall Architectural Products;Terrell,TX;(800)869-4567. C. Additional Substitutions: None Accepted. 2.2 FRAMING w► A. Interior Framing System: TRIFAB 11 450, by Kawneer Company, Inc. 1-3/4 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, minimum wall thickness of 0.080 inches,extruded aluminum flush glazed framing system. B. Exterior Framing System: TRIFAB II 451, by Kawneer Company, Inc. 2 x 4-1/2 inch nominal dimension, aw minimum wall thickness of 0.080 inches,extruded aluminum flush glazed framing system. C. Column Covers: 0.040 inch aluminum,by Kawneer. Finish to match that of storefront system. ► D. Receptor Channel: Model No.450-038 and 65-025,by Kawneer Company,Inc. Finish to match that of storefront system. ow 2.3 DOORS A. Doors: Series 350 swing door,medium stile,by Kawneer Company,Inc. Door sizes indicated on Drawings. +w 1. Top Rail: 6-1/2 inch,single piece. 2. Bottom Rail: 12 inch,single piece. 3. Glazing: 1/4 inch thick units per Section 08800,with standard bevel glass stops. r� 2.4 HARDWARE A. Closers: 1. Single Acting Doors: Heavy duty, parallel arm only, surface closer meeting ADA-90 requirements, independently hung, with adjustable back check and 100 degree hold-open; slim line half covers, spray painted aluminum to match aluminum storefront system. Attachment: Thru-bolted in door. No drop- 4*, plates allowed. a. Dorma 760 IPA Series. b. LCN P1461. C. Norton 8301BF. 4M d. Russwin 2820DA. e. Yale 3301BF. 08411-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 • 40 go UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 08411 -ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS op PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum doors,frames and glazed lights. 2. Anchors,brackets,and attachments. 3. Door hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08462-Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors: Coordination between components. 2. Section 08710-Finish Hardware: Coordinate cylinders,thresholds and other hardware. 3. Section 08800-Glazing: Glass products. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E283 -Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows,Curtain Walls and Doors. 2. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ! ' B. Federal Specification(FS): 1. FS TT-P-31 -Paint,Oil: Iron Oxide,Ready Mixed,Red and Brown. 2. FS TT-P-641 -Primer Coating: Zinc Dust-Zinc Oxide(for Galvanized Surfaces). C. Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990: Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. D. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): Iow 1. ANSI Al 17.1 -Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. is 1.3 SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Air Infiltration: ASTM E283,infiltration not to exceed 0.06 CFM per sq. ft.of fixed area. 2. Water Infiltration: ASTM E331,no water penetration at a test pressure of 8.0 psf. 3. Structural Performance: Maximum deflection of 1/175 of span. Allowable stress with 1.65 safety factor. System shall perform to these criteria under a windload of 20 psf. w 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to disabled access requirements of the following: 1. State or Local requirements(where applicable). 2. ANSI A117.1. 3. ADA (Americans with Disabilities Act- 1990) requirements for entrance door access, entrance doors and pa hardware. 08411-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 MAN C. Door: High impact traffic door with polyethylene outer skin over high density urethane foam and easy swing r, gravity-type hinge with adjustable spring assist to maintain closed door position. D. Gasketing: Full perimeter gasketing. am E. View Window: 24 x 24 inch(Frommelt) 20 1/2 x 22 1/2 inch(Chase-Durus), clear acrylic safety window set in black rubber molding. .R F. Hardware: As required for installation conditions. G. Impact Bumper: Impact absorbing tear drop shaped bumper,24"high. wo H. Color: Metallic Gray. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive work and opening dimensions and clearances are as indicated on Draw- ings. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. oft 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install door unit assembly to manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's location and installation drawings. B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten door assembly to door frame construction without distortion or imposed * stresses. C. Fit and align door assembly level and plumb. D. Adjust door assembly to provide smooth operation from closed to full open position. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION ' A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Flexible door supplier to provide location and installation drawings to Contractor. 2. Indicate type of door to be installed at each door opening. 3. Include manufacturer's published instructions for installation of doors attached to manufacturer's location and installation drawings. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. dit B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water,applied with soft,clean wiping cloths. Wipe "' surfaces clean. END OF SECTION ..w, ,. 08383-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 om UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 08383 -FLEXIBLE TRAFFIC DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum double acting swinging traffic doors. 2. Plastic double acting swinging traffic doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Prepared opening with steel channel jambs and head. 1.2 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect Products. B. Deliver product in manufacturer's original unopened packages with labels legible and intact. C. Labels shall identify manufacturer,brand name,model size,finish,and location of installation. D. Store double doors and accessories in unopened packages in protected dry area to prevent damage from environ- mental and construction operations. E. Handle double action doors with care to prevent damage. go PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE ALUMINUM TRAFFIC DOORS A. Easy Swing LWP3 Interior Double-Acting Door,by Eliason Corporation,Kalamazoo,MI;(800)828-3655. B. Substitutions: Subject to compliance with requirements,one of the following may be substituted for that specified. I. Type 2-Double Acting Door,by Carlson Products. 2. Series 2000 Rigid Traffic Doors,by Chase-Durus;(800)543-4455 or(513)821-3939. W C. Door: Standard lightweight aluminum door of 0.063 inch, 6061-T6 aluminum alloy with satin anodized finish both faces. Form edges for stiffness and easy swing gravity-type hinge with no springs. D. Hardware: As required for installation conditions. E. View Window: 6 x 34 inch(200 sq in),clear acrylic safety window set in black rubber molding. F. Impact Bumper: 34 inch high, 18 gage,stainless steel impact plates at each side of door. G. Jamb Guards: 5 x 18 inch high,steel jamb guards. 2.2 FLEXIBLE PLASTIC TRAFFIC DOORS A. Durulite Standard Traffic Doors,by Chase-Durus;(800)543-4455 or(513)821-3939. �r B. Substitutions: Subject to compliance with requirements,the following may be substituted for that specified. 1. Series 9000,by Frommelt;(800)553-4834. Custom color required by Manufacturer. 00 08383-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 so D. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard,chrome plated. ws E. Thermal Resistance: Minimum R= 14.86. Insulation: Polyurethane. .,1► 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate door sections not more than 24 inches high,with horizontal meeting edges rolled to form weather seal. am B. Enclose ends and provide reinforcing required for stability. C. Finish: Baked-on enamel manufacturer's standard white. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION BY OWNER A. Sectional Overhead Doors: Owner's overhead door supplier will install sectional overhead doors. At Stockroom doors only,position stops so that when door is in up position,bottom edge of door is minimum of 12"above top of .. masonry opening. At all other sectional overhead doors,bottom edge of door in up position shall be flush with top of opening. 3.2 INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Provide grouted concrete masonry unit cells or, at Contractor's option, steel plates for attachment of track and counterbalance mechanism. Coordinate plate sizes, areas to be grouted, and locations with Owner's sectional .� overhead door supplier. END OF SECTION A .l► w 08360-2 March 10,2000 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts •� UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 08360-OVERHEAD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manually operated sectional overhead doors. B. Products Furnished and Installed Under Separate Contract(NIC): 1. Under provisions of Section 01600, Owner's overhead sectional door supplier will furnish and install overhead sectional doors as described within this Section. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Coordinate installation with overhead door installer. 2. Provide openings,size as scheduled on Drawings,with head,jambs,and sill as detailed. 3. Provide grouted concrete masonry unit cells and steel plates required for attachment of sectional overhead door to wall. 4. Provide sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section 07900. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. Ifr 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Maximum deflection, no greater than 0.03 inches per foot of opening width for the following wind load. 1. Wind load:20 psf. B. Operation: Manual lift. Full vertical and high lift operating styles with track and hardware as indicated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS(OWNER FURNISHED-OWNER INSTALLED) A. Model: Series 591,by Overhead Door Corporation,Lewiston,PA. B. National Account Contact: Brian Foutz,(800)972-1730,Facsimile(972)830-8697. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Steel Door Sections: Minimum .016 inch steel (interior and exterior face) G60 galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653;face pattern manufacturer's standard. B. Tracks,Supports,and Accessories: 3 inch track;galvanized;with ball bearing roller guides,brackets,bracing, and reinforcing. 1. Track: Full vertical track and high lift track as indicated on Drawings. 2. Weather Seal: Manufacturer's standard perimeter weather seals at head,jambs,and door bottoms. C. Counterbalance: Manufacturer's standard torsion spring mechanism for manual operation. 08360-1 r Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 w B. Doors will be installed in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. �. 3.4 INSTALLATION BY CONTRACTOR A. Install smoke detectors as specified in Section 13850 at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Connect power and smoke detectors to Accordion Folding Door system in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions,NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 16100. C. Finish installation in accordance with Contractor Responsibilities specified in Part I of this Section. 3.5 CONSTRUCTION A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate construction of door openings. 2. Coordinate smoke detector installation and connection to door operating system. 3. Coordinate permanent electrical power and power connection to door operating system. A 3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Site Tests: Upon completion of installation, test operation of accordion folding door. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager 48 hours before scheduled test. �.. 1. Make all necessary adjustments as required and retest. 2. After acceptance of test results,re-set door to original position. B. Inspection: 1. Inspect accordion folding door and operating system installation. 2. Inspect smoke detector connections to door operating system. 3. Inspect power connections to door operating system. 4. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING w A. Adjust operation of doors for smooth, quiet operation. Verify that all operations are functional and meet the requirements of the applicable codes and regulations. B. Upon completion of installation,protect doors from damage. Replace or repair damaged doors. END OF SECTION 4M „0. 08352-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �,,, C. Motors operated by direct current(DC)power supplied from a 12-volt maintenance free battery located in the electronic control box. d. Batteries are continuously charged by the building's electrical service and be automatically maintained at capacity. e. Doors are operated manually in either the conventional or emergency mode. 2. Electronic Control Box: Houses the microprocessor logic board,interconnect board, 12-volt maintenance free battery,power supply charger,and motor control relays. Microprocessor will initiate a loud audible signal in the following conditions: a. High or low AC voltage b. High or low DC voltage C. Drive train malfunction !W d. Limit switch malfunction e. Key switch malfunction f. ROM or RAM check-sum error. 3. Motor Drive Assembly:DC gear motor,limit switch,torque limiting device,drive sprocket and clutch. Motor drives fire door by means of a chain attached to stabilizer bar trolley. B. Leading Edge Obstruction Detector: Doors are equipped with pressure sensitive leading edge such that each 04 contact with an obstruction will cause the door to stop and pause before attempting to re-close. 1. Doors can be manually opened at any time by pushing against the leading edge. C. Exit Hardware will be located on both sides of each fire door. In emergency mode, a slight pressure on the hardware will cause the door to open a minimum of 32 inches,pause for three seconds,then automatically close. 1. Hardware is field programmable to allow automatic opening distances of up to entire opening width. 2. In the conventional mode,the hardware may be used to open door and move it back into the storage pocket. 2.4 ACCESSORIES 00 A. Smoke Detectors(Contractor Furnished-Contractor Installed): Specified in Section 13850. 2.5 FINISHES A. Color: Manufacturer's standard#55 platinum. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Contractor and Owner's Accordion Folding Door Supplier shall jointly examine existing conditions prior to start of door installation. B. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which doors are to be installed. Report conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Verify openings are the dimensions indicated. 2. Verify headers are level and parallel with finish floor. C. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare for installation in accordance with Contractor Responsibilities specified in Part 1 of this Section. 3.3 INSTALLATION BY OWNER A. Accordion Folding Doors will be installed by Owner's Accordion Folding Door Supplier personnel. 08352-3 n Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Product Packaging: Accordion folding doors will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with .� identification markings on each component or package. C. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bills of Lading provided with products. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered,or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart immediately. Upon notification,Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. AW D. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Owner's Accordion Folding Door Supplier. Upon notification,Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. E. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. 1. Store Accordion Folding Doors at site ready for installation by Accordion Folding Door Supplier. 00, 2. Store doors inside building in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. PART 2-PRODUCTS ,rr 2.1 ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS(OWNER FURNISHED-OWNER INSTALLED) A. Manufacturer: Won-Door Corporation,Salt Lake City,UT. ..�, 1. National Accounts Sales Manager: David Larsen (972)285-1950. B. Model: FireGuard 60;one hour labeled fire door with battery backup emergency operation. 2.2 MATERIALS DESCRIPTION A. Door: Single parting door consisting of two parallel,accordion type walls of panels independently suspended with *0 no pantographs or interconnections except at door lead post. B. Panels: 24 gage enamel coated steel, V-grooved for strength and resilience connected by full height 24 gage enamel coated steel hinges. C. Suspension System: Two 14 gage cold rolled steel tracks at 8"centers attached to the overhead structural support. 1. Lead post suspended from 8-wheel ball bearing trolley. ..a 2. Each panel suspended from steel hanger pin and a 1-1/2 inch diameter ball bearing roller. D. Lead Posts: Fabricated from 24 gage cold rolled steel connected to specially formed steel panels. Stabilizer bar is mounted internally to keep lead post plumb and in proper alignment during operation and to provide for tight fitting closure. E. Perimeter Seals: Continuous extruded vinyl sweeps attached to the top and bottom of the fire doors forming a smoke and draft seal. F. Hanging Weight:4.5 pounds per square foot. 2.3 COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION A. Automatic Closing System: "" 1. Operations: a. closing system consists of an electronic control box,motor drive assembly and leading edge obstruction detector. ,■a b. In case of fire,closing system is activated by the building's fire/smoke detection equipment and automatically close doors. am 08352-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 we UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 08352-ACCORDION FOLDING DOORS PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner furnished fire rated accordion folding doors at exit corridors. 2. Owner installation of Accordion Folding Doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. l 2. Section 13850-Detection and Alarm: Smoke detectors for accordion folding doors. 3. Section 16100-Wiring Methods: Electrical connections for accordion folding doors. C. Products Furnished and Installed Under Separate Contract: 1. Owner's Accordion Folding Door Supplier will furnish and install accordion folding doors under provisions of Section 01600. D. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Coordinate installation with Owner's Accordion Folding Door Supplier. 2. Provide openings,size as scheduled on Drawings,with head,jambs,and sill as detailed.Install head parallel to floor. 3. Provide power and make final electrical connections. 4. Provide smoke detectors,conduit,and wiring. 5. Complete gypsum wallboard including fire taping and painting within pocket. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 152-Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. B. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): P* 1. NFPA 70-National Electric Code. C. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL 10B-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Accordion Folding Fire Doors shall be approved by ICBO,SBCCI,or BOCA and possess a current Evaluation Report prepared by the respective evaluation service,where required by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Fire doors shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratory as"special purpose fire doors"having a fire-resistive rating as indicated in accordance with requirements of UL l OB and ASTM E-152. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart forces will pick-up products from Owner's Accordion Folding Door Supplier and deliver to jobsite ready for installation. Owner's Accordion Folding Door Supplier regional project manager will contact Contractor after Award of Contract to establish a product delivery and installation date and establish a coordination procedure. 08352-1 r Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am Ow Ow AM A Ow BLANK PAGE w. .M OW 08331-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 r UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 08331 -COILING COUNTER DOORS w PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Pharmacy coiling counter doors. ► B. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under this Section: 1. Under provisions of Section 01600, Wal-Mart will furnish coiling counter doors at Pharmacy for installation by Contractor. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PHARMACY COILING COUNTER DOORS(WAL-MART FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Manufacturer: Countersafe Rolling Shutter,by QMI Roll Shutter Supply, Elmhurst,IL(630)782-0911,Fax(630) 782-1911. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION(BY CONTRACTOR) A. Pharmacy Coiling Counter Doors: Install coiling counter doors in accordance with manufacturer's published in- structions. 00 1. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction without distortion or stress. 2. Fit and align assembly,including hardware,level and plumb. END OF SECTION �w ok 08331-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frame square and level in ceiling openings. Secure rigidly in place. .,., C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK A. Install access doors in gypsum board ceilings in the following locations: 1. At electrical junction boxes as required by National Electrical Code,local codes,and governing authorities. 2. At valves,controls,and manual dampers requiring access. B. For access doors adjacent to secure areas (Gun Room and Cash/Counting Room), coordinate location with Wal- 40 Mart Construction Manager. END OF SECTION AW ,ter A .w .+ Am 08311-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,, UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 08311 -ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Secton Includes: 1. Fire-rated and Non-rated access doors and frames for ceilings. A ► B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Openings in gypsum board ceilings. 2. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field paint finish. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with UL requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 CEILING ACCESS DOORS A. Non-Fire Rated Door and Frame Unit: 1. Product Number 3203-018 Style DW,by Milcor Inc. 2. Product Number DW-5015,by Acudor B. Fire-rated Door and Frame Unit: 1. Product Number 3210-024,by Milcor Inc. 2. Product Number FW-5050,by Acudor C. Substitutions: None accepted. w. 2.2 FINISH 00 A. Base Metal Protection: Factory prime coat units with electrostatic baked on electrostatic powder. Prime exposed edges with coat of white rust-inhibitive paint. B. For fire-rated access doors,furnish units with ceramic fiberboard panel insert,attach to outside face of door,ready for field painting. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 08311-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,OW .. Ow BLANK PAGE am ,.w 08110-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,i1e 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Test for smooth operation through full range of swing;make necessary adjustments. r B. Coordinate adjustment of doors with installation of hardware. Adjust doors and hardware for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 00 �r ow 08110-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 2.6 FABRICATION ..o A. Fabricate doors and frames rigid, neat, and free from warp or buckle. Weld exposed joints continuously; grind, dress,and make smooth,flush and invisible. Oft 1. Fabricate exterior frames and interior masonry frames as welded units. B. Transom Bars for Glazed Lights: Fixed type,of same profiles as jamb and head. C. Fabricate doors with hardware reinforcement welded in place. D. Fabricate frames with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes. E. Fabricate frames to suit masonry wall coursing with 4 inch head member. F. Silencers: Prepare frames for silencers. *R 1. Single Doors: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on strike side. 2. Double Doors with Mullions: Provide 3 single rubber silencers on each door,on strike side. 3. Double Doors Without Mullions: Provide 2 single silencers on frame head. .. G. Fire Rated Doors: Attach fire rated label to each door unit. Do not paint over labels. H. Close top edge of exterior door flush with inverted unperforated steel channel closure set flush with top edge to ... exclude water. Seal joints watertight. I. Undercut non-fire rated doors as indicated on drawings. J. Where multiple openings are indicated,fabricate double wide frames of material gauge as scheduled. Joint frames at swing jamb using minimum 16 gauge insert spline connection full length. After assembly, fill joint with epoxy filler,allow to harden,and finish smooth and flush. 1. Fabricate impost base anchor,providing for minimum of two(2)anchors per impost. Base shall fit impost inside profile with"force fit." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify substrate conditions,opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable for proper installation. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and DHI. B. Install doors in accordance with SDI-100 and DHI. AM C. Coordinate with adjacent wall construction for anchor placement. so D. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. E. Install door louvers,plumb and level. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of hardware specified in Section 08710. 1. Provide board insulation blocking at exterior hollow metal frames. Glue blocking in frame jambs (strike side and hinge side)at height indicated on Drawings. ..w AM 08110-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 0* 2.3 FRAMES A. Interior Drywall Frames: 16 gage,cold-rolled steel,mitered knockdown units. 1. Jamb depth: 4 5/8"throat. B. Interior Masonry Frames: 16 gage,cold-rolled steel,mitered and welded units. 1. Jamb depth: Sized to fit wall thickness. C. Exterior Frames: 16 gage,galvanized(ASTM A 653)steel,mitered and welded units. I. Jamb depth: 5-3/4",unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. AW 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Rubber Silencers: Resilient rubber. Specified in Section 08710. B. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape,butted corners;prepared for countersink style screws. C. Plaster Guards: Provide 26 gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes, welded to frame, at back of hardware cut- outs in masonry openings. D. Board Insulation Blocking: ASTM C578, Type IV (density 1.6 pcf minimum), 1 inch thick. Provide one of the following: 1. Amofoam-CM,by Amoco Foam Products Company. 2. Styrofoam SM,by Dow Chemical USA. 3. Foamular 250,by UC Industries,Inc. E. Astragals: Doors swinging in pairs and having a fire protection rating of more than 1-1/2 hours, provide an over- lapping astragal to meet UL rating requirements. Doors swinging in pairs and having a fire protection rating of not more than 1-1/2 hours,when located within a means of egress,shall not be equipped with astragals that inhibit the free use of either leaf. I. Provide steel astragals,integral with door construction. 2. If U-shaped astragal is used that does not require a coordinator, coordinate with Section 08710 to omit double door coordinator from applicable hardware sets. F. Louvers: Door louvers manufactured by one of the following. "* 1. Anemostat. 2. Air Louver. 3. Leslie Locke. 4. Material and Finish: Roll formed steel, 18 ga.thickness. a. Louver Blade: Inverted V blade,sight proof. b. Louver Free Area: As indicated on mechanical drawings. G. Dutch Door Shelf: Manufacturer's standard 12 inch full shelf, 16 gage cold-rolled steel, with 2 support brackets each side. Provide beveled head sheet metal fasteners for attachment of shelf support brackets to door. 2.5 PROTECTIVE COATINGS A. Bituminous Coating: Fibered asphalt emulsion,field applied. B. Primer: Exposed surfaces shall be cleaned, treated with Bonderite chemical and given one baked-on shop coat of grey synthetic primer. 08110-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 0" 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND PROTECTION .. A. Protect doors and frames with resilient packaging. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation. oft,. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Coordination: Coordinate the work with door opening construction,door frame and door hardware installation PART 2-.PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide doors,panels and frames of one of the following manufacturers. 1. Amweld Building Products Division. 2. Ceco Door Division. 3. Curries. am 4. Fenestra Corporation. 5. Kewanee Corporation. 6. Mesker. 7. Republic Builders Products. "' 8. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. B. Substitutions: None accepted. ow C. Oversized Fire Rated Steel Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide oversized fire rated steel doors of one of the following manufacturers. 1. Ceco Door Division. 2. Curries. 3. Kewanee Corporation. 2.2 DOORS A. Interior Doors: SDI-100, Grade I - Standard-Duty 1-3/4 inches thick, Model 2 Seamless Design - Hollow Steel Construction(seamless edges and faces),20 gage cold-rolled steel. ` B. Exterior Doors: SDI-100; Grade III, Extra Heavy Duty 1-3/4 inches thick, Model 2 Seamless Design - Hollow Steel Construction(seamless edges and faces), 16 gage galvanized(ASTM A 653)cold-rolled steel. 1. Fabricate head with inverted,unperforated channel flush with top edge to exclude water. C. Core Construction: Provide one of the following core constructions;Contractor's option: 1. Vertical steel stiffeners,22 gage,spaced 6 inches apart and spot welded to face sheets at 6 inches on center. a. Insulate spaces between stiffeners with loose fill insulation full height of door. 2. Polyurethane core foamed in place or laminated,20 psi strength, 1.8 pcf density,R=12; 1/2 inch maximum voids in any direction. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so ..A delamination will not occur during operating conditions. 3. Rigid core or polystyrene foam board, 1500 psf compressive strength, 18 psi shear strength, R=7. Strength of bond between core and steel face sheet shall exceed strength of core so that delamination will not occur under operating conditions. w 4. Honeycomb Core (Interior Doors Only, Not Permitted In Exterior Doors): Resin impregnated, kraft fiber honeycomb with nominal 1 inch cell size and crush strength of 45 psi. Lamination of face sheet to core shall withstand not less than 1,100 psf in shear. 5. If laminated insulation is used, apply adhesive full coverage to door face. Do not use spot adhesive method. 08110-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 '"` UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-rated and fire rated rolled steel doors,panels,and frames. 2. Glazed light frames.- 3. Louvers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04060 - Masonry Mortar: Masonry mortar fill of metal frames. Placement of anchors into wall construction. 2. Section 08710-Door Hardware: Door hardware coordination. 3. Section 08800-Glazing: Glass in steel doors and frames. 4. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Door frame attachment to metal wall framing. 5. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field painting of doors and frames. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. ANSI A117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): on 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM E 152-Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. C. Door Hardware Institute(DHI): 1. DHI - The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. D. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA): 1. NFPA 80-Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 252-Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. E. Steel Door Institute(SDI), 1991 Edition: 1. SDI-100-Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 2. SDI-105 -Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. F. Underwriters Laboratories(UL): 1. UL l OB-Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of SDI-100 and ANSI A 117.1. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Installed Fire Rated Door Assemblies: Conform to NFPA 80,NFPA 252,and UL lOB for fire rated class, as indicated on Drawings. 08110-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. AW Am .* mom .s BLANK PAGE 07900-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 '`"" E. Apply sealant within recommended temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within recommended temperature ranges. F. Install sealant free of air pockets,foreign embedded matter,ridges,and sags. G. Tool joints concave. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints: 1. Joints in vertical surfaces directly exposed to weather, including perimeter of openings where frames and " other penetrations meet building facade,control and expansion joints in building facade: a. Polyurethane Sealant#1. b. Polyurethane Sealant#3. C. Color: To match adjacent material. 2. Joints in horizontal surfaces subject to traffic: a. Polyurethane Sealant#2. b. Color: To match adjacent material. 3. Joints in vertical and horizontal surfaces concealed, including lapped sheet metal joints,joints at skylights or smoke vents(if specified)and curbs: a. Silicone Sealant#1. B. Interior Joints: 1. Joints in vertical surfaces, including perimeter of openings where frames and other openings meet partitions,control and expansion joints in concrete masonry unit and gypsum board partitions: a. Polyurethane Sealant#1. b. Color: To match adjacent material. 2. Joints in horizontal surfaces exposed to foot traffic, including expansion joints in ceramic and quarry tile flooring: a. Polyurethane Sealant#2. b. Color: To match adjacent material. 3. Joints in horizontal surfaces concealed by floor finish material, including control/construction joints in ! ► slabs-on-grade: a. See Section 09650 for control/construction joint and subfloor filler. 4. Joints in horizontal surfaces exposed to pallet jacks and heavy loads, including controUconstruction joints 10 in exposed slabs-on-grade: a. See Section 03152 for epoxy joint sealer. 5. Joints where plumbing fixtures meet adjacent floor and wall finishes: a. Silicone Sealant#2. b. Color: To match plumbing fixture. 6. Joints in vertical surfaces,irregular in shape,and greater than 1/2 inch in width: a. Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealant#1. END OF SECTION 07900-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 AM B. Silicone Sealants: 1. Silicone Sealant#1: ASTM C920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25. a. 791,by Dow Corning Corporation. b. Silpruf,by General Electric Silicone Products Division. 2. Silicone Sealant#2: ASTM C920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25,mildew resistant. a. 786,by Dow Corning Corporation. b. Sanitary 1700,by General Electric Silicone Products Division,(USDA Approved). 2.2 EXPANDING FOAM SEALANTS A. Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealants: 1. Polyurethane Expanding Foam Sealant #1: Closed-cell foam and non-flammable propellant; urea ""' formaldehyde-free, CFC-free; UL Class 1 Foam with flamespread of 20 and smoke developed of 25 as tested in accordance with ASTM E84. a. Touch'n Seal Quick Cure,by Convenience Products,(314)349-5333. b. Polycel One,by Macklanburg-Duncan,(800)654-0007. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type,recommended by sealant manufacturer;compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Filler: Polyethylene foam rod,oversized 30 percent to 50 percent. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing substrates. +�* 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. AM C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Protect elements surrounding work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. „„ 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. AM B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. .. C. Install joint backing to achieve neck dimension no greater than 1/3 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. SW 07900-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 •• UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07900-JOINT SEALERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. 2. Sealant and backing Via► 3. Control joint filler. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03152 -Control and Construction Joint Filler: Joint filler for control/construction joints in interior exposed concrete floor slabs. 2. Section 04220-Concrete Masonry Units: Installation of expansion joint filler in masonry walls. 3. Section 07840-Firestopping: Joint seals around penetrations of fire-rated Assemblies. ► 4. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Joint filler for control/construction joints concealed by floor finish material. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM C920-Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Interior sealants in food preparation areas shall be USDA approved, as required by local authorities having juris- diction. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. des B. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by sealant manufacturer during and after installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS ` 2.1 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. Polyurethane Sealants: + 1. Polyurethane Sealant#1: ASTM C920,Type S,Grade NS,Class 25. a. Vulkem 921,by Mameco International,Inc.,(USDA Approved). b. Dynatrol I,by Pecora Corporation,(USDA Approved). C. Sonolatic NP-1,by Sonnebom Building Products,(USDA Approved). d. DyMonic,by Tremco Sealants. 2. Polyurethane Sealant#2: ASTM C920,Type S,Grade P,Class 25. a. Vulkem 45,by Mameco International,Inc.,(USDA Approved). tom, b. Urexpan NR-201,by Pecora Corporation,(USDA Approved). C. Sonolastic SL I,by Sonneborn Building Products. 3. Polyurethane Sealant#3: ASTM C920,Type M,Grade NS,Class 25. a. Dymeric 511,by Tremco. 07900-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..a moo Am ... Am M BLANK PAGE .. am Am AM AM .. me 07840-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 O. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove loose dirt and oil from penetration surfaces. B. Place hangers or damming materials in penetration to hold firestopping materials, if necessary. of 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Follow manufacturer charts for appropriate material to achieve required fire rating in various locations. B. Install firestopping at penetrations of fire rated wall materials in accordance with manufacturer's published in- structions. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Provide firestopping complying with UL assemblies specified below. Penetration Assembly Nelson Hilti RectorSeal STI 3M Tremco CMU Wall 8" CAJ1224 or CAJ1150 or CAJ1114 or CAJ1079 or CAJ1001 or CAJ1179 or Thick or Less CAJ1203 CAJ1158 CAJ1115 CAJ1217 CAJ1009 CAJ1187 Gypsum Board WL1083 or WL1052 or WL1026 or WL1049 or WL1003 or WL1020 or Metal Pie Partition WL1030 WL1054 WL1034 WL1079 WL1009 WL1051 CMU Wall 8" CAJ2095 or CAJ2021 or CAJ2064 or CAJ2082 or Thick or Less CAJ2086 CAJ2109 WJ2025 CAJ2045 CAJ2005 FA2024 Non-Metallic Gypsum Board WL2015 or WL2093 or WL2002 or WL2083 or Pie Partition WL2071 WL2078 WL2104 WL2029 WL2005 WL2082 CMU Wall 8" CAJ8049 or CAJ4020 or CAJ4003 or CAJ4007 or Thick or Less CAJ4033 CAJ4017 CAJ8043 CAJ4029 CBJ4020 WJA4005 Gypsum Board WL4005 or WL3043 or Cable Tray Partition WL4003 WL4006 ---- WL4008 WL4004 WL3044 CMU Wall 8" CAJ5008 or WJ5016 or CAJ5021 or CAJ5001 or CAJ5052 or thick or Less CAJ5059 CAJ5045 CAJ5070 CAJ5029 CAJ5002 CBT5005 Insulated Metal Gypsum Board WL5022 or WL5014 or Pie Partition WL5036 WL5029 WL5057 WL5051 WL5001 WL5034 _ Construction CMU Wall to TRC/PV120-14 Gaps-Head Metal Deck ---- HWD0008 ---- HWD0013 ---- of Wall to Gyp Bd Parti'n to HWD0003 or Roof Deck Metal Deck ---- HWD0004 HWD0014 ---- HWS0003 WHPV60.01 CMU Wall to ---- wWS1011 -- WWS1001 ---- CMU Wall ---- Construction Gyp Bd Parti'n to Gaps-Wall to Gyp BdParti'n ---- ---- ---- --- WWS0004 --- ' Wall END OF SECTION w 00 + 07840-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Intumescent Solvent-Release-Curing Sealant: Single component, intumescent, synthetic-polymer based, non-sag Amp grade. 1. CP 25N/S,by 3M. 2. TREMstop WBM,by Tremco. C. Intumescent Wrap/Strip: Single-component,elastomeric sheet with aluminum foil on one face. 1. WRS,by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. Metacaulk Wrap Strip,by RectorSeal. 3. SpecSeal SSWRED Wrapstrip,by STI. 4. FS-195+Wrap/Strip,by 3M. 5. TREMstop WS,by Tremco. D. Intumescent Putty: Single-component,non-hardening,dielectric,intumescent putty. 1. FSP,by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty,by RectorSeal. 3. SpecSeal Putty,by STI. 4. Moldable Putty+,by 3M. E. Silicone Sealant: Single-component,moisture-curing,silicone-based elastomeric,non-sag grade. 1. CLK N/S,by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. FS 601,by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk 835,by RectorSeal. "+ 4. SpecSeal PEN 300,by STI. 5. 2000+Silicone,by 3M. 6. FYRE SIL,by Tremco. F. Silicone Foam: Two-component, silicone-based liquid elastomer that,when mixed, expands and cures in place to produce a flexible,nonshrinking foam. 1. FS Fireblocks,by Hilti. 4"? 2. SpecSeal PEN 200,by STI. 3. 2001 Silicone RTV Foam,by 3M. G. Intumescent Collar: Factory-fabricated,intumescent collar. .m 1. PCS,by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. CP 642,by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk Pipe Collar,by RectorSeal. A* 4. SpecSeal SSC Collars,by STI. 5. Plastic Pipe Device,by 3M. 6. TREMstop D,by Tremco. AM H. Intumescent Composite Sheet or Pillows and Mortar: Intumescent sheet used to firestop large openings. 1. CPS,by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. SpecSeal SSB Pillows and SpecSeal SSM Firestop Compound,by STI. AM 3. CS-195+Composite Sheet,by 3M. 4. TREMstop PS,by Tremco. I. Packing Material: Manufacturer's standard mastic,putty, ceramic fiber blanket, or mineral wool to be used as fill OM or backing material for firestopping. 1. FSB or Mineral Wool,by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. Mineral Wool,by Hilti. "" 3. Fire Safing or Backer Rod,by RectorSeal. 4. Mineral Wool,by STI. 5. FireMaster Mastic,FireMaster Putty,or FireMaster Bulk,by 3M. 6. Cerablanket,by Tremco. 07840-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ''11e UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07840-FIRESTOPPING on PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Firestopping in rated assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07815-Mineral Fiber Fireproofing: Fireproofing for grease ducts. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM El 19-Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ASTM E814-Test Methods for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. B. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc. (UL): I. UL 1479-Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Firestopping Materials: ASTM E 119,ASTM E814,UL 1479 to achieve a fire rating as noted on Drawings. 1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During application of caulk and putty, keep away from heat, open flame, sparks, or other sources of ignition until product cures. Use only with adequate ventilation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide firestopping products as manufactured by one of the following: I. Nelson Firestop Products,(800)331-7325. 2. Hilti Firestop Systems,(800)879-4000. 3. The RectorSeal Corporation,(800)231-3345. 4. Specified Technologies,Inc.(STI),(800)992-1180. 5. 3M Fire Protection Products,(800)328-1687. ' 6. Tremco Firestop System,(800)852-8173. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Intumescent Latex Sealant: Single-component,intumescent,latex formulation. 1. LBC,by Nelson Firestop Products. 2. FS611A,by Hilti. 3. Metacaulk 950 or 1000,by RectorSeal. 4. SpecSeal SSS100,by STI. 5. CP 25WB+,by 3M. 6. TREMstop WBM,by Tremco. 07840-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 law 2.2 MATERIALS A. Mineral Fiber Blanket Fireproofing: Ceramic or glass fiber blanket covered with polypropylene or fiberglass scrim foil facing;with flame and smoke developed ratings of 5;and as follows: w. 1. Thickness: 3 inches(2 layers of 1-1/2 inch blanket). 2. Nominal Density/Thermal Resistivity: 8 pcf/4.15 at 70 deg F. B. Anchorage Accessories: For each fire resistive assembly in which mineral fiber blanket serves as fireproofing, provide manufacturer's standard blanket-anchorage system complying with related design of UL or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work under this Section is to be performed. Report in writing to the Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. w B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of the existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting all unsatisfactory and defective Work encountered. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. Consult with manu- facturer's technical representative for conditions not covered by printed instructions. B. Install fireproofing blanket to comply with requirements for thicknesses, number of courses (layers), construction of joints and corners,and anchorage methods that apply to fire resistance rated assemblies indicated. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Coordinate installation of fireproofing with other construction to minimize cutting into, or removal of, installed fireproofing. As other construction is successively completed, replace or repair fireproofing installations which have been cut away to facilitate this other construction. Maintain complete coverages of full thickness on mem- bers and substrates protected by fireproofing. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Installer,Manufacturer, and authorities having jurisdiction that ensures mineral fiber blanket fireproofing being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION ww am .re 07815-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ""� UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 07815 -MINERAL FIBER FIREPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mineral fiber blanket fireproofing. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E 119-Method For Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. B. Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.(UL)-Fire Hazard Classifications. 1. UL 263 -Standard for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Mineral Fiber Fireproofing System: Provide a fire rated assembly rating of 1 hour for grease duct assembly. Grease duct enclosure shall have been tested in accordance with UL 263 and shall be listed in UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory as an approved Grease Duct Enclosure(UL YYET,R14229). 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide ceramic or glass fiber blanket fireproofing identical to those whose specified fire performance characteristics have been determined per test method indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Surface Burning Characteristics:ASTM E 84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings:ASTM E 119,provide UL-labeled units listed for application indicated. 1.5 SEQUENCING A. Sequence and coordinate installation of mineral fiber blanket fireproofing with other, related construction speci- fied in other sections to comply the following requirements: 1. Avoid unnecessary exposure of mineral fiber blanket fireproofing to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application. 2. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after mineral fiber blanket fireproofing has been applied and inspected by authorities having jurisdiction. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements of this Section, provide mineral fiber fireproofing as manufactured by one of the following: 1. FireMaster Duct Wrap,by 3M Fire Barrier Products,(800)328-1687. 2. FyreWrap Duct Insulation,by Unifrax Corporation,(716)278-3800. 3. Pyroscat FP Duct Wrap,by Premier Refractories and Chemicals,Inc. 07815-1 !! Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am B. Ladder Safety Post: LadderUP,Model#1,by The Bilco Co.,New Haven,Connecticut. am 1. Telescoping tubular post,with stainless steel spring balancing mechanism and automatic locking device for full extension. Furnish unit complete with fasteners for securing to ladder rungs. 2. Finish: Black enamel. 3. Substitutions: Not permitted. ma PART 3 -EXECUTION so 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings. Provide weathertight installation. B. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of units in contact with cementitious materials and dissimilar metals. C. Ladder Safety Post: Secure safety post to top two ladder rungs, on right side (climbing side), in strict accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Adjust for smooth operation. END OF SECTION AM 07722-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07722-ROOF HATCHES ON PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY OR A. Section Includes: 1. Prefabricated steel roof hatch,with integral support curbs,operable hardware,and counterflashings. 2. Ladder Safety Post. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Requirements for shop fabricated roof hatch ladders and other ferrous metal items. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ROOF HATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1. Model 6-102,by Babcok-Davis Hatchways,Inc.,Arlington,MA. 2. Model S-20,by The Bilco Co.,New Haven,Connecticut. 3. Model M-1,by Milcor,Lima,OH. 4. Model PLH-G,by Precision Stair Corp.,Morristown,TN. B. Manufactured Units: 1. Size: 2'-6"by 3'-0". 2. Curb: 14 gage galvanized G90 steel; 1 inch rigid insulation; integral cap flashing to receive roof flashing system;extended flange for mounting. 3. Cover: 14 gage galvanized G90 steel with one inch glass fiber insulation retained by 22 gage steel inner liner. Continuous gasket to provide weatherproof seal. 4. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operated type with compression spring operators, positive snap latch with turn handles inside and out and padlock hasp inside; automatic hold-open arm with vinyl covered grip handle for easy release;cadmium plated finish. #0 5. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 6. Fasteners: Corrosive resistant fasteners recommended by roof hatch manufacturer. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate free of visual distortions and defects. Weld corners and joints. B. Fabricate units weathertight with integral capflashing,providing for removal of condensation. C. Prime paint;one coat. D. Spot weld hasp,latch and hinges to prevent removal from interior. 2.3 ROOF HATCH LADDER A. Steel Wall Ladder: As specified in Section 05500-Metal Fabrications. 4 07722-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am b. Web Height: Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height, but in no case shall ■W curb height be less than 14 inches as measured from top of steel roof deck to top of curb, nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top of roof membrane to top of curb. C. Top Flange Width: None. d. Drip: None. "m 2. Sheet Metal Gage: 14 gage. PART 3 -EXECUTION MW 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install curbs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate installation .r. with roof membrane installation requirements specified under other Sections. B. Roof Curbs Bearing on Steel Angles and Joists: �** 1. Set units in place and secure base to roof structure by welding to top chord of structural member. 2. Secure metal deck to perimeter of curb as indicated on Drawings. C. Roof Curbs Bearing on Roof Deck: 1. Set units in place and secure base to steel roof deck by self-tapping screw fasteners spaced at a maximum of 12 inches on center,staggered. 3.2 COORDINATION A. Coordinate project requirements for custom adapting and connecting to roof curbs with manufacturers and suppli- ers of curb mounted items and equipment. B. Provide structural roof curbs for the following items: 1. HVAC roof top units(RTU). 2. Refrigeration Condensers. 3. Skylights. C. Provide non-structural roof curbs for the following items: 1. Deck Penetrations- 10 Inches by 10 Inches or Less: a. Satellite dish-coordinate satellite conduit penetration into building. b. Unit heater vents and gas flues. " 2. Deck Penetrations Greater Than 10 Inches by 10 Inches: a. Exhaust fans. MW END OF SECTION IN" ..R ..As 07721-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "'� b. Web Height: Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height, but in no case shall curb height be less than 16 inches, as measured from top of bar joist to top of curb, nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top of roof membrane to top of curb. C. Top Flange Width: 2 inches. 00 d. Drip: 3/4 inches. 2. Sheet Metal Gage: 14 gage. B. Reinforce curb sections as required for design loads indicated on Drawings. C. Welding: AWS D1.1. OR D. Roof Top Unit(RTU)Curbs: Provide rail curbs. Frame duct openings with full height curb sections of same gage metal as perimeter curb sections. E. Skylight Curbs: 1. Safety Screen: 3/16 inch cold rolled galvanized steel rods welded in 6 inch by 6 inch grid pattern;weld to bottom of curb as indicated on Drawings, prior to shipment. Screen shall have been tested to withstand impact of 245 pound lead weight, 10-3/4 inch diameter, dropped from height of 3 feet and support concentrated load of 600 pounds after impact. a. Provide shop fabricated safety screen, or at Contractor's option, provide Safety-Security Guard, by Sunoptics Prismatic Skylights,Sacramento,CA,(800)289-4700. 2. Shop Painting: Shop finish interior surfaces of skylight curbs,including safety screen;PPG dry fog coating as specified;color#2537"Blossom White." 2.4 NON-STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS A. Fabrication, Deck Penetrations - 10 Inches by 10 Inches or Less: Coated steel sheet curb sections, corners fully mitered and welded; 2 inch by 4 inch(nominal dimension)pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint com- plying with SSPC-Paint 20. 1. Profile: a. Bottom Flange Width: 3 inches. b. Web Height: Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height,but in no case shall curb height be less than 14 inches as measured from top of steel roof deck to top of curb, nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top of roof membrane to top of curb. C. Top Flange Width: 1-1/2 inches. d. Drip: None. 2. Sheet Metal Gage: 18 gage. B. Fabrication, Deck Penetrations - Greater Than 10 Inches by 10 Inches: Coated steel sheet curb sections, comers fully mitered and welded; 2 inch by 4 inch (nominal dimension) pressure treated continuous wood nailers me- chanically fastened at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20. 1. Profile: a. Bottom Flange Width: 3 inches. b. Web Height: Comply with local code requirements for minimum curb height, but in no case shall two curb height be less than 16 inches as measured from top of steel roof deck to top of curb,nor shall curb height be less than 8 inches as measured from top of roof membrane to top of curb. C. Top Flange Width: 2 inches. d. Drip: 3/4 inches. 2. Sheet Metal Gage: 18 gage. C. Fabrication, Expansion Joints: Coated steel sheet curb sections; 2 inch by 4 inch (nominal dimension) pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. 1. Profile: a. Bottom Flange Width: 9 inches. ' 07721-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 00 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE so A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify field welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualifica- tion Procedures. Provide certification that field welders have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. ..s 1. If recertification of welders is required,provide without additional cost to Wal-Mart. B. Structural Curbs: Provide manufactured metal roof curbs designed by a licensed engineer. Meet or exceed Live .f► Loads and Dead Loads as specified in this Section and as indicated on Drawings. Coordinate curb dimensions with shop drawings of equipment to be supported. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING ..� A. Ship curbs to site palletized and banded. B. Curb manufacturer shall furnish Curb Schedule to Contractor identifying curb "Type" and roof penetration for which curb is to be used. Curb Schedule shall identify identical curbs as single "Type" (i.e. Type A - 10 ton RTU's,Type B-5 ton RTU's,Type C-skylights,Type D-satellite dish,Type E-expansion joints,etc.). Identify rr. each curb with"Type"designation painted in 1 inch high letters on outside face of curb. C. Stack curbs at site to prevent twisting,bending or permanent deformation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide prefabricated metal roof curbs manufactured by one of the following: 1. A.E.S.Inc.,East Tallassee,Alabama,(800)786-0402. 2. Custom Curb,Inc.,Chattanooga,Tennessee,(800)262-6669. 3. Thybar Corp.,Louisville,Kentucky,(502)499-5480 2.2 MATERIALS A. Sheet Steel: One of the following at Contractor's option: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653,Structural Quality,Grade 33,G60 hot-dip zinc coating. 2. Aluminum-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 463,Type 2,T2 100 aluminum coating. 3. Aluminum Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet (GAVALUME): ASTM A 792, AZ55 aluminum zinc alloy coating. ., B. Board Insulation: Specified in Section 07530. C. Wood Nailers: CCA Pressure Treated Lumber Type C,"Standard"grade lumber of any species. D. Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Type II. E. Alkyd Finish Paint: PPG Speedhide Super-Tech Dry Fog Coating,Flat#6-160. 2.3 STRUCTURAL ROOF CURBS A. Fabrication, General: Coated steel sheet curb sections,corners fully mitered and welded; 2 inch by 4 inch(nomi- nal dimension)pressure treated continuous wood nailers mechanically fastened at 12 inches on center to exterior face of curb. Shop prime welded connections with zinc-rich paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20. .. 1. Profile: a. Bottom Flange Width: 3 inches. 07721-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ' '" UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07721 -MANUFACTURED CURBS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manufactured structural and non-structural metal roof curbs. 2. Coordination with manufacturers and suppliers of roof mounted items and equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Roof opening frames and headers. 2. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Joists supporting roof curbs. 3. Section 07511 -Built-up Asphalt Roofing: Board insulation for roof curbs. 4. Section 07550-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Board insulation for roof curbs. 5. Section 07620 - Sheet Metal Flashing Trim: Sheet metal flashing installed in conjunction with roof penetration curbs. 6. Section 07722-Roof Hatches. 7. Section 08630-Metal Framed Skylights. 8. Section 15700-Heating,Ventilating and Air Conditioning Equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Welding Society(AWS): AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. B. American Society of Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 463 -Specification for Steel Sheet,Cold Rolled,Aluminum Coated Type 1 and Type 2. 2. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM A 792 -Specification for Steel Sheet,Fifty-Five Percent Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot- Dip Process. C. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20 Type II-Zinc Rich Primers-Organic. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Roof Curb: Manufactured square or rectangular roof curb,bearing on structural steel joists or headers, designed to support equipment dead load and roof dead and live loads. �. B. Non-Structural Roof Curb: 1. Deck Penetrations - 10 Inches by 10 Inches or Less: Manufactured square or rectanular roof curb,bearing on top of metal roof deck,designed to receive sheet metal flashing skirt,not used for support of equipment. 2. Deck Penetrations - Greater Than 10 Inches by 10 Inches: Manufactured square or rectanular roof curb bearing on structural steel angle frame, designed to support equipment dead load. Roof dead and live load supported by structural angle frame. 3. Expansion Joints: Manufactured linear roof curb, bearing on top of metal roof deck, designed to receive expansion joint cover. l�11 07721-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 mew ,M BLANK PAGE 07711-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "'° po 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install gutters,brackets,and accessories in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-12. 1. Gutter Brackets: Space alternately with gutter spacers at 36 inches on center. a. Attachment to Masonry: Anchor to masonry bond beam with two 1/2 inch diameter expansion bolts,space anchor bolts minimum of 3 inches apart. b. Attachment to Steel: Weld to steel tube section with 3/16 inch by 2 inches fillet weld,both sides of bracket. Begin weld at top of bracket. B. Install downspouts in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-35A,space straps at 48 inches on center. C. Provide lap type gutter expansion joint in accordance with SMACNA Figure 1-6. Locate expansion joints as indi- cated on Drawings. Verify that at least one downspout is provided for each segment of gutter. # D. Apply bituminous coating on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials including the following: 1. Dissimilar metals as defined in SMACNA Appendix A-3 and backside of gutters and downspouts. 2. Preservative treated wood. E. Lap gutter joints 2 inches,set laps in bead of sealant,and rivet at 1 inch on center. F. Install screens and strainers as required. Install vertical screens at midpoints between 2 downspouts adjacent to gutter expansion joints. END OF SECTION 07711-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 b. Girth 25 Inches to 36 Inches: 20 gage. ... C. Girth Greater Than 36 Inches: 18 gage. 2. Downspouts: 24 gage; SMACNA rectangular"open face"profile,Figure 1-32D. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Gutter Brackets: Galvanized steel plate,size as specified below: 1. Girth 24 Inches and Less: 3/16 inch thick by 2 inches wide bent plate. +*+. 2. Girth Greater Than 24 Inches: 1/4 inch thick by 2 inches wide bent plate. B. Gutter Spacer: Galvanized steel sheet;gage to match gutter. C. Downspout Straps: Galvanized steel sheet;20 gage. D. Bituminous Coating: SSPC- Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. E. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. ■. F. Downspout Strainers: Same basic metal as gutter. Strainers fabricated of galvanized wire, inserted into outlet tubes and held in place by friction. G. Splash Blocks(if indicated on Drawings): Precast concrete units,minimum 3000 psi at 28 days,with 5 percent air entrainment,size and profile to suit application. H. Downspout Collectors (if indicated on Drawings): Pipe material, sizes, connections, dimensions and profiles to suit downspouts and underground storm drainage system as indicated on civil drawings. I. Conductor Heads and Scuppers (if indicated on Drawings): Galvanized steel,ASTM A446, G90 zinc coating; 24 gage core steel. Provide overflow openings,located 1 inch below scupper to permit overflow. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form gutters and downspouts of size and profile indicated on Drawings. B. Provide gutter spacers at 36 inches on center;rivet to front and back of gutter. ""` C. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. D. Form sections square,true,and accurate in size,in maximum possible lengths and free of distortion or defects det- rimental to appearance or performance. Allow for expansion at joints. E. Hem exposed edges of metal. Am F. Shop Finishing: Shop prepare and prime ferrous metal surfaces. am PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ..4 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and conditions are acceptable. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions and substrate. 07711-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "'" 00 ear UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 07711 -GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Galvanized steel gutters and downspouts,with expansion joints. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashings and Trim. 2. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 3. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field painting of metal surfaces. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A123 -Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A283 -Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates. 3. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA): 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,Fifth Edition, 1993. C. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 12-Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic(Extra Thick Film). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Nominal sizing of components for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5 years shall be as indicated on Drawings. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed materials to prevent twisting,bending,or abrasion,and to aid ventilation. Slope to drain. B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration,staining,or damage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality,Grade 33,G90 zinc coating. B. Galvanized Steel Plate: ASTM A 283, Grade A; hot-dipped galvanized G90 coating complying with ASTM A 123. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Gutters and Downspouts: Galvanized steel sheet,gage and SMACNA profiles as follows: 1. Gutters: SMACNA rectangular profile,Figure 1-2,Style D,gage as specified below: a. Girth 24 Inches and Less: 24 gage. 07711-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 G. Roof Penetration Flashing Installed In Conjunction With Manufactured Curbs: 1. Satellite Dish Support,Unit Heater Vents, and Gas Flues: Install galvanized sheet metal flashing in accor- dance with SMACNA Figure 4-13A. Lap joints,set in sealant,and rivet at 1 inch on center. H. Expansion Joint Cover: 1. Roof To Roof Expansion Joint: Install galvanized sheet metal joint cover in accordance with NRCA Detail MB-9,profile as indicated on Drawings. Form cap pieces in sections not exceeding 12 feet and join with standing seams held in place by cleats in accordance with SMACNA Figure 5.5A. I. Door Hood: Install galvanized sheet metal hood with 3/8 inch expansion bolts at 16 inches on center and as indi- cated on Drawings. J. Surface Mounted Flashings: Fill joint between flashing and wall with full bead of sealant and secure to wall with neoprene/stainless steel washers and drive pins at 16 inches on center, parallel to roof line. Provide continuous, full bead of sealant at top edge flashing. Sealant bead shall be of sufficient width to provide a 45 degree angle �+ with vertical surface. 1. Provide minimum 2 inch end lap at continuous elevations. 2. Change in elevation of 4 inch,provide 8 inch end lap. 3. Change in elevation of 8 inch,provide 12 inch end lap. Im K. Reglet and Counterflashing System: 1. Surfaced Mounted Reglet: „a a. Set reglet parallel to roof line in full bed of sealant. Provide minimum 2 inch end lap at continuous elevations. b. Secure to wall with neoprene/stainless steel washers and drive pins at maximum 16 inches on cen- ter. me C. Provide a continuous, full bead of sealant at top edge of reglet between flashing and wall. Sealant bead shall be of sufficient width to provide a 45 degree angle with vertical surface. 2. Counterflashing: Provide counterflashing of the type indicated or required to match reglet system. Insert .m counterflashings into reglets to form tight fit. Counterflashing shall be installed in such a manner as to pro- vide for continuous contact at base flashing with sufficient pressure at point of contact to prevent disloca- tion. a. Provide minimum 2"end lap at continuous elevations. b. Change in elevation of 4",provide 8"end lap. C. Change in elevation of 8",provide 12"end lap. END OF SECTION .ter 07620-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,.. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 4 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges. H. Fabricate exposed sheet metal components with provisions for thermal expansion. " 2.5 FINISH A. Paint metal surfaces exposed to view from ground level in accordance with Section 09900, and as indicated on ,40 Drawings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify roof openings,curbs,pipes,sleeves,ducts,or vents through roof are solidly set. B. Verify roofing membrane termination and base flashings are in place,sealed,and secure. 4% C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION +!1W A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work. B. Install starter and edge strips,and cleats before starting installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install sheet metal flashing and trim in accordance with applicable details of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal 0 Manual" and NRCA"Low Slope Roofing Manual." Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Bed flanges of metal flashings in plastic cement or sealing mastic where required for waterproof performance. C. Apply bituminous coating on surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials including the following: 1. Dissimilar metals as defined in SMACNA Appendix A-3. 2. Preservative treated wood. w D. Counterflashing: Provide continuous contact at membrane base flashing with sufficient pressure to prevent dislo- cation. 1. Comers: Lap inside corners. Notch and hook-seam outside comers. Set laps and seams in sealant. E. Roof Edge Trim: 1. Install galvanized sheet metal edge trim in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-1, profile as indicated on Drawings;nail edge trim flange at 3 inches on center,in staggered pattern. "s 2. Thermal Expansion Joints: Install roof edge trim in 10 foot lengths with 4 inch lap joint in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-5B. Set lap in sealant. alant and rivet for rigidity. Space rivets at 1 inch on center. 3. Comer Joints: Notch and lap. Set laps in se F. Parapet Fascia: a. Install galvanized sheet metal snap-on fascia with spring cleat/cant in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-6,profiles as indicated on Drawings.Set spring cleat in full bed of sealant, overlaying and concealing continuous parapet waterproofing membrane. b. Secure spring cleat to nailer at 6 inches on center. 2. Thermal Expansion Joints: Install parapet fascia in 10 foot lengths with 4 inch lap joint in accordance with SMACNA Figure 2-5B. Set lap in sealant. 07620-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Stack preformed material to prevent twisting,bending,or abrasion,and to provide ventilation. B. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration,staining,or damage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653 Commercial Quality and Lock-Forming Quality, G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill phosphatized for painting where exposed to view from ground level,gage as follows: 1. Flashing and Counter Flashing: 24 gage. 2. Fascia and Edge Trim: 24 gage. 3. Roof Penetration Flashing(Satellite Dish Support,Unit Heater Vents,and Gas Flues): 24 gage. 4. Door Hood: 18 gage. 5. Expansion Joint Cover-Roof to Roof: 24 gage. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, finish exposed fasteners to match flashing metal. Furnish exposed fasteners with soft EPDM washers as manufactured by the following: 1. Tap-Fast Screws,by Hilti. 2. Trugrip GT,by ITW Buildex. B. Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 1. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586,Type I and II Cutback Asphalt Type,asbestos-free. a. Non-setting type at horizontal use. b. Hard setting type at vertical uses. C. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur, compounded for 15 mil dry film thickness per coat. 2.3 COMPONENTS A. Counterflashing System: Springlok Flashing System,by Fry Reglet Corp. 1. Type SM,Surface Mounted. B. Draw Band: Stainless steel. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape,accurate in size,square,and free from distortion or defects. B. Fabricate cleats of same material as sheet,interlockable with sheet. C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch;miter and seam corners. E. Fabricate corners to form one piece with minimum 18 inches long legs;rivet for rigidity. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. * 07620-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 """ No UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07620-SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fascia and roof edge trim. 2. Roof penetration flashings installed in conjunction with manufactured curbs. 3. Counterflashing over base flashing. 4. Surface mounted flashing system. - 5. Steel door hoods. 6. Expansion joint covers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 2. Section 07511 -Built-up Asphalt Roofing: Molded pipe flashing installed as part of roofing system. 3. Section 07550 -Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing: Molded pipe flashing installed as part of roof- ing system. 4. Section 07611 -Gutters and Downspouts. 5. Section 07900-Joint Sealers. 6. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Gal- vannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM D 4586-Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos Free. B. National Roofing Contractors Association(NRCA): 1. NRCA-Low Slope Roofing Manual. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA): 1. SMACNA-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual,Fifth Edition, 1993. D. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 12-Cold-Applied Asphalt Mastic(Extra Thick Film). 1.3 SUBMITTALS oft A. Section 01330-Submittal Proceduress: Procedures for submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE NO A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual' and NRCA"Low Slope Roofing Manual'standard details and requirements. so B. Supplier Certification: Provide certification from galvanized sheet steel supplier stating that materials conform to ATSM A 653,G90 hot-dipped galvanized steel. 07620-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 BLANK PAGE +�w 07611-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 w! W 3.4 CLEANING on A. Wipe clean each soffit panel after erection. 0 B. Replace damaged panels and other components of Work which cannot be repaired by finish touch-up or similar minor repairs. C. Remove from finished surface,filing caused by drilling and cutting of panels. OR END OF SECTION 40 40 on 4K so 40 07611-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, one of the following may be substituted for .� that specified. 1. MM Systems Corporation;Tucker,GA;(800)241-3460. 2. Berridge Manufacturing Co.,Houston,TX;(800)231-8127. 3. ASC Pacific,Inc.;Federal Way,WA;(206)838-4821. of 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Provide manufacturer's standard accessories and other special items required and essential to completeness of sof- fit installation. Sight-exposed accessories shall match finish of metal soffit system. 1. Trim Items: Of same material and finish as soffit sheets. 2. Fasteners: As recommended by soffit system manufacturer for intended purpose. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fabricate and finish panels and accessories ready for field assembly. B. Form sections true to shape,accurate in size,square,and free from distortion. C. Fabricate panels in one piece. Fabricate accessories in longest practicable lengths. 2.4 FINISHES �* A. Factory finish surfaces with high performance pigmented organic coating. Prepare,pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces in conformance with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions providing finish free of scratches and other blemishes. 1. Fluoropolymer Coating: AAMA 605.2,containing a minimum of 70 percent Penwalt Kynar 500 resin-with minimum 1.2 mil dry film thickness. 2. Texture: Smooth. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine building structure and adjacent areas where panels will be installed. Do not proceed with Work until un- satisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Examine soffit structure to verify that structure is ready for soffit panel installation. 2. Verify field dimensions to determine compliance with panel manufacturer's tolerances. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install soffit panels in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Secure panel in place with concealed fasteners. C. Interlock panels and secure in place to prevent warping and wracking. D. Back paint surfaces in contact with dissimilar materials. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect soffit panel installation,alignment,attachments,trim,and accessories. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. �.. 07611-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ""` UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07611 -SHEET METAL SOFFIT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed metal soffit panels. 2. Related flashings and accessory components. 3. Factory finishing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05400-Cold Formed Metal Framing: Steel framing supporting metal soffit. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Architectural Manufacturer's Association(AAMA): 1. AAMA 605.2 - Specifications for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusion and Panels. on B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 40 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. B. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. "! C. Deliver panels to site in dry and undamaged condition. Unload and handle in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. D. Store panels off ground protected from weather, to prevent twisting,bending, or abrasion, and to provide ventila- tion. 1.4 WARRANTY A. Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions: Warranty requirements. B. Factory Finish: Provide manufacturer's 20 year written warranty against failure of finish including blistering, chipping,cracking,peeling,chalking,and fading. PART2-PRODUCTS WA 2.1 METAL SOFFIT A. Manufacturer: AEP-SPAN;Dallas,TX;(800)527-2503. B. Flush Panel Design FP 12-1: 1. Panel: 24 gage ASTM A 653 Structural Quality,Grade 33,HDG G-90 steel 2. Seam Spacing: 12 inches. 3. Color: Regal White. lARi 07611-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3. This Guarantee shall become null and void unless the Contractor is notified of any alleged defect in materials or workmanship and provided an opportunity to inspect and,if required by the terms of this Guarantee,to repair the roof. Wal-Mart will notify Roofing Contractor of needed repairs and Roofing Contractor will make repairs within 48 hours. The notice will be by telephone or facsimile to the Contractor's office as listed on this Guarantee. The Contractor will notify Wal-Mart Property Maintenance when the repairs are complete. In the event an emergency condition exists which requires immediate repair to avoid substantial damage to the building or its contents,then the Owner may make the essential temporary repairs. The Contractor will reimburse the Owner for those reasonable repair expenses which would have been the Contractor's responsibility but for the emergency condition. Such emergency repairs will not void the Guarantee. 4. No work shall be done on said roof,including,but without limitation,work in connection with flues,vents,drains,sign braces,railings,platforms or other equipment fastened to or set on the roof,and no repairs or alterations shall be made to said roof,unless Contractor shall first be notified through Wal-Mart Property Maintenance Department,and shall be given the opportunity to provide the necessary roofing work. Contractor shall be paid for reasonable time and materials expended in making requested repairs occasioned by the work of others on said roof. 5. This Guarantee shall become null and void if the roof is used as a promenade or is sprayed or flooded,unless such use was originally specified and the specification is noted in Paragraph 9 below. 6. This Guarantee shall not be or become effective unless and until Contractor has been paid in full for said roof in accordance with the agreement pursuant to which such roof was applied. 7. This Guarantee is transferable within the two-year guarantee period,without the prior written consent of Contractor. 8. This Guarantee is in lieu of all other guarantees or warranties,express or implied. ALL IMPLIED GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES,AND SPECIFICALLY THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED AND DISCLAIMED. 9. Additional conditions or exclusions: IN WITNESS WHEREOF,this instrument has been duly executed this day of ,19 By END OF GUARANTEE ...E 07550-16 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ROOFING GUARANTEE Whereas OR of herein called "Contractor" has completed application of the following roof: o" Owner: Address of Owner: ON Type and Name of Building: Location: Manufacturer and System Specification Number: ON Area of Roof: Date of Building Substantial Completion: Date Guarantee Expires: Contractor's Telephone: Emergency Telephone: Whereas,at the inception of such work,Contractor agreed to guarantee the aforesaid roof for a limited period and subject to the conditions herein set forth; Now, therefore, Contractor hereby Guarantees, subject to the conditions herein set forth, that during a period of Two (2) years from the date of building Substantial Completion (as defined in Section 00800 - Supplementary Conditions), it will, at its own cost and expense,make or cause to be made such repairs to said roof resulting solely from faults or defects in materi- als or workmanship applied by or through contractor as may be necessary to maintain said roof in watertight condition. In accordance with good roofing practice,the Contractor shall remove and replace all wet insulation caused by water leaks cov- ered under this Guarantee(i.e. leaks resulting from circumstances other than those listed in the exclusions)and repair the roof system at no cost to the Owner. Guarantee shall include materials and workmanship for the following items: 1. Membranes(including parapet waterproofing). 2. Membrane flashings including attachment to sheet metal flashings and trim. 3. Insulation. 4. Asphalt bitumen. 5. Fasteners,cements,and adhesives. This guarantee is made subject to the following conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Guarantee is any and all damage to said roof,the building or contents caused by the acts or omissions of other trades or contractors;lightning,cyclone,tornado,hurricane,hailstorm,flood,or earthquake; foundation settlement;failure or cracking of the roof deck;faulty construction of,copings,chimneys,skylights,vents, supports,or other parts of the building;vapor condensation beneath the roof;water leakage due to erosion and porosity of mortar and brick;dry rot;stoppage of roof drains and gutters;inadequate drainage,slope,or other conditions beyond the control of Contractor which cause ponding or standing of water(standing water longer than 72 hours);rodents or other animals;or fire. If the roof is damaged by reason of any of the foregoing,this guarantee shall thereupon become null and void for the balance of the guarantee period unless such damage is repaired by Contractor at the expense of the Im party requesting such repairs. 2. Contractor is not liable for consequential damages to the building or contents resulting from any defects in said roof, including,but without limitation,any interruption of business experienced by Owner or occupants of the building. 07550-15 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Ow BLANK PAGE 07550-14 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 *�* an Accessories: [] Roofing Fasteners: Galvanized or non-ferrous type. [] Insulation Fasteners: Coated mechanical fasteners;proper length and acceptable for 90 psf wind uplift. Manufacturer: �, [] Fibrous Cant and Tapered Edge Strip: High density,asphalt impregnated wood fiber or perlite. [] Walkway Pads: Full width of SBS modified bitumen flashing material. [] Isolation Pads:- [] J-Walk,by Johns Manville. + ! [] Brai/Flex Walkboard,by U.S.Intec. [] Termination Bar: Manufacturer's standard 1 inch wide extruded or rolled aluminum bar,pre-punched at 6 inches on center. [] Vapor Retarder(For Use At Expansion Joints Only): Alumiseal Zero Perm Vapor Barrier,by Alumiseal Corporation. [] Compressible Fiberglass Insulation(For Use At Expansion Joints Only): Sill Sealer,by CertainTeed. [] Molded Pipe Flashing: [] Pipe Boots,by Portals Plus,Inc. [] EPDM Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's splice cleaner,splicing cement,and lap sealant as recommended by membrane manufacturer. [] EPDM Bonding Cement: Manufacturer's standard rubber based adhesive as recommended for substrates and project conditions. Statement of Conformance: This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Document 00800- Supplementary Conditions, Paragraph 9.11. The undersigned hereby declares that the Product identified above by manufacturer's name and model number is (one of) the product(s) specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Docu- ments and has been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instruc- tions and the Contract Documents. SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER: Phone Number: ( ) (Contact name of subcontractor/supplier offering above product) (Subcontractor/supplier name and address) CONTRACTOR: Contractor signature and Title of Signatory) (Contact name of Contractor) ( g END OF FORM 07550-13 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 4M Flashing Membrane: go Flashing Membrane: Check one to be provided. [] Ruberoid Mop,by GAF. [] Nordflex 170,by Nord Bitumi. [] DynaFlex,by Johns Manville. Ow [] VersaFlash 160,by Tamko. [] Brai/F1ex170,by U.S. Intec. sm Waterproofing Membrane: Waterproofing Membrane: Check one to be provided. [] Sure-Seal 0.045 Thick Reinforced EPDM Membrane,by Carlisle. [] SPM 45R,by Johns Manville. Waterproofing Flashing: [] Sure-Seal Uncured EPDM Elastoform Flashing,by Carlisle. [] SPM Flashing,by Johns Manville. Bituminous Materials: [] Bitumen: ASTM D312,Type III or Type IV bitumen,American made. Manufacturer: ^s [J Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586,Type I and II cutback asphalt type. Hard setting at vertical use;non-setting at horizontal use. Manufacturer: �.. [] Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41,asphaltic primer suitable for use with roofing system,for application to concrete or masonry surfaces. Manufacturer: [] Modified Bitumen Flashing Cement: Manufacturer's standard one-part or two-part SBS modified bitumen cement. ^� Manufacturer: Roof Insulation: Check insulation system and those products to be provided;give thicknesses. Insulation Boards: Indicate boards used in insulation assembly: Isocyanurate Foam Insulation: [] Pyrox,Apache Products Company: Thickness: [] AC Foam,Atlas Energy Products: Thickness: [] GAFTEMP Isotherm R,GAF: Thickness: [] E'NRG'Y 2,NRG,Barriers,Inc.: Thickness: [] Multi-Max,R-Max,Inc.: Thickness: [] UltraGard,Johns Manville: Thickness: [] USIso Polyisocyanurate,U.S.Intec: Thickness: Glass Fiber Insulation: [] Fiberglass,Johns Manville: Thickness: High Density Wood Fiber: [] GAFTEMP Fiberboard,GAF: Thickness: 3/4 inch. (] Huebert Fiberboard,Huebert Fiberboard,Inc.: Thickness: 3/4 inch. [] Wood Fiber,Wood Fiber Industries: Thickness: 3/4 inch. Perlite Thermal Insulation Board: [] GAFTEMP Perlite,GAF Thickness: 3/4 inch. [] Fesco Board,Johns Manville: Thickness: 3/4 inch. ..� Roof Curb Insulation: [] Isocyanurate Foam: Thickness: .. sm 07550-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .n, CONTRACTOR'S RECORD LETTER OF CONFORMANCE SECTION 07550 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET ROOFING tin Project Location: Date: (City) 4M (State) Project Number: Store Number: The following product has been selected for use in this project from the list of acceptable products specified. Quality Assurance: Roofing Applicator: Check one of the following: [] GAF Master Roofer,with three years documented experience. [] Nord Bitumi Registered Non-Standard Warranty Applicator,with three years documented experience. [] Johns Manville NDL Approved,with three years documented experience. [] TAMKO approved Roofing Contractor(TARC),with three years documented experience. [] U.S.Intec Platinum Contractor,with three years documented experience. Geographical Limitations: [] Roofing applicator's primary place of business is within a 250 mile radius of the Project site. Regulatory Requirements for Roof Assembly: One of the following standards have been met by this roofing system: [] Factory Mutual: Roofing assembly meets Class IC-90(FM Standard 4470)requirements for fire resistance and wind uplift in accordance with FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. [] Underwriters Laboratory: Roof covering materials meet Class C(UL test 790)requirements for external fire resistance. Roofing assembly meets Class 90 Fire Classified(UL tests 580 and 1256)requirements for uplift and flame spread developed from underside of deck. Manufacturers: Roofing System: Check one to be provided. [] System No.I-2-1-MG,by GAF. [] System No.MAM027,by Nord Bitumi. [] System No.317I13,by Johns Manville. [] System No.202,by Tamko. [] System No.BF-310-NI,by U.S.Intec. Roofing Membrane: Cap Sheet: Check one to be provided. [] Ruberoid Mop,by GAF. [] Nordflex170,by Nord Bitumi. [] DynaGlas,by Johns Manville. [] AwaPlan 170,by Tamko. [] Brai/Flex170,by U.S.Intec. Cap Sheet Ceramic Granule Color: [] Black or dark gray. Ply Felt: Check one to be provided. on [] GAFGlass Ply 4,by GAF. [] Type IV Ply Sheet,by Nord Bitumi. [] Glas Ply IV,by Johns Manville. [] Tam-Ply 1V,by Tamko. [] Tough Ply IV,by U.S.Intec. 07550-11 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ON am MM m nw BLANK PAGE xw wa w" no 07550-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. ON � 3.7 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Waterproofing Membrane: Apply EPDM waterproofing membrane to parapet using bonding cement as recom- mended by membrane manufacturer. Run membrane waterproofing over top of parapet and turn down front side of parapet 3 inches. 1. Apply additional 3" wide x continuous waterproofing membrane on exterior surface of parapet wall. Set waterproofing strip in full bed of adhesive,membrane centered over joint between masonry and nailer. 2. Provide continuous weather tight seal from 3"below parapet cap,over parapet,down interior face,and onto roof surface. 3. Conceal adhesive on exterior face of parapet with waterproofing. B. Waterproofing Flashing: Apply EPDM flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements and sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured EPDM flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle changes,to flash inside and outside comers,scuppers,and other penetrations or unusually shaped walls. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.9 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instruction. B. Replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. 3.10 PROTECTION A. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof installation,protect surfaces in manner recommended by roofing system manufacturer to protect Manufacturer's Warranty. END OF SECTION Im 07550-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 4. Modified Bituminous Cap Sheet Installation: a. Mopping asphalt shall have an EVT to accommodate minimum mop temperature of 425 degrees F. b. Do not mop asphalt more than 3 to 4 feet in front of roll; embed rolls into hot asphalt immediately. "Walk-in"edges of sheet at side laps. C. In extreme conditions, completely unroll the cap sheet prior to placement, turn dark side up, and place in direct sunlight for minimum of 15 minutes or until there are no apparent waves in sheet. Re-roll or scroll sheet and move into position for mopping. 5. Phased installation of the roofing membranes will not be permitted. F. Broadcast loose granules on asphalt bleed-out at laps. Granule color: match roof membrane granules. 3.5 WATER CUTOFFS AND WEATHER PROTECTION A. Install water cut-offs, two plies in hot asphalt with asphalt glaze coat, at end of day's operation to seal insulation and edge of roof membrane from moisture entry. If inclement weather appears imminent during roofing applica- tion,cease operations and protect deck,insulation,flashings,penetrations and membrane from moisture infiltration with water cutoffs. Insulation and roofing materials not protected prior to inclement weather will be considered damaged and will be cause for rejection. B. Apply two plies of felt in 23 lbs/sq of hot asphalt with asphalt glaze coat over cutoffs and as recommended by roofing system manufacturer. Plug steel deck flutes under cutoff membrane to prevent moisture from getting un- der insulation. C. Remove water cut-offs and other temporary weather protections prior to continuing roofing work. Remove mate- rials that have been subject to moisture damage and return deck to a clean, dry condition before proceeding with roofing operations. Remove damaged materials from job site. A` D. The water cut-offs and weather protection shall not be considered a part of the final roof system specified. 3.6 FLASHING MEMBRANE AND ACCESSORIES A. Extend membrane felts up cant strips. Apply modified bituminous sheet base flashing in hot asphalt and mechani- cally fasten top edge in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Roof Penetrations: 1. Molded Pipe Flashing: Install where configuration of penetration will permit, including but not limited to sensor mast,electrical conduit,and plumbing vents. 2. Roof Curbs: Install manufactured roof curbs, specified in Section 07721, where molded pipe flashing cannot be installed due to configuration of penetration. s C. Mop in and seal flanges of items penetrating through membrane with modified bituminous flashing. D. Fasten termination bars at 6 inches on center. E. Walkway Pads: Mop in and seal modified bitumen walkway pads as indicated on Drawings at each new or relo- cated rooftop mechanical unit and at new roof hatch. Provide 1 inch gap between perpendicular pads to allow for positive drainage. F. Isolation Pads: Set pads in roofing cement. Install isolation pads at pipe supports as indicated on Drawings. G. Expansion Joints: Install specified vapor barrier forming minimum 6 inch deep trough supporting compressible insulation. Extend vapor barrier over top edge of modified bituminous base flashing and mechanically attach to curb. Tape laps in vapor barrier with specified pressure sensitive tape. Fill expansion joint with compressible in- sulation. See Section 07620 for sheet metal expansion joint covers. If an existing expansion joint is extended in length,the profile and cover of the new expansion joint must match the profile and cover of the existing expansion joint. as 07550-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 WN OW C. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of water,snow,and ice. D. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate and pre-installation conference has been held with agree- ments reached. vp 3.2 PREPARATION tw A. Provide covers and other means of protection as necessary to protect building surfaces against damage during roofing work. B. Where work shall continue over finished roof membrane,protect surfaces. ow 3.3 ROOF INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Multiple Layer Installation: 1. Place long edge of boards parallel to deck flutes, forming joint over solid bearing. Lay insulation units with long edge joints continuous and end joints staggered. Mechanically fasten first layer of insulation through fire resistive layer if specified, to deck with FM approved fasteners and plates. Install fasteners using drill with torque clutch; other types of drills will not be permitted. Install fasteners in accordance with requirements of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 for 90 psf wind uplift resistance. In no case shall the number of fasteners be less than indicated in Attachment A for the field,perimeter,and corners as defined by Attachment B(refer to Attachments at end of this Section). 2. Solid mop second layer of insulation to meet 90 psf wind uplift requirements,with joints offset a minimum of 6 inches from first layer. Place boards with end joints staggered. Mechanical attachment of second layer of insulation is unacceptable,and will be cause for rejection. B. Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around protrusions through roof. C. Place roof crickets and tapered insulation to required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. E. Adhere a single layer of insulation to manufactured metal curbs with modified bitumen flashing cement. 3.4 ROOFING MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply roofing at transition of existing roof system to new roof system as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 07560. B. Equiviscous Temperature at Point of Application: No more than 25 degrees F from bitumen rating (EVT) indi- cated on bitumen container label. C. Apply roofing membrane in strict accordance with roofing manufacturer's published instructions for specified system. D. Apply ply felts and modified bituminous cap sheet firmly and uniformly, smooth, free from voids, air pockets, wrinkles,fishmouths,lap joints,or tears. Do not permit foot traffic on freshly mopped ply felts or cap sheet. on E. Cold Weather Application Procedures: When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 degrees F, follow Cold Weather Application Procedures as follows: 1. Store materials in heated storage units(minimum temperature 55 degrees F)prior to installation. Store roll materials on end only. 2. Use insulated asphalt lines and roof top equipment. 3. Fiberglass Ply Felt Installation: Do not mop asphalt more than 6 feet ahead of the roll;embed rolls into hot asphalt immediately. 07550-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2.7 ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Fasteners: Galvanized or non-ferrous type,size and configuration as required to suit application. B. Mechanical Fasteners for Insulation: Coated fasteners,screw type with plates as specified,appropriate for purpose intended and approved by Factory Mutual and system manufacturer; length required for thickness of insulation materials and penetration of deck substrate. 1. Isocyanurate Foam Insulation Fasteners: Metal plate fasteners as approved by roofing system �.. manufacturer. C. Fibrous Cant and Tapered Edge Strips: High density, asphalt impregnated wood fiber or perlite, location as indi- cated on Drawings. 1. Cant Height: 3 inches. D. Walkway Pads: Single layer of modified bituminous sheet flashing material (full width of granular modified bi- tumen SBS sheet,with selvage edge removed). 1. Ceramic Granule Color: White to contrast with field of roof. E. Isolation Pads: Provide one of the following: 1. J-Walk, 12 inch by 24 inch by 1/2 inch plank,by Johns Manville,(800)654-3103. 2. Brai/Flex Walkboard,36 inch by 36 inch pad,by U. S.Intec,(800)624-6832. F. Termination Bar: Manufacturer's standard 1 inch wide extruded or rolled aluminum bar, pre-punched at 6 inches on center. G. Vapor Retarder(For Use At Expansion Joints Only): Lamination of 1-mil thickness of aluminum foil between two 0.5-mil thicknesses of mylar polyester film. Class A fire hazard classification with flame spread rating of 5 and smoke developed rating of 5. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1. Vapor Retarder: Alumiseal Zero Perm Vapor Barrier,by Alumiseal Corporation,(800)235-2313. 2. Tape: Zero Penn Pressure Sensitive Tape,by Alumiseal Corporation. H. Compressible Fiberglass Insulation(For Use At Expansion Joints Only): ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced glass fi- ber insulation. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1. Product: Sill Sealer,by CertainTeed(913)342-5759. a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Width: 6 inches. . I. Molded Pipe Flashing: Factory molded neoprene base flashing for pipe penetration. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: �. 1. Pipe Boots,by Portals Plus,Inc.,(800)774-5240. J. EPDM Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's splice cleaner, splicing cement, and lap sealant as recommended by membrane manufacturer. K. EPDM Bonding Cement: Manufacturer's standard rubber based adhesive as recommended for substrates and proj- ect conditions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify deck is clean and smooth, free of depressions,waves,or projections,properly sloped to drains,valleys, and eaves. Verify flutes of steel deck are evenly spaced at intersections. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place. Verify deck is supported and tightly secured. 07550-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "R W RM 2.5 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312; Type III or Type IV (American made). Consult with roofing manufacturer re- garding use of Type III asphalt in hot climates,as Type III may not be permitted. 4M B. Plastic Cement:ASTM D4586,Type I and II Cutback Asphalt Type,asbestos-free. 1. Non-setting type at horizontal use and between dissimilar materials. so 2. Hard setting type at vertical uses. C. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41,asphaltic primer suitable for use with roofing,for application to concrete or masonry surfaces. D. Modified Bitumen Flashing Cement: Manufacturer's standard one-part or two-part SBS modified bitumen cement. 2.6 ROOF INSULATION A. Isocyanurate Foam Insulation (FS HH-I-1972/2) Manufacturers. Foam plastic products shall comply with FM Standard 4450 Approval or UL Standard 1256 Classification: O 1. Pyrox,by Apache Products Company;(800)777-3707. 2. AC Foam,by Atlas Energy Products,(800)677-1476. 3. GAFTEMP Isotherm R,by GAF,(800)766-4311. 4. E'NRG'Y 2,by NRG Barriers,Inc.,(800)343-1285. 5. Multi-Max,by R-Max,Inc.,(800)527-0890. 6. U1traGard,by Johns Manville,(800)654-3103. 7. USIso Polyisocyanurate,by U.S.Intec,(800)624-6832. B. Glass Fiber Insulation(ASTM C726)Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass,by Johns Manville,(800)654-3103. C. High Density Wood Fiber Insulation(ASTM C208)Manufacturers: 1. GAFTEMP Fiberboard Roof Insulation,by GAF,(800)766-3411. 2. Huebert Fiberboard Roof Insulation,by Huebert Fiberboard,Inc,(816) 882-2704. 3. Wood Fiber Roof Insulation,by Wood Fiber Industries,(312)407-9210. D. Perlite Thermal Insulation Board(ASTM C728)Manufacturers: 1. GAFTEMP Perlite Roof Insulation,by GAF(800)766-3411. 2. Fesco Board,expanded perlite,by Johns Manville,(800)654-3103. 3. Insulation Assembly(Z1-B): E. Insulation Assembly: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following insulation assem- bly:Insulation Assembly(Z3-A): a. First Layer Insulation: Isocyanurate Foam;both faces covered with glass fiber felt;2.7 inches thick no (R=20.0). b. Second Layer Insulation: Select one of the following. 1) Perlite Board Insulation;3/4 inch thick(R=2.08 min.). 2) HD Wood Fiberboard Insulation;3/4 inch thick(R=2.08 min.). 3) Glass Fiber Rigid Board; top surface coated with asphalt and craft paper; 3/4 inch thick (R=2.78). F. Roof Curb Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Foam; both faces covered with glass fiber felt; thickness to match wood nailer. G. Tapered Insulation: Provide crickets, saddles, and tapered insulation of same material as second layer of insula- tion;taper to the following slopes: 1. Crickets and Saddles: 1/4 inch per foot. 2. Insulation Installed to Counterslope the Roof Structure: 1/2 inch per foot. 07550-5 OF Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide modified bituminous sheet roofing system, by one of the fol- lowing manufacturers: 1. System No.I-2-1-MG,by GAF,(800)766-3411. 2. System No.MAM027,by Nord Bitumi,(800)523-0179. 3. System No.3FID by Johns Manville Roofing Systems,(800)654-3103. 4. System No.202 by Tamko,(800)641-4691 ext.392. 5. System No.BF-310-NI,by U.S.Intec,(800)624-6832. 2.2 ROOFING MEMBRANE A. Cap Sheet: Polyester or fiberglass mat,as specified,saturated in asphalt and coated on both sides with SBS rubber ... modified asphalt,with ceramic granule finish surface. 1. Ruberoid Mop,by GAF. 2. Nordflex 170,by Nord Bitumi. 3. DynaGlas,by Johns Manville. 4. Awaplan 170,by Tamko. 5. Brai/Flex170,by U.S.Intec. B. Cap Sheet Ceramic Granule Color: Black or dark gray. C. Ply Felt: ASTM D2178,Type IV,asphalt coated fiberglass mat. 1. GAFGIas Ply 4,by GAF. 2. Type IV Ply Sheet,by Nord Bitumi. 3. Glass Ply IV,by Johns Manville. 4. Tam-Ply IV,by Tamko. 5. Tough Ply IV,by U.S.Intec. 2.3 FLASHING MEMBRANE A. Flashing: Polyester mat saturated in asphalt and coated on both sides with SBS rubber modified asphalt,with ce- ramic granule finish surfaces. 1. Ruberoid Mop,by GAF. �+ 2. Nordflex 170,by Nord Bitumi. 3. DynaFlex,by Johns Manville. 4. VersaFlash 160,by Tamko. 5. Brai/F1ex170,by U.S.Intec. ..w 2.4 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Waterproofing Membrane: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D4637, Type 1. Class SR (scrim or fabric internal reinforced); 45 mils nominal thickness; exterior face color,black. .� 1. Sure-Seal 0.045 Thick Reinforced EPDM Membrane,by Carlisle. 2. SPM 45R,by Johns Manville. B. Waterproofing Flashing: 60 mils, uncured EPDM sheet flashing specifically designed for use in flashing at cor- ners,transitions,and changes in plain of membrane. 1. Sure-Seal Uncured EPDM Elastoform Flashing,by Carlisle. 2. SPM Flashing,by Johns Manville. 07550-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ** f. Review required inspections,testing,certifying and material usage accounting procedures. g. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions,including possibility of temporary roofing(if not a mandatory requirement). h. Review safety precautions relating to roofing installation. 1.6 GEOGRAPHICAL LIMITATIONS A. Roofing applicator's primary place of business shall be within a 250 mile radius of the Project site. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers,dry,undamaged,seals and labels intact. B. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Store roll materials standing on end. Storage requirements for insulation are as follows: 1. Cover with tarpaulin,shield from moistures and ultraviolet rays. 2. Elevate minimum of 4 inches above substrate. 3. Secure to resist high winds. 4. Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads. 5. Do not install wet insulation. Insulation shall be thoroughly dry prior to installation. C. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces against damage from roofing work. Do not store materials on previously completed roofing. OR 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather. When air temperature is expected to fall below 40 de- grees F,follow specified Cold Weather Application Procedures. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to wet,damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is occurring. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed dur- ing same day. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated metal counter flashings specified under other sections as the work of this Section proceeds. B. Phased installation of the roofing membranes(glaze coating of ply felts)will not be permitted. C. Complete installation of base flashing at roof curbs prior to setting roof top equipment. on 1.10 WARRANTY A. Existing Roofing System: 1. Verify if adjacent existing roofing system is under warranty or bond. Perform Work in accordance with requirements of party issuing warranty or bond. 2. Provide certification from party holding existing warranty or bond that new Work does not invalidate existing warranty or bond. B. Provide 2 year Roofing Guarantee, from Roofing Subcontractor, commencing at date of building Substantial Completion, on form provided at the end of this Section. During 2 year guarantee period, Roofing Subcontractor agrees to respond to Wal-Mart reported roof leaks within 48 hours to execute repairs. 07550-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ..., A. Modified Bituminous Roofing System: Three-ply,hot mopped,system consisting of insulation on metal deck with two plies of Type IV (ASTM D2178) fiberglass ply felt overlaid with modified bituminous (SBS) granular sur- faced cap sheet. B. Waterproofing Membrane: Parapet walls as indicated on Drawings, using fully adhered single ply EPDM mem- brane system. C. Wind Uplift: 90 psf of uplift resistance(minimum). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions: Submittals for Closeout. B. Section 01330-Submittal Proceduress: Procedures for submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Qualifications of Applicator: Company specializing in modified bituminous roof application, with minimum of three years documented experience (most recent 3 years prior to bid date), certified by roofing system manufac- turer as follows. 1. GAF,Master Roofer. 2. Nord Bitumi,Registered Non-Standard Warranty Applicator. 3. Johns Manville,NDL Approved. 4. TAMKO,TAMKO approved roofing contractor(TARC). 5. U.S.Intec,Platinum Contractor. B. Regulatory Requirements for Roof Assembly: Comply with Factory Mutual System Approval Guide or Under- writers Laboratories,Inc. Roofing Materials and Systems Directory as specified: 1. Factory Mutual: Provide roofing assembly meeting Class IC-90(FM Standard 4470)requirements for fire resistance and wind uplift in accordance with FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. , 2. Underwriters Laboratory: Provide roof covering materials meeting Class C (UL test 790)requirements for external fire resistance. Provide roofing assembly meeting Class 90 Fire Classified (UL tests 580 and 1256)requirements for uplift and flame spread developed from underside of deck. C. Pre-installation Conference: 1. Convene a pre-installation conference at the site, one week prior to commencing work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this Section, including, but not limited to, the Owner's representative, Contractor, Roofing Applicator and job foreman, Plumber and Roofing Manufacturer's Representative. 2. Contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager two weeks prior to pre-installation conference to confirm schedule. 3. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work. 4. Record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements (or disagreements) reached, and furnish copy of record to each party attending. Review foreseeable methods and procedures related to roofing work,including the following: a. Tour, inspect and discuss condition of substrate, roof drains, roof drain final locations, curbs, penetrations and other preparatory work performed by other trades. WM b. Review structural loading limitations of deck and inspect deck for loss of flatness and for required mechanical fastening. C. Review roofing system requirements(drawings,specifications and other contract documents). s,,,,, d. Review required submittals,both completed and yet to be completed. e. Review and finalize construction schedule related to roofing work and verify availability of materials,installer's personnel,equipment and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. a. 07550-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ""� UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07550-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING !� PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Preparation of roof deck to receive roofing membrane. 2. Roof Insulation. 3. Modified bituminous SBS(Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene)roofing membrane. 4. Flashing membrane. 5. Parapet wall waterproofing membrane. 6. Accessories B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Roof parapet camera support mount. 2. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking and nailers. 3. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Counter flashings,edge trim,and other sheet metal. 4. Section 07711 -Gutters and Downspouts: Interface of gutters with roofing and metal flashings. 5. Section 07721 -Manufactured Curbs: Curbs for roof penetrations. 6. Section 07722-Roof Hatches: Penetration of roofing system. 7. Section 08630-Metal Framed Skylights. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials: on 1. ASTM C208-Specification for Insulating Board(Cellulosic Fiber),Structural and Decorative. 2. ASTM C726-Specification for Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board. 3. ASTM C728-Specification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. 4. ASTM D41 -Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,Dampproofing,and Waterproofing. 5. ASTM D312-Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 6. ASTM D2178-Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 7. ASTM D4586-Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos Free. 8. ASTM D4637-Specification for EPDM and Neoprene Sheet Roofing. B. Factory Mutual Research Corporation(FM): 1. FM-Approval Guide,Chapter 18-Building Materials. 2. FM-Loss Prevention Data 1-28,Insulated Steel Deck. 3. FM-Standard 4470. C. Federal Specification(FS): 1. FS HH-I-1972/2 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate Faced with Asphalt/Organic Felt or Glass Reinforced Fiber Felt on Both Sides of the Foam. D. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.(UL): 1. UL-Roofing Materials and Systems Directory. 2. UL 580-Standard Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 3. UL 790-Standard Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials. 4. UL 1256-Standard Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction. 07550-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3. This Guarantee shall become null and void unless the Contractor is notified of any alleged defect in materials or .m workmanship and provided an opportunity to inspect and,if required by the terms of this Guarantee,to repair the roof. Wal-Mart will notify Roofing Contractor of needed repairs and Roofing Contractor will make repairs within 48 hours. The notice will be by telephone or facsimile to the Contractor's office as listed on this Guarantee. The Contractor will notify Wal-Mart Property Maintenance when the repairs are complete. In the event an emergency condition exists am which requires immediate repair to avoid substantial damage to the building or its contents,then the Owner may make the essential temporary repairs. The Contractor will reimburse the Owner for those reasonable repair expenses which would have been the Contractor's responsibility but for the emergency condition. Such emergency repairs will not void .. the Guarantee. 4. No work shall be done on said roof, including,but without limitation,work in connection with flues,vents,drains,sign braces,railings,platforms or other equipment fastened to or set on the roof,and no repairs or alterations shall be made to said roof,unless Contractor shall first be notified through Wal-Mart Property Maintenance Department,and shall be .. given the opportunity to provide the necessary roofing work. Contractor shall be paid for reasonable time and materials expended in making requested repairs occasioned by the work of others on said roof. 5. This Guarantee shall become null and void if the roof is used as a promenade or is sprayed or flooded,unless such use was originally specified and the specification is noted in Paragraph 9 below. 6. This Guarantee shall not be or become effective unless and until Contractor has been paid in full for said roof in accordance with the agreement pursuant to which such roof was applied. 7. This Guarantee is transferable within the two-year guarantee period,without the prior written consent of Contractor. 8. This Guarantee is in lieu of all other guarantees or warranties,express or implied. ALL IMPLIED GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES,AND SPECIFICALLY THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,ARE EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED AND DISCLAIMED. 9. Additional conditions or exclusions: too IN WITNESS WHEREOF,this instrument has been duly executed this day of ,19 am By No END OF GUARANTEE an ..s 07511-14 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ""' ROOFING GUARANTEE Whereas of herein called"Contractor" has completed application of the following roof: Owner: Address of Owner: Type and Name of Building: Location: Manufacturer and System Specification Number: Area of Roof- Date of Building Substantial Completion: go Date Guarantee Expires: Contractor's Telephone: Emergency Telephone: NO Whereas,at the inception of such work,Contractor agreed to guarantee the aforesaid roof for a limited period and subject to the conditions herein set forth; Now, therefore, Contractor hereby Guarantees, subject to the conditions herein set forth, that during a period of Two (2) years from the date of building Substantial Completion(as defined in Section 00800- Supplementary Conditions), it will, at its own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to said roof resulting solely from faults or defects in materials or workmanship applied by or through contractor as may be necessary to maintain said roof in watertight condition. In accordance with good roofing practice, the Contractor shall remove and replace all wet insulation caused by water leaks covered under this Guarantee(i.e. leaks resulting from circumstances other than those listed in the exclusions)and repair the roof system at no cost to the Owner. Guarantee shall include materials and workmanship for the following items: 1. Membranes(including parapet waterproofing). ON 2. Membrane flashings including attachment to sheet metal flashings and trim. 3. Insulation. 4. Asphalt bitumen. 5. Fasteners,cements,and adhesives. This guarantee is made subject to the following conditions: 1. Specifically excluded from this Guarantee is any and all damage to said roof,the building or contents caused by the acts or omissions of other trades or contractors; lightning,cyclone,tornado,hurricane,hailstorm,flood,or earthquake; foundation settlement; failure or cracking of the roof deck;faulty construction of,copings,chimneys,skylights,vents, supports,or other parts of the building;vapor condensation beneath the roof;water leakage due to erosion and porosity of mortar and brick;dry rot;stoppage of roof drains and gutters;inadequate drainage,slope,or other conditions beyond the control of Contractor which cause ponding or standing of water(standing water longer than 72 hours);rodents or other animals;or fire. If the roof is damaged by reason of any of the foregoing,this guarantee shall thereupon become null and void for the balance of the guarantee period unless such damage is repaired by Contractor at the expense of the party requesting such repairs. 2. Contractor is not liable for consequential damages to the building or contents resulting from any defects in said roof, including,but without limitation,any interruption of business experienced by Owner or occupants of the building. 07511-13 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .K on no BLANK PAGE 07511-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Statement of Conformance: This Record Letter of Conformance is provided as a Record Document in accordance with Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions, Paragraph 9.11. The undersigned hereby declares that the Product identified above by manufacturer's name and model number is (one of) the product(s) specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. SUBCONTRACTOR/SUPPLIER: Phone Number: ( ) Mp (Contact name of subcontractor/supplier offering above product) (Subcontractor/supplier name and address) CONTRACTOR: IF (Contact name of Contractor) (Contractor signature and Title of Signatory) END OF FORM �w wA 07511-11 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 [] Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41,asphaltic primer suitable for use with roofing system,for application to concrete or .A masonry surfaces. Manufacturer: [] Modified Bitumen Flashing Cement: Manufacturer's standard one-part or two-part SBS modified bitumen cement. Manufacturer: Insulation: Check insulation system and those products to be provided;give thicknesses. Insulation Boards: Indicate boards used in insulation assembly: wr Isocyanurate Foam Insulation: [] Pyrox,Apache Products Company: Thickness: [] AC Foam,Atlas Energy Products: Thickness: [) GAFTEMP Isotherm R,GAF: Thickness: [] E'NRG'Y 2,NRG,Barriers,Inc.: Thickness: [] Multi-Max,R-Max,Inc.: Thickness: [] U1traGard,Manville: Thickness: [] USIso Polyisocyanurate,U.S.Intec: Thickness: Glass Fiber Insulation: [] Fiberglass,Manville: Thickness: High Density Wood Fiber: [] GAFTEMP Fiberboard,GAF: Thickness: 3/4 inch. [] Huebert Fiberboard,Huebert Fiberboard,Inc.: Thickness: 3/4 inch. [] Wood Fiber,Wood Fiber Industries: Thickness: 3/4 inch. Perlite Thermal Insulation Board: [] GAFTEMP Perlite,GAF Thickness: 3/4 inch. [] Fesco Board,Manville: Thickness: 3/4 inch. Roof Curb Insulation: �* [] Isocyanurate Foam: Thickness: Roof Surfacing: Fibrated Emulsion Roof Coating:. Check one to be provided. [] 20-FAF Emulsion,by Grundy Industries,Inc.. [] Karnak#220,by Karnak Chemical Corporation. [] Topgard Type B,by Manville. MW [] Fibrated Emulsion,by Monsey. [] 6195-900 Black Jack Fibered Asphalt Emulsion,by Gibson-Homans Co. [] Liquid Asphalt Emulsion#484,by Koppers. [] Asphalt Emulsion#5930,by Permaseal. Accessories: [] Roofing Fasteners: Galvanized or non-ferrous type. [] Insulation Fasteners: Coated mechanical fasteners;proper length and acceptable for 90 psf wind uplift. Manufacturer: [] Fibrous Cant and Tapered Edge Strip: High density,asphalt impregnated wood fiber or perlite. [] Walkway Pads: Full width of SBS modified bitumen flashing material. •• [) Isolation Pads:J-Walk,by Manville. [] Termination Bar: Manufacturer's standard 1 inch wide extruded or rolled aluminum bar,pre-punched at 6 inches on center. [] Vapor Retarder(For Use At Expansion Joints Only): Alumiseal Zero Perm Vapor Barrier,by Alumiseal Corporation. [] Compressible Fiberglass Insulation(For Use At Expansion Joints Only): Sill Sealer,by CertainTeed. [] Molded Pipe Flashing: [] Pipe Boots,by Portals Plus,Inc. [] EPDM Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's splice cleaner,splicing cement,and lap sealant as recommended by membrane manufacturer. [] EPDM Bonding Cement: Manufacturer's standard rubber based adhesive as recommended for substrates and �.. project conditions. ow 07511-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 , CONTRACTOR'S LETTER OF CONFORMANCE SECTION 07511 BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING • Project Location: Date: (City) (State) Project Number: Store Number: op The following product has been selected for use in this project from the list of acceptable products specified. Quality Assurance: Roofing Applicator: Check one of the following: [] GAF Master Roofer,with three years documented experience. [] Manville NDL Approved,with three years documented experience. Geographical Limitations: [] Roofing applicator's main place of business is within a 250 mile radius of the Project site. Regulatory Requirements for Roof Assembly: One of the following standards have been met by this roofing system: [] Factory Mutual: Roofing assembly meets Class IC-90(FM test 4450/4470)requirements for fire resistance and wind uplift in accordance with FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. [] Underwriters Laboratory: Roof covering materials meet Class C(UL test 790)requirements for external fire resistance. Roofing assembly meets Class 90 Fire Classified(UL tests 580 and 1256)requirements for uplift and flame spread developed from underside of deck. Manufacturers: Roofing System: Check one to be provided. [] System No.1-O-4-C/P6,by GAF. [] System No.4GIS,by Manville. Roofing Membrane: Ply Felt: Check one to be provided. [] GAFGlass Ply 6,by GAF. [] Glas Ply Premier,by Manville. Flashing Membrane: Flashing Membrane: Check one to be provided. o. [] Ruberoid Mop,by GAF. [] DynaFlex,by Manville. PW Waterproofing Membrane: Waterproofing Membrane: Check one to be provided. [] Sure-Seal 0.045 Thick Reinforced EPDM Membrane,by Carlisle. [] SPM 45R,by Manville. No Waterproofing Flashing: [] Sure-Seal Uncured EPDM Elastoform Flashing,by Carlisle. [] SPM Flashing,by Manville. op Bituminous Materials: [] Bitumen: ASTM D312,Type II or Type III bitumen,American made. Manufacturer: [] Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586,Type I and II cutback asphalt type. Hard setting at vertical use;non-setting at horizontal use. Manufacturer: 07511-9 ' Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 G. Expansion Joints: Install specified vapor barrier forming minimum 6 inch deep trough supporting compressible ..,, insulation. Extend vapor barrier over top edge of modified bituminous base flashing and mechanically attach to curb. Tape laps in vapor barrier with specified pressure sensitive tape. Fill expansion joint with compressible insulation. See Section 07620 for sheet metal expansion joint covers. If an existing expansion joint is extended in length,the profile and cover of the new expansion joint must match the profile and cover of the existing expansion joint. 3.7 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE .�. A. Waterproofing Membrane: Apply EPDM waterproofing membrane to parapet using bonding cement as recommended by membrane manufacturer. Run membrane waterproofing over top of parapet and turn down front side of parapet 3 inches. 1. Apply additional 3" wide x continuous waterproofing membrane on exterior surface of parapet wall. Set waterproofing strip in full bed of adhesive,membrane centered over joint between masonry and nailer. 2. Provide continuous weather tight seal from 3" below parapet cap, over parapet, down interior face, and onto roof surface. 3. Conceal adhesive on exterior face of parapet with waterproofing. B. Waterproofing Flashing: Apply EPDM flashings to seal membrane to vertical elements and sheet metal flashing and trim. 1. Uncured Flashing: Limit use of uncured EPDM flashing to overlay vertical seams as required at angle changes,to flash inside and outside corners,scuppers,and other penetrations or unusually shaped walls- +h• 3.8 ROOF SURFACE COATING A. Apply roof surface coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to new roof surfaces. B. Apply coating no sooner than 45 days and no later than 90 days after roofing system completion. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct identified defects or irregularities. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by asphalt or any other source of soiling caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their instruction. B. Replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this Section. 3.11 PROTECTION A. Protect existing and expansion area building faces, adjacent site, and adjacent existing roof areas from damage during roof application operations. B. Where construction traffic must continue over finished roof installation,protect surfaces in manner recommended by roofing system manufacturer to protect Manufacturer's Warranty. END OF SECTION aw 07511-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Equiviscous Temperature at Point of Application: No more than 25 degrees F from bitumen rating (EVT) indicated on bitumen container label. C. Apply roofing membrane in number of roof felt plies to manufacturer's installation instructions for system specified. Starting at the low edge apply one 9 inch wide,then over that one 18 inch wide, then over that one 27 inch wide,then over all three a full 36 inch wide felt. Following felts are to be applied full width,overlapping the preceding felt by 27-1/2 inches so that at least four plies of felt cover the substrate at all locations. D. Apply felts firmly and uniformly, smooth, free from voids, air pockets, wrinkles, fishmouths, lap joints, or tears into the hot asphalt (within 25 degrees F of the EVT) applied just before the felt at manufacturer's nominal uniform rate over the entire surface. Do not permit foot traffic on freshly mopped ply felts. E. Finish entire surface with the roof surface coating specified below. Do not flood-coat felts prior to applying surface coating. 3.5 WATER CUTOFFS AND WEATHER PROTECTION A. Install water cut-offs, two plies in hot asphalt with asphalt glaze coat, at end of day's operation to seal insulation and edge of roof membrane from moisture entry. If inclement weather appears imminent during roofing application, cease operations and protect deck, insulation, flashings, penetrations and membrane from moisture infiltration with water cutoffs. Insulation and roofing materials not protected prior to inclement weather will be considered damaged and will be cause for rejection. B. Apply two plies of felt in 23 lbs/sq of hot ashpalt with asphalt glaze coat over cutoffs and as recommended by roofing system manufacturer. Plug steel deck flutes under cutoff membrane to prevent moisture from getting under insulation. C. Remove water cutoffs and other temporary weather protections prior to continuing roofing work. Remove materials that have been subject to moisture damage and return deck to a clean, dry condition before proceding with roofing operations. Remove damaged materials from job site. D. The water cutoffs and weather protection shall not be considered a part of the final roof system specified. 3.6 FLASHING MEMBRANE AND ACCESSORIES A. Extend membrane felts up cant strips. Apply modified bituminous sheet base flashing in hot asphalt and mechanically fasten top edge in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Roof Penetrations: 1. Molded Pipe Flashing: Install where configuration of penetration will permit, including but not limited to sensor mast,electrical conduit,and plumbing vents. 2. Roof Curbs: Install manufactured roof curbs, specified in Section 07721, where molded pipe flashing cannot be installed due to configuration of penetration. C. Mop in and seal flanges of items penetrating through membrane with modified bituminous flashing. D. Fasten termination bars at 6 inches on center. E. Walkway Pads: Mop in and seal modified bitumen walkway pads as indicated on Drawings at each new or relocated rooftop mechanical unit and at new roof hatch. Provide 1 inch gap between perpendicular pads to allow for positive drainage. F. Isolation Pads: Set pads in roofing cement. Install isolation pads at pipe supports as indicated on Drawings. 07511-7 OF Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 AM J. EPDM Sheet Seaming System: Manufacturer's splice cleaner, splicing cement, and lap sealant as recommended MW by membrane manufacturer. K. EPDM Bonding Cement: Manufacturer's standard rubber based adhesive as recommended for substrates and project conditions. PART 3 EXECUTION .. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify deck is clean and smooth,free of depressions,waves,or projections,properly sloped to drains,valleys,and eaves. Verify flutes of steel deck are evenly spaced at intersections,clean and dry. .. B. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips, nailing strips, and reglets are in place. Verify deck is supported and tightly secured. C. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of water,snow,and ice. D. Beginning installation means acceptance of substrate and pre-installation conference has been held with agreements reached. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide covers and other means of protection as necessary to protect building surfaces against damage during roofing work. *+� B. Where work shall continue over finished roof membrane,protect surfaces. MW 3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION A. Multiple Layer Installation: 1. Place long edge of boards parallel to deck flutes, forming joint over solid bearing. Lay insulation units .,.� with long edge joints continuous and end joints staggered. Mechanically fasten first layer of insulation through fire resistive layer if specified, to deck with FM approved fasteners and plates. Install fasteners using drill with torque clutch; other types of drills will not be permitted. Install fasteners in accordance with requirements of FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28 for 90 psf wind uplift resistance. In no case ` shall the number of fasteners be less than indicated in Attachment A for the field,perimeter,and corners as defined by Attachment B(refer to Attachments at end of this Section). 2. Solid mop second layer of insulation to meet 90 psf wind uplift requirements,with joints offset a minimum of 6 inches from first layer. Place boards with end joints staggered. Mechanical attachment of second layer of insulation is unacceptable,and will be cause for rejection. B. Lay insulation boards to moderate contact without forcing joints. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking ` and around protrusions through roof. C. Place roof crickets and tapered insulation to required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Apply no more insulation than can be sealed with membrane in same day. E. Adhere a single layer of insulation to manufactured metal curbs with modified bitumen flashing cement. 3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Apply roofing at transition of existing roof system to new roof system as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 07560. 07511-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "* w 2. Roof Curb Insulation: Polyisocyanurate Foam;both faces covered with glass fiber felt; thickness to match wood nailer.Tapered Insulation: Provide crickets, saddles, and tapered insulation of same material as second layer of insulation;taper to the following slopes:Crickets and Saddles: 1/4 inch per foot. 3. Insulation Installed to Counterslope the Roof Structure: 1/2 inch per foot. 2.7 ROOF SURFACING u A. Coating(Fibrated Emulsion),ASTM D1227,Type IV,asbestos free. Provide one of the following coatings: 1. 20-FAF Emulsion,by Grundy Industries,Inc.. 2. Karnak#220,by Karnak Chemical Corporation. 3. Topgard Type B,by Manville(formerly Schuller). 4. Fibrated Emulsion,by Monsey. 5. 6195-900 Black Jack Fibered Asphalt Emulsion,by Gibson-Homans Co. 6. Liquid Asphalt Emulsion#484,by Koppers. A► 7. Asphalt Emulsion#5930,by Permaseal. 2.8 ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Fasteners: Galvanized or non-ferrous type,size and configuration as required to suit application. B. Mechanical Fasteners for Insulation: Coated fasteners, screw type with plates as specified, appropriate for purpose intended and approved by Factory Mutual and system manufacturer; length required for thickness of insulation materials and penetration of deck substrate. 1. Isocyanurate Foam Insulation Fasteners: Metal plate fasteners as approved by roofing system manufacturer. C. Fibrous Cant and Tapered Edge Strips: High density, asphalt impregnated wood fiber or perlite, location as indicated on Drawings. po 1. Cant Height: 3 inches. D. Walkway Pads: Single layer of modified bituminous sheet flashing material (full width of granular modified bitumen SBS sheet,with selvage edge removed). 1. Ceramic Granule Color: Black or dark gray. E. Isolation Pads: J-Walk, 12 inch by 24 inch by 1/2 inch plank,by Manville(formerly Schuller). F. Termination Bar: Manufacturer's standard 1 inch wide extruded or rolled aluminum bar,pre-punched at 6 inches on center. G. Vapor Retarder (For Use At Expansion Joints Only): Lamination of 1-mil thickness of aluminum foil between two 0.5-mil thicknesses of mylar polyester film. Class A fire hazard classification with flame spread rating of 5 and smoke developed rating of 5. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1. Vapor Retarder: Alumiseal Zero Perm Vapor Barrier,by Alumiseal Corporation,(800)235-2313. 2. Tape: Zero Penn Pressure Sensitive Tape,by Alumiseal Corporation. H. Compressible Fiberglass Insulation (For Use At Expansion Joints Only): ASTM C 665, Type I, unfaced glass fiber insulation. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1. Product: Sill Sealer,by CertainTeed(913)342-5759. a. Thickness: 1 inch. b. Width: 6 inches. I. Molded Pipe Flashing: Factory molded neoprene base flashing for pipe penetration. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: 1. Pipe Boots,by Portals Plus,Inc.,(800)774-5240. 07511-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Waterproofing Flashing: 60 mils, uncured EPDM sheet flashing specifically designed for use in flashing at .� corners,transitions,and changes in plain of membrane. 1. Sure-Seal Uncured EPDM Elastoform Flashing,by Carlisle. 2. SPM Flashing,by Manville. dbl 2.5 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS A. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D312; Type II or Type III (American made and approved by roofing manufacturer). MW Consult with roofing manufacturer regarding use of Type II asphalt in hot climates, as Type II may not be permitted. Im B. Plastic Cement:ASTM D4586,Type I and II Cutback Asphalt Type,asbestos-free. 1. Non-setting type at horizontal use and between dissimilar materials. 2. Hard setting type at vertical uses. C. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D41, asphaltic primer suitable for use with roofing, for application to concrete or masonry surfaces. D. Modified Bitumen Flashing Cement: Manufacturer's standard one-part or two-part SBS modified bitumen cement. 2.6 INSULATION A. Isocyanurate Foam Insulation (FS HH-I-1972/2) Manufacturers. Foam plastic products shall comply with FM Standard 4450 Approval or UL Standard 1256 Classification: 1. Pyrox,by Apache Products Company;(800)777-3707. 2. AC Foam,by Atlas Energy Products,(800)677-1476. 3. GAFTEMP Isotherm R,by GAF,(800)766-4311. 4. E'NRG'Y 2,by NRG Barriers,Inc.,(800)343-1285. for 5. Multi-Max,by R-Max,Inc.,(800)527-0890. 6. U1traGard,by Manville,(800)654-3103. 7. USIso Polyisocyanurate,by U.S.Intec,(800)624-6832. ow B. Glass Fiber Insulation(ASTM C726)Manufacturers: 1. Fiberglass,by Manville,(800)654-3103. C. High Density Wood Fiber Insulation(ASTM C208)Manufacturers: 1. GAFTEMP Fiberboard Roof Insulation,by GAF,(800)766-3411. 2. Huebert Fiberboard Roof Insulation,by Huebert Fiberboard,Inc,(816)882-2704. 3. Wood Fiber Roof Insulation,by Wood Fiber Industries,(3 12)407-9210. D. Perlite Thermal Insulation Board(ASTM C728)Manufacturers:GAFTEMP Perlite Roof Insulation,by GAF(800) 766-3411. ., 1. Fesco Board,expanded perlite,by Manville,(800)654-3103. E. Insulation Assemblies: Field verify existing insulation thickness and provide insulation assembly components of thickness as recommended by roofing manufacturer to achieve smooth transition from adjacent existing roofing A* system to new roofing system. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following insulation assembly,minimum thickness as specifed: 1. Insulation Assembly(Z3-A): a. First Layer Insulation: Isocyanurate Foam;both faces covered with glass fiber felt;2.7 inches thick (R=20.0). b. Second Layer Insulation: Select one of the following. 1) Perlite Board Insulation;3/4 inch thick(R=2.08 min.). 2) HD Wood Fiberboard Insulation;3/4 inch thick(R=2.08 min.). 3) Glass Fiber Rigid Board; top surface coated with asphalt and craft paper; 3/4 inch thick (R=2.78). aw 07511-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "' e B. Do not apply roofing membrane to wet,damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is occurring. C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed during same day. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work with installation of associated metal counter flashings specified under other sections as the work of this Section proceeds. B. Phased installation of the roofing membranes(glaze coating of ply felts)will not be permitted. Wr C. Complete installation of base flashing at roof curbs prior to setting roof top equipment. ok 1.10 WARRANTY A. Existing Roofing System: 1. Verify if adjacent existing roofing system is under warranty or bond. Perform Work in accordance with wo requirements of party issuing warranty or bond. 2. Provide certification from party holding existing warranty or bond that new Work does not invalidate existing warranty or bond. B. Provide 2 year Roofing Guarantee, from Roofing Subcontractor, commencing at date of building Substantial Completion, on form provided at the end of this Section. During 2 year guarantee period, Roofing Subcontractor agrees to respond to Wal-Mart reported roof leaks within 48 hours to execute repairs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the built-up asphalt roofing system, by one of the following manufacturers: 1. System No. I-0-4-C/P6,by GAF,(800)766-3411. 2. System No.4GIS,by Johns Manville Roofing Systems(formerly Schuller),(800)654-3103. 2.2 SHEET MATERIALS A. Ply Felt: ASTM D2178,Type VI,asphalt coated fiberglass mat. 1. GAFGlas Ply 6,by GAF. 2. Glas Ply Premier,by Manville(formerly Schuller). 2.3 FLASHING MEMBRANE A. Flashing: Polyester mat saturated in asphalt and coated on both sides with SBS rubber modified asphalt, with ceramic granule finish surfaces. 1. Ruberoid Mop,by GAF. 2. DymaFlex,by Manville(formerly Schuller). 2.4 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE A. Waterproofing Membrane: Ethylene propylene diene monomers formed into uniform, flexible sheets, complying with ASTM D4637, Type 1. Class SR(scrim or fabric internal reinforced); 45 mils nominal thickness; exterior face color,black. 1. Sure-Seal 0.045 Thick Reinforced EPDM Membrane,by Carlisle. 2. SPM 45R,by Manville. 07511-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Built-up Roofing System: Four-ply, hot mopped asphalt system consisting of insulation on metal deck with four plies of Type VI(ASTM D2178)fiberglass ply felts and fibrated surface coating. , B. Waterproofing Membrane: Parapet walls as indicated on Drawings, using fully adhered single ply EPDM membrane system. C. Wind uplift: 90 psf of uplift resistance(minimum). 1.4 SUBMITTALS .. A. Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions: Submittals for Closeout. B. Section 01330-Submittal Proceduress: Procedures for submittals. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Applicator: Company specializing in built-up bituminous roof application, with minimum of three years documented experience (most recent 3 years prior to bid date), certified by roofing system manufacturer as follows. 1. GAF,Master Roofer. 2. Johns Manville,NDL Approved. B. Regulatory Requirements for Roof Assembly: Comply with Factory Mutual System Approval Guide or ..� Underwriters Laboratories,Inc.Roofing Materials and Systems Directory as specified: 1. Factory Mutual: Provide roofing assembly meeting Class IC-90(FM test 4450/4470)requirements for fire resistance and wind uplift in accordance with FM Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. 2. Underwriters Laboratory: Provide roof covering materials meeting Class C(UL test 790)requirements for external fire resistance and wind resistance. Provide roofing assembly meeting Class 90 Fire Classified (UL tests 580 and 1256)requirements for uplift and flame spread developed from underside of deck. rr 1.6 GEOGRAPHICAL LIMITATIONS A. Roofing applicator's main place of business shall be within a 250 mile radius of the Project site. �s 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original containers,dry,undamaged,seals and labels intact. B. Store materials in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. Store roll materials standing on end. Storage requirements for insulation are as follows: 1. Cover with tarpaulin,shield from moistures and ultraviolet rays. 2. Elevate minimum of 4 inches above substrate. 3. Secure to resist high winds. 4. Distribute insulation stored on roof deck to prevent concentrated loads. 5. Do not install wet insulation. Insulation shall be thoroughly dry prior to installation. C. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces against damage from roofing work. Do not store materials on previously completed roofing. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS �w A. Do not apply roofing membrane during inclement weather or when air temperature may fall below 40°F. 07511-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 '""� 4W wr UniSpec II 102999 SECTION 07511 -BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL, 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparation of roof deck to receive roof membrane. 2. Roof Insulation. 3. Roofing membrane. 4. Base flashing. 5. Parapet wall waterproofing. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 0 13 11 -Project Meetings: Pre-Installation Conference. 2. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Roof parapet camera support mount. 3. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking,curbing and cants. Wood treatment requirments. 4. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashings And Trim: Counter flashings,edge trim,and other sheet metal. 5. Section 07711 -Gutters and Downspouts: Interface of gutters with roofing and metal flashings. tour 6. Section 07722-Roof Hatches: Penetration of roofing system. 7. Division 15 - Mechanical: Penetrations of roofing system, flashing collars, curbs for mechanical equipment. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM C208 - Specification for Insulating Board (Cellulosic Fiber), Structural and Decorative.ASTM C726-Specification for Mineral Fiber Roof Insulation Board. 2. ASTM C728-Specifification for Perlite Thermal Insulation Board. 3. ASTM D41 -Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing,Dampproofing,and Waterproofing. 4. ASTM D312-Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing. 5. ASTM D 1227-Specification for Emulsified Asphalt for Use as a Protective Coating for Roofing. 6. ASTM D2178-Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 7. ASTM D2824 -Specification for Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coatings. 8. ASTM D4586-Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos Free. B. Factory Mutual System(FM): 1. FM-Approval Guide,Chapter 18-Building Materials(FM). 2. FM-Roof Assembly Classifications. 3. FM-Fire Test No 4450/4470. C. Federal Specification(FS): I. FS HH-1-1972/2 - Insulation Board, Thermal, Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate Faced with „N►, Asphalt/Organic Felt,Asphalt/Asbestos Felt or Asphalt/Glass Fiber Felt on Both Sides of the Foam. D. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc. (UL): Aw 1. UL-Roofing Materials and Systems Directory. 2. UL580-Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies. 3. UL 790-Standard Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials. 4. UL 1256-Standard Fire Test of Roof Deck Construction. PW no 07511-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. .. w; .m .r .�r BLANK PAGE * wu ,rw 07411-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 '" w SECTION 07411 METAL ROOF PANELS CONTRACTOR'S FINAL FIELD USE DRAWING REVIEW Project Name: Project Number: The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work until review of the Final Field Use Drawings is complete. By signing below as approved,the Contractor hereby certifies that the he has reviewed the Final Field Use Drawings and has checked and coordinated the information contained therein with related work and has reported any errors, inconsistencies, or !! omissions to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer's review of this form or any attached drawings shall neither relieve the Contractor or the metal roof panel supplier from the responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents nor approve any work not complying therewith. Final Field Use Drawings are not Contract Documents and do not modify Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of measurements,elevations,line and grades of the Work. SUBMITTAL: ❑ Metal Roof Panel Final Field Use drawings from Owners Metal Roof Panel Supplier dated (check the appropriate submittal action and fill in date on drawings) ❑ Approved/no exceptions taken ❑ Revise and resubmit ❑ Approved/comments attached ❑ Rejected owl If comments are required,attach a separate sheet. Approved by Contractor: Firm Name: Signed by: Date: Return one copy to the Structural Engineer of Record,and one copy to Owner's Metal Roof Panel Supplier. Wallace Engineering 201 W.Sth,Suite 200 Tulsa,OK 74103 Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER Wheeling Corrugating Company,Division of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation 1134 Market Street PHONE: (304)234-2300 Wheeling,WV 26003 FAX: (304)234-2330 END OF FORM 07411-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Ow No Ab .. .. .w .R a* BLANK PAGE an 00 so ..0 on A* .. 07411-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "' 2.3 ACCESSORIES(CONTRACTOR FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Fasteners: As indicated on Drawings. B. Premolded Closure Strips: Manufactured panel manufacturer's standard, size and configuration to match panel flutes. C. Flashing and Counter Flashing: Specified in Section 07620. D. Gutters and Downspouts: Specified in Section 07711. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate panels in sizes and profiles to fit intended application and remain watertight. Provide for expansion of panel components within the system and in relationship to adjoining construction. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that metal deck supporting framing components are ready to receive Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install panels such that panel joint occurs at top of rib. B. Coordinate with work of other Sections to produce watertight assembly, capable of withstanding loading pressures and thermal and lateral loads. C. Install gutter and downspouts furnished under other Sections. D. Lap panels,set into sealant,and fasten at spacing indicated on Drawings. E. Isolate metals from dissimilar metals or corrosive substrates using bituminous coating. F. Fill space between metal panel and support beam and between metal panel and light fixtures with premolded clo- sure accessory strip to eliminate nesting space for birds. G. Canopy Roof Panels: Paint canopy supports, structural steel, metal fabrications and accessories on tops,bottoms, edges,and other weather-exposed surfaces as indicated on Drawings,in accordance with Section 09900. 1. Do not field finish canopy panels. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect metal canopy panel installation,type of deck,laps,fastener type,fastener spacing,and attachments. +04 B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. C. Testing and Inspection: Testing Laboratory services specified in Section 01458. ow 07411-3 �w Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 r.. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE MW A. Qualifications for Welding Work: 1. Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. 2. Provide certification that welders employed in Work have satisfactory passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. 3. If recertification of welders is required,provide without additional cost to Owner. 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery: Owner's metal canopy panel supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by contractor. To establish product delivery date, contact the Delivery Scheduling or Wal-Mart Account Contact person indicated,immediately upon notice of Award of Contract. B. Project Packaging: Metal canopy panel will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. Identification markings will coordinate with identification markings for components indicated on Owner's Metal Canopy Panel Supplier installation final field use drawings. C. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Installation Final Field Use Drawings and Bills of Lading pro- vided by Owner's Metal Canopy Supplier. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart immedi- ately. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. D. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Owner's Metal Canopy Panel Supplier. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of manufacturing de- fects. E. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. F. Keep materials dry. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. G. Prevent damage to edges,ends and surfaces. PART 2-PRODUCTS .r� 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wheeling Corrugating Company, Division of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation, Wheeling, WV (304) 234- 2300. 1. Wal-Mart Account Sales Manager: Kerry Price. B. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS(OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Metal Canopy Panels: Roll formed; ASTM A 653 Structural Quality, Grade 33, G90 galvanizing, 4.5 inch deep, gage as indicated on Drawings,prime painted grey top and bottom side,uncoated steel not permitted. .w B. Structural Steel Supports: Specified in Section 05120. 07411-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "'"` �w. UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 07411 -METAL ROOF PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner furnished fluted metal canopy panels at Garden Center. 2. Supports and accessories for installation. 3. Contractor installation of metal canopy panels and accessories. B. Products Installed,But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Under provisions of Section 01600, Owner's manufactured roof panel supplier will furnish metal canopy panels. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Furnish and install fasteners, closure strips, flashing and accessories required for installation and attach- ment of panels to structural support members. 2. Installation of Owner furnished metal canopy panels and accessories. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Steel structure supporting metal roof panels. 2. Section 05300-Metal Deck: Building roof deck. 3. Section 07620-Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal counter flashing for metal roof panels. 4. Section 07711 -Gutters and Downspouts: Gutters and downspouts for metal roof panels. 5. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Sealant at lapped joints. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. Mu B. American Welding society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3-Structural Welding code-Sheet Steel. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Olt, 1. Loading Requirements: a. Live Load: As indicated on Structural Drawings. b. Deflection: L/180. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Final Field Use Drawing Review Form: Complete attached Final Field Use Drawing Review Form and forward to Structural Engineer of Record and metal canopy panel supplier under provisions of Section 01330. 07411-1 Wr Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 NO MM am AM BLANK PAGE 07240-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 *w EXHIBIT B Sealant Installer Name: (Insert Sealant Installer Name Here) Completion Date: THE SEALANT INSTALLED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM(EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW CONFORMS: TO and RECOMMENDED (Insert EIFS Manufacturer Name Here) (Insert Sealant Manufacturer Name Here) INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND SECTION(S) OF [ICBO] [BOCA] [SBCCI] (Insert Appropriate Section Numbers Here) (Circle Applicable Code) EVALUATION REPORT NO. (Insert Applicable Report Number Here) Address of Structure: Product Component Names: Primer(s): Sealers: Bond Breakers: Sealant Materials: �w► INSTALLATION CONFORMS A. Designer's requirements,details and instructions B. Sealant Manufacturer's details and Requirements C. Exterior Insulation Manufacturer'sRequirements D. The information entered above is offered in testimony that the Sealant installation conforms with the Sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures,and the EIFS manufacturers evaluation report. Sealant Installer Company Name and Address: Signature of Responsible Officer: Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: ( ) cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with EIFS contractor declaration.) Copies: EIFS Manufacturer EIFS Contractor Sealant Manufacturer Wal-Mart(include in Final Closeout Submittals) 07240-7 +! Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am EIFS Contractor Company Name and Address: am ww Signature of Responsible Officer: w Typed Name and Title of Officer: Telephone Number: ( ) fim cc: Original: Building Department (Must be submitted with sealant installer declaration.) Copies: EIFS Manufacturer Wal-Mart(include in Final Closeout Submittals) AW ow AW .ft� 07240-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "' to EXHIBIT A EIFS Contractor Name: (Insert EIFS Contractor Name Here) Completion Date: THE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) INSTALLED ON THE STRUCTURE LOCATED AT THE ADDRESS INDICATED BELOW CONFORMS: TO RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION PRACTICES AND (Insert EIFS Manufacturer Name Here) SECTION(S) OF [ICBO] [BOCA] [SBCCI]EVALUATION REPORT NO. (Insert Appropriate Section Numbers Here) (Circle Applicable Code) (Insert Applicable Report Number Here) Address of Structure: Product Component Names: Adhesive(s): Fasteners(Mech.): Base Coat: Reinforcing Fabric: Finish Coat(s): INSTALLATION CONFORMS A. Substrate Type and Tolerance B. EIFS 1. Adhesive and/or Fasteners 2. Insulation 3. Reinforcing Fabric 4ft 4. Base Coat 5. Finish C. The information entered above is offered in testimony that the EIFS installation conforms with the EIFS manufacturer's installation methods and procedures,and the EIFS manufacturers ES report. NOTE: An installation card shall be received from the Sealant Installer indicating that the sealant installation conforms with the EIFS evaluation report and sealant manufacturer's installation methods and procedures must accompany this declaration. 40 00 07240-5 ow Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Textured Finish: 1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. 2. Do not apply finish texture until base coat has cured properly. 3. Trowel finish coat onto base surface and float to achieve uniform texture to match approved sample. 4. Apply and level material in one operation. 5. Obtain final texture by trowels or floats as necessary to achieve specified finish. 6. Provide finish coat 1/16 inch to 1/8 inch thick. 3.7 CURING A. Apply coating materials at 40 degrees F or above. Cure each coat at least 24 hours prior to application of next coat. 3.8 JOINTING A. Install sealant at joints within system,and where system abuts dissimilar materials. END OF SECTION .w Ak wr 07240-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ow dN PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas in which Work under this Section is to be performed. Report in writing to Wal-Mart Construction Manager prevailing conditions that may adversely affect satisfactory execution of Work. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and this Contractor shall then, at his expense, be responsible for correcting unsatisfactory and defective Work encountered. 3.2 INSTALLATION-GENERAL A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation of exterior insulation and finish system. B. Deviations from printed manufacturers instruction will not be permitted without written authorization from manufacturer. 3.3 INSULATION BOARD INSTALLATION A. Install rigid insulation board to conform to insulation manufacturer's printed recommendations except as otherwise specified and modified by system manufacturer. B. Place insulation starting from level base line. Stagger vertical joints with insulation board interlocked at corners. Butt joints of insulation tightly. Flush surfaces of adjacent boards at joints. C. Apply insulation to substrate providing firm butt joints. Tamp entire surface with even pressure to ensure complete contact with adhesive. Test installation of each board with the use of a 6 foot straight edge. ? 1. Allow adhesive a minimum of 24 hours to dry. 2. Sand surfaces which are high and out of plane until flush. Do not fill low areas. D. Form 3/4 inch drip rustication joints straight and true to line,as indicated on Drawings. 3.4 ACCESSORIES A. Locate expansion joints at locations indicated; do not exceed manufacturer's maximum recommended area. Coordinate placement of additional joints with Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 3.5 REINFORCING MESH A. Place reinforcing fiber glass mesh,overlapping edges a minimum of 3 inches, over insulation and secure in place with base coating. 3.6 FINISH SYSTEM is A. Base Coat: 1. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and apply to insulation surfaces. 2. Trowel material into reinforcing mesh in tight coat and doubling back. Cover reinforcing mesh 100 percent with base coat. 3. Apply base coat in such a manner as to level surface and fill joints. Apply base coat 1/8 inch to 3/16 inch thick. 4. Cure base coat as directed by manufacturer. 07240-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 so 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ambient air temperature shall be 40 degrees F or greater and rising at time of installation of coating application and shall remain at 40 degrees F or greater for at least 24 hours after application. 1. Provide temporary heat as required to meet above requirements. "" PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. These specifications are based on the Exterior Insulation and Finish System "Outsulation" as manufactured by Dryvit Systems,Inc. B. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide exterior insulation and finish system of one of the following: 1. Dryvit Systems,Inc. 2. Energex,by Vitricon. 3. Omega Akroflex,by Omega Products Intl.Inc. 4. Parex,Inc. 5. Sto/R-Wall,by Sto Industries. 6. Senergy,Inc. C. Substitutions: None Accepted. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Insulation Board: Insulation board shall be produced by manufacturer approved by EIFS manufacturer meeting ..+� the following requirements. 1. Type: Expanded Polystyrene Insulation Board. 2. Nominal Density: 1.0 pcf. r.. 3. Maximum Flame-Spread and Smoke Development: ASTM E-84,25 and 450 respectively. 4. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings,but in no case shall insulation be less that 3/4 inch or greater than 4 inches. B. Reinforcing Fabric: Manufacturer's open weave type glass fiber fabric complying with ASTM D1682 as supplied by system manufacturer: 1. Standard Weight: Minimum 4.2 ounces per square yard plus or minus 10 percent. C. Coating System: 1. Base Coat: Acrylic based,modified portland cement(Type I or II)and silica sand to function as base coat , for coating application and mixed with base coat liquid admixture as supplied by system manufacturer. 2. inish Coat: Acrylic based, modified portland cement(Type I or II) and silica sand; compatible with base coat and mixed with finish coat liquid admixture as supplied by system manufacturer. a. Integral Color: Dryvit standard#310"China White." A" b. Paint Finish: Field applied paint finish as specified in Section 09900 or 09981 as applicable. Color as shown on the drawings and as defined within Sections 09900 and 09981. C. Texture: Dryvit standard"Sandblast". D. Water: Potable. E. Joint Sealant: Specified in Section 07900. 07240-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,� UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 07240-EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY Oft A. Section Includes: 1. Field applied exterior insulation and finish system. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05400-Cold Formed Metal Framing: Framing for gypsum sheathing substrate. 2. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Joint sealants used in conjunction with exterior insulation and finish system. go 3. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Gypsum sheathing. 4. Section 09900-Paint and Coatings: Field applied paint finish. 5. Section 09981 -Elastomeric Coatings For Masonry Systems: Color for field applied paint finish. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM D1682-Test Method for Breaking Load and Elongation of Textile Fabrics. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Exterior Insulation and Finish System(EIFS)shall consist of the following: 1. Thermal insulation board secured to supporting structural system. 0 2. Reinforcing mesh set into a trowel applied primer/adhesive base coat. a. Standard reinforcing mesh. 3. Acrylic-based trowel-applied weatherproof and textured finish with integral white coloring and field applied paint finish. 4. Primers, backer rods, bond breakers, and sealants for all EIFS to EIFS, and EIFS to dissimilar material joints. !0* 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Submit Forms Exhibit A&B included at the end of the Section in accordance with Section 01330. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Single firm, approved in writing by system manufacturer, employing trained workers familiar with current installation methods and materials. B. Standards: Current model Code approval by ICBO,BOCA,and SBCC. 1. Base approval on full scale diversified Fire Testing, end use configuration by independent agencies whose classifications and requirements have general acceptance as regulatory. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Vie! A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened packages, clearly marked with manufacturer's name, brand name, and description of contents. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. 07240-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .w AM ma BLANK PAGE „ w rr, 07210-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 4ft C. Install insulation with factory applied membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap ends and side flanges of membrane.Attach insulation in place to framing;tape seal butt ends and lapped side flanges. Tape seal tears or cuts in membrane. 3.3 INSTALLATION-BOARD INSULATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Apply adhesive in three continuous beads to board insulation. B. Install boards on foundation wall or grade beam perimeter. Place boards by method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions. C. Extend boards over expansion and control joints,unbonded to foundation two inches both sides of joint. Backfill carefully to prevent damage to insulation boards. 3.4 INSTALLATION-BOARD INSULATION AT FURRED-OUT MASONRY WALLS A. Adhesive apply board insulation to interior of CMU wall between furring strips. Furring strip is required from finish floor to metal roof deck above as indicated on Drawings. B. Cut and fit boards to maintain thermal integrity of insulated wall. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Provide insulation types as scheduled below and as indicated on Drawings. CONDITION TYPE OF INSULATION THICKNESS Batt Insulation,Face Concealed Within Partition Unfaced Glass Fiber Batt Full depth of framing member Batt Insulation,Face Exposed Faced Glass Fiber Batt Full depth of framing member Sound Attenuation Batt Unfaced Glass Fiber Batt Full depth of framing member Foundation Perimeter Extruded Polystyrene, Insulation,Type IV 2.0 inches(R=10.0) Board Insulation at Furred-Out Exterior Masonry Walls Polyisocyanurate 1.5 inches(R=10.8) END OF SECTION 07210-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..* 2. Polyisocyanurate: a. Atlas Energy Products,Atlanta,GA (800)933-1476. b. Cellotex Corporation,Tampa,FL (813)873-1700. C. Firestone Building Products Company,Carmel,IN (800)428-4442. d. NRG Division/Johns Manville,Portland,ME (800)343-1285. C. Substitutions: Not permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Batt Insulation: 1. Unfaced Glass Fiber: ASTM C 665, Type 1, unfaced; flame spread of 25, smoke developed of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. 2. Faced Glass Fiber: ASTM C 665,Type III, Class A,with reflective covering one side; flame spread of 25, smoke developed of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. ! B. Board Insulation: 1. Extruded Polystyrene: a. Type IV: ASTM C578, Type IV (density 1.6 pcf minimum); square edges. Provide one of the following: 1) Amoco: Amofoam-CM. 2) Dow: Styrofoam SM. !► 3) UCI: Foamular 250. 2. Polyisocyanurate: FS HH-I-1972/GEN,foil facing both sides;square edges. Provide one of the following: a. Atlas: Energy Shield. b. Cellotex: Tuff-R Insulating Sheathing. ' C. Firestone: ISO-R Sheathing. d. NRG: Barrier Board. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Polyethylene or polyester self-adhering type;two inches wide. B. Adhesive: Waterproof type,acceptable to manufacturer of insulation board. PART 3 -EXECUTION ► 3.1 PREPARATION A. Batt Insulation: 1. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. 2. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. B. Board Insulation: 1. Verify substrate and adjacent materials and insulation boards are dry and ready to receive insulation and adhesive. 2. Verify insulation boards are unbroken,free of damage. 3.2 INSTALLATION-BATT INSULATION .r A. Install batt insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,without gaps or voids. B. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Use batts free of damage. Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation. MW 07210-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 07210-BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY ok A. Section Includes: 1. Batt Insulation. 2. Board Insulation. 3. Accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04220-Concrete Masonry Units: Masonry fill insulation(if specified). 2. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood furring(if specifed). 3. Section 07840-Firestopping: Safing insulation used in conjunction with fire stop material. 4. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Metal furring. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM C 578-Specification for Preformed,Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 3. ASTM C 665 - Specifiction for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. 4. ASTM C 991 - Specification for Flexible Glass Fiber Insulation for Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings (If " Specified). B. Federal Specifications(FS): 1. FS HH-I-1972/GEN-Insulation Board,Thermal,Faced,Polyurethane or Polyisocyanurate. ! ! 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Concealed Insulation: Insulation concealed within framing system,both faces protected by finish material. B. Exposed Insulation: Insulation exposed within framing system,one or both faces unprotected. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Batt Insulation: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers. 1. CertainTeed Corporation,Valley Forge,PA (800)523-7844. 2. Guardian Fiberglass Incorporated,Albion,MI (800)748-0035. 00 3. Johns Manville Insulations,Denver,CO (800)654-3103. 4. Owens-Corning,Toledo,OH (800)438-7465. B. Board Insulation: Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers. 1. Extruded Polystyrene: a. Dow Chemical Company,Midland,MI (800)232-2436. b. Tenneco Building Products, Smyrna,GA (800)241-4402. C. UC Industries Incorporated,Parsippany,NJ (800)828-7155. 07210-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Om 4w ..p BLANK PAGE w w 06610-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,,,w D. Install panels with edges vertical and plumb. Use maximum length pieces to provide minimum number of end joints. 1. Where end joints occur,align panel"score"lines. 2. Align panel to panel vertical joints at inside and outside corner conditions. E. Gypsum Board Substrate: Apply adhesive to gypsum board substrate and to panel backs as recommended by manufacturer with V-notch spreader. Provide 100 percent coverage of adhesive. F. Install accessory panel trim pieces concurrently with installation of panels. Mitre cut accessory panel trim at cor- ners to provide smooth transition. Set trim attached to adjacent panel ends and edges and seal with sealant. air G. Seal corner seams,base and ceiling junctures,and junctures between panels and wall with sealant. Remove excess sealant during installation. H. Provide sealant around all openings,comers,and joints. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect fiber reinforced plastic coated panel installation,accessories,and fasteneing to substrate. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract requirements. END OF SECTION 06610-3 o Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 2.2 FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC COATED PANELS(OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Coated Panels:Kemlite Glasbord-P with Surfaseal 1. FRP#1: Panel BES385-PIF a. Thickness: 0.09 inch. b. Color: 85 White. C. Finish: Embossed. d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class C,ASTM E84. B. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Coated Panels: Marlite Sanitary Wall Systems decorative wall panel. 1. FRP#2: Panel#S-100-G44. a. Thickness: 3/32 inch. ..� b. Color: White. C. Finish: 4"x 4"pattern. d. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class C,ASTM E84. 2.3 ACCESSORIES(OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Wall Trim: Aft 1. 41 White by Profile Solutions. B. Adhesive: Manufacturer's Low VOC Latex-Based Construction Adhesive suitable for specified substrate. 1. Product: FRP1168WB,by TACC(gypsum board substrate). 2. Product: Solvent Free FRP4054,by Franklin C. Sealant: Manufacturer's Silicone Construction Sealant. rw► 1. Product: 3C332,by TACC. 2. Product: 2601,by Franklin PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's requirements for substrate conditions. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. .. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. �s 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install FRP wall panels in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Prefit each wall panel before securing in place. Cut panels with carbide-tipped power saw or swivel-head shear. C. Provide manufacturer's recommended spacing between abutting panel ends, edges and trim. Provide minimum 1/8 • inch space around pipes, electrical fittings, obstructions and other items penetrating panels. Fill joints with seal- ant. 1. Align panels both vertically and horizontally to maintain continuous panel "score"lines. 06610-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,, UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 06610-GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Glass fiber reinforced plastic(FRP)coated panels. 2. FRP accessories. B. Products Installed,But Not Furnished Under This Section: 1. Under provisions of Section 01600, Owner's FRP suppliers will furnish FRP panels and accessories as specified in this Section. 2. Owner's Suppliers: a. Specialty Products and Insulation Company,Tulsa OK. Contact: Randy Rhoads,(800)326-6736. b. Marlite Sanitary Wall Systems.Contact: Bill McAuley,(972)660-6443.] 3. Contractor's Responsibilities: a. Provide substrate to receive FRP panels as indicated on Drawings. b. Install FRP panels and accessories as specified in this Section. C. Provide FRP indicated as Owner furnished,Contractor installed. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 09250-Gypsum Board: Gypsum board substrate. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM E-84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Surface Burning Characteristics in Accordance with ASTM E-84 for Class C finish: a. Flame Spread: Less than 200. b. Smoke Density: Less than 450. 2. United States Department of Agriculture(USDA): Approved for incidental food contact. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Coated Panel: 1. Owner furnished for Contractor installation: a. Kemlite Company,Joliet,IL. b. Marlite,Dover,OH. B. Wall Trim: Owner will furnish wall trim as manufactured by Profile Solutions. C. Adhesive and Sealant: Owner will furnish adhesive and sealant as manufactured by TACC International Corpora- tion,Rockland MA and Franklin International,Columbus,OH. 4* 06610-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 r An ON .N BLANK PAGE am 06400-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .� 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install woodwork plumb, level, and straight without distortion;use concealed shims. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. Anchor woodwork items to nailers or blocking or directly to substrate using concealed fasten- ers. B. Casework: Provide well-fitting and smooth operating doors and drawers. C. Countertops: Anchor plastic laminate countertops securely to base units. D. Plastic Laminate Wainscot: Provide extruded aluminum trim at exposed laminate edges, vertical and horizontal, where indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION t 06400-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Naw B. Metal Edge Trim: Extruded shapes,smooth surface,anodized finish. Size and type to suit application. ow 1. Approved Manufacturer: Macklanburg-Duncan,Oklahoma City,OK (800)851-1831. 2. Substitutions: Products by other manufacturers may be provided subject to compliance with specified re- quirements and acceptance by Architect. fto C. Plastic Laminate Schedule: Limit manufacturers to those specified for each laminate color. No substitutions ac- cepted. 1. Plastic Laminate PL-l: a. No. 692 Folkstone Celesta, by Formica Corporation; Indianapolis, IN; Regina Radin; (513) 786- 3039. b. No.4142-6 Grey Glace,by Wilsonart;New York,NY; (212)753-8686. 2. Plastic Laminate PL-4: ** a. No. 85788 Federal Blue,by Formica Corporation;Indianapolis,IN;Regina Radin;(513)786-3039. b. No.D321-6 Brittany Blue,by Wilsonart;New York,NY; (212)753-8686. 3. Plastic Laminate PL-5: a. No.462 Contract Gray,matte finish,by Formica Corporation;Indianapolis,IN;Regina Radin;(513) .. 786-3039. b. No.D92-6 Dove Grey,by Wilsonart;New York,NY;(212)753-8686. 2.3 HARDWARE A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior and high humidity locations; plain finish at other locations. B. Cabinet Hardware: 1. Base Cabinets: ,w► a. Drawer Slides KV 1300 b. Drawer Lock KV 986 NP C. Shelf Standards KV 255ZC .. d. Shelf Supports KV 239 2. Doors: a. Wire Pull Ives 36 B26D b. Hinges Stanley 1584 A* C. Magnetic Catches Ives 325 (A 92) 2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AWI Standards. 1. Plastic Laminate Casework: Custom Grade,reveal overlay construction. a. Exposed Surfaces: High pressure laminate,nominal 0.050 inch thick. b. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: High pressure laminate,nominal 0.028 inch thick. C. Concealed Surfaces: Mill option. PART 3 -EXECUTION 06400-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 •.s UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 06400-ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plastic Laminate Casework. 2. Plastic Laminate Wainscoting B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Panel product used as finish material on walls, ceilings, wainscots, and bases. Lumber and panel products used for wood and wire mesh doors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American National Standards(ANSI): 1. ANSI A208.1 -Particleboard 2. ANSI A208.2-Medium Density Fiberboard For Interior Use ok B. American Woodworking Institute(AWI): AWI-Quality Standards. C. American Plywood Association(APA): APA-Grades&Specifications. D. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association(NEMA) 1. NEMA LD3 -High-Pressure Decorative Laminates 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING all A. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. B. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and 1w systematically to avoid damage,store in clean,dry,enclosed,and secure storage area. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS A. Panel Product for Laminate Clad Casework: Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF) Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2,Grade MD or 45 lb density particleboard ANSI A208.1,Grade M-2. B. Panel Product for Finish Material on Walls,Ceilings,Wainscots,and Bases: See Section 06100. 2.2 PLASTIC LAMINATE MATERIALS A. High pressure laminate;NEMA LD3;color,pattern,and finish as indicated in this Section. 1. Exposed Horizontal Surfaces: GP-50. 2. Exposed Vertical Surfaces: GP-50. 3. Postformed Surfaces: PF-42. 4. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic laminate manufacturer. 06400-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .m 2.2 HARDWARE A. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior and high humidity locations; plain finish at other locations. .w B. Layaway Hanging Rod: 5/8 inch diameter solid stainless steel rod, with escutchen and brackets; configuration as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate to AWI Standards. 1. Standing and Running Trim: Custom Grade. 2. Wood Shelving with Clear Sealer: Economy Grade. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install woodwork plumb, level, and straight without distortion;use concealed shims. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work. Anchor woodwork items to nailers or blocking or directly to substrate using concealed fasten- ers. B. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum joints, using maximum lumber lengths possible. Cope at re- turns;miter at corner. C. Wood Shelving: Assemble units and install as indicated on Drawings. D. Site Finishing: Refer to Section 09900. END OF SECTION 06200-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .ai UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Shelving. 3. Hardware and attachment accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Panel product used as finish material on walls, ceilings, wainscots, and bases. Lumber and panel products used for wood and wire mesh doors. 4 2. Section 06400-Architectural Woodwork: Plastic laminate casework and wainscoting. 3. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Opaque and transparent finishes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Woodworking Institute(AWI): AWI-Quality Standards. B. American Plywood Association(APA): APA-Grades&Specifications. 4a 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Inspect materials delivered and reject those not qualifying with requirements, those damaged in transit, or those that appear otherwise unsatisfactory. B. Schedule delivery of items to installation areas that are in proper condition to receive them. Place items neatly and systematically to avoid damage, store in clean,dry,enclosed,and secure storage area. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 WOOD MATERIALS A. Interior Standing and Running Trim - Painted Finish: AWI Custom Grade; plain sawn, Grade II lumber, closed- grain hardwood,any species. B. Interior Standing and Running Trim-Clear Sealer Finish: AWI Custom Grade; plain sawn, Grade II lumber; pro- vide one of the following hardwood species(one species throughout): 1. Ash. 2. Birch. 3. Oak. 4. Poplar. C. Shelving-Clear Sealer Finish: Fir or birch plywood with veneer core and sanded edges. 1. APA 5-ply A/C,3/4 inch thickness at Stockroom shelving. !I 2. APA 5-ply A/B at other locations. D. Panel Product for Finish Material on Walls,Ceilings,Wainscots,and Bases: See Section 06100. 06200-1 40 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3M r�s BLANK PAGE ,a A* m rllk am an 06100-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 NOR 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install miscellaneous blocking, nailing strips, framing, and sheathing as detailed on Drawings. Coordinate to al- low proper attachment of work of other Sections. 1. Secure wood blocking, cants, nailers, in place using fasteners specified. Use only recommended power tools for placement of fasteners. 2. Recess heads of fasteners below surface of wood members. B. Install members true to line,plumb,and level. C. Secure in place with appropriate fasteners. Use fasteners of correct size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or require finishing. Do not split wood with fasteners; set panel products to allow expansion at joints. D. Do not splice structural members between supports. E. Firestop concealed spaces with wood blocking (horizontally and vertically per drawings) not less than 2 inches thick where space is not blocked by other framing members. F. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths. G. Furring on Masonry: Attach wood furring strips with specified Masonry Fasteners at 12"o.c.and liquid nail adhe- sive. END OF SECTION 06100-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 5. Lumber shall be dried to 15-19 percent moisture content after treatment, and material to be painted or stained shall have knots and pitch streaks sealed as with untreated wood. 6. Liberally brush freshly cut surfaces, bolt holes and machined areas with the same preservative in accordance with AWPA Standard M4. .,r B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Manufacturers: a. Dricon by Hickson Corporation;Atlanta,GA;(404)801-6600. .. b. "Pyro-Guard"by Hoover Treated Wood Products,Inc.;Thomson,GA;(800)832-9663 C. "D-Blaze"by Bowie-Sims-Prange Treating Corporation,Dallas,TX;(214)446-1150. 2. Lumber and plywood shall be treated as follows: a. Each piece of treated material shall bear the UL FR-S classification or shall bear actual flamespread "f and smoke developed ratings indicating compliance with an extended 30 minute tunnel test in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723. b. After treatment,all lumber shall be dried to an average moisture content of 19 percent or less. C. After treatment,all plywood,shall be dried to an average moisture content of 15 percent or less. d. All treated material shall meet interior Type A requirements in AWPA standard C-20 for lumber and C-27 for plywood. e. Chemicals used to treat material shall be free of halogens, sulfates, ammonium phosphate and formaldehyde. f. Treatment material shall provide protection against termites and fungal decay and shall be registered for use as a wood preservative by the U. S.Environmental Protection Agency. .w g. Submit evidence of local building code compliance and approval for proposed material. C. Wood Requiring Treatment: 1. Lumber,Preservative Treated: A%lk a. Nailers, blocking, stripping, and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and other con- struction. b. Sills,blocking,furring,stripping,and similar items in contact with masonry or concrete. .r 2. Lumber,Fire Retardant Treated: a. Interior partition framing, furring, blocking, nailers, and miscellaneous exposed wood at roofing system and wood exposed within the roof/ceiling assembly. b. Do not treat furring in contact with masonry or concrete. nom► 3. Interior Plywood,Fire Retardant Treated: a. Plywood used as finish material,walls,ceilings,wainscots and bases. b. Plywood backing for electrical and telephone equipment. C. Plywood concealed within gypsum board and metal stud partitions. d. Exposed to sight plywood surfaces. 4. Plywood Not to be Fire Retardant Treated: Structural plywood performing a structural function, such as a component of roof,floors or shear walls. 00 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A" A. Examine areas to receive rough carpentry work and verify following: 1. That installation of building components to receive rough carpentry work is complete. am 2. That surfaces are satisfactory to receive work. 3. That spacing, direction and details of supports are correct to accommodate installation of blocking, backing, stripping,furring and nailing strips. AN 3.2 SITE TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Retreat site sawn ends with brush application according to manufacturer's instructions. Allow preservative to cure prior to placing members. .M 06100-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 «. 6. Fasteners for Wood and Plywood to Light Gage Metal Framing and Metal Deck (up to 11 gage (0.1196 inch)): Self-drilling flat head wood-to-metal screws. a. Manufacturers: ` 1) Hilti,Tulsa,OK (800)879-8000. 2) ITW Buildex,Itasca,Il (800)323-0720. 3) Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements fasteners of equal type to those specified,by alternate manufacturers are acceptable. b. Wood and Plywood Up to 3/4 Inch Thick: tl ► 1) Hilti: 8-18 PFH#3 Point. 2) ITW: Traxx 10-16#3 point. 3) Alternate Manufacturers: Equivalent type. C. Wood 7/8 Inch Thick and Thicker to 18 Gage(0.0478 inch)and 20 Gage(0.0359 inch)Metal: 1) Pre-drill wood for fastener. 2) Hilti: 8-18 PFH#3 Point. 3) ITW: Traxx 10-16#3 point. OR 4) Alternate Manufacturers: Equivalent type. d. Wood 7/8 Inch Thick and Thicker to 16 Gage(0.598 inch)and Heavier Metal: 1) Hilti: 12-24 PFH#4 Point with Wings. 2) ITW: Traxx 12-24#4 Point with Wings. 3) Alternate Manufacturers: Equivalent type. 7. Fasteners for Structural Wood Members to Solid Grouted Masonry: Adhesive anchors, size and length as indicated on Drawings. 40 a. Manufacturers: 1) Hilti,Tulsa,OK (800)879-8000. 2) ITW Epcon,Itasca,11 (800)323-0720. 3) Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements fasteners of equal type to those specified,by alternate manufacturers are acceptable. b. Hilti: HIT C-100. C. ITW: Epcon Ceramic 6. _ d. Alternate Manufacturers: Equivalent type. 8. Fasteners for Non-Structural Wood Members to Masonry: 1/4 inch diameter x 3-1/4 inch with phillips or torx flat head. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hilti,Tulsa,OK (800)879-8000. 2) ITW Buildex,Itasca,11 (800)323-0720. 3) Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements fasteners of equal 0% type to those specified,by alternate manufacturers are acceptable. b. Hilti: Kwik-Con II fastener. C. ITW: Tapcon masonry anchor. d. Alternate Manufacturer: Equivalent type. 2.3 WOOD TREATMENT A. Preservative Pressure Treated Lumber: 1. Manufacturers: a. "Wolmanized Pressure-Treated Wood", Wolman CCA Type C, by Hickson Corporation; Atlanta, GA;(404)801-6600. b. CCA Pressure Treated Lumber Type C, by Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.; Thomson, GA; (800)832-9663. 2. Impregnate lumber with preservative treatment conforming to AWPA Standard C 1 and P5. Apply the preservative in a closed cylinder by pressure process in accordance with AWPA Standard C 15. 3. Retention of dry salts: a. Moderate service conditions(weather exposure): 0.25 pounds per cubic foot(oxide basis). b. Severe conditions(constant contact with ground or water): 0.40 pounds per cubic foot(oxide basis). 4. Remove excess moisture where shrinkage is a serious fault or where treated lumber will be in contact with plaster,or stucco,and where water-borne treated lumber is to be painted or stained. 06100-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE sow A. Lumber Grading Agency: Lumber to be grade stamped by an agency certified by the Board of Review of the American Lumber Standards Committee(ALSC). am B. Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by APA. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable codes for fire retardant treatment of wood surfaces for flame/smoke ratings. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Provide proper facilities for handling and storage of materials to prevent damage to edges,ends and surfaces. B. Keep materials dry. Stack materials off ground a minimum of 12 inches or if on concrete slab-on-grade a mini- ..,, mum of 1-1/2 inches,fully protected from weather. PART 2 -PRODUCTS ON 2.1 MATERIALS A. Lumber: PS 20; S4S. Maximum of 19 percent moisture content, surfaced dry, No. 2 any species graded under WWPA grading rules or No.3 Grade Southern Pine graded under SPIB grading rules. B. Non-Structural Panel Product: APA graded plywood for application indicated. 1. Backing for Electrical and Telephone Equipment(If Applicable): C-D Plu gg ed Exposure 1; fire retardant treated,3/4 inch thickness. 2. Other Locations: C-D Plugged,Exposure 1, 1/2 inch thickness. C. Structural Panel Product: 1. APA Performance Rated Panels: For concealed applications, provide-plywood meeting requirements of DOC PS 1. 2. Where exposure rating or span rating is not shown or specified, P rovide Exposure 1 plywood with ratin g required to suit support spacing indicated on Drawings. 3. Plywood Wall Sheathing: DOC PS 1, APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1. Thickness as indicated on the drawings. 4. Plywood Roof Deck:: Structural 1, APA Rated Sheathing, Exposure 1, 5 ply. Thickness as indicated on Drawings and span rating required to suit support spacing indicated on Drawings. D. High Density Wood Fiber: 1. GAFTEMP Fiberboard Roof Insulation,by GAF,(800)766-3411. 2. Huebert Fiberboard Roof Insulation,by Huebert Fiberboard,Inc,(816)882-2704. 3. Wood Fiber Roof Insulation,by Wood Fiber Industries,(312)407-9210. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Provide manufacturers recommended power tools for each type of fastener. " 1. Nails,Spikes and Staples: ASTM A123,Galvanized for exterior locations,high humidity areas,and treated wood;plain finish for other interior locations;size and type to suit application,unless otherwise noted. 2. Bolts,Nuts,Washers,Lag Screws,and Wood Screws: ASTM A307,Medium carbon steel;size and type to suit application; galvanized for exterior locations, high humidity areas, and treated wood; plain finish for other interior locations,of size and type to suit application,unless otherwise noted. 3. Toggle Bolt Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to hollow masonry. ON 4. Expansion Shield Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to solid masonry and concrete. 5. Powder or Pneumatically Activated Fasteners: For anchorage of non-structural items to steel. oft 06100-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 so I" UniSpec II 112699 SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wood furring for wall finishes. 2. Blocking and nailers for roofing system and related metal flashings. 3. Preservative and fire resistive treatment. 4. Concealed blocking behind wall mounted items. 5. Structural panel products. 6. Non-structural panel products including the following: a. Backing for electrical and telephone equipment. b. Panels concealed within gypsum board and metal stud partitions. C. Panels used as finish material;walls,ceilings,wainscots,and bases. 7. Panel product and framing for wood and wire mesh doors. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Lumber Standards Committee(ALSC): Softwood Lumber Standards. B. American Plywood Association(APA): Grades and Standards. C. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A123 -Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. ASTM A307-Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 3. ASTM E84-Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. American Wood Preservers Association(AWPA): "! 1. AWPA-C1 -All Timber Products-Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. 2. AWPA - C15 - Wood for Commercial-Residential Construction Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes. 3. AWPA-C20-Structural Lumber-Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. 4. AWPA-C27-Plywood-Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes. 5. AWPA-M4-Care of Preservative Treated Wood Products. 6. AWPA-P5-Water Borne Preservatives. ON E. National Forest Products Association (NFoPA): National Design Specification for Wood Construction (and Sup- plement). F. Product Standard(PS): 1. PS 1 -Construction and Industrial Plywood with typical APA Trademarks. 2. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard. G. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau(SPIB): Grading Rules. H. Western Wood Products Association(WWPA): Western Lumber Grading Rules. I. Underwriters'Laboratories(UL): 1. UL FR-S Classification - Fire Retardant Treated Wood with Flame Spread Ratings of 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. UL 723 -Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 06100-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 a% am ... AV* w BLANK PAGE Mw wit A" go AN oft 04 05500-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. 3. Attach with steel mounting brackets. 4. Prime paint finish. 5. Cage: Provide ladder cage,starting at 12 feet AFF,conforming to OSHA Standards. K. Steel Supports for Overhead Doors and Grilles: Channels and tubes as indicated on Drawings for overhead coiling doors and overhead coiling grilles. Coordinate fabrication with respective section of work. L. Jib Crane Hoist Arm and Railing Assembly(Wal-Mart Furnished Contractor Installed): ' I. Factory fabricated welded steel tube with steel support bracket plates of size and configuration indicated on Drawings,factory finished OSHA Yellow. 2. Install jib crane hoist arm and railing assembly using threaded rods through masonry wall with nuts each side to attachment plates and backing plates in accordance with manufacturer's installation drawings at locations indicated on Drawings. 3. Seal threaded rod penetrations of masonry wall using sealant. Provide a watertight condition. Set support bracket plate in full bed of sealant and seal edge of plate to prevent infiltration of moisture behind plate. M. Television Monitor Bracket Support Assembly(Wal-Mart Furnished Contractor Installed): 1. Factory fabricated steel assembly consisting of threaded pipe hanger (lengths vary according to location and height of roof structure), support angle, and attachment fasteners. Factory prime finish ready for field painting. 2. Install support assembly spanning across steel roof joist bottom chords. Attach to structure as indicated on Drawings. Use pipe hanger lengths required for required height above finish floor for television monitor bracket. 3. install support assemblies at locations indicated on Electrical Drawings and as approved by Wal-Mart. N. Television Monitor Bracket(Wal-Mart Furnished Contractor Installed): 1. Factory fabricated steel assembly for support of security system television monitor,threaded for attachment to end of threaded pipe support. 2. Install bracket to end of threaded pipe support. O. Truck Well Curb Drain: Model 1211-Black,by National Diversified Sales,Inc.; (800) 726-1994. Locate as indi- cated on Drawings. P. Pit Angles and Channels: Provide perimeter steel angles and channels with welded studs, as indicated on Draw- ings, for dock leveler pits as required for installation of equipment. Coordinate fabrication with respective section of work. 1. Prime paint finish. Q. Wire Mesh Partitions: 10 to 14 gage steel, I x 1 or 1 x 2 inch mesh. END OF SECTION 05500-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 l 3.4 SCHEDULE ..a A. Loose Bearing Plates and Lintels: Fabricate to sizes and configuration indicated on Drawings; prime paint finish except for items requiring field welding. B. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: Furnish steel framing and supports not specified under Section 05120. Fab- ricate welded construction in as large units as possible. Drill and tap for hardware and other items. Include an- chors required for building into work of other Sections. 1. Prime paint finish,gray. .s C. Rough Hardware: Custom fabricated bolts,plates,anchors,hanger,dowels,and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes required for framing, supporting, and anchoring other construction. Galvanized unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. D. Steel columns not included in Section 05120. 1. Prime paint finish. E. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: Profiles and sizes as indicated on Drawings; continuous welded joints and smooth ex- posed edges. Use concealed field splices where possible. Provide cutouts,fittings,and anchorages; coordinate as- sembly and installation into work of other Sections. 1. Prime paint finish. F. Steel Pipe Bollards: ASTM A 53, Type E (electric-resistance welded) or Type S (seamless), Grade B, Schedule 40,size and configuration as detailed. 1. Fill bollard as indicated on Drawings. 2. Bollards associated with freezers and coolers; install immediately after installation of freezer and cooler installations. 3. Finish: a. Prime paint finish as specified in Section 09900. 4. Plastic Sleeves: Where indicated, provide "red" thermoplastic polyethylene bollard sleeve, #001220 x 52" high to fit 6" diameter pipe bollards as manufactured by Ideal Shield LLC, Detroit, MI 48209 (313) 842- 7290. G. Steel Pipe Railings: ASTM A53,Type E(electric-resistance welded)or Type S (seamless),Grade B, Schedule 40. Fabricate to dimensions indicated on Drawings. Cope horizontal railings intersecting vertical members. Provide radius bends at changes in direction.Finish as follows: r 1. Prime paint finish as specified in Section 09900. 2. Set-in sleeves and secure railings to other construction,as indicated on Drawings. 3. Handrails and Top Rails: Design point load 200 lbs,downward or horizontal,and uniform load of 50 lb/lin ft applied simultaneously in both vertical and horizontal directions. Concentrated and uniform loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Intermediate Rails: Uniform load of 25 lbs/sq ft of gross area of railing system,including open area. 5. Shopping Cart Railings (If Indicated on Drawings): 1-1/2 x 1-1/2 inches by 11 gage tube steel. Weld all connections. No finish required. Coordinate installation with store manager. H. Handrail Brackets: Cast iron with not less than 3 inch projection from wall surface to center line of handrail. Finish as indicated below. .� 1. Prime paint finish as indicated in Section 09900. I. Partition Deep Leg Track at Roof Deck or Structure for Partition Between Stockroom and Sales Area(designed for uniform load perpendicular to partition exceeding 5 pounds per square foot): ASTM A 653, galvanized steel sheet,size,configuration,gage and fasteners as indicated on Drawings. J. Steel Ladder(Roof Hatch): Coordinate steel wall ladders with Section 07722. 1. Side Rails: 1/2 x 3-1/2 inch steel bars. 2. Rungs: 3/4 inch diameter solid steel rods, 12 inches o.c. 05500-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,.,, I. Primers: 1. Shop application and field touch-up: SSPC 25. 2. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20. 3. Color: To match primer used on steel roof deck and joists. J. Concrete Inserts: Cast steel or malleable bolts,washers,and shims;galvanized. 2.2 FABRICATION A. Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections,for delivery to site. D. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform ra- dius. 1 E. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;unobtrusively located; consistent with design of structure,except where specifically noted otherwise. F. Make exposed joints butt tight,flush,and hairline. G. Supply components required for anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication,except where specifically noted otherwise. H. Finishing: 1. Clean surfaces of rust,scale,grease,and foreign matter prior to finishing. 2. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact bond with concrete or where field welding is required. 3. Prime paint items scheduled with one coat;touch up with same primer. 4. Galvanize to minimum 2.0 oz/sq ft zinc coating, exterior items,and those items indicated on Drawings and specified herein,to be galvanized. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. B. Clean and strip site primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is scheduled. C. Make provision for erection loads with temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. D. Use grout specified in Section 03300 for setting metal fabrications. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level,accurately fitted,free from distortion or defects. ► B. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS DLI or D1.3, as applicable. After installation, grind sight- exposed field welds smooth,touch-up welds,scratched,or damaged surfaces with primer. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspection: See Section 01458. 05500-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .. A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to w Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING •••. A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (WAL-MART FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED .. ITEMS) A. Product Delivery: Wal-Mart's metal fabrication supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive *+ on delivery date established by Contractor. To establish product delivery date and obtain Manufacturer's Installa- tion Drawings contact: 1. R&S Manufacturing,Catoosa,OK (918)266-2266. B. Product Packaging: Products will be packaged in manufacturer's standard packaging on shipping pallets. Installa- tion Drawings will be included with products. C. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Bill of Material provided with Wal-Mart furnished products: 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart Construction Division immediately at(501)273-4217. 3. Upon notification by Contractor,Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. 4. Note description of product quantity discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AM A. Steel Plates and Shapes: ASTM A 36. B. Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: ASTM A 325 and ASTM A 307. No C. Cold Rolled Steel: ASTM A 366,Class I,matte finish. An D. Cold Rolled Sheet: ASTM A 570. E. Galvanized Steel Sheets: 1. Structural: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality,G90. '" 2. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 591,Class C. F. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500,Grade B. WX G. Steel Piping: ASTM A 53. H. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.3 type required for materials being welded. 05500-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..� UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 05500-METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items,galvanized and prime painted. 2. Wal-Mart furnished fabricated metal items. 3. See Schedule at end of this Section. a. Provide as scheduled and as indicated on Drawings. b. Include anchorages and attachments necessary for installation. C. Schedule lists basic items and systems. Include related items and systems necessary to complete the Work. B. Products Installed But Not Furnished Under This Section: Under provisions of Section 01600, Wal-Mart's metal fabrication supplier will furnish the following fabricated metal items for installation by Contractor. 1. Jib crane hoist arm and railing assembly. 2. Television monitor bracket support assembly. 3. Television monitor bracket. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: General procedures related to Wal-Mart furnished products. 2. Section 01458-Testing Laboratory Services: Testing and inspection. 3. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Furnish handrail sleeves for embedding into concrete. 4. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Connection of miscellaneous framing and supports to structural steel. 5. Section 07722-Roof Hatches: Steel wall ladder to roof hatch. 6. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Painted finishes. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 53 -Specification for Pipe, Steel,Black and Hot-Dipped,Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. 3. ASTM A 307-Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 4. ASTM A 325 - Specification for Structural Bolts,Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 5. ASTM A 366-Specification for Steel Sheet,Carbon,Cold-Rolled,Commercial Quality. 6. ASTM A 500 - Specification for Cold-formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 7. ASTM A 569 - Specification for Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality. 8. ASTM A 570-Specification for Steel,Sheet and Strip,Carbon,Hot-Rolled,Structural Quality. 9. ASTM A 591 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Mass Applications. 10. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. B. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. C. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20 Type II-Zinc Rich Primers-Organic. 2. SSPC-Paint 25-Red Iron Oxide,Zinc Oxide,Raw Linseed Oil,and Alkyd Primer. 05500-1 40 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 3.6 CONSTRUCTION am A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate erection of studs with hollow metal door frames and overhead coiling door frames. 2. Coordinate installation of anchors, supports, and blocking for mechanical, electrical, and building AM accessory items installed within framing. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL sm A. Inspect metal framing erection,placement,spacing,fasteners,welds,and connections to building. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. Im END OF SECTION .. .m ow .w M" w OR dW w .ww ww 05400-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am eM MINIMUM CONNECTION FASTENERS Floor Track to Concrete 1 -Anchor at 36 inches on center. Partition Stud to Floor Track 1 -Screw each side at flange Stud Web to Stud Web 2-Screws. Plates and Straps to Studs 2-Screws. Lateral Bracing to Partition Stud Using clip Angles 2- Screws to stud and 2-Screws to cold rolled channel. ! ' Runner to Header 1 -Screw at 16 inches on center,maximum 6 inches from each end. Welded Connections Indicated on Drawings. 3.3 INSTALLATION-JOIST FRAMING A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Place joists at locations and spacing as indicated on Drawings. D. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. on E. Fastening: Indicated on Drawings. 3.4 INSTALLATION-CEILING JOISTS on A. Install joists and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to joists,install joists in accordance with GA-201 and GA-216. B. Ceiling Joist Spacing: 16 inches on center beginning from center of room. C. Install joists in direction of shortest span,parallel and level,with lateral bracing and bridging. ok D. Install joists in one piece full length. Splicing of joists not permitted. E. Install perimeter joist runner track sized to match joists. Attach joist runner track to wall framing with minimum 2 screws per stud and at corners and ends. F. Attach joist ends to joist runner tracks with minimum 1 screw each side at each flange. l G. Install bridging at 48 inches on center beginning from center of room with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels screw at- tached to joists. 3.5 INSTALLATION-FURRING A. Furring Channels: Attach vertically spaced at maximum 16 inches on center, to masonry and concrete surfaces with specified powder driven fasteners staggered 24 inches on center on opposite flanges. B. Wall Furring: 1. Secure top and bottom runners to structure. 2. Space metal furring at maximum 16 inches on center. 05400-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Primer: SSPC Paint 20,Type I,touch-up for galvanized surfaces. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION "" A. Examine existing conditions and adjacent areas where products will be installed and verify that conditions con- form to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work. ,. Verify that rough-in utilities are in-place and located where required. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory condi- tions have been corrected. B. Beginning of erection indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION- STUD FRAMING A. Install studs and fasteners in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and, where gypsum board is attached to studs, install studs in accordance with GA-201 and GA-216. B. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center,maximum. C. Align stud web openings horizontally. ..M D. Construct corners using minimum three studs. E. Place studs as indicated on Drawings,minimum 2 inches from abutting walls. F. Erect studs one piece full length. Splicing of studs not permitted. G. Erect studs,brace,and reinforce to develop full strength to meet design requirements. •*+ H. Install headers at partition openings using load-bearing cee joists. w I. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items. J. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. .Re K. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to match wall stud spacing. L. Fasten studs adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, and corners to top and bottom runner flanges in double-stud fashion with metal lock fastener tools. 1. Securely fasten studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door and borrowed-light frames. 2. Place horizontally a cut-to-length section of runner with web-flange bent at each end, fasten with minimum one screw per flange. 3. Position a cut-to-length stud(extending to top runner)at vertical panel joints over door frame header. M. Install bridging for stud partitions over 8 feet high at mid-height with 1-1/2 inch rolled channels through studs and screw attach in place using clip angles. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8 inches and wire tie together. N. Blocking: Screw attach wood blocking between studs. Install blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions,wall cabinets,toilet accessories,and hardware. O. Touch up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. P. Fastening: Fasten framing in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions and schedule below, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 05400-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .w D. Partition Deep Leg Track at Roof Deck or Structure for Nonload-Bearing Steel Stud Partitions (designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition): ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955; galvanized sheet steel,channel shaped;solid web. 1. 22 and 20 Gage Studs: CR18 x stud depth x 4 inch leg. E. Partition Deep Leg Track at Roof Deck or Structure for Partition Between Stockroom and Sales Area(designed for uniform load perpendicular to partition exceeding 5 pounds per square foot): Fabricated bent plate channel and fasteners specified in Section 05500. F. Load-Bearing Wall Furring and Partition Bracing: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955,galvanized sheet steel. 1. Studs: a. 358SN20 - 3-5/8 inch studs,20 gage. b. 358SN18 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 18 gage. C. 358SN16 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 16 gage. 2. Cold-Rolled Channels: 3/4 inch x 1/2 inch and 1-1/2 inch x 17/32 inch. OW 3. Clip Angles: 2 inches x 2 inches x 16 gage x 1/4 inch less than stud width. G. Framing Attachment Angles: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality; galvanized sheet steel, size, shape and configura- tion as indicated on Drawings, 14 gage,unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. H. Ceiling Joists and Runners: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955;galvanized sheet steel,cee shaped. 1. 600SJ20-6 inch joists,20 gage. 2. 600CR20-6 inch runner track,20 gage. I. Flat Straps and Plates: ASTM A 653; galvanized sheet steel, gage, shape, and configuration as indicated on Drawings. 2.3 FASTENERS A. Framing to Framing: ASTM C 954; 5/8 inch Type S-12 low-profile head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self- tapping steel screws. B. Framing to Attachment Angle Fasteners: #12 diameter pan head corrosion-resistant self-drilling self-tapping steel screws. C. Wall Floor Track Anchorage Device: Carbon steel wedge type expansion anchor; minimum 3/8 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/2 inch embedment. 1. Kwik Bolt KB 11 38-3,by Hilti,Tulsa,OK (800)879-8000. 2. Thrubolt WS-3822,by ITW Ramset/Red Head,Wood Dale,IL (708)350-1558. D. Wall Furring to Concrete or Masonry Wall Fasteners: Hex head sleeve anchors; minimum 1/4 inch diameter x minimum 1-1/8 inch embedment. 1. Slv Anch HX 5/16X2-1/2,by Hilti,Tulsa,OK (800) 879-8000. 2. Dynabolt HN-1413,by ITW Ramset/Redhead,Wood Dale,IL(708)350-1558. E. Furring Channel to Masonry or Concrete Surface Fasteners: Low velocity powder-actuated drive pins of size to Ir suit application. F. Welding: AWS D1.3. G. Wood Furring,Blocking,and Plywood,Attached to Framing Fasteners: Specified in Section 06100. 2.4 FINISHES A. Galvanizing: G90 coating class. 05400-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 M. B. Install system to provide for movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fas- teners,or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges. ` C. Install system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. ow D. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification .« tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Owner. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Am A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. MM B. Protect metal framing from corrosion,deformation,and other damage during delivery,storage,and handling. C. Store and protect with waterproof covering;ventilate to avoid condensation. on D. Where framing is stored outdoors, stack materials off ground, supported on level platform, fully protected from weather. a PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Unimast Incorporated,Franklin Park,IL(800)969-4110. 1. Unimast framing component designations are used within this Section to identify framing types. 2. Alternate Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with project requirements metal framing materials of equal type to those specified,by alternate manufacturers are acceptable. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Studs: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped,punched for utility access,depth and gage as indicated on Drawings. 1. 358SN20 - 3-5/8 inch studs,20 gage. am 2. 358SN18 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 18 gage. 3. 358SN16 - 3-5/8 inch studs, 16 gage. 4. 600SN20 - 6 inch studs,20 gage. ON 5. 600SN18 - 6 inch studs, 18 gage. 6. 600SN16 - 6 inch studs, 16 gage. B. Interior and Exterior Load-Bearing Cee-Joists: ASTM A 653 Structural Quality; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped,depth and gage as indicated on Drawings. 1. 358SJ20 - 3-5/8 inch joists,20 gage. 2. 358SJ18 - 3-5/8 inch joists, 18 gage. 3. 358SJ16 - 3-5/8 inch joists, 16 gage. 4. 600SJ20 - 6 inch joists,20 gage. 5. 600SJ18 - 6 inch joists, 18 gage. 6. 600SJ16 - 6 inch joists, 16 gage. C. Partition Floor Tracks and Runners: ASTM A 653 and ASTM C 955; galvanized sheet steel, channel shaped; same depth and gage as studs;tight fit;solid web. 1. 20 Gage Studs: CR20 x stud size. " 2. 18 Gage Studs: CR18 x stud size. 3. 16 Gage Studs: CR16 x stud size. ... 05400-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 05400-COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Load bearing formed steel stud exterior and interior framing 20 gage and heavier. 2. Cold formed steel cee joists. 3. Cold formed steel ceiling joists. 4. Cold formed steel stud header wall framing and bracing supported from roof structure. 5. Cold formed deep leg track for interior nonload-bearing steel stud partitions (designed for 5 pounds per square foot uniform load perpendicular to partition). 6. Cold formed steel stud partition between stockroom and sales area. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Connecting to structural building framing. 2. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Connecting to steel joists. 3. Section 05300-Metal Deck: Connecting to decking 4. Section 05500 -Metal Fabrications: Fabricated bent plate, deep leg track for steel stud partition between stockroom and sales area (designed for uniform load perpendicular to partition exceeding 5 pounds per square foot). 5. Section 06100-Rough Carpentry: Wood furring strips,plywood,and blocking. 6. Section 07210-Building Insulation: Thermal insulation installed in exterior framing. 7. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Non-load bearing steel stud partition framing 20 gage and lighter and gypsum board attached to cold formed metal framing. 1.2 REFERENCES t A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 153 -Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process. 3. ASTM C 954- Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in.(0.84 mm)to 0.112 in(2.84 mm)in Thickness. 4. ASTM C 955 - Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Board and Metal Plaster Bases. B. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code-Steel Sheet. C. Gypsum Association(GA): 1. GA-201 - Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings. 2. GA-216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. D. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20 Type I-Zinc Rich Primers-Inorganic. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of cold formed metal framing components with minimum five years documented experience. 05400-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 eeee BLANK PAGE mw Mw so ewo we ON 05300-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 „1e SECTION 05300 METAL DECK CONTRACTOR'S FINAL FIELD USE DRAWING REVIEW Project Name: Project Number: The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work until review of the Final Field Use Drawings is complete. By signing below as approved,the Contractor hereby certifies that the he has reviewed the Final Field Use Drawings and has checked and coordinated the information contained therein with related work and has reported any errors,inconsistencies, or omissions to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer's review of this form or any attached drawings shall neither relieve the Contractor or the steel deck supplier from the responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents nor approve any work not complying therewith. Final Field Use Drawings are not Contract Documents and do not modify Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of measurements,elevations,line and grades of the Work. SUBMITTAL: ❑ Steel Deck Final Field Use drawings from Owners Metal Deck Supplier dated (check the appropriate submittal action and fill in date on drawings) ❑ Approved/no exceptions taken ❑ Revise and resubmit ❑ Approved/comments attached ❑ Rejected If comments are required,attach a separate sheet. Approved by Contractor: Firm Name: Signed by: Date: Return one copy to the Structural Engineer of Record,and one copy to Owner's Metal Deck Supplier. Wallace Engineering 201 W.5th,Suite 200 Tulsa,OK 74103 Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER Wheeling Corrugating Company,Division of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation 1134 Market Street PHONE: (304)234-2300 Wheeling,WV 26003 FAX: (304)234-2330 END OF FORM 05300-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 BLANK PAGE Aft am, AM OM an 05300-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am MR C. Testing and Inspection: Testing Laboratory services specified in Section 01458. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Powder and air actuated fasteners. 1. Inspection: Pin manufacturer representative shall be on site to inspect and verify proper installation of fasteners. 2. Report: Manufacturer representative shall submit inspection report indicating verification to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. END OF SECTION tl Aw 1 05300-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal decking and connect to structure in accordance with SDI Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks,Roof Decks. Coordinate attachment sequence and procedure with placing of units; show on final field use drawings. •. B. On steel support members provide 1-1/2 inch minimum bearing. On masonry support surfaces provide 3 inch minimum bearing. Am C. Align and level deck on supports. D. Provide welds, fasteners,and side lap connectors of size,spacing,and location as indicated on Drawings. mo E. Install Hilti powder actuated fasteners using the DX-450 or DX-750 decking system,by Hilti. Installed pin height shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and verified with manufacturer approved inspection gage. Determine power level by jobsite testing. F. Install Hilti air actuated fasteners using the R4xl2 decking system, by Hilti. Installed pin height shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and verified with manufacturer approved inspection gage. Determine power level by jobsite testing. G. Install Pneutek air actuated fasteners using decking system, by Pneutek. Install pins in accordance with .. manufacturer's recommendations. Pin head shall clamp deck tightly to supporting member without gaps between underside of head and top side of deck. Pin shall not cause excessive dimpling of the deck greater than 1/2 the thickness of the pin head. H. Powder and air actuated fasteners shall be installed by a tool operator licensed by the pin manufacturer. I. Welding: In accordance with AWS D1.1 and D1.3. Provide welding washers when welding 24 gauge or lighter steel in conformance with SDI standards.Install 6 inch wide sheet steel cover plates where deck changes direction. Spot weld in place 12 inches on center maximum. Install sheet steel closures and angle flashings to close openings between deck and walls,columns,and openings. J. Position roof sump pans with flange bearing on top surface of deck. Weld at each deck flute. K. Immediately after welding deck in place, touch-up welds, burned areas, and surface coating damage with prime paint. L. Field Painting: Dry fog paint finish specified in Section 09900. M. Interface with Other Work: 1. Coordinate locations and sizes of openings for skylights, smoke vents (if specified), roof top mechanical equipment and penetrations of metal deck. ..► 2. Verify steel joist spacing,bracing,and layout. 3. Coordinate structural steel support framing for metal deck openings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect metal deck installation,type of deck,laps,fastener type,fastener spacing,and attachments. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. 05300-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 „�, 2.2 DECK MATERIALS (OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) illt M A. Metal deck shall conform to SDI standards. B. Steel Roof Deck: ASTM A 611, Grade C, 1-1/2 inch high,minimum gage sheet steel as indicated on Drawings, prime painted grey top side and white bottom side. 2.3 ACCESSORIES(OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Side Lap Fasteners: Self-drilling screws; #10-16 /1, by ITW Buildex, Itaska, Il (800) 323-0720, or Wal-Mart approved substitute. 2.4 ACCESSORIES (CONTRACTOR FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. B. Primers: 1. Shop application and field touch-up: SSPC 25. 2. Touch-up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC 20. C. Screw Fasteners: Self-drilling, self tapping No. 12 HWH Tek screws, by ITW Buildex, Itaska, Il (800) 323- 0720,or Wal-Mart approved substitute. D. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Minimum 0.145 inch diameter knurled hardened steel shank; minimum 0.5625 inch diameter washer;meet SDI design requirements. 1. ENP2-21-L15,by Hilti Incorporated,Tulsa,OK (800)879-8000. 2. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: not permitted. E. Air Actuated Fasteners: Minimum 0.130 inch diameter knurled hardened steel shank; minimum 0.500 inch diameter steel washer or head;meet SDI design requirements. 1. X-EDNK22 HSN or X-EDN19 HSN,by Hilti,Incorporated,Tulsa,Ok (800)879-8000. !" 2. K-65056 or SDK-63075,by Pneutek Incorporated,Hudson,NH (603) 883-1660. 3. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: not permitted. F. Masonry Anchorage: Specified in Section 04220. 2.5 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel decking in accordance with the SDI Design Manual and AISI,to accommodate the following: 1. Roof Deck: Maximum working stress of 20,000 psi and maximum span deflection of L/240. B. Fabricate roof sump pan of 14 gage sheet steel, flat bottom, sloped sides, recessed 1-1/2 inches below roof deck surface,bearing flange 3 inches wide,watertight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that metal deck supporting framing components are ready to receive Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 05300-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am E. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20 Type II-Zinc Rich Primers-Organic. 2. SSPC-Paint 25 -Red Iron Oxide,Zinc Oxide,Raw Linseed Oil,and Alkyd Primer. 1.3 SUBMITTALS • A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Final Field Use Drawing Review Form: Complete attached Final Field Use Drawing Review Form and forward to Structural Engineer of Record and metal deck supplier under provisions of Section 01330. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that welders employed in Work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification ., tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Product Delivery: Owner's metal deck supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by contractor. To establish product delivery date, contact the Delivery Scheduling or ., Wal-Mart Account Contact person indicated,immediately upon notice of Award of Contract. B. Project Packaging: Metal decking will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. Identification markings will coordinate with identification markings for components indicated on Owner's Metal Deck Supplier installation final field use drawings. C. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. , 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Installation Final Field Use Drawings and Bills of Lading provided by Owner's Metal Deck Supplier. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered, or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart immediately. Upon notification, Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. D. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Owner's Metal Deck Supplier. Upon notification,Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. E. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. .w F. Keep materials dry. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers;slope for positive drainage. G. Prevent damage to edges,ends and surfaces. +*a PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wheeling Corrugating Company, Division of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation, Wheeling, WV (304) 234- 2300. 1. Wal-Mart Account Sales Manager: Kerry Price. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. ..4 05300-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,. 1 UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 05300-METAL DECK PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner furnished roof decking. 2. Owner furnished sidelap fasteners. 3. Framed openings up to 10 inches by 10 inches. 4. Welding,fasteners,and accessories for attachment of deck. 5. Contractor installation of metal decking and accessories. B. Work Installed,but not Furnished under this Section: 1. Owner's Metal Deck supplier will furnish steel roof deck under provisions of Section 01600. 2. Owner's Metal Deck supplier will furnish side lap fasteners for deck. Owner's Metal Deck supplier will determine quantity of fasteners based on requirements of Side Lap Fastener Schedule on Drawings. At time of receipt, Contractor shall verify quantity of side lap fasteners is in accordance with Side Lap Fastener Schedule. If fastener quantity is not in accordance with requirements of Schedule,obtain balance of fasteners from Owner's Metal Deck supplier. Subsequent to receipt of side lap fasteners from Owner's Metal Deck supplier,additional fasteners shall be provided at Contractor's expense. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Furnish and install roof sump pans,cover plates,and accessories required for installation and attachment of deck to structural steel members. 2. Installation of Owner furnished metal decking and accessories. D. Related Sections: 1. Section 01600-Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. 2. Section 04220 - Concrete Masonry Units: Anchorages for support plates and angles embedded in masonry. 3. Section 05120-Structural Steel: a. Structural steel for rooftop HVAC units and framed openings larger than 10 inches by 10 inches. b. Support plates and angles with anchor studs, expansion bolts, or adhesive anchors, which are embedded in or cast into concrete or masonry for supporting steel deck. 4. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Support structure for metal decking. 5. Section 09900-Paints and Coatings: Field painting of exposed deck. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute(AISI): Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): OR 1. ASTM A 611 -Specification for Structural Steel(SS),Sheet,Carbon,Cold-Rolled 2. ASTM A 653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed)by the Hot-Dip Process C. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. 2. AWS D1.3 -Structural Welding Code-Sheet Steel. D. Steel Deck Institute(SDI): Design Manual for Composite Decks,Form Decks,Roof Decks. 05300-1 Op Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .a BLANK PAGE 05210-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 «,w, SECTION 05210 STEEL JOISTS CONTRACTOR'S FINAL FIELD USE DRAWING REVIEW 0- Project Name: Project Number: The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work until review of the Final Field Use Drawings is complete. By signing below as approved,the Contractor hereby certifies that the he has reviewed the Final Field Use Drawings and has checked and coordinated the information contained therein with related work and has reported any errors, inconsistencies, or omissions to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer's review of this form or any attached drawings shall neither relieve the Contractor or the steel joist supplier from the responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents nor approve any work not complying therewith. Final Field Use Drawings are not Contract Documents and do not modify Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of measurements,elevations,line and grades of the Work. SUBMITTAL: ❑ Steel Joist Final Field Use Drawings from Owner's Steel Joist Supplier dated (check the appropriate submittal action and fill in date on drawings) ❑ Approved/no exceptions taken ❑ Revise and resubmit ❑ Approved/comments attached ❑ Rejected If comments are required,attach a separate sheet. Approved by Contractor: Firm Name: Signed by: Date: Return one copy to the Structural Engineer or Architect of Record,and one copy to Owner's Steel Joist Supplier. Pop Wallace Engineering 201 W.5th,Suite 200 Tulsa,OK 74103 Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER SMI Joist Company 619B N. 1st Street Jacksonville,AR 72076 (501)982-5377 END OF FORM 05210-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 e. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL .t A. Inspect steel joist installation,types of joists and locations,welds and connections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. am C. Testing and Inspection: Testing Laboratory Services specified in Section 01458. END OF SECTION *� .w 05210-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,.,,, 2.3 ACCESSORIES(CONTRACTOR FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Anchors and Fasteners: Furnish anchors and fasteners required for installation and attachment of joist, joist girders,and bridging not provided by Owner's Steel Joist Supplier. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. 2.4 FABRICATION A. Steel joists and joist girders will be fabricated in accordance with SJI Standard Specifications including headers and other supplementary framing. Top and bottom chord extensions will be provided where indicated on 40 Drawings. B. Joists,joist girders,and accessories will be prepared and shop primed with one coat of primer. C. Fabrication Testing and Inspection: I. Testing and inspection will be performed under provisions of Section 01450. 2. Fabrication of joists and joist girders is subject to inspection and testing. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify that steel joist supporting framing components are ready to receive Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 ERECTION A. Erect steel joists,joist girders,and bridging in accordance with approved final field use drawings and SJI Standard Specifications. B. Bear joists and joist girders on supports in accordance with approved final field use drawings and SJI. During erection,provide temporary bracing,as required by joist manufacturer,for induced loads and stresses on joists and joist girders. C. Limit sweep of joists to span length/180 or a maximum of 2 inches. D. Coordinate placement of anchorages in concrete and masonry construction for making connections to joists and joist girders,and for securing bearing plates. E. Connect or field weld joist seat to placed bearing plates after alignment, positioning after installation of bridging. Do not permit erection of decking until joists are braced and bridged. F. Do not field cut or alter joists without written approval from Structural Engineer of Record and Owner's Steel Joist Supplier. 4P 05210-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Owner. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING MW A. Product Delivery: Owner's Steel Joist Supplier will deliver products to jobsite for Contractor to receive on delivery date established by contractor. To establish product delivery date,contact the Wal-Mart Account Contact person indicated,immediately upon notice of Award of Contract. d B. Project Packaging: Steel Joists will be shipped in manufacturer's standard packaging with identification markings on each component or package. Identification markings will coordinate with identification markings for components indicated on Owner's Steel Joist Supplier installation shop drawings. oft C. Acceptance at Site: Receive products as specified in Section 01600. 1. Verify quantity of products furnished with Installation Shop Drawings and Bills of Lading provided by an Owner's Steel Joist Supplier. 2. Report discrepancies in product quantity delivered,or damage to products delivered to Wal-Mart immediately. Upon notification,Wal-Mart will arrange for delivery of replacement products. Note description of product quality discrepancies and/or product damage on Bill of Lading. Oft D. Manufacturing Defects: Report suspected product manufacturing defects to Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Owner's Steel Joist Supplier. Upon notification,Wal-Mart will arrange for repair of manufacturing defects. ow E. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: Transport, handle, store, and protect products in accordance with SJI requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. SMI Joist Company,Hope,AR. Telephone: (800)643-1577. FAX: (800)427-4272. 1. Wal-Mart Account Sales Manager: Stan McKown. ..� 2. Additional Manufacturer Contacts: Susan Rider or Robbie Fuller. B. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Product options and.substitutions: Substitutions: Not Permitted. 2.2 MATERIALS(OWNER FURNISHED-CONTRACTOR INSTALLED) A. Open Web Joist Members: 1. SJI Type K Open Web. 2. SJI Type H Open Web. 3. LH Longspan. 4. DLH Longspan. 5. Joist Girders. B. Bridging: ASTM A 36,ASTM A 242,A 570,or A 572. C. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15,grey. D. Anchors and Fasteners: ... 1. Bridging bolts and joist to girder bolts. 2. Clips for bridging wall anchors. 05210-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 05210-STEEL JOISTS OR PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Owner furnished open web steel joists,with extended ends,and attached bearing plates. 2. Owner furnished joist girders and continuity angles for joist girders. !!! 3. Owner furnished bridging and connection angles for bridging at side walls. 4. Contractor installation of steel joists and accessories. B. Work Installed, but not Furnished under this Section: Owner's Steel Joist Supplier will furnish steel joists,joist girders,and bridging under provisions of Section 01600. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300-Cast In Place Concrete: Grouting base plates and bearing plates. 2. Section 05120-Structural Steel: a. Support plates and angles with anchor studs,expansion bolts,or adhesive anchors,which are embedded in or cast into concrete or masonry for supporting steel joists and joist girders. b. Frames for rooftop HVAC units and roof openings larger than 10 inches by 10 inches. 3. Section 09900-Paint and Coatings: Field painting of exposed joists and roof deck. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1 1. ASTM A 36-Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 242-Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Structural Steel. 3. ASTM A 570-Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip,Carbon,Hot-Rolled,Structural Quality. 4. ASTM A 572-Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality. B. American Welding Society(AWS): + * 1. AW S D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. C. Steel Joist Institute(SJI): 1. SH-Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists H-Series,and Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists K-Series,and Standard Specifications for Longspan Steel Joists LH-Series and Deep Longspan Steel Joists DLH-Series. 2. SJI-Standard Specifications for Joist Girders. D. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 15 Steel Joist Shop Paint. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Contractor's Final Field Use Review Form: Complete attached Contractor's Final Field Use Review Form and forward to Structural Engineer of Record and Owner's Steel Joist Supplier under provisions of Section 01330. 05210-1 At Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.4 ERECTION A. Erect structural steel in accordance with AISC Specification. B. Make provision for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in *�* true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. C. Do not field cut or alter structural members. D. After erection, paint surfaces not shop painted that are to receive finish painting. Use a primer consistent with shop coat. E. Anchor Bolts: Install anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work. Furnish templates and other devices as necessary for presetting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations. F. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surfaces of base and bearing plates. 1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on adjusting nuts. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after the supported members have been positioned and plumbed. 3. Grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases of plates immediately after erecting member and before additional load is placed on member. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure. For proprietary grout materials,comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Slide bearings: Permanently affixed to member and support, respectively, by welding or bolting as indicated. Align and level member faces to maintain full contact between surfaces before completing installation. G. High-strength Bolting: Comply with specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts. H. Erection Bolts: 1. Comply with ASTM A 307. 2. Hand tighten nut to minimum depth of nut. w. I. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. J. Field Painting: Specified in Section 09900. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL " A. Inspect structural steel erection,material,components,shapes,alignment and connections. B. Correct deficiencies in Work which inspection indicates are not in compliance with Contract Documents. C. Testing and Inspection: Testing Laboratory services specified in Section 01458. END OF SECTION 05120-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,� 2.2 FABRICATION A. Fabricate structural steel members in accordance with AISC Specification. B. Connections not detailed on Drawings: Engineer by fabricator,which is subject to review. C. Fabricator's Responsibility: I. Errors of detailing,fabrications,and for correct fitting of structural steel members. 2. Do not splice structural steel members. Members having splice not indicated on Drawings will be rejected. 2.3 FINISH A. Clean,prepare,and shop prime structural steel members. B. Galvanized Finish: Minimum 1.25 oz/sq ft zinc (hot-dipped galvanized) coating complying with ASTM A123. Galvanize the following items: 1. Anchor bolts exposed to weather and in contact with or embedded in concrete or masonry. C. Epoxy Coating Finish: Prepare structural steel items scheduled to receive epoxy coating by SSPC-SP 6 (Commercial Blast Cleaning) method. Prime steel with SSPC-Paint 20 Type II, zinc rich primer; minimum dry film thickness of 3 mils. Top coat structural steel with SSPC-Paint 22, epoxy coating; minimum dry film thickness of 3 mils. Apply zinc rich primer and epoxy coating to the following items: 1. Satellite dish support(from bottom of deck to top of support). D. Alkyd Primer Finish: Prepare structural steel items scheduled to recieve alkyd primer by SSPC-SP 2 (Hand Tool Cleaning) method. Prime steel with SSPC-Paint 25 alkyd primer; minimum dry mil thickness of 2 mils. Apply alkyd primer to the following items: I. Structural steel items not specified as galvanized or scheduled to recieve epoxy coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and adjacent areas where products and materials will be installed and verify that conditions conform to product manufacturer's requirements. Verify elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces and locations of anchorage. Verify that all conditions are ready to receive Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Beginning of installation indicates acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting diagrams to appropriate Sections. 3.3 SURVEY A. Employ Professional Engineer registered in State in which Project is located, experienced in survey work, to establish permanent bench marks as shown and as necessary for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made, or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Wal-Mart. 05120-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 dw 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. Provide certification that welders employed in work have satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests within previous 12 months. If recertification of welders is required, provide without additional cost to Owner. B. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. D. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets,platforms,or other supports. E. Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration. 1. Store fasteners in a protected place. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before *� use. 2. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage members or supporting structures. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: 1. Wide Flange Steel Shapes:ASTM A 572,Grade 50. 2. Steel Channels,Angles,Anchor Bolts,Plates and Bars: ASTM A 36. ` B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500,Grade B. C. Structural Steel Pipe: ASTM A53,Grade B;ASTM A500,Grade B;ASTM A 501. D. Bolts,Nuts,and Washers: ASTM A 325 or A 307 as indicated on Drawings. E. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded or as indicated on Drawings. E7024 electrodes("Jet Weld"rods)are not permitted;use only"All Position"rods. F. Adhesive Anchors: Stud-type adhesive anchors consisting of threaded steel rod, nut and washer or deformed reinforcing bar, adhesive cartridge, and mixing tubes. Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide adhesive anchors as manufactured by one of the following: 1. HY-150,by Hilti. 2. Epcon System,by ITW Ramset/Red Head. G. Alkyd Primer: SSPC-Paint 25;Grey color. H. Zinc Rich Primer: SSPC-Paint 20 Type II. 1. Carboline 858,by Carboline. aw 2. 90-97 Tneme-Zinc,by Tnemec. I. Epoxy Top Coat: SSPC-Paint 22. 1. Carboline 893,by Carboline. 2. Series 27 F.C.Typoxy,by Tnemec. J. Teflon Coated Slide Bearing Pads: 1. Fluorogold,by Furon. 2. Dura-Slide,by Tobi Engineering. 3. Type CSA,by Con-Serv,Inc. 05120-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 w. UniSpec II-ASTM 123199 SECTION 05120-STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Structural steel framing members, structural steel support members, struts, with required bracing, welds, and fasteners. 2. Base plates and shear stud connectors. 3. Teflon coated slide bearing pads. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300 - Cast In Place Concrete: Anchorages cast in concrete. Grouting base plates and bearing plates. 2. Section 04220-Concrete Masonry Units: Anchorages embedded in masonry. 3. Section 05210-Steel Joists: Steel bracing for joists and joist girders. 4. Section 05300-Metal Deck: Support framing for roof openings. 5. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel components. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC): Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 36-Specification for Structural Steel. 2. ASTM A 53 -Specification for Pipe,Steel,Black and Galvanized, Seamless and Welded. 3. ASTM A 123 -Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 4. ASTM A 307-Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60,000 psi Tensile Strength. 5. ASTM A 325 -Specification for Structural Bolts,Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength. 6. ASTM A 500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 7. ASTM A 501 -Specification for Hot-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing. 8. ASTM A572 - Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural Steel. C. American Welding Society(AWS): AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. L D. Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC): 1. SSPC-Paint 20 Type II-Zinc Rich Primers-Organic. 2. SSPC-Paint 22-Epoxy-Polyamide Paints. 3. SSPC-Paint 25 -Red Iron Oxide,Zinc Oxide,Raw Linseed Oil,and Alkyd Primer. 4. SSPC-SP 2-Hand Tool Cleaning. 5. SSPC-SP 6-Commercial Blast Cleaning. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Final Field Use Drawing Review Form: Complete attached Final Field Use Drawing Review Form and forward to Structural Engineer of Record and structural steel supplier under provisions of Section 01330. 05120-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 MM an .. .m .m BLANK PAGE ..A 04220-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Bed anchors of metal door and glazed frames in mortar joints. Fill frame voids solid with grout. Fill masonry cores with grout minimum 12 inches from framed openings. D. Do not build in organic materials subject to deterioration. 3.11 CUTTING AND FITTING A. Cut and fit for bearing plates, chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds. Coordinate with other Sections of work to provide correct size,shape,and location. B. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any area not indicated or where appearance or strength of masonry work may be impaired. 3.12 CLEANING A. Remove excess mortar and smears. B. Replace defective mortar. Match adjacent work. C. Clean soiled surfaces with anon-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or adjacent materials. Consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners. D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.13 PROTECTION A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by construction activities. B. Provide protection without damaging completed work. C. At day's end, cover unfinished walls to prevent moisture infiltration. Weight cover down to prevent blow-off and maintain protection for fresh masonry work. Extend cover from top of wall a minimum of 2 feet down the wall on each side. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Masonry: Required testing will be performed in accordance with Section 01458. B. Blown-In Expanded Polystyrene Bead Insulation: Upon completion of installation, perform infrared thermographic inspection of exterior walls. 1. Thermographer Qualifications: Level 2 Certified Thermographer, certified in accordance with ASNT SNT-TIC-IA,with at least three years experience performing infrared inspections of building envelopes. 2. Infrared Equipment: Flir Systems Incorporated Prism DS thermal imager. 3. Environmental Conditions: Perform thermographic inspection under the following conditions. a. From exterior of building with building in heated mode. b. Post-sunset,from ground level,with inside/outside temperature differential of at least 18 degrees F. C. Exterior wall surfaces shall be dry at time of inspection and winds at less than 15 miles per hour. 4. Inspection Report: Submit Inspection Report prepared by Thermographer to: Staff Architect Wal-Mart Stores Incorporated Sam M.Walton Development Center 2001 S.E. 10th Street Bentonville,AR 72712-6489 END OF SECTION 04220-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..R 3.6 MASONRY FILL INSULATION A. Blown-In Expanded Polystyrene Bead Insulation: Confirm that selected foam insulation material is compatible and non-detrimental to referenced fire resistance assemblies before use. B. Install insulation in masonry unit cores of exterior walls. C. Granular Insulation: 1. Place masonry fill insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Verify that holes and openings have been sealed to prevent escape of insulation. 2. Place as masonry is erected. Ensure spaces are free of mortar to allow free flow of insulation. 3. Completely fill spaces. Place in lifts and rod to eliminate air pockets. Place prior to covering cores with bond beams or lintels. 4. Place temporary signs on face of insulated walls warning workers to use caution to prevent loss of insulation if cutting into walls. D. Blown-In Expanded Polystyrene Bead Insulation: 1. Installer shall be certified or approved by manufacturer of insulation. 2. Install expanded polystyrene beads in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 3. Blow-in expanded polystyrene beads from top of wall prior to installation of bond beams. 3.7 LINTELS w A. Install loose steel lintels as scheduled. B. Install reinforced unit masonry lintels over openings where steel lintels are not scheduled. Construct lintels using ow grout fill and reinforcing. Maintain minimum 8 inch bearing on each side of opening, unless noted otherwise on Drawings. .o C. Use reinforcing bars of one piece lengths only. D. Place and consolidate grout fill without disturbing reinforcing. Allow lintels to reach strength before removing temporary supports. E. For soap units covering steel lintels,provide 9 gage Z-ties at each vertical joint. Weld Z-ties to web of steel lintel. 3.8 CONTROL JOINTS A. Do not continue bond beam reinforcing or joint reinforcing across control joints. ..® B. Install preformed control joint filler at locations indicated on Drawings. Use proper size material to create sealant joint space. For backer rod and sealant see Section 07900. ■w 3.9 EXPANSION JOINTS A. At expansion joints indicated on Drawings, locate expansion joint filler on centerline of wall. Install backer rods and sealant. See Section 07900. 3.10 BUILT-IN WORK go A. As work progresses,build in metal door frames, fabricated metal frames,window frames,anchor bolts,diaphragm anchors,embedded plates,and other items included in the work supplied by other Sections. w B. Install items plumb and level. an 04220-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ow 40 B. For hollow concrete masonry units, fill head and bed joints solidly with mortar for a distance in from the face of the unit not less than the thickness of the shell. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and foundation walls and in courses of piers, columns and pilasters, and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be reinforced or filled with concrete or grout. For starting courses on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed, including areas under cells. C. Fully bond intersections,and external and internal corners. D. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and replace. E. Perform jobsite cutting with proper tools to provide straight unchipped edges. Take care to prevent breaking masonry unit corners or edges. 1. Where required,match finish masonry work to adjacent surfaces. po 2. For fire-rated walls, construct walls to finish against bottom of roof or floor deck and fill voids with firestopping. 3. For other than fire-rated walls, cut units to match the slope of the roof deck and finish construction to within 2 inches of and parallel to roof deck. F. Isolate masonry partitions from vertical structural framing members with a control joint. 3.4 TOLERANCES A. Construct masonry within the following tolerances: 1. Alignment of Pilasters: Maximum 1/4 inch from true line. 2. Variation from Plane of Wall: 1/4 inch in 10 feet;3/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/2 inch maximum. 3. Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch per story non-cumulative. 4. Variation from Level Coursing: 1/8 inch in 3 feet; 1/4 inch in 10 feet; 1/2 inch maximum. 5. Variation of Joint Thickness: 1/8 inch in 3 feet. B. Tolerances for the placement of reinforcing steel in walls and flexural elements: 1. f 1/2 inch when the distance from the centerline of the steel to the opposite face of the masonry, "d", is equal to 8 inches or less. 2. f 1 inch for"d"equal to 24 inches or less. 3. t 1-1/4 inch for"d"greater than 24 inches. 3.5 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES P0 A. Install horizontal joint reinforcement 16 inches on center, except space at 8 inches in parapet walls and below finished floor, or where otherwise indicated on Drawings. Place joint reinforcement continuous in first and second joint below top of walls. Lap joint reinforcement ends minimum 6 inches. Do not extend joint reinforcement through control joints. B. Place vertical reinforcing bars supported and secured against displacement, by means of bar positioners. Support other bars and tie to prevent displacement. C. Grout cells full that contain vertical reinforcing. Use low lift grout method of construction conforming to requirements of ACI. D. Verify that anchorages embedded in masonry are properly placed. 1. Proper placement of embed anchors shall be understood as full depth penetration of scheduled anchorage without contact of embed stud with interior surface of exterior shell face. 04220-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 m,. am b. Control Joint No. 9101, by Southern Construction Products, Inc.; Birmingham, AL; (800) 821- 9296. am C. Masonry Control Joint No.571;by Greenstreak; St.Louis,MO;(800)325-9504. 2. Tee Joint: 2-5/8 inches by 1 inch;rubber. a. Rapid Control Joint D/A 2025,by Dur-O-Wal,Inc.,Aurora,IL,(800)323-0090. ow b. Control Joint No. 9107, by Southern Construction Products, Inc.; Birmingham, AL; (800) 821- 9296. C. Masonry Control Joint No. 572;by Greenstreak;St.Louis,MO;(800)325-9504. C. Preformed Expansion Joint Filler: 1. One Inch Expansion Joint: Secondary compression seal. a. WABO WE-225,black;by Watson Bowman Acme;Amherst,NY;(716)691-7566. ... b. GreyFlex Expanding Foam Sealant; by Emseal Joint Systems, Ltd.; Westborough, MA; (508) 836- 0280. 2.4 MASONRY FILL INSULATION A. Granular Insulation: ASTM C 516 vermiculite or ASTM C 549 perlite. B. Blown-In Expanded Polystyrene Bead Insulation: Bloc Fil Masonry Insulation, by Block Fil Incorporated (800) 342-0839. 1. Substitutions: As approved by Wal-Mart Staff Architect submitted through the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Verify items provided by other sections of work are properly sized and located. B. Establish lines, levels, and coursing. Protect from disturbance. Use non-corrosive materials in contact with masonry work. C. Provide temporary bracing for walls,lintels,and other masonry work during erection. Maintain in place until roof and other structural elements are complete and provide permanent bracing. 3.2 COURSING A. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. C. Lay concrete masonry units in running bond unless otherwise noted. Course one block unit and one mortar joint * to equal 8 inches. D. Tool head and bed joints concave regardless if below grade or above ceiling height. Use tool with large enough radius that joint is not raked free of mortar. 3.3 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay solid concrete masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. Remove excess mortar. .w. 04220-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,w go PART 2 PRODUCTS 4P 2.1 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS A. Hollow Load Bearing Units: ASTM C 90,Type II. 1. Smooth CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. 2. Splitface CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. B. Solid Load-bearing Units: ASTM C 90,Grade N,Type II. on 1. Smooth CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. 2. Splitface CMU: Light weight or normal weight above finished floor; normal weight only below finished floor. C. Non-load Bearing Units: ASTM C 129,Type II. to D. Light Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 331,free of materials that will cause rusting,staining,or popouts. E. Fire Resistance Classification: UL, FM, WH, or SWRI listing and fire resistance rating required for CMU wall ww and partition assemblies and components. Provide units of minimum equivalent thickness specified for the fire rating and for corresponding aggregate type. F. Unit Design: Modular two core units sized as indicated or scheduled. Provide special units for bond beams, control and expansion joints,and lintels. 1. Provide units as required for indicated construction including sill units and solid cap units. 2. Provide units with exposed faces which are uniform in appearance. 2.2 REINFORCEMENT AND ANCHORAGES A. Horizontal Joint Reinforcement: At Contractor's option, truss design or ladder design, minimum 9 gage welded steel wire; hot dipped galvanized to 1.5 oz, ASTM A 153, Class B2. Width 1-1/2 to 2 inches less than wall thickness. B. Deformed Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Shop fabricate reinforcement which is shown bent or hooked. Field bending not allowed. C. Anchor bolts and threaded rods as shown embedded in masonry on structural drawings: ASTM A 307. D. Adhesive for embedding threaded rods: HILTI C 100. No substitutions. 410 E. Bar Positioners for Vertical Wall Bars: Minimum 9 gage,galvanized wire. 1. AA Wire Products Co.;Dallas,TX;(214)637-1511. 2. Dur-O-WaI,Inc.;Arlington Heights,IL;(708) 577-6400. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America;Charlotte,NC;(704) 525-3761. 2.3 ACCESSORIES ! " A. Joint Filler: Closed cell foam,oversized 50 percent;self-expanding. B. Preformed Control Joint Filler: 1. Regular Joint: 2-5/8 inches by 1-1/2 inches;rubber. a. Rapid Control Joint D/A 2001,by Dur-O-WaI,Inc.,Aurora,IL(800)323-0090 04220-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Mock-up: Construct a masonry wall mockup,8 feet long x 6 feet high panel. 1. Locate where directed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. " 2. Include reinforcing and minimum of one expansion joint and one outside corner. 3. Include joint treatment and mortar color. 4. Receive acceptance of mock-up by Wal-Mart Construction Manager before proceeding with masonry .. installation. 5. When accepted,mock-up will be used as standard of quality for masonry Work. 6. Leave field sample in place until project completion. 7. Mock-up may not remain as part of the Work. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements(Cold Weather): Follow cold weather procedures of IMIAC. Include the following construction requirements for cold weather procedures. 1. When Air Temperature is above 40 degrees F: a. Heating of Materials: Follow normal masonry procedures. b. Protection: Cover walls with plastic or canvas at end of workday to prevent water entering masonry. 2. When Air Temperature is below 40 degrees F: ... a. Heating of Materials: Heat mixing water. Maintain mortar temperatures between 40 and 120 degrees F until placed. b. Protection: Cover walls and materials to prevent wetting and freezing. Cover material: plastic or .. canvas. 3. When Air Temperature is below 32 degrees F: a. Heating of Materials: In addition to above heating requirements, heat sand. Thaw frozen sand and frozen wet masonry units. Maintain masonry above 32 degrees F, by using auxiliary heat or insulated blankets for 16 hours after laying masonry units. b. Protection: With wind velocities over 15 mph, provide windbreaks during the work day and cover walls and materials at the end of the workday to prevent wetting and freezing. 4. When Air Temperature is below 20 degrees F: a. Heating of Materials: In addition to above heating requirements, dry masonry units by heating to 20 degrees F. b. Protection: Provide enclosures and supply sufficient heat to maintain masonry enclosure above 32 �** degrees F for 24 hours after laying masonry units. B. Environmental Requirements (Hot Weather): When the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F, or 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph,execute the following: 1. Store masonry units out of direct sunlight. 2. Do not spread mortar beds more than 4 feet ahead of masonry. 3. Set masonry units within one minute of spreading mortar. 1.6 WARRANTY A. Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions: Requirements for warranties. B. Blown-In Expanded Polystyrene Bead Insulation: Provide manufacturer warranty covering the following items. 1. Complete wall coverage at time of installation. " 2. Testing of suspected problem areas during life of building. Test shall consist of drilling 1/4 inch holes in horizontal mortar joints and probing wall for insulation. 3. Repair of problem areas,including future renovations,at no cost to building owner. 04220-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 11116 P" UniSpec II(ACI) 123199 SECTION 04220-CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY aw A. Section Includes: 1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Reinforcement,anchorages,and accessories. 3. Masonry fill insulation. B. Work Installed But not Furnished under this Section: Support plates and angles with anchor studs,sleeve anchors, expansion bolts, adhesive anchors, and anchor bolts which are embedded in masonry for supporting structural members. C. Related Sections: 40 1. Section 04060-Mortar and Masonry Grout: Mortar and grout. 2. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Support plates and angles with anchor studs, expansion bolts, sleeve anchors,adhesive anchors,and anchor bolts embedded in masonry for supporting structural members. 3. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Loose steel lintels and other metal components embedded in masonry. 4. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Rod and sealant at control joints. 1.2 REFERENCES M A. American Concrete Institute(ACI): 1. ACI 530-Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures. 'M 2. ACI 530.1R-Specifications for Masonry Structures. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 153 -Specification for Zinc Coating(Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM A 307-Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,60 000 psi Tensile Strength.. 3. ASTM A 615 -Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C 90-Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 5. ASTM C 129-Specification for Non-Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 6. ASTM C 331 -Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete Masonry Units. 7. ASTM C 516-Specification for Vermiculite Loose Fill Thermal Insulation. 8. ASTM C 549-Specification for Perlite Loose Fill Insulation. C. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC): Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Requirements: Procedures for Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct masonry in accordance with ACI 530 and 530.IR.Regulatory Requirements: B. Special inspection and testing will be provided in accordance with the Building Code and as noted on the Drawings and will be performed under provisions of Section 01450. 04220-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 BLANK PAGE . s Ow Mw 04060-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Ow 3. Do not use anti-freeze compounds. 4. If water is lost by evaporation,retemper only within 2 hours of mixing. Do not retemper mortar more than 2 hours after mixing. 2.4 MIXES-GROUT FILL A. Grout fill for concrete masonry unit bond beams, lintels, and reinforced cells with reinforcing bars and embedded plates. 1. Compressive Strength: 2000 psi minimum at 28 days, as determined in accordance with the provisions of ASTM C 1019. 2. Slump: 8 inches,minimum; 10 inches,maximum,taken in accordance with ASTM C 143. in 3. Use coarse grout when grout space is equal to or greater than 4 inches in both directions. 4. Use fine grout when grout space is smaller than 4 inches in either direction. 5. Do not use air-entrainment admixtures. 2.5 MIXING-GROUT A. Grout: Batch and mix grout in accordance with ASTM C 94 or ASTM C476 for site batched and mixed grout. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. After reinforcing of masonry is securely tied in place,plug cleanout holes with masonry units. Brace against wet grout pressure. B. Install mortar and grout under provisions of Section 04220. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01458 -Testing Laboratory Services: Procedures for testing. END OF SECTION Mn 04060-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS .. A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Cold Weather Requirements: IMIAC - Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. �f4 2. Specific Cold Weather Requirements: When the ambient air temperature is below 40 degrees F, heat mixing water to maintain mortar temperature between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F until placed. When the ambient air temperature is below 32 degrees F, heat the sand and water to maintain this mortar temperature. B. For other measures and hot weather requirements refer to Section 04220. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS ^ A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150,normal-Type I or Type II; gray color. Fly ash, slag,and pozzolans not permitted as substitutes for Portland cement. �r B. Masonry Cement: Not allowed. C. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C 144, standard masonry type; clean, dry, protected against dampness, freezing, and *� foreign matter. D. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C 404; use of blast furnace slag is not permitted. Maximum coarse aggregate size, 3/8 inch. E. Calcium chloride is not permitted in mortar or grout. Admixtures or other chemicals containing Thyocyanates, Calcium Chloride or more than 0.1 percent chloride ions are not permitted. +p F. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207,Type S. G. Water: Potable. H. Admixtures: Not permitted unless approved by the Architect prior to construction. (See Section 01330 for sub- mittal procedures). 2.2 MIXES-MORTAR ,w. A. Mortar: Type"S",in accordance with the Proportion specification of ASTM C 270, 1. Mixing of components on-site is acceptable. 2. Mixing on-site water and packaged dry blended mix for mortar(ASTM C 387 or C1329), that contains no masonry cement,is acceptable. 3. Use of ready mix mortar(ASTM C 1142)is prohibited. B. Pointing Mortar: Duplicate original mortar proportions. Add aluminum tristearate, calcium stearate, or ammo- nium stearate equal to 2%of Portland cement weight. C. Mortar Color: As required to match existing, subject to approval by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Control mortar mix to obtain desired color. ra 2.3 MIXING-MORTAR A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in accordance with ASTM C 270,in quantities needed for immediate use. 1. Maintain sand uniformly damp immediately before the mixing process. 2. Provide uniformity of mix and coloration. sm 04060-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 +� UniSpec II-ASTM 092499 SECTION 04060-MASONRY MORTAR PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Mortar and grout for unit masonry. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04220-Concrete Masonry Units: Installation of mortar and grout,reinforcement and anchorages. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM C 94-Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 2. ASTM C 143 -Test Method for Skimp of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 3. ASTM C 144-Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. 4. ASTM C 150-Specification for Portland Cement. 5. ASTM C 207-Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. 6. ASTM C 270-Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 7. ASTM C 387-Specification for Packaged,Dry,Combined Materials for Mortar and Concrete. 8. ASTM C 404-Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout. 9. ASTM C 476-Specification for Grout for Masonry. 10. ASTM C 1019-Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 11. ASTM C 1142-Specification for Ready Mixed Mortar for Unit Masonry(Prohibited). 12. ASTM C 1329-Standard Specifications for Mortar Cement. B. IMIAC-International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council: Recommended Practices and Guide Specifications for Cold Weather Masonry Construction. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing CMU Grout: 1. Determine and certify that proportions of ingredients for mix design will provide the specified compressive strength for each type of grout. 2. Test mix design prior to beginning construction of CMU walls. w 3. Required testing will be performed in accordance with Section 0 145 8. 4. Prepare test specimens in accordance with Section 01458. B. CMU Mortar: Determine and certify that proportions of ingredients for mix design in accordance with ASTM C 270 will provide the specified strength. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store sand for mortar on plastic sheeting to)prevent contamination by extraneous chemicals in earth beneath. 04060-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. R� �IIM BLANK PAGE , Ow .s 03480-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �. UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 03480-PRECAST CONCRETE SPECIALTIES �w PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Window Sill. �►� B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04220-Concrete Masonry Units. 1.2 DELIVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver,store,and handle precast items to prevent breakage or chipping. Replace damaged items. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 PRECAST ITEMS A. Window Sill: Reinforced precast of 3500 psi air-entrained concrete, approximately 24 inches long, with cham- fered corners. Size and shape as indicated. B. Fabricate sill in nominal dimensions,allowing for 3/8 inch mortar joints. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lay units with completely filled bed and head joints;butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not slush head joints. Remove excess mortar. B. Maintain courses to uniform width. Align,vertical joints.Provide joints equal and of uniform thickness. C. Tool head and bed joints concave regardless. Use tool with large enough radius that joint is not raked free of mortar. END OF SECTION 03480-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 W 1.7 WARRANTY ;A. A. Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions: Requirements for warranties. B. Provide 20 year manufacturer's material warranty commencing at date of building Substantial Completion. Manu- facturer shall warrant to the Owner that treated surface will remain waterproof, dustproof, hardened and abrasion resistant. so PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS .w, A. Special Concrete Finish: Silicate sealer, hardener, densifier floor finish "Retro-Plate 99". Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide special concrete finish as manufactured by the following: 1. Advanced Floor Products, Inc. Provo, UT. (801) 812-3420. For name of local agent, contact Advanced A Floor Products,Inc 2. Substitutions: Not permitted. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 4 • A. Examine surfaces receiving special concrete finish. Verify that surfaces conform to product manufacturer's re- quirements for substrate conditions. Prior to application, verify floor is free of construction latents. Do not pro- ceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Special Concrete Finish Application: 1. Application of Densifier and finishing of concrete by certified applicator of Advanced Floor Products,Inc. END OF SECTION .M. ww aw 03360-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 a ±w UniSpec II 102999 SECTION 03360-CONCRETE FINISHES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Silicate sealer,hardener,densifier floor finish. ow B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete floors. 1.2 REFERENCES&SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Application of silicate sealer,hardener,densifier floor finish with a medium floor finish(600 grit). 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for Submittals. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Applicator certified by special concrete finish manufacturer. 2. Applicator familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work. B. Manufacturer Certification: Provide letter of certification from concrete finish manufacturer stating that installer is a certified applicator of special concrete finish material and is familiar with proper procedures and installation requirements required by manufacturer. C. Assign experienced mechanics from previous applications including lead mechanic. RW 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Section 01600-Product Requirements: Transport,handle,store,and protect products. B. Store material in dry,enclosed area protected from exposure to moisture. C. Keep containers closed and upright to prevent leakage. D. Dispense special concrete finish material from factory numbered and sealed drums. Maintain record of drum numbers. 1.6 SCHEDULING A. Application: Concrete must be in place a minimum of 45 days before application can begin. Application is to take place at least ten days prior to racking and other in-store accessory installation(substantial completion), thus pro- viding a complete,uninhibited concrete slab for application. 03360-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ter, No Ow .r, .. •A* Am 4w O BLANK PAGE wer w .r .0 .�r 03300-16 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,,, B. Exposed Interior Slab Areas: 1. Preferred Curing Method: Curing, sealing,and finishing in accordance with Section 03360. 2. Alternative Curing Method: None. 3. Prohibited Curing Methods: Curing/sealing compound;moisture cure. C. Seasonal Garden Center: 1. Preferred Curing Method: Curing,;sealing,and finishing in accordance with Section 03360. 2. Alternative Curing Method: None. 3. Prohibited Curing Methods: Curing/sealing compound;moisture cure. D. Carpet or Vinyl Composition Tile Finished Areas: ow 1. Preferred Curing Method: Moisture cure. 2. Alternative Curing Method: Curing/sealing compound. E. Ceramic or Quarry Tile Finished Areas: 1. Preferred Curing Method: Moisture cure. 2. Alternative Curing Method: None. END OF SECTION �r► ww 03300-15 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 MW 4. Repair defective areas,except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter,by cutting aw out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with am adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. D. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Wal-Mart Construction Manager for method and procedure, oft using specified epoxy adhesive and mortar. 1.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL wo A. Testing as indicated in Section 01458. B. Evaluation and Acceptance: am 1. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the average of all sets of three consecutive strength tests equal or exceed specified strength and no individual strength test(average of two cylinders) results are below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Complete concrete work will not be accepted unless requirements of ACI 301, have been met, including ow dimensional tolerances,appearance,and strength of structure. 3. Where average strength of cylinders, as shown by tests is not satisfactory, Wal-Mart reserves the right to require Contractor to provide improved curing conditions of temperature and moisture to secure required w strength. If average strength of laboratory control cylinders should fall so low as to cause portions of structure to be in question by Wal-Mart, follow core procedure set forth in ASTM C42. If results of core test indicate, in opinion of Wal-Mart, that strength of structure is inadequate, provide without additional cost to Wal-Mart,replacement,load testing,or strengthening as may be ordered by Wal-Mart. If core tests are so ordered and results of such tests disclose that strength of structure is as required, cost of test will be paid by Wal-Mart. 1.11 PROTECTION A. Protect finished work. B. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and damage. .rs C. Patch or replace damaged portions of detectable warning areas. 1.12 CLEANING A. Remove forms, equipment, protective coverings, and rubbish resulting from concreting operations. Leave finished concrete surfaces in clean conditions. After sweeping with ordinary broom and removing mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt and mud,wash concrete floors and platforms with soapy water and rinse with clean +� water. Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and rinsing to keep excessive or detrimental amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Repair damage to resilient tile floors due to concrete cleaning operations. 1.13 CURING SCHEDULE,INTERIOR SURFACES A. Stockroom: 1. Preferred Curing Method: Curing,sealing,and finishing in accordance with Section 03360, 2. Alternative Curing Method: None. 3. Prohibited Curing Methods: Curing/sealing compound;moisture cure. 03300-14 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2. Cover entire surface, including edges of slabs such as paving or sidewalks. " 3. Keep coverings continually moist so that a film of water remains on concrete surface throughout curing period. 4. Maintain concrete in moist condition for not less than seven days after placement. 1.8 CURING METHOD,EXTERIOR SURFACES Ok A. Moisture Cure: 1. Place wet, moisture-containing fabric covering as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage. 2. Cover entire surface, including edges of slabs such as paving or sidewalks. 3. Keep coverings continually moist so that a film of water remains on concrete surface throughout curing period. 4. Maintain concrete in moist condition for not less than seven days after placement. B. Detectable Warning Areas: 1. Sweep, vacuum and pressure wash surface. Allow to dry. Apply specified curing compound in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions. 1.9 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms. 1. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve,using only enough water as required for handling and placing. B. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities,cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock packets, fins and other projections on surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry-pack mortar, or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete.If defects cannot be repaired,remove and replace concrete. 2. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly Mr clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding compound has dried. 3. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface. C. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using template having required slope. alt+ 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect concrete's durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling,popouts,honeycomb,rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days. 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 03300-13 1>M Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 w� 3. Do not over-trowel floors scheduled to receive curing/sealing/densifying compound. Slab must be able to aw accept specified floor treatment. Coordinate with floor treatment manufacturer's application instructions for proper finish and for procedures when finish is too dense for proper floor treatment application. 4. Do not re-wet surface to trowel. e„ F. Broomed: 1. Provide a floated finish,then finish with broom. a. Heavy Boom Finish: Steel wire or stiff,course,fiber broom. b. Light Broom Finish: Soft-bristled fiber broom. 2. Allow surface to harden sufficiently to retain scoring or ridges. 3. Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to slope of slab. .� G. Provide ACI"Class A"tolerance; 1/8 inch variation in 10 feet,measured with straight edge laid in any direction in accordance with ACI 117. H. Pitch to drains: Form 18 inch radius around floor drains and pitch concrete surface to drains at rate of 1/4 inch per foot nominal,unless noted otherwise in Drawings. I. Building Slab Joints: 1. Saw-Cut Control Joints: a. Primary Method: Soff-Cut System, by Soff-Cut International, Corona, CA (800)776-3328. Finisher shall have documented successful experience in the use of this method prior to this project. Install cuts within 2 hours after final finish at each saw cut location. Use 1/4 inch thick blade, cutting 3/4 inch into slab. b. Optional Method(Where Soff-Cut System Equipment is Not Available): Properly time cutting with ..s set of concrete. Saw-cut control joints within 12 hours after finishing. Start cutting as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent aggregates being dislodged by saw. Complete cutting before shrinkage stresses become sufficient to produce cracking. Use 1/4 inch thick blade, cutting 1-1/4 inch into slab. J. Sidewalk Joints: 1. Tooled Joints: Provide at 12 feet 0 inch on center maximum intervals each way,unless indicated at smaller .. intervals on Drawings. a. Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top of slab minimum 1/4 slab thickness with jointer and finishing edges. b. Do not use sawed joints. 2. Expansion Joints: Provide at 30 feet 0 inch on center maximum intervals, unless indicated at smaller intervals on Drawings. Provide at joints abutting concrete curbs,buildings and other appurtenances. a. Provide asphalt impregnated fiberboard joint filler. Recess top of filler 1/4 inch below finished surface of sidewalk. Provide joint fillers in one piece lengths for full width being placed. b. Provide horizontal exterior joint sealant as specified in Section 07900. 3. Align curb,gutter and sidewalk joints. .w, 1.7 CURING METHODS,INTERIOR SURFACES A. Cure floor surfaces in accordance with ACI 301. 40 B. Curing/Sealing Compound: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's application instructions. C. Curing/Sealing/Densifiying Compound: Specified in Section 03360. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's ow application instructions as. D. Moisture Cure: 1. Place wet, moisture-containing fabric covering as soon as concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent surface damage. Aw 03300-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �w C. Floating: 1. Begin float operations when bleed water sheen has disappeared and concrete has stiffened sufficiently to allow walking on surface without leaving heel prints more than 1/4 inch deep. Use magnesium or aluminum power float. a. Detectable Warning Area: Float concrete from two directions with wood float to create an open and uniform surface. Metal floats not permitted. b. All Other Areas: Use magnesium or aluminum power float. 2. Avoid premature finishing that brings excessive fines to surface and causes finished slab to have soft surface which will dust. D. Color Texture Concrete: 1. Pattern: a. Exterior Detectable Warning Area: Layout defined pattern as indicated with proper alignment with respect to building lines. Apply imprint to concrete surface with a consistent pressure while war concrete is plastic providing a uniform texture. 1) Layout texture area at 90 degrees to edge of sidewalk. Provide uniform balance of texture spacing,centering pattern between ends of detectable warning area. 2) Hand-tool in areas where imprinting tools are not practical. *"' b. Vestibule Entry Area: Layout defined pattern as indicated with proper alignment with respect to building lines. Imprint fresh concrete surface, creating uniform texture using "slate or rock" textured mat for entire entry area. 1) Saw cut 1/4"x 1/4" deep joints within entry area in 24 inch grid pattern at 90 degrees to building lines (1/4"): 3/4" deep at control joints). Follow saw cutting method as defined within this Section. Observe minimum curing times for fresh concrete. 2) Saw cut to within 8"of perimeter wall. 2. Coloring Agents: a. Dry-Shake Method: Evenly apply color hardener in two or more applications to fresh concrete. Apply at rate of 60 pounds per 100 square feet.Wood float after each shake. b. Release Agent: Apply evenly to troweled surface before imprinting. 3. Detailing: When necessary, after concrete has set for at least 24 hours, chisel to remove marks left by imprinting tool. a. Or S-tool joints immediately,following imprinting procedure. 4. Sealer:Apply per manufacturer's requirements. 5. Protection of Work: After application and curing or sealer, cover imprinted concrete area with polyethylene. Lay panels of hardboard over polyethylene at traffic paths. Remove protection material from I* finish surfaces only after Work in the area has been completed. 6. Grout Joints: a. Allow concrete surface to cure a minimum of 3 days before grouting operations begin. b. Close area to traffic for a minimum of 12 hours after grouting operations begin. C. Cleaning Joints: 1) Construction Joints: Clean joints of dirt and debris and fill with sanded elastomeric caulking. 2) Saw Cut Joints: Clean thoroughly joints of loose dirt and debris. 3) Tooled Joints: Remove dirt, and debris from joint. Remove excess concrete material from formed joints. d. Prepare grout to a uniform consistency. e. Grout tooled joints within textured area. Tool grout joints with concave tool, slightly compressing grout. E. Troweling: 1. Delay troweling as long as possible to prevent working excess fines and water to surface. Do not begin until surface moisture film and shine remaining after floating have disappeared. 2. Power trowel using riding trowel where possible;use hand trowel in inaccessible areas. wR. 03300-11 1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 ■. L. Vibration: As soon as concrete is deposited, thoroughly agitate with mechanical vibrators and suitable hand tools ,,,, to work mixture into corners of forms and around reinforcing and embedded items. Use mechanical vibrators with minimum frequency of 9000 revolutions/minute. Do not over vibrate or use vibrators to transport concrete within forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators at approximately 18 inches apart. At each insertion,vibrate generally 5-15 seconds, sufficient to consolidate concrete but not long enough to cause segregation. Keep spare vibrator on "' job site during concrete placement operations. Do not insert vibrator into lower courses that have begun to set. M. Excessive honeycomb or embedded debris in concrete is not acceptable. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager . upon discovery. N. Pumping: Maintain controls for proportioning,mixing, adjustment of mix and placement in accordance with ACI .s 301. 1. Refer to Section 01330 for submittal requirements. 3.5 FORM REMOVAL .A. A. Do not remove forms until concrete has attained sufficient strength. Clamps or tie rods may be loosened 24 hours after concrete is placed. Ties,except for sufficient number to hold forms in place,may be removed at that time. .. B. Minimum Curing Period Prior to Form Removal: 1. Air Temperature: Above 60 degrees F: 3 days. 2. Air Temperature: 50F to 60 degrees F: 5 days. 3. Air Temperature: 40F to 50 degrees F: 7 days. 4. Air Temperature: Less than 40 degrees F: When temperature below 40 degrees F prevails, leave forms until concrete reaches 75%of 28-day design strength. C. Observance of minimum curing periods listed above does not relieve Contractor of responsibility for safety of structure during construction. D. Remove wood forms from under floors, ramps, steps, and similar places (through temporary openings if necessary)so no material will be left to rot or to be infested by termites. E. Slab Construction and Expansion Joints: Remove greased dowels prior to form removal. Immediately re-insert dowels as forms are removed. 1.6 FINISHING A. Schedule of Finishes: 1. Interior Floor Slabs: Riding machine trowel. ..v 2. Unexposed Exterior Formed Surfaces: Rough form finish. 3. Exposed Exterior Formed Surfaces: Rubbed/stoned. 4. Sidewalks: Light broom. 5. Detectable Warning Area Color Textured Concrete: Specified in Article entitled "Color Textured Concrete." 6. Ramps and Steps: Heavy broom. 7. Slabs Receiving Ceramic or Quarry Tile Flooring: Light broom. W" 8. Exterior Garden Center Slab: Light broom. 9. Vestibule Floor Slab Color Textured Concrete: Specified in Article entitled"Color Textured Concrete." .0 B. Initial Finishing: 1. Remove surface irregularities with bull float before water appears on concrete surface. 2. Do no further working of surface until time for floating;do not work surface while water is present. 3. "Dry Sprinkle"method finishing is not acceptable and will be cause for rejection. M0 am 03300-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 -4W a. Bars in Slabs and Beams: 1) Members 8 Inches Deep or Less: t 1/4 inch. 2) Members 8 Inches to T-0"Deep: f 1/2 inch. 3) Members More than T-0"Deep: t 1 inch. b. Lengthwise of Member: f 2 inches. C. Concrete Cover to Formed Surfaces: f 1/4 inch. d. Minimum Spacing Between Bars: t 1/4 inch. B. Welded Reinforcement(AWS D1.4): Do not weld reinforcement in the shop or field. 3.4 PLACING CONCRETE A. Notify Testing Laboratory minimum 48 hours prior to commencement of concreting operations. B. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 301; including hot and cold weather placement procedures. C. Inspect reinforcement, inserts, and embedded parts before beginning concrete placement to ensure accurate size and location. D. Ensure reinforcement,inserts,embedded parts and formed joints are not disturbed during concrete placement. E. Place concrete in uniform layers, horizontal, 12 to 18 inches thick, exercising care to avoid vertical joints or inclined planes. Place concrete continuously between predetermined construction joints shown on structural drawings. Piling up of concrete in forms to cause separation or loss of ingredients is not permitted. F. Place exposed concrete surfaces free of stains, including petroleum stains. Means of adequately removing petroleum stains are not available,therefore,prevention of stains is most critical. 1. No pipe cutting machinery allowed.within building line on concrete surface. eA� 2. No stock piling of steel allowed within building line on concrete surface. 3. No vehicle parking within building line on concrete surface without meeting the following requirements: a. Provide non-absorbent"drop cloths"below vehicle that will not stain surface. b. Cover hydraulic powered equipment to prevent staining of concrete surface. G. Do not deposit concrete which has partially set or hardened. Do not deposit initial lubricating mortar when pumping concrete. Remove hardened or partially hardened concrete which has accumulated on forms or reinforcement. Do not place concrete on previously deposited concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause formation of seams or planes of weakness within respective member or section except as specified. H. Deposit concrete as nearly in final position as practical to avoid rehandling. Exercise care to prevent splashing forms or reinforcing with concrete. Do not permit concrete to drop freely a distance greater than 3 feet. Where longer drops are necessary,use chute,tremie,or other conveyance to help avoid separation. a* 1. Do not deposit concrete into excavation where water is standing. If place of deposit cannot be successfully pumped dry,place through tremie with outlet end near bottom of place of deposit. w� J. Do not deposit concrete when plasticity,measured by slump test,is outside specified limits. K. Consolidate and screed concrete slabs-on-grade by use of laser screed to allow construction joint pattern as indicated on Structural Drawings and specified. Other vibratory screeding methods are acceptable only in areas where laser screed in not acceptable. t�s 03300-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 no b. For Concrete Not Exposed to Freeze-Thaw: 0.58 by wt. ,f, C. Water-cementitious material ratio may vary from above if standard State Highway Department mix design is used. Submit copy of State mix under provisions of Section 01300. 7. Concrete to be Placed by Pumping Methods a. The minimum quantity of constituent materials passing the No. 50 sieve (fine aggregate and aw cementitious materials)shall be 600 pounds per cubic yard. b. The particle size distribution of the combined fine and coarse aggregate shall be uniform from the largest to the smallest particles. An 2.10 ADMIXTURES A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (Superplasticizer) in concrete as required for placement and workability. Unless otherwise permitted, chemical admixtures shall be dispensed at the batch plant. B. Use nonchloride accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 degrees F (10 degrees Q. C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture(HRWR)in pumped concrete. M D. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior concrete exposed to weather. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content with a tolerance .. of plus or minus 1.5 percent. E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set control (accelerators and retarders) in strict compliance with .. manufacturer's directions. F. Verify with the admixture manufacturer the following: 1. The compatibility of the individual admixtures when combined in the concrete mix. .a 2. The compatibility of the individual admixtures with the concrete materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement, and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, held securely,and will not cause hardship in placing concrete. 3.2 PREPARATION w. A. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent. Apply bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not apply bonding agent at slab-on-grade construction joints. B. The base elevation shall conform to an elevation of+0"/-3/4". Prior to placing concrete,the soil support system shall be proof rolled by a loaded tandem axle dump, a loaded truck mixer, roller, or equivalent. Corrective action WW shall be taken if rutting or pumping is evident at any time during the preparation of the soil support system. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, Documents 63 and 65. 1. Accurately place and secure saddle ties at every other intersection with 16 gage black annealed wire; hold rigidly in place with metal chairs or spacers during placing of concrete. 2. Hold bars in beams and slabs to exact location during concrete placement. Use spacers, chairs, or other necessary supports with the following tolerances: wir 03300-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 ••• go D. Textured Concrete Sealer: " 1. Mix 20 parts of sealer to(1)part skid-resistant additive. a. Sealer: Solvent based concrete sealer having a minimum 25% solids similar to Concrete Sealer "B28 as manufactured by Barrier International or High Solids Clear Seal manufactured by Increte I" Systems Inc. b. Additive: "Sharkgrip" Skid-Resistant Additive by H&C distributed by Sherwin-Williams. 2.8 COLOR TEXTURED CONCRETE A. Where indicated, provide stamped concrete textures noted as "Detectable Warning Area" and "Vestibule Floor Texture." Subject to compliance with project requirements, provide concrete stamp pattern as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Bomanite Corporation,(800) 854-2,094. 2. Patterned Concrete Industries,Inc.,(800)252-4619. 3. Increte Systems Inc.,(800)752-4626. 4. Substitutions:None accepted. B. Imprint Pattern: Imprint tools listed below shall be compatible in terms of providing a dimensional transition between Warning Area and Vestibule. Subject to approval by Wal-Mart Construction Manager, provide textured finishes as follows: 1. Detectable Warning Area: 6"x 6"Granite Setts stamp. 2. Vestibule Floor Texture: 12"x 12" Slate or Rock texture mat. C. Colored Hardener: Dry-shake colored hardener. Subject to compliance with project requirements,provide colored hardener as manufactured by one of the following: 1. "Lithochrome Color Hardener"by L.M. Schofield Company,(800)800-9900. a. Detectable Warning Area:#A-21 "Deep Charcoal'. b. Vestibule Floor Color: Base#A-50"Slate Gray"with Release Agent#A-57 "Platinum". 2. "Bomanite Color Hardener"by Bomanite Corporation,(800)854-2094. a. Detectable Warning Area Color: #B-2, "Cobblestone Gray" with Release Agent #A-3 "Natural Gray". b. Vestibule Floor Color: Base#B-13 "Chargreen"with Release Agent#A-3 "Natural Gray". 3. "Increte Systems Color Hardener"by Increte Systems,Inc.,(800)752-4626. a. Detectable Warning Area: "Gray". b. Vestibule Floor Color: Base"Muted Slate"with Release Agent"Pewter". 2.9 CONCRETE MIX A. Mix and deliver concrete in accordance with ASTM C94. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by the laboratory trial batch or the field experience method as specified in ACI 301. B. Provide concrete with the following characteristics: 0. 1. 28 Day Compressive Strength: a. 3000 psi for all concrete except exterior concrete and Vestibule Concrete.. b. 3500 psi for exterior concrete and Vestibule Concrete. 2. Air Content: a. For Concrete Exposed to Weather: 6 percent,plus or minus 1.5 percent. b. For Concrete Not Exposed to Weather: Not to exceed 4 percent. Do not add air entraining agents. 3. Fly Ash: Maximum 20 percent of total cement content. 4. Slump for Conventionally Placed Concrete: Not to exceed 5 inches. 5. Slump for Pumped Concrete: Not to exceed 7 inches at the point of discharge from the pipe or hose after pumping. HRWR admixture(superplasticizer)required. 6. Maximum Water-Cementitious Material Ratio(Cement Quantity Includes Fly Ash): a. For Concrete Exposed to Freeze-Thaw: 0.46 by wt.. 03300-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 WP 3. Construction Grout;by Master Builders,Inc.;(800)227-3350. Am 4. Sonogrout;by Sonneborn Building Products(ChemRex Inc.);(800)433-9517. 5. Certi-Vex Grout#1000,by Vexcon Chemicals,Inc.,(888)839-2661. 6. Enduro 50,by Conspec Marketing&Manufacturing,(800)348-7351. Aw B. Epoxy Bonding Agent: ASTM C881. 1. Euco#452 or Eucopoxy LPL;by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. 2. EVA-PDX Epoxy Paste No.22;by E-Poxy Industries,Inc.;(800) 833-3400. 3. Concresive Liquid LPL);by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. 4. Uniweld;by Permagile Industries,Inc.; (800)645-7546. 5. EMACO P-24,by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. C. Expansion Joint Fillers: 1. Asphalt Impregnated Fiberboard: ASTM D1751, 1/2 inch thick,unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. 2. Extruded Polystyrene Insulation Board: ASTM C578,Type IV(density 1.6 pcf minimum), 1/2 inch thick. OW D. Control/Construction Joint Fillers: 1. Interior Exposed Concrete Slabs: See Section 03150. 2. Concrete Slabs Receiving Floor Finish: See Section 09650. MW E. Bond Breaker: ASTM D226,No. 15,unperforated asphalt saturated felt. no F. Leveling Compound: 1. Ardex V-900,by Ardex Engineered Cements;Contact:Jesse David, (412)264-4240. 2. Flo-Top;by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. 3. SikaTop Overlay System;by Sika Corporation, (201)933-8800. .r. 4. Thoro Underlayment Self-Leveling including Thoro Primer#800;by Thoro System Products, (800) 327- 1570. 5. Certi-Vex SLU TC including EnvioBond A Primer,by Vexcon Chemicals,Inc.,(888)839-2661. .• 6. Conflow including Primeflow,by Conspec Marketing&Manufacturing,(800)348-7351. 7. MASTERTOP 110 UNDERLAYMENT, by Master Builders,Inc. (800)227-3350. G. Evaporation Retardant: 1. CONFILM,by Master Builders,Inc. (800)227-3350. 2.7 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS A. Curing/Sealing/Densifying Compound for Slabs: See Section 03360 MW B. Curing/Sealing Compound for Slabs: Acrylic formula,ASTM C309. 1. Dress&Seal WB;by L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc.; (800)362-3331. 2. Kure-N-Seal-WB;by Sonneborn Building Products;(800)433-9517. 3. Vexcon StarSeal 1315,by Vexcon Chemicals,Inc.,(888)839-2661. 4. MASTERCURE N-Seal-W,by Master Builders,Inc.(800)227-3350. 5. High Seal,by Conspec Marketing&Manufacturing,(800)348-7351. 6. Substitutions: None accepted. ,. C. Moisture Cure: 1. Water: Potable. 2. Moisture-retaining Coverings: Burlap, cotton mats, or other moisture-retaining fabrics; AASHTO M182, ASTM C171, or AASHTO M73. Provide burlap free of sizing; rinse thoroughly in caustic soda to remove soluble substances and make burlap more absorbent. ..R 03300-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 • C. Fly Ash: ASTM C618,Type C or F,maximum 4 percent loss in ignition. D. Water: Clean potable water,not detrimental to concrete. 'a 2.5 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Chemical Admixtures,General: 1. Admixtures containing calcium chloride or more than 0.05 percent chloride ions or more than 0.03 percent thiocyanate ions by weight of cement are not permitted. 2. Maximum water soluble chloride ion content in hardened concrete at 28 days: Not to exceed 0.15 percent by weight of cement. B. Air Entrainment: ASTM C260. 1. Air-Mix or Perma-Air,by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. ,� 2. MB-VR MB-AE 90,or Micro-Air,by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. 3. Sika AER,by Sika Corp.,(800)631.7270. 4. Daravair or Darex Series,by W.R. Grace and Co.,(713)223-8353. "~ C. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494,Type A. 1. Eucon WR-75,by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. 2. Pozzolith by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. 3. Plastocrete 161,by Sika Corp.,(800)631-7270. 4. WRDA or Daracem Series,by W.R.Grace and Co.,(713)223-8353. D. Chloride-Free,Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494,Type C. 1. Accelguard 80,by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. 2. Plastocrete 161FL,by Sika Corp.,(800)631-7270. 3. Certi-Vex Triple Set NC,by Vexcon Chemicals,Inc.,(888)839-2661. 4. Pozzutec 20,by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. 5. Pozzolith 534 NC by Master Builders, Inc.,(800)227-3350. E. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C494,Type D. 1. Eucon Retarder 75,by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. 2. Pozzolith by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. 3. Plastiment,by Sika Corp.,(800)631-7270. 4. Daratard 17,by W.R.Grace and Co.,(713)223-8353. F. Chloride-Free,Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C494,Type E. 1. Accelguard 80,by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. 2. PolarSet,by W.R.Grace and Co.,(713)223-8353. 3. Certi-Vex Triple Set NC,by Vexcon Chemicals,Inc.,(888)839-2661. 4. Pozzutec 20,by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. G. High-Range,Water Reducing Admixture(Superplasticizer): ASTM C494,Type F or Type G. 1. Eucon 37,by Euclid Chemical Co.,(800)321-7628. 2. PolyHeed by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. 3. Rheobuild 1000,by Master Builders,Inc.,(800)227-3350. 4. Sikament 300,by Sika Corp.,(800)631-7270. 5. Daracem Series,by W.R. Grace and Co.,(713)223-8353. �u► 2.6 RELATED MATERIALS A. Non-shrink Grout: Pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout, COE CRD-621; compressive strength of 5000 psi in 28 days. 1. Euco-N-S Grout;by Euclid Chemical Company;(800)321-7628. 2. Duragrout;by L&M Construction Chemicals,Inc.;(800)362-3331. 03300-5 llr Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 3. Execute special precautions to protect fresh concrete before and during finishing when the rate of .o evaporation of surface moisture from concrete exceeds 0.2 pounds per square foot per hour. Determine rate of evaporation in accordance with ACI 305R. Provide special precautions as required: a. Cool ingredients before mixing to reduce concrete temperature at time of placement. Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control the concrete temperature provided the water Aw equivalent of the ice is calculated to the total amount of mixing water. b. Dampen subgrade and forms. C. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap so the steel temperature will not exceed the mo ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. 4. When high temperature and/or placing conditions dictate, the concrete supplier may request use of water- reducing retarding admixture (Type D) in lieu of water-reducing admixture (Type A), subject to approval me from the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMWORK A. Design, engineer, and construct forms, shores, bracing, and other temporary supports to support loads imposed during construction. Design under the direct supervision of a licensed Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work. 1. Plywood: PS 1,sound,undamaged sheets with straight edges. 2. Lumber: Construction grade. .� 3. Steel: Minimum 16 gage sheet,well matched,tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. 4. Carton Forms: Moisture resistant treated paper faces, biodegradable, structurally sufficient to support weight of wet concrete until initial set. B. Accessories: 1. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off metal,of fixed or adjustable length as applicable,with cone ends. ..� 2. Form Release Agent: VOC compliant, colorless mineral oil which will not stain concrete. Provide one of the following or an equivalent product: a. Certi-Vex FRN VOC or Certi-Vex Enviro Strip,by Vexcon Chemicals,Inc.,(888) 839-2661. b. Enviroform by Conspec Marketing&Manufacturing,(800)348-7351. 3. Waterstops: Select one of the following. a. Volclay RX-101;by American Colloid Company;Arlington Heights,IL;(708)392-4600. b. Synko-Flex;by Synko-Flex Products(Division of Henry Company);Houston,TX;(800)231-4551. , 2.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615;60 ksi yield grade billet-steel deformed bars,uncoated finish. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type. B. Manufactured Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of «r reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150 -Type I. If reactive aggregates are available in the area,use low alkali cement containing less than 60 percent alkalis. ow B. Fine and Coarse Aggregate: Use gradation for fine and coarse aggregate per ASTM C33,but not larger than 1-1/2 inches;except building slabs-on-grade use 1 inch maximum; for pumped concrete use maximum aggregate size of 1/3 the inside diameter of the hose or pipe. 03300-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 „� C. Chemical Admixtures: Permitted only when adverse weather conditions are anticipated. Use of admixtures is subject to Wal-Marts approval. 1. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager at Pre-Bid Conference if admixtures will be used in concrete. 2. Provide Wal-Mart Construction Manager with proposed Construction Schedule identifying anticipated adverse weather conditions justifying use of admixtures. D. Delivery, Storage And Handling: 1. Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents. 2. Store powdered materials in dry area and in manner to prevent damage. Protect liquid materials from freezing. E. Imprinted Concrete Installer: Company qualified in patterned concrete and trained by imprinting tool manufacturer. F. Textured Concrete Field Samples: 1. Prepare a reference sample,minimum 24"x 24",before proceeding with Work. 2. Once accepted by Wal-Mart Constriction Manager, store sample on site as directed. 04 1.6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Cold Weather Concreting: Perform work in accordance with ACI 306R during cold weather concreting operations. 1. Comply with the following for minimum temperature of concrete delivered to job site: a. Air Temperature 30-45 degrees F: Concrete temperature 60 degrees F minimum. b. Air Temperature 0-30 degrees F: Concrete temperature 65 degrees F minimum. no C. Air Temperature below 0 degrees F: Concrete temperature 70 degrees F minimum. d. Maximum concrete temperature: Not to exceed the minimum required temperature by more than 10 degrees F. 2. Combine water heated to above 100 degrees F with aggregates before cement is added. Do not add cement to water or aggregates having temperature greater than 100 degrees F. 3. When temperatures of 40 degrees F or lower occur during the placing and curing of concrete, maintain temperature of concrete at not less than 55 degrees F for at least 3 days. "' a. Make arrangements before placement to maintain required temperature without damage from excessive heat. b. Do not use combustion heaters during first 48 hours without precautions to prevent exposure of concrete to exhaust gases containing carbon dioxide and carbon monoxide. 4. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength which could be caused by frost, freezing actions,or low temperatures,in compliance with the requirements of ACI 306R and as herein specified. 5. When the air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F,provide adequate means to maintain the temperature of the plastic concrete as placed, at 60 degrees F minimum, for at least 3 days. Provide temporary housings or coverings including tarpaulins or plastic film. Keep protection in place and intact at least 24 hours after artificial heat is discontinued. Avoid rapid dry-out of concrete due to overheating,and avoid thermal shock due to sudden cooling or heating. 6. Do not use frozen materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. Ascertain that forms, reinforcing steel, and adjacent concrete surfaces are entirely free of frost, snow, and ice and temperature of these materials is above 32 degrees F before placing concrete. 7. Use specified non-corrosive, non-chloride accelerator. Calcium chloride, thiocyanates or admixtures containing more than 0.05 percent chloride ions are not permitted. B. Hot Weather Concreting: Perform work in accordance with ACI 305R. 1. When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305R and as herein specified. 2. Temperature of concrete at time of placing: Not to exceed 90 degrees F. Maintain an accurate reading thermometer at the job site to check temperature of concrete. Reject concrete before placing if temperature of concrete exceeds 90 degrees F. 03300-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 13. ASTM C 172- Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 14. ASTM C 173 -Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 15. ASTM C231 -Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete By the Pressure Method. 16. ASTM C260-Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 17. ASTM C309-Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete. ... 18. ASTM C494-Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 19. ASTM C578- Specification for Preformed,Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation. 20. ASTM C618 - Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral ,.w Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 21. ASTM C881 -Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete. 22. ASTM D226-Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 23. ASTM D698 - Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort .w (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3). 24. ASTM D1751 - Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction. 25. ASTM D2240-Test Method for Rubber Property-- Durometer Hardness. P 26. ASTM E1155 - Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using the F-Number System (Inch-Pound Units). sus C. American Welding Society(AWS): AWS DIA-Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel. D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI): 1. CRSI-Manual of Standard Practice. 2. CRSI 63 -Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars. 3. CRSI 65 -Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports,Specifications and Nomenclature. AM E. Product Standard(PS): Construction and Industrial Plywood with Typical APA Trademarks. F. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO): 06 1. AASHTO M182. 2. AASHTO M73. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01330-Submittal Procedures: Procedures for Submittals 1.4 TESTING A. Section 01458 -Testing Laboratory Services. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following codes, specifications, and standards, except where .s more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. 3. CRSI-Manual of Standard Practice. ' B. Pumped Concrete: 1. Submit documented evidence of experience in placing concrete by pumping on not less than three projects A& of similar size and complexity. List available pump size,standby pump size,piping,and other equipment. 2. Submit documented evidence of concrete supplier's ability to dedicate sufficient mixing and delivery equipment to supply the concrete continuously for the volumes to be placed by pumping. Im .. 03300-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 „A, UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE NO PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Formwork,shoring,bracing,and anchorage. 2. Reinforcement and accessories. 3. Cast-in-place concrete, including sidewalks adjacent to building, light pole foundations and equipment pads. 4. Textured Concrete. 5. Curing and finishing. 6. Grout, for setting and anchoring items in masonry and concrete. 7. Expansion joint fillers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03150 - Concrete Accessories: Joint filler for control/construction joints in interior exposed concrete floor slabs. 2. Section 03360-Concrete Finishes: Application of siliconate sealer,hardener,densifier floor finish. 3. Section 05120-Structural Steel: Column anchor bolts. 4. Section 05500-Metal Fabrications: Other metal components cast into concrete. 5. Section 07900-Joint Sealers: Joint sealant for expansion joints in exterior concrete slabs and sidewalks. 6. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring: Joint filler for control/construction joints concealed by floor finish material. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute(ACI): 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specification for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials - Floor profile finish using the straight edge method. 2. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ACI 302-Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction. 4. ACI 304.2R-Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods. 5. ACI 305R-Hot Weather Concreting. 6. ACI 306R-Cold Weather Concreting. 7. ACI 308 -Standard Practice for Curing Concrete. 8. ACI 315 -Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. 9. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary. 10. ACI 347-Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. B. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A82-Specification for Steel Wire,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement. e� 2. ASTM A185-Specification for Stec;l Welded Wire Fabric,Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement. 3. ASTM A615-Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 4. ASTM C31 -Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 5. ASTM C33 -Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 6. ASTM C39-Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 7. ASTM C42-Test Method of Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete. 8. ASTM C94-Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete. 9. ASTM C 13 8-Test Method for Unit Weight,Yield,and Air Content(Gravimetric)of Concrete. 10. ASTM C143-Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 11. ASTM C 15 0-Specification for Portland Cement. 12. ASTM C171 -Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete. 03300-1 OR Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Choke off shrinkage crack at bottom of control/construction joints. 1. Saw Cut Control Joints: Use one of the following methods: a. Place 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch(maximum)layer of dry-bagged silica sand. b. Insert Spal-Pro Rod, as manufactured by Metzger/McGuire, to bottom of cut. Rod shall be over- sized to fit snugly in joint. Do not use compressible backer. ^� 2. Construction Joints Through Slab: Use one of the following methods: a. Fill joint with dry-bagged silica sand to depth of 2 inches of slab surface. b. Insert Spal-Pro Rod,as manufactured by Metzger/McGuire,to depth of 2 inches below slab surface. Do not use compressible backer rod. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Do not proceed with installation until Contractor has verified that joints have been cleaned and prepared as speci- fied. B. Mix joint filler in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. C. Fill joint using two pass method. On first pass fill to within 1/2 inch of slab surface. Allow filler to cure for 30 to 60 minutes,while filler is still liquid and tacky make second pass. "" D. Filler shall cure flush with surface. If slightly crowned,shave excess flush with surface within 12 to 24 hours. .w 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Joint filler installed to a depth less than specified in this Section shall be removed and replace at no cost to the Owner. During installation, the Contractor shall drill random holes through filler and measure depth. Take one random measurement per 500 linear feet of filler. B. Joint filler installed over compressible backer rod shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION A 4" ww am 03150-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. UniSpec II 102999 SECTION 03150-CONCRETE ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preparing joint filler substrate surfaces. 2. Joint filler for interior exposed concrete slab control/construction joints. Isolation joints between concrete slab and vertical surfaces are excluded from this Section. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete slab materials and accessories. 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide joint filler that is approved by the United States Department of Agriculture for use in food service areas, as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. 6W 1.3 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store joint filler material in manufacturer's labeled,unopened containers. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Metzger/McGuire;Concord,NH; (800)223-6680. B. Sika Corporation,Lyndhurst,NJ;(800)933-7452. C. Dayton Superior;Oregon,IL;(815)732-3136. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Epoxy Joint Filler: Two-part liquid, 100 percent solids epoxy resin. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide epoxy joint filler as manufactured by one of the following: 1. Spal-Pro XL,by Metzger/McGuire. 2. Sikadur 51 SL,by Sika. 3. Poxy-Fil(J-52),by Dayton Superior. B. Color: provide color to match concreteIntegrally colored concrete : Match"Mocha Brown"by LM SchofieldOther Exposed Concrete: Concrete gray C. Substitutions: Not Permitted. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Loosen embedded debris and saw laitance in joint using narrow tool or dustless saw/grinder. Remove curing and sealing compounds using dustless saw/grinder. B. Clear loosed matter from joint by blowing out or vacuuming. If debris is damp,allow joint to dry for 24 hours. 03150-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Optics that will sharply restrict any back light behind the luminaire(house side). Light is directed forward (street side)and equally on both sides of the luminaire (bi-laterally symmetric about the luminaire across axis). d) Type V Square (Vertical Lamp) Optics that produce a symmetrical (quadrilateral)square light distribution pattern about the luminaire across and along axis. Optical types I, III and IV(Forward Throw)are used to effectively cover odd-shaped areas. Optical assemblies that produce round light distribution patterns are not acceptable. Wal-Mart Engineering shall be the sole judge regarding acceptability of optical system performance. +w See section 1.05 D for specific optical type performance. J. BALLAST and BALLAST HOUSING Premium type ballast that will provide power for only 1 (one)metal halide lamp, capable of reliable lamp starting at temperatures as low as-20 degrees Fahrenheit and shall have minimum power factor of 90 percent, Super CWA pulse start type± 10 percent lamp power regulation with + 10 percent variation from 480 volt, single phase, input voltage. Assembly shall be easily accessible and removable with quick disconnects to reflector. K. AREA LIGHTING LAMPS 1000 watt; 110,000 initial lumen; 15,000 hour; clear BT37 reduced envelope pulse start metal halide (vertical base-up). PART 3 INSTALLATION 1. Provide labor, material, and energy to conduct parking lot lighting test at least 30 days prior to Substantial Completion date. Test shall consist of continuous operation of luminaires and lamps for time period of 100 hours. Witness and certify continuous operation and time duration of test. At end of testing period, immediately request warranty parts and replace defective components at least 3 days prior to Substantial Completion date. 2. The Contractor shall Install lighting poles, anchor bolts, luminaires, lamps, and apply touch-up paint.T 3. The Contractor shall Furnish and Install the parking lot electrical system in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documentation. 4. The Contractor shall Furnish and Install a ground rod and required bonding at each concrete pole foundation in accordance with the specific details shown on the Construction Drawings. 5. The Contractor shall Furnish and Install the concrete foundations in accordance with the specific details shown on the Contract Drawings. End of Section 16530 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 8/19/1999 16525-6 Specification Name: 1000 Watt SITE LIGHTING electrostatically applied and cured in a gas fired convection oven by heating the steel substrate to a minimum of 350 degrees Fahrenheit and a maximum of 400 degrees Fahrenheit. 3. Interior Coating: A minimum of 2' (feet)at the base end of the pole shaft shall be blast cleaned and powder coated with a minimum of 2 mils of exterior coating applied per specifications. A minimum of 6' (feet)at the base end of the pole shall be coasted with a hydrocarbon resin coating formulated for application over untreated surfaces. 4. Field Touch-up: An matching Acrylic Enamel or Polyurethane touch-up kit shall be included to repair an scratches in the pole's coating. 5. Wrapping Materials: I rl Prior to shipment poles all poles will be entirely wrapped as per the pole manufacturers suggested method. The Site Lighting Vendor will be responsible for the arrival of poles on site in an undamaged condition. Cutting instruments (i.e. knives)are strictly prohibited for means of removing packaging material. G. MATERIAL CERTIFICATIONS All raw materials, and manufacturing process to form, shape, cut, or weld, said materials, shall be produced in North America to be considered of domestic origin. They shall be of the ASTM type as called forth in this specification. Mill certifications shall be supplied for proof of compliance to this specification. H. LUMINAIRES 1. SITE LIGHTING SEMI-CUTOFF LUMINAIRES Luminaires shall be fabricated from one piece die cast aluminum or from formed and welded aluminum housing. Assembled to form weather and bug proof unit. Injected silicone used as a weatherproofing seal shall not be directly exposed to sunlight and shall not be the sole means to prevent water intrusion. All exposed surfaces shall have an electrostatically applied thermally cured polyester powder finish. Color shall be black. Sag lens of vertical lamp units shall be constructed of a one piece, impact resistant, clear tempered glass. Sag lens frame shall be mitered, extruded, anodized aluminum with stainless steel spring loaded latches and hinge pins or securing screws. Flat lens frame shall be mitered, extruded, anodized aluminum with stainless steel hinge and latch pins. Lens frame assemblies and housing shall be sealed by memory retentive silicon rubber gasketing to exclude moisture, dust, insects and pollutants. Screwdriver r only access is required to both optic chamber and ballast. Every luminaire shall be electrically tested before shipment from factory. Luminaire shall have lamp installed or packaged in optical chamber as of shipment from factory. Luminaire arm bolts shall be 304 stainless steel or zinc plated steel. Luminaire arm shall have either an internal extruded bolt alignment channel with an integral hand hole and cover for the field wiring connections or cast as an integral part of the luminaire assembly with electrical connection from the pole top. Each luminaire shall bear the UL label for wet location. I. LUMINAIRE OPTICAL ASSEMBLY 1. AREA LIGHTING SEMI-CUTOFF LUMINAIRES One universal"outdoor cutoff luminaire" housing shall be capable of containing the following general optical systems without modification and each optical system shall be field interchangeable and rotatable in 90 degree increments with only a screwdriver. a) Type I Optics that produce a long narrow light distribution pattern that disperse light equally on both sides of luminaire (bi-laterally symmetric about luminaire across and along axis). b) Type III Optics that produce an asymmetrical light distribution pattern that directs the majority of the light in front(street side)of the luminaire and equally on both sides of the luminaire (bi-laterally symmetric about the luminaire across axis). C) Type IV (Forward Throw) Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 8/19/1999 16525-5 Specification Name: 1000 Watt SITE LIGHTING .N PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. POLE DESIGN Pole shaft, base plate, and anchor bolts, shall be designed in accordance requirements of(current) 1985 AASHTO "Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires and Traffic Signals". Loading shall be based on the appropriate isotach wind velocity of 120 mph times a 1.3 gust factor with the effective projected area (EPA)and weight of 3 (three) 1000 watt vertical burn luminaires. The design stresses shall include the additional stresses resulting from eccentricity caused by deflections of all design loads, including deflections caused by eccentricity of these loads per AASHTO 1.3.3 (A) (2). B. POLE SHAFT The pole shall be one piece, 38'-9" long, round, and shall have a constant linear taper. The pole shaft shall be manufactured with a single ply minimum wall thickness of 11-gauge (.1196"). Circumferential welded splices, or two piece telescoping sections shall not be permitted. The pole shaft shall be made of high strength steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A595 Grade-A with a guaranteed minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi after fabrication. The pole shall have a seamless appearing, visually pleasing uniform weld. A nominal 4"(inch)X 6.5" (inch) hand hole frame shall be welded into the pole at 1.5' (feet) from it's base and shall be provided with a cover. The pole shall be drilled properly to accept the maximum number of specified luminaires. All unused pre-drilled holes shall be plugged weathertight. C. POLE BASE PLATES The base plate shall be of steel meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM A36. It shall be integrally welded to the pole shaft utilizing a telescopic weld. The base plate shall be slotted to accommodate a plus or minus 1/2"(inch)variation in the nominal bolt circle. All base plates shall have a 12.5"bolt circle(for consistency)for all pole designs. D. ANCHOR BOLTS The anchor bolts shall meet the requirement of ASTM F1554 Grade-55, having a minimum yield strength of 55,000 psi. The bolts shall have an°L" bend on one end and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 specifications for a minimum of 8"(in.)on the threaded end. Four anchor bolts shall be provided per pole. Each anchor bolt shall be furnished with 2 (two) hex nuts, 2 (two)flat washers galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153 specifications The strength of the nuts shall equal or exceed the proof load of the anchor bolts. Anchor bolts shall have minimum dimensions of 1.25"(in.)of diameter, 42" (in.)of length, and 6"(in.)of hook(for consistency)for all pole designs. Each pole shall be provided with an aluminum base cover powder coated to match the finish of the pole. E. WELDING Welding shall be in accordance with AWS (American Welding Society)or CWB (Canadian Welding Bureau)"Structural Welding" (the most recent publication). Welding shall only be performed by robotic welding process or welders formally trained and certified in accordance with AWS or CWB specifications. F. COATING 1. Surface Preparation: The exterior steel surface is blast cleaned to Steel Painting Council Surface Preparation AW Specification No. 6 (SSPC-SP6)or"near white"Specification No.10 (SSPC-SP10)requirements. The inside steel surface shall be cleaned to SSPC-SP3 requirements a minimum of 2'(feet)at the base end of the pole. 2. Exterior Coating: All exterior surfaces shall be coated with a Triglycidyl Isocyanurate (TGIC)or"super durable" Polyester Powder to a minimum dry film thickness of 3.0 mils. The coating shall be Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 8/19/1999 16525-4 Specification Name: 1000 Watt SITE LIGHTING s C. PAVEMENT ILLUMINATION UNIFORMITY 1. TYPICAL STANDARD SPACING ANALYSIS GRIDS VERTICAL LAMP LUMINAIRE ASSEMBLIES The 4 (four)pole analysis shall produce a Maximum-to-Minimum uniformity ratio of not greater than 6-to-1 and an Average-to-Minimum uniformity ratio of not greater than 2-to-1. 2. OVEF:ALL PARKING STANDARD SPACING LAYOUT ANALYSIS VERTICAL LAMP LUMINAIRE ASSEMBLIES The site lighting layout shall produce a Maximum-to-Minimum uniformity ratio of not greater than 10-to-1 and an Average-to-Minimum uniformity ratio of not greater than 3-to- 1 in accordance with I.E.S.visual comfort and lighting safety recommendations. (Site lighting uniformity shall not include facade lighting and/or building security lighting.) D. SEMI-CUTOFF LUMINAIRE PERFORMANCE VERTICAL LAMP LUMINAIRE Optics that produce a symmetrical (quadrilateral)square light distribution pattern about the luminaire across and along axis,which meets the following requirements. "► Control downward within the lighted area: The optical system shall produce a candlepower peak(maximum intensity)of not less than 213 candela per 1000 rated lamp lumens at 65 degrees vertical and 35 degrees lateral from luminaires across and along axis. Nadir candlepower shall not exceed 79 candela per 1000 rated lamp lumens. The total downward coefficient of utilization for the ' luminaire shall not be less than 66%. 1.06 SUBMITTALS When required by the Owner, each submittal transmitted for approval shall contain: A. Computer generated photometric analysis of proposed lighted area layout which indicates the site lighting Ilk system performance by point horizontal footcandle readings at grade and compliance with section 1.05 C. 2. Analysis points shall not be greater than 25' (feet)on center. 1 B. Computer generated photometric analysis of proposed lighted area typical sections which indicates area lighting and building security lighting system performance by point horizontal footcandle readings at grade and compliance with sections 1.05 B./C1 and 1.07 B./C1. Analysis points shall not be greater than 5' (feet)on center. C. A Cutoff luminaire performance (photometric)report with laboratory name, report number,date, luminaire catalog number, luminaire and lamp specifications. Report shall contain I.E.S. Cutoff and Roadway Type classifications, candlepower tabulations, zonal lumen summary and iso footcandle diagram. D. The Underwriters Laboratory listing and file number for the specific luminaire(s)to be utilized. E. Pole Manufacturer AASHTO calculations indicating the poles and anchor bolts being submitted are capable of st,pporting the pole and luminaire systems being utilized in accordance with specifications. G. Catalog specification sheets proving complete conformance to specifications. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Unless otherNise indicated on Construction Drawings or in Special Conditions to Contract, Owner(or Developer as directed by the Owner in the case of a Joint Development Agreement project)will furnish lighting poleE, anchor bolts, luminaires, lamps, and touch-up paint for installation by Contractor. B. Owner will furnish and erect signage for illuminated canopy, automotive, pylon, and mall entrance signs. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 8/19/1999 16525-3 Specification Name: 1000 Watt SITE LIGHTING .■ OR B. Owner reserves the right to request standard production model luminaire samples for inspection and to order such tests as Owner deems necessary to insure compliance with this Section and to reject those , luminaires failing such tests, or those luminaires with improper or inadequate light distribution. Wal-Mart Engineering shall be sole judge regarding acceptability of optical system performance. C. Wal-Mart reserves the right to take field measurements to confirm lighting levels. If light levels do not meet specification, the luminaire manufacturer shall provide additional luminaires to achieve specified light 00 1 levels. The cost for additional luminaires and poles, if required, including material and labor to install the same, shall be the responsibility of the luminaire manufacturer. Additionally, the luminaire manufacturer shall reimburse Wal-Mart for additional energy costs as a result of the additional luminaires. D. Wal-Mart reserves the right to request independent testing of site luminaires, installed at least 6 months prior to the bid date, to verify luminaire performance. Luminaires must be identical to bid luminaire,which must comply with the specification. 1.05 SITE LIGHTING SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. GENERAL Semi-Cutoff luminaire(s)to be utilized shall meet the I.E.S. defined "semi-cutoff'classification requirements. An"Outdoor Semi-Cutoff Luminaire" is defined by the following I.E.S. limitations on light distribution. 1. At any lateral angle around the luminaire, candlepower at the angle of 80 degrees vertical, shall 4 not exceed 200 candela per 1000 rated lamp lumens. 2. At any lateral angle around the luminaire, candlepower at the angle of 90 degrees vertical, shall Am not exceed 50 candela per 1000 rated lamp lumens. See Section 2.01 1. 1.for specific optical type descriptions. B. TYPICAL STANDARD SPACING FOUR POLE ANALYSIS GRIDS 1. VERTICAL LAMP AREA LIGHTING The optical system specified herein shall be capable of maintaining a minimum of 1.8 horizontal to footcandles measured at grade for paved walking and driving surfaces based on a 2 (two) luminaire mounting configuration with vertical lamp optics,which produce a symmetric (square) distribution pattern, at a mounting height of 42' (feet)within a 4 (four) pole grid with pole spacing of 186' (feet)fixed X 186' (feet). All point-by-point photometric performance test grids shall be based on the following criteria: Maintenance Factor=0.75 Mounting Height=42' (feet) Grid = 1"= 10' (points on 5'centers)-all points between 4 (four) poles (1,521 points). (Including point at grid midpoint) Vertical Lamp Lumens = 110,000 lumens minimum initial (each of 2 lamps per pole) Analysis Grid Results: (calculations by Lumen-Point software) a) 3.3 Footcandle Average b) 1.8 Footcandle Minimum C) 10.0 Footcandle Maximum d) 6.0 Maximum-to-Minimum Uniformity e) 1.8 Average-to-Minimum Uniformity 2. HORIZONTAL LAMP AREA LIGHTING Horizonal burn 1000 watt lamps are not permitted. AW Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 8/19/1999 16525-2 Specification Name: 1000 Watt SITE LIGHTING SECTION 16525 SITE LIGHTING 1000 Watt Pulse Start Technology PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of exterior luminaires and accessories, installation and touch-up of poles, underground conduit, wiring, concrete foundation ground rod installation,,system bonding, terminations and final system testing and documentation. B. Installation of concrete pole foundations. C. Installation of underground conduit, wires, and controls for illuminated pylon sign. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS', A. Section 0222:2 -Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities B. Section 03300-Cast-in-Place Concrete (See Architectural/Building Specifications) C. Section 16950- Electrical Systems Testing (See Architectural/Building Specifications) D. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) latest edition ANSI C78.373 Electric Lamps - Incandescent and High-Intensity-Discharge Reflector Lamps- Classification of Beam Patterns. ANSI C82.4 Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple Supply Type). B. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) latest edition NFPA 70 National Electrical Code C. Illuminating Engineering Society(IES)of North America IES RP-8 Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting. IES RP-20 Recommend Practice for Parking Facilities. IES LM-36 Method for Testing Floodlights Using Discharge Lamps. IES Lighting Handbook- Eighth Edition (1993) D. American So;iety for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition A 36 Structural Steel A 307 Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 psi Tensile Strength A 595 Steel Tubes, Low-Carbon, Tapered for Structural Use 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 111 X A. Provide Owner with 1 (one)year warranty certificate signed by Contractor and by company providing Q actual warranty labor. Certificate must be received by Owner prior to final payment. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 8/19/1999 16525-1 Specification Name: 1000 Watt SITE LIGHTING u A* BLANK PAGEp y 1. Wh an cold weather approaches and chance for freezing conditions exist, the irrigation system should be drained after each use. 2. Winterization procedure as follows: a. Shut water off at main gate valve b. Open manual drain valves C. Blow out each section twice with compressed air d. Set controller to cycle through each section minimum time available, once each day through Winter months e. If backflow preventor is installed with unions, remove and store out of weather. L. Spring stars up: Spring start up procedure as follows: 1. Reinstall backflow prevention 2. Clcse manual drain valves 3. Slcwly turn water on 4. Ch ack for leaks and proper alignment of heads 5. Repair and adjust system as required for proper operation M. Component replacement: If replacement of component parts becomes necessary after normal use, and after original warranty has expired, Owner is responsible for expense of replacements, if there has been no mishandling of these items on part of landscape maintenance contractor. N. Terminatioii of maintenance contract: 1. If Owner fails to make payment for period of 90 days without written clarification, landscape maintenance contractor may, upon 12 additional days written notice to Owner,terminate contract and recover from Owner, payment for work executed and for proven loss sustained upon materials, equipment, or tools, including reasonable profit and damages applicable to Maintenance Contract. 2. If landscape maintenance contractor defaults, persistently fails, or neglects to carry out work in accordance with Maintenance Contract, Owner, after 12 days written notice to landscape maintenance contractor, and without prejudice to any other remedy Owner may have, may make good such deficiencies and deduct cost, including compensation for additional services made necessary,from payment due landscape maintenance contractor, or Owner may terminate Maintenance Contract. END OF SECTION 02900 fi Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-11 Specification Name: PLANT NG Remove rubbish,waste, tools, and equipment used at end of each workday. Other procedures consistent with good horticultural practice necessary to insure vigorous, healthy growth of plant material are also part of Maintenance Contract. 3. During first year of Maintenance Contract, replacement of plant material shall be responsibility of Contractor with exceptions as listed herein. 4. Landscape maintenance contractor shall purchase and maintain Contractor's general liability insurance in amount of$1,000,000 for protection from Contractor's operations under Maintenance Contract. Certification of such insurance shall be filed with Owner prior to commencement of work. B. Watering 1. Irrigation system shall be used by landscape maintenance contractor for watering. Failure rrr of system does not eliminate landscape maintenance contractor's responsibility of maintaining desired level of moisture necessary to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. 2. Water shall be applied each time sufficient to penetrate soil to minimum depth of 8-inches in shrub beds and 6-inches in turf areas at rate that will prevent saturation of soil. 3. On-site water shall be furnished by Owner. Contractor shall furnish hose and other watering equipment. C. Weeding: Landscape maintenance contractor shall keep areas free from weeds and undesirable grasses by approved methods and materials . D. Disease and insect pest control: Inspect plant material at least once each month to locate any disease or insect pest infestations. Upon discovery of infestation, nature or species of infestation shall be identified. Control in accordance with industry standards shall be immediately implemented. E. Fertilizing: Landscape maintenance contractor is to fertilize on regularly scheduled program to-fit requirements of plant material to maintain vigorous, healthy growth. F. Pruning and repair: Amount of pruning shall be limited to minimum necessary to remove dead or injured branches, to compensate for loss of roots as result of transplanting operations, and to maintain safety in traveled areas. Pruning shall be done to not change the natural habit or shape of plant. Cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. G. Mowing: Mow grass areas at regular intervals to keep grass height from exceeding 3-inches. Mow in such manner as to prevent clippings from blowing onto paved areas and sidewalks. Cleanup + after mowing shall include sweeping or blowing to clear mowing debris. H. Clean up: During course of maintenance, excess and waste materials shall be continuously and promptly removed at end of each workday. I. Maintenance report and schedule of activities: Landscape maintenance contractor shall provide schedule and report to Owner that details planned maintenance activities including names of any +tr subcontractors. J. General Irrigation: ,f, 1. After Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement has expired, landscape maintenance contractor shall maintain irrigation system in good operating condition through monthly inspections of system components and make repairs as necessary. This includes checking and verifying operation in each zone, alignment of heads, rain sensors, controller, rat and checking leaks. 2. Landscape maintenance contractor shall make every effort to conserve water by adjusting programming to allow for weather changes and growth seasons. Irrigation should be conducted between 2:00 a.m. and 6:00 a.m. unless requested by Owner. K. Winterization: Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-10 Specification Name: PLANTING G. Water for execution and maintenance will be provided by Owner at no expense to Contractor. Contractor sF all furnish portable tanks, pumps, hose, pipe, connections, nozzles, and any other equipment required to transport water from available outlets and apply it to seeded areas in approved manner. H. Initiate mowing of seeded areas when grass has attained height of 1 1/2-inches to 2-inches Maintain gra:rs height at 1-inch to 1 1/2-inches at subsequent cuttings depending on time of year. Not more than 113 of grass leaf shall be removed at any cutting and cutting shall not occur closer than 10 days apart. !. Heavy cuttings shall be removed to prevent destruction of underlying turf. If weeds or other undesirable vegetation threaten to smother planted species, such vegetation shall be mowed or, in case of rank growths, shall be uprooted, raked and removed from area by methods approved by Owner. J. Protect seecled area from trespassing while grass is germinating. Furnish and install fences, signs, barriers, or ether necessary temporary protective devices. Contractor shall repair damage resulting from trespass, erosion,washout, settlement, or other causes at his expense. K. Remove fences, signs, barriers, or other temporary protective devices after final acceptance. L. If substanti<<I number of plants are sickly or dead at time of inspection, acceptance will not be granted ana Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of plants shall be extended until replacements are made. M. Replacements shall be plants of same kind and size specified on Construction Drawings. Furnish and plant as specified herein. Cost shall be borne by Contractor. Replacements resulting from removal, loss,or damage due to occupancy of project in any part,vandalism, physical damage by animals, vehicles, etc., and losses due to curtailment of water by local authorities will be approved and paid for by Owner. N. Remove and replace dead, defective and/or rejected plants as required before final acceptance. Replacement of plant materials that may be necessary shall be at expense of Contractor. O. Grassed areas damaged during process of work shall be responsibility of Contractor,who shall restore disturbed areas to condition satisfactory to Owner. This may include filling to grade, fertilizing, :reeding, and mulching. P. Guarantee plants for period of 2 years after inspection and acceptance. Q. At end of Establishment Period, inspection shall be made again. Remove from site any plant that is dead or unsatisfactory to Owner. Replace plants during normal planting season. 3.08 MAINTENANCE A. GENERA!-LANDSCAPING 1. Provide Owner with 3 written proposals due before possession date for landscape .e maintenance from experienced local nursery businesses capable of performing work specified herein. Accepted proposal and maintenance contract will be for period of 2 years and renewable in 1-year increments. Maintenance will begin immediately after final acceptance of landscaping by Owner. During the first year warranty period, the Contractor shall be responsible for insuring that the maintenance contract is being followed. 2. Landscape maintenance shall include necessary watering, cultivation,weeding, pruning, wound dressing, disease and insect pest control, protective spraying, labor for replacement ,< of dead plant material, straightening plants which lean or sag, adjustments of plants which E ettle or are planted too low, mowing, replacement of mulch that has been displaced, repairing and reshaping of saucers,and reseeding or replanting of those areas affected. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-9 Specification Name: PLANKING so 3.05 SEEDING A. Do not perform seeding in windy weather. B. Seeding shall be done in 2 directions at right angles to each other. INK C. Seed lawn areas by sowing evenly with approved mechanical seeder at rate of minimum of 3- pounds per 1,000 square feet. Culti-packer or approved similar equipment may be used to cover seed and to form seedbed in 1 operation. In areas inaccessible to culti-packer, lightly rake seeded ground with flexible rakes and roll with water ballast roller. After rolling, seeded areas are to be lightly mulched with wheat straw. D. Surface layer of soil for seeded areas must be kept moist during germination period. Water seeded areas twice first week to minimum depth of 6-inches with fine spray and once per week thereafter as necessary to supplement natural rain to equivalent of 1-inch or to 6-inches depth. 3.06 SOD A. As noted on Construction Drawings, V-6"wide strip shall be sodded along sidewalks, roadways, ,ter and parking areas to prevent washing and erosion. B. Cut and lay sod on same day. Only healthy vigorous growing sod is to be laid. C. Always lay sod across slope and tightly together so as to make solid area. D. Roll or firmly but lightly tamp with suitable wooden or metal tamper new sod sufficiently to set or press sod into under laying soil. E. After sodding has been completed, clean up and thoroughly moisten newly sodded areas. 3.07 MAINTENANCE DURING CONSTRUCTION A. Begin maintenance immediately after planting. Plants shall be watered, mulched,weeded, pruned, sprayed, fertilized, cultivated, and otherwise maintained and protected until acceptance. Settled plants shall be reset to proper grade and position, planting saucer restored, and dead material removed. Tighten and repair stakes and wires. Correct defective work as soon as possible after it becomes apparent and weather and season permit. +� !! B. Maintain lawns for at least 30 days after sodding and 60 days after seeding, or as long as is necessary to establish uniform stand of the specified grasses, or until substantial completion of project, or until acceptance of lawns,whichever is later. C. In event that lawn operations are completed too late in Fall for adequate germination and/or growth, maintenance shall continue into following growing season or until uniform stand of specified grasses has been established. D. Make weekly inspections to determine moisture content of soil and adjust watering schedule established by irrigation system installer to fit conditions. E. After grass growth has started, areas that fail to show uniform stand of grass for any reason whatsoever shall be reseeded in accordance with Construction Drawings and as specified herein. .,k Such areas shall be reseeded repeatedly until areas are covered with satisfactory growth of grass at no additional cost to Owner. F. Watering shall be done in such manner and as frequently as is deemed necessary by Owner to assure continued growth of healthy grass. Water areas of site in such way as to prevent erosion due to excessive quantities applied over small areas and to avoid damage to finished surface due to watering equipment. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-8 Specification Name: PLANTING re1:aining structure as detailed on Construction Drawings constructed minimum of 5-feet frcm trunk. Exposed or broken roots shall be cut clean and covered with topsoil. 3.03 TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING rF A. Plants too large for 2 men to lift in and out of holes shall be placed with sling. Do not rock trees in holes to raise. B. If rock or ether underground obstruction is encountered, Owner may require plant pits to be L relocated, pits enlarged, or plants deleted from project. C. Make adjustments in locations as directed. In event that pits or areas for planting are prepared and backfilled'Kith topsoil to grade prior to commencement of lawn operations,they shall be so marked ' that when planting proceeds, they can be readily located. In case underground obstructions such as ledges or utilities are encountered, change location under direction of Owner without charge. ' D. Holes for trees shall be at least 2-feet greater in diameter than spread of root system and at least 6-in. deeper than root ball. Holes for shrubs and vines shall be at least 12-inches greater in diameter than spread of root system and at least 2-feet deep. E. During b&*filling of tree holes and shrub beds with topsoil, manure, ground limestone (if soil tests indicate it is needed), and commercial fertilizer at rate of 3-pounds for trees up to 3-inches in caliper, 1-pound per inch caliper for larger trees, 6-ounces for small shrubs and 8-ounces for each shrub 4-feet or over shall be added as progress of work permits. Omit ground limestone and manure in case of acid soil plants. Manure, limestone, and fertilizer shall be thoroughly mixed with topsoil in planting operation; care being taken that manure does not come in immediate contact with roots, F. Plants shell be planted in center of holes and at same depth as they previously grew. Backfill topsoil in ayers of not more than 8-inches and each layer watered sufficiently to settle before next layer is put in place. Tamp loam under edges of balled plants. Use enough topsoil to bring surfaces to finish grade when settled. 1. Provide saucer around each plant as shown on Construction Drawings. 2. Soak plants with water twice within first 24 hours after time of planting. Apply water with Icw pressure so as to soak in thoroughly without dislodging topsoil. 3.04 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATIONS A. Shreddec Hardwood Bark Mulch 1. L se 4-inches of shredded hardwood bark mulch or approved equal as top dressing in planting beds. Mulch single trees or shrubs to outside edge of saucer. 2. F lace weed mat under planting areas not to be seeded, or as directed on Construction Drawings. Cover mat with mulch and secured in place with soil anchor. B. Use peat moss for planting soil mixture only and not be used as mulch, except on ground cover. C. Apply fertilizer to grass or sodded areas in 2 applications with thorough watering immediately following First application shall be 1 week before seeding at rate of 35-pounds per 1,000 square feet harrowed into top 2-inches of seedbed. Second application shall be done at rate of 25-pounds per 1,000 square feet, immediately following second mowing. D. Peg sodded slopes greater than 3:1 to hold in place. PO E. Areas to be covered with erosion control blankets shall be properly prepared,fertilized, and seeded before blanket is applied. When blanket is unrolled, netting shall be on top and fibers in contact with soil. In ditches, apply blanket in direction of flow of water. On slopes, apply blankets vertically on slope Butt ends and sides snugly and stapled. Staple to manufacturer's recommendations. PA Projec t Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-7 Specification Name: PLANTING we I. Sod Bed Preparation: Grade areas to finish grade, filling as needed or removing surplus dirt, stones, debris, etc. and floating areas to smooth, uniform grade as indicated on Construction Drawings. Lawn areas are to slope to drain. J. Grass or sodded areas shall have fertilizer applied in two (2)applications with a thorough watering as specified in section 4.02 B immediately following each application. The first application shall be one (1)week prior to seeding/sodding at the rate of 25 pounds per 1000 square feet and barrowed rt into the top two(2) inches of topsoil. The second application shall be at the rate of 10 pounds per 1000 square feet immediately following the second mowing. 3.02 PROTECTION r A. Before commencing work,trees and shrubs that are to be saved shall be protected from damage by placement of fencing flagged for visibility or some other suitable protective procedure approved by Owner. No work may begin until this requirement is fulfilled. B. In order to avoid damage to roots, bark, or lower branches, no truck or other equipment shall be driven or parked within drip line of any tree, unless tree overspreads paved area. r C. Use precautionary measures when performing work around trees, sidewalks, pavements, utilities, and other features either existing or previously installed. D. Adjust depth of earthwork and topsoil when working immediately adjacent to aforementioned features in order to prevent disturbing tree roots, undermining sidewalks and pavements, and damage in general to other features either existing or previously installed. , E. Cover plants transported to project in open vehicles with tarpaulins or other suitable covers securely fastened to body of vehicle to prevent injury to plants. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating of plants. Evidence of inadequate protection following digging, carelessness while in transit, or improper handling or storage shall be cause for rejection. Plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected. Such protection shall encompass entire period during which plants are in transit, being handled, or are in temporary storage. F. Where excavating, fill, or grading is required within drip line of trees that are to remain,work shall be performed as follows: 1. Trenching: When trenching occurs around trees to remain, tree roots shall not be cut but trench shall be tunneled under or around roots by careful hand digging without injury to roots. 2. Raising Grades: a. Where fill not exceeding 16-inches is required, clean,washed gravel graded from 1-inch to 2-inch in size shall be placed directly around tree trunk. Extend gravel out from trunk on all sides minimum of 18-inches and finish approximately 2-inches above finished grade at tree. Install gravel before any earth fill is placed. New ,* earth fill shall not be left in contact with trunks of trees requiring fill b. Where fill exceeding 16-inches is required, construct dry laid tree well around trunk of tree. Tree well shall extend out from trunk on all sides minimum of 3-feet and to a" 3-inches above finish grade. Place coarse grade rock directly around tree well extending out to drip line of tree. Place clean,washed gravel graded from 1-inch. to 2-inch. in size directly over coarse rock to depth of 3-inches. Place approved backfill material directly over washed gravel to desired finish grade. A 3. Lowering Grades: Existing trees in areas where new finish grade is to be lowered shall have regrading work done by hand to elevation indicated on Construction Drawings. Roots as required shall be cut cleanly 3-inches below finished grade and scars covered with tree paint. 4. Trees marked for preservation that are more than 6-inches above proposed grades shall stand on broad rounded mounds and be graded smoothly into lower level. Trees located more than 16-inches above proposed grades shall have dry laid stone wall or other Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-6 Specification Name: PLANTING acceptable to Owner. Loosen soil to minimum depth of 12-inches with additional loosening as required to obtain adequate drainage. Contractor may introduce peat moss, sand, or or5anic matter into the subsoil to obtain adequate drainage. Such remedial measures shall be considered as incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 2. Were unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to presence of boards, mortar, concrete, or other construction materials in sub-grade and where natural subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of A6 or 7, remove debris and objectionable material. Such remedial measures shall be considered as incidental, without additional cost to Owner. 3. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be because natural subsoil falls into AASHTO classification of A6 or 7 and contains moisture in excess of 30 percent,then installation of sub-drainage system or other means described elsewhere in Specifications shall be used. Where such conditions have not been known or revealed prior to planting time and they have not been recognized in preparation of Construction Drawings and Specifications, then Owner shall issue pricing order to install proper remedial measures. D. Perform planting operations at steady rate of work unless weather conditions make it impossible to work. No plant material shall be planted in frozen ground. E. Disk, drag, harrow, or hand rake subgrade to depth of 4-inches and removed stones larger than 1- 1/2 inches to provide bond for topsoil. Topsoil, which must be transported across finished sidewalks, shall be delivered in such manner that no damage will be done to sidewalks. Contractor shall be responsible for repair of such damage. F. Do not la(: p e topsoil until sub grade has been approved in accordance with Section 02300. Before ' placing topsoil, rake subsoil surface clear of stones, debris, and roots. Compact topsoil to form layer with minimum depth of 4-inches in lawn areas and 12-inches in shrub beds. Place topsoil so that after final settlement there will be positive drainage conforming to elevations shown on Construction Drawings. G. Tree and :)hrub Preparation 1. Dig bare rooted shrubs with adequate fibrous roots. Cover roots of these plants with uniformly thick coating of mud by being puddled immediately after they are dug,or packed in moist straw or moss. 2. Dig ball and burlap plants with firm natural balls of earth of diameter and depth to include x fibrous roots. 3. Protect roots or balls of plants at all times from sun and drying winds. 4. Ball and burlap plants which cannot be planted immediately upon delivery shall be set on ground and protected with soil,wet moss, or other acceptable material. Heel-in bare rooted plants that cannot be planted immediately upon delivery. All shall be kept moist. 5. O 3en bundles of plants and plants separate before roots are covered. Take care to prevent air pockets among roots. During planting operations, cover bare roots with LL canvas, hay, or other suitable material. No plant shall be bound with wire or rope at any time so as to damage bark or break branches. H. Seed Bed Preparation 1. Grade areas to finish grades,filling as needed or removing surplus dirt. Float areas to srnooth, uniform grade as indicated on Construction Drawings. Lawn areas shall slope to drain. 2. \Alhere no grades are shown, areas shall have smooth and continual grade between existing or fixed controls, such as walks, curbs, catch basin, steps, or building, and elevations shown on Construction Drawings. Roll, scarify, rake, and level as necessary to obtain true, even lawn surfaces. Finish grades shall meet approval of Owner, before grass stied is sown. 3. Loosen soil to depth of 6-inches in lawn areas by approved method of scarification and grade to remove ridges and depressions. Remove stones or foreign matter over 2-inches it diameter from top 2-inches of soil. Float lawn areas to finish grades. 4. Seed beds should be permitted to settle or should be firmed by rolling before seeding begins. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-5 Specification Name: PLANTING C. Hose shall be 2-ply fibred-bearing rubber garden hose, not less than 1/2-inches inside diameter, black or green, and of suitable length. 2.07 WATER A. Potable water, on-site water shall be furnished by Owner. Contractor shall furnish hose and other watering equipment. 2.08 LAWN SEED A. Lawn seed mixture shall be fresh, clean new crop seed. Furnish to Owner dealers guaranteed statement of composition of mixture and percentage of purity and germination of each variety. B. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight and minimum percentages of purity, germination, and maximum percentage of weed seed. Seed mixtures vary by region and season and shall comply with State DOT and Local Soil Conservation Service Standards. 2.09 WEED MAT , A. Weed mat shall be"Dewitt Weed Barrier"or approved equal. 2.10 STEEL EDGING A. Steel edging shall be 1/8-inch x 4-inch interlocking steel edge, staked with metal stakes sufficiently to hold in place. 2.11 STONE MULCH A. Size and color of stone mulch should be as shown on Construction Drawings. 2.12 SOD A. Sod shall be species ASPA certified. Sod to be strongly rooted,weed, disease, pest free and rt uniform in thickness. 2.13 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET A. Blankets, biodegradable, enclosed in a photodegradable plastic mesh, including steel wire staples, 6 inches long. B. Provide and install where indicated on Construction Drawings"Curlex" blankets by American Excelsior Company, "Polyjute"Style 465 GT by Synthetic Industries, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. If project completion date prohibits in-season planting, prepare for out-of-season seeding or sodding so that lawns shall be completed and ready for acceptance at time of project completion, without additional cost to Owner. B. Provide sufficient tools and equipment required to carry out planting operation. C. Locations containing unsuitable subsoil shall be treated by one or more of the following: 1. Where unsuitability is deemed by Owner to be due to excessive compaction caused by heavy equipment and where natural subsoil is other than AASHTO classification of A6 or 7, loosen such areas with spikes, discing, or other means to loosen soil to condition Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-4 Specification Name: PLANTING 9. Thickness of each shrub shall correspond to trade classification "No.1". Single stemmed or thin plants shall not be accepted. Side branches must be generous,well-twigged, and pla nt as whole well-branched to ground. Plants must be in moist condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or other root or branch injuries. I 2.02 TOPSOIL A. Natural, friable, fertile, fine loamy soil possessing characteristics of representative topsoil in the vicinity tha�:produces heavy growth. B. Topsoil, p1-1 range of 5.5 to 7.4 percent organic material minimum, free from subsoil, objectionable weeds, litter, sods, stiff clay, stones larger than 1-inch in diameter, stumps, roots,trash, toxic substances, or any other material which may be harmful to plant growth or hinder planting operations. C. Verify amount stockpiled if any, and supply additional as needed from naturally well drained sites where topsoil occurs at least 4 inches deep; do not obtain topsoil from bogs or marshes. 2.03 FERTILIZER A. Deliver fertilizer, mixed as specified, in original unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Containers shall bear manufacturer's guaranteed statement of analysis, or manufacturer's certificate of compliance covering analysis shall be furnished to Owner. Store fertilizer in such manner that it shall be kept dry. B. Base perceritages of nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash on laboratory test recommendations as approved by Owner. For bidding assume 10 percent nitrogen, 6 percent phosphorus, and 4 percent potash by weight. At least 50 percent of total nitrogen shall contain no less than 3 percent water-inso uble nitrogen. At least 60 percent of nitrogen content shall be derived from super-pho:>phate containing not less than 18 percent phosphoric acid or bone meal containing 25- 30 percent phosphoric acid and 2 -3 percent nitrogen. Potash shall be derived from muriate of potash containing 55-60 percent potash. 2.04 PEAT MOSS A. Peat moss shall be Michigan peat moss or approved equal in color and consistency. B. Peat moss shall be moss peat, finely shredded to pass 1/2-inch mesh and shall be no less than 90 percent organic material by weight, with ash content by ignition of no more than 10 percent. C. Material shall contain 35-66 percent moisture by weight, but shall have water-holding capacity of 150-200 percent. D. Material shall have pH value of 4 to 5. E. Material rr ay be imported supplied in bales or domestic furnished in bulk. If furnished in bulk, material acid its source must be acceptable to Owner. 2.05 SHREDDED HARDWOOD BARK MULCH A. Mulch shall be of sufficient character as not to be easily displaced by wind or water runoff. 2.06 STAKING MATERIAL A. Stakes shall be 8-ft steel tee posts. Three stakes shall be used for each tree. B. Wire used for tree staking shall be pliable No. 12 galvanized soft steel wire. Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma:cter Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-3 Specification Name: PLANTING is* G. Measurements specified are minimum size acceptable and,where pruning is required, are measurements after pruning. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Before ordering or purchasing materials, provide samples of those materials to Owner for approval, if so requested. B. Submit certification tags from trees, shrubs, sod, and seed verifying type and purity. C. Unless otherwise authorized by Owner, notify Owner at least 48 hours in advance of anticipated .rx delivery date of plant materials. Legible copy of invoice, showing kinds and sizes of materials included for each shipment, shall be furnished to Owner. D. Inform Owner of date when planting shall commence. `m 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS ift A. Work must be carried out only during weather conditions favorable to landscape construction and to health and welfare of plants. Owner shall determine suitability of such weather conditions. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANT MATERIALS A* A. Plant material (trees and shrubs)shall conform to requirements of ANSI Z60.1 of rules and grading upgraded to meet the following: 1. Plants shall be of selected specimen quality, exceptionally heavy, symmetrical, tightly knit, so trained or favored in their development and appearance as to be superior in form, number of branches, compactness and symmetry. Plants shall have normal habit or sound, healthy, vigorous plants with well developed root system. rr 2. Plants shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. 3. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. 4. Trees with abrasion of bark, sunscalds, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 1 1/4- inch, which have not completely calloused, shall be rejected. +�•! 5. Plants shall be typical of their species or variety and shall have normal habit of growth and be legibly tagged with proper name. Plants shall have been grown under climatic conditions similar to those of site or have been acclimated to such condition for at least 2 years. - 6. Root system of each plant shall be well provided with fibrous roots. Parts shall be sound, healthy,vigorous,well-branched, and densely foliated when in leaf. 7. Plants designated ball and burlap must be moved with root systems as solid units with balls of earth firmly wrapped with burlap and comply with the following: a. Diameter and depth of balls of earth must be sufficient to encompass fibrous root feeding systems necessary for healthy development of plant. b. No plant shall be accepted when ball of earth surrounding its roots has been badly cracked or broken preparatory to or during process of planting. Balls shall remain intact during all operations. C. Plants that cannot be planted at once must be heeled-in by setting in ground and covering balls with soil or mulch and then watering. d. Hemp burlap and twine is preferable to treated. If treated burlap is used, twine is to be cut from around trunk and burlap is to be removed. 8. Trunk of each tree shall be single trunk growing from single unmutilated crown of roots. No part of trunk shall be conspicuously crooked as compared with normal trees of same variety. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-2 Specification Name: PLANTING SECTION 02900 PLANTING PART 1 GENERAL. 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparatiol and excavation of planting beds. B. Planting of trees, shrubs, sod, seed, and associated materials. C. Provide ar d execute Maintenance Contract. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 - Earthwork B. Section 02370- Erosion Control and Sedimentation C. Section 02.810-Lawn Sprinkler System D. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American National Standard Institute (ANSI) 1. Z60.1 American Standard for Nursery Stock B. American Sod Producer Association (ASPA) C. American Nursery and Landscape Association (ANLA) 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. No error c r discrepancy in Construction Drawings or Specifications shall cause defective or inappropr ate materials to be used or poor workmanship to be allowed. B. Condition of new plant materials is responsibility of Contractor and shall be approved by Owner. Owner re:;erves right to inspect and reject plants at any time and place. C. Measure Slants when branches are in their normal position. D. Trees and shrubs shall meet requirements for spread, height, or container size stated in Construction Drawings. 1. Measurements are to be taken from ground level to average height of shrub and not to longest branch. 2. 1-eight and spread dimensions specified herein refer to main body of trees measured from c-own of roots to tip of top branch. E. Caliper rr easurements shall be taken at point on tree trunk 6-inches above natural ground line for trees up to 4-inches in caliper, and at point 12-inches above natural ground line for trees exceeding 4-inches in caliper. F. If range cf sizes is given, no plant shall be less than minimum size, and at least 50 percent of plants shall be as large as upper half of range specified. Project Name: Wal-Mart Mz ster Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02900-1 Specification Name: PLANTING Am 2.02 POSTS A. "U"channel galvanized steel posts with galvanized sign-mounting hardware for each sign. Posts shall have a weight of 2-pounds per lineal foot. 2.03 MIX DESIGN AND TESTING A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing admixture, air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following: 1. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings. 2. Slump Range: 1 to 3-inches at time of placement 3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A* A. Contractor to field verify all underground utilities prior to sign installation. Primary utilities of concern, of shallow depths, are lawn sprinkler systems, electric, telephone, fiber optic, cable and gas ?" B. Cost related to repair of damaged surface and subsurface facilities shall be paid for by the Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 04 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install posts in 18-inches round x 24-inches deep concrete foundations. Set posts vertical and plumb with bottom of sign at 6'-5"above finish grade unless otherwise indicated on the Construction Drawings. Mount signs in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A* END OF SECTION 02846 wrr Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specifications Revised 02/14/2000 02890-2 Specification Name:TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS SECTION 02890 $. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of traffic control signs. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS: B. US Department of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration's"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices" (MUTCD), latest edition. C. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Standard for Testing Materials (ASTM) 1. C94 Ready Mix Concrete PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SIGNS- MUTCD classification is shown in parentheses A. "STOP" Signs: 30-inches x 30-inches, Octagon,white legend and border on red background (R1- 1) B. "YIELD" Signs: 36-inches x 36-inches x 36-inches,Triangle, red legend and border band with y. white interior(R1-2) C. "SPEED LIMIT 15MPH" Signs: 24-inches x 30-inches, black legend and border on white background (R2-1) D. "NO RIGHT TURN"(or"NO LEFT TURN") Signs: 24-inches x 24-inches, black legend and border, red circle end bar, and white background (R3-1 and R3-2) E. "RIGHT TURN ONLY" (or"LEFT TURN ONLY")Signs: 30-inches x 36-inches, black legend and border on white background (R3-5) F. DO NOT ENTER Signs: 30-inches x 30-inches,white legend, bar, and background and red circle (R5-1) ` G. "NO TRUCKS"Signs: 24-inches x 24-inches, black truck symbol, red circle and bar, on white background (R5-2) H. "ACCESSIBLE PARKING SYMBOL" Signs: 12-inches x 18-inches, green legend and border, white sym col on blue box, and white background (R7-8) I. "PED XING"Signs: 30-inches x 30-inches, black legend and border on yellow background (W1 1A- 2) J. Miscellanoous Signs: See Construction Drawings Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma:>ter Specifications Revised 02/14/2000 02890-1 Specification Name:TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS III�IIIIII�A•1 .rw D. Soil and Backfill Testing: Unless otherwise directed by the Owner or required by this technical scope of work, type and minimum frequency of testing for soils related ortions of construction shall be as follows. 1. Field density tests in accordance with ASTM (D2922): a. Subgrade Soils: One test for every 2,500 square feet per lift of material b. Base Leveling Pad: One test for every 100 lineal feet C. Reinforced Backfill: One test for every 2,500 square feet per lift. Every other lift shall be tested. 2. Laboratory moisture-density relationships, ASTM (D698), a minimum of one test for every compacted material type. 3. Gradation Analysis in accordance with ASTM (D422): a. Unit Fill: One test for every 500 cubic yards of material b. Wall Backfill: One test for every 500 cubic yards of material or when material type changes. END OF SECTION 02830 wo •�ri Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-10 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 3. When blanket drain is installed, non-woven geotextile shall be installed prior to aggregate placement in accordance with Construction Drawings. F C. Drainage Composite: r 1. Install drainage composite according to Construction Drawings. kW 2. Wrap upper ends of drainage composite with approved geotextile fabric. 3. Drainage composite, shall extend upwards minimum of 2/3 of height of backcut and be spaced on horizontal centers to give a minimum of 50% to 100% horizontal coverage as required. 4. Drainage composite shall terminate in a French Drain effectively connecting to a collector pip,:wrapped in drainage aggregate and an approved geotextile fabric. 3.08 SRW CAP INSTALLATION A. Place SRV'/ Cap units per manufacturer's recommendations. Backfill and compact to finished grade. B. Incorporate surface water drainage control (swale) into finished grading at top of wall, as shown on Construction Drawings. C. Permanent mechanical connection of cap units to wall units shall be provided by construction epoxy Apply epoxy to bottom surface of cap unit and install on units below. Follow epoxy manufacturer's directions to ensure permanent bond. 3.09 CONSTRUCTION A. SRW Tolerances: Installation of SRW face location shall be within all the following tolerances: 1. Vertical control from plan: t 1.25 inches over a 10 ft. distance. 2. He rizontal location control from plan: Straight lines: t 1.25 inches over a 10 ft. distance. �,. Straight&radius corner locations: ± 1.0 ft. Curves and serpentine radius: t 2.0 ft. 3. Rotation of the wall face during construction: Maximum 2.0 degrees from established wall plan batter. Maximum, t 10.0 %from total established horizontal setback. 4. Budging: ± 1.25 inches over a 10.0 ft. distance. B. Mechanical vibrating plate compactors shall not be used on top of the units. The Contractor shall compact fill between units and the backfill zone behind the units by running hand-operated compaction equipment just behind units. The Contractor shall perform compaction to ManufactL rers Specifications. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. In accordance with provisions of Division 1, the Owner shall engage inspection and testing service agencies, including independent laboratories, to provide quality assurance and testing services during construction of the Project. This does not relieve the Contractor from providing the necessary construction quality control and testing. B. Testing aid inspection services will be performed only by trained and experienced technicians currently qualified for the work they are to perform. C. The testirg agency will submit written reports to the Owner and to Contractor of all inspections on weekly basis. Such reports shall include description of work performed, deficiencies noted in construction, and corrective action taken to resolve such deficiencies. Written reports will also L# include location, type and results of all tests taken on the Project. Testing agency will verify reinforcement type (strength); length, orientation and placement elevation are as shown on the Construction Drawings. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-9 Specification Name: SEGMI=NTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 3.05 SOIL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Soil reinforcement shall be oriented with the highest strength axis perpendicular to the wall alignment. B. Install soil reinforcement at wall height, horizontal location, and to the extent as shown on Construction Drawings. C. Lay the soil reinforcement horizontally on compacted backfill. Pull geogrid taut and connect to concrete SRW units according to connection detail shown on Construction Drawings or as recommended by manufacturer prior to backfill placement on geosynthetic reinforcement. iw D. Soil reinforcements shall be continuous throughout their embedment lengths. Spliced connections between shorter pieces will not be allowed. E. Do not operate tracked construction equipment directly upon soil reinforcement. A minimum fill AM thickness of 6 inches is required prior to operation of tracked equipment over soil reinforcement. Keep tracked vehicle turning to minimum to prevent tracks from displacing the fill and damaging soil reinforcement. M% F. Rubber-tired equipment may pass over soil reinforcement at low speeds, less than 10 mph, if permitted by the manufacturer.Avoid sudden braking and sharp turning. G. Changes to soil reinforcement layout, including, but not limited to, length, soil reinforcement type (strength), or elevation, shall be made subject to the Civil RFI Process and Approval. H. Verify orientation (Roll direction)of geosynthetic reinforcement. I. Place segmental unit and fill in accordance with requirements of this specification section. 3.06 REINFORCED BACKFILL PLACEMENT A. Place reinforced backfill, spread and compact in such a manner that will not develop slack in the soil reinforcement in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations. B. Place and compact reinforced backfill in lifts not to exceed 8 inches, in compacted thickness. E. At the end of each day's operation, slope the last lift of reinforced backfill away from the wall facing to rapidly direct runoff away from the wall face. Do not allow surface runoff from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site. low 3.07 DRAINAGE SYSTEM A. Drainage Collection Pipe: 1. Install the drainage collection pipe according to line, grades and sections shown in Construction Drawings. 2. Install drainage collection pipe to maintain gravity flow of water from reinforced soil zone. Daylight drainage collection pipe at storm sewer manhole or along slope at an elevation lower than lowest point of pipe within reinforced soil mass, every 40 feet minimum. 3. Main collection drain pipe just behind segmental units shall be minimum 4 inches in diameter. Secondary collection drain pipe shall gravity flow independently or tie into main ,rr collection drain pipe with laterals at maximum 40 foot spacing along wall face. B. Drainage Aggregate: 1. Install drainage aggregate to line, grades and sections shown on Construction Drawings. 2. Place the drainage aggregate to minimum finished thickness and widths shown on Construction Drawings. +�r Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-8 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS «.A C. Prior to undertaking any grading or excavation of the site, confirm the location of the retaining walls and all underground features, including utility locations within the area of construction. Ensure surrounding structures are protected from effects of wall excavation. D. Coordinate Installation of underground utilities with wall installation. E. Control surface water drainage and prevent inundation of the retaining wall area during constructior.. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to lines and grades shown on the Construction Drawings. Take precautions to minimize over-excavation. Over-excavation shall be filled with approved compacted material at no cost to the Owner. B. Inspect excavation prior to placement of leveling pad material. C. Excavation of unsuitable soils and replacement with approved compacted material shall be included pE rt of this contract. D. Fill over-excavated areas in front of wall face with approved compacted material before wall construction reaches 4 feet in height. E. In areas where soft, disturbed or otherwise unsuitable soils are encountered within the zone of the wall loading in the excavations, such unsuitable soils shall be over-excavated to the depths and extents required and replaced with select material and compacted per the contract documents at no additior al cost to the Owner. 3.03 LEVELING PAD CONSTRUCTION A. Place leveling pad as shown on the Construction Drawings with minimum thickness of 6 inches for crushed s:one dense aggregate base and 8 inches for unreinforced concrete. The leveling pad shall extend laterally a minimum distance of 6 inches from the toe and heel of the lower most SRW Unit in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations. 3.04 SRW UNIT INSTALLATION A. Place first course of SRW units on the leveling pad. Level units side-to-side, front-to-rear and aligned with adjacent units. B. Insure units are in full contact with base. C. Place the front of the units side-by-side. Do not leave gaps between the front of adjacent units. Layout o: curves and corners shall be in accordance with SRW manufacturer's installation guideline:.. D. Install mechanical fascia connections per SRW manufacturer's recommendations. E. Place an J compact drainage fill within, between and behind units. Place and compact infill soil behind drainage fill. F. Clean all excess debris from top of units. G. Repeat procedure to the extent of wall height. H. Stacking of segmental retaining wall units without placing core fill in the previous course of units will not be permitted. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-7 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 2. Geogrid manufacturers are: a. Stratagrid b. Nicolon/Mirafi C. Tensar(Black Sb Series Geogrids Only)d. Approved equal B. Steel Soil Reinforcement: 1. The steel soil reinforcement shall possess minimum strength and durability at end of design life of structure including provisions for corrosion and Manufacturers recommendations ' 2. Approved steel (inextensible)soil reinforcement manufacturers is: Reinforced Earth Company or approved equal. 2.04 DRAINAGE MATERIALS A. Drainage collection pipe shall be perforated/slotted PVC or corrugated HDPE pipe comply with Section 02630. The pipe shall be covered with a knitted or non-woven geotextile sock specifically "*! designed to function as a filter. B. Drainage aggregate shall be free draining material, relative to the surrounding soil, in order to prevent build up of hydrostatic pressure as specified in Section 02325 and Manufacturers recommendations. C. Drainage geotextile shall be Synthetic Industries 401 or Approved Equal. « ! D. Drainage composite shall be J-DRain 400 or Approved Equal. 2.05 REINFORCED WALL BACKFILL " A. Reinforced Soil shall be in accordance with Manufacturers recommendations. 2.06 RETAINED BACKFILL OR COMMON BACKFILL A. Soil placed behind the reinforced backfill shall be as specified in Section 02300. 2.07 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL an A. SRW Shear Capacity: Concrete units shall have a demonstrated shear capacity to withstand laterally applied shear loads as defined in the design calculations. Shear capacity shall be demonstrated through full-scale testing of SRW facing system according to NCMA SRWU-2 test method. Shear capacity shall be defined both with and without the soil reinforcement present at the `K interface. Results of this capacity testing shall be submitted, as required in sec. 1.06.G.5. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Include all means of subsoil improvement as required. B. Comply with all federal, state and local requirements for execution of the work, including local building codes and current OSHA excavation regulations. The Contractor is responsible for stability of the area during excavation and wall construction. Any excavation support required to maintain / protect existing structures; utilities, landscape features or property shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-6 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEGMENTAL CONCRETE FACING UNITS A. Facing units shall be KEYSTONE, VERSA-LOK, REINFORCED EARTH COMPANY, ANCHOR, VENTURE DELTA1, or MESA Segmental Retaining Wall Units or approved equal as manufactured by a licensed representative. B. Facing units shall meet the following structural requirements: 1. Concrete wall units including cap units shall have minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3 000 psi on the net area and have a maximum absorption rate of 8 percent. 2. Cementitious materials used in manufacture of units shall be Type I, Type II or Type III Portland cement in accordance with ASTM C150. 3. In areas where repeated freezing and thawing under saturated conditions occur freeze- thaw durability shall be demonstrated by testing per ASTM C1262. Testing shall be con Ducted for a minimum 100 cycles, and leight loss shall not exceed one percent. s 4. Other constituents - Air entraining agents, coloring pigments, integral water repellents, finely ground silica and other constituents shall be previously established as suitable for use in retaining wall units and shall conform to applicable ASTM Standards or shall be shown by test or experience not to be detrimental to the durability of segmental concrete facing units or to any material used in masonry construction. 5. Dimensional tolerances for exterior molded units shall be in accordance with ASTM C90- 85. SRW concrete facing unit's molded dimensions shall not differ more than t 1/8 inch from the manufacturer's published dimensions, except for height which must be ± 1/16. Maximum differential shall be no more than 1/16 inch in height from front to back of unit. 6. SRVV units shall provide minimum effective, in-place weight equivalent to 100 pcf. Fill pla-,ed within dimensions of units may be considered as integral the effective unit weight. This in-place weight shall be determined by testing and used for all design calculations. 7. Only SRW Systems with positive mechanical fascia connections will be considered. Connections shall provide uniform horizontal setback per course, which equates to uniform initial wall batter of between 3 and 12 degrees for installed units. C. Material Acceptance: 1. All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit or significantly impair the strength or permanence of the co istruction. 2. Only units meeting all physical and material properties specified herein shall be used. Units not meeting these specifications, specifically unit height tolerance, shall be rejected by the contractor. Materials incorporated into the Work and found to be non-compliant with the requirements of this specification shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. 2.02 BASE LEVELING 'AD MATERIAL AND UNIT FILL FOR BLOCK A. Provide base leveling pad material complying with requirements of State Highway Department's recommended crushed dense aggregate base material. At Contractor's option, lean non-reinforced concrete; minimum of 8 inches thick will be permitted. B. Unit Fill: Free-draining crushed stone or crushed gravel, meeting requirements of Section 02325 and Manufacturers recommendations. 2.03 SOIL REINFORCI=MENT A. Geosynth atic Soil Reinforcement: 1. Properties: The geosynthetic soil reinforcement shall possess minimum strength and durability required by design as determined by product specific testing as defined in the NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls (Section 3.5), including provisions for minimum partial safety factors. Design submittal shall indicate the index tensile strength for each reinforcement type to be used in construction. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-5 Specification Name: SEGMEENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS wall penetrations, guard rails, hand rails, leveling pad, drainage swales and typical sections and construction details. ! 8. Retaining wall shop drawings shall show design parameters for retaining wall, required bearing capacity of foundation soils along with provided factor safety against bearing capacity failures wall subgrade and construction details. .wo 9. Retaining wall shop drawings shall be accompanied by a complete set of construction specifications based on this specification. 10. Retaining wall shop drawings and specifications shall be stamped "FOR BID ONLY-NOT CONSTRUCTION" in red ink. 11. Retaining wall shop drawings and specifications shall be accompanied by hand calculations and/ computer output accompanied by hand calculations addressing required design parameters according to NCMA recommendations. 12. Four copies of the submittal package shall be provided to the project civil engineer of record for distribution for review as follows: a. 2 copies to the owner. b. 1 copy to the project geotechnical engineer. C. 1 copy to be retained by the civil engineer of record. After submittals are approved, shop drawings and construction specifications shall be provided stamped "FOR CONSTRUCTION" and sealed by the Wall Design Engineer of Record. The wall design of record shall be registered in the state of the project and shall have a minimum of 5 years of documentable experience in the design of SRW systems. The wall design engineer of record shall provide proof of current professional and general liability with aggregate coverage limit not less than $1,000,000. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. SRW system installer shall have minimum of the previous two years and minimum of 100,000 square feet of documentable experience installing SRW systems over eight feet in height on minimum of five projects. B. Provide the Owner a project list with current references and telephone numbers for the proposed SRW Installer substantiating the required experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A" A. Segmental Concrete Facing Units: 1. Check the materials upon delivery to assure the specified type, grade, color and texture of units have been received. 2. Prevent excessive mud, wet concrete, epoxies, and like materials which may affix themselves, from coming in contact with the materials. 3. Protect the materials from damage. Damaged material shall not be incorporated into the 04 SRW system. B. Soil Reinforcement: 1. Check the soil reinforcement upon delivery to assure the proper grade and type of material been received. Provide a product certification with each shipment. 2. Store soil reinforcement material in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. w C. Drainage Materials: 1. Store plastic pipe in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to prevent damage deleterious materials from becoming affixed. Am 2. Store drainage aggregate to prevent contamination with other materials. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-4 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS 7. Minimum Factor of Safety Connections (serviceability criterion)0.75 inches 1.0 8. Minimum Factor of Safety for Uncertainties 1.5 C. External Stability: 1. Minimum Factor of Safety Against Base Sliding (static condition) 1.5 2. Minimum Factor of Safety Against Overturning 2.0 3. Minimum Factor of Safety for Global Stability 1.5 4. Minimum Factor of Safety for Bearing Capacity 2.0 d. Design shall address hydrostatic loading, seismic loading, rapid drawdown, surcharge, and backslopes where appropriate. Minimum Design Live Load of 125 psf shall be used for all walls. Minimum Design Live Load of 250 psf shall be used for walls supporting entrance drives,service drives and other areas subject to traffic. e. Minimum geogrid length shall be 70 percent of the wall height. Geogrid reinforcement coverage at each layer shall be 100 percent(no gaps) f. The maximum vertical distance between layers of soil reinforcement shall be limited to two times the thickness of the facing units. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Notarized manufacturer's certification shall be provided to the Owner prior to start of work stating that SRW u sits meet requirements of this specification. Note: if the Contractor provides design, items B, C apply B. Notarized certificate from the Wall Design Engineer of Record shall be provided to the owner prior to start of work stating that the SRW system complies with code evaluation referenced in section 1.06.G.1 C. The Contractor shall provide the SRW system design and supporting signed & sealed structural calculation:; to the Owner prior to the start of work. The designs submitted shall be based on soil parameter:;, foundation conditions and loading stated in documentation as outlined in the Construction Drawings and Project Manual. D. Samples of SRW units showing finish and color shall be provided to the Owner for selection prior to delivery of materials as required on Construction Drawings. E. Furnish to the Engineering Consultant of Record and to the Owner a Certificate of Compliance certifying tie reinforced backfill materials comply with this section of the specifications. F. Soil Reinforcement: Submit manufacturer's certification to the Engineering Consultant of and to the Owner, prior to start of work, stating soil reinforcement meets requirements of this specification. G. Drainage Materials: Submit a notarized manufacturer's certification to the Engineering Consultant of Recorc and to the Owner, prior to start of work, stating the drainage materials meet the requirements of this specification. H. Submittal Requirements For Srw Systems Submittal packages shall include the following: 1. Code evaluation of the specific SRW system by the governing Model Codes (18BCCI, BOCA or ICBO). 2. Proprietary product literature indicating specifically which segmental retaining wall units are proposed for use on project, including color, face style and texture. 3. Proprietary product specifications indicating compressive strength, unit weight, mix and percent absorption for the units proposed. 7. Retaining wall shop drawings showing complete wall profiles, reinforcement elevations, reinforcement lengths, reinforcement types, top of wall, bottom of wall, proposed grades at top of wall, proposed grades at tottom of wall, and stations showing beginning of and end of wall as well as beginning and end of turns and radii. Shop drawings shall include detail drawings for facing connections, Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-3 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS G. Retained Soil: Compacted import or in-situ soil behind reinforced zone of retaining wall. H. Leveling Pad: Level compacted gravel or unreinforced concrete footing upon which first course of segmental concrete facing units are placed. ," 1.05 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Designs for SRW's using extensible (geosynthetic) reinforcement shall be prepared according to "' design methodology presented in NCMA's "Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls" and conform to the minimum safety factors as specified in this specification section. Design submittals not meeting this design criteria or technical/administrative criteria as specified will be rejected in their entirety until complete compliance is achieved. Owner reserves all rights in determining compliance for plan approval and may reject any submittals. B. Designs submitted using inextensible reinforcements, including Panel Wall Systems, shall be **! performed per AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges. Allowable tensile stress at the end of design service life shall not exceed 55 percent of yield strength of steel for metallic strap and wire reinforcements after accounting for appropriate amount of sacrificial steel for corrosion. Design submittals not meeting this design criteria or technical / administrative criteria as specified will be rejected in their entirety until complete compliance is achieved. Owner reserves all rights in determining compliance for plan approval and may reject any submittals. .�e C. Soil design parameters shall be as provided in the Construction Documents. Wall Design Engineer of Record shall be responsible for selecting and specifying reinforced fill material. Reinforced fill material shall have minimum angle of internal friction of 30 degrees. Contractor is responsible for ensuring and documenting the reinforced fill meets the specified parameters for both strength and compaction. Compacted retained soil shall meet the minimum requirements specified in 1.05.D D. Design Criteria For Retaining Wall System 1. Design Parameters: a. Design of the SRW system shall be based on the following soil parameters as: determined in the field. 04 Wall Seament Friction Annie Cohesion Unit Weiaht Reinforced Backfill 300 (min.) _PSF _PCF Retained Backfill ° _PSF _PCF Foundation PSF PCF .s� 2. Design Requirements: a. Unless otherwise indicated below, SRW design shall be performed in strict accordance with the procedures presented in the NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls. b. Internal Stability of Walls: 1. Minimum Factor of Safety on Tensile Overstress 1.2 2. Minimum Factor of Safety on Geogrid Pullout(peak load criterion) 1.5 3. Minimum Factor of Safety on Geogrid Pullout (serviceability criterion)0.75 inches 1.0 4. Minimum Factor of Safety on Facing Shear w (peak load criterion) 1.5 5. Minimum Factor of Safety on Facing Shear (serviceability criterion)2% of height of SRW units 1.0 6. Minimum Factor of Safety Connections (peak load criterion) 1.5 silo Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-2 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS T SECTION 02830 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES .n A. Construction of segmental retaining wall (SRW) units, soil reinforcement, and all appurtenant materials in accordance with Manufacturers Specifications and in conformity to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the Construction Drawings. B. Providing the type of Segmental Retaining Wall System and the associated lump sum cost to the Owner as provided on the bid form. If not provided on the bid form, contact the Owner in accordance with the Special Conditions. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 022.30-Site Clearing B. Section 02:00- Earthwork C. Section 02630—Storm Drainage D. Section 02325—Aggregate Materials D. Constructic n Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STA14DARDS The latest edition or revision of the Manufacturers Specifications for materials and installation shall apply. Where specifications and construction documents conflict, the more stringent shall apply. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Soil Reinforcement: Structural geogrid or steel strips formed by a regular network of integrally connected tensile elements with apertures of sufficient size to allow interlocking with surrounding soil, rock cr earth and function primarily as structural reinforcement. 1. Goosynthetic (extensible) Soil Reinforcement: Polymer product specifically manufactured as soil reinforcement element that meets requirements of this specification. 2. Steel (inextensible) Soil Reinforcements: Steel strips, wires, or bars specially configured and coated for soil reinforcement applications. B. Segmental Concrete Facing Units: KEYSTONE, VERSA-LOK, REINFORCED EARTH CO., ANCHOR, VENTURE DELTA1, or MESA made from Portland Cement, water and mineral aggregates. C. Cap Unit: KEYSTONE, VERSA-LOK, REINFORCED EARTH CO., ANCHOR, VENTURE DELTA1, or MESA:segmental concrete cap unit. D. Unit Fill: Free draining 'open" aggregate fill which is within, between and extends minimum of 12" behind the segmental concrete facing units. E. Reinforced Backfill: Compacted soil which is within the reinforced soil volume as outlined on Construction Drawings. F. Foundation Soil: Compacted import or in-situ soil beneath entire wall. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02830-1 Specification Name: SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS ..s �w MIN M" BLANK PAGE w, o 1. Bend ends of exposed wires to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. 2. Instill nuts for fasteners on tension bands and hardware bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric. The ends of bolts, once secure and checked for smooth operation, shal be peened to prevent removal of nuts. 3. Repair coatings damaged in the field with methods and techniques as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.06 WARRANTY 1. A guarantee shall be furnished for all materials, installation, and workmanship to be free of defects for a period of 1 year from date of acceptance unless noted otherwise in the contract documents. Any defect in installation or workmanship shall be repaired, and defective materials shall be replaced du-ing the guarantee period without any cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 02821 t Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specifications Revised 02/14/2000 02821-5 Specification Name: CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES rF am A. Comply with recommended procedures and instructions of fencing manufacturer. Provide secure, aligned installation with line posts spaced at 10'-0"o.c. maximum. B. Grade Set Posts: Drill or hand excavate using posthole digger in firm undisturbed or compacted soil. C. Excavate hole for each post to minimum diameter recommended by fence manufacturer but not less than 4 times the largest cross-section of post. Excavate hole depths not less than 36-inches below finish grade surface. D. Center and align posts in holes with bottom of posts 3-inches above bottom of excavation. E. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations. Extend concrete footing 2-inches above grade and trowel crown to shed water. F. Sleeve Set Posts: Anchor posts by means of pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete. After posts have been inserted into sleeves,fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with nonshrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's directions. G. Top Rails: Run rail continuously, bending to form radius for curved runs. Provide expansion couplings as recommended by manufacturer. H. Center Rails: Provide center rails where indicated. Install in 1 piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using special offset fittings where necessary. I. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod are under proper tension. J. Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with not less than 6 gauge galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gauge Wo galvanized steel hog rings spaced 24-inches o.c. K. Fabric: Leave approximately 2-in. between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. L. Stretcher Bars: Secure at end, corner, pull, and gate posts by threading through or clamping to fabric at 4-inches o.c., and secure to posts with metal bands spaced at 15-inches o.c. M. Tie Wires: 1. Use U-shaped wire, conforming to diameter of pipe to which attached, 9PP clas in pipe and P fabric firmly when ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons or clothing. 2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12-inches o.c. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced 24-inches o.c. Tie fabric to tension wires with hog rings spaced 24- inches o.c. 3. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durability. N. Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. O. Gates: Install gates plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubrication. 3.05 MISCELLANEOUS INSTALLATION �+++ A. Use U-shape tie wires, conforming to the diameters of pipe, that clasp the pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least 2 full turns. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specifications Revised 02/14/2000 02821-4 Specification Name: CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES P. Ready Mix Concrete: ASTM C94, mix design as follows: 1. Mix -oncrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C94. 2. Des gn mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing admixture, air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following: a. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings. b. Slump Range: 1 to 3-inches at time of placement C. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent Q. Water: Clean R. Swinging Gate Hardware: 1. Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type, offset to permit full 180 degree gato opening. Provide a pair of 1 1/2-inch hinges for each leaf over 6'-0" nominal height. 2. Latch: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from either side of gate,with padlock eye as integral part of latch. S. Double Gatas Hardware: Provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type of flush plate with anchors set in concrete, to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Include locking device and padlock eye as integral part of latch, using 1 padlock for locking both gate leaves. T. Sliding Gate: Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard heavy-duty track, ball-bearing hanger sheaves, overhead framing and supports, guides, stays, bracing, and accessories as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GATE FABRICATION A. Fabricate swing gate perimeter frames of 1.90-inch OD pipe, galvanized steel. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space frame members maximum of 8'-0"apart. B. Assemble gate frames by welding or special fittings and rivets,for rigid connections. Install same fabric as for fence with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Install diagonal cross-bracing on gates as required ensuring rigid frame without sag or twist. Bars may be used at top and bottom edges. Attach stretchers to gate frame at 15-inches o.c. maximum. C. Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 3.02 FINISH A. Fabric Finish: Galvanized,ASTM A 392, Class I,with not less than 1.2 oz zinc/sq.ft of surface. B. Framing: Galvanized steel, ASTM A120 or A123,with not less than 1.8 oz zinc/sq.ft of surface. C. Hardware and Accessories: Galvanized,ASTM A153 with zinc weights in accordance with Table I. 3.03 CONCRETE MIXING A. Mix materials to obtain concrete with minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2,500 psi; 1-inch maximurr size aggregate, maximum 3-inch slump, and 2-4 percent entrained air. 3.04 INSTALLATION Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specifications Revised 02/1412000 02821-3 Specification Name: CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 1. No. 9 gage, 0.148"t 0.00",finished size galvanized steel wires, 2-inch mesh, top and bottom selvages twisted and barbed conforming to ASTM A392, A491, F668, or F573. 2. Furnish 1-piece fabric widths for fencing. B. End, Corner, and Pull Posts: Galvanized steel, minimum sizes and weights conforming to ASTM A120 as follows: 1. Up to 6'-0" Fabric Height: 2.5"pipe (2.375-inch OD), 3.12-pounds per lineal foot, or 3.5- inch x 3.5-inch roll-formed section, 4.85-pounds per lineal foot. 2. Over 6'-0" Fabric Height: 3.0"pipe (2.875-inch OD), 4.85-pounds per lineal foot, or 3.5- inch x 3.5-inch roll-formed section, 4.85-pounds per lineal foot. C. Line Posts: Galvanized steel, minimum sizes and weights conforming to ASTM A120 as follows: .w 1. Up to 6'-0" Fabric Height: 2.0" pipe (1.90-inch OD), 2.28pounds per lineal foot or 1.875- inch x 1.625-inch C-section, 2.28-pounds per lineal foot. 2. Over 6'-0"to 8'-0" Fabric Height: 2.5"pipe (2.375-inch OD), 3.12-pounds per lineal foot or 2.25-inch x 1.875-inch H-section, 2.64-pounds per lineal foot. 3. Over 8'-0" Fabric Height: 3.0"pipe (2.875-inch OD), 4.85-pounds per lineal foot or 2.25- inch x 1.875-inch H-section, 3.26-pounds per lineal foot. D. Gate Posts: Galvanized steel posts for supporting single gate leaf or 1 leaf of double gate installation, for nominal gate widths conforming to ASTM A120 as follows: 1. Up to 6'-0": 3.0"pipe(2.875-inch OD), 4.85-pounds per lineal foot, or 3.5-inch x 3.5-inch roll-formed section,4.85-pounds per lineal foot. 2. Over 6'-0"to 13'-0": 4.00-inch OD pipe, 9.11-pounds per lineal foot. E. Top Rail: Rails: 1 E'(1.66-inch OD), 1.84-pounds per lineal foot or 1.625-inch x 1.25-inch roll-formed sections, 1.35-pounds per lineal foot; galvanized steel, manufacturer's longest lengths conforming to ASTM A120. F. Couplings: Expansion type, approximately 6-inches long, for each joint. G. Attaching Devices: Provide means for attaching top rail securely to each gate corner, pull, and end post. H. Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe not less than 6-inches long with inside diameter not less than 1/2- inch greater than outside diameter of pipe. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeve of width and length not less than 1-inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. I. Tension Wire: 7 gage galvanized steel, coated coil spring wire, located at bottom of fabric conforming to ASTM A116. R J. Wire Ties: Class 1 galvanized steel, no less than 9 gage. K. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end of gate posts and at both go sides of corner and pull posts, with horizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. Use same material as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375-inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener. .w L. Post Tops: Galvanized steel,weather tight closure cap for each tubular post. Furnish caps with openings to permit passage of top rail. M. Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, 1 piece lengths equal to full height of fabric, with minimum cross-section of 3/16-inch x 3/4-inch. Provide 1 stretch bar for each gate and end post, and 2 for each corner and pull post. N. Stretch Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard 0. Gate Cross-bracing: 3/8-inch diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specifications Revised 02/14/2000 02821-2 Specification Name: CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PARTI GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of chain link fences and gates units provided by single source including erection accessories fittings, and fastenings. B. Refer to architectural building plans for fencing attached to building. 1.02 RELATED SECTIO14S B. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANIDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)latest edition 1. A116 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric 2. A 120 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized)Welded and Seamless,for Ordinary Uses 3. A 121 Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)Steel Barbed Wire 4. A 123 Zinc(Hot Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products 5. A 153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware ;= 6. A 392 Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric 7. A 428 Weight of Coating on Aluminum-Coated Iron or Steel Articles 8. A 491 Aluminum-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric 9. A E69 Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled, Sheet and Strip Commercial Quality 10. A°185 Aluminum Coated Steel Barbed Wire 11. C 94 Ready-Mixed Concrete ter; 12. F 668 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric 13. F 567 Installation of Chain-Link Fence 14. F 573 Residential Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric B. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (CLFMI) latest edition Product Manual 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of property perimeter posts relative to property lines and easements. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS � A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of following or approved equal: 1. Allied Tube and Conduit Corp. 2. Anchor Fence, Inc. 3. United States Steel 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fabric: Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specifications Revised 02114/2000 02821-1 Specification Name: CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES BLANK PAGE .as D. Grade backf Iled trench uniform with surrounding grades. 3.10 BACKFLOW PREVE:NTOR A. Comply with local codes for installation of backflow preventor. In absence of local codes, minimum requirement.i shall be to set in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Provide combination of drains and quick coupler valves to accommodate winterization of entire system by forced air. Submit materials/methods to Owner for consideration and receive approval prior to installation of work. 3.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Location and installation shall be as shown on Construction Drawings and approved by Owner prior to installation. B. Provide rigid conduits for both power supply and control wiring. 1. Control wire conduit shall extend to 18-inches below grade. 2. Secure conduit to wall with anchors and screws. C. Provide electrical grounding for controller in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. END OF SECTION 02810 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-9 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS C. Locate within valve box with 6-inch deep layer of coarse gravel beneath bottom of valve. D. Top of quick coupler valves shall be 6-inches to top of valve box. Top of gravel layer shall be 3- inches below top of valve. E. Master Valve(if provided on Construction Drawings): 1. Locate immediately behind backflow preventor. 2. Valve shall be energized by master valve circuit on automatic controller. 3.07 SPRINKLERS A. Install plumb to within 1/16-inch,with top collar, not nozzle, flush with finish grade. B. Provide swing joint with each sprinkler, except where entire head is raised above grade and/or where rigid riser piping is required. C. Heads adjacent to paving and curb: Locate between 6-inch and 12-inches from edge of paving or back of curb to prevent car overhang to conflict with a fully extended sprinkler. 3.08 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS AND CONTROL WIRE A. Shall be in strict accordance with latest edition of National Electrical Code (NEC) and local electrical codes. B. Provide electrical connection to system as designated on Construction Drawings and as specified herein. C. General: 1. Do not run control and power supply wiring in same conduit. 2. Provide continuous runs of wire between controller and valves. Splices shall be made with one of following: a. Watertight below ground electrical junction boxes. b. Water-tight connectors, such as utilized for valves, and located within valve box for X% ease of locating. C. The location of any and all electrical splices shall be shown on the As-Built provided for herein in 1.06A. 3. Bury control wire beside pipe in same trench. Bundle and tape together at not more than 10-ft intervals. D. Expansion Loops: Constructed by wrapping wire around 1/2-inch diameter pipe to create coil. A 3- foot section of wire shall be used to create 12-inch coil with 6-foot section being used to create 24- inch coil. 1. Provide 12-inch coils at each wire splice, not including valves, and at each change of wire direction. Mo 2. Provide 24-inch coils at each control valve and where each valve enters conduit for automatic controller. 3.09 BACKFILLING A. Sand or fine-grained soils should be used for initial backfill to sufficient depth to prevent damage to pipe from rocks or other debris during compaction of subsequent backfill. B. Fill trench to within 3-inches of finish grade with excavated soil and compact in accordance with Section 02322. .M C. Fill top 3-inches with existing topsoil in planting or turf areas and wheel roll until compaction of backfill is same as surrounding soil. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-8 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS M" D. Excavate trenches deeper than required in soils containing rock or other hard material that might damage pipo. Backfill to proper depth with selected fine earth or sand. E. Keep trenches free of obstructions and debris that would damage pipe. F. Avoid heatir g trenches, electric ducts, storm and sanitary sewer lines, water and gas mains when trenching for piping. 1 G. Do not cut c;idewalks, paved areas, or curb and gutter when trenching for piping unless otherwise f noted on the: Construction Drawings. 1. Provide sleeves (as specified in 2.03 A. above)under paving prior to installation of paving. 2. Uncer existing paving, auger bore or tunnel without disturbing existing pavement above. Any damaged pavement will be removed and replaced according to specification Section 02740 or 02751. 3.03 PIPING SYSTEM A. Minimum cover from top of piping to finished grade shall be provided as follows: 1. Lamm and planting areas: a. Mains and Control Valves: 18-inches b. Laterals: 12-inches 2. Drives or parking areas: 24 inches B. Clearances: Minimum of 3-inches horizontal clearance between parallel lines in same trench or vertical cleeirance between lines crossing at angles. C. Special Requirements-PVC and PE pipe: 1. Snake in trench at least 1-foot per 100-feet of pipe to allow for thermal expansion. - 2. Pipe laterals to drain to low point drains located at lowest elevations of each zone. 3.04 SLEEVING A. Provide sleeves for both piping and control wiring where either passes under paved surfaces: 1. Depths of sleeves shall be same as that required for piping at each location or condition. 2. Extend sleeves 12-inches beyond paving at each end. 3. Install permanent benchmark at top of curbs for reference to sleeve locations. 3.05 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Do not lay pipe on unstable material or blocking, or when in opinion of Owner conditions are unsuitable. B. Rest full leigth of pipe section on bed of trench, excavating recesses to accommodate joints. C. Hold pipe :securely while joints are being made. D. Threaded Plastic Pipe: 1. Do not use solvent cement on threaded joints. 2. Wrap joints with Teflon tape or use virgin Teflon lubricant. E. Bell and Socket Plastic Pipe: Cemented joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. 3.06 VALVES A. Do not locate beneath paved surfaces. B. Install plumb to within 1/16-inch. Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma:iter Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-7 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS A. Number 14-size minimum copper wire, U. L. approved pproved for underground direct burial. 1. Colored wire shall have same color-coding as shown on controller. 2. Provide single wire from controller to each valve. 3. Provide common neutral from controller to each valve. 2.14 BACKFLOW PREVENTOR A. Comply with requirements and codes of local governing authority regarding backflow prevention. B. Provide the necessary materials, insulation/draining capabilities, and insulated fiberglass enclosure, dark green in color. C. Backflow preventors shall be type suitable for use in high hazard cross connection to potable water system as manufactured by Watts Regulator Company, Lawrence, Ma., or approved equal: 1. Reduced pressure backflow preventors shall be No. 909 series Reduced Pressure .. Principle Backflow Preventor, or approved equal. 2. Double check valve assembly backflow preventors shall be No. 709 series Double Check Valve Assembly, or approved equal. 3. In absence of local codes or requirements, double check assembly backflow preventor installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written instructions shall be considered as minimum requirement. 2.15 RAINFALL SENSOR A. Provide rainfall sensor to cancel operation of controller during substantial rainfall. Acceptable �e products include: 1. Mini-Click Rain Sensor manufactured by Glen-Hilton 2. Approved equal as manufactured by entities specified in 2.01 above. •" 2.16 METER A. Meter box shall meet or exceed requirements set forth by local utility company. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Pressure/Flow Test: Conduct tests at the irrigation water tap or meter location and provide written results to Owner including the following information: 1. Static pressure in psi 2. Residual pressure in psi 3. Flow in gpm B. Prior to installation, receive approval from General Contractor to proceed with construction. C. Contractor shall field verify all aboveground and underground utilities prior to start of work. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate trench to proper depth. B. Minimum trench width shall be 3 1/2-inches. C. Backfill and hand tamp over excavation prior to installing piping. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-6 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 2.08 MASTER VALVES A. Shall be elegy:tric control valve as specified herein. B. Size of valve: shall be same as diameter of main line pipe as noted on Construction Drawings. C. Provide watertight connectors as Scotch Lock or Rain Bird Snap Tight connectors with sealant for wiring connections. 2.09 SPRINKLER HEADSO A. Full or part Circle Pop-Up Fixed Spray Sprinkler: 1. If not specified on Construction Drawings, pop-up heights shall be: a. Turf-4-inches b. Shrub and groundcover beds- 12-inches 2. Acceptable Products: a. Rain Bird 1800 Series nozzles with 1800 Series sprinklers having Pressure Regulating (PRS)and Seal-A-Matic(SAM)features. b. Toro 570 Series plastic nozzles with 570C Series sprinklers having Pressure Compensating Devices (PCD)and optional check valve unit. C. Nelson 6400 Series with Anti-Drain Valves (ADV) with Pressure Compensating Screens(PCS). B. Full or Part Circle Pop-up Gear Driven Rotor Sprinkler. 1. Acceptable Products: a. Rain Bird Turf Bird Rotor Pop-up Sprinkler Series, R-50C Commercial Series, R-70 Series,with Seal-A-Matic(SAM)check valve. b. Toro Super 700 Sprinklers Series S700C Commercial, with check valve. C. Nelson Pro 6000 and 6500 Series Gear Drives with Anti-Drain Valves (ADV). 2.10 VALVE BOX A. Valve boxers shall be manufactured by Ametek, Plymouth Products Division, Sheboygan WI., or approved Equal. No irrigation valve box shall be placed in pavement areas unless otherwise specified o!i the Construction Drawings. 1. When used with single valve, provide Economy Turf Box with green colored snap fit cover labeled"Valve Box". 2. When used with 2 or more valves, provide Jumbo Box with 20-inch x 14-inch cover op aning with cover labeled"Control Valve". 2.11 LOW POINT DRAI VS A. Required on all zones. Automatic drain valves shall be Rain Bird Model Number 16A, FDV, or approved oqual. B. Provide 2 at lowest points of each zone, with each drain installed above a 12-inch x 12-inch x 12- inch deep area of coarse gravel. 2.12 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER A. Controller shall have wall mount, weatherproof, lockable cabinet with internal transformer. Acceptably, products include: 1. Rein Bird RC-4C, RC-7C, RC-1260C. 2. Taro 170 Series Monitor II Controller <., 3. Nelson 8900 Series Controller 2.13 CONTROL WIRE Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-5 Specification Name: IRRIGA710N SYSTEMS D. Pipe sizes 2 1/2-inch or smaller shall have bell and socket joints. E. Pipe sizes larger than 2 1/2-inch shall have snap connections with rubber gasket joints. Thrust blocking shall be required in accordance with Section 02510. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Sleeves: Sleeves shall conform to ASTM D2241, Schedule 40. Minimum diameter of 2-inch or 2 sizes larger than pipe scheduled to pass through them. B. Plastic Fittings: 1. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2241, Schedule 40, and Molded. 3. Flexible Polyethylene (PE) Lateral Line Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASTM D2609 Type 1 PVC insert fittings designed for used with this type of pipe. Pipe and fittings shal, be joined with stainless steel pinch clamps or worm gear clamps, including stainless steel screw. 4. Risers above finished grade shall be black in color or receive 2 coats of black exterior semi-gloss enamel paint if a color other than black. C. PVC Solvent Cement: Cement shall conform to ASTM D2564. D. Swing Joint Connections: Connections between heads and laterals shall be thick wall, flexible, polyethylene pipe, with fittings that have male barbs on one end and either male or female screw ends opposite. Glue fittings and female barb adapters are not allowed. 2.04 BALL VALVES-3-Inches or Smaller A. Cut off or isolation valves shall be as manufactured by Red-White Valve Corporation, Carson, CA. '" or approved equal. 2.05 MECHANICAL JOINT VALVES- Larger than 3-Inches A. Cut off or isolation valves shall be of cast iron and bronze construction and have fusion bonded epoxy coated, exterior and interior, finish as Resilient Wedge Valve, manufactured by Clow Valve Co., Oskaloosa, Iowa or approved equal. B. Provide with each valve a valve key and cast iron cylindrical valve box with top. 2.06 QUICK COUPLER VALVES A. Each with key having 3/4-inch male top pipe threads for hose connection, shall be one of following: 1. Rain Bird model 44NP Valve with model 33K Key 2. Toro 470 Series Valve and Coupler Key 3. Nelson Model 7643 Valve with Model 7640 Coupler Key and Model 8649 Locking Top Wrench. ..r 2.07 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES A. Rain Bird PEB Series electric remote control valves B. Toro 252 Series plastic valves C. Nelson Model 7900 Series plastic valves D. Provide watertight connectors as Scotch Lock or Rain Bird Snap Tight connectors with sealant for wiring connections. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-4 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS .w B. If irrigation work is part of General Construction Contract, then meter shall be provided by Plumbing Subcontractor in accordance with Section 02510. If irrigation work is not part of General Construction Contract, General Contractor shall contract with and pay local utility company, including meter deposit, to tap water main and install meter(s)required. C. Cutting and patching is not permitted. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Minimum of 3 consecutive years experience in area of project and having installed other jobs of similar size and scope. B. Provide minimum of 3 references and list of similar projects with owner's names, addresses, and telephone r umbers,when requested by Owner. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Once each month, for first 6 months of operation following Final Acceptance, provide on-site consultation with Owner's operating personnel. This shall include up to 4 hours time each month. B. Maintenance agreement: 1. Prier to beginning installation, execute bonded, written Extended 2-Year Maintenance Ag-eemert with Owner for period of 2 years from date of Final Acceptance for the following: a. Spring start-up of system in accordance with Section 02900. b. Monthly checks of system during operating season. C. Winterization of system in accordance with Section 02900. 2. Costs for additional work required for repair of items not covered by warranty (e.g. damage by others) shall be negotiated between Owner and Contractor prior to initiation of any repairs. 3. Ccsts for Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement are over and above Contract Sum, and shall not be included in construction price. Payment for extended maintenance by Owner shall occur upon completion of scheduled service and additional work, if any, as it occurs on monthly basis throughout duration of Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement. PART 2 PRODUCI'S 2.01 GENERAL A. Acceptable; manufacturers shall include: 1. Rein Bird Sales, Inc. -Turf Division iP 2. The Toro Company- Irrigation Division 3. L.R. Nelson Corporation -Turf Division 2.02 PIPE OR A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe over 1 inch diameter shall conform to ASTM D2241, SDR 21, and Class 200. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): Pipe 1-inch diameter and under shall conform to ASTM D2241, SDR 13.5, and Class 315. C. Flexible Polyethylene (PE): Pipe shall conform to ASTM D2239, SDR 11.5, PE23, rated at 100 PSI, National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved. Subject to approval of Owner, shall be utilized far laterals in areas where ground is subject to freezing for extended periods of time each year. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-3 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS C. Following final adjustment, operate entire installation to demonstrate complete and successful .w operation of equipment. D. Guarantee installation for 1 year from date of final acceptance for the following: 1. Defects in material, equipment, and workmanship. 2. Repair of damage to premises resulting from leaks or other defects in material, equipment, and workmanship to satisfaction of Owner. E. Repairs, if required, shall be done promptly at no cost to Owner. F. Parts Manufacturers'warranties shall be provided to Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals: 1. Required for items specified herein. Provide 5 copies of each to Owner for review. 2. Do not proceed with purchase or installation of materials prior to receipt of approved submittals from Owner. B. Substitutions shall be made only with written approval of Owner. Substitutions will not be considered prior to opening of bids. 1. Substitution of specified irrigation heads after awarding of bid shall require piping diagram noting revised pipe sizes, pressure loss calculations, and head locations necessary to achieve desired watering provided by system as shown on Construction Drawings. 2. Provide 5 copies each of product data for requested substitutions to Owner for review. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. As-built drawings: 2 sets, noting exact locations of elements and changes to Construction Drawings. B. Operation Manual: 2 copies, bound in 1-inch diameter three ring binders, indexed and tabbed for easy reference, and labeled on spine and cover. Manual is to include following: ■" 1. Approved submittals as specified herein. 2. Installation instructions including mounting details for control valves. 3. Operating Instructions: a. Winterization procedures b. Recommended operation sequence, frequency, and length of operation cycle, as per relationship to estimated absorption rate, evaporation rate, and anticipated flow. 4. Maintenance Instructions: a. Manufacturers'product data, installation, and maintenance instructions. b. Copies of completed warranty information. Contractor to complete and mail necessary warranty registration information to manufacturer keeping copies for Owner. C. Controller Chart: Prepare color coded chart, reduced in size, containing same plan information as As-Built drawings, and laminated in plastic on both sides,with following specific information: 1. Note routing of control wires. 2. Identify valves as to size, station number shown on controller, and type of irrigation head (e.g. spray head, turf head)on each valve. • 3. Delineate each station's limits of coverage by color-coding, with each station having different color showing its zone with zone number designation. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Visit site and become familiar with nature and location of work, existing conditions, and conditions that will exist during installation. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-2 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS t SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Installation of underground, automatically controlled lawn and shrub bed irrigation system, including electrical connections, connections to water mains, and necessary accessories. B. Provide and execute Extended 2-Year Maintenance Agreement. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02322- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities B. Section 02510-Water Distribution Systems C. Section 02740—Asphaltic Concrete Paving D. Section 02751 —Portland Cement Concrete Paving E. Section 02900- Planting F. Constructioi Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition 1. D2:239 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter 2. D2241 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR-Series) 3. D2564 Solvent Cement for poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings 3. D2509 Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE)Plastic Pipe 4. D2B55 Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Pipe and Fittings B. National Fi•e Protection Agency(NFPA)latest edition 1. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 1.04 QUALITY ASSURJkNCE A. Perform piping installation in accordance with Section 02510 or as specified on the Construction Drawings. B. Following installation, make final adjustments to lawn irrigation system prior to Owner's final inspection 1. Flash system completely,with nozzles and screens removed, to extract debris. 2. Verify sprinkler operation and alignment for direction of throw. Correct as necessary at no rr additional cost to the Owner. 3. Check pop-up spray nozzling for proper arc of spray with no overthrow onto pavement. Adjust nozzles as necessary for proper throw with no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Insure uniform distribution exists. 5. Insure proper sprinkler head operational after landscaping and/or sod installation. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02810-1 Specification Name: IRRIGATION SYSTEMS BLANK PAGE . w B. Work edges of sidewalks,gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with edging tool, rounding edge to 1/2-inch radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and trowelling, when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: 1. Curs,gutters, and sidewalks: Broom finish by drawing fine-hair broom across surface perpendicular to flow of traffic. Repeat operation as necessary to produce fine line texture. C. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints anc point up minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed Owner. D. Protect and cure finished concrete paving using acceptable moist-curing methods, more particularly described in "water-curing"section of ACI 308. 3.04 BACKFILL A. After concrete has set sufficiently, spaces on either side of concrete curb, combination concrete curb and glitter, or concrete sidewalk shall be refilled to required elevation with suitable material compacted in accordance with Section 02323. 3.05 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. B. Protect cor crete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials. END OF SECTION 02770 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02770-5 Specification Name: CURBS AND SIDEWALKS •s 4. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. B. Reinforcement: Fasten reinforcing bars or welded wire fabric(if required)accurately and securely in place with suitable supports and ties. Remove from reinforcement all dirt, oil, loose mill scale, on rust, and other substances that will prevent proper bonding of the concrete to the reinforcement. C. Concrete Placement 1. Concrete may be mixed and placed when the air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat is a minimum of 35 degrees F and rising. Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305R and 306R, respectively. 2. Do not place concrete until base material and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten base material if required to provide uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until set at required finish elevation and alignment. 3. Place concrete using methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. 4. Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place construction joint. Automatic machine may be used for curb and gutter placement. Machine placement shall be at required cross section, line, grade, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete as specified herein. D. Joint Construction 1. Contraction Joints: Construct concrete curb or combination concrete curb and gutter, where specified on Construction Drawings, in uniform sections of length specified on - Construction Drawings. Form joints between sections either by steel templates, 1/8-inch in thickness, of length equal to width of curb and gutter, and with depth which will penetrate at least 2-inches below surface of curb and gutter; or with 3/4-inch thick performed expansion joint filler cut to exact cross section of curb and gutter; or by sawing to depth of at least 2- inches while concrete is between 4 and 24 hours old. If steel templates are used, they shall be left in place until concrete has set enough to hold it's shape, but shall be removed while forms are still in place. 2. Longitudinal Construction Joints: Tie concrete curb or combination concrete curb and gutter, where specified on Construction Drawings, to concrete pavement with 1/2-inch w" round deformed reinforcement bars of length and spacing shown on Construction Drawings. 3. Transverse Expansion Joints: Concrete curb, combination concrete curb and gutter, or concrete sidewalk shall have filler cut to exact cross section of curb, gutter, or sidewalk. �w Joints shall be similar to type of expansion joint used in adjacent pavement. E. Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 04 1-inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being placed,wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. F. Joint Sealants: Seal joints with approved exterior pavement joint sealants. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with 10'-0"straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide continuous smooth finish. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02770-4 Specification Name: CURBS AND SIDEWALKS WX E. Joint Fillers: Resilient premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with ASTM D994, D175' , D2628; FS HH-F-341,Type II, Class A or approved equal. F. Joint Sealan:s: Conforming to ASTM D1190, non-priming, pourable, self-leveling polyurethane. Acceptable sealants are Sonneborn "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant", Sonneborn "Sonomeric CT ry1 Sealant", �11conneborn "Sonomeric CT 2 Sealant", Mameco"Vulken 245", or Woodmont Products "Chem-Caullc"or approved equal. G. Aggregate: Shall conform to ASTM C33. t H. Water: Shall be clean and potable 1. Dowel Bars: Shall conform to ASTM A615, grade 60, and plain steel bars. J. Air Entraining Mixture: Shall conform to ASTM C260 (Sika AER by Sika Corporation, Air Mix by the Euclid Chemical Corporation or approved equal). K. Curing Compound: Shall conform to ASTM C309 (Hydrocide by Sonneborn of Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc., and Polyseal 4 in 1 by Chem Masters Corporation or approved equal. L. Joint Backu:) Rods: Shall be CCEVA Rod 100 by E-Poxy Industrials, Inc., Sealtight BACKER ROPE by W.R. Meadows, Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 MIX DESIGN AND'TESTING A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Design mix to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-reducing admixture, air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following: 1. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings. 2. Slump Range: 2"4'for hand placed concrete, 1-1/4"to 3"for machine placed (slipform) concrete 3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Proofroll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas. Begin paving work only after unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce firm, smooth surface immediate y before placing concrete. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Form Construction 1. Sett forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. 2. Imitall sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain in place minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement. 3. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: a. Top of forms not more than 1/8-inch in 10'-0" b. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10'-0" Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02770-3 Specification Name: CURB AND SIDEWALKS ■w 16. D2628 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements C. State Highway Department Standard Specifications 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. B. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable work as directed by Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit materials certificate which materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, requirements specified herein to the Engineering Consultant of Record and the independent testing laboratory for review and approval for the following items: With 7 calendar days after receipt of Notice-to-Proceed, submit for approval, certified laboratory test data or manufacturers certificates and data for the following items: 1. Portland cement concrete mix 2. Aggregate gradations ■" 3. Preformed expansion joint filler 4. Field molded/poured sealant 5. Dowel bars 6. Expansion sleeves 7. Tie bars 8. Reinforcing steel bars 9. Welded wire fabric 10. Air entraining admixtures 11. Water-reducing and set-retarding admixtures (if used) 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary striping,flagmen, barricades,warning signs, and warning lights as required. 0 PART2 PRODUCTS w 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Forms shall be of depth equal to depth of curbing or sidewalk,and so designed as to permit secure fastening together at tops. Coat forms with nonstaining type of coating that will not discolor or deface surface of concrete. B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric,ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat sheets. C. Reinforcing Steel: Deformed steel bars,ASTM A 615, Grade 60. D. Portland Cement: Shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02770-2 Specification Name: CURBS AND SIDEWALKS SECTION 02770 CURBS AND SIDEWALKS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation and placement of combination portland cement concrete curb and gutter. B. Preparation and placement of portland cement concrete curb. C. Preparation and placement of portland cement concrete sidewalk. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02323- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Pavements B. Section 02324- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Out Parcels C. Section 02715- Base Course D. Section 02740—Asphlatic Concrete Paving E. Section 02765—Pavement Markings F. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STA14DARDS A. American Concrete Institute(ACI) latest edition 1. 211.1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete 2. 304R Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 3. 305R Hot Weather Concreting 4. 3013R Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting 3. 303 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete B. American ;standards for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition 1. A185 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement 2. AE 15 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement 3. C":!3 Concrete Aggregates 4. C78 Method for Flexural Strength Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third- point Loading) 5. C94 Ready-Mixed Concrete 6. C'143 Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 7. C1150 Portland Cement 8. C-171 Sheet Material for Curing Concrete 9. C231 Air-Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 10. 0260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 11. C 309 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 12. C 494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 13. D994 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous) 14. D1190 Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot Poured, Elastic Type 15. D1751 Performed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma Ater Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02770-1 Specification Name: CURBSS AND SIDEWALKS an A. Examine the work area and correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. an 3.02 PREPARATION OR A. Sweep and clean surface to eliminate loose material and dust. B. Where existing pavement markings are indicated on Construction Drawings to be removed or would interfere with adhesion of new paint, a motorized abrasive device shall be used to remove "R the markings. Equipment employed shall not damage existing paving or create surfaces hazardous to vehicle or pedestrian traffic. Within public rights-of-way, appropriate governing authority shall approve method of marking removal. C. New pavement surfaces shall be allowed to cure for a period of no fewer than 30 days before application of marking materials. no 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply two coats of paint at manufacturer's recommended rate, without addition of thinner,with maximum of 100 square feet per gallon. Apply with mechanical equipment to produce uniform straight edges. At sidewalk curbs and crosswalks, use straightedge to ensure uniform, clean, and straight stripe. B. Install pavement markings according to manufacturer's recommended procedures for the specified material. C. Following items shall be painted with colors noted below: MR 1. Pedestrian Crosswalks: White 2. Exterior Sidewalk Curbs, Light Pole Bases, and Guard posts: Yellow 3. Fire Lanes: Red or per local code 4. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in opposite directions: Yellow 5. Lane Striping where separating traffic moving in the same direction: White 6. Handicap Symbols: Blue or per local code 7. Parking Stall Striping: Yellow, unless otherwise noted on Construction Drawings 8. Associate Parking Area: White, unless otherwise noted on Construction Drawings 3.04 INSPECTION AND CLEAN UP A. After the paint has thoroughly dried, visually inspect the entire application and touch up as required to provide clean, straight lines and surfaces throughout. B. Waste materials shall be removed at the end of each workday. Upon completion of the work, all containers and debris shall be removed from the site. Paint spots upon adjacent surfaces shall be carefully removed by approved procedures that will not damage the surfaces and the entire job left clean and acceptable. END OF SECTION 02765 'o OR an Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02765-2 Specification Name: PAVEMENT MARKINGS SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation and application of painted parking lot pavement markings. B. Preparation and application of paint on curbs, guard posts, and light pole bases. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02740-Asphaltic Concrete Paving B. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving C. Section 0270 -Curbs and Sidewalks D. Constructicn Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Federal Specifications and Standards 1. A_4 2886A Paint, Traffic, Solvent Based (supersedes FS TT-P-85E and FS TT-P-_ 11517,Type 1) B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation (AASHTO) 1. AA.SHTO M248 Ready-Mixed White and Yellow Traffic Paints 1.04 PROJECT CONDfrIONS �r A. Maintain af;cess for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize flaginen, barricades,warning signs, and warning lights as required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSUR)kNCE A. Use trained and experienced personnel in applying the products and operating the equipment required fcr properly performed work. PART 2 PRODUCT'S 2.01 MATERIALS A. Paint shall be non-bleeding, quick-drying, and alkyd petroleum base paint suitable for traffic-bearing surface and be mixed in accordance with manufacture's instructions before application for colors White,Yellow, Blue, and Red. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02765-1 Specification Name: PAVEMENT MARKINGS w .w BLANK PAGE wr 2. Paring: Provide coarse, nonslip finish by scoring surface with stiff-bristled broom perpendicular to flow of traffic so as to produce regular corrugations not over 1/16 of an inch deep. IF C. Do not rem eve forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints anti point up minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Owner. D. Protect anc cure finished concrete paving using acceptable moist-curing methods, more particularly described in "water-curing"section of ACI 308. 3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and other foreign material just prior to final inspection. B. Protect cor Crete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The independent testing laboratory will randomly core pavement at minimum rate of 1 core per 20,000 sq. ft of pavement,with minimum of 3 cores from heavy-duty areas and 3 cores from light duty areas. Core will be tested for thickness and quality of aggregate distribution. Core holes shall be patchec immediately with portland cement concrete and shall be finished to provide level surface as specified herein. END OF SECTION 02751 Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma:;ter Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02751-5 Specification Name: PORTL4,ND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING C. Concrete Placement 1. Concrete may be mixed and placed when the air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat is a minimum of 35 degrees F and rising. Hot and cold weather concreting shall be in accordance with ACI 305R and 306R, respectively. 2. Do not place concrete until base material and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten base material if required to provide uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Concrete shall not be placed around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish elevation and alignment. 3. Place concrete using methods that prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. 4. Deposit and spread concrete in continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible. If interrupted for more than 1/2 hour, place construction joint. D. Joint Construction: Construct expansion,weakened-plane control (contraction), and construction ..� joints straight with face perpendicular to concrete surface. Construct transverse joints perpendicular to centerline, unless otherwise detailed. 1. Weakened-Plane Control or Contraction Joints: Provide joints at spacing of 15'-0"on centers, maximum each way. Construct control joints for depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: a. Form tooled joints in fresh concrete by grooving top with recommended tool and finishing edge with jointer. b. Form sawed joints using powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or otherwise damaged by cutting action. 2. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for period of more than 1/2 hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. Construct joints using standard metal keyway-section forms. 3. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints at maximum of 180'-0" on centers, maximum each way unless otherwise shown on the Construction Drawings. Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, sidewalks, and other fixed objects. E. Joint Fillers: Extend joint fillers full-width and depth of joint, and not less than 1/2-inch or more than 1-inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for full width being placed,wherever possible. Where more than 1 length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. F. Joint Sealants: Joints shall be sealed with approved exterior pavement joint sealants and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screeding and floating. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with 10'-0"straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities and refloat no repaired areas to provide continuous smooth finish. B. Work edges of slabs and formed joints with edging tool, rounding edge to 1/2-inch radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. After completion of floating and trowelling,when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing, as follows: 1. Inclined Slab Surfaces: Provide coarse, nonslip finish by scoring surface with stiff-bristled broom perpendicular to flow of traffic so as to produce regular corrugations not over 1/16 of 0" an inch deep. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02751-4 Specification Name: PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING W 1 Sealant", Sonneborn "Sonomeric CT 2 Sealant", Mameco"Vulken 245", or Woodmont Products "Chem-CaLilk"or approved equal. G. Aggregate: Shall conform to ASTM C33. H. Water: Shall be clean and potable I. Dowel Bar;;: Shall conform to ASTM A615, grade 60, and plain steel bars. J. Air Entraining Mixture: Shall conform to ASTM C260 (Sika AER by Sika Corporation, Air Mix by the Euclid Chemical Corporation or approved equal). K. Curing Compound: Shall conform to ASTM C309 (Hydrocide by Sonneborn of Rexnord Chemical Products, Inc., and Polyseal 4 in 1 by Chem Masters Corporation or approved equal. L. Joint Backup Rods: Shall be CCEVA Rod 100 by E-Poxy Industrials, Inc., Sealtight BACKER ROPE by W.R. Meadows, Inc. or approved equal. 2.02 MIX DESIGN AND TESTING A. Mix concrete and deliver in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Design min to produce normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water-redu,-ing admixture, air-entraining admixture, and water to produce following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi, minimum at 28 days, unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings. 2. Slump Range: 2"4"for hand placed concrete, 1-1/4"to 3"for machine placed (slipform) concrete 3. Air Entrainment: 5 to 8 percent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Proofroll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas. Paving work shall begin only after unsui:able areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface to produce firm, smooth surface immediately before placing concrete. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Form Construction 1. Set forms to required grades and lines, rigidly braced and secured. 2. Install sufficient quantity of forms to allow continuance of work and so that forms remain in plaice minimum of 24 hours after concrete placement. 3. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: a. Top of forms not more than 1/8-inch in 10'-0" b. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4-inch in 10'-0" 4. Claan forms after each use and coat with form release agent as often as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. B. Reinforcement: Fasten reinforcing bars or welded wire fabric(if required)accurately and securely x in place with suitable supports and ties. Remove from reinforcement all dirt, oil, loose mill scale, rust, and ether substances that will prevent proper bonding of the concrete to the reinforcement. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02751-3 Specification Name: PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING C. State Highway Department Standard Specifications " 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Establish and maintain required lines and elevations. B. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner. a 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit materials certificate which materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, requirements specified herein to the Engineering Consultant of Record and the independent testing laboratory for review and approval for the following items: With 7 calendar days after receipt of Notice-to-Proceed, submit for approval, certified laboratory AN test data or manufacturers certificates and data for the following items: 1. Portland cement concrete mix 2. Aggregate gradations 3. Preformed expansion joint filler 4. Field molded/poured sealant 5. Dowel bars •� 6. Expansion sleeves 7. Tie bars 8. Reinforcing steel bars 9. Welded wire fabric 10. Air entraining admixtures 11. Water-reducing and set-retarding admixtures (if used) 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary striping,flagmen, barricades,warning signs, and warning lights as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms: Steel,wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. Coat forms with nonstaining type of coating that will not discolor or +•Ar deface surface of concrete. B. Welded Wire Mesh: Welded plain cold-drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat sheets. C. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. wr D. Portland Cement: Shall conform to ASTM C150, Type I E. Joint Fillers: Resilient premolded bituminous impregnated fiberboard units complying with ASTM D994, D1751, D2628; FS HH-F-341, Type II, Class A or approved equal. "" F. Joint Sealants: Conforming to ASTM D1190, non-priming, pourable, self-leveling polyurethane. Acceptable sealants are Sonneborn "Sonolastic Paving Joint Sealant", Sonneborn "Sonomeric CT ..� Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02751-2 Specification Name: PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02751 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation and placement of portland cement concrete parking areas. B. Preparation and placement of portland cement concrete roads and entrances. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS e A. Section 02323- Excavation, Backfill, Compaction For Pavement B. Section 02224- Excavation, Backfill, Compaction for Out Parcels C. Section 02715- Base Course D. Section 02765- Pavement Markings E. Section 02770-Curbs and Sidewalks F. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STA14DARDS A. American Concrete Institute (ACI)latest edition 1. 21' .1 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete 2. 304R Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete 3. 305R Hot Weather Concreting 4. 306R Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting 3. 3013 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete B. American %Standards for Testing and Materials(ASTM)latest edition 1. Al B5 Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement 2. A615 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement 3. C33 Concrete Aggregates 4. C78 Method for Flexural Strength Concrete (Using Simple Beam with Third- point Loading) 5. C54 Ready-Mixed Concrete 6. C143 Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete 7. C150 Portland Cement 8. C171 Sheet Material for Curing Concrete 9. C'231 Air-Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method 10. C'260 Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 11. C1109 Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete 12. 0494 Chemical Admixtures for Concrete 13. D994 Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous) 14. D'I 190 Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot Poured, Elastic Type 15. D1751 Performed Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types) 16. D;2628 Preformed Polychloroprene Elastomeric Joint Seals for Concrete Pavements Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02751-1 Specification Name: PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING Base Course Surface: 1/4-inch Wearing Course Surface: 1/8-inch .s C. Thickness Test: The average thickness of the course or the combined courses shall be within 1/4 inch of the indicated thickness. Where the deficiency is greater than the specified tolerance, remove the ON pavement and replace it with new pavement. D. Field density test for in-place materials shall be performed by examination of field cores in accordance with one of following standards: 1. AASHTO Test Method T 245 (Percent of Laboratory Density) a. Temperature equal to temperature at paving machine with reheating. b. Compactive blows (35, 50, or 75)equal to mix design blows. C. Minimum density =96% of laboratory density. 2. AASHTO Test Method T 209 (Percent of Theoretical Maximum Density) a. Minimum density = 92% of Theoretical Maximum Density. E. Rate of density testing shall be 1 core per 20,000 sq. ft of pavement, with minimum of 3 cores from heavy-duty areas and 3 cores from light duty areas. Cores shall be cut from areas representative of project. or F. Areas of insufficient compaction, smoothness and thickness shall be delineated, removed, and replaced in compliance with Specifications at no additional expense to Owner. END OF SECTION 02740 AM owl Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02740-6 Specification Name: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING operations shall be such that the required density and surface are consistently attained while the mixture is in workable condition. B. Compact mixture with hot hand tampers or vibrating plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. C. Breakdown Rolling: Accomplish breakdown or initial rolling immediately following rolling of joints and outside edge. Check surface after breakdown rolling and repair displaced areas by loosening and filling with hot material. D. Second Rollin Follow breakdown rolling as soon as possible, while mixture is hot. Continue second 9� 9 P rolling until mixture has been thoroughly compacted. E. Finish Rolling: Perform finish rolling while mixture is still warm enough for removal of roller marks. t Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has attained maximum density. F. Patching: Remove and replace paving areas mixed with foreign materials and defective areas. Cut out such areas and fill with fresh, hot asphaltic concrete. Compact by rolling to maximum surface density and smoothness. G. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled and hardened. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become marked. Any masked or marred finish surfaces shall be repaired or smoothed. 3.05 JOINTS A. General 1. PI-ace each asphaltic paving layer as continuous as possible to keep the number of joints to a minimum. Create joints between old and new pavement, between successive days'work, and where the mixture has become cold (less than 140 degrees F). Make these joints in such a manner as to create a continuous bond between the old and new pavement construction courses. 2. Wien the pavement construction involves 2 or more courses, offset successive courses by at least 6 inches. B. Transverse: Joints: If placing of material is discontinued or if material in place becomes cold, make a joint running perpendicular to the direction traveled by the paver. Before placement continues, trim the edge of the previously placed pavement to a straight line perpendicular to the paver and cut back to expose are even vertical surface for the full thickness of the course. When placement continues, position the paver on the transverse joint so that sufficient hot mixture will be spread in order to create a joint after rolling that conforms to the required smoothness. If the temperature of the previously placed pavement material drops below 140 degrees F before paving is resumed, give the exposed vertical face a thin coat of liquid asphalt just before paving is continued. C. Longitudinal Joints: Coat longitudinal joints that are not completed before the previously laid mixture has cooled to a temperature below 140 degrees F,with liquid asphalt just before paving is continued. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Asphaltic .-,urface and base courses will be randomly cored at minimum rate of 1 core per 20,000 sq. ft of paving. However, a minimum of 3 cores in light duty areas and 3 cores in heavy-duty areas shall be obtained. Coring holes shall be immediately filled with full-depth asphaltic concrete. Asphaltic concrete pavement samples will be tested for conformance with mix design. B. Testing will be performed on finished surface of each asphalt concrete course for smoothness, using 10'-0" straightedge applied parallel with, and at right angles to centerline of paved area. Results of failed tests will be sent to Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 24 hours. . Surfaces will not be accepted f the following 10-foot straightedge tolerances for smoothness are exceeded: Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma:;ter Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02740-5 Specification Name: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Prime Coat: 1. Apply bituminous prime coat to base material surfaces at least 24 hours in advance, where asphaltic concrete paving will be constructed. + 2. Apply bituminous prime coat in accordance with state highway department specifications. 3. Apply at minimum rate of 0.25 gal per sq. yd over compacted base material. Apply to penetrate and seal, but not flood surface. 4. Take necessary precautions to protect adjacent areas from over spray. 5. Cure and dry as long as necessary to attain penetration of compacted base and evaporation of volatile substances. .0 B. Tack Coat: 1. Apply to contact surfaces of previously constructed asphaltic concrete base courses or portland cement concrete and surfaces abutting or projecting into asphaltic concrete or into asphaltic concrete pavement. - 2. Apply tack coat to asphaltic concrete base course or sand asphalt base course. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat between each lift or layer of full depth asphaltic concrete and sand asphalt bases and on surface of bases where asphaltic concrete paving will be .W constructed. 3. Apply emulsified asphalt tack coat in accordance with state highway department specifications. 4. Apply at minimum rate of 0.05 gal per sq. yd of surface. 5. Allow drying until at proper condition to receive paving. 3.03 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place asphaltic concrete mixture on completed compacted subgrade surface, spread, and strike off. Spread mixture at following minimum temperatures: 1. Ambient temperature between 40 degrees Fahrenheit and 50 degrees Fahrenheit, mixture temp. = 285 degrees Fahrenheit 2. Ambient temperature between 50 degrees Fahrenheit and 60 degrees Fahrenheit, mixture temp. =280 degrees Fahrenheit 3. Ambient temperature higher than 60 degrees Fahrenheit, mixture temp. = 275 degrees Fahrenheit B. Whenever possible, spread pavement by finishing machine; however, inaccessible or irregular areas may be placed by hand methods. Spread hot mixture uniformly to required depth with hot shovels and rakes. After spreading, carefully smooth hot mixture to remove segregated course aggregate and rake marks. Rakes and lutes used for hand spreading shall be type designed for use on asphalt mixtures. Do not dump loads faster that they can be properly spread. Workers shall not stand on loose mixture while spreading. C. Paving Machine Placement: Apply successive lifts of asphaltic concrete in transverse directions with surface course placed parallel to flow of traffic. Place asphaltic paving in typical strips not less than 10'-0"wide. Where thickness of finished paving will be greater than 3 inches, spread in equal lifts of 3 inch maximum and 1 inch minimum. Where the thickness of finished paving will be 3 inches or less, spread in one layer. D. Joints: Make joints between old and new pavements, or between successive days and work in manner that will provide continuous bond between adjoining work. Construction joints shall have aw same texture, density, and smoothness as other sections of asphaltic concrete course. Clean contact surfaces of joints and apply tack coat. 3.04 ROLLING AND COMPACTION am A. Mixture, after being spread, shall be thoroughly compacted by rolling as soon as it will bear the weight of rollers without undue displacement. Number, weight, types of rollers, and sequences of rolling OR Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02740-4 Specification Name: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING C. Prime Coat: Medium curing cut-back asphalt or asphalt penetrating prime coat consisting of either MC-30 or SS-'I h. D. Tack Coat: Emulsified asphalt; AASHTO M 140 or AASHTO M 208, SS-1h, CSS-1, or CSS-1 h, diluted with 1 part water to 1 part emulsified asphalt. E. Mineral Filler: Rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or other inert material complying with AASHTO M 117, if recommended by state highway department specifications. "k F. Asphalt-Aggregate Mixture: Unless otherwise noted on Construction Drawings, Design Mix shall have minimum stability based on 75-blow Marshall complying with ASTM D 1559 of 1000 pounds with flow between O.OE and 0.16 inches. The Design Mix shall be within sieve analysis and bitumen ranges a specified below unless approved otherwise by Owner prior to placement. SIEVE ANALYSIS OF MIX Sieve No. Total Percent Passing Percent Tolerance 3/4" 100 7 1/2" 90-100 5 4 44-74 4 8 28-58 4 50 5-21 2 200 2-10 0 Percent bitumen by weight of total mix: 5.0-8.5 percent Air voids: 3 -6 percent Aggregate v yids filled with asphalt cement: 70-82 percent Allowable ve riance of bitumen by weight of total mix=0.4 percent 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. All equipment necessary for the paving of asphaltic concrete shall be on the project prior to beginning paving operations. B. Maintain equipment in satisfactory operating condition and correct breakdowns in manner that will not delay or be detrimental to the schedule of paving operations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Proofroll prepared base material surface to check for unstable areas. Paving work shall begin only after unsuitable areas have been corrected and are ready to receive paving. B. Remove loose material from compacted base material surface immediately before applying prime iL coat. C. Establish sand maintain required lines and elevations. D. Cover the surfaces of curbs, gutters, manholes and other structures the asphaltic concrete mixture will be placed against with a thin, uniform coat of liquid asphalt. Where the asphaltic concrete mixture will be placed against the vertical face of an existing pavement, clean the vertical face to remove foreign substances and apply a coating of liquid asphalt at a rate of approximately 0.25 gallons per square yard. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02740-3 Specification Name: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING a* C. In-place compacted thickness shall not be less than thickness specified on Construction Drawings. Areas of deficient paving thickness shall receive tack coat and minimum 1-in. overlay; or shall be removed and replaced to proper thickness, at discretion of Owner; until specified thickness of course is met or exceeded at no additional expense to Owner. D. Check surface areas at intervals necessary to eliminate ponding areas. Remove and replace unacceptable paving as directed by Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Before asphaltic concrete paving is constructed, submit actual design mix to Civil Engineering Consultant of Record and independent testing laboratory for review and approval. Design mix submittal shall follow a format as indicated in Asphalt Institute Manual MS-2, Marshall Stability Method; and shall include type/name of mix, gradation analysis, grade of asphalt cement used, Marshall Stability in pounds (lb.)flow, effective asphalt content in percent (%), and direct references to state highway department specifications sections for each material. Design shall be for mixture listed in current edition of state highway department specifications. Mix designs over 3 years old will not be accepted by Owner. B. Submit materials certificate to the independent testing laboratory that is signed by materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, requirements specified herein. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS so A. Weather Limitations: 1. Apply prime and tack coats when ambient or base surface temperature is above 40 degrees Fahrenheit, and when temperature has been above 35 degrees Fahrenheit for 12 hours immediately prior to application. Do not apply when base is wet, contains excess moisture, during rain, or frozen. 2. Construct asphaltic concrete paving when atmospheric temperature is above 40 degrees 04 Fahrenheit. B. Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide asphalt-aggregate mixture in accordance with this Section. If specified aggregate is scarce, use locally available materials and gradations that meet state highway department specifications and exhibit satisfactory records of previous installations. B. Asphalt Cement: Comply with AASHTO M 226; Table 2 AC-10, AC-20, or AC-40, viscosity grade, depending on local mean annual air temperature. See chart below: Temperature Condition Asphalt Grades , Cold, mean annual air temperature AC-10 At 45 degrees Fahrenheit or lower 85/100 pen. Warm, mean annual air temperature AC-20 Between 45 degrees Fahrenheit and 60/70 pen. 75 degrees Fahrenheit Hot, mean annual air temperature AC-40 At 75 degrees Fahrenheit or higher Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02740-2 Specification Name: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING «�r SECTION 02740 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART1 GENERAL 1� 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparation aid placement of asphaltic concrete binder course. B. Preparation and placement of asphaltic concrete surface course. W 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02323-Excavation, Backfll, and Compaction for Pavement B. Section 02324-Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Out Parcels C. Section 02715-Base Course D. Section 02765- Pavement Markings E. Section 02770-Curbs and Sidewalks F. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The Asphalt Institute(AI) latest edition 1. MS 2 Mix Design Methods for Asphaltic Concrete and Other Hot Mix Types 2. MS 3 Asphalt Plant Manual 3. MS 3 Asphalt Paving Manual 4. MS 19 Basic Asphalt Emulsion Manual B. State Highway Department Standard Specifications C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition 1. D 946 Penetration -Graded Asphalt Cement for use in Pavement Construction 2. D 1 188 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin- Coated Specimens 3. D 1559 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)latest edition 1. M 117 Mineral Filler"Bitumen-Saturated Cotton Fabrics Used in Roofing and Waterproofing" 2. M 140 Tack Coat"Emulsified Asphalt" 3. M 2:08 Tack Coat"Cationic Emulsified Asphalt' 4. M 226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement 5. T 245 Marshall Mix Design 1.04 QUALITY ASSURP.NCE A. An indepe ident testing laboratory, selected and paid by Contractor, will be retained to perform construction testing of in-place asphaltic concrete courses for compliance with requirements for PO thickness, -,ompaction, and surface smoothness. B. All failed test results to be faxed to Wal-Mart Construction Management. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02740-1 Specification Name: ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING MON Mrs BLANK PAGE rr Specifications; Owner and Contractor will be notified immediately by the independent testing laboratory. E. The Contractor shall pay for retesting due to failures at no additional expense to Owner. Contractor shall provide free access to the site for testing activities END OF SECTION 02715 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02715-3 Specification Name: BASE COURSE B. Do not place aggregate when base surface temperature is less than 40 degrees F, nor when air temperature is below 45 degrees F. Do not place aggregate when surface is wet or frozen. Do not place aggregate when weather conditions are unfavorable otherwise. No PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS 00 A. Submit materials certificate to the independent testing laboratory that is signed by materials producer and Contractor, certifying that materials comply with, or exceed, requirements specified herein or on the Construction Drawings. (4 & 5 moved to FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AS B & C.) «w PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Contractor shall verify to the Owner in writing that the subgrade has been inspected, tested, and gradients and elevations are correct, dry, and properly prepared in accordance with Section 02223. +`u 3.02 CONSTRUCTION A. Perform base course construction in a manner that will drain the surface properly and prevent runoff from adjacent areas from draining onto base course construction. B. Compact base material to not less than 98 percent of optimum density as determined by ASTM D 698 (or 95 percent of optimum density, as determined by ASTM D 1557) unless otherwise '�► indicated on Construction Drawings. C. Granular Base: Construct to thickness indicated on Construction Drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 8-inches, measured loose. D. Sand/Shell Base: Construct to thickness indicated on Construction Drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 4-inches, measured loose. E. Asphalt Institute Type VI, VII, or VIII Mixes for Hot-mix Sand Asphalt Bases: Construct to thickness indicated on Construction Drawings. Apply in lifts or layers not exceeding 3-inches, measured loose. 0 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL fit A. Field density tests for in-place materials shall be performed in accordance with the following standard: 1. Nuclear Method: ASTM D 2922 (Method B-Direct Transmission) ** B. Base material thickness: Perform 1 test for each 20,000 sq.ft. of in-place base material area. C. Base material compaction: Perform 1 test in each lift for each 20,000 sq. ft. of in-place base material area. D.. The independent testing laboratory will prepare reports that indicate test location, elevation data, and test results. Owner and Contractor shall be provided with copies of the reports within 96 hours of the time the test was performed. In the event that the test results show failure to meet any of the .Mr Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02715-2 Specification Name: BASE COURSE �i SECTION 02715 BASE COURSE PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction of granular base for asphaltic concrete and portland cement concrete paving. B. Construction of sand/shell base for asphaltic concrete and portland cement concrete paving. C. Construction of hot-mix sand asphalt base for asphaltic concrete paving. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS _ A. Section 02323 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Pavement B. Section 02324—Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction For Out Parcels C. Section 02325-Aggregate Materials D. Section 02740-Asphaltic Concrete Paving E. Section 027r,1 -Portland Cement Concrete Paving F. Section 02770-Curbs and Sidewalks ` G. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition 1. C133 Method For Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 1. D69B Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN.m/m3)) 2. D1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft Ibf 1ft3 (2,700 Kn.m/m3)) II 3. D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock, and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures 4. D 2,187 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes 5. D 21422 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) z 6. D 3317 Water Content of Soil and Rock In Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 7. D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils B. State Highway Department Standard Specifications 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. An independent testing laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, will be retained to perform constructio i testing of in-place base course for compliance with requirements for thickness, compaction, density, and tolerances. Paving base course tolerances shall be verified by rod and M level readi igs on not more than 50-foot centers to be not more than 0.05-feet above design elevation which will allow for paving thickness as shown on Construction Drawings. Contractor shall provide instruments and suitable benchmark. 02715-1 Project Name: Wal-Mart Masier Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: BASE ODURSE w Aft .o A* BLANK PAGE AR 3. Adjustment rings used to make adjustments in grade shall be made with the initial ring embedded in mortar and the exterior of the rings parged with mortar not less than 1/2 inch thick. No adjustment made in this manner shall exceed 8 inches. E. Concrete cradles shall be constructed as shown on the construction drawings and as needed when crossing over and under sewer pipe or utility lines. Concrete is to be 3000 psi mix with a minimum thickness of 6 inches. 3.06 SUBDRAINS A. Subdrains shall be installed in accordance with the details and at the locations shown on the construction drawings i 3.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General w 1. Strom sewer systems and culverts, upon completion or at such time as directed, shall be cleaned, inspected and tested. The system or culvert shall have a true grade and line. Actual elevations shall be within 0.08 feet of the elevations given on the construction drawings. 2. After completion of the Work,or any part thereof,the job shall be tested to determine that it has been installed in accordance with the construction drawings and specifications. In genE:ral, the Work shall prove to be in good condition, installed in accordance with the construction drawings and specifications and ready for use. B. Cleaning and Testing 1. The contractor is to visibly inspect and remove all debris and obstructions from storm pipe. All storm pie is to be tested for infiltration and exfiltration by hydrostatic testing per ASTM C969. All manholes and pipe shall meet ASTM C969 leakage criteria. C. Alignment Test 1. After backfill has been placed and compacted to a depth not less than one foot above to of pipe, a visual inspection shall be made by flashing a light between manholes. Any dis filacement or misalignment of invert shall be corrected. END OF SECTION 02630 Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma,-;ter Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02630-5 Specification Name: STORK DRAINAGE go disturbed after laying shall be taken up and replaced. Open ends shall be protected with a stopper to prevent earth or other material from entering the pipe during construction. The interior of the pipe shall be free from dirt, excess water and other foreign materials as the pipe laying progresses, and left clean at the completion of the installation. B. Installation shall commence at the lowest point for each segment of the route. RCP shall be laid with the groove or bell end upstream. Riveted CSP shall be placed with the inside circumferential laps pointing downstream. Applying bituminous material conforming to AASHTO M190 shall repair damaged bituminous coating on CSP. C. Lay pipe to the required line and slope gradients with the necessary fittings, bends, manhole, risers and other appurtenances placed at the required location as noted on Construction Drawings. •+, D. Do not displace or damage pipe when compacting. F. No pipe shall be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable for such work. G. Joints: 1. Joints shall be constructed as described herein with the intent that they be made watertight. 2. For RCP, the joint surface shall be cleaned and washed with water, if necessary, before the joints are made. For tongue and groove joints in smaller sizes, butting the inside of the bell with a cement mortar before joining shall make the joints. The inside joint can be wiped clean of excess mortar by brush of a squeegee drawn through the pipe as the laying operations progress. In the lager diameters, which permit the entry of a man, an annular . ► space is provided between pipe sections which shall be completely filled with mortar and finished off smooth with the inside surface of the pipe. 3. CSP shall be joined by standard corrugated connecting bands. Care shall be used to keep dirt or gravel out for between the pipes and band so that corrugations fit snugly. While being tightened, the bands shall be tapped with a mallet to take up slack and insure a tight joint. 4. PVC fittings shall be attached to the pipe by solvent welding according to the .fit manufacturers recommendations. 3.05 INSTALLATION -CATCH BASINS, INLETS,AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Precast Sections: 1. Precast section with bases shall be installed in accordance with Section 02322 and 02536 or as shown on construction drawings. ,OP 2. Pipe openings shall be aligned to that of the pipe entering and leaving the manhole, etc. Pipe shall be properly aligned with connections to manholes, etc. as shown on the construction drawings. B. Cast-In-Place sections shall be as shown on the drawings and in accordance with Section 02322. C. Invert channels shall be smooth and accurately shaped to a semicircular bottom conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer section. Invert channels and structure bottoms shall be shaped with cement mortar. Changes in size and grade of invert shall be made gradually and evenly. Changes in direction of the sewer entering branch or branches shall have a true curve of as large a radius as the manhole will permit. 04 D. Frames and Covers: 1. Frames and covers shall be set to the proper elevation. The frames shall be firmly No embedded in mortar approximately 1 inch thick and aligned to fit the top section of the structure. 2. Bricks set in mortar used to adjust the frame to finished grade shall be limited to no more than four courses. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02630-4 Specification Name: STORM DRAINAGE 2. Accepi:able manufacturers: Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. "ADS N-12", HANCOR, INC. "Iii-Q", or approved equal. D. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP): shall conform to ASTM A746 1. Fitting s shall be cast iron conforming to ASTM A74 2. Joint iaterial for DIP shall be a rubber gasket conforming to the requirements of ASTM C564 for compression joints. E. Subdrains: shall be perforated, PVC or Flexible corrugated plastic pipe as specified herein of the size indicated on the construction drawings. 2.02 INLETS, CATCH BASINS AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Lid and frame per details shown on Construction Drawings. B. Structure construction in accordance with details shown on Construction Drawings and in accordance with Section 02536. C. Cast-In-Place concrete headwalls and paved ditches shall conform t ACI 301e and cappli able reference� support blocks, specification :herein and the following: 1. Compressive Strength—3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Reint'orcement—ASTM A615, grade 40 or 60 deformed reinforcing bars. Or A185 for wire fabric D. Cement Mortar used for paving inverts,filling lift holes,joints, patching and anchoring castings-shall consist of one part portland cement, type I, ASTM C150, 1/4 part hydrated lime, ASTM C206 and 2-1/2 parts clean, well-graded sand and water free of suspended matter, alkali, and containing no industrial or domestic waste. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut and excavation is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations a'e as indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION ` A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with bedding material. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage piping or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. C. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, ai necessary, by same. 3.03 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02322. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE A. The pipe shall be inspected for defects and cracks before being carefully lowered to thi trench grade piece by piece. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe or any pip Project Name: Wal-Mart Masier Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02630-3 Specification Name: STORM DRAINAGE A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. Provide shop drawings for precast inlets, catch basins and junction boxes. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified local requirements. Mw► 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, catch basins, cleanouts, and invert elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work with termination of storm sewer connection outside building including connection w to municipal storm sewer system. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe (RCP): ASTM C 76, Class III, wall B (Class V under Railroads) except as noted on Construction Drawings, installed with flexible plastic, bitumen gaskets at joints. 1. Gaskets: Joint material for RCP shall be rubber gasket conforming to the requirements of ASTM C443 or"tongue and groove"type filled with cement mortar. 2. Flared end sections shall be class 1 w► B. Corrugated Steel (Metal) Pipe (CSP or CMP): ASTM A 760, 16 gauge unless another gauge is indicated on Construction Drawings. Galvanized, aluminized (Type 1 R), or bituminous coated as 04- specified on Construction Drawings. Only permitted when specifically indicated on Construction Drawings. Corrugated steel pipe may be round pipe, arch pipe, or slotted drainpipe as indicated on Construction Drawings. Slotted drainpipe shall have 1.75-inches wide drain waterway openings and 6-inches minimum height drain guide AR 1. CSP, bands and appurtenances shall be uniformly coated inside and outside with a 0.05 inch minimum thickness bituminous coating in accordance with AASHTO M190. . 2. CSP shall be supplied with paved inverts or fully lined to provide a smooth interior, smooth flow lining only as indicated on the construction drawings. C. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: ASTM D 3034, rated SDR 35, continually marked with manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D 3034 classification. Only permitted when specifically indicated on Construction Drawings. 1. Pipe joints: Joints for PVC shall conform to ASTM 3212 using restrained gasket conforming to ASTM F477. D. High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) Smooth Interior: AASHTO Designation M252 and M294, maximum diameter of 48-inches. Only permitted when specifically indicated on Construction Drawings. Pipe shall be installed in accordance with pipe manufacturer's installation Guidelines for Culvert Storm Drainage Applications. 1. Pipe Joints and fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252 and M294. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: STORM DRAINAGE 02630-2 •�w SECTION 02630 ` STORM DRAINAGE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site storm sewar drainage piping,fittings, accessories, and bedding. B. Connection of'wilding storm water drainage system to municipal storm sewers. } C. Catch basins, paved area drainage, site surface drainage, and stormwater detention facilities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02322- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities B. Section 0237C -Slope Protection and Erosion Control C. Section 0253E,-Sewer Manholes, Frames, and Covers r; D. Section 02830-Segmental Retaining Wall Systems E. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials(AASHTO)latest edition 1. M36 Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Corrugated Iron or Steel Culverts and Under Drains 2. M190 Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Arches 3. M252 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing, 3 to 10 Inch Diameter 4. M294 Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Tubing, 12 to 36 Inch Diameter B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)latest edition 1. A74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 2. A185 Steel welded Wire Fabric, Plain,for Concrete Reinforcement 3. A616 Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement 4. A7415 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe 5. C 76 Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain, and Sewer Pipe 6. C15) Portland Cement 7. C205 Finished Hydrated Lime 8. C443 Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using Rubber Gaskets 9. C478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 10. C5E4 Rubber Gasket for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 11. C969 Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines 12. D 3334 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings 13. D3212 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 14. D3350 Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fitting Materials 15. F4 i'7 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe C. American Concrete Institute(ACI) 1. ACI 301 Structural Concrete for Buildings 1.04 SUBMITTALS Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02630-1 Specification Name: STORM DRAINAGE ww BLANK PAGE AA E. Provide regulator vent with rain and insect proof opening,terminating not less than 5-feet away from building openings Fill 3.06 PROPANE TANK INSTALLATION A. Place tank legs on coricrete pads;level within tolerance of 2-inches maximum. B. Prepare and grade an area outside the tankperimeter,for.distance of 6-feet. Grade,,place, and compact gravel fill to cornpactect depth a f; -rnches minimum. Compact in accordance with Section 02322. C. Provide tank with reref value,shutoff value,pressure regulator,pressure,gauge,and removable protection cover (ristafl p'pmg,shutoff,,ydive=.and.pressure gauge t0 ui derground piping. D. Set tankeregulato to out(et;pressure as indicated on Construction,Drawings E. Instatl.vaporizer±o de of t rd,sectace to tank vrtttt aluminum.tray and twP*tairtless steel straps: w, F. Install weatherprpof controt box,for vaporer 404nches above ground surfaca. instalf,on 4-inch.x 4-inch cedar post,dnverr into grntxndCf»rrtchs. G. Install control wu e:from uaporr- t,to control box 20-inches below ground surface:alt�stalf',,4P rvice wiring 24-inches betow rtSund i�rom oerltral baxa budding, END OF SECTION 02555 r Project Name: Wal-Mart Master:3pecification Revised 02/14/2000 02555-5 Specification Name: NATURAL P ND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION an B. Verify that building service connection and utility gas main size, location, and depth are as indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe ends and remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe over 2-inches diameter or thread ferrous pipe 2-inches diameter and under. rr B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections with flanges or threading and unions. D. Comply with NFPA 54 on all installations of gas lines. 3.03 BEDDING �► A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02322. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Maintain a minimum of 12 inches separation of gas line from sewer, water, or storm water piping in accordance with state or local code. 0% B. Install piping to conserve space and not interfere with use of site space. C. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints. D. Install cocks and other fittings as required. am E. Establish elevations of buried piping in accordance with Section 02322. F. Wrap couplings and fittings of steel pipe with polyethylene tape and heat shrink over pipe in accordance r„ with AWWA C105. G. For Nonmetallic Pipe: Install trace wire continuous over top of pipe. H. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02322. I. Center and plumb valve box over valve. Set box cover flush with finished ground surface. Prevent shock or stress from being transmitted through valve box to valve. J. Wrap valve and valve box with polyethylene tape and heat shrink or paint valves and valve boxes with red anti-rust primer and 1 coat of epoxy paint. 3.05 SERVICE CONNECTIONS A. Provide sleeve in foundation wall for gas service main. Caulk enlarged sleeve watertight. " B. Anchor service main to interior surface of foundation wall. C. Install service regulator adjacent to building wall in specified location. D. Install service regulator and riser pipe to prevent undue stress on service pipe. For plastic service pipe, use steel pipe riser from below ground to regulator. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02555-4 Specification Name: NATURAL AND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION D. For Propane Systems: Capper tubing above ground: ASTM 888,Type K, L`or ASTM B75,Type GP, .0 internally tinned: 1. Fittings, i6ME 1316-AS cast copper,ASME B 16.22,wrought copper,or ASME 616.26, cast copper,.In #!fined 2. Joint: ASTM 832;�Satter,,Grado 95TA or°AWS,A5:8,,Bcup silver brazed E. Polyethylene Pipe (below ground only): ASTM D-2513, SDR 11.5 or ASTM F678 Series 125: 1. Fittings: ASTM D2513 2. Joints: Mechanical or Compression fit. 3. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor,brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural Gas Service" in large letters. e F. Reinforced Epoxy Resin Piping:ASTM D2517: 1. Fittings: ASTM D2517. 2. Joints: Eell and spigot with epoxy resin. �. 3. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural 3as Service" in large letters. 2.02 GAS COCKS A. 2-Inches and Smaller: 150 psig (1,040 kPa)WOG, bronze body, bronze tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing,threaded ends with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. B. 2-Inches and Lager: 125 psig (860 Kpa)WOG, Steel or Cast iron body and tapered plug, non-lubricated, Teflon packing, threaded ends,with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. C. For Applications with Line Pressure Greater than 60 psig (415 KPA): Over 2-Inches(50 mm): Cast iron body and plug, pressure lubricated,Teflon packing,flanged ends,with cast iron curb box, cover, and key. 2.03 PRESSURE REGULAT'NG VALVES A. Valves: Single stage, malleable iron body, corrosion-resistant, pressure regulator with atmospheric vent, elevation compensator;eearthquake threaded ends automatic shutoff valve,e, f required by local for utility.r than 2- � inches. Install E;arthq B. Capacity: For i ilet and outlet gas pressures, specific gravity,and flow rate indicated. 2.04 PROPANE STORAGE TANKS A. Construction . �aosed,welded steel,tested and stamped.in adcordance with AShIE Section 8Q, minimum 256,psig,( pt�me caatett` a d natnted {allatia ats�orlvertr rust(faint,and 'F,70t1;�1pa)ratite,ctepned, r n ofpirtgand�dcessories. P pP ti,q. supplied with steel"support saddles prpssur_;gages, B. Vaporizer._ 1,Od0 watts,hea#Eng cable.`bedde �n 14-j"tch` f glass fiber,Insulation and cove, . d ,,flexible stdniess steel pis#e,with thermostat w�atherprao bo�rsetto turn on at„ 13rdgrees f=ahrenhe�t with rriaital off-oaf witci C. Capaotty Id re3ter and leng#h'as shown,onCortstruclton prawtngs PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions. 02555-3 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: NATURAL AND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION •r 4. B31.8 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems G. National Fire Protection Agency(NFPA) latest edition 1. 54 National Fuel Gas Code ,, 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform installation in accordance with utility company requirements. B. Gas Cock: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and applicable state regulations. D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME Sec 9. E. Conform to NFPA 54, ANSI 831.2, or ANSI 831.8. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified local requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of pipe mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations. - B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to be included. B. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place. A# PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Steel Pipe Below Ground: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, type E or S, grade B, black: 1. Fittings: ANSI 1316.11, forged steel, or ASTM A234 forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Welded and seamless. 3. Jackets:AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket, double layer, half lapped, 10-mil polyethylene tape. B. Steel Pipe Above Ground: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, type E or S, grade B, black: ' 1. Fittings: ANSI B16.3, malleable iron,ANSI B16.1 1,forged steel, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded. C. For Propane Systems Copper tubing below grount ` STMf388,Type K;-internl(y tinned. 1. Fittings ASME 1316 i8;cast popper, oASNIB�&22,uyrought°copper;internally tinned. 2• Joint. A, A5:8 E3Cu', ifYer brdzed: Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02555-2 Specification Name: NATURAL AND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SECTION 02555 NATURAL AND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe and fittings for site utility natural or propane gas distribution. B. Propane storage � 0 s and; ppurte�ancas C. Connection of situ natural gas system and private utility company system. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02322 - I_xcavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities } D. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS T A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)latest edition 1. B 16.18 Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings 2: B 16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings emu, 3. B 16.26 Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 4. 831.8 Gas Transmission And Distribution Piping Systems 4. Sec. 8D Pressure Vessels 5. Sec. 9 Welding and Brazing Qualifications 6. Boiler and Pressure Code B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) latest edition t 1. A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated (Galvanized)Welded and Seamless 2. A234 Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperature 3 B32 Solder Metal 4 B75 Seamless Copper Tube 5 B88 Seamless Copper Water Tube 6. D2513 Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe,Tubing, and Fittings 7. D2517 Reinforced Epoxy Resin Gas Pressure Pipe and Fittings 8. D2683 Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings For Outside Diameter-Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and Tubing 9. F678 Polyethylene Gas Pressure Pipe,Tubing and Fittings D. American Welding Society (AWS) latest edition 1. A5.8 Brazing Filler Metal E. American Water Works Association (AWWA) latest edition 2. C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids F. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) latest edition 0 1. 816.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings 2. 816.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded 3. B31.2 Fuel Gas Piping Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02555-1 Specification Name: NATURAL AND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION .wr +r� rM BLANK PAGE wr► 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify items specified by other Sections are properly sized and located. B. Verify that built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into work. -- C. Verify that the excavation for manholes is correct. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate placement of inlet and outlet pipe or duct sleeves as indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.03 PLACING PRECAST MANHOLE BARREL SECTIONS A. Place base pad to proper elevation and location and trowel top surface level for placement of manhole barrel. B. Place manhole barrel plumb and level to correct elevations and anchor to base pad. 1. After completion of slab foundation, lower first joint of manhole barrel into position, grooved end first, and set level and plumb on concrete base. Align and adjust to proper grade prior to placing and forming invert. Pour invert immediately after setting of first section of manhole barrel. 2. Prior to setting subsequent manhole barrel sections, apply primer to tongue and groove ends and allow to set in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Place "Rare-nek", or equivalent, plastic rope on tongue end. Lower next section into position, and remove excess material from interior of structure. Add additional material on exterior of jo nt, if necessary, for completely watertight joint. C. Set cover fames and lids level without tipping, to correct elevations. Utilizing pre-cast rings, or brick and mortar may achieve final rim elevation. Maximum limit, 4 courses. END OF SECTION 02536 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02536-3 Specification Name: SEWER MANHOLES,FRAMES,AND COVERS PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Manhole Barrel: Reinforced precast concrete in accordance with ASTM C 478 with gaskets in accordance with ASTM C 923. 1. Construct manholes of precast concrete sections as required by Construction Drawings to size, shape, and depth indicated, but never less than 4'-0" inside diameter. x111 B. Concrete Brick Units: ASTM C 55, Grade N Type I-moisture controlled, normal weight, of same grade, type and weight as block units, nominal modular size of 3 5/8-inches x 7 5/8-inches x 2 1/4- inches C. Manhole Barrel: Precast polyethylene in accordance with ASTM D 1248. Manholes shall be manufactured with factory-molded steps. Nominal cylinder internal diameter shall be 48-inches and shall be designed to accept concrete filled polyethylene manhole lids and standard cast iron frames with lid or grate. Manholes shall have compressive strength that meets ASTM D 2412 standards. Acceptable Manufacturers: Advanced Drainage Systems (ADS)or approved equal. D. Mortar and Grout: Mortar for finishing and sealing shall be Class"C". Honeycombing less than 2- inches deep shall be repaired using Class "D"mortar. E. Brick Transition Reinforcement: Formed steel 8-gauge wire with galvanized finish. ' '"► 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Lid and Frame: ASTM A 48, Class 30B heavy duty cast iron construction, machined flat bearing surface, removable lid, closed or open as indicated on Construction Drawings, sealing gasket, minimum total weight of 475 pounds manufactured by Neenah Foundry Company, East Jordan Iron Works, or approved equal. B. Manhole Steps: Shall be formed aluminum rung, 3/4 inch minimum diameter, 12 inches wide, 16 inches on center vertically(maximum)set in manhole wall. 2.03 CONFIGURATION A. Barrel Construction: Concentric with eccentric cone top section. B. Shape: Cylindrical C. Clear Inside Dimensions: 48-inches diameter minimum or as indicated on Construction Drawings. ` D. Design Depth: As indicated on Construction Drawings. E. Clear Lid Opening: 24-inches minimum F. Pipe Entry: Provide openings as indicated on Construction Drawings G. Main and Lateral Pipes: Neatly cut off main and lateral pipes flush with inside of manhole or inlet where they enter structure,walls. Point up irregularities and rough edges with nonshrinking grout. H. Inverts: Shape inverts for smooth flow across structure floor as indicated on Construction Drawings. Use concrete and mortar to obtain proper grade and contour. Finish surface with fine textured wood float. PART 3 EXECUTION Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: SEWER MANHOLES, FRAMES,AND COVERS 02536-2 P SECTION 02536 Ilk SEWER MANHOLES, FRAMES,AND COVERS j< PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Monolithic concrete manhole barrel with either monolithic concrete or masonry transition to lid frame. B. Modular precast concrete manhole barrel with tongue-and-groove joints with either precast concrete or masonry transition to lid frame. C. Masonry manhole barrel with masonry transition to lid frame. D. Precast polyethylene manhole assemblies. E. Preparation a.nd installation of lid frame, covers, anchorage, and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02322-Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities B. Section 0251;5-Sanitary Sewer Systems C. Section 026130-Storm Drainage D. Constructior Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)latest edition 1. A 48 Gray Iron Castings 2. C 5:5 Concrete Building Brick 3. C 478 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 4. C 923 Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Pipes tics Molding and Extrusion Materials 5. D 1248 Polyethylene Plas B. International Masonry Industry All-Weather Council (IMIAC) latest edition 1. Re;ommended Practices and Guide Specification for Cold Weather Masonry Construction C. State Department of Transportation (DOT), Construction and Material Specifications, Latest Edition 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate reference to Construction Drawings of manhole locations, elevations, piping with sizes, locations, and elevations of penetrations. B. Product Data: Provide data for manhole covers, manhole steps, component construction,features, configuration, and dimensions. Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma:3ter Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02536-1 Specification Name: SEWER MANHOLES,FRAMES,AND COVERS r�r ..w BLANK PAGE •rw r.ic 1. Each ;;ection of sewer line between successive manholes shall be tested by closing the lower and of the sewer to be tested and the inlet sewer of the upper manhole, using stoppers. 2. Fill the: manhole and pipe with water to a point which produces a maximum of 3 feet of head above the invert of the sewer at the center of the upper manhole; or if ground water is present, 3 feet of head above the average adjacent ground water level. 3. The allowable leakage shall be: a. 200 gal/inch of pipe diameter/mile/day E. Infiltration Test go 1. If excessive ground water is encountered in the construction of a section of the sewer, the exfiltration test shall not be used. 2. The upper and lower ends of the sewer to be tested shall be closed sufficiently to prevent the entrance of water. 3. Pumping of ground water shall be discontinued for at least 3 days; then infiltration shall be tested. 4. Infiltration into each section of sewer between adjoining manholes shall not exceed that allowed for the exfiltration test, except that head conditions shall be a maximum of 6 feet. F. Provide mea;iuring devices, meters,water, materials, and labor for making the required tests. G. Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Construction Manager or his designee. Test data shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. H. All force mai i piping shall be hydrostatically tested at 150 psi in accordance with AWWA C 600. �Y I. If deflection test is to be run using a rigid ball or mandrel. It shall have a diameter equal to 95 percent of th a inside diameter of the pipe. The test shall be performed without mechanical pulling 0 devices. ... 1. Allowable Deflection: Maximum allowable pipe deflection shall not exceed 5 percent of nominal inside diameter. IP 2. Mandrel: Mandrel, go/no-go, device shall be cylindrical in shape and constructed with ,= eith ar 9 or 16 evenly spaced arms or prongs. Mandrels with fewer arms will be rejected as not sufficiently accurate. Contact length of mandrel's arms shall equal or exceed nominal inside diameter of sewer to be inspected. Critical mandrel dimensions shall carry tolerance of 0.01-inch maximum. Contractor shall provide mandrel and necessary equipment for L mandrel test. 3. Procedure: Mandrel shall be hand-pulled through flexible pipe sewer lines no earlier than 30 days after trench has been completely backfilled. Sections of sewer not passing ,; mandrel shall be uncovered and rebedded, rerounded, or replaced to satisfaction of Owner or 13overning agency. Repaired section shall be retested. END OF SECTION 02535 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02535-5 Specification Name: SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS .w unsound pipe, or any pipe that has had its grade disturbed after laying shall be taken up and replaced. Commence installation at lowest point with the bell end upgrades. B. No pipe shall be laid in water or when trench conditions are unsuitable for work. C. Pipe connecting to manholes or other structures shall terminate flush inside of the structure wall. D. Joints for PVC and CISP shall be thoroughly lubricated with an approved lubricant before pipe A6 sections are slipped together. Open ends shall be fully protected with a stopper to prevent earth or other material from entering the pipe during construction. Carefully free interior of the pipe from dirt, cement and other deleterious material as the work progresses. E. Maintain separation of potable water main for sewer piping (10 foot horizontal and 18 inches vertical minimum. F. Install HDPE piping and fittings to AWWA C901 and C906. Butt fusion welded per ASTM 03261. G. Route pipe in straight line parallel to roads, buildings and adjacent utilities and as shown on construction drawings. H. Establish elevations of buried piping with sufficient cover as recommended by pipe manufacturer to ensure not less than 3 feet of cover, except as noted on drawings. I. Form and place concrete for thrust blocks at each elbow of pipe force main. See construction drawing for details of construction. J. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02322. K. Install trace wire continuous over to of non-metal pipe. Bury 6 inches minimum below finish grade, above pipeline. 3.05 INSTALLATION—CLEANOUTS AND MANHOLES A. Form bottom of excavation clean and smooth to correct elevation. B. For cleanouts form and place cast-in-place concrete base pad, with provision for sanitary sewer pipe to be installed to proper elevations. C. For manholes construct inverts according to the following guidelines: 1. Invert channel shall be smooth and accurately shaped to a semicircular bottom to match w with the inside of the adjacent sewer section. 2. Invert channels and structure bottoms shall be shaped with mortar and lean concrete. 3. Changes in size and grade of invert shall be made gradually and evenly. 4. Changes in the direction of the sewer entering branch or branches shall have a true curve 'r"F of as large a radius as the manhole will permit. D. For manholes provide manhole rings, frame and cover as shown on the construction drawings. /4 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Pipes and joints shall not be completely backfilled until after inspection, testing, and approval by the Construction Manager. B. Prior to testing for leakage, the pipe trench shall be backfilled to at least the spring line of the pipe. If required to prevent pipe movement during testing, additional backfill shall be added leaving the pipe joints uncovered to permit inspection. C. Exfiltration Test Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02535-4 Specification Name: SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS 1. High-Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE): AWWA C901 and C906, ASTM D3035, SDR 11 for 150psi pressure rating. a. Fittings: Molded, AWWA C901 or C906. b. Joints: Butt fusion, ASTM D2657,flanged gasket joints at interface C. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor (#12 copper), brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with"Sanitary Sewer Service" in large letters. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): For less than 4 inches in diameter, ASTM D2241 for push- on or;solvent weld joints, and for pipe 4 inches in diameter and larger, AWWA C900, Class 150 with push-on joints. a. Joints/Fittings: Push-on,ASTM D3139 with ASTM F477 gaskets. b. Solvent Cement: ASTM D2564 2.02 PIPE ACCESSORIES A. Pipe Joints: Mechanical clamp ring type, stainless steel expanding and contracting sleeve, neoprene-ribbed gasket for positive seal. B. Fittings: Same material as pipe molded or formed to suit pipe size and end design, in required tee, bends, elbows, cleanouts, reducers, traps, etc. 2.03 CLEANOUTS AND MANHOLES A. Precast concrete manholes section shall conform to Section 02536. .: B. Lid and Frame: Provide traffic grade and rated covers and frames where cleanouts and manholes are within pavement, with the letters "SSCO" or "SANITARY SEWER" respectively cast into the cover. B. Shaft Construction: Cast Iron shaft of internal diameter as specified on Construction Drawings with 2500 psi con Crete collar for cleanouts. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that trench cut and excavation is ready to receive work and excavations, dimensions, and elevations a-e as indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Hand trim excavations to required elevations. Correct over excavation with bedding material. B. Remove large stones or other hard matter that could damage pipe or impede consistent backfilling or compaction. 3.03 BEDDING A. Excavate trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02322. 3.04 INSTALLATION - FIPE A. The type and class of pipe used shall be as shown on the construction plans. Pipes shall be laid and maintained to the required line and grade with necessary fittings, bends, manholes risers, cleanouts and other aprtthe full length placed of he barren o' /f the pipe The p pe s l hall beinspected llfro with uniform bearing under defects ar d cracks before carefully being lowered into the trench. Any defective, damaged or Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02535-3 Specification Name: SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS A. An independent testing laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, will be retained to perform construction testing on site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data of pipe materials, pipe fittings, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified local requirements. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of pipe runs, connections, cleanouts, and invert elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work with termination of sanitary sewer connection outside building and connection to municipal sewer utility service. A" PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEWER PIPE, FITTINGS, AND JOINTS (Exterior to Building except as noted) A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe (PVC): ASTM D 3034, rated SDR 35 unless otherwise specified by the utility company. Pipe shall be continually marked with manufacturer's name, pipe size; cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D 3034 classification. 1. Pipe joints: Integrally molded bell ends, ASTM D 3034, Table 2, with factory supplied o"" elastomeric gaskets and lubricant. 2. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor (#12 copper), brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Sanitary Sewer Service"in large letters. .s B. Vitrified Clay Pipe (VCP): ASTM C700: (Use only if required by local jurisdiction) 1. Fittings: ASTM C700 2. Joints: ASTM C425 3. Gaskets: ASTM C425. Gaskets shall be manufactured from high grade, properly vulcanized elastomeric compound consisting of either basic natural or synthetic rubber. Gasket manufacturing tolerances shall comply with Rubber Manufacturer's Association tolerances for gaskets. 4. Lubricant: Suitable for lubricating joint components; no deteriorating effects on gasket or pipe material, will not support growth of fungi or bacteria, and shall be of type recommended by gasket manufacturer. 5. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor (#12 copper), brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Sanitary Sewer Service" in large letters. C. Ductile Iron Pipe (DIP): ASTM A746, Class 50, inside nominal diameter as specified on Construction Drawings, bell and spigot end. 1. Ductile Iron Pipe Joint Device: AWWA C111, rubber gasket joint devices. D. Cast Iron Pipe (CISP)(Building Interior ONLY): ASTM A74, Service grade (SV), inside nominal diameter as specified on Construction Drawings, bell and spigot end. 1. Cast Iron Pipe Joint Device: ASTM C564, rubber gasket joint devices. E. Force Main: r* Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS 02535-2 SECTION 02535 ., SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS �e PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sanitary sewer drainage piping, fittings, accessories, cleanouts, and bedding. A B. Connection of site sanitary sewer system to municipal sanitary sewer systems. ' 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 02322:- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities B. Section 02536- Sewer Manholes, Frames, and Covers D. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)latest edition 1. A74 Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 2. A746 Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe 3 C12 Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines 4. C150 Portland Cement 5 C207 Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes 6 C425 Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings 7. C470 Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections 8. C564 Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings 9. C700 Vitrified Clay Pipe, Extra Strength, Standard Strength, and Perforated 10. C823 Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines 11. D17B5 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40,80, and 120 12. D2141 Poly (vinyl Chloride) (PVC)Pressure-Rated Pipe(SDR Series) 13. D2657 Heat-Joining Polyolefn pipe and Fittings 14. D304 Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Sewer Pipe and Fittings 15. DX35 Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 16. D3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipe Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 17. D3.:12 Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 18. 133261 Butt heat fussion Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene Plastic pipe and Tubing 19 F477 Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets)for Joining Plastic Pipe C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) latest edition 1 C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 2. C6D0 Ductile-Iron Water mains and Their Appurtenances 3. C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure pipe, 4 in. Through 12 in, for Water Distribution 4 Cc01 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure pipe, Tubing and Fittings 1/2 inch through 3 inches,for Water Distribution 5 Cc 06 Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Fittings, 4 inch through 63 inch, for Water Distribution 1.04 QUALITY ASSUR%NCE Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma:ter Specification Revised 02/1412000 02535-1 Specification Name: SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS A. After the pumps have been installed and wired the Contractor shall complete the following with certification provided to the Owner's Engineering Consultant: 1. Megger stator and power cables. 2. Check seal lubrication. 3. Check for proper rotation. 4. Check power supply voltage. 5. Measure motor operating load and no load current. 6. Check level control operation and sequence. 3.04 WARRANTIES A. The manufacturer of the equipment shall warrant the total package for the lift station for one year from the date of start-up. The major wear parts, such as mechanical seal, impeller, pump housing, wear ring and ball bearings, are pro-rated from years two through five. A printed warranty certificate from the original manufacturer shall be provided. END OF SECTION 02532 Aw A" •% .* A •w As Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS 02532-4 aw IR C. Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Mueller swing type lever and weight check valves or approved equal. 2. AVWA C508, iron body, rubber disc facing, flanged, 175 psi rated. 2.05 PAINTING PR A. All metal surfaces coming into contact with the pump, other than stainless steel or brass, shall be protected by a factory applied primer with a chlorinated rubber paint finish or a zinc chromate base enamel on the exterior of the pump. B. All painted surfaces damaged during handling or construction shall be repaired with primer and paint compatible witn the base material and original painted finish. 2.06 GUIDE RAIL SYSTEM A. The pump shell be automatically connected to the discharge connection elbow when lowered into place, and shell be easily removed for inspection or service. There shall be no need for personnel to enter the pump well. A simple linear downward motion of the pump shall accomplish sealing of the pumping unit•:o the discharge connection elbow. 2.07 CONTROLS A. The motor co itrol panel shall be assembled and tested by the contractor in accordance with UL Standard 508 for industrial controls. B. The alarm system shall produce a signal that is compatible with remote building alarm system. A conduit and s ignal wire shall be installed from the pump station control panel to the stockroom area of the store in accordance with the construction documents. C. All internal wring shall be neat and color-coded. Each wire shall be a different color or stripe(except for ground). D. All electrical components and assembly shall be in accordance with Section 16050. 2.08 OPERATION OF SYSTEM A. All float switches shall be adjustable for level setting from the surface. 2.09 ACCESS DRIVE ` A. An all-weather surface with a minimum width of 20 feet shall be provided to the lift station in accordance with the construction documents PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building sewer service pipe size, location, and elevation are as indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION IP A. Installation of the duplex non-clog submersible lift station pumps shall be done in accordance with the pump manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 START-UP Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02532-3 Specification Name: SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS E. Wet wells constructed of precast manhole barrels shall meet the requirements of Section 02536. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed state or local requirements. B. Dimensional shop drawings of equipment items shall be provided to the Civil Engineering Consultant. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual sewer inlet invert elevations at the wet well;wet well bottom elevation; pump , on/off level switch elevations; and high level alarm elevation. B. Unexpected modifications resulting from field variations shall be made only with the approval of the Engineering Consultant. Identify and describe all approved modifications. C. Furnish one copy of Lift Station Operation and Maintenance Manual to Owner's Director of Maintenance and Warranty. This manual shall cover, in addition to installation and general operating procedure, the operation, maintenance, and servicing procedures of the major individual components provided with the lift station. The manual shall also include parts lists of components and a troubleshooting guide. D. Furnish Certificate of Warranty for one year on any defects of material or workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS , ► 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish and install a duplex lift station with a concrete wet well. Pumps shall be of the non-clog submersible centrifugal type with submersible motor. Pumps shall be installed on lift- out rail systems to allow for easy removal without requiring entry into the wet well. Pumps shall not be intended to handle material that is not normally found in municipal sewage. " 2.02 CONCRETE WET WELL A. Excavation and backfill to comply with Section 02322. B. Concrete to meet requirements of Class"C"concrete as specified in Section 02536 for precast wet wells. C. Top of wet well slab shall not be less than 1 foot above the surrounding area. Grading shall be tapered up to meet the base of the top slab to provide positive drainage away from the station. 2.03 DISCHARGE PIPING A. Where piping passes through a wall, non-shrink grout shall be used to make a watertight joint. 04 2.04 VALVES A. Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Mueller resilient seat gate valves or approved equal. 2. AWWA C509, iron body, non-rising stem with 2"square nut, resilient seat, flanged ends, 200 psi rated. B. Plug Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Dezurik Series 100 or equal,flanged. err Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS 02532-2 SECTION 02532 SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction of exterior submersible lift station wet well. B. Installation of exterior pumping system and appurtenances. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 0232 :- Excavation, Backfill,and Compaction for Utilities. B. Section 02536-Sewer Manholes, Frames, and Covers C. Section 02535-Sanitary Sewer Systems. D. Section 02631)-Storm Drainage E. Section 16053-Basic Electrical Materials and Methods F. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Scciety for Testing and Materials(ASTM)latest edition. B. American Water Works Association (AWWA)latest edition. C. National Electrical Code (NEC)latest edition. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). F. Underwriten;Laboratories(UL)latest edition. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Commercia. Testing of Pumps: 1. The pump shall be visually inspected to confirm that it is built in accordance with the a specification as to horsepower,voltage, phase and hertz. 2. Thi:motor seal and housing chambers shall be meggered for infinity to test for moisture content or insulation defects. 3. Pu­np shall be allowed to run dry to check for proper rotation. 4. Discharge piping shall be attached, the pump submerged in water and amp readings shall be taken in each leg to check for an imbalanced stator winding. B. Pumps: Manufacturer's name, pump model number, and electrical information stamped on the motor nameplate. C. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. D. Compaction testing of backfill around concrete lift station wet well shall be performed in accordance with Section 02322. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02532-1 Specification Name: SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS rw with 6" permanent storage. In this case, the contractor shall time the release to assure that no rainstorms are imminent. The intent of this condition is to allow the majority of the chlorine to evaporate into the atmosphere before a rainstorm has the opportunity to wash the residual downstream. Contractor shall not release super-chlorinated water directly into the sanitary sewer system, private or public, nor any storm drain system not directly discharging into the detention facility mentioned above. 3.07 SERVICE CONNECTIONS 04 A. Provide water service connection in compliance with utility company requirements including reduced pressure backflow preventor (if required) and water meter with by-pass valves and sand strainer. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform compaction testing of trench backfill in accordance with Section 02322. ! B. Test water distribution system pipe installed below grade and outside building in accordance with the following procedures: 1. Perform testing of pipe materials, joints, and other materials incorporated into construction of water mains and force mains to determine leakage and water tightness. Test pressure pipeline in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA C600 and NFPA 24. In the event state or local code requires more stringent test, more stringent test shall take precedence. 2. Pressure Test: After pipe has been laid, subject newly laid pipe or valved section to hydrostatic pressure of at least 1.5 times working pressure at point of testing and not less than 1.25 times working pressure at highest point along test section. 3. Leakage Test: Conduct leakage test concurrently with pressure test. Leakage is defined as quantity of water that must be supplied into newly laid pipeline or valved section thereof to maintain pressure within 5 psi of specified test pressure after air in pipeline has been expelled and pipeline has been filled with water. Leakage shall not be measured by drop .r in pressure in test section over period of time. a. Pipeline installation will not be accepted if leakage is greater than that determined by the following formula: w SDgP L= 133200 L =allowable leakage, (gallons per hour) S = length of pipe tested, (feet) D = nominal diameter of pipe, (inches) P = average test pressure during test, (psig) 4. Visible Leakage: Repair visible leaks regardless of amount of leakage measured. 5. Acceptance of Installation: If test of pipe laid in place discloses leakage greater than that cwt specified, Contractor shall, at his own expense, locate leak and make repairs as necessary until leakage is within specified allowance. Supply water for testing at no expense to Owner. END SECTION 02510 M" Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02510-6 A 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Maintain separation of water main from sanitary and storm sewer piping in accordance with state or local codes. B. Install pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C600. C. Install pipe to E,Ilow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe or joints or as specified by $' pipe manufacturer. 1 D. Install access fittings in accordance with local codes to permit disinfection of water system performed under this Section. E. Connections with Existing Pipelines: Where connections are made between new work and existing piping, make connection using suitable fittings for conditions encountered. Make each connection with existing pipe at time and under conditions with least interference with operation of existing pipeline and in compliance with local utility company. F. Form and plaf;e concrete for thrust blocks or other specified methods of retainage at each change of direction or end of pipe main. G. Establish elevations of buried piping in accordance with Section 02322. H. Backfill trench in accordance with Section 02322. I Install trace wire continuous over top of non-metal pipe. Bury a minimum of 6 inches below finish grade, and above pipeline. 3.05 INSTALLATION -VALVES AND HYDRANTS A. Install gate valves as indicated on Construction Drawings. Support valve on concrete pads with valve stem vertical and plumb. Install valve boxes in manner that will not transmit loads, stress, or shock to valve body. Center valve box over operating nut of valve vertical and plumb. Securely fit valve box together leaving cover flush with finished surface. B. Install fire hNrdrant assemblies as indicated on Construction Drawings in vertical and plumb position with steamer/pumper nozzle pointed perpendicular to traffic where hydrant is adjacent to street, roadway, or parking lot drive or toward protected building unless otherwise directed by local authorities. Support hydrant assembly on concrete pad and firmly brace on side opposite inlet pipe against undisturbed soil and concrete blocking. Place minimum of 6-cubic feet of crushed stone or gravel arou id hydrant base and barrel after thrust blocking has cured at least 24 hours. Exercise care when backfilling and compacting so proper vertical position will not be altered. ..: 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Contractor to disinfect distribution system with chlorine before acceptance for domestic operation. Amount of chlorine shall be such as to provide dosage of not less than 50 parts per million. Thoroughly flush lines before introduction of chlorinating materials and after contact period of not less than 24 hours, system shall be flushed with clean water until residual chlorine content is not greater than 1.0 part per millior.. Open and close valves in lines being disinfected several times during contact period. ;:. After disinfection, take water sample and bacteriologically test in accordance with AWWA C651. Do not place distribution system in service until approval is obtained from local governing authorities. B. Contractor shell provide a means of neutralizing the super-chlorinated water before releasing into the environment. This may be accomplished by either a method of dechlorinization, direct release into a detention area approved by Wal-Mart, or any method acceptable to federal, state, and local codes. Direct release to open ground shall not be allowed, unless contained within an on site detention facility Project Name: Wal-Mart Maater Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02510-5 Specification Name: WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS A. Fire Hydrants: Type as required by utility company/Local Fire Department and as shown on +* Construction Drawings. B. Hydrant Extensions: Fabricate in multiples of 6-inches with rod and coupling to increase barrel length. rrry C. Hose and Steamer Connections: Match sizes with utility company, with two hose nozzles, one pumper nozzle. D. Finish: Apply primer and 2 coats of enamel or special coating to color as required by utility company. M. 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Thrust Blocking: Place 3000 psi concrete to provide sufficient bearing area to transmit unbalanced .■. thrust from bends, tees, caps, or plugs to undisturbed soil without loading undisturbed soil in excess of 2,500 pounds per square foot when water main pressure is 100 psi. MINIMUM THRUST BLOCKING BEARING AREAS ," Pipe Tees 90°Bend 451 Bend 22'/:Bend 11%,Bend 5 5/8 Bend Cap/Plug Diameter Sq. Ft Sq. Ft Sq.Ft Sq.Ft. Sq.Ft. Sq.Ft. Sq.Ft. 3" 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 WA 4" 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.0 6" 1.5 2.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 3.0 8" 2.5 3.5 1.8 1.0 1.0 1.0 4.0 10" 4.0 5.5 2.8 1.5 1.0 1.0 6.0 04 12" 6.0 8.0 4.0 2.0 1.5 1.0 8.5 14" 8.0 11.0 5.5 3.0 2.0 1.5 12.0 16" 10.0 14.2 7.0 4.0 3.0 2.5 15.0 18" 21.0 21.0 12.0 6.0 4.0 3.5 24.0 B. Locked mechanical joint fittings shall be installed where vertical changes in direction are required and, if approved by Owner and governing authority, can be installed in lieu of above thrust blocking requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION A" 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building service connection and municipal utility water main size, location, and depth are W as indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.02 PREPARATION 04 A. Ream pipe and tube ends and remove burrs. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. OR C. Prepare pipe for connections to equipment with flanges or unions. D. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same. 3.03 BEDDING A. Excavate pipe trench and place bedding material in accordance with Section 02322. ■e► Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02510-4 Specification Name: WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS «14 PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE A. Pipe sizes less than 3-inches that are installed below grade and outside building shall comply with one or combination of following: 1. Seamless Copper Tubing: Type"K"soft copper,ASTM B 88. a. Fittings: Wrought copper(95-5 Tin Antimony solder joint), ASME B 16.22. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Water Pipe: Pipe, ASTM D 2241, with SDR 21 rating, continually market with manufacturer's name, pipe size, cell classification, SDR rating, and ASTM D 1784 material classification. a. Pipe joints: Integrally molded bell ends, ASTM D 2672. b. Cement primer: ASTM-F656. C. Solvent cement: ASTM -D 2564. d. Trace wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, (#12 Copper) brightly colored plastic covering imprinted with"Water Service" in large letters. B. Pipe sizes 3-inches and larger that are installed below grade and outside building shall comply with one or combination of following: 1. Gray Cast Iron Water Pipe: ANSI A21.6,thickness class 22, pressure class 150. a. Fittings: Either mechanical joint or push-on joint, AWWA C110 or AWWA C111. b. Elastomeric gaskets and lubricant: ASTM - F477. 2. Ductfe Iron Water Pipe: AWWA C151, thickness class 50. a. Fittings: Either mechanical joint or push-on joint, AWWA C110 or AWWA C111. b. Elastomeric gaskets and lubricant: ASTM- F477. 3. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Water Pipe: Pipe, AWWA C900, rated DR 18 (Class 150), conti ivally marked as required. a. Elastomeric gaskets and lubricant: ASTM - F477 for smaller pipes. b. Pipe joints: Integrally molded bell ends,ASTM D3139. C. Trace wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, (#12 Copper) brightly colored plastic covering imprinted with"Water Service"in large letters. 2.02 GATE VALVES- 2-Inches and Larger x A. Manufacturers: Mueller Resilient Seat Gate Valves or approved equal. lip B. AWWA C5(,0, Iron body, non-rising stem with square nut, single wedge, resilient seat, class 150flanged :)r mechanical joint ends, control rod, post indicator where indicated on Construction Drawings, a ttension box and valve key. 2.03 BALL VALVES -2-Inches and Smaller A. Manufacturers: Mueller Oriseal or approved equal. B. Brass body, teflon coated brass ball, rubber seats and stem seals, Tee stem pre-drilled for control rod, AWWA compression inlet end, compression outlet with electrical ground connector, with control rod, extension box and valve key. 2.04 BUTTERFLY VALVES-from 2-Inches to 24-Inches A. AWWA C534, Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat, water or lug ends, infinite position lever handle. 2.05 CHECK VALVES, '3OST INDICATOR VALVES, and BACKFLOW PREVENTORS A. Refer to St,ction 13900 - Fire Suppression in Architectural/Building Specifications 1 2.06 FIRE HYDRANTS Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02510-3 Specification Name: WATER.DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS r - r 9. C504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 10. C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances 11. C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints 12. C651 Disinfecting Water Mains 13. C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 Inches Through 12 Inches, for Water Distribution E. National Fire Protection Associations (NFPA) 1. NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems 2. NFPA 24 Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform installation in accordance with utility company or municipality requirements. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Perform disinfection of potable lines in accordance with AWWA C651. 1.05 SUBMITTALS " ! A. Product Data: Provide CEC with data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, hydrants, valves, and accessories. „ B. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed state or local requirements. C. Furnish 1 copy of results of meter test and hydrostatic pressure test to Owner and utility company upon completion of water distribution backfilling operations. D. Project Record Documents: 1. Disinfection report; record: a. Type and form of disinfectant used. b. Date and time disinfectant injection start and time of completion. C. Test locations. d. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. e. Date and time of flushing start and completion. f. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. 2. Bacteriological report; record: a. Date issued, project name, testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. b. Time and date of water sample collection. C. Name of person collecting samples. d. Test locations e. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. f. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. g. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards. h. Bacteriologist's signature and authority. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS R" A. Accurately record actual locations of piping mains, valves, connections, and top of pipe elevations. B. Identify and describe unexpected variations to subsoil conditions and location of uncharted utilities. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Specification Name: WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS 02510-2 SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS F PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Site water piping and fittings including domestic potable waterline and fire protection system supply waterline, valvi:s, and fire hydrants. B. Connection of site water system to municipal water systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02322 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities B. Section 02810—Lawn Sprinkler Systems C. Section 13900 - Fire Suppression (See Architectural/Building Specifications) D. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) latest edition 1. B 16 22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)latest edition 1. B 88 Seamless Copper Water Tube 2. D 1784 Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC)Compounds 3. D 2 :41 Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR-Series) 4. D 29564 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)solvent cement 5. D 2672 Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) integrally molded bell ends for solvent - ., cemented pipe joints. 6. D 21355 Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings 7. D 3139 Joints for Plastic Pressure Pipes using Flexible Elastomeric Seals 8. F 477 Elastomeric gaskets and lubricant 9. F 656 Poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)cement Primer C. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) latest edition 1. A2'1.8 D. American Water Works Association (AWWA)latest edition t 1. Cl 34 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water 2. C105 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Piping for Water and Other Liquids 3. C110 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3 Inches Through 48 Inches, for Water and Other Liquids 4. C111 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings 5. C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water or Other Liquids 6. C1200 Steel Water Pipe 6 Inches and Larger 7. C500 Gate Valves for Water and Sewage Systems ► 8. C502 Dry-Barrel Fire Hydrants Project Name: Wal-Mart Mae;ter Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02510-1 f OR Specification Name: WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS L SITE STABILIZATION and CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY DATES A record of dates when major grading activities occur,when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site, and when stabilization measures are initiated shall be maintained until final site stabilization is achieved and the Notice of Termination is filed. The dates can be entered in the following form, or on a different form. MAJOR GRADING ACTIVITIES Description of Activity: Begin (date): Site Contractor: Location: End (date): Description of Activity: Begin (date): Site Contractor: ! Location: End (date): Description of Activity: Begin (date): Site Contractor: Location: End (date): Description of Activity: Begin (date): Site Contractor: Location: End (date): Description of Activity: Begin (date): Site Contractor: Location: End (date): END OF SECTION 02370 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-22 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (INCLUDING SWPPP) L APPENDIX E RECORD OF STABILIZATION AND CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY DATES Project Name: Wal-Mar:Master Specification Revised 02/1412000 02370-21 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) NOTICE of TERMINATION Two copies of the Notice of Termination must be completed when construction activities that disturb site soil have been completed and the site has achieved final stabilization. One should be forwarded to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. The other should be sent via registered or certified mail, with return receipt requested, to the following address. [GQve�ning Agen ,. I me] [Ades] Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-20 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) APPENDIX D NOTICE OF TERMINATION Project Name: Wal-Mari Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 19 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) am INSPECTION REPORT for STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN , g mcLocatio� DATE: INSPECTOR: INSPECTOR QUALIFICATIONS: SITE CONDITIONS: POLLUTANT CONTROL IN CONFORMANCE EFFECTIVE Construction Entrance YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below Sediment Barriers YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below Vehicle Service Area Berm YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below ► YES/NO See Below YES/NO See Below YES/NO(See Below) YES/NO(See Below) VIOLATIONS NOTED: (Explain each "NO"circled above) RECOMMENDED REMEDIAL ACTIONS: .w COMMENTS: Based on the results of the inspection,necessary control modifications shall be implemented within 7 calendar days. These reports shall be kept on file as part of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan for at least three years from the date of 4% conpletion and submissioin of the Notice of Termination. A copy of the SWPPP shall be kept at the site at all times during construction. Certification Statement at "I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible 0" for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Name: Address: Telephone: Site location: INSPECTOR: DATE: (Signature) «ew Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 18 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) ..► APPENDIX C INSPECTION REPORT (SAMPLE FORM) 1p t1k, Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 17 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) .w, CONTRACTOR CERTIFICATIONS [Project,Name and:;Numberj [P,�oject�Location ..�► The general contractor and/or subcontractor(s)that will implement the pollutant control measures described in the SWPPP must be identified below. Each must sign a statement certifying that they understand the NPDES general permit authorizing storm water discharges during construction. These statements must be maintained in the SWPPP file on site. Contractor implementing the SWPPP: Business Name Business Address Business Telephone Number CERTIFICATION: (Note signature requirements in Part VI.G. of the NPDES General Permit.) 71 certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES)permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site identified as part of this certification." w Signature Date Printed Name Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 16 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) APPENDIX B CERTIFICATION FORM Project Name: Wal-Mart Master specification Revised 02114/2000 02370- 15 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) w BLANK PAGE Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 14 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (INCLUDING SWPPP) APPENDIX A NOTICE OF INTENT lip �q o actual Noticeof intent Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 13 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (INCLUDING SWPPP) .w BLANK PAGE Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 12 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) APPENDIX A - 140TICE OF INTENT(NOI) APPENDIX B -CERTIFICATION FORMS APPENDIX C - INSPECTION REPORT(SAMPLE FORM) APPENDIX D - NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT) APPENDIX E - !RECORD OF STABILIZATION AND CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY DATES Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 11 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) effective in preventing significant impacts to receiving waters. Based on inspection results, any modification necessary to increase effectiveness of this SWPPP to an so acceptable level must be made within seven calendar days of the inspection. The inspection reports must be completed entirely and additional remarks should be included if needed to fully describe a situation. An important aspect of the inspection report is the description of additional measures that need to be taken to enhance plan effectiveness. The inspection report must identify whether the site was in No compliance with the SWPPP at the time of inspection and specifically identify all incidents of non- compliance. W4 Inspection reports must be kept on file by the general contractor as an integral part of this SWPPP for at least three years from the date of completion of the project. Ultimately, it is the responsibility of the general contractor to assure the adequacy of site pollutant discharge controls. Actual physical site conditions or contractor practices could make it necessary to install more structural controls than are shown on the plans. (For example, localized concentrations of runoff could make it necessary to install additional sediment barriers.) Assessing the need for additional controls and implementing them or adjusting existing controls will be a continuing aspect of this SWPPP until the site achieves final stabilization. •4 •A Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 10 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) ,� 2. The general contractor will designate areas for equipment cleaning, maintenance, and repair. The general contractor and subcontractors will utilize those areas. The areas will be protected by a temporary perimeter berm. 3. Us a of detergents for large scale washing is prohibited (i.e.,vehicles, buildings, pavement surfaces, etc.) 4. Chemicals, paints, solvents,fertilizers, and other toxic material must be stored in waterproof containers. Except during application, the contents must be kept in trucks or within storage facilities. Runoff containing such material must be collected, removed from the site, treated, and disposed at an approved solid waste or chemical disposal facility. V1. LOCAL PLANS In addition to this SWPPP, construction activities associated with this project must comply with any guidelines set forth by local regulatory agencies. �r VI1. INSPECTIONS AND SYSTEM MAINTENANCE Between the time tiis SWPPP is implemented and final site stabilization is achieved, all disturbed areas and pollutant controls must be inspected at least once every seven calendar days and within 24 hours following a rainfall of 0.5 inches or greater. The purpose of site inspections is to assess performance of pollutant controls. The inspections will be conducted by the general contractor's designated representative. Based on these inspections, the general contractor will decide whether it is necessary to modify this SWPPP, add or relocate sediment barriers, or whatever else may be needed in order to prevent pollutants^*rom leaving the site via storm water runoff. The general contractor has the duty to cause pollutant control measures to be repaired, modified, maintained, supplemented,or whatever else is necessary in order to achieve effective pollutant control. Examples of particular items to evaluate during site inspections are listed below. This list is not intended to be comprehensive. During each inspection the inspector must evaluate overall pollutant control system performance as well as particular details of individual system components.Additional factors should be considered as appropriate to the circumstances. A. Locations Nhere vehicles enter and exit the site must be inspected for evidence of off-site sediment tracking. A stabilized construction entrance will be constructed where vehicles enter and exit. ­his entrance will be maintained or supplemented as necessary to prevent sediment from leaving the site on vehicles. B. Sediment barriers must be inspected and, if necessary, they must be enlarged or cleaned in order to provide additional capacity. All material excavated from behind sediment barriers will be stockpiled on the up slope side. Additional sediment barriers must be constructed as needed. C. Inspections will evaluate disturbed areas and areas used for storing materials that are exposed to rainfall for evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. If necessary, the materiels must be covered or original covers must be repaired or supplemented. Also, protective berms must be constructed, if needed, in order to contain runoff from material storage areas. D. Grassed areas will be inspected to confirm that a healthy stand of grass is maintained. The site has achieved final stabilization once all areas are covered with building foundation or pavement, or have a stand of grass with at least 70 percent density. The density of 70 percent or greater must be ffiaintained to be considered as stabilized. Areas must be watered,fertilized, and reseeded as needed to achieve this goal. E. All discharge points must be inspected to determine whether erosion control measures are 7 Project Name: Wal-Mart��aster Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-9 9 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) Final site stabilization is achieved when turf grass cover provides permanent stabilization for at least 70 percent of the disturbed soil surface, exclusive of areas that have been paved. B. Other Pollutant Controls Control of sediments has been described previously. Other aspects of this SWPPP are listed below: 1. Dust Control-Construction traffic must enter and exit the site at the stabilized construction entrance. The purpose is to trap dust and mud that would otherwise be carried off-site by construction traffic. Water trucks will be used as needed during construction to reduce dust generated on the site. Dust control must be provided by the general contractor to a degree that is acceptable to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, and in compliance with applicable local and state dust control regulations. After construction,the site will be stabilized (as described elsewhere),which will reduce the potential for dust generation. 2. Solid Waste Disposal- No solid materials, including building materials, are allowed to be discharged from the site with storm water. All solid waste, including disposable materials incidental to the major construction activities, must be collected and placed in containers. The containers will be emptied periodically by a contract trash disposal service and hauled away from the site. Substances that have the potential for polluting surface and/or groundwater must be controlled by whatever means necessary in order to ensure that they do not discharge from the site. As an example, special care must be exercised during equipment fueling and servicing operations. If a spill occurs, it must be contained and disposed so that it will not flow from the site or enter groundwater, even if this requires removal,treatment, and disposal of soil. In this regard, potentially polluting substances should be handled in a manner consistent with the impact they represent. 3. Sanitary Facilities-All personnel involved with construction activities must comply with state and local sanitary or septic system regulations. Temporary sanitary facilities will be provided at the site throughout the construction phase. They must be utilized by all construction personnel and will be serviced by a commercial operator. 4. Water Source-Non-storm water components of site discharge must be clean water. Water used for construction,which discharges from the site, must originate from a public water supply or private well approved by the State Health Department. Water used for construction that does not originate from an approved public supply must not discharge from the site. It can be retained in the ponds until it infiltrates and evaporates. 5. Long-Term Pollutant Controls-Storm water pollutant control measures installed during construct on,that will also provide benefits after construction, include[provt'de Uiescnption of perrparter onds,_grass lm d,c' %Jp: app@gjgQrra11s ,glass co vefage,_e�c,_,�. � Those sediment barriers that do not interfere with normal operations and appear to provide long-term benefits can be left in place after construction is completed. C. Construction Phase"Best Management Practices" During the construction phase,the general contractor will implement the following measures: 1. Material resulting from the clearing and grubbing operation will be stockpiled up slope from adequate sedimentation controls. A" Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-8 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) am IV. SITE DESCRIPTION Included as part of this SWPPP are the project construction drawings. Refer to them for detailed site information.Site Ult,41� eYe s tc CLstni of;dl�A. Location C o o1Pf oagdQ p pE}Y 9 s=tream_ }'°wn• +vy..a � B. Site Topography [Decnfethe existing topography onahe site ",Tell what vegetation wlhbe impacted by tbe�deye.[op,�.er� e�pi G!e �,,topQgraphy;�wtll_bg impacted by,the de,�elopmer tj xs'"4 C. Rainfall Informabon�Descn �,,#.he-typical yeaflywra,�fa��patte�,for �,,site .yow muc,...,whert �a n" gall al rtc` j D. Site Soils- Descnb theoils,apectado;fe foudu�ng pQstructt4! ab se othe`geeeh report]. E. Total Area and Disturbed Area and Disturbed Area-The entire site contains[x]acres and the area to be clisturbed by grading is anticipated to be approximately[xiij acres. F. Quality Receiving Surface Waters and Wetlands Waters and Wetlands-Poiz-951VO 010 .��. �ece�ving;yvd�.�an �sf�ea�. '�;r.�, i�>S-^.:v:.k:�s��."--�^^��'�'"�S G. Erosion Control Plan [�',�o a ye fg�e�ic.gq;tie�eXosion.controls.shest(s)] V. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION MEASURES AND CONTROLS A variety of storm Hater pollutant controls are recommended for this project. Some controls are intended to function temporarily and will be used as needed for pollutant control during the construction period. These include temporary sediment barriers and permanent storm retention ponds (which also function as permanent sediment basins). For most disturbed areas, permanent stabilization will be accomplished by covering the soil wi-:h pavement, building, or vegetation. A. Erosion and Sediment Controls 1. Soil Stabilization-The purpose of soil stabilization is to prevent soil from leaving the site. In the natural condition, soil is stabilized by native vegetation. The primary technique to be used at this project for stabilizing site soil will be to provide a protective cover of turf grass, pavement,or building. (a; Temporary Seeding-Within 14 days after construction activity ceases on any particular area, all disturbed ground where there will not be construction for longer than 21 days must be seeded with fast-germinating temporary seed and protected with mulch. (b) Permanent Seeding-All areas at final grade must be seeded within 14 days after completion of the major construction activity. Except for small level spots, seeded areas should generally be protected with mulch. (c) Structural Controls [Prov�c a a;descnptlon reference pan sheets which }_ .wry a. irk t° r y° describes l ow the storm wader n�ng vyljl.be bandlecl de nor_por d;retet do Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-7 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) XIR 3. Water used to wash vehicles or control dust; 4. Water flowing from potable sources and water line flushing;' 41� 5. Irrigation drainage; 6. External building wash down which does not use detergents; 7. Runoff from pavement wash down where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous materials have not occurred (unless all spilled material has been removed)and where detergents have not been used; 8. Air conditioning condensate; 9. Springs and uncontaminated groundwater; and 10. Foundation or footing drains where flows are not contaminated with process materials such as solvents. The techniques described in this SWPPP focus on providing control of pollutant discharges with practical approaches that utilize readily available expertise, materials, and equipment. The Owner referred to in this SWPPP is Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. The general contractor will construct the site development improvements while working under contract with the Owner. III. PROJECT DESCRIPTION Described below are the major construction activities that are the subject of this SWPPP. They are _ presented in the order(or sequence)they are expected to begin, but each activity will not necessarily be completed before the next begins. Also,these activities could occur in a different order if necessary to maintain adequate erosion and sedimentation control: A. Construct rock pads for construction entrance/exit. This will be the first construction work on the project. B. Install sediment barriers down slope from construction activities that disturb site soil; C. Construct rock surface for temporary parking; D. Clear and grub the improvement areas. Sediment barriers will already be in place down slope; E. Excavation and embankment to form retention ponds and drainage channels; F. Excavation and embankment to form the building pad and pavement areas; G. Underground Utilities-Sediment barriers will be utilized as required to bound the down slope side of utility construction and soil stockpiles; H. Final Grading-Sediment barriers will be maintained down slope from disturbed soil during this operation; and I. Completion of on-site stabilization. The actual schedule for implementing pollutant control measures will be determined by project construction progress. Down slope protective measures must always be in place before soil is disturbed. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-6 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (INCLUDING SWPPP) SWPPP in order to accomplish the intended goals. K. This SWPPF'must be amended as necessary during the course of construction in order to keep it current with the pollutant control measures utilized at the site. Amending the SWPPP does not mean that it has to be reprinted. It is acceptable to add addenda, sketches, new sections, and/or revised drampings. L. A record of the dates when major grading activities occur,when construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site, and when stabilization measures are initiated mu:;t be maintained until the NOT is filed. A log for keeping such records is included in the Appendices. A different form for the log may be substituted if it is found to be more useful. II. INTRODUCTION This SWPPP has been prepared for major activities associated with construction of(insert project name and location). This SWPPP includes the elements necessary to comply with the national baseline general permit for construction activities administered by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)under the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES)program and all local governing agency requirements. This SWPPP must be implemented at the start of construction. Construction phase pollutant sources anticipated at the site are disturbed (bare)soil, vehicle fuels and lubricants, chemicals associated with building construction, and building materials. Without adequate control there is the potential for each type of pollutant to be transported by storm water. .g, . :� Project constructior will consist primarily of site grading, axing, storm drainage,water �l�r, sewage .�� collection, and site lighting to facilitate[a . Fa a es np iQ l and_size;of t ie p�ofe_�,.,��t g;�;uf I A. Purpose A major goal of pollution prevention efforts during project construction is to control soil and pollutants tiat originate on the site and prevent them from flowing to surface waters. The purpose of this SWPPP is to provide guidelines for achieving that goal. A successful pollution prevention program also relies upon careful inspection and adjustments during the construction process in order to enhance its effectiveness. B. Scope This SWPPP must be implemented before construction begins on the site. It primarily addresses the impact of storm rainfall and runoff on areas of the ground surface disturbed during the constructic n process. In addition,there are recommendations for controlling other sources of pollution trat could accompany the major construction activities. This SWPPP will terminate when disturbed areas are stabilized, construction activities covered herein have ceased, and a completed Notice of Termination (NOT)is mailed to the governing agency requiring the NOT. Particular-brms are included which are necessary for implementing the SWPPP. The natior al baseline General Permit for Storm Water Discharges from Construction Activities prohibits most non-storm water discharges during the construction phase. Allowable non-storm water discharges that could occur during construction on this project,which would therefore be covered by the General Permit, include: 1. Discharges from fire fighting activities; 2. Fire hydrant flushing;' ' Project Specification 02510-3.06,8 requires the Utility Contractor to neutralize super-chlorinated water from water distribution pipes before releasing it into the environment. Alternative neutralization techniques are described in that specification. rr Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-5 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (INCLUDING SWPPP) I. EXECUTIVE SUMMARY The general contractor, and all subcontractors involved with a construction activity that disturbs site soil or who implement a pollutant control measure identified in the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) must comply with the following requirements of the National Pollution Discharge Elimination Systems (NPDES)General Permit and any local governing agency having jurisdiction concerning erosion and sedimentation control: M" A. List the noUficatlon regwrements of the permit Ust names and addresses of the governing agerices requiring niitification before earthworj(can'begm�and what the rrt�rnmum rto� cattotj time is,,State any regwrements fo u a`pre-construction meeting Iderify specficallyhos contacts whose�attendac@t tt pre;gp�strueet�gs fequlred " [adiress,,c��tactg rr png,�u�e�.oe_goy®rryryq review 3gQncy] B. A copy of the Notice of Intent(NOI)and a description of the project must be posted in a prominent place for public viewing at the construction site. C. Complete copy of the SWPPP, including copies of all inspection reports, plan revisions, etc., must be retained at the project site at all times during working hours and kept in the permanent project records for at least three years following submission of the Notice of Termination (NOT). D. The general contractor must provide names and addresses of all subcontractors working on this project who will be involved with the major construction activities that disturb site soil. That information must be kept with this SWPPP. E. The general contractor and all subcontractors involved with the major construction activities that disturb site soil must sign a copy of the appropriate certification statement included in Appendix B. F. As described previously, regular inspections must be made to determine effectiveness of the SWPPP. It would be modified as needed to prevent pollutants from discharging from the site. The inspector must be a person familiar with the site,the nature of the major construction activities, and qualified to evaluate both overall system performance and individual component performance. Additionally, the inspector must either be someone empowered to implement modifications to this SWPPP and the pollutant control devices, if needed, in order to increase effectiveness to an acceptable level, or someone with the authority to cause such things to happen. G. This SWPPP must be updated each time there are significant modifications to the pollutant prevention system or a change of contractors working on the project who disturbs site soil. The general contractor must notify the governing review agency as soon as these modifications are implemented. H. Discharge of oil or other hazardous substances into the storm water is subject to reporting and cleanup requirements. Refer to Part 111.6 of the NPDES General Permit for additional information. Copies of the NPDES General Permit and the Notice of Intent forms are available by calling 1-703-821-4823. I. Once the site reaches final stabilization, the general contractor must complete and submit a Notice of Termination (NOT). A blank form is included as Appendix D. J. This SWPPP intends to control water-borne and liquid pollutant discharges by some combination of interception, filtration, and containment. The general contractor and subcontractors implementing this SWPPP must remain alert to the need to periodically refine and update the Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-4 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) •.� STORM "FATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN For CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES At [P-�roject�Na�ne,�,�n�Number 0 PRARRdof tion Prepared by: [Engineer s Address] E,[i[Engfne�e,�s Phone Igines'Faz;No:] [Eng neer's�Project.Number(optional)] (Dade) Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-3 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) w PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Review Construction Drawings and Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. B. Conduct pre-construction meeting with Site Contractor. 3.02 EROSION CONTROL AND SLOPE PROTECTION IMPLEMENTATION A. Place erosion control systems in accordance with Construction Drawings and Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan or as may be dictated by site conditions in order to maintain the intent of the specifications and permits at no additional cost to Owner. B. Deficiencies or changes on Construction Drawings or Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan shall be implemented as site conditions change. C. Owner has authority to limit surface area of erodible earth material exposed by clearing and grubbing, excavation, borrow and embankment operations and to direct Contractor to provide immediate permanent or temporary pollution control measures. D. Maintain temporary erosion control systems as directed by Owner or governing authorities to control siltation during life of contract. Contractor shall respond to maintenance or additional work ordered by Owner or governing authorities within 48 hours or sooner if required at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Contractor will be required to incorporate permanent erosion control features into project at earliest practical time to minimize need for temporary controls. F. Permanently seed and mulch cut slopes as excavation proceeds to extent considered desirable and practical. G. Slopes that erode easily or that will not be graded for a period of 14 days or more shall be temporarily seeded as work progresses with wheat, rye, or oats application in accordance with Section 02900 unless otherwise specified on the Construction Drawings. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370-2 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) .,,� SECTION 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUD=S A. Installation of temporary and permanent erosion control systems. B. Installation of temporary and permanent slope protection systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02230-Siie Clearing B. Section 02300—Earthwork C. Section 02630—S.orm Drainage D. Section 02900—Planting E. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan F. Construction Drawings 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Protect adjacent properties and water resources from erosion and sediment damage throughout life of contract. PART2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Quick growing grasses such as wheat, rye, or oats in accordance with Section 02900. B. Hay or straw bales as specified on Construction Drawings. C. Fencing for siltation control as specified on Construction Drawings. D. Curlex blankets by American Excelsior Company or approved equal. E. Bale stakes for each bale shall be minimum of 4-feet in length and shall be either two#2 rebars,two steel pickets, or troo 2-inch x 2-inch hardwood stakes driven 1'-6" into ground. F. Temporary mulches such as loose hay, straw, netting,wood cellulose, or agricultural silage. G. Fence stakes shell be minimum of 5-ft in length and be either metal stakes or 2-inch x 2-inch hardwood stakes driven 1'-6"into ground. H. Rip-Rap in accordance with Section 02300.3.06. I. Temporary and Permanent Outfail Structures as specified on Construction Drawings. Project Name: Wal-Mart Ma ster Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02370- 1 Specification Name: EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL(INCLUDING SWPPP) 11, E. Backfill and compaction of treated subsoil shall be in accordance with Sections 02300, 02321, 02322, 02323, and 02324. F. Maintain optimum moisture of mixed materials to attain required stabilization and compaction. G. Finish subgrade surface in accordance with Section 02300. H. Remove surplus mix materials from site at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.05 CURING A. Immediately following compaction of mix, seal top surface with curing seal. B. Do not permit traffic for 72 hours after sealing top surface. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compression test and analysis of hardened fill material will be performed in accordance with Section 02300. B. If tests indicate work does not meet specified requirements, remove work, replace and retest. END OF SECTION 02340 r► Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02340-4 Specification Name: SOIL STABILIZATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Obtain approval from the independent testing laboratory of mix design before proceeding with placement. B. Start stabilization only when weather and soil conditions are favorable for successful application of proposed material. C. Proofroll subgrade to identify areas in need of stabilization. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate sub soil to depth sufficient to accommodate soil stabilization. B. Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock that interfere with achieving uniform subsoil conditions. C. Do not excavate within normal 45 degree bearing splay of any foundation. D. Notify Construction Manager of unexpected subsurface conditions. Discontinue affected work in area until notified t:) resume work. E. Correct areas over-excavated in accordance with Section 02300. F. Remove excess excavated material from site. 3.03 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC F A. Place geotextile fabric over subsoil surface, lap edges and ends in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in those areas that are shown on Construction Drawings or in those areas that need additional stcibilization prior to placement of base course. Bridge lift sections may require the use of geotextile fabric for stabilization prior to placement of fill. B. Place geotextile fabric specified on Construction Drawings and in Specifications in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.04 SOIL TREATMENT AND BACKFILLING A. Lime Stabilised Subgrade: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after continual failure, treat prepared subgrade with hydrated lime in accordance with state highway department specification s. B. Cement Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after IF continual failure, treat prepared subgrade with portland cement in accordance with state highway department:>pecifications. C. Fly Ash Stabilized Subgrade: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after continual failure, treat prepared subgrade with fly ash in accordance with state highway department specifications. D. Bridge Lifts: Where indicated on Construction Drawings or as required after continual failure, treat prepared subgrade by application of a bridge lift. Bridging over existing soils shall be acceptable only when approved in writing by the Owner. Place geotextile fabric or geogrid over existing soils to be bridged. The geotextile fabric or geogrid selected shall be appropriate for the bridge lift material being placed. Place bridge lift over geotextile fabric or geogrid. Bridge lift material may be surge stone, granular fill, or shot rock fill. Granular material shall be in accordance with Section 02325. Surge stone and shot roe* will be approved by the Owner's representative on a submittal basis. The Owner and the Owner's representative shall have sole discretion as to the acceptability of all submittals. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02340-3 Specification Name: SOIL STABILIZATION 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with state and local standards in conjunction with requirements specified herein. ftR 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 30-pound sample of each material to be used at the site in airtight containers to the OR independent testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of material that is to be used to the independent testing laboratory for review. B. Submit name of each materials supplier and specific type and source of each material. Change in source requires approval of Owner. C. Submit mix design and materials mix ratio that will achieve specified requirements of state and local agencies for soil stabilization. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hydrated Lime B. Portland Cement:ASTM C150, Normal Type I C. Fly Ash: ASTM C977 or AASHTO M216 D. Coarse Aggregate: Type Al �► E. Fine Aggregate: Type A4 F. Subsoil: Existing to be Reused, Type S1 G. Surge Stone 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Curing Seal:Asphalt Emulsion Primer B. Geotextile Fabric for Stabilization 1. Mirafi 50OX or 60OX 2. Phillips 66 Supac 6WS 3. Dupont Typar 3401 and 3601 4. Trevira S1114 and S1120 5. Tensar SS-1 and SS-2 6. Exxon GTF-200 or 350 " 7. TerraTex HD and GS 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Perform operations using suitable, well maintained equipment capable of excavating subsoil, mixing and placing materials,wetting, consolidating, and compacting of material. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02340-2 Specification Name: SOIL STABILIZATION SECTION 02340 SOIL STABILIZATION PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation, treatment, and backfilling of subgrade for lime stabilization. B. Excavation, treatment, and backfilling of subgrade for cement stabilization. C. Excavation, treatment, and backfilling of subgrade for fly ash stabilization. D. Excavation, treatment, and backfilling of subgrade for bridge lift stabilization. E. Installation o-:Geotextile Fabric for stabilization of subgrade. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300- Earthwork B. Section 023'1 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Structures C. Section 023:2 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities D. Section 02323 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Pavement E. Section 02324—Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction For Out Parcels F. Section 02325-Aggregate Materials G. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)latest edition 1. C 1;60 Portland Cement 2. C 6'8 Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete 3. C 977 Quicklime and Hydrated Lime for Soil Stabilization 4. D 1633 Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement Cylinders B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO)latest edition 1. M 216 Lime for Soil Stabilization C. National Lime Association (NLA) 1. Bulletin 326 Lime Stabilization Construction Manual 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not instE ll mixed materials in wind in excess of 10 mph or when temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. Project Name: Wal-Mart Masten Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02340-1 Specification Name: SOIL STABILIZATION BLANK PAGE A* ..r 1,^ I inch 70-100 314 inch 50-90 No.4 30-60 No. 30 7-30 No. 200 0-13 3. Aggregate Type A3: Pea Gravel — Natural stone; washed, free of clay, shale, organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C136 and D2487; to the following limits: a. Minimum size: 1/4 inch b. Maximum Size: 5/8 inch 4. Fine Aggregate Type A4: Sand — Natural river or bank sand; washed; free of silt, clay, loans, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter; graded in accordance with ASTM C133 and D2487;within the following limits: Sieve Size Percent Passing No. 4 90-100 No. 50 7-40 No.200 0-10 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Transport off-site materials to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger any improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STOCKPILING Stockpile on-site at locations indicated by Owner in such manner that there will be no standing water or ru mixing with other mE terials. 3.02 BORROW AND SPOIL SITES Upon completion of borrow and/or spoil operations, clean up borrow and/or spoil areas as indicated on Construction Drawings in neat and reasonable manner to satisfaction of property owner and Owner. END OF SECTION 02325 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02325-3 Specification Name: AGGREGATE MATERIALS 7 40 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 30-pound sample of each aggregate or mixture that is to be incorporated into project in air- tight containers to the independent testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of aggregate material that is to be incorporated into project to the independent testing laboratory for " ► review. B. Submit name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Any change , in source requires approval of Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Construction and materials shall meet or exceed requirements of this Section and applicable state highway department specifications section(s) referred to or noted on the Construction Drawings which pertain to paving base course design, materials, preparation, and execution. Materials shall be as indicated on Construction Drawings and shall comply with state highway department specifications regarding source, quality, gradation, liquid limit, plasticity index, and mix proportioning. B. Soil Materials 1. Subsoil Type S1: Excavated and reused material, graded, free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rock larger than 2 inches, and debris; Conforming to ASTM D2487 Group Symbol CL, ML, SC. 2. Subsoil Type S2: Imported material graded, free of lumps larger than 3 inches, rock larger than 2 inches, and debris, conforming to ASTM D2487 Symbol CL, ML, SC. 3. Topsoil Type S3; Excavated and reused material, graded, free of root, rock larger than inch, subsoil, debris, large weeds and foreign matter; conforming to ASTM D2487 Group ,* Symbol OH C. Aggregate Material 1. Coarse Aggregate Type Al: Material shall be sound crushed limestone, crushed slag, granulated slag, crushed gravel, or other types of suitable material meeting the requirements of the item. Crushed limestone, crushed slag and crushed gravel shall meet .r the following grading requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 1/2 inches 100 1 inch 75-100 3/4 inch 60-100 3/8 inch 35-75 No. 4 30-60 No. 30 7-30 No. 200 3-13 2. Coarse Aggregate Type A2: Material shall be crushed carbonate, crushed gravel, crushed air-cooled slag, granulated slag, a mixture of crushed and granulated slag, or other types of suitable material meeting the requirements of this item. Crushed carbonate stone or 04 mixtures of crushed and granulated slags shall meet the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing 2 inches 100 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02325-2 Specification Name: AGGREGATE MATERIALS SECTION 02325 AGGREGATE MATERIALS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aggregate materials for use as specified in other Sections. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02220—Site Demolition ' B. Section 02230-Site Clearing .y C. Section 02300- Earthwork D. Section 02321 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Structures E. Section 02322- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities F. Section 02323- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Pavement G. Section 02324- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Out Parcels H. Section 02340-Soil Stabilization I. Section 02370- Erosion Control and Sedimentation J Section 2830—Segmental Retaining Wall Systems K. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)latest edition 1. C126 Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 0 2. D 698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft- Ibf/f:3 (600 kN.m/m3)) 3. D 1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft- Ibf/f:3 (2,700 Kn.m/m3)) 4. D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water (Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock, and Soil- Aggregate Mixtures 5. D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes 6. D 2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 7. D 3017 Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 8. D 4:318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest editionT 88 Particle Size.Analysis of Soils 1.04 QUALITY ASSURA14CE A. Tests and analysis of aggregate materials will be performed in accordance with ASTM and AASHTO procedures specified herein. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02325-1 Specification Name: AGGREGATE MATERIALS 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 02300, "Field Quality Control'. END OF SECTION 02324 �R •ar Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02324-4 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR OUT PARCELS Mw Y- w insufficient compaction. Accomplish proofrolling by making minimum of 2 complete passes with fully-loaded tandem-axle dump truck with a maximum loaded weight of 20 tons, or approved equal, in each of 2 perpendicular directions under supervision and direction of the independent testing laboratory. Excavate and recompact areas of failure as specified herein. Continual failure areas shall be stabilized in accordance with Section 02340 at no additional cost to Owner. l B. Place fill materials used in preparation of the subgrade in lifts or layers not to exceed 8-inches loose measure and compacted to minimum density of 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 698, (or 92 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557) at m oisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. C. Following cable stipulates maximum allowable values for plasticity index (PI)and liquid limit(LL)of suitable fill materials to be used in specified areas, unless specifically stated otherwise on Construction Drawings: PI LL *Paving Area, below upper two feet 20 50 *Paving Area, upper two feet 15 40 (*References to depth are to proposed subgrade elevations) .: D. Fill material imported from off-site or fill material removed from onsite cut areas shall have CBR or LBR value equal to or greater than pavement design subgrade CBR or LBR value indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials as specified herein to attain required compaction density. B. Test materials in accordance with Section 02300. C. Corrective Measures for Non-Complying Compaction: Remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained. Continual failure areas shall be stabilized in accordance with Section 02:140 at no additional cost to Owner. 3.05 MAINTENANCE Of= SUBGRADE A. Verify finished subgrades to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. B. Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction including concrete trucks, dump truck.5, and other construction equipment. C. Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace in manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or Fetter than best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, un form, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross-section. 3.06 FINISH GRADING A. Finish grading shall be in accordance with Section 02300 and as specified herein. B. Check grad ng of out parcel areas by string line from grade stakes (blue tops)set at not more than 50-foot cenlers. Tolerances of 0.10-foot, more or less, will be permitted. Contractor is to provide engineering and field staking necessary for verification of lines, grades, and elevations. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02324-3 Specification Name: EXCAVA71ON, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR OUT PARCELS PART 2 PRODUCTS !! 2.01 MATERIALS rrU A. Fill material from on-site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. B. Fill material from off-site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. C. Aggregate material as specified in Section 02325. D. Acceptable geotextile fabrics and geogrids as specified in Section 02340. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Transport off-site materials to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify lines, elevations, and grades necessary to construct Out Parcel(s) as shown on Construction Drawings. B. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same. C. Locate and identify site utilities that have previously been installed and protect from damage. D. Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect from damage. E. Over excavate and properly prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting proposed systems. Stabilize these areas by using acceptable geotextile fabrics or aggregate material placed and compacted as specified in Section 02340. 3.02 EXCAVATION , A. Excavate Out Parcel(s)areas to line and grade as shown on Construction Drawings. B. Place suitable material into project fill areas as specified in Section 02300. C. Unsuitable excavated material is to be disposed of in manner and location that is acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. D. Perform excavation using capable, well-maintained equipment and methods acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. 3.03 FILLING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which subgrade preparations for out parcel(s)are to be performed shall be scarified to minimum depth of 8-inches and compacted to minimum of 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 698 (or 92 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557)at moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. Proofroll these areas to detect areas of „ . Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02324-2 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR OUT PARCELS war SECTION 02324 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR OUT PARCELS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation to line, grade, and configuration as shown on Construction Drawings for proposed out parcel(s). B. Fill to line, grade, and configuration as shown on Construction Drawings for proposed out .arcel s p O C. Compacting fill materials in acceptable manner as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 - Earthwork B. Section 02318- Rock Excavation C. Section 02340- Soil Stabilization z D. Section 02715- Base Course > E. Section 02 325-Aggregate Materials F. Section 02740-Asphaltic Concrete Paving G. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving H. Section 02770 -Curbs and Sidewalks I. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. See Sectio i 02300 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE_ A. Independent Testing Laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, will be retained to perform construction testing on filling operations and subgrade analysis as specified in Section 02300 and as specified herein. B. Quality ass trance testing shall be in accordance with Part 3, Section 3.07, "Field Quality Control". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawl igs or details pertaining to excavating and filling for out parcel(s)are not required unless otherwise shown on Construction Drawings or if contrary procedures to Construction Documents are proposed. B. Submit 30-pound sample of each type of off-site fill material that is to be used in backfilling in air-tight container to independent testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of aggregate material that is to be used to independent testing laboratory for review. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02324-1 Specification Name: EXCAVA "ION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR OUT PARCELS B. Check grading of paving areas by string line from grade stakes (blue tops) set at not more than 50- foot centers. Tolerances of 0.10-foot, more or less, will be permitted. Contractor is to provide engineering and field staking necessary for verification of lines, grades, and elevations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL rw A. See Section 02300, 3.07, "Field Quality Control". END OF SECTION 02323 +.M OR w., Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02323-4 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT r 1 percent Delow and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. Proofroll these areas to detect areas of insufficient compaction. Accomplish proofrolling by making minimum of 2 complete passes with fully-loaded tandem-axle dump truck with a maximum loaded weight of 20 tons, or approved equal, in each of 2 perpendicular directions under supervision and direction of the independent testing laboratory. Excavate and recompact areas of failure as specified herein. Continual failure areas shall be stabilized in accordance with Section 02245 at no additional cost to Owner. B. Place fill materials used in preparation of the subgrade in lifts or layers not to exceed 8-inches loose men sure and compacted to minimum density of 98 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 698, (or 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557) at moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. C. Following table stipulates maximum allowable values for plasticity index (PI) and liquid limit (LL) of suitable fill materials to be used in specified areas, unless specifically stated otherwise on Constructic n Drawings: PI LL *Paving rea below g , upper two feet 20 50 *Paving Aroa, upper two feet 15 40 (*References to depth are to proposed subgrade elevations) D. Fill materia imported from off-site or fill material removed from onsite cut areas shall have CBR or LBR value equal to or greater than pavement design subgrade CBR or LBR value indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.04 COMPACTION A. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill materials as specified herein to attain required compaction density. B. Test materials in accordance with Section 02300. C. Corrective ineasures for non-complying compaction: Remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained at no additional expense to Owner. 3.05 MAINTENANCE OF: SUBGRADE A. Verify finished subgrades to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. B. Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction including concrete trucks, dump trucks, and other construction equipment. C. Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth - necessary and replace in manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or Setter than best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross-section. 3.06 FINISH GRADING A. Finish grading shall be in accordance with Section 02300 and as specified herein. Project Name: Wal-Mart Maste r Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02323-3 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill material from on-site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. B. Fill material from off-site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. C. Aggregate material as specified in Section 02325. D. Acceptable geotextile fabrics and geogrids as specified in Section 023405:. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Transport off-site materials to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping. 00 PART 3 EXECUTION 9 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify lines, elevations, and grades necessary to construct pavements, curb, curb and gutter, bases, sidewalk, and roadways as shown on Construction Drawings. B. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and 04 replaced, as necessary, by same. C. Locate and identify site utilities that have previously been installed and protect from damage. D. Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect from damage. E. Over excavate and properly prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting proposed systems. Stabilize these areas by using acceptable geotextile fabrics or aggregate material placed and compacted as specified in Section 02340. 3.02 EXCAVATION •r A. Excavate roadway and pavement areas to line and grade as shown on Construction Drawings. - B. Place suitable material into project fill areas as specified in Section 02300. C. Unsuitable excavated material is to be disposed of in manner and location that is acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. D. Perform excavation using capable, well-maintained equipment and methods acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. +k 3.03 FILLING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which subgrade preparations for paving are to be performed, including future pavement areas, shall be scarified to minimum depth of 8-inches and compacted to minimum of 98 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 698 (or 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557) at moisture content of not less than A Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02323-2 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT SECTION 02323 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT s" PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation t:) line, grade, and configuration as shown on Construction Drawings for proposed and future pavement areas. B. Fill to line, grade, and configuration as shown on Construction Drawings for proposed and future pavement areas. C. Compacting fill materials in acceptable manner as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 - Earthwork j>- B. Section 02318- Rock Excavation C. Section 02310 -Soil Stabilization D. Section 02715- Base Course E. Section 02325-Aggregate Materials F. Section 02740-Asphaltic Concrete Paving G. Section 02751 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving H. Section 02770- Curbs and Sidewalks I. Constructior Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. See Section 02300 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Independent, Testing Laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, will be retained to perform S` construction testing on filling operations and subgrade analysis as specified in Section 02300 and as specified herein. B. Testing shall be in accordance with Part 3, Section 3.07, "Field Quality Control'. 1.05 SUBMITTALS 00 A. Shop drawings or details pertaining to excavating and filling for pavement are not required unless °` otherwise shown on Construction Drawings or if contrary procedures to Construction Documents are proposed. B. Submit 30-pound sample of each type of off-site fill material that is to be used in backfilling in air-tight container to independent testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of aggregate material that is to be used to independent testing laboratory for review. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02323-1 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT rMc f , BLANK PAGE ,,,,r B. Maintain opt mum moisture content of fill materials as specified in Section 02300 to attain required compaction density. C. Materials use-d for backfill shall comply with requirements of Section 02325 and as specified herein. 3.06 BORINGS AND CA�SJNGS UNDER ROADS, HIGHWAYS, AND RAILROAD CROSSINGS A. When indicated by Construction Drawings, street, road, highway, or railroad crossings for utility mains installed by jacking and boring method shall be in accordance with area specifications and governing authorities. B. Excavation of approach pits and trenches within right-of-way of street, road, highway, or railroad shall be of sufficient distance from paving or railroad tracks to permit traffic to pass without interference. Tamp backfill for approach pits and trenches within right-of-way in layers not greater than 6-inches thick for entire length and depth of trench or pit. Compact backfill to 98 percent of maximum density in accordance with ASTM D698, (or 95 percent of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D1557) obtained at optimum moisture as determined by AASHTO T 180. Mechanical ':ampers may be used after cover of 6-in. has been obtained over top of barrel of pipe. - C. Accomplish boring operation using commercial type boring rig. Bore hole to proper alignment and grade. Bore hole shall be within 2-inches of same diameter as largest outside joint diameter of pipe installeJ. Install pipe in hole immediately after bore has been made and in no instance shall hole be left unattended while open. D. In event subsurface operations result in failure or damage to pavement or railroad tracks within 1 year of construction, make necessary repairs to pavement or railroad tracks at no additional cost to Owner. If paving cracks on either side of pipe line or is otherwise disturbed or broken due to construction operations, repair or replace disturbed or broken area at no additional cost to Owner. E. Clean, prima, and line interior and exterior of casing pipe with two coats of asphalt in accordance with area specifications and governing authorities. F. Butt weld steel casing. Welds shall be full penetration single butt-welds in accordance with AWWA C206 and AWS D7-0-62. G. Install casing and utility pipe with end seals, vent pipe, and other special equipment in accordance with area specifications and governing authorities. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Sectior 02300, 3.07,"Field Quality Control". END OF SECTION 02322 t -Mart Mast�ar Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02322-5 Project Name: Wal-Mart p Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES G. Accurately grade trench bottom to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of pipe on bedding material at every point along entire length, except where necessary to excavate for bell holes, proper sealing of pipe joints, or other required connections. Dig bell holes and depressions for joints after trench bottom has been graded. Dig no deeper, longer, or wider than needed to make joint connection properly. H. Trench width below top of pipe shall not be less than 12-inches or more than 18-inches wider than outside surface of pipe or conduit that is to be installed to designated elevations and grades. Other trench width for pipe, conduit, or cable shall be least practical width that will allow for proper compaction of trench backfill. I. Trench depth requirements measured from finished grade or paved surface shall meet the following requirements or applicable codes and ordinances, whichever is more stringent: 1. Water Mains: 30-inches to top of pipe barrel or 6-inches below frost line, established by local building official, whichever is deeper. 2. Sanitary Sewer: Elevations and grades as indicated on Construction Drawings. 3. Storm Sewer: Elevations and grades as indicated on Construction Drawings. 4. Electrical Conduits: 24-inches minimum to top of conduit or as required by NEC 300-5, AS NEC 710-36 codes, or local utility company requirements, whichever is deeper. 5. TV Conduits: 18-inches minimum to top of conduit or as required by local utility company, whichever is deeper. 6. Telephone Conduits: 18-inches minimum to top of conduit, or as required by local utility company, whichever is deeper. 7. Gas Mains and Service: 30-inches minimum to top of pipe, or as required by local utility company, whichever is deeper. ,gyp 3.03 PIPE BEDDING A. Accurately cut trenches for pipe or conduit that is to be installed to designated elevations, 4-inches below bottom of pipe and to the width as specified herein. Place 4-inches of bedding material, ``"' compact in bottom of trench, and accurately shape to conform to lower portion of pipe barrel. •ilt B. Place geotextile fabric as specified on Construction Drawings and in accordance with Section 02340. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Criteria: Do not backfill trenches until required tests are performed and utility systems comply with and are accepted by applicable governing authorities. Backfill trenches as specified in Sections 02300 and one or more of the following sections, as applicable: 02321 for trenches below structures; 02323 for trenches below pavements; or 02324 for trenches on out parcels. If improperly backfilled, reopen to depth required to obtain proper compaction. Backfill and compact, as specified herein, to properly correct the condition in an acceptable manner. �t B. Backfilling: After pipe or conduit has been installed, bedded, and tested as required, backfill trench or structure excavation with specified material placed as given in the Construction Documents. C. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations shown on Construction Drawings with unfrozen materials. 4 D. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen, or spongy subgrade surfaces. 3.05 COMPACTION !! A. Exercise proper caution when compacting immediately over top of pipes or conduits. Water jetting or flooding is not permitted as method of compaction. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02322-4 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES AW. P A. Transport off >ite materials to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Set lines, elevations, and grades for proposed systems. B. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same. C. Maintain in operating condition existing utilities, previously installed utilities, and drainage systems encountered in utility installation. Repair surface or subsurface improvements shown on Construction Drawings. D. Verify location, size, elevation, and other pertinent data required making connections to existing utilities and drainage systems as indicated on Construction Drawings. E. Over excavate and properly prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting proposed systems. Stabilize these areas by using acceptable geotextile fabrics or additional bedding material placed and compacted as specified in Section 02340. F. Provide dewatering systems as required for utility excavations. Dewatering systems shall comply with requirements of Section 02300. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Contract local utility companies before excavation begins. Dig trench at proper width and depth for laying pipe, conduit, or cable. Cut trench banks vertical, if possible, and remove stones from bottom of tranch as necessary to avoid point-bearing. Over excavate wet or unstable soil, if encountered,from trench bottom as necessary to provide suitable base for continuous and uniform bedding. B. Trench excavation sidewalls shall be sloped, shored, sheeted, braced, or otherwise supported by means of su'ficient strength to protect workmen in accordance with applicable rules and regulations established for construction by the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), and by local ordinances. Lateral travel distance to exit ladder or steps shall not be greater than 25-feet in trenches 4-feet or deeper. C. Perform ex,-avation as indicated on Construction Drawings for specified depths. During excavation, stockpile materials suitable for backfilling in orderly manner far enough from bank of trench to avoid overloading, slides, or cave-ins. D. Remove excavated materials not required or not suitable for backfill or embankments and waste off-site or at on-site locations approved by the Owner and in accordance with governing regulations. Dispose of structures discovered during excavation as specified in Section 02220. E. Prevent surface water from flowing into trenches or other excavations by temporary grading or y other methods, as required. Remove accumulated water in trenches and other excavations as specified in Section 02300. F. Open cut eKCavation with trenching machine or backhoe. Where machines other than ladder or wheel-type trenching machines are used, do not use clods for backfill. Dispose of unsuitable material and provide other suitable material at no additional cost to Owner. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02322-3 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES A. An independent testing laboratory will perform testing at intervals not exceeding 200-feet of trench for first and every other 8-inch lift of compacted trench backfll and furnish copies of results as ""'( specified herein. B. Testing shall be in accordance with Part 3, Section 3.07, "Field Quality Control". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings or details pertaining to site utilities are not required unless required by regulatory '" authorities or unless uses of materials, methods, equipment, or procedures that are contrary to Construction Drawings or Specifications are proposed. Do not perform work until Owner has accepted required shop drawings. B. Contact utility companies and determine if additional easements will be required to complete project. Provide written confirmation of the status of all easements to Owner at time of Preconstruction Conference or no later than 90 days prior to project possession date. C. Submit 30-pound sample of each type of off-site fill material that is to be used in backfilling in air-tight container(s) to the independent testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of aggregate material that is to be used at the site to the independent testing laboratory for review. 1.06 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual locations of subsurface utilities, structures, and obstructions installed or encountered. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Bedding Material: Aggregate Type as indicated on the plans and [Specifications to add type on plans basod on site"conditions]as specified in Section 02325. B. Haunching Material: As specified in Section 02325. Aggregate Type as indicated on the plans and [CEC"to add,type`ort plank based orr Otte c as specified in Section 02325. C. Backfill material from the site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. D. Backfill material from off-site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. E. Steel Casing Pipe: Comply with AWWA C200 minimum grade B, size, and wall thickness as indicated on Construction Drawings. F. Backfill material shall not contain rock or stone with a maximum size greater than 2 inches. 2.02 LOCATOR TAPE A. Locator tape shall be heavy duty 6" wide underground warning tape. Tape shall be made from polyethylene material, 3.5 mils thick, with a minimum tensile strength of 1,750 psi. Place the tape at one-half the minimum depth of cover for the utility line or a maximum of 3', which ever is the lesser, but never above the top of subgrade. Color of tape shall be determined by APWA Color Standards: Natural Gas or Propane-Yellow, Electric- Red, Telephone-Orange. 2.03 EQUIPMENT Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02322-2 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES SECTION 02322 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES .r A. Excavation of trenches for installation of utilities. B. Backfilling trenches with bedding material as specified and filling trenches with suitable material to proposed subc rade. C. Compacting backfill materials in acceptable manner. D. Borings and casings under roads. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02220 —Site Demolition B. Section 0230C - Earthwork C. Section 0231EI- Rock Excavation D. Section 02340 Soil Stabilization E. Section 02510-Water Distribution Systems F. Section 02535- Sanitary Sewer Systems G. Section 02536-Sewer Manholes, Frames, and Covers H. Section 02555-Natural and LP Gas Distribution I. Section 0263)-Storm Drainage J. Section 02325-Aggregate Materials K. Section 02810-Lawn Sprinkler Systems L. Section 13900—Fire Suppression M. Section 1652 5—Site Lighting N. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS See Related Sections. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02322-1 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES not more than 50-foot centers. Tolerance of 0.10-feet, more or less, will be permitted. Contractor to provide engineering and field staking necessary for verification of lines, grades, and elevations. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 02300, 3.07, "Field Quality Control". END OF SECTION 02321 M" �rtv r+�w Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 9/24/99 02321-4 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR STRUCTURES .W. B. Prepare building area subgrade pad in strict accordance with "Foundation Subsurface Preparation" as shown on the Construction Drawings and/or the Structural drawings, whichever is more stringent. Rock larger than 6-in. shall not be part of building subgrade fill. C. Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which building subgrade preparations are to be performed shall bo scarified to a minimum depth of 8-inches and compacted to minimum of 98 percent of optimum density, n accordance with ASTM D 698, (or 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557) at moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. Proofroll these areas to detect areas of insufficient compaction. Accomplish proofrolling by making a minimum of 2 complete passes with a fully-loaded tandem-axle dump truck with a maximum weight of 20 tons, or approved equal, in each of 2 perpendicular directions while under supervision and direction of the independent testing laboratory. Excavate and recompact areas of failure as specified herein. Continual failure areas shall be stabilized in accordance with Section 02340 at no additional cost to Owner. + D. Place fill materials used in preparation of subgrade in lifts or layers not to exceed 8-inches loose measure and compacted to a minimum density of 98 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 698 (or 95 percent of optimum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557) at moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. Unless specifically stated otherwise in "Foundation Subsurface Preparation" on Construction Drawings, following table stipulates maximum allowable values for plasticity index (PI) and liquid limit (LL) of suitable materials to be used as fill in specified areas: Location PI LL a *Building area, bi;low upper four feet 20 50 *Building area, upper four feet 12 40 (*References to depth are to proposed subgrade elevations) 3.04 COMPACTION A. Maintain optimum moisture content as specified above of fill materials to attain required compaction density. B. Test materials in accordance with Section 02300. C. Corrective meaE ures for non-complying compaction: Remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained at no additional expense to Owner. 3.05 MAINTENANCE OF SU 3GRADE A. Verify finished subgrades to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above subgrade. B. Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction, including concrete trucks, dump trucks, and other construction equipment. C. Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace in manlier that will comply with compaction requirements by use of materials equal to or better than best subC�rade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross-section. 3.06 FINISH GRADING A. Finish grading shall be in accordance with Section 02300 and as more specifically specified herein.B. Check grading of building subgrades by string line from grade stakes (blue tops) set at Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 9/24/99 02321-3 Specification Name: EXCAVATIO V, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR STRUCTURES 0" PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fill material from on-site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. B. Fill material from off-site as specified in Section 02300 and approved by Owner. AN C. Aggregate material as specified in Section 02325. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Transport off-site materials to the project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rrr rutting, overloading, or pumping. PART 3 EXECUTION „* 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify lines, elevations, and grades necessary to construct building subgrades as shown on Construction Drawings. B. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same. C. Locate and identify utilities that have previously been installed and protect from damage. D. Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect from damage. E. Over excavate and properly prepare areas of subgrade that are not capable of supporting proposed structures. Stabilized these areas by using acceptable geotextile fabrics or aggregate materials placed and compacted as specified in Section 02340. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Excavate building areas to line and grade as shown on Construction Drawings being careful not to over 04 excavate beyond elevations needed for building subgrades. B. Place suitable excavated material into project fill areas as specified in Section 02300. C. Unsuitable excavated material is to be disposed of in manner and location that is acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. D. Perform excavation using capable, well-maintained equipment and methods acceptable to Owner and local governing agencies. 3.03 FILLING AND SUBGRADE PREPARATION ,p A. Building area subgrade pad shall be that portion of site directly beneath and 10-feet beyond building and appurtenances, including limits of future building expansion areas as shown on Construction Drawings. 4% Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 9/24/99 02321-2 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR STRUCTURES SECTION 02321 EXCAVPTION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR STRUCTURES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Excavation to line, grade, and configuration as shown on Construction Drawings for proposed structures and future expansion areas. B. Fill to line, grade, and configuration as shown on Construction Drawings for proposed structures and future expansion areas. C. Compacting for materials in acceptable manner as specified herein. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02300 - Earthwork B. Section 02318 - Rock Excavation C. Section 02340 - Soil Stabilization D. Section 02325-Aggregate Material E. The "Foundation Subsurface Preparation" as shown on the Construction Drawings and/or the Structural drawings,whichEiver is more stringent. F. Construction drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. See Section 02300 1,04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. An independent testing laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, will be retained to perform construction testing on filling operations and subgrade analysis as specified in Section 02300 and as specified herein. B. Testing shall be in accordance with Part 3, Section 3.07, "Field Quality Control". 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings or details pertaining to excavating and filling for structures are not required unless otherwise shown on Construction Drawings or if contrary procedures to Contract Documents are proposed. B. Submit 30-pound sample of each type of off-site fill material that is to be used in backfilling in air-tight container(s) to the independent testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of aggregate material that is ro be used at the site to the independent testing laboratory for review. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 9/24/99 02321-1 Specification Name: EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR STRUCTURES 3.04 ROCK CUT FACE EXCAVATION A. The slope of the soil above the top of any permanently exposed rock cut face shall be no less than 3(H):1(V) unless otherwise noted on the Construction Drawings. Slope of the rock face shall meet the *" requirements below. TYPE SLOPE (Horizontal to Vertical) Solid limestone or sandstone 1:1.2 Interbedded limestone, sandstone or shale 1:1.25 Layered shale (no hard rock) 1:1.5 B. Benches of at least ten (10) feet in width at a maximum of twenty (20) feet in elevation intervals or as noted on the Construction Drawings. The benches are to provide rock traps and divert water from the rock face. sire 3.05 ROCK TRAP - A. Locate rock traps at the base of permanently exposed rock slopes and construct as indicated on the wa Construction Drawings. 3.06 OVEREXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Over excavation, which is required to remove unsuitable natural undisturbed bedrock weakened by weathering or other cause not inflicted by the Contractor shall be immediately reported to the Owner and performed as directed by the Owner, and the theoretical lines and grades will be adjusted accordingly. Material outside the excavation limits which are disturbed due to the fault or negligence of the Contractor or due to his failure to exercise sound construction practices, shall be either replaced by him with-suitable materials (earth or concrete), or bolted, or both as directed, at no cost to the Owner. N END.OF SECTION 02318 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02318-6 Specification Name: ROCK EXCAVATION b. The preblast survey shall also include an assessment of water supply wells located within a minimum 500 feet of the limits of all blasting work. This assessment shall include the following items: 1. Information regarding the date of construction of the well, depth, method of construction, yield, water quality and any other existing available data will be requested from each well owner and/or the installer, providing the installer is known. �;. A short duration pump test shall be performed on each well utilizing the existing pump that services each well. The pump shall be activated, the volume of water measured and the drawdown in the well measured for a 1-hour or less period !. until approximate steady state conditions are achieved. The data obtained from these measurements shall be used to estimate the approximate yield of each well. 3. Upon completion of the above-described short duration pump test, obtain a groundwater sample from the well and submit to a State certified water quality laboratory. Laboratory shall analyze sample for iron, manganese, total dissolved solids, turbidity and total coliform. 4. Survey Report: a. 'rhe Contractor shall prepare a written report summarizing the results of the preblast Survey. The final written report shall be signed and sealed by the Contractor's qualified nspector. The report shall contain the following: 1. Location and description of each property 2. Descriptions of the conditions of the on-site elements 3. Summary of the visual inspection 4. Color photographs, sketches, and videotape with vocal summary 5. All data developed from the water supply well assessment b. Provide videotapes to include supplemental information, as required. Pictorial documentation shall be of professional quality and shall be provided with a scale, where practicable. Clearly label pictorial documentation with an identification number, name of the project and the Engineer or qualified person conducting the survey, name of the property owner, date the picture or video tape was taken,and sufficient information to determine the location of the area in question. C rip- . The Contractor's inspector shall immediately report in writing to the Contractor any findings that, in his opinion, indicate that any structure or well will be adversely affected by the required construction and blasting. d. If, during the course of construction and blasting, the Contractor is requested by an adjacent property owner to view alleged damage to property, the Contractor shall give written notice to the Owner prior to the Contractor's visit to the adjacent owners property. F. Blast Monitoring) 1. Contractor shall perform seismic blast monitoring in accordance with State and local regulations. 2. Contractor shall provide monitoring of blasting vibrations and over-pressures to allow evaluation of compliance with the specified vibration/over-pressures to criteria. As a minimum, the Contractor will monitor each blast as follows: a. Monitor vibrations at the exterior walls of all structures within 500 feet of each blast location. b. If no structures are located within 500 feet of the blast location, monitor vibrations at three r equally spaced radial points located a minimum of 500 feet from the blast locations. C. Monitor over-pressures for all structures within a minimum 500 feet of the blast. 3. If requested by the Owner, report vibration/overpressure-monitoring results to the Owner within two hours of blasting. Monitoring performed by the Contractor does not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for control of vibration and overpressure during blasting operations. � Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02318-5 Specification Name: ROCK EXCI,VATION 3. In case of conflict between regulations or between regulations and Specifications, the Contractor sow shall comply with the strictest applicable codes, regulations or Specifications. C. Explosives • 1. Take special precautions for proper use of explosives to prevent harm to human life and damage to surface structures, utility lines, or other subsurface structures. 2. Store, handle, and employ explosives in accordance with Federal, state and local regulations, or, in the absence of such, in accordance with the provisions of the NFPA and OSHA. D. Blasting Vibration And Limit Criteria 1. The amount of vibration, frequency and overpressure generated by blasting shall not exceed 04 regulatory statutes or directives establish by State, local or other authorities. In no case shall the maximum Peak Particle Velocity (PPV) exceed the limits indicated on Figure B-1, Appendix B, of the United States Bureau of Mines Report of Investigations, RI 8507, 1980 or latest edition. so 2. The peak airblast overpressure measured at the location of the nearest occupied, aboveground structure (considering wind direction) shall not exceed 0.014 psi. E. Preblast Survey 1. General: a. Conduct a preblast survey prior to initiating any blasting work. The Contractor shall have the preblast survey performed by a registered Professional Engineer or specialized consultant licensed in the State of the work covered under this contract and specialized in conducting preblast surveys. b. The work to be performed for the preconstruction/preblast survey will consist of documenting conditions of all existing dwellings and structures located within a minimum of 500 feet of the limits of all work requiring rock blasting prior to commencement of blasting or further if required by Federal, state or local regulations. C. The purpose of the preblast survey is to determine the conditions of existing dwellings, structures and water supply wells and document any pre-existing defects and other " physical factors that could reasonably be affected by the blasting. Structures such as dams, ponds, pipelines, cables and transmission lines, cisterns, structures of historical significance, and/or structures with unusually costly or vulnerable contents shall be A* included. The preblast survey shall also note the nature and sensitivity of livestock that may be affected by the blasting. 2. Examination of and Preparation for Survey: a. The Contractor shall contact the property owners (or their legal representative) of properties within a minimum of 500 feet of the limits of all blasting work in order to obtain permission to conduct a survey of their property. If the property owner does not grant the Contractor permission to conduct the survey, the Contractor shall contact the property am owner a second time by registered mail/return receipt requested. The second request for permission to conduct the survey shall include a description of the survey to be performed and the purpose of the survey. At least 72 hours prior to start of blasting work, notify the appropriate local regulatory authority of any property owners who refuse access '" for the preconstruction survey. b. Notify the property owners at least 48 hours prior to conducting the preblast survey. After completion of the survey, two copies of the preblast report will be submitted to the aw appropriate local regulatory authority for their reference if required. Additionally, one copy shall be kept on file at the location of the project and provided to the Owner upon request. 3. Method: a. The preblast survey shall include a detailed examination of the interior and exterior of structures located within a minimum of 500 feet of the limits of all blasting work. Color photographs, videotapes, and written descriptions shall be taken as required to document am the condition of areas within the limits of the survey area. Particular note shall be made of evident structural faults or deficiencies, or recent repairs. A Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02318-4 Specification Name: ROCK EXCAVATION A building improvements as indicated on Construction Drawings. Remove loose or shattered rock, overhanging ledges and boulders,which might dislodge. C. Use lean concrete, or suitable materials as directed by registered geotechnical engineer to replace rock overblast or over excavation in building and expansion area to facilitate placement of utilities and foundations systems. 3.03 ROCK BLASTING N A. General 1. The drillirg and blasting methods and programs shall be those necessary to accomplish any and all rock Excavation required for completion of the improvements shown on the Construction Drawings in accordance with the procedures specified herein. Do not use explosives as a primary means of transporting material outside the excavated prism. 2. Blasting work shall be performed only with necessary permits from all regulatory authorities and prior to completion of the preblast survey. Blasting work shall take place only after persons in the vicinity have been notified and have reached positions of safety. Take appropriate precautions to prevent Ell persons from entering the blasting area. Use methods and programs that will prevent damage to, but not limited to, adjacent dwellings, structures, public domain, natural resources, habitat, existing wells and landscape features and that will minimize the scattering of rock, stumps cr other debris. All affected roadways shall be inspected, cleared, and opened to traffic within 1 (one)hour of completed blasting or as required by governing authorities. 3. Complete;all blasting with experienced powdermen licensed to use explosives in the State. 4. Conduct blasting at sic t ") p g g ` ; J p p,tn. hours so as not to disrupt surrounding residencas and businesses, and in accordance with Federal, state and local regulations and/or ordinances with regard to noise. 5. Take all precautions necessary to warn and/or protect any individuals exposed to his operations prior to any blasting. Blasting mats or other approved flyrock protection shall be employed as necessary to protect areas adjacent to blasting. 6. Develop and maintain records covering pertinent data on the location, depth and area of the blast, the diameter, spacing, depth, overdepth, pattern, amount, distribution and powder factor for the explosives used per hole and per blast; the sequence and pattern delays, and description and purpose of special methods. Provide a copy of the records to the Owner upon the Owner's request. Receipt and acceptance by the Owner of blasting data will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to produce satisfactory results as set forth in these specifications. Drilling and blasting shall be done only to the depth, amount and at such locations, with explosives of such quantity, distribution, and density that will not produce unsafe or damage rock surfaces or damage rock beyond the prescribed excavation limits. The Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of removal of overblast and also for the cost of placement and compaction of suitable replacement fill where overblast removal is required or occurs. 7. When a drilling and blasting program results in damage to the excavation or unacceptable peak particle velocity or frequency values as specified in Section 3.03. D. Below, the Contractor will be required) to devise and employ revised methods that will prevent such damage or unacceptable ground motions at no cost to the Owner. The revisions may include special methods such as presplit and zone blasting, shallow lifts, reduction in size of individual blasts, small diameter blast holes, Oosely spaced blast holes, reduction of explosives, greater distribution of explosives by use of decking and primacord or variation in density of explosives and chemical or mechanical splitting of the rock. B. Codes, Permits And Regulations 1. Comply with all applicable laws, rules, ordinances and regulations of the Federal, State and local regulatory authorities and insurers that govern the licensing, transportation, storage, handling, use, arid disposition of explosives. 2. Obtain and pay for all powder and blasting permits and licenses required to complete the work of this Section as defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02318-3 Specification Name: ROCK EXCAVATION rw A. Perform the Work in accordance with all pertinent Federal, state and local regulations. B. "Rock Excavation" contract requirements are provided in the General and Supplementary Conditions provided in the Project Manual. C. This Section includes furnishing all drilling, blasting and protection required to complete the work indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage and/or injury from the use of explosives. The Contractor shall save and hold harmless the Owner, Architect and Engineer from any and all claims from + the use of explosives. Removal of materials of any nature by blasting shall be done in such a manner and at such times as to avoid damage affecting integrity of existing construction and damage to new or existing dwellings, structures and water wells in or adjacent to the area of the work. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to determine the method of operation to ensure desired results and integrity of completed work. All damage caused by the Contractor's blasting operations shall be repaired to the full satisfaction of the Owner at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.07 PERMITS AND LICENSES A. Prior to rock excavation, Contractor shall obtain all necessary permits from regulatory agencies. If blasting is required or undertaken, the responsible Subcontractor shall be licensed in the State and shall possess a current blasting license issued by the appropriate regulatory authority and be permitted for the transportation of explosives if required. 1.08 SUBMITTAL A. The Contractor shall provide Blasting Plan (prior to any blasting) and Monitoring Reports to the Owner and Governing Agencies for review. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Explosives, detonator/delay device, and blast mat materials shall be type recommended by explosive supplier and shall comply with requirements specified herein. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify site conditions and note subsurface conditions affecting work of this section. B. Identify required lines, levels, and elevations that will determine extent of proposed removals. 3.02 ROCK EXCAVATION A. Cut rock to form level bearing at bottom of footing and trench excavations. Remove shaled layers to provide sound and unshattered base for footings or foundations. Contractor shall consider reuse of excavated materials on site in accordance with Section 02300. If material cannot be utilized on site, than =^ Contractor shall dispose of material offsite at no additional cost to the Owner. B. If placed in embankments, perform rock excavation in manner that will produce material of such size as in accordance with Section 02300. Remove rock to allow for construction and/or installation of the site and Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02318-2 Specification Name: ROCK EXCAVATION 4W SECTION 02318 ROCK EXCAVATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of identified and discovered rock during excavation. B. Use of explosives to assist rock removal. C. Incorporating removed rock into fills and embankments. - 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02230—Site Clearing B. Section 02300 - Earthwork C. Section 02321 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Structures D. Section 02322- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities E. Section 02323 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Pavement F. Section 02324 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Out Parcels G. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1. NFPA 495 Code for Manufacturing, Transportation, Storage, And Use of Explosive Material B. United States Do:partment of Interior, Bureau of Mines, Seismic Effects of Blasting (Latest Edition) C. Occupational Sefety & Health Administration (OSHA) 1. 29CFR 1910.109 Explosives and Blasting Agents 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS _. A. Determine environmental effects associated with proposed work and safeguard those concerns as regulated by lavf and local governing agencies by reasonable and practical methods. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. 'Rock Excavation" is defined as removal of igneous, metamorphic or sedimentary rock or stone, boulders over two (2) cubic yards in volume in open areas and one (1) cubic yard in volume in trenches; masonry or concrete or solid frozen soil; that cannot be removed by rippers or other mechanical methods and, therefore, requires drilling and blasting. The word "trenches"shall mean excavations having vertical sides whose depths exceed its width, made for drainage, storm water, sewer,water, and gas pipes, electric and steam conduits, and related uses. 1.06 SCOPE 02318-1 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master S)ecification Revised 02114/2000 Specification Name: ROCK EXCAVATION .A� BLANK PAGE look ftl. r rrM Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-2 Specification Name: EARTHWORK * D. Place stones so that greater portion of weight is carried by earth and not by adjacent stones. Place stones in single layer with close joints. Upright areas of stone shall make angle of k approximatel y 90 degree with embankment slope. Place courses from bottom of embankment upward,with larger stones being placed in lower courses. Fill open joints with spalls. Embed stones in em Dankment as necessary to present uniform top surface such that variation between tops of adjacent stones shall not exceed 3-inches. 3.07 FINISH GRADING A. Grade areas where finish grade elevations or contours are indicated on Construction Drawings, other than paved areas and buildings, including excavated areas,filled and transition areas, and landscaped;areas. Graded areas shall be uniform and smooth,free from rock, debris, or irregular surface charges. Finished subgrade surface shall not be more than 0.10-feet above or below established linished subgrade elevation. Ground surfaces shall vary uniformly between indicated elevations. Grade finished ditches to allow for proper drainage without ponding and in manner that will minimize erosion potential. For topsoil, sodding and seeding requirements refer to Section 02900. B. Correct settled and eroded areas within 1 year after date of completion at no additional expense to Owner. Ering grades to proper elevation. Replant or replace grass, shrubs, bushes, or other vegetation that appears dead,dying, or disturbed by construction activities. Refer to Section 02370 for slope protection and erosion control. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field densit/tests for in-place materials shall be performed as part of construction testing requirements according to one of following standards: 1. Nuclear Method: ASTM D 2922 (Method B-Direct Transmission) B. Perform density test as follows: 1. Building Subgrade Areas, Including 10'-0"Outside of Exterior Building Lines: In cut areas, not less than 1 compaction test for every 2,500 sq.ft. In fill areas, same rate of testing for each 8- inch lift, measured loose. 2. Areas of Construction Exclusive of Building Subgrade Areas: In cut areas, not less than 1 compaction test for every 10,000 sq.ft. In fill areas, same rate of testing for each 8-inch lift, measured loose. C. Corrective ^neasures for non-complying compaction: 1. Remove and recompact deficient areas until proper compaction is obtained at no additional expense to Owner. END OF SECTION 02300 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-7 Specification Name: EARTHWORK r� maximum weight of 20 tons, or approved equal, in each of 2 perpendicular directions while under the supervision and direction of the independent testing laboratory. Areas of failure shall be excavated and recompacted as specified herein. Continual failure areas shall be stabilized in accordance with Section 02340 at no additional cost to Owner. J. Fill materials used in preparation of subgrade in all areas other than structures, utilities, pavements, or out parcels (see related sections for backfilling within these areas)shall be placed " in lifts or layers not to exceed 8-inches loose measure and compacted to 95 percent of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 698, (or 92 percent of the maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 1557)at moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not more than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. K. Material imported from off-site shall have CBR or LBR value equal to or above pavement design subgrade CBR or LBR value indicated on Construction Drawings. 3.04 MAINTENANCE OF SUBGRADE A. Verify finished subgrades to ensure proper elevation and conditions for construction above h subgrade. B. Protect subgrade from excessive wheel loading during construction, including concrete trucks, dump trucks, and other construction equipment. C. Remove areas of finished subgrade found to have insufficient compaction density to depth necessary and replace in manner that will comply with compaction requirements by use of material equal to or better than best subgrade material on site. Surface of subgrade after compaction shall be hard, uniform, smooth, stable, and true to grade and cross-section. 3.05 BORROW AND SPOIL SITES A. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with NPDES and local erosion control permitting rr* requirements for any and all on-site and off-site, disturbed spoil and borrow areas. Upon completion of spoil and/or borrow operations, clean up spoil and/or borrow areas in a neat and reasonable manner to the satisfaction of off-site property owner, if applicable, Owner, and Civil Engineering Consultant. 3.06 RIP-RAP do A. Place rip-rap in areas where indicated on Construction Drawings. Stone for rip-rap shall consist of field stone or rough unhewn quarry'stone as nearly uniform in section as is practical. Stones shall be dense, resistant to action of air and water, and suitable for purpose intended. Unless otherwise specified, stones used as rip-rap shall weigh between 50-pounds and 150-pounds each, and at least 60 percent of stones shall weigh more than 100-pounds each. B. Dress slopes and other areas to be protected to line and grade shown on Construction Drawings prior to placing of rip-rap. Undercut areas to receive rip-rap to elevation equal to final elevation less average diameter of stones before placing rip-rap. C. Install filter fabric and bedding stone prior to placement of stones if so indicated on Construction Drawings. Bedding stone shall be quarried and crushed angular limestone, 6-inches in depth in accordance with Section 02227 and with the following gradation: Sieve Designation % By Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves 3" 100 No.4 20-65 No. 200 0-10 Filter fabric shall be as specified in Section 02270 and as detailed on Construction Drawings. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-6 Specification Name: EARTHWORK 4 becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, perform such work as may be required to restore,damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional cost to Owner. d. System maintenance shall include but not be limited to 24-hour supervision by personnel skilled in the operation, maintenance, and replacement of system components, and any other Nvork required to maintain excavation in dewatered condition. 5. System Removal: a. Remove dewatering equipment from the site, including related temporary electrical service. b. Wells shall be removed or cut off a minimum of 3 feet below final ground surface, capped, and abandoned in accordance with regulations by agencies having jurisdiction. 3.02 EXCAVATION FOR FILLING AND GRADING A. Classification of Excavation: by submitting bid, Contractor acknowledges that site has been ,? investigated to determine type, quantity, quality,and character of excavation work to be performed. ;xcavation shall be considered unclassified excavation, except as indicated in the ! Contract Do�.uments. B. When performing grading operations during periods of wet weather, provide adequate dewatering, drainage and ground water management to control moisture of soils. C. Shore, brace;, and drain excavations as necessary to maintain excavation as safe, secure, and free of wate,at all times. D. Excavated material containing rock or stone greater than 6-inches in largest dimension is unacceptable as fill within proposed building subgrade and paving subgrade. E. Rock or stone less than 6-inches in largest dimension is acceptable as fill to within 24-inches of surface of proposed subgrade when mixed with suitable material. F. Rock or stone less than 2-inches in largest dimension and mixed with suitable material is acceptable as fill within the upper 24-inches of proposed subgrade. 3.03 FILLING AND SU BGRADE PREPARATION A. Fill areas to contours and elevations shown on Construction Drawings with unfrozen materials. B. Place fills in continuous lifts specified herein. C. Refer to Section 02321 for filling requirements for structures. } D. Refer to Section 02322 for filling requirements for utilities. E. Refer to Section 02323 for filling requirements for pavements. F. Refer to Section 02324 for filling requirements for out parcels. G. Refer to Section 02340 for soil stabilization using lime, cement,fly ash, and geotextile fabrics. H. Refer to Section 02318 for rock excavation. I. Areas exposed by excavation or stripping and on which subgrade preparations are to be performec shall be scarified to minimum depth of 8-inches and compacted to minimum of 95 percent of maximum density, in accordance with ASTM D 698 (or 92 percent of maximum density, it accordance with ASTM D 1557)at moisture content of not less than 1 percent below and not rrore than 3 percent above optimum moisture content. These areas shall then be proofrollei to detect areas of insufficient compaction. Proofrolling shall be accomplished by making minimum of 2 complete passes with fully-loaded tandem-axle dump truck with a Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-5 Specification Name: EARTHWORK hydrostatic head from the bottom and/or sides. Design system to prevent differential hydrostatic head,which would result in floating out soil particles in a manner,termed as a "quick"or"boiling"condition. System shall not be dependent solely upon sumps and/or pumping water from within the excavation where differential head would result in a quick condition, which would continue to worsen the integrity of the excavation's stability. b. Provide dewatering system of sufficient size and capacity to prevent ground and surface water flow into the excavation and to allow all Work to be installed in a dry condition. C. Control, by acceptable means, all water regardless of source and the Contractor is fully responsible for disposal of the water. d. Confine discharge piping and/or ditches to available easement or to additional easement ,w,s; obtained by Contractor. Provide necessary permits and/or additional easement at no additional cost to Owner. e. Control groundwater in a manner that preserves strength of foundation soils, does not cause instability or raveling of excavation slopes, and does not result in damage to existing structures. Where necessary to these purposes, lower water level in advance of excavation, utilizing wells,wellpoints,jet educators, or similar positive methods. The water level as measured by piezometers shall be maintained a minimum of 3 feet below 04 prevailing excavation level. f. Commence dewatering prior to any appearance of water in excavation and continue until Work is complete to the extent that no damage results from hydrostatic pressure, flotation, or other causes. ak g. Open pumping with sumps and ditches shall be allowed, provided it does not result in boils, loss of fines, softening of the ground, or instability of slopes. h. Install wells and/or welipoints, if required,with suitable screens and filters, so that continuous pumping of fines does not occur. Arrange discharge to facilitate collection of samples by the Owner. During normal pumping, and upon development of well(s), levels of fine sand or silt in the discharge water shall not exceed 5 ppm. Install sand tester on discharge of each pump during testing to verify that levels are not exceeded. L Control grading around excavations to prevent surface water from flowing into excavation areas. j. No additional payment will be made for any supplemental measures to control seepage, groundwater, or artesian head. 2. Design: a. Contractor shall designate and obtain the services of a qualified dewatering specialist to provide dewatering plan as may be necessary to complete the Work. b. Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the drawings, design data, and operational records required. C. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design, installation, operation, maintenance, rr� and any failure of any component of the system. 3. Damages: a. Contractor shall be responsible for and shall repair without cost to the Owner any damage to work in place,or other contractor's equipment, utilities, residences, highways, roads, railroads, private and municipal well systems, adjacent structures, natural resources, habitat, existing wells, and the excavation. Including, damage to the bottom due to heave and including but not limited to, removal and pumping out of the excavated area that may result from Contractor's negligence, inadequate or improper design and operation of the dewatering system, and any mechanical or electrical failure of the dewatering system. b. Remove subgrade materials rendered unsuitable by excessive wetting and replace with approved backfill material at no additional cost to the Owner. 4. Maintaining Excavation in Dewatering Condition: a. Dewatering shall be a continuous operation. Interruptions due to power outages, or any other reason will not be permitted. ., b. Continuously maintain excavation in a dry condition with positive dewatering methods during preparation of subgrade, installation of pipe, and construction of structures until the critical period of construction and/or backfill is completed to prevent damage of subgrade support, piping, structure, side slopes, or adjacent facilities from flotation or other hydrostatic pressure imbalance. C. Provide standby equipment on site, installed,wired, and available for immediate operation if required to maintain dewatering on a continuous basis in the event any part of the system Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-4 Specification Name: EARTHWORK ,,� 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. Transport off-site materials to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping. 2.03 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. In areas to receive pavement, California Bearing Ratio (CBR)or Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) test shall be performed for each type of material that is imported from off-site. B. Following te:,ts shall be performed as part of construction testing requirements on each type of on-site or imported soil material used as compacted fill: 1. Moisture and Density Relationship: ASTM D 698 (or ASTM D 1557) 2. Mechanical Analysis: AASHTO T 88(or ASTM D422) 3. Plasticity Index: ASTM D 4318 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify reqL fired lines, levels, contours, and datum. B. Locate and dentify existing utilities that are to remain and protect from damage. p C. Notify utility companies to remove or relocate public utilities that are in conflict with proposed improvements. D. Protect plart life, lawns,fences, existing structures, sidewalks, paving, and curbs, unless otherwise ncted on construction drawings from excavating equipment and vehicular traffic. E. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by licensed land surveyor and replaced, as necessary, by same. F. Remove from site, material encountered in grading operations that, in opinion of Owner or Agent, is unsuitable or undesirable for backfilling, subgrade, or foundation purposes. Dispose of in manner satisfactory to Owner. Backfill areas with layers of suitable material and compact as specified ho.rein. G. Prior to placing fill in low areas, such as previously existing creeks, ponds, or lakes, perform following procedures: 1. Drain water out by gravity with ditch having flow line lower than lowest elevation in low area. If drainage cannot be performed by gravity ditch, use adequate pump to obtain the same results. 2. After drainage of low area is complete, remove mulch, mud, debris, and other unsuitable material by using acceptable equipment and methods that will keep natural soils underlying low area dry and undist.irbed. 3. All muck, rnud, and other materials removed from low areas shall be dried on-site by spreading in thin layers for observation by Owner or Agent. Material shall be inspected and, if found to be suitable for use as fill material, shall be incorporated into lowest elevation of site filling operation, but not under building subgrade or within 10'-0"of perimeter of building subgrade or paving subgrade. If,after observation by Owner or Agent, material is found to be unsuitable, unsuitable material shall be removed from site. H. Dewatering: 1. General: a. De:nign and provide dewatering system using accepted and professional methods cor sistent with current industry practice to eliminate water entering the excavation under Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-3 Specification Name: EARTHWORK a" 2. D 698 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort(12,400 ft-Ibf/ft3 (600 kN.m/m3)) 3. D 1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort(56,000 ft-Ibf/ft3 oft (2,700 Kn.m/m3)) 4. D 2216 Laboratory Determination of Water(Moisture) Content of Soil, Rock, and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures 5. D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes 6. D 2922 Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Methods(Shallow Depth) 7. D 3017 Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth) 8. D 4318 Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils B. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) latest edition 1. T 88 Particle Size Analysis of Soils 2. State Department of Transportation (DOT): Standard Specifications for Construction and Materials, Latest Edition 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. An independent testing laboratory, selected and paid by Owner, will be retained to perform construction testing on site. 1. The independent testing laboratory shall prepare test reports that indicate test location, elevation data, and test results. Owner, Civil Engineering Consultant, and Contractor shall be provided with copies of reports within 96 hours of time that test was performed. In event that test performed fails to meet Specifications, the independent testing laboratory shall notify Owner and Contractor immediately. 2. Costs related to retesting due to failures shall be paid for by Contractor at no additional expense to Owner. Contractor shall provide free access to site for testing activities. 3. Quality assurance testing shall be in accordance with Part 3, Section 3.07, "Field Quality Control". 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 30-pound sample of each type of off-site fill material that is to be used at the site in airtight container(s)for the independent testing laboratory or submit gradation and certification of A4 aggregate material that is to be used at the site to the independent testing laboratory for review. B. Submit name of each material supplier and specific type and source of each material. Change in source throughout project requires approval of Owner. ' ! C. If fabrics or geogrids are to be used, design shall be submitted for approval to Owner. D. Submit Dewatering Plans upon request by Owner. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Excavated and re-used material for subsoil fill as specified herein. do B. Aggregate fill as specified in Section 02325. C. Imported fill material approved by Owner and specified herein. D. Topsoil fill as specified in Section 02230. +ww E. Acceptable stabilization fabrics and geogrids as specified in Section 02340. F. Filter and drainage fabrics as specified in Section 02370. Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-2 Specification Name: EARTHWORK SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Protection, modification, or installation of utilities as site work progresses with particular attention to grade changes and necessary staging or phasing of work. B. Cutting,filling, and grading to required lines, dimensions, contours, and elevations for proposed improvements. Ito C. Scarifying, compacting, drying, dewatering and removal of unsuitable material to ensure proper t" preparation of areas for fills or proposed improvements. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 022:20—Site Demolition B. Section 02230-Site Clearing f C. Section 02321 - Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Structures D. Section 022:22-Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities E. Section 02:323- Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Pavement F. Section 02,124-Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Out Parcels G. Section 02;318-Rock Excavation H. Section 02340-Soil Stabilization I. Section 02370- Erosion Control and Sedimentation J. Section 02325-Aggregate Materials K. Section 02.830—Segmental Retaining Wall Systems L. Section 09900—Planting M. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) N. The"Foundation Subsurface Preparation" as shown on the Construction Drawings and/or the Structural drawings,whichever is more stringent if a conflict exists. O. Construction Drawings 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM)latest edition 1. D422 SUindard Test Method For Particle—Size Analysis of Soil Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/29/2000 02300-1 Specification Name: EARTHWORK M" BLANK PAGE NNW rr► r B. Cut heavy growth s of grass from areas before stripping and remove cuttings with remainder of cleared vegetative materiel. C. Strip topsoil from areas that are to be filled, excavated, landscaped, or re-graded to such depth that it prevents intermingling with underlying subsoil or questionable material. D. Stockpile topsoil ii storage piles in areas shown on Construction Drawings or where directed by Owner. Construct storage piles to freely drain surface water. Cover storage piles as required to prevent windblown dust. 'Dispose of unsuitable topsoil as specified for waste material, unless otherwise specified by Owner. Conlractor shall remove excess topsoil from site unless specifically noted otherwise on Construction Drawings. END OF SECTION 02230 rz r_ rF, Project Name. Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02230-3 Specification Name: SITE CLEARING B. Variations to conditions or discrepancy in actual conditions as they apply to site preparation operations are to be brought to attention of Owner prior to commencement of sitework. PART2 PRODUCTS 1.01 EQUIPMENT A. Off-site materials shall be transported to project using well-maintained and operating vehicles. Once on site, transporting vehicles shall stay on designated haul roads and shall at no time endanger improvements by rutting, overloading, or pumping. PART 3 EXECUTION 04 3.01 PREPARATION A. Identify existing plant life that is to remain and verify clearing limits are clearly tagged, identified, and JI marked in such manner as to ensure their safety throughout construction operations. 3.02 PROTECTION Oak A. Locate and identify existing utilities that are to remain and protect these from damage. B. Protect trees, plant growth, and features designated to remain as part of final landscaping. C. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses and facilities. Maintain ingress and egress at all times and clean or sweep roadways daily as required by SWPPP or governing authority. Dust control shall be provided with sprinkling systems or equipment provided by Contractor. D. Protect benchmarks, property corners, and other survey monuments from damage or displacement. If marker needs to be removed it shall be referenced by a licensed land surveyor and replaced, as 04 necessary, in kind. E. Provide traffic control as required, in accordance with the US Department of Transportation's "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices"and applicable state highway department requirements. 04 3.03 CLEARING A. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of work. B. Unless otherwise indicated on Construction Drawings, remove trees, shrubs, grass, other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with installation of new construction. Removal includes digging " out stumps and roots. Depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations are to be filled to subgrade elevation to avoid ponding of water. Satisfactory fill material shall be placed in accordance with Section 02300. C. Remove grass, trees, plant life, stumps, and other construction debris from site to dump site that is suitable for handling such material according to state laws and regulations. 3.04 TOPSOIL EXCAVATION A. Topsoil shall consist of organic surficial soil found in depth of not less than 6-inches. Satisfactory topsoil shall be reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones and other objects over 2-inches in diameter, weeds, roots, and other objectionable material. OW- Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02230-2 Specification Name: SITE CLEARING Iwo Ilk SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cleaning site of debris, grass,trees, and other plant life in preparation for site or building earthwork. B. Protection of existing structures, trees, or vegetation indicated on the Construction Drawings to remain. C. Stripping topsoil f'om areas that are to be incorporated into limits of project and storage of topsoil where so indicated on Construction Drawings. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02220—Site Demolition B. Section 02300 - Harthwork C. Section 02325— Aggregate Materials D. Section 02318—Rock Excavation E. Section 02370 - Erosion Control and Sedimentation F. Section 02830—Segmental Retaining Wall System G. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) H. Construction Drawings 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Construct temporary erosion control systems as shown on Construction Drawings or as directed by the "Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan" (SWPPP) to protect adjacent properties and water resources from erosion and sedimentation. B. In event that siiework on this project will disturb 5 or more acres; Contractor shall not begin construction without"National Pollution Discharge Elimination System" (NPDES) permit governing discharge of storm water from site for entire construction period. NPDES permit requires SWPPP to be in place during construction. C. Contractor shall be totally responsible for conducting storm water management practices in accordance with NPDES permit and for enforcement action taken or imposed by Federal or State agencies, including cost of fines, construction delays, and remedial actions resulting from Contractor's failure to comply with provisions of NPDES permit. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITI0I4S A. Existing Conditions at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner in so far as practical. i ation Revised 02/14/2000 02230-1 Project Name: Wal-Mart Master:3peci f c Specification Name: SITE CLEARING A" > C. Transport materials removed from demolished structures with appropriate vehicles and dispose off-site to areas that are approved for disposal by governing authorities and appropriate property owners. END OF SECTION 02220 AW Akio 4" ow Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02220-4 Specification Name: SITE DEMOLITION AF u Pill B. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority-having jurisdiction. Do not resume operations until directed by authority. C. Conduct operations with minimum of interference to public or private access. Maintain ingress and egress at all times. D. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, t; infringe upon, or li nit access to their property. E. Sprinkle work with water to minimize dust. Provide hoses and water connections for this purpose. F. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection. G. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations. �t Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to start of work. 3.03 DEMOLITION A. Demolish buildings completely and remove from site using methods as required to complete work within limitations of governing regulations. Small structures may be removed intact when acceptable to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. B. Locate demolition equipment and remove materials so as to prevent excessive loading to supporting walls, floors, or framing. C. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. Break up concrete slabs-on-grade that are 2-feet or more below proposed subgrade to permit moisture drainage. Contractor shall remove slabs-on-grade and below grade construction within 2-feet of proposed subgrade. 3.04 FILLING BASEMENTS AND VOIDS A. Completely fill aelow grade areas and voids resulting from demolition or removal of structures, underground fuel storage tanks, wells, cisterns, etc., using approved select fill materials consisting of stone, gravel, and sand free from debris,trash, frozen materials, roots, and other organic matter. B. Ensure that areas to be filled are free of standing water, frost, frozen or unsuitable material, trash, and debris prior to fil placement. C. Place fill materials in accordance with Section 02300 unless subsequent excavation for new work is required. D. Grade surface to match adjacent grades and to provide flow of surface drainage after fill placement and compaction. 3.05 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. Remove from site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Leave areas of work in clear condition. B. No burning of any material, debris, or trash on-site or off-site will be allowed, except when allowed by appropriate governing authority and Owner. If allowed as stated above, burning shall be performed in manner prescribed by governing authority. Attend burning materials until fires have burned out and have been completely extinguished. Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02220-3 Protect Name: Wa p Specification Name: SITE DEMOLITION 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and subsurface obstructions that will remain after demolition. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Structures to be demolished will be discontinued in use and vacated prior to start of work. B. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of structures to be demolished. C. Conditions, existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner as reasonably A% practical. Variations within structures may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of demolition work. D. Unless otherwise indicated in Contract Documents or specified by the Owner, items of salvageable value to Contractor shall be removed from site and structures. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted and shall not interfere with other work specified in Contract Documents. E. Explosives shall not be brought to site or used without written consent of authorities having jurisdiction. Such written consent will not relieve Contractor of total responsibility for injury to persons or for damage to property due to blasting operations. Performance of required blasting shall comply with governing regulations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FILL MATERIALS Aggregate materials as specified in Section 02325. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain erosion control devices, temporary barriers, and security devices at locations indicated on Construction Drawings. B. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, and structures, which are not to be demolished. 00 Repair damage caused by demolition operations at no cost to Owner. C. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Provide bracing and shoring as needed. A4 D. Mark location of utilities. Protect and maintain in safe and operable condition utilities that are to remain. Prevent interruption of existing utility service to occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities and Owner. E. Notify adjacent owners of work that may affect their property, potential noise, utility outages or disruptions. Contractor to coordinate with Owner. •s 3.02 DEMOLITION REQUIREMENTS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent structures or pavements. .r Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02220-2 Specification Name: SITE DEMOLITION SECTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION PART1 GENERAL rF 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Demolition of designated site structures, retaining walls and foundations and removal of materials from IP site. B. Demolition and removal of pavements, curbs and gutters, drainage structures, utilities, signage or landscaping. . C. Disconnecting and capping or removal of identified utilities. D. Filling or removal of underground tanks, piping, and appurtenances. E. Filling voids in su grade created as a result of removals or demolition. F. Hazardous material compliance. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 02230 - l5ite Clearing B. Section 02300- Earthwork C. Section 02322— Excavation, Backfill, and Compaction for Utilities D. Section 02325 -Aggregate Materials E. Section 02370 - Erosion Control and Sedimentation F. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) G. Construction Drawings 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable State and local codes for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, and runoff control. B. Obtain required permits and licenses from appropriate authorities. Pay associated fees including disposal charges. C. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. D. Do not close or obstruct public or private roadways, sidewalks, or fire hydrants without appropriate permits or writton authorization. E. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. F. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination. Project Na me: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 02220-1 Specification Name: SITE DEMOLITION O ` N C r C.w M � C aS 7 ` y O O tic N U O U v) o E (A 0 (D 0 0 ° C) O N N O N C M O 7 O CL C W C p � N o c c � ca c 5 oar we .0 U) AU) cc6 U N vOi U— «� = A2 as N y O Q O `UCaC (D U w c 0 o CL O N (D L) w m 0 E c o U ao o` w E CU a) v t5 0 Cc o a`) mco — °- U U � o. p F- Q m o c O W ca 0 3 is c c c c O LL = U C O W f- •L �� jU U) 'W+ LU U C n v U W D � .o o oU CJ LLJ C cu cc @ o = 'N W 0 c g t3):=c �Z '� UU m mM � o U a W a O wz t+ O L cc W E C _caw O � a) � U f0 mL c � U = V O O " 0 �p N O O O ' N � c�a Cc o c J" co d U `m w ca.o (D p _= z r�ya, V .0 CL M '6 tf., Y. Q. U) W N '6 a) m. Q CL U1 WAL-MART REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (CIVIL ENGINEERING) STORES, SUPERCENTER, SAM'S DATE: RFI NO: TO: PROJECT: (Civil Engineering Consultant) (City,State) FROM: PROJECT NO: (General Contractor) (Store#) SPECIFICATION SECTION: (Project Superintendent) (Job Site Phone Number; DRAWING/DETAIL: (Job Site Fax Number) Irv:; Contractor: Please Check Box to indicate that W/M Construction Manager has authorized this RFI to be sent to the Consultant ❑ INFORMATION REQUESTED: Requested By: REPLY: cc: Wal-Mart Civil Engineering ,Manager Engineer's response shall not be considered as a Change Order or Change Directive, nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Schedule Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 01256 -3 Specification Name: CIVIL ENGINEERING "REQUEST FOR INFORMATION" ON 1.04 RFI FORM A" A. Submit RFI's on attached form, or duplicate format on letterhead. Civil Engineering Consultant will not respond unless on proper form or equivalent format is utilized. B. If submittal form or format does not provide space needed for complete information, additional sheets may be attached. Oft END OF SECTION 01256 .r Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 01256 -2 Specification Name: CIVIL ENGINEERING "REQUEST FOR INFORMATION" '"" SECTION 01256 - "REQUEST FOR INFORMATION" (CIVIL ENGINEERING) PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing "Request for Information", (RFI). B. RFI process diagram and form is attached at the end of this Section. 1.02 DEFINITION A. RFI: Formal process used during construction phase to facilitate communication between the Contractor, the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, and the Civil Engineering Consultant with regard io requests for additional information and clarification of intent of Contract Documents (Drawings and Specifications). lip B. Do not use F;FI form during bidding. Direct questions during bidding phase as indicated in Contract Documents. 1.03 PROCEDURE A. Conditions nequiring clarification of the Contract Documents: 1. Subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers shall submit request for additional information and clarification to Contractor. 2. Contractor shall contact the Wal-Mart Construction Manager with request for additional information or clarification. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager will not accept request for information or clarification submitted directly from subcontractors, manufacturers, or suppliers. _ 3. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager will provide response to Contractor or he will direct the Contractor to submit RFI to the Civil Engineering Consultant with a copy to the Wal-Mart Engineering Manager. a. Generate RFI by one source per project and number accordingly. b. Submit one request for information or clarification per form. B. Civil Engineering Consultant will review RFI from Contractor with reasonable promptness and Contractor will be notified in writing of decisions made. 1. Civil Engineering Consultant's written response to RFI shall not be considered as a Pric ng Order or Pricing Directive, nor does it authorize changes in Contract Sum rv; or Contract Schedule. C. Contractor shall maintain a log of RFI's sent to and responses from Civil Engineering Consultant. RFI log shall be sent, by FAX, every Friday to Civil Engineering Consultant. D. RFI's regarding scheduling, cost, or coordination for Owner provided equipment shall be submitted directly to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Project Name: Wal-Mart W ster Specification Revised 02/14/2000 01256- 1 Specification Name: CIVIL ENGINEERING "REQUEST FOR INFORMATION" ww BLANK PAGE ••r I r WAL-MART SITEWORK SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 2.1 - SITEWORK PER ENGINEERING CONSULTANT DESIGN SECTION 01256 CIVIL ENGINEERING "REQUEST FOR INFORMATION" SECTION 02220 SITE DEMOLITION SECTION 02230 SITE CLEARING SECTION 02300 EARTHWORK SECTION 02318 ROCK EXCAVATION SECTION 02321 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION FOR STRUCTURES SECTION 02322 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION FOR UTILITIES SECTION 02323 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL,AND COMPACTION FOR PAVEMENT SECTION 02324 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, AND COMPACTION FOR OUT PARCELS SECTION 02325 AGGREGATE MATERIALS SECTION 02340 SOIL STABILIZATION SECTION 02370 EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL (INCLUDING SWPPP) SECTION 02510 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS SECTION 02532 SEWAGE LIFT STATIONS SECTION 02535 SANITARY SEWAGE SYSTEMS SECTION 02536 SEWER MANHOLES, FRAMES, AND COVERS SECTION 02555 NATURAL AND PROPANE GAS DISTRIBUTION SECTION 02630 STORM DRAINAGE SECTION 02715 BASE COURSE SECTION 02740 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02751 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 02765 PAVEMENT MARKINGS SECTION 02770 CURBS AND SIDEWALKS SECTION 02810 IRRIGATION SYSTEMS SECTION 02821 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES SECTION 02830 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS SECTION 02890 TRAFFIC SIGNS AND SIGNALS SECTION 02900 PLANTING SECTION 16525 SITE LIGHTING PROJECT: PROJECT ENGINEER: (Engineer's Seal & Signature) Project Name: Wal-Mart Master Specification Revised 02/14/2000 Index Cover Sheet a. M. Posts for Garden Center aluminum truss columns for shade cloth canopy: am 1. Install columnns at locations indicated on the drawings. 2. Coordinate installation of aluminum truss attachment brackets with Wal-Mart's Aluminum Truss Supplier Installation Drawings. an 3.2 INSTALLATION- ACRYLIC SHEET A. Mechanically fasten"Plexiglass"as shown on Drawings. am B. Pre-drill oversized holes in"Plexiglass"for fasteners. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES so A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch. Am B. Maximum Offset from True Position: 1 inch. END OF SECTION .w d.. .wb .w� w 02821-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 *"�+ PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F 567. Install chain link gates in accordance with ASTM F 900. B. Space line posts 10'-0" on center maximum,except as otherwise indicated. OR 1. Space line poste at 8'-0" on center maximum,if plastic slats are indicated to be installed in fence fabric. 2. Space interior 1 ine posts 8'-0" on center maximum. C. Methods for Setting Pests: 1. Grade-Set Posts: a. Drill or hand excavate to a depth approximately 3 inches lower than post bottom. Set post bottom not less than 36 inches below finish grade. b. Excavale each post hole to 12 inch diameter,or not less than four times diameter of post. C. Hold post in position while placing,consolidating,and finishing concrete. d. Post shell be set plumb within 1/4"in 10 feet. 2. Sleeve-Set Posts In Slabs: Anchor posts in concrete by means of pipe sleeves preset into concrete to depth not less than `4 inches"below finish slab, and anchored into concrete. Insert posts into sleeves and fill annular space between post and sleeve solid with grout. Mix and place grout in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. OR D. Intermediate Rails: Provide center and bottom rails where indicated. Install in one piece between posts and flush with post on fabric side, using offset fittings where necessary. Place intermediate rails a maximum of 6 feet on center. E. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb with rod in tension. F. Tension Wire: Install tension wires through post cap loops before stretching fabric and tie to each post cap with not less than 6 gage galvanized wire. Fasten fabric to tension wire using 11 gage galvanized steel hog rings spaces 24 inches on center. OR G. Fabric: Leave approximately 2 inches between finish grade and bottom selvage. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Install fabric on security side of fence, and anchor to framework so fabric remains in tension after pulling .orce is released. H. Stretcher Bars: To secure end, corner, pull, and gate posts, thread through or clamp to fabric 4 inches on center and secure to posts with metal bands spaced 15 inches on center. I. Tie Wires: I. Use U-shaped wire conforming with diameter of pipe to which attached, clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted two full turns. Bend wire ends to minimize hazards to persons or clothing. 2. Tie fabric to line posts with wire ties spaced 12 inches on center. Tie fabric to rails and braces with wire ties spaced 24 inches on center. Manufacturer's standard procedure will be accepted if of equal strength and durabiliri. 1P J. Fasteners: Install nits for tension bands and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite fabric side. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. K. Gates: Install gate:; plumb, level, and secure for full opening without interference. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. L. Install plastic slats vertically to manufacturer's instructions. 02821-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 a. b. Latch: WAR 1) Exterior: Forked type or plunger-bar type to permit operation from both sides of gate, with padlock eye. 2) Interior: Forked type to permit operation from both sides of gate, with padlock link. At Electrical Room and Sprinkler Room, omit padlock link and substitute standard pin bracket for attachment of forked latch(gates are not to be padlocked). 2. Double Gate Hardware: In addition to the above, provide gate stops for double gates, consisting of mushroom type flush plate with anchors set in concrete to engage center drop rod or plunger bar. Configure for use of one padlock to lock both gate leaves. 3. Sliding Gate Hardware: Manufacturer's standard heavy duty cantilever slide gate complying with ASTM F1184 including the following: a. Enclosed top track/rail. M! b. Truck assembly with internal ballbearing rollers. Provide two truck assemblies per leaf. C. Gate hangers, latches,brackets,bracing,and stops. d. Bottom guide wheel assemblies. ,- J. Plastic Slats(Exterior): Tubular plastic slats designed for use in 2 inch mesh fabric, installed vertically. PVT slats by Patrician Products,Inc.;Hicksville,NY;(516)937-3580. 1. Color: Grey,except as noted otherwise. MR K. Acrylic Sheet: Clear acrylic plastic sheet, "Plexiglass", by Rohm and Haas Company. Grind exposed edges smooth, free of chips and hairline cracks. 0M 1. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Location: Garden Center gate. 2.5 SETTING MIXES A. Concrete: See Section 03300. �wr B. Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive grout. See Section 03300. Provide type especially formulated for exterior application. 2.6 GATE FABRICATION "t A. Fabricate swing gate perimeter frames of 1.90 inch outside diameter galvanized steel pipe. Provide horizontal and vertical members to ensure proper gate operation and for attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space no frame members maximum 8'-0"apart. B. Assemble gate frames rigidly by welding or with special fittings and rivets. Use same fabric as specified for fence. Install fabric with stretcher bars at vertical edges. Bars may also be used at top and bottom edges. Attach 0M stretchers to frame at not more than 15 inches on center. Install diagonal cross-bracing on gates as required to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. C. Attach hardware to provide security against removal or breakage. 2.7 FINISH A. Fabric: Not less than 1.2 oz zinc/sq ft. B. Framing: M* 1. Type I Pipe: Hot dipped galvanized,with not less than 1.8 ounces of zinc per square foot of coated surface area as per ASTM A 90. 2. Type II Pipe: Not less than 0.9 ounces of zinc per square foot of exterior surface, over coated with a clear ..,, acrylic or polyester of not less that 3 mils,and the internal surface shall be coated with zinc rich paint with a minimum thickness of 3 mils as per ASTM A 90. 3. C Section: Zinc coating as per ASTM A 123. ■. 02821-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 MW C. Gate Posts: For single gate or one leaf of double gate,as follows. 1. Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: 1) Found: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe,5.79 lbs/lin ft. 2) Square: 2.5"x 2.5"outside dimension,5.10 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe,4.641bs/lin ft. 2. Over 6 Foot Fa)ric Height: a. Type I Posts: Round;4.00 inch outside diameter pipe,9.10 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II Posts: 4.00 inch outside diameter pipe,6.56 lbs/lin ft. D. Top,Bottom,and Inte-mediate Rails: Manufacturer's longest lengths. P 1. Typical: a. Type 1: Round; 1.66 inch outside diameter pipe,2.27 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II 1.66 inch outside diameter pipe 1.83 lbs/lin ft. 2. Couplings: Expansion type,approximately 6 inches long. 3. Attaching Dev�ces: Means of attaching top rail securely to each gate,corner,pull,and end post. E. Posts for Garden Center aluminum truss columns for shade cloth canopy. a. Type 1: Round,size as indicated on the drawings. 2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Sleeves: Galvanized steel pipe with inside diameter not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside diameter of fence posts. Provide steel plate closure welded to bottom of sleeves of width and length not less than 1 inch greater than outside diameter of sleeve. 1. Up to 6 Foot fabric Height: Provide sleeve not less than 12 inches long. s'- 2. Over 6 Foot Fabric Height(Not for Partitions Tight to Roof Deck): Provide sleeve not less than 24 inches long. 3. Fabric Installed Tight to Roof Deck (Posts Braced to Roof Structure): Provide sleeve not less than 12 inches long. B. Tension Wire: 7 ga€;e steel, metallic-coated coil spring wire, in accordance with ASTM A 824, located at bottom of fence fabric. C. Wire Ties: 11 gage galvanized steel. i� D. Post Brace Assembly: Manufacturer's standard adjustable brace at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts,with aorizontal brace located at mid-height of fabric. Use same materials as top rail for brace, and truss to line posts with 0.375 inch diameter rod and adjustable tightener. E. Post Tops: Galvani:ed steel, weather tight closure cap for tubular posts, one cap for each post. Furnish cap with openings to permit passage of top rail. F. Stretcher Bars: Galvanized steel, one piece lengths equal to full height of fabric; with minimum cross section of 3/16 x 3/4 inch. Prcvide one stretcher bar for each gate and end post,and two for each corner and pull post. G. Stretcher Bar Bands: Manufacturer's standard. H. Gate Cross-Bracing: 3/8 inch diameter galvanized steel adjustable length truss rods. I. Gate Hardware: 1. Swinging Gate Hardware: a. Hing.-s: Size and material to suit gate size;offset to permit 180 degree gate opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6-0"nominal height. 02821-3 OPP Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am PART 2-PRODUCTS .a 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specifications,use products of one of the following: ow 1. Allied Tube and Conduit Fence Division;(708)339-1610. 2. Anchor Fence,Inc.; (410)633-6500. 3. Cyclone Fence,U.S. Steel Group USX Corp.;(817)640-5309. do 4. Master-Halco,Inc.;(800)883-8384. 2.2 MATERIALS am A. Steel Posts: 1. Type I: ASTM F 1083, standard weight (Schedule 40) round or square post, hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 90. om 2. Type 11: ASTM F 669, cold-formed and welded steel pipe with zinc coating in accordance with ASTM F 1234. 3. C Section: Rolled formed steel'C'shapes,produced from ASTM A 570 Grade 45 and ASTM A 572 Grade an 45,and shall be fabricated with zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 123. B. Fabric: No. 9 gage(0.148 nominal)galvanized steel wire in 2 inch mesh;ASTM A 392. 1. Fabric height less than 72 inches: Top and bottom selvages knuckled. am 2. Fabric height 72 inches and greater: Top selvage twisted,bottom selvage knuckled. 2.3 COMPONENTS •.4 A. End,Corner,and Pull Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows. 1. Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: ..�+ 1) Round: 2.375 inch outside diameter pipe,3.65 lbs/lin ft. 2) Square: 2"x 2"outside dimension,2.60 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II Posts: 2.375 inch outside diameter pipe,3.12 lbs/lin ft. ..A 2. Over 6 Foot to 13 foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: 1) Round: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe,5.79 lbs/lin ft. 2) Square: 2.5"x 2.5"outside dimension,5.10 lbs/lin ft. b. Type Il Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe,4.64 lbs/lin ft. 3. 13 foot and over Fabric Height(If required): a. Type I Posts: Round;4.0 inch outside diameter pipe,9.10 lbs/lin ft. ... b. Type 11 Posts: 4.0 inch outside diameter pipe,6.56 lbs/lin ft. B. Line(Intermediate)Posts: Minimum sizes and weights as follows. 1. Up to 6 Foot Fabric Height: ..t a. Type I Posts: Round; 1.90 inch outside diameter pipe,2.72 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II Posts: 1.90 inch outside diameter pipe,2.281bs/lin ft. C. C Section: 1.875"x 1.625"outside dimension,2.28 lbs/lin ft. .� 2. Over 6 Foot to 8 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: Round;2.375 inch outside diameter pipe,3.65 lbs/lin ft. b. Type II Posts: 2.375 inch outside diameter pipe,3.12 lbs/lin ft. C. C Section: 2.25"x 1.70"outside dimension,2.64 lbs/lin ft. **+ 3. Over 8 Foot Fabric Height: a. Type I Posts: 1) Round: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe,5.79 lbs/lin ft. 2) Square: 2.5"x 2.5"outside dimension,5.10 lbs/lin ft. b. Type 11 Posts: 2.875 inch outside diameter pipe,4.64 lbs/lin ft. 02821-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ""'" UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 02821 -CHAIN LINK.FENCES AND GATES(BUILDING RELATED) P PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and in:erior chain link fence. 2. Columns for G irden Center aluminum trusses at shade cloth canopy. 3. Acrylic plastic sheet at Garden Center swinging exit gate. 4. Manual swingi zg and sliding chain link gates. 5. Plastic slat scrt ening. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300-Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete anchorage for posts. 2. Section 13121 -Fabric Structures: Aluminum trusses and shade cloth canopy at Garden Center. 3. Section 08710-Door Hardware: Panic exit device at Garden Center swinging exit chain link gate. 1.2 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 90-Tests for Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Iron or Steel Articles. 2. ASTM A 116 -Specification for Zinc-Coated(Galvanized)Steel Woven Wire Fence Fabric. 3. ASTM A 123 -Specification for Zinc(Hot-Dip Galvanized)Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. . 4. ASTM A 392 -Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric. 5. ASTM F 567 Specification for Installation of Chain Link Fence. 6. ASTM A 570-Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Sheet and Strip, Structural Quality. 7. ASTM A 572 - Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Steels of Structural Quality. 8. ASTM A 824 - Specification for Metallic-Coated Steel Marcelled Tension Wire Use with Chain Link Fence. 9. ASTM F 669 - Specification for Strength Requirements of Metal Posts and Rails for Industrial Chain Link Fence. X11 10. ASTM F 900-Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. 11. ASTM F 1083 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized) Welded, For Fence Structures. 12. ASTM F1184 -Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide Gates. 13. ASTM F 1231-Specification for Protective Coatings on Steel Framework for Fences. B. Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute(CLFMI): Product Manual. 1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: Fencing system and installation engineered to withstand 70 mph windload assuming 50 percent coverage wi:h hanging plastic banners and signage. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURkNCE A. Perform Work in ac-.ordance with CLFMI Product Manual and ASTM F 567. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. 02821-1 OF Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Perform cutting and patching required by installation of shoring in accordance with approved Cutting and Patching .a Procedures and Sequencing Plan as specified in Section 01700. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ■w A. Shoring Design Engineer: Inspect and approve shoring materials and installation prior to start of any demolition work. B. Submit inspection report to Wal-Mart Construction Manager. no END OF SECTION 4W .w w .a n.. rw w .iw 02251-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "" P P UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 02251 -SHORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Shoring at excavations and building structural and non-structural elements required to provide temporary support during excavating,demolition,and construction operations. 2. Temporary protection including without limits for construction workers, materials, existing construction other adjacent properties,and public. 1* B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01700 .Execution Requirements: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 2. Section 02023 - Selective Site Demolition: Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building elements. 1.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design and provide snoring to safely prevent collapse of materials and structures and to permit construction op- erations to proceed in conformance with construction sequence phases indicated on Drawings. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURAVCE A. Provide design of shoring by professional civil or structural engineer licensed in State in which project is located. B. Coordinate shoring design and construction with: 1. Soil Investigal ion Report prepared for this project. 2. Building structural system, including without limits to locations of footings, columns, pilasters, walls, and IMP other related structural elements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide shoring constructed of structural materials as required for shoring system design. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas where Work under this Section will be performed. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. Be responsible for correcting unsatisfactory and de- fective Work encountered after starting Work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install shoring system in accordance with shoring design drawings. B. Coordinate placement of shoring system elements with existing Work and approved Demolition Procedures and Sequencing Plan as specified in Section 02023. 02251-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 on" C. Interior or Exterior Slab on Grade: 1. Locate portion of existing concrete slab to be removed. Saw cut perimeter of existing slab minimum of 0M 50%of slab thickness to provide a breaking point to remove existing concrete. 2. Break concrete slab to be removed into portions easily removed,maximum 3 feet dimension at any side. 3. Remove concrete pieces within removed area down to the existing subgrade. ,. D. Exterior Masonry: 1. Locate portion of existing masonry wall to be removed. Units which are removed: "tooth" from existing 4M construction. 2. Verify that temporary supports,enclosures,and bracing are in place and adequate for intended purpose. 3. Remove only that portion of the exterior wall which is required for the indicated new construction. E. Below Grade Construction: 1. Remove below grade construction including foundation work, column footings, and abandon mechanical, plumbing,and electrical work as indicated. �.. F. Interior Walls and Partitions: 1. Remove interior walls and partitions as indicated. 2. Remove all top and bottom framing tracks and overhead braces of partitions being removed. an G. Doors and Frames: 1. Remove hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Remove aluminum storefront doors and frames. .. 3. Remove aluminum automatic doors and frames. H. Interior Finishes: .•A 1. Remove carpet and carpet adhesives. 1. Mechanical System: .. 1. Remove mechanical equipment and related ductwork as indicated. 2. Provide temporary weathertight protection of openings in roof and exterior walls. 3. Remove accessories to the mechanical system including,but not limited to,hanger straps. J. Plumbing: 1. Remove plumbing fixtures and accessories including exposed supply,waste,and vent piping as indicated. 2. Identify concealed piping within and below slab construction, and cap a minimum of 3 inches below finish floor unless otherwise noted. K. Electrical Service: 1. Remove abandoned electrical fixtures,conduit,boxes,and wiring as indicated. 2. Remove electrical circuits including conduct as indicated. END OF SECTION �s ..r W4 02023-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 9. Where selectiv,; demolition terminates at a "surface" or construction "to remain," completely remove all traces of material selectively demolished, including mortar beds. Provide smooth, even substrate transition as specified in'Section 0 173 1. C. Environmental Contro Is: 1. Use water spri *ling, temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in air to lowest practical level. 2. Comply with g)verning regulations pertaining to environmental protection. 3. Do not use water when it may create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, or pollution. P D. Below Grade Demolition: 1. Demolish and remove below grade wood or metal construction. 2. Break up below grade concrete slabs. E. Filling Below-Grade Voids: 1. Fill below grade areas and voids resulting from demolition work. 2. Use fill consis:ing of earth,gravel,or sand,free of trash and debris, stones over 6 inches diameter,roots,or other organic matter. F. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements conflicting with intended function or design are en- PR countered,submit wr tten report of nature and extent of conflict to Architect and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Rearrange demolition schedule to continue job progress without delay. 3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS P , rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations, to le- A. Transport and legally dispose of debris gally approved and licensed offsite location. B. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal,handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager,in writing,of hazardous materials encountered. INP _ 3.5 POLLUTION CONTROLS op A. Use temporary enclosures and other suitable methods to limit the amount of dust and dirt rising and scattering in the air to the lowest-)Tactical level. B. Comply with governing authorities pertaining to environmental protection. C. Clean adjacent portion of the structure and improvement of dust,dirt and debris caused by demolition operations, as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager and governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to conditions existing prior to the start of the work. D. Burning of trash,debris,or removed materials not permitted on site. 3.6 SCHEDULE OF SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Remove and dispose of existing building items and adjacent sitework items as required for Work and as indicated OP on Drawings. B. Sitework Adjacent ;o Building: 1. Fencing,gates and concrete post footings. 2. Asphalt con,-rete paving. 3. Metal handrails and railings. IP 02023-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. PART 3 -EXECUTION am 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces and adjacent areas of Work under this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory ..� conditions have been corrected. B. Starting Work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. oft 3.2 PREPARATION A. Ensure safe passage of persons around area of demolition. .ft B. Erect temporary covered passageways as sspecified in Section 01500. am C. Protect existing finish work to remain in place. D. Protect floors with suitable coverage. am E. Construct temporary insulated solid dustproof partitions where noise or extensive dirt or dust operations are per- formed. Equip partitions with dustproof doors and security locks if required as specified in Section 01500. 4M F. Provide temporary weather protection between demolition and removal of existing construction on exterior sur- faces and installation of new construction to ensure no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior ar- eas of existing building as specified in Section 01500. ow G. Cease operations and notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager immediately if safety of structure appears to be en- dangered. on H. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations. I. Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures to remain from soiling or damage when demolition work is ." performed in rooms or areas from which such items have not been removed. 3.3 DEMOLITION A. The Owner will remove or, under separate contract, have materials and equipment which the Owner requires re- moved,prior to commencement of Work under this Section. Coordinate scheduling of removal of Owner materi- als and equipment with Wal-Mart Construction Manager and Store Manager. .. B. Demolition: 1. Perform demolition work in systematic manner. 2. Demolish concrete and masonry in small sections. M0 3. Cut concrete and masonry at junctures with construction to remain,using masonry saws or hand tools, and make cuts straight and square with building. 4. Do not use powder-driven impact tools. om 5. Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls,floor,or framing. 6. For interior slabs on grade,use removal methods that will not crack or structurally disturb adjacent slabs or partitions. "" 7. Perform cutting of existing concrete and masonry construction with saws and core drills. Do not use jack- hammers or explosives. 8. Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the ON work. Am 02023-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 °m" 1.6 PROJECT SITE A. Indicated"Existing Construction"was obtained from existing drawings. Verify existing conditions as specified in Document 00800 and notify the Wal-Mart Construction Manager of discrepancies before proceeding with the Work. B. Perform removal, cutting, drilling, etc., of existing work with extreme care, and use small tools in order not to 1P jeopardize the structural integrity of the building. C. Occupancy: Contractor will have limited use of the facility during construction as specified in Section 01700. D. Condition of Structure: The Owner assumes no responsibility for the actual condition of portions of the structure to be demolished. 1 E. Protection: Ensure that the safe passage of persons around the area of demolition is provided. Conduct operations to prevent damage to;adjacent buildings,structures,and other facilities,and injury to persons. 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Comply with Wal-Mart approved schedule for sequence of operations for selective demolition work. B. Include coordination:.'or shut-off,capping,and continuation of utility services as required,together with details for dust and noise control. 1.8 SHORING AND BRACING A. Provide temporary storing, bracing and supports for building structure as required for support of structure during demolition of existing structural elements and to prevent movement, settlement of exting building and adjacent buildings and facilities to remain as specified in Section 02251. PART2-PRODUCTS op 2.1 MATERIALS A. Designated materials and equipment for re-installation: Carefully remove,store,and protect. B. Wal-Mart Salvage: Clean, store, and transfer designated materials and equipment to Owner, and obtain receipt. Wal-Mart salvage items include but are not limited to: W 1. Store fixtures. 2. Storage racks. A 3. Store equipment. 4. Salvage item;;as indicated on Drawings. C. Contractor's Salvage: 1. Contractor sl;all verify with and obtain approval from Wal-Mart Construction Manager for all Contractor salvage items prior to their removal from site. 2. Transport salvaged items from site as items are removed. 3. Storage or sale of removed items on site not permitted. -heduled for reuse which are damaged to the extent that they cannot be reused. Replace with D. Replace materials s equal quality material at no additional cost to the Owner as specified in Section 01700. E. Coordinate with th,; Owner on disposition of salvage items not scheduled for reuse, demolished materials, and equipment. Deliver salvaged materials,not reused,as directed,by or to the Owner. 02023-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North ampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..e 1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditions of Structure: 1. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of items or structures to be demolished. 2. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purposes will be maintained by Owner insofar as practical. 3. Variations within structure may occur by Owner's removal and salvage operations prior to start of selective demolition work. .w B. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition and debris removal in manner to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Provide traffic controls as specified in Section 01500. ON 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE .w A. Qualifications: Engage only personnel who can demonstrate not less that five (5) years successful experience in Work of similar character. B. Performance Criteria: so 1. Requirements of Structural Work: Do not cut structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of load- carrying capacity of load/deflection ratio. 2. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut operational elements and safety-related components in a am manner resulting in a reduction of capacities to perform in a manner intended or resulting in a decreased operational life,increased maintenance,or decreased safety. 3. Visual Requirements: Do not cut work which is exposed on the exterior or exposed in occupied spaces of the building in a manner resulting in a reduction of visual qualities or resulting in substantial evidence of the demolition work judged by the Architect to be cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. 4. Loading: Do not superimpose loads at any point upon existing structure beyond design capacity including loads attributable to materials,construction equipment,demolition operations,and shoring and bracing. �+ 5. Vibration: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would induce vibration into any element of the structure. 6. Fire: Do not use means,methods,techniques,or procedures which would produce any fire hazard. 7. Water: Do not use means, methods, techniques, or procedures which would produce water run-off, and .A water pollution. 8. Air Pollution: Do not use means, methods, techniques or procedures which would produce uncontrolled dust, fumes,or other damaging air pollution. oft 1.5 UTILITY SERVICES A. Maintain existing utilities. Keep in service and protect against damage during demolition operations. B. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving occupied or used facilities except when authorized in writing by authori- ties having jurisdiction and approval by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. .w C. Provide temporary services during interruptions to existing utilities as acceptable to governing authorities. D. Locate, identify,stub off,and disconnect utility services not to remain. E. Provide by-pass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. F. Provide advance notice to Wal-Mart if shut-down of service is necessary during change-over. 02023-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "' UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 02023 -SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Procedures for demolition and removal of existing building elements. 2. Protection of existing construction. 3. Salvaged material and items. 4. Schedule of building demolition. 5. Disposal of deriolished materials(non-hazardous and hazardous). B. Related Sections: 1. Document 008)0 - Supplementary Conditions: Review of Contract Documents and field conditions by Contractor. 2. Section 01100 -Summary: Restrictions for Work within and adjacent to existing building areas. 3. Section 01700 -Execution Requrrments. 4. Section 01731 Cutting and Patching: Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 1 5. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary protection and barriers. Removal and disposal of der,iolished materials. 6. Section 02251 -Shoring: Requirements for shoring and bracing. 1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Selective Demolition Requirements: 1. Perform demolition in construction sequence phases according to Construction Sequence Drawings. 2. Work necessary and required to facilitate the new construction indicated. 3. Demolish so ghat construction, new and existing, can be performed and completed in accordance with construction documents. 4. Visit the project site and become familiar with the existing conditions and project requirements. 5. Clarify the st;ope of the Work under this Section including salvage material. The Owner will be responsible for removing materials and equipment which the Owner wishes to salvage prior to the beginning of this Work. 6. Retain existin;fire protection sprinkler system in place and active. 7. Contractor is responsible for damage to existing structure and replacement or repair of damage. 8. Repair,replace,or rebuild existing construction as required or as directed which has been removed,altered, or disrupted to allow for new construction. Correct existing construction to match adjacent construction, x- new or existirg as specified in Section 01731. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable code for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control,and 6sposal. 2. Obtain required permits from authorities having jurisdiction and submit to Wal-Mart. 3. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. Submit Certificates fir severance of utility services and submit confirmation documentation of all utility company contacts to NA'al-Mart. 4. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or hydrants without permits from authorities having jurisdiction and Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 5. Conform to t.pplicable regulatory procedures when discovering hazardous or contaminated materials. 6. Test soils around buried tanks for contamination(where hurried tanks occur). 02023-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.2 PREPARATION A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut to prevent failure. B. Protection: .. 1. Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. 2. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 3. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. 4. Take precautions not to cut existing pipe, conduit, or duct serving building but scheduled to be relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them. ■m 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Remove, cut, and patch Work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide means of restoring products, mate- rials and finishes to original condition. B. Cut work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. C. Where cutting is required,use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding,not hammering or chop- ping. Cut through concrete and masonry using cutting machine, such as a carborundum saw or core drill. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing w finished surfaces, cut and drill from exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. D. Patch with seams that are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for work. 3.4 TRANSITIONS ..e A. Where expansion new Work abuts or aligns with existing Work, provide a smooth and even transition. Patched Work shall match existing adjacent Work in texture and appearance. B. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with expansion new Work is not possible,terminate ex- isting surface along a straight line at a natural line of division. 3.5 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SURFACES ..� A. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged,discolored,or showing imperfections. B. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. .�. 3.6 FINISHES A. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product sections. B. Finish patched area shall produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, re- ... finish entire surface to nearest intersections. END OF SECTION Am 01731-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 no P UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 01731 -CUTTING AND PATCHING P PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements and limitations for cutting and patching Work. 2. Products for patching and extending Work. 3. Transitions and adjustments. 4. Repair of damaged surfaces,finishes and cleaning. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01500 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary barriers. 2. Section 02023 -Selective Site Demolition: Procedures for removing existing materials and equipment. 1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS K A. Cutting and patching includes cutting into existing construction to provide for installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Structural Work: 1. Do not cut an6 patch structural work in manner resulting in reduction of load-carrying capacity or load and deflection ratio. 2. Submit proposal and request and obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager's review before proceeding with cutting and patching of structural work. Pp Y C. Operational Limitations: 1. Do not cut and patch operational elements and safety components in manner resulting in decreased performance, shortened useful life,or increased maintenance. 2. Submit propo>als and requests and obtain Wal-Mart Construction Manager's acceptance before proceeding with cutting a ad patching. 1 D. Quality Limitations: Do not cut and patch work exposed to view(exterior and interior) in manner resulting in no- ticeable reduction of aesthetic qualities and similar qualities,as judged by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. E. Limitation on Acceptance: Wal-Mart Construction Manager's acceptance to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive right to later require removal or replacement of work found to be cut and patched in unsatisfactory manner as judged by Wal-Mart Construction Manager. Rp PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS OPP A. Use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not avail- able or cannot be used,use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal or better performance characteristics. 111 r. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which work is to be performed before cutting. Take corrective action before proceeding with work if unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered. 01731-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 IM am Oft Ow s4 am BLANK PAGE .. .w 01700-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 I UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General Install ition Requirements 2. Work Within and Adjacent to Existing Building Area. 1.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Repair, re-route, and extend all services, piping, and conduit of existing items and equipment as required during construction operations for installation and operation of new items and equipment. Re-install existing equipment or related items in areas affected by Work as required for proper operation. !"P B. Provide furring for all existing and new piping and conduit. Finish and materials on furring to match existing ad- jacent finishes. C. Obtain all required i ispections and approvals from authorities having jurisdiction for Temporary Certificate of Occupancy for Offic.-s and Stockroom 7 calendar days prior to Wal-Mart scheduled move into new Office and Stockroom areas. !ON D. Provide materials and finishes used for expansion Work of same type as existing materials and finishes as speci- fied in Section 01600. 1.3 WORK WITHIN AND ADJACENT TO EXISTING BUILDING AREAS A. Building Regulations: Comply with all specific Wal-Mart building regulations for Contractor work within build- ing. Specific regulations will be discussed by Wal-Mart Construction Manager at Preconstruction Conference. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 01700-1 op Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 BLANK PAGE w .w 01600-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �. Specification Furnished Received Section Description By B Installed By Order Date* Delivery Date* 16700 Telephone • Telephone Service Installed Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 10 weeks 4 weeks • Telephone System(Ph ise 1) Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 4 weeks • Telephone System(Phase 2) Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 2 weeks after possession Fire Alarm Drawings Fire Alarm System • Fire Alarm System Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 4 weeks • Burglar Alarm Systerr Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 4 weeks *Dates are based on number of weeks prior to possession(unless noted otherwise). END OF SCHEDULE Pr 01600-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Specification Furnished Received Section Description By By Installed By Order Date' Delive Date' Architectural Wal-Mart Drawings Vision Center Equipment Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Contr.Hook-Up l week Architectural Wal-Mart Drawings Photo Lab Equipment Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Contr.Hook-Up Contractor to schedule Architectural Drawings Pharmacy Equipment Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor 4-6 weeks Architectural ■s Drawings Fire Extinguishers Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Contractor to schedule 13121 Fabric Structures Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor 8 weeks w 13810 Energy Monitoring and Control Systems Owner Owner Owner Contractor to schedule 13812 Energy Management System Wiring Owner Owner Owner Contractor to schedule am 15480 Water Heaters Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 15700 Roof Top Air Conditioning Units Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 15700 HVAC Test and Balance Wal-Mart Wal-Mart [Wal-Mart- 1 week am 15600 Refrigeration Contractor to coord.with • Condensers/Evaporators Owner Owner Owner Refrigeration Department an Contractor to coord.with • Walk-In Cooler/Freezers Owner Owner Owner Refrigeration Department Contractor to coord.with No • Upright Cases with Doors Wal-Mart Owner Owner Refrigeration Department 16121 Prefabricated Flexible Cable Assemblies Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule wM 16128 Data System Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Contractor to schedule 16265 Central UPS Wal-Mart Contractor Wal-Mart 3 weeks wee 16402 Low Voltage Service and Distribution Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 16500 Lighting Fixtures as Noted Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 16525 Site Lighting • Anchor Bolts Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule • Site Lighting Poles/Heads Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 16700 Satellite Dish Equipment and Cabling Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 3 weeks w .we 01600-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..� PRODUCTS FURNISHED BY OTHERS SCHEDULE Specification Furnished Received Section Description By B Installed By Order Date* Delivery Date* 05210 Steel Joists Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 05300 Metal Roof Decking Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 05500 Metal Fabrications Jib Crane Hoist Arm and Railing Assembly Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule • Monitor Bracket Support Assembly Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule • Television Monitor Bracket Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 07411 Manufactured Roof Pane Is Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 08331 Pharmacy Coiling Counter Doors Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule 08352 Accordion Folding Door Owner Contractor Owner Contractor to schedule 08360 Sectional Overhead Doors Owner Owner Owner Contractor to Schedule 08462 Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors Owner Owner Owner Contractor to Schedule 08710 Positive Lock Alarm Exit Device Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule- 06610 Fiber Reinforced Plastic Coated Panels Owner Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule - Resilient Flooring Tile,Feature Tile,and Contractor to schedule 09650 Adhesive Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor po 09720 Wall Covering for Vision Center Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor Contractor to schedule Architectural Drawings Carpet Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 2 weeks Architectural Contractor coordinate Drawings Signage Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart with Sign Department 10810 Toilet Accessories • Toilet Paper Holden,Sanitary Napkin Disposals,Soap Dispensers Wal-Mart Contractor Contractor Possession date • Paper Towel Dispen;;ers Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Refer to Section 11400 and Snack Bar 11400 Food Service Equipment(Snack Bar) Drawings for Schedule of Equipment 10 weeks 6 weeks Architectural Drawings Stock Room Motorized Racks Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 1-4 weeks Architectural Drawings High Stock Fixed Rao cs Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 1-4 weeks Architectural Drawings Battery Chargers Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 10 weeks 6 weeks Architectural Drawings Balers/Compactors Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Wal-Mart 3 weeks Architectural Drawing Safe Wal-Mart Wal-Mart Contractor 9 weeks 6 weeks 01600-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northzmpton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for components being replaced. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRODUCTS FURNISHED BY OTHERS SCHEDULE ,.. A. Refer to schedule at the end of this Section for products furnished by others and respective milestone dates. .w .A ..w .w dM am 01600-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 no B. Unpack and set in place,plumb,level,and secure. C. Connect to mechanical,plumbing,and electrical systems as required. X11 D. Remove packaging and clean products. E. Test and adjust as required. 1.9 PRE-NEGOTIATED SUPPLIERS A. Wal-Mart has negotiate-d national accounts for Products identified in individual Specification Sections. Manufac- turer national accounts include fixed pricing, delivery, and payment terms for the Products to be incorporated into the Work. B. Refer to individual Specification Sections for product manufacturer and manufacturer national account contact in- formation. C. Procure specified proc.ucts as indicated in the individual Specification Section through the manufacturer national account contact. 1.10 PRODUCT DELIVEF.Y REQUIREMENTS A. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Deliver materials and equipment at such stages of work in order to expedite the Work and minimize storage requirements. B. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 10 C. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, and damage. Do not use damaged materials and equipment. 1.11 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide safe storage of both Owner furnished and Contractor furnished products. Ali B. Store and protect pro iucts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,with seals and labels intact and legible. Store sensitive products in weather-tight,climate controlled enclosures. C. For exterior storage c f fabricated products,place on sloped supports,above ground. D. Provide off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. E. Cover products subjfcct to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensa- tion. _P F. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. G. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling,disfigurement,or damage. H. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to assure products are undam- aged and are maintained under specified conditions. OF 01600-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ■w B. Wal-Mart's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for delivery of supplier furnished shop drawings,product data,and samples to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site, in accordance with agreed upon construction management plan in Section 01320. 3. Deliver supplier's shipment list of materials to Contractor. MOO 4. Submit claims for transportation damage. 5. Arrange for replacement of damaged,defective,or missing items. 6. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties,bonds,services,and inspections,as required. on C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Determine and coordinate quantities of materials with Wal-Mart's Construction Department. 2. Coordinate required delivery dates with Wal-Mart's Construction Department. ■. 3. Review supplier furnished shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330. Submit to supplier with notification to Architect and Wal-Mart's Construction Department of any discrep- ancies or problems anticipated in the use the products. 4. Receive and unload products at the Site. "" 5. Promptly inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damaged, or defective items; report to Wal-Mart's Construction Department. 6. Handle products at site, including uncrating, storage,and protection. 7. Install products when indicated in"Products Furnished by Others Schedule" at end of this Section. 8. Protect installed products from damage. 9. Replace items damaged by Contractor. 10. Remove trash,debris,and rubbish. 1.7 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner are those indicated in "Products Furnished by Others Sched- ule" at end of this Section. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for delivery of supplier furnished shop drawings,product data,and samples to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site, in accordance with agreed upon construction management plan in Section 01320. 3. Deliver supplier's shipment list of materials to Contractor. 4. Submit claims for transportation damage. 5. Arrange for replacement of damaged,defective,or missing items. 6. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties,bonds,services,and inspections,as required. w� C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Determine and coordinate quantities of materials with Owner and Wal-Mart's Construction Department. �*! 2. Coordinate required delivery dates with Owner and Wal-Mart's Construction Department. 3. Review supplier furnished shop drawings, product data, and samples under provisions of Section 01330. Submit to supplier with notification to Architect, Owner, and Wal-Mart's Construction Department of any discrepancies or problems anticipated in the use the products. 4. Receive and unload products at the Site. 5. Promptly inspect products upon receipt for shortages, damaged, or defective items; report to Owner and Wal-Mart's Construction Department. 6. Handle products at site,including uncrating, storage,and protection. 7. Install products when indicated in"Products Furnished by Others Schedule"at end of this Section. 8. Protect installed products from damage. 9. Replace items damaged by Contractor. aw 10. Remove trash,debris,and rubbish. 1.8 INSTALLATION OF WAL-MART AND OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS No A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. am 01600-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,.., Y.> UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 01600-PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART I GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Basic Product Requirements 2. Product Options 3. Product Substitution Requirements 4. Owner Furnished Products 5. Pre-negotiated Suppliers. 6. Product Delivery Requirements 7. Product Stora&e and Handling Requirements 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Defined as new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work. Does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication,conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also in(,Iude existing materials or components required for reuse. 1.3 BASIC PRODUCT RQUIREMENTS A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with require- ments of the standarc.,except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. H C. Obtain copies of standards when required by Contract Documents. !! D. Should specified ref,-rence standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect be- fore proceeding. E. The contractual relal ionship,duties,and responsibilities of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 PRODUCT OPTIO14S by Naming a Single Manufacturer and/or Model Number: Provide specified product only. A. Products Specified B. Products Specified by Naming Two or More Manufacturers: Provide specified products of manufacturers and models named only,meeting specifications and specified requirements. C. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Provide any product meeting specified refer- ence standard or de:cription. 1.5 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION REQUIREMENTS A. No substitutions permitted. Provide specified products only. 1.6 WAL-MART FURVISHED PRODUCTS A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Wal-Mart are those indicated under "Products Furnished by Others Schedule"at end of this Section. 01600-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 North rmpton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 we AAM BLANK PAGE w s w■ 01500-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION P* 01500-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 7 F. Do not operate cranes or other heavy equipment on concrete floor slabs if damage could result from such opera- tions. G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.17 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program through Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 1.18 ACCESS ROADS AND PARKING A. Construct and maintain temporary all weather roads accessing public thoroughfares to serve building pad and con- struction staging area. B. Extend and relocate as Work progress requires. Provide detours necessary for unimpeded traffic flow. .r C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants,free of obstructions. D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. rr, E. When site space is not adequate,provide additional off-site parking. F. Provide 100'x 100'all weather material staging area exclusive of building pad. 1.19 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials,debris,and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing,and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. .w D. Remove waste materials,debris,and rubbish from site weekly and dispose off-site. 1.20 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES,FACILITIES,AND CONTROLS ,,As, A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Final Application for Payment inspection. B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during . construction to specified condition. r� 01500-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 '"� 1.12 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES iR!1! A. Provide temporary weather-tight closure of exterior openings to provide acceptable working conditions and pro- tection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified �It in individual specification Sections,and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. B. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks. 1.13 INTERIOR ENCLOS JRES z A. Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas,to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas,and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces. 1.14 FIELD OFFICES AND SHEDS A. Contractor's Office: 1. Size as required for Contractor's use and to provide space for project meetings. 2. Adequate electrical power,lighting,heating,and cooling to maintain human comfort. 3. Office space with desk and chair, layout table, plan rack, and facilities for storage of Project Record Documents. 4. Furnishings in meeting area: a. Confer,mce table and chairs for at least eight persons. b. Racks send files for Project Record Documents in,or adjacent to,the meeting area. ! ! C. Other furnishings: Contractor's option. 5. Contractor's o:fice and sheds not to be used as living accommodations. B. Storage Sheds: Structurally sound,weathertight,on proper foundations,with floors raised above ground. .z.' C. Locate office and sheds minimum 30 feet from structures. 1.15 CONSTRUCTION AIDS A. Provide construction aids required to facilitate execution of Work, including stairs, ladders, ramps, staging, plat- forms,railings,cranes,scaffolds,hoists,chutes,runways,and other required facilities and equipment. B. Coordinate crane service required for erection of structural steel, installation of HVAC Rooftop Units, Electrical Distribution Center(when used),and other crane services as required to accommodate Wal-Mart's needs. 1.16 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK l A A. Protect installed Work;provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs,sills,and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished flocrs, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Minimize traffic and storage on roofed surfaces. If traffic or storage is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from roofing material manufacturer. 01500-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indi- cated otherwise in specifications. 1.5 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes,vapors,or gases. 1.6 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide,maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.7 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide,maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required for construction operations. .w B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide tem- porary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. C. Connect to existing water source. Owner will pay cost of water used. Exercise measures to conserve water. 1.8 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required chemical toilet facilities. B. Existing facilities shall not be used. 1.9 BARRIERS A. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic,stored materials,site and structures from damage. B. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of site,and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. C. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way, to allow for Owner's use of site,and for public access to existing building. 1.10 FENCING AW A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence,6 feet high. B. Provide fence around area of expansion and staging area. wit C. Equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 1.11 WATER CONTROL ^4 A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water.Provide,operate,and maintain pumping equipment. B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion. w C. The Contractor shall at all times protect all activities of his construction, excavations, fill areas, embankments, trenches structures or building from damage from rainwater, spring water, ground water, backing up of drains, 40 sewers and all other water encountered during his operations. He shall provide all pumps, equipment and enclo- sures necessary to provide adequate protection. +wr 01500-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .0 UniSpec II 092499 ., SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting,heat,ventilation,telephone service,water,and sanitary facilities. 2. Temporary Controls: Barriers,enclosures and fencing,protection of the Work,and water control. 3. Construction Facilities: All weather access roads, parking, progress cleaning, and temporary buildings, staging areas. 1.2 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Connect to existing power service. Owner will pay cost of electricity used. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. Exercise measures to conserve energy. B. Arrange with local electric utility for installation of temporary electric service. Provide required items of work as- sociated with the installation of temporary electric service. C. Provide adequate distribution equipment,wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. Provide temporary feeders to limit voltage loss to 5% overall from local utility power lines to provide electric requirements for project during construction. D. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location. Provide necessary transform- ers,meters,cables,p-otective devices,switches,etc.,as required. E. Provide for motors u3 to 1/2 HP, 120 volt only. F. Provide flexible power cords as required. Provide sufficient number of outlets so that extension cords of not more than 50 feet will reach work requiring light and power. G. Permanent convenience receptacles may not be utilized during construction. 1.3 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations. Provide temporary lighting equal to one 200 watt lamp per 1000 square feet of floor space. B. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors,pigtails, and lamps as re- quired. C. Permanent building:ighting may be utilized during construction. D. Maintain lighting an provide routine repairs. 1.4 TEMPORARY HE?,T I` A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. B. Prior to operation oi'permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation,equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation,maintenance,and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. 01500-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northa pton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Am Aw vo Ow ad BLANK PAGE 00 04 Mw 40 40 01458-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 5. Inspect walls]br compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: a. Spacin;;and grouting of embedded plates for joist bearing. b. Spacin;; and grouting (or installation of Hilti anchors) of embedded plates for continuous angle attachment at roof perimeter. C. Structural Steel Inspections: 1. Inspection of columns, beams,joist, and joists girders for compliance with Drawings and Specifications shall be by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. Report on the following: 4kk a. Size of members. b. Straightness. �, C. Erecticn tolerances and bearing length: ir. 1) Minimum 2-1/2 inch bearing length for joists. 2) Minimum 5 inch bearing length for joist girders. OR d. Imperfections or damage. D. Structural Connections Inspections: 1. Inspection of bolted connections for placement and tightness shall be by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the project is located. When designated on the Drawings as"Slip Critical,"high strength bolts complyi ag with ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 shall be tested to ensure they have been torqued to the minimum values as shown in the AISC specification for structural connections. All other bolt locations shall be visually inspected to verify bolt placement. 10 percent of all bolted connections shall be tested to verify that nu:s are snug tight. All base plate anchor bolts shall be visually inspected for out-of-plumb and extension of threads beyond the nut. 2. Inspect welded connections for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Welding inspection shall be by a Welding Inspector certified by AWS in accordance with AWS QC1-Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors, and meeting the qualification requirements of AWS D 1.I. Report on the following: a. Verify that all welding is performed by welders certified for the type of welding indicated. Deck to joist welding shall be performed by welders certified for deck welding. .; b. A minimum of 10 percent of joist to joist girder welds selected at random and visually inspected for length and size of weld. C. A mir.imum of 25 percent of continuous roof perimeter angle to embedded plate and joist welds selected at random and visually inspected for length,spacing,and size of weld. d. A minimum of 25 percent of all deck-to-joist welds,visually inspected for size, spacing, and fusion. Perform random checks of deck for adhesion to joists. e. If more than 10 percent of the welds inspected are not acceptable, an additional 25 percent of all welds shall be inspected. If additional welds are unacceptable, 100 percent of all welds shall be inspected. f. If apr roved by the Construction Manager, the testing engineer shall verify the adequacy of the welds in question by means of ultrasonic inspection. E. Steel Roof Deck Inspections: 1. Inspect steel roof deck for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: a. Selecl 6 random sheets for each type of deck used. Inspect for deck thickness,type,and material. b. Inspect 10 percent of side lap connectors over entire roof area for type, size, and spacing of side lap connectors. END OF SECTION 0 01458-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northz.mpton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.5 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY TESTING A. Conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 140. B. Select 3 units from each lot of 10,000 units or less, 6 units for each lot of 10,000 to 100,000 units, select 3 units for every 50,000 units. C. Strength of concrete masonry units will be considered satisfactory if calculated test compressive strength conforms to requirements of ASTM C 90 for hollow units and ASTM C 145 for solid units. D. In addition to required information noted previously in this Section, record the following information on concrete unit masonry compression reports: 1. Test sample number. 2. Specific wall areas covered by test. 3. Description of units used to form sample. 4. Tested compressive strength to the nearest 10 psi separately for each specimen and as the average of three specimens. 3.6 STRUCTURAL INSPECTION A. Concrete Foundations and Slabs-On-Grade Inspections: 1. Inspect foundations for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: a. Concrete footing size and depth. b. Footing bar size,spacing,and placement(cover). C. Placement and vibration of concrete. d. Dowel bar size,orientation,embedment,and spacing. e. Anchor bolt size,orientation,embedment,and spacing. 2. Inspect slabs-on-grade for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: a. Preparation of subgrade. b. Slab thickness. C. Size,spacing,placement(cover),and lap of reinforcement. d. Size,spacing,and placement of joint dowels. e. Placement and finishing of concrete. f. Time of saw cuts after placement of concrete. B. Masonry Wall Inspections: 1. Inspect wall for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: a. Placement of concrete masonry units(joint space,level,plumb). b. Horizontal reinforcing,spacing,and lap. C. Vertical bar size,spacing and placement(spacing across width of wall)at walls and control joints. d. Vertical bar laps. e. Lift heights,placement,and vibration of grout. 2. Inspect bond beams for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: a. Location. b. Size,placement,and lap of reinforcing bars. C. Placement and vibration of grout. 3. Inspect openings for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: " a. Types of concrete masonry units used to form lintels. b. Reinforcing bar size and placement at lintel. C. Stirrup size and spacing at lintel. ww d. Vertical reinforcing size and placement at doorjambs. e. Placement and vibration of grout in lintels and jambs. 4. Inspect pilasters for compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Report on the following: a. Vertical reinforcing size and placement. " b. Tie size and placement. C. Placement and vibration of grout. 01458-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 K. Certify each delivery ticket of concrete. Report type of concrete delivered, amount of water added and time at which cement and aggregate were loaded into truck,and time at which concrete was discharged from truck. 3.3 MASONRY GROUT TESTING A. Conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C 1019. 1. Take two strength samples for each 5000 square feet of masonry wall surface for each type of grout placed each day. 2. Create test samples by forming with wood surface on bottom and concrete block on sides. The samples shall be minimum 3 inches square and 6 inches high. 3. Initial cure during first 48 hours. Protect samples from loss of moisture by covering with wet cloth and keeping moist. Protect from freezing and variations in temperature. Record maximum and minimum temperatures by using a max/min thermometer. 4. Remove masonry units that form samples after 48 hours and transport grout samples to laboratory. Keep samples protected from vibration,freezing,and moisture loss during transportation. 5. Test samples with test method ASTM C 39 at 7 days & 28 days. Compressive strength shall be the average of tf.e two samples and shall be adequate if it equal fm as defined an Drawings. If 7 day test breaks are equal to or above specified 28 day strength,do not break 28 day samples. B. Conduct slump test at time compressive test samples are taken in accordance with ASTM C 143. Grout shall have a slump between 8 inches and 10 inches. 06 C. In addition to requi;•ed information noted previously in this Section, record the following information on grout compression reports; 1. Mix design or mix designation. 2. Test sample number. 3. Specific wall areas covered by test. 4. Description c f sample-dimensions amount out of plumb in percent. 5. Description c f units used to form sample. 6. Curing history with max/min temperature,age when transported to lab,and age when tested. 7. Tested compressive strength. 8. Description of failure. g 3.4 MASONRY MORTAR TESTING A. Conduct strength tests in accordance with ASTM C109 and with the following: 1. Spread mortz.r on the masonry units 1/2 inch to 5/8 inch thick,and allow to stand for one minute. 2. Remove mortar and place in a 2-inch cube in two layers, compressing the mortar into the cylinder using a flat-end stick or fingers. Lightly tap mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and ` keep them de.mp until taken to the laboratory. ;> 3. After 48 hours' set, have the laboratory remove molds and place them in the fog room until tested in damp condition. B. Execute 2 mortar :est specimens per week during period masonry construction is being performed. Test specimens at 28 days. C. In addition to requi-ed information noted previously in this Section, record the following information on mortar compression reports: 1. Mix design c r mix designation. 2. Test sample:lumber. 3. Specific wall areas covered by test. 4. Description of units used to form sample. 5. Tested compressive strength. 01458-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �, d. Specimens transported after 48 hours age shall be demolded in 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours). aw Curing shall then be continued but in saturated limewater at 73.4 degrees (plus or minus 3 degrees F)until the time of transporting. 3. Test cylinders in accordance with ASTM C 39. a. Date test cylinders and number consecutively. Give each cylinder of each set an identifying letter (i.e. A, B, C, D). Prepare a sketch of the building plan for each test set identifying location of placed concrete. b. Test one cylinder(A)at 7 days for information. (If the compressive strength of the concrete sample is equal to or above the 28 day specified strength, test another cylinder(B) at 7 days. The average of the breaks shall constitute the compressive strength of the concrete sample. If the average is equal to or above 28 day specified strength,do not test cylinders(B&C)at 28 days). C. Test two cylinders (B and C) at 28 days and the average of the breaks shall constitute the compressive strength of the concrete sample. d. Retain fourth cylinder (D) for further testing if needed, but do not retain cylinder more than 60 days. D. Conduct slump test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C 143. Make additional slump tests for every other load from a stationary mixer or truck to test consistency. Sampling shall be in accordance with ASTM C 172. E. Conduct air content test for each cylinder set for concrete exposed to freeze-thaw in accordance with ASTM C 231,ASTM C 173,or ASTM C 138. Indicate test method on report. Make test at same time as slump test. 0' F. Unit Weight: ASTM C 138. G. Conduct temperature test for each cylinder set taken in accordance with ASTM C 1064. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 F and below or 80 F and above. Determine temperature of concrete sample and ambient air for each strength test. H. Additional Tests: In-Place tests in accordance with ASTM C 42 shall be conducted as directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager when specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structures. I. In addition to required information noted previously in this Section, record the following information on concrete compression reports: 1. Test cylinder number and letter. 2. Specific foundations or structures covered by this test. 3. Proportions of concrete mix or mix identification. 4. Maximum size coarse aggregate. ► 5. Specified compressive strength. 6. Tested compressive strength. 7. Slump,air-content(when applicable)and concrete temperature. 8. Concrete plastic unit weight. w 9. Concrete Temperature. 10. Elapsed time from batching at plant to discharge from delivery truck at project. 11. Date and time concrete was placed. 12. Ambient temperature,wind speed,and relative humidity during concrete placement. 13. Name of technician securing samples. 14. Curing conditions for concrete strenght test specimens(field and laboratory). 15. Date strength specimens transported to laboratory. 16. Age of strenght specimens when tested. 17. Type of fracture during test. J. At the start of each day's mixing, report any significant deviations from approved mix design including temperature,moisture and condition of aggregate. .0 01458-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 '" " i F. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing,or similar services. 1. Protect wcrk exposed by or for quality assurance and quality control service activities. 2. Upon completion of inspection , testing, sample-taking, and similar services, restore constructed areas to conform to Contract Documents. G. Costs of retesting and re-inspections will be deducted from the Sum due the Contractor. /l H. Costs of any required redesign or re-engineering required by non-conformance tests and inspections will be deducted from the Sum due the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ASPHALT/CONCRETE PAVING TESTING A. Take core sample;; at the rate of not less than one per every 20,000 square feet of parking lot area, but not less than 3 cores in li€;ht duty areas or 3 cores in heavy duty areas. Testing and Inspection Firm shall consult with Wal-Mart Construction Manager for locations prior to commencement of coring. Selection of core locations shall provide the greater t amount of information for the area tested. #, B. Perform the following test: 1. Perform compression tests in accordance with ASTM C 39. 2. Perform asphalt density tests in accordance with ASTM D 2950. 3. Perform extraction and gradation tests in accordance with ASTM D 4074 and ASTM D 71. 4. Measure thickness of pavement. C. Testing during placement of asphalt concrete mixture: 1. Test engine,-r shall be on-site when placement begins. 2. Perform in-Site density tests utilizing Nuclear Density equipment. 3. Record aml:Tent temperature. 4. Record asphalt mixing temperatures. 3.2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TESTING A. Review the Contractor's proposed materials and mix design for conformance with specifications. B. Perform testing in .ccordance with ACI 301 and testing standards listed in Section 03300. C. Conduct strength tests: 1. Secure composite samples in accordance with ASTM C 172. Sample at regularly spaced intervals from middle portion of the batch. Sampling time shall not exceed 15 minutes. 2. Mold and cure specimens in accordance with ASTM C 31. a. A minimum of four concrete test cylinders shall be taken for every 100 cubic yards or less of each class of concrete placed each day and not less than once for each 5000 square feet of surface area for sl ibs. b. During the initial 24 hours (plus or minus 8 hours) after molding, the temperature immediately adjac.-nt to the specimens shall be maintained in the range of 60 to 80 degrees F. Control loss of moisture from the specimens by shielding from the direct rays of the sun and from radiant heating devic-s. C. Specimens transported prior to 48 hours after molding shall not be demolded, but shall continue initial curing at 60 to 80 degrees F until time for transporting. 01458-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 B. Maintain a copy of Contract Drawings and Specifications with all Addenda and Change Orders. C. Provide qualified personnel, under supervision of the Registered Professional Engineer (P.E.) in the state where Project is located,at site to comply with schedule and submit reports for each test and inspection as defined in Part 3 of this Section. D. Perform specified inspection,sampling,and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. �r E. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. F. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Sitework Engineering Consultant,Architect of Record,and Contractor of �r- observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products. If observed deviations will be probable cause of subsequent rejection of material, notify Contractor, the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Sitework Engineering Consultant, and Architect of Record, sufficiently in advance for determination to continue operations or take corrective measures before continuing. "" G. Perform retesting due to non-conformance with the Contract Documents. Costs will be deducted from the Sum due the Contractor. 4k 1.8 TESTING AND INSPECTION FIRM LIMITS ON AUTHORITY A. Testing and Inspection Firm may not: ow 1. Release,revoke,alter,or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Stop the Work. 1.9 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall pay for: 1. Tests and inspections of materials,products, or equipment to certify compliance with Contract Documents, before incorporation into the Work. 2. Additional tests, samples, inspection, or engineering services the Contractor determines appropriate for performance of Work or for Contractor's convenience. 3. Tests,inspections,or laboratory services necessary with respect to substitutions. 4. Additional tests and inspections when initial tests or inspections indicate Work does not comply with A% Contract Documents. 5. Tests and inspections required or conducted by public authorities as part of permits or inspection fees. 6. Other tests and inspections indicated to be"by Contractor." B. Cooperate with Testing and Inspection Firm personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturer's facilities. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested,to facilitate tests and inspections,storage and curing of test samples. D. Provide Testing and Inspection Firm 24 hour notice prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. E. Notify in writing the Wal-Mart Construction Manager three calendar days prior to expected time for operations requiring inspecting and testing services. 01458-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 '"�" B. Test and Inspection'teports: 1. Site Work Testing and Inspection: After each inspection or test, distribute report within three calendar days of time services were performed as follows: a. Wal-Mart Construction Manager: 1 copy. b. Site Work Engineering Consultant: 1 copy. C. Contr<<ctor: 3 copies. d. Building Official: Quantities as required. 2. Building Testing and Inspection: After each inspection or test,distribute report within three calendar days of time services were performed as follows: a. Wal-Mart Construction Manager: 1 copy. b. Contractor: 3 copies. C. Building Official: Quantities as required. r d. Architect of Record: 2 copies,Attention Construction Management Support Team. 3. Tests and inspections indicating non conformance to the Contract Documents shall be stamped with a red stamp indicating "Non-Conformance" and distributed to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 24 hours of discovery. 1.6 TESTING AND INSPECTION FIRM REPORTS A. Laboratory Report format: Reports shall be made on 8-1/2 by 11 white paper, suitable for photocopying and 4 binding in booklet form. Sheets shall have Testing and Inspection Firm's letterhead(including phone number and address). Larger she ets shall be folded and bound into the booklet. ' B. Laboratory Report Data: Reports shall include the following: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number as it appears on the Contract Documents. 3. Store number. 4. Name of inspector. 5. Name and seal of registered engineer in responsible charge. 6. Date and time of sampling or inspection. ':. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Location of sampling or inspection in the Project. 9. Type of inspection or test. 10. Date of test. 11. Results of tests. 12. Indicate conformance or non-conformance with the Contract Document requirements and provide Testing and Inspection Firm's interpretation of test or inspection results. 13. When test r,sults indicate non conformance with Contract Document requirements, provide Testing Laboratory's recommendations for corrective action. C. Report non-conformance in materials or construction to the Construction Documents to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 24 hours of discovery by both written and verbal means. D. When a non-conformance is noted in reports, comment on probable cause and provide recommendation for corrective action as;in attachment to the 24 hour written notice to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. E. Note trends of decreasing quality in concrete due to changing seasons, conditions of curing, or other causes and bring to attention c the Wal-Mart Construction Manager with recommendations for corrective action before material falls below requirements of specifications for environmental tolerances. Report and log comments on Non-Conformance Correction Log. f, 1.7 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Testing and Inspection Firm's registered professional engineer (P.E.) will be required to attend a Wal-Mart 2 sponsored pre-construction meeting prior to actual start of the Project at no additional cost to the Owner. 01458-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Ak 10. ASTM C 145 - Specification for Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 11. ASTM C 172-Method of Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete. 12. ASTM C 173 -Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method. 13. ASTM C 231 -Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 14. ASTM C 1019-Method of Sampling and Testing Grout. 15. ASTM C 1077 - Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation. 16. ASTM C 1093 -Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry. w,r 17. ASTM D 71 -Test Method for Relative Density of Solid Pitch and Asphalt(Displacement Method). 18. ASTM D 2950-Test Method for Density of Bituminous Concrete in Place by Nuclear Method. 19. ASTM D 3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. 20. ASTM D 4074 - Test Method for Bitumen and Aggregate Content of Bitumen-Aggregate Mixtures from Built-Up Roofing Samples. 21. ASTM D 4561 - Quality Control Systems for an Inspection and Testing Agency for Bituminous Paving Materials. 22. ASTM E 329 - Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 23. ASTM E 543 -Determining the Qualification of Nondestructive Testing Agencies. 24. ASTM E 548 - Preparation of Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing Laboratories and Inspection Bodies. 25. ASTM E 699 -Criteria for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating Building Components in Accordance with Test Methods Promulgated by ASTM Committee E 6. C. American Welding Society(AWS): 1. AWS D1.1 -Structural Welding Code. " 2. AWS QC -Standard and Guide for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ; A. Testing agency will comply with requirements of ASTM C 1077,ASTM C 1093,ASTM D 3740,ASTM D 4561, ASTM E 329 ASTM E 543,ASTM E 548,and ASTM E 699. r�wr B. Laboratory: 1. Authorized to operate in state in which Project is located. 2. Conform to 'Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualification," published by American Council of Independent Laboratories. C. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards(NBS)Standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A* A. Laboratory Quality Assurance: Submit the following. 1. Testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time Registered Engineer and responsible officer. 0^ 2. Copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by Materials Reference Laboratory of National Bureau of Standards during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection. 3. List of each individual test and inspection to be performed. A* 4. Submit to: a. Wal-Mart Construction Manager. b. Site Work Engineering Consultant. 1s, C. Contractor. d. Building Official(when required by the local authority having jurisdiction). e. Architect of Record,Attention: Construction Management Support Team. 01458-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 two Ok UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 01458-TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrativc and procedural requirements for testing and inspection services. B. Related Documents and Sections: 1. A complete set of site specific Contract Documents. w 2. Document 00700-General Conditions: Inspections,testing,and approvals required by public authorities. 3. Document 00100-Supplementary Conditions: Contract Closeout,Project Record Documents. 4. Section 0160C -Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished work and Work of other Contract ors. 5. Section 01411 -Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing: Wal-Mart procurement of test and balance for heating, ventilating,and air conditioning systems. 6. Provide Testing and Inspection Work identified in Divisions 2 through 16 except Work specifically assigned to ot:ier contractors. 1.2 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Owner Responsibilities: Employment and payment for services of an independent Testing Laboratory to perform specified testing and inspecting will be by the Owner under separate contract. B. Contractor(Building)Responsibilities: 1. Employment of testing laboratory in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform work in accordance w ith requirements of Contract Documents 2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality control services as specified or required by the Owner or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. 3. The Contractor shall not employ the entity engaged by the Owner,unless otherwise agreed in writing with the Owner. C. Testing Lab Respon;>ibilities: Testing laboratory services include inspections, tests and related actions including reports,performed b y testing agency. They do not include Contract enforcement activities performed by the Wal- Mart Construction 1V:anager or authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Provide the Architect of Record a copy of the contractual provisions defining the testing laboratory's scope of services. 1.3 REFERENCES ok A. American Concrete Institute(ACI): 1. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. B. American Society far Testing and Materials(ASTM): 1. ASTM A 32` -Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints. 2. ASTM A 490-Specification for Heat-Treated,Steel Structural Bolts, 150 ksi Tensile Strength. 3. ASTM C 31 -Test Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 4. ASTM C 39 -Test Method for Comprehensive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 5. ASTM C 90 -Specification for Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units. 6. ASTM C IOSI-Standard Test Method For Compressive Strength Of Hydraulic Cement Mortar. 7. ASTM C 138-Test Method for Unit Weight,Yield,and Air Content(Gravemetric)of Concrete. 8. ASTM C 140-Test Method of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 9. ASTM C 14_� -Test Method for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete. 01458-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 P: w. A* BLANK PAGE w owl .w 01411-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "" C. Report Procedures: 1. If any air system or outlet is not within 10 percent of design capacity at design rpm, determine the reason. Check duct work and plenums for leaks; coils, filter, for excessive pressure drop, etc.; and list on HVAC Deficiency Report. 2. Using data oblained during test,determine if cooling side of roof top unit is performing in accordance with published data. One representative unit's record data for each size RTU shall be plotted on a psychometric chart for comparison to manufacturer's published literature. These psychometric charts shall be part of the final test report. Any deficiencies shall be listed on the HVAC Deficiency Report. 3. Before leaving;job site, provide Contractor's representative a neat, legible deficiency list of all remaining HVAC system.deficiencies for correction. The content of this HVAC Deficiency Report shall be provided to Wal-Mart by phone before leaving job site. 4. Submit three bound copies of final testing and balancing report. Record data on applicable NEBB or AABC certified reporting forms. Report shall include start-up data provided by Contractor; summary sheet of deficiencie; with status (corrected or not corrected at time of report) and recommendations. Submit report within 14 days after final test and balance. D. Guarantee test and b,.lance for period of ninety days from date of final acceptance of the Test and Balance Report. During this period,T7BA shall correct deficiencies at no cost to Wal-Mart. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. op t PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 00 > 01411-3 r Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..M 2. One day prior to starting test and balance procedure, verify that new filters have been installed and are ow equal in quality to factory installed filters. Filters: Class 1, 30 percent efficiency, radial pleat design with 15 pleats per linear foot. 3. Verify that duct work is clean and sealed tight against leaks. 4. Verify that controls,dampers,and actuators are installed,adjusted,and calibrated. *A% 5. To maintain schedules and prevent return trips, have experienced personnel available to correct HVAC system deficiencies while ITBA is scheduled on site. 6. Secure control dampers after test and balance as directed by ITBA. aw C. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Department when HVAC systems are ready for test and balance. If Contractor fails to notify Wal-Mart Construction Department of status, ITBA will be scheduled into store during week following Contract Substantial Completion Date. "�` 1.6 INDEPENDENT TEST AND BALANCE AGENCY(ITBA)RESPONSIBILITIES Alb A. Test, adjust, and balanced specified equipment in accordance with governing NEBB or AABC Procedural Stan- dards. •M► B. Procedures: 1. Make preliminary system check on HVAC, control and Energy Management systems and equipment to be tested to determine that equipment, duct work, etc. is installed and will operate. Deficiencies shall be immediately reported to Contractor's job site superintendent and the Wal-Mart General Offices. 44 2. Inspect and test Novar Controls electronic thermostat modules using ETM Interface Analyzer for the following control functions: a. Fan control. w b. Stage 1 cooling control. C. Stage 1 heating control. d. Stage 2 cooling control. e. Stage 2 heating control. f. Economizer control g. Unit shut down upon fan operation loss, and alarm received at offices. (Novar, Wal-Mart Maint. Dept.,Wal-Mart EMS). Verify with Wal-Mart Support Service. Contact:Wal-Mart Support Service Novai 3. Record readings and testing data for inclusion into final report. 4. Perform the following testing and balancing. Record readings for inclusion into final report: a. Test and adjust fan speeds to deliver design CFM and record rpm and full load amperes at design CFM. Record voltage at each unit. r b. Test and adjust system for design CFM outside air. C. Test and record suction and discharge external static pressures at respective plenums. Seal access holes with rubber or metal snap-in plugs. The use of duct tape to seal access holes will not be permitted. d. Test and record entering air temperatures. (Dry Bulb heating and cooling;Wet Bulb cooling.) e. Test and record leaving air temperature. (Dry Bulb heating and cooling;Wet Bulb cooling.) f. Test and record outside air Dry Bulb and Wet Bulb temperatures. .w g. Test and adjust the volume dampers in the main duct runs to each diffuser, grille, and register to provide±10%of design CFM requirements. h. Identify each diffuser,grille,and register to location and area. i. Record Unit Data and Motor Data for each air system tested per appropriate NEBB or AABC test report. 5. Test and record voltage and amperage measurements and calculate KW rating per appropriate NEBB or AABC procedure for each electric heater or electric coil heating section. 6. Verify and record proper operation of all stages of gas heating sections or gas radiant heaters. 7. Verify and record proper operation of ceiling fans. 01411-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 00 UniSpec II 123199 SECTION 01411 -MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT TESTING,ADJUSTING,AND BALANCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for test and balance services for mechanical equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01458 - Testing Laboratory Services: Owner procurement of testing laboratory services for site f and building testing and inspection. 2. Section 1?810-Energy Monitoring and Control: Energy management system(EMS). 3. Section 1 700-Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning Equipment: HVAC system equipment. 4. Section If 800-Air Distribution: HVAC system ductwork and diffusers. 1.2 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Employment and payment for services of an Independent Test and Balance Agency (ITBA) to perform specified testing and balancing of environmental systems will be by Wal-Mart under separate contract. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wal-Mart Responsibilities: Wal-Mart will obtain the services of an Independent Test And Balance Agency (ITBA) certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or Associated Air Balance Council 00 (AABC). B. Independent Test And Balance Agency (ITBA) Responsibilities: Testing and balancing shall be supervised by Registered Profess Tonal Engineer. Personnel involved in execution of the work for ITBA shall be technicians ex- perienced and trained specifically in testing and balancing of mechanical systems. Instruments used by ITBA shall be recently and accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. Verification of calibration shall be submitted in final :est report if so requested by Wal-Mart. 1.4 WAL-MART RESPONSIBILITIES A. Upon completion of system Test and Balance, a copy of ITBA report will be forwarded to the Contractor. If HVAC system clef ciencies exist,a letter listing those deficiencies will also be forwarded to the Contractor for cor- rection. If the Contractor fails to respond and correct these deficiencies within seven days upon receipt of letter, the Owner will authorize repairs as judged necessary and take necessary contractual action to recover adequate compensation for repair expenses. B. As a result of HVYLC system performance or operational deficiencies, a return trip by ITBA to complete Test and Balance will be authorized when deemed necessary by Wal-Mart Construction Department. This return trip will be costed at$55.00 per hour plus mileage and expenses. Wal-Mart shall be reimbursed for ITBA expenses. 1.5 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide balancing dampers as specified and shown on the Drawings for proper balancing of systems. B. Prepare system for :est and balance as follows: 1. Install, start up, check out, and adjust HVAC systems per Drawings and Specifications and have fully operational with deficiencies corrected on or before Wal-Mart's Substantial Completion Date. 01411-1 f* Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 rrt �w BLANK PAGE 4 G.' rwr rw ft 01330-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .,, 8. Incorrect Valves: Do not propose OS&Y valves when PIV's are indicated in the Construction Documents. 9. Incorrect Sprink lers: Unapproved sprinklers being proposed as substitutions. Submit 10. Substitute products which are proposed,but not indicated in the Construction Documents,will be cause for rejection. Back charge, described above, will be imposed until submittals are approved by Designated Reviewer(s). D. Send submittals to Public Authorities and Designated Reviewer(s)within 15 working days after award of contract. Expect 30 day turn-around on submittals sent to Designated Reviewer(s). 1. Submittals to Public Authorities: Submit two copies of complete submittals to Public Authorities. Submit additional copies if required. 2. Submittals to Designated Reviewer(s): Submit five copies of shop drawings (folded, not rolled), one copy I of hydraulic CE.lculations, one copy of product data sheets, and one copy of fire pump motor control electrical diagr<<ms. 3. Designated Reviewer(s): 0 AIE Sue Warmann Alternatives in Engineering 1314 Hwy DD Defiance,MO 63341 (314)398-528F. 4. Submittals to Wal-Mart: After receiving approval from the Public Authorities and all Designated Reviewers,forward one(Designated Reviewer(s)stamped and approved)copy of the submittal to: Conversion Te,hnology Incorporated 4923 South Ycrktown Tulsa,OK 74]05 P, (918)712-7226. END OF SECTION 0 v s A 01330-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.16 SECTION 07620 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM low A. Letter of Certification: Submit certification from sheet metal supplier verifying quality of galvanized steel sheet materials. .. B. Submit Letter of Certification within 20 working days of Contract date. 3.17 SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE .R A. Hardware Schedule: Submit final hardware schedule organized by "like sets", to indicate specifically which product to be furnished for each item required on each door. B. Submit Hardware Schedule within 30 working days of Contract date. 3.18 SECTION 09981 - ELASTOMERIC COATINGS FOR MASONRY A. Letter of Certification. B. Submit Letter of Certification within 30 working days of Contract date. 3.19 SECTION 11160 - LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT A. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit Letter of Conformance, attached to technical section, in accordance with Document 00800.. 3.20 SECTION 13900 - FIRE SUPPRESSION A. Submit the following: 1. For proper and timely approval of submittals, it is imperative that submittals be complete, accurate and in full compliance with Construction Documents. 2. No extension of time will be allowed due to submittal approval delays due to rejected submittals. If submittal is rejected, revise and submit until approved. General Contractor shall respond to ALL shop drawing review comments within 15 days of receipt. B. Submittal Rejection: If submittal is rejected by Designated Reviewer(s) for any reason, Wal-Mart Stores, Inc., will back-charge the Contractor$200.00 (Two Hundred Dollars)via Change Order, to cover the processing costs of each subsequent review,until submittal is approved. C. Submittal shall include,but is not limited to, fire protection system design,product data, shop drawings,hydraulic calculations, and additional data as may be required byPublic Authorities. Designated Reviewer(s) will reject submittals which do not comply with Construction Documents. Submittal rejections include, but are not limited to,the following reasons: 1. Hydraulics: Input errors, incorrect remote areas, shop drawings do not match calculations,etc. 2. Design Issues: Incorrect densities, design areas, equipment sprinkler spacing, hose station missing, incomplete system design,etc. 3. Backflow Preventors: Devices incorrectly located on the suction side of pumps. Improper friction loss used in calculations. Device shown in the vertical position. 4. Fire Pump Details: Make, model number unknown. Piping and valve arrangement not defined, product data not submitted. Electrical details missing. 5. Fire Pump Electrical: Safety shut-off not shown in power feed to fire pump controller. 6. Incorrect Pipe: Unapproved pipe products being proposed. Submit pipe data as indicated in the Construction Documents. 7. Incomplete Calculations: Submit calculations for all areas indicated in the Construction Documents and shown on shop drawings. 4W 01330-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 2. Include erectio:►drawings,elevations,and details where applicable. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 4. Prepare shop drawings under the supervision of a licensed structural Professional Engineer. B. Submit Shop Drawings within 10 working days of Contract date. 3.11 SECTION 06100 - BOUGH CARPENTRY A. Letter of Certification; 1. Preservatives ',reatment: For type specified, include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used,r,et amount of preservative retained and conformance with AWPA Standards C9 and C 15. 2. For water-borne preservatives, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to a maximum of 15%for plywood prior to shipment to project site. 3. Fire Retardant Treatment(when specified): a. For typ,-specified,include certification by treating plant stating chemicals and process used,net amount of retardant retained and conformance with AWPA Standards C-20 and C-27. b. Include statement that moisture content of treated materials was 15 percent or less. B. Submit Letter of Cert fication within 15 working days of Contract date. 3.12 SECTION 07240 - EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM A. Letter of Certification. Submit Letter of Certification within 20 working days of Contract date. B. Closeout Submittals: 1. Contractor Installation Declaration Form: Include completed Exhibit A and Exhibit B forms signed by EIFS Contractor and Sealant Installer,under provisions of Document 00800. 3.13 SECTION 07411 - ]METAL ROOF PANELS A. Shop Drawings: Metal Roof Panel shop drawings will be prepared as part of the Metal Decking shop drawings specified in Section 05300. B. Submit Contractor's final Field Use Drawing Review Form,completed. Form is located at end of Section 07411. 3.14 SECTION 07511- BUILT-UP ASPHALT ROOFING A. Letters of Certificat on: Submit copy of certification from roofing system manufacturer, verifying qualifications of roofer. << 1. Submit Letter of Certification within 20 working days of Contract date. B. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit Letter of Conformance, attached to technical Section, under provisions of Document 00800. 3.15 SECTION 07550 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING fo A. Letters of Certification: Submit copy of certification from roofing system manufacturer, verifying qualifications of roofer. 1. Submit Letter of Certification within 20 working days of Contract date. B. Contract Closeout Submittals: Submit Letter of Conformance, attached to technical Section, under provisions of Document 00800. t 01330-7 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Substitutions: Submit substitutions of sections or modifications of details, or both, and reasons for proposal, with shop drawings. Clearly identify substitutions as such. Accepted substitutions, modifications, and necessary changes in related portions of Work shall be coordinated by fabricator and shall be accomplished at no additional cost to Wal-Mart. ws D. Submit Shop Drawings and Quality Control Submittals within 10 working days of Contract date. 3.8 SECTION 05210 - STEEL JOISTS ,OR A. Shop Drawings: 1. Owner's steel joist supplier will prepare shop drawings and forward to Structural Engineer of Record. a. Transmit submittals reviewed by Structural Engineer of Record to: * Wallace Engineering 201 W.5th, Suite 200 Tulsa,OK 74103 , Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER 2. Shop Drawings will indicate: a. Standard designations,configuration,sizes,spacing,and locations of joists and joist girders. b. Joist and joist girder coding. C. Bridging,connections,attachments,and cambers. 3. Shop drawings will be prepared under the direction of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which the Project is located. B. Submit Contractor's Final Field Use Drawing Review Form,completed. Form is included in Section 05210. C. Submit Shop Drawings and Contractor's Final Field Use Drawing Review Form within 3 working days of Contract date. 3.9 SECTION 05300 - METAL DECKING A. Shop Drawings: 1. Owner's steel deck supplier will prepare shop drawings and forward to Structural Engineer of Record. a. Transmit submittals reviewed by Structural Engineer of Record to: Wallace Engineering 201 W.5th, Suite 200 Tulsa,OK 74103 so Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER 2. Shop Drawings will indicate: a. Decking plan, deck profile dimensions, supports, projections, openings and reinforcements, fastening method and installation accessories. b. Locations,types,and sequence of connections. C. Welds by standard welding symbols adopted by AWS. 3. Shop drawings will be prepared under the direction of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in State ► in which the Project is located. B. Submit Contractor's Final Field Use Drawing Review Form,completed. Form is located at end of Section 05300. w. C. Submit Shop Drawings and Contractor's Final Filed Use Drawing Review Form within 3 working days of Contract date. 3.10 SECTION 05500 - METAL FABRICATIONS A. Shop Drawings: Submit directly to Architect. 04 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 40 01330-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10, 2000 00 3.5 SECTION 04060 - MASONRY MORTAR A. Product Data. 1. Design mix. 2. Proportion method used. 3. Required environmental conditions. 4. Assurance that mix is free of admixtures. B. Test results of trial design mix. C. Submit Product Data within 5 working days of Contract date. - CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS 3.6 SECTION 04220 A. Shop Drawings: Do not use reproductions of Contract Documents as shop drawings. Prepare shop drawings in accordance with ACI:S 15. 1. Reinforcement a. Include masonry notes on shop drawings that relate to proper placing of reinforcing and submit shop drawings for use in the field. b. Reinfor-.ing shown shall include but not limited to vertical and horizontal wall reinforcement, dowels,bond beam reinforcement,embedded steel items and anchor bolts. 2. Placement Drawings: a. Prepare elevations including sides,front and rear of building showing all masonry walls full height and len;;th showing reinforcing size,quantity, spacing,location,length and grade of steel. b. Shop drawings shall include top of bearing plate elevations,and elevations above finish floor to the centerlines of embedded plate,anchor bolts,and all control joint locations. B. Submit Shop Drawings within 5 working days of Contract date. 3.7 SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, and locations of structural members, connections, attachments, and fasteners. 2. Include supplementary parts and members necessary to complete structural steel work, regardless of whether parts are definitely shown or specified, and furnish bolts, gussets, plates, and related items as required for p:-oper assembly of items. 3. Include miscellaneous deck support angles as required for proper support of metal deck around columns, gussets,openings,and obstructions. 4. Indicate weldod connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 5. Provide setting drawings,templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed by other trades. 6. Templates arc to be furnished by fabricator with instructions for setting of anchor bolts and bearing plates. 7. Prepare shop drawings under seal of a Professional Structural Engineer registered in the State in which Project is located. 8. Omission from shop drawings of materials required by Contract Documents does not relieve Contractor of responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials even though shop drawings may have been -• returned and -eviewed. B. Quality Control Sub nittals: 1. Submit design calculations for structural steel connections not detailed on Contract Documents or proposed differently than as shown on Contract Documents, signed and sealed by Professional Structural Engineer registered in State in which Project is located. 01330-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 r PART 3 EXECUTION Oft 3.1 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS BY SECTION A. Submittals under this Section are required for,but not limited to,the following items: am 3.2 DIVISION 2.1 - SITEWORK PER ENGINEERING CONSULTANT DESIGN A. Transmit submittals in accordance with requirements of each section. w. B. Transmit sitework submittals directly to Owner's Civil Engineering Consultant of Record listed on first page of Division 2.1 "Wal-Mart Sitework Specifications." a 3.3 SECTION 03300 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Product Data: List products selected for the following. 1. Curing compound. 2. Concrete Admixtures. w B. Shop Drawings: 1. Reinforcement: a. Submit concrete notes that concern proper placing of reinforcing and submit with shop drawings for field use. Do not use reproductions of Contract Drawings as shop drawings. b. Submit reinforcement placement drawings with bar lists. Include elevations of walls and grade beams and plans of footings and slabs. Include sections, details, and schedules. Comply with Part B, Chapter 3 of ACI 315 for preparation of shop drawings. Include number, grade, size, length, mark,location,splice lengths,and bending diagrams for all reinforcing steel and related products. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Mix Design: Submit three copies of each proposed mix design in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". Submit separate mix design for concrete to be placed by pumping, in addition to the mix design for concrete to be placed directly from the truck chute. low 2. Include the following information in concrete mix design: a. Proportions of cement,fine and coarse aggregate,and water. b. Water-cement ratio,28-day compressive design strength,slump,and air content. C. Type of cement and aggregate. d. Aggregate gradation. e. Type and dosage of admixtures. f. Special requirements for pumping. g. Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. h. Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product specified. 3. Materials and methods for curing concrete. D. Samples: Materials as requested by the Engineer, incuding names,cources,and descriptions. E. Submit Product Data, Shop Drawings,and Quality Control Submittals within 5 working days of Contract date. 3.4 SECTION 03360-CONCRETE FINISHES Aft A. Letter of Certification. B. Submit Letter of Certification within 30 working days of Contract date. Am 01330-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Arw P G. Number of Copies Req tired: One reproducible transparency and one blueline or blackline reproduction. Submit additional copies to local jurisdiction for approval if required. Comply with requirements of local jurisdiction with regard to signing and sealing of submittals by Registered Professional licensed in the State in which project is located. 1. One copy only Nvill be returned to the Contractor. 2. Bar Joists and .'oist Girders: Owner's joist supplier will submit one reproducible transparency and two blueline or blackline reproductions and two bills of materials directly to Structural Engineer of Record. 3. Steel Roof Deck: Owner's metal deck supplier will submit one reproducible transparency and two blueline Ix or blackline rep.-oductions and two bills of materials directly to Structural Engineer of Record. 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. Manufacturer's standard schematic drawings and diagrams: 1. Clearly mark to identify pertinent products. 2. Show performance characteristics and capacities. 3. Show dimensions and clearances required. 4. Show wiring of piping diagrams and controls. 5. Modify drawings and diagrams to delete information not applicable to this work. 6. Supplement standard drawings and diagrams to provide complete information applicable to this work. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement product data with material prepared for,he Work to satisfy submittal requirements for which product data does not exist. Note that the material is developed specifically for this Contract. C. Submit product data or each section as a complete, bound volume. Include table of contents listing page and catalog item numbers for product data. D. Indicate,by prominer t contrasting color notation, each product which is being submitted; indicate the section and paragraph numbers to which it pertains. E. Where printed product data include information on several products, some of which are not required,mark copies to indicate informatian applicable to Work and clearly cross out other information not applicable to Work. Include the following information: 1. Manufactureei,printed recommendations or instructions. 2. Compliance w ith referenced standards. 3. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 4. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. 5. Notation of coordination requirements. F. Product Data For Inf)rmation: 1. Submitted for the Architect's knowledge or for the Owner. G. Number of Copies Required: Four. 1.6 LETTERS OF CER"IFICATION A. Certify manufacture Is or installer's qualifications, conformance with tests or specified criteria, or other factors as required in individual specification sections. 00, B. Submit supporting n;ference data,affidavits,and certifications as required. C. Number of Copies Required: Two. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. 01330-3 March 10,2000 4* Wal-Mart Store#2901 North',impton,Massachusetts 4. Identify variations from Contract Documents and limitations of product and system which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 5. Provide space for Contractor,Architect,and Architect's Consultant review stamps. 6. Allow 10 working days for review. 7. Revise and resubmit submittals when required; identify changes made since previous submittal. am 8. Forward copies of reviewed submittals to Contractor. D. Contractor's Responsibilities-Wal-Mart and Owner Furnished Products: 1. Review submittals to verify products required,field dimensions,and adjacent construction. «.r 2. Coordinate information on submittals with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 3. Forward executed copy of Submittal Review Form to supplier within 5 days after receipt of submittal,with copies to Architect and Wal-Mart's Construction Manager. wm 4. Schedule delivery date for products with supplier. E. Architect's Responsibilities: Review submittals and take appropriate action as follows. .M 1. Shop Drawings and Product Data: Architect will mark submittals to indicate appropriate action. 2. Return Architect reviewed Submittals to Contractor,by US Mail only. 3. Submittals for Information: Architect will not return submittals for information. F. Non-Required Submittal Items: Submittals transmitted to Architect or Architect's Consultants that are not indicated or requested to be submitted will not be reviewed. Architect will dispose of non-required submittal items. o. 1.3 RECORD LETTERS OF CONFORMANCE A. Submit Record Letters of Conformance as a Closeout Submittal instead of Shop Drawings, or Product Data. See Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions. By submitting Record Letter of Conformance, the Contractor declares that the Product identified by manufacturer's name and model number is(one of)the product(s) specified is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in w.r operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. 1. Submit completed Record Letter of Conformance for each product selected as indicated within each Section. 2. Fill-in required information on form and sin in ink b q g y person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. 3. No modifications to form permitted. 4. Record Letters of Conformance are located at the end of each Section. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS/FINAL FIELD USE DRAWINGS A. Submit drawings with graphic information at accurate scale. Show dimensions and note which dimensions are based on field measurement. Identify materials and products in Work shown. Indicate compliance with specified standards and special coordination requirements. Do not use reproductions of Contract Drawings as shop drawings. .�. B. Include on each drawing the drawing title, number, date, and revision numbers and dates, in addition to other required identifying information. C. Identify details by reference to sheet,detail,schedule or room names shown on Drawings. D. Size: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches nor more than 30 by 42 inches. E. For drawings submitted on sheets larger than 8-1/2 x 11 inches, submit reproducible transparency and blueline or blackline reproduction. F. For drawings submitted on sheets 8-1/2 x 11 inches, conform to requirements for product data and submit as a bound volume for submittal required. Art 01330-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10, 2000 An UniSpec 11 123199 SECTION 01330-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PARTI GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Record Letters(if Conforinance. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Product data. 4. Letters of Certification. 5. Required submittals by section. B. Related Sections: 1. Document 008CO-Supplementary Conditions: Contract closeout submittals. 2. Section 01600 - Product Requirements: General procedures related to Owner furnished products. Requirements for product selection and product options. 3. Section 01458- Testing Laboratory Services: Submittals required for tests and inspections. 4. Wal-Mart Sitework Specifications Division 2.1: Submittals required. 1.2 PROCEDURES A. Comply with submittal requirements defined within each Section. Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submit to Architect unless indicated otherwise. 1. Transmit subm�ttals reviewed by Architect to: Perry L.Butchor&Associates,Architects Attn: SUBMITTAL REVIEWER 301 West Chestnut P.O. Box 2076 Rogers,Arkamas 72756 B. Contractor's Respionsi Dilities-Contractor Provided Products: 1. Submit required submittals as scheduled. eet and detail numbers, and 2. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, pertinent Drawing sh sp cification si-ction number,as appropriate. 1 Apply Contractor's Submittal Review stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of rmation, is in products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction, and coordination of info accordance wih the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. 4. Schedule submittals to expedite the Work; coordinate submission of related items into single submittal. 5. Submit all submittal items required within an individual specification section in a single submittal. 6. Identify variations from Contract Documents and limitations of product and system which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. 7. Provide space for Contractor,Architect,and Architect's Consultant review stamps. 8. Allow 10 wor cing days for review. 9. Revise and re,,;ubmit submittals when required; identify changes made since previous submittal. 10. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties and to Record Documents file. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. C. Supplier's Responsibilities-Wal-Mart and Owner Furnished Products: eet and detail numbers, and 1 Identify Projcct, Contractor, subcontractor or supplier, pertinent Drawing sh specification!;ection number,as appropriate. 2. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project. section in a single submittal. 3. Submit all submittals required within an individual specification 01330-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.4 SCHEDULE UPDATES A. The Contractor shall provide to the Wal-Mart Construction Manager regular updated reports on the Construction Schedule as determined by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. The Contractor shall maintain current weekly updated detailed construction schedule in the site construction field office. 1. Construction Schedule Updating: Progress information to be included in schedule updates includes actual start and finish dates, percentage complete, remaining duration or projected finish dates for all activities in progress during reporting period. Schedule updates may also include approved added activity descriptions. Updates to the schedule shall not change any milestone dates or the contract completion date. B. Periodically,at times to be determined by Wal-Mart,the Wal-Mart Construction Manager will visit the job site for a meeting with the Contractor's Project Manager and Superintendent. This meeting is to review progress to date, am and to project upcoming work. 1.5 RECOVERY PLAN .. A. Should the updated approved Construction Schedule show the Contractor to be behind schedule, the Contractor shall immediately devise a plan for recovery of lost time within one week and submit it to the Wal-Mart Construc- tion Manager for approval. Once approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager, the Contractor shall immedi- ately put recovery plan into action. B. During period covered by recovery plan,the Contractor's progress will continue to be monitored against approved Construction Progress Chart. If the Contractor does not recover from delay as detailed in his recovery plan, Wal- Mart may exercise its option as described above. C. The Contractor shall bear all costs and expenses related to recovery from the Contractor's delays, including costs, 4 9 expenses,and lost sales incurred by Wal-Mart. PART2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION +•. Not Used. END OF SECTION .w rw AM am .MM 01320-2 k Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 00 UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 01320-CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Progress Schedules and Reports 1.2 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS CHART A. Progress of the Project will be monitored using bar charts. Requirements are included to ensure adequate planning and execution of the Work and to assist the Wal-Mart Construction Manager in evaluating progress of the Work economically and chronologically. B. The Contractor shall be familiar, in detail, with the Construction Progress Bar Chart example, which is contained I4 in the Invitation to Bid. Use the Construction Progress Bar Chart example for the basic time table for delivering and executing the Woi k. By submitting his bid,the Contractor acknowledges that the Construction milestones are feasible,reasonable,and are a workable schedule for the Work. C. The completion miles:ones noted on Schedule in Section 01600 indicate normal delivery times for Wal-Mart Fur- nished Items. Coordinate delivery of these items with progress of the Work. D. Prior to construction, the Contractor may request reasonable changes to the Construction Progress Bar Chart,pro- vided milestones contained on Schedule in Section 01600 and the contract completion date are not changed._The Wal-Mart Construction Manager will review requested changes. Once schedule is agreed to by Wal-Mart, it shall become the "Approved Construction Progress Chart" by which the Contractor shall plan, organize, direct, coordi- nate,and execute the'Mork,and the basis of evaluating progress of the Work. E. If, in the opinion of tl.e Wal-Mart Construction Manager,any of the milestone dates shown on schedule in Section !!! 01600 are not completed by the Contractor on or before the stated time period and after 48 hours written notice to the Contractor, Wal-Mart may proceed to carry out the work in accordance with Paragraph 2.4 of the General Conditions except that both 7 day notices do not apply in this particular situation. F. The Contractor shall perform work directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager to meet the Wal-Mart contract completion date and shall maintain the original management and supervision team to continue their office and job site duties on a full-t�me basis through Grand Opening and/or any other time the Contractor has any work being performed on the pro ect regardless of the date or condition of project completion. 1.3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Using the Construction Progress Bar Chart example as the model; the Contractor shall develop a detailed Con- struction Schedule with activity time duration in calendar days further describing his method for performing the Work. This schedule shall be similar in appearance to the example Construction Progress Bar Chart with enough detail to clearly represent work flow and areas to be completed. The Contractor shall review the Contractor's schedule with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager within 3 weeks from award of Contract, or at the Pre Construction Meeting, whichever is first. Failure of the Contractor to have a construction schedule approved by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager will be considered cause to withhold progress payments. 1. The Construction Progress Bar Chart example is not to be construed as an indication by the Owner as to means,methcds,or techniques of construction to be employed by the Contractor. 2. Critical path,activities shall be indicated on the Contractor's detailed construction schedule. 01320-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northa npton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 04 .,r .r •w BLANK PAGE �. �w +K+ Mw ..M A" Aft 01311-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �1 7. Corrective measures to regain quality of materials and workmanship; status of products, assemblies, or systems requiring replacement. 8. Status of chang,;orders. 9. Corrective mea:>ures to regain projected schedules. 10. Planned progress for period prior to next scheduled Progress Meeting. 11. Effect of propo;>ed project changes(if any)on construction schedule and coordination. 12. Temporary facilities and services. 13. Jobsite housekeeping and cleanliness. D. Documentation: Record minutes of conference and distribute copies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager, partici- pants, and those affected by decisions made, 2 working days after conference date. Recording, producing, and distributing by Contractor. E. Construction Schedule Update: Revise construction schedule after each progress meeting where schedule revi- sions have been made or recognized. Issue updated schedule concurrently with report of meeting. PART 2-PRODUCTS 00 Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 1�► 01311-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 21. Quality of workmanship required. 22. Wal-Mart furnished testing and inspection services. "" 23. Contractor's quality control procedures and requirements, inspection,testing,and documentation. D. Documentation: Record minutes of conference and distribute copies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager, partici- pants, and those affected by decisions made, 2 working days after conference date. Recording, producing, and distributing by Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION CONFERENCES A. When required in individual specification Section,conduct a Preinstallation Conference at project site prior to start of Work of Section or related sections. B. Notify Wal-Mart Construction Manager 14 working days in advance of meeting date. C. Attendance Required: Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Owner's Representative, Contractor Project Coordination .. Administrator, Contractor Quality Control Representative, Contractor Project Field Superintendent, any subcon- tractor,supplier,or installer directly affecting,or affected by,Work of specific Section. A* D. Minimum Agenda: Review conditions of installation, progress of other construction activities, and preparations for Work of Section or related Sections,including requirements for: 1. Contract documents. 2. Related change orders. ek 3. Equipment and material deliveries. 4. Shop drawings and product data. 5. Possible conflicts and compatibility problems. •�, 6. Weather limitations. 7. Time schedules. 8. Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 9. Compatibility of materials. 10. Acceptability of substrates. 11. Temporary facilities required. 12. Space and access limitations. .� 13. Governing codes and regulations. 14. Inspection and testing requirements. 15. Required performance results. E. Documentation: Record minutes of conference and distribute copies to Wal-Mart Construction Manager,partici- pants, and those affected by decisions made, 2 working days after conference date. Recording, producing, and distributing by Contractor. .. 1.6 PROGRESS AND QUALITY CONTROL MEETINGS A. Schedule and conduct progress meetings throughout the progress of the Work at intervals determined by the Wal- Mart Construction Manager. B. Attendance Required: Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Owner's Representative, Contractor Project Coordination Administrator,Contractor Quality Control Representative,and Contractor Project Field Superintendent. C. Minimum Agenda: Review items of significance that may affect project progress,including the following: ..� 1. Minutes of previous meetings. 2. Work progress in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Status of required submittals. 4. Payment request status. Documentation of information for payment requests. 5. Field observations,Requests for Information,discussions of problems,and agreement on solutions. 6. Quality of materials and workmanship. .4a 01311-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ,.� UniSpec 11 092499 SECTION 0 1311 -PROJECT Mf ETINGS PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I. Preconstruction conference. 2. Preinstallation conferences. 3. Progress and quality control meetings. 1.2 PROJECT MEETING 3 A. Conduct project meetings, as a part of the overall project coordination effort, to coordinate construction activities and Work. 1.3 ATTENDEES'AUTHORITY A. Persons designated b) Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers to attend project meetings: Possess authority to commit entities they ri.,present to items agreed upon in project meetings. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. Schedule a preconstn,ction conference at project site or other designated location after execution of the Contract and prior start of WorK. "k B. Attendance: Wal-Mart Construction Manager, Owner's Representative,Contractor Project Coordination Adminis- trator, Contractor Quality Control Representative, Contractor Project Field Superintendent, roofing, mechanical, plumbing,fire protection,and electrical subcontractor field supervisory personnel. C. Minimum Agenda: I Organizationai arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of subcontractors, material suppliers and'Nal-Mart Construction Manager. fit 2. Contractor certificates of insurance. 3. Status of Contractor-required submittals;list of subcontractors,schedule of values,etc.. 4. Approved Progress Schedule. Work hours. Work outside of normal working hours. 5. Specific build[ng regulations for Work within and adjacent to existing building. 6. Critical work 3equencing. processing field decisions; Request for Information procedures. 7. Procedures fo. 8. Change order process and procedures for processing change orders. 9. Procedures for processing applications for payment. Contract closeout procedures. 10. Wal-Mart funiished equipment and materials process,procedures,and coordination. 11. Wal-Mart insialled equipment and materials process,procedures,and coordination. 12. Wal-Mart separate vendor process,procedures,and coordination. 13. Submittal process,procedures,and coordination. 14. Temporary facilities and controls by Owner. 15. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 16. Procedures Rr preparation and maintenance of Project Record Documents. 17. Contractor of fice,work,storage,and parking areas. 18. Work area se-urity requirements. 19. Safety procedures,first aid,and occupational safety and health requirements. 20. Housekeepin g,cleanliness,noise and dust control of work areas, 01311-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 r, F. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion and •�e for portions of Work designated for Owners partial occupancy after possession. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents,to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. .� PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used. N PART 3 -EXECUTION so Not Used. END OF SECTION .m w rrr 01310-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 ..ak UniSpec 11 092499 SECTION 0 13 10-CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: I Project Management and Coordination: a. Construction Manager b. Project Coordination 1.2 WAL-MART CONSTRUCTION MANAGER A. Wal-Mart will assign this project to a staff Wal-Mart Construction Manager. The Wal-Mart Construction Manager is the Owner';representative in all matters relating to the Work. B. Cooperate with the Wal-Mart Construction Manager in all matters relating to the Work on this project. C. During construction,coordinate use of site and facilities through the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. D. Comply with Wal-Mxt Construction Manager's procedures for project communications; reports and records; coordination with dravrings,and comply with recommendations and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts. E. Comply with instructi:)ns of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities. F. Coordinate use of sit-, during Wal-Mart fixture set-up work under instructions of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 1.3 PROJECT COORDD,ATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of specifications to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of ir stallation of interdependent construction elements,with provisions for accommodating items installed at a later datc and under separate contracts. B. Obtain necessary drawings, manufacturer's product data, and other necessary data to provide a complete and proper installation. pment and furnishings. Verify necessary clearances and 1. Check field &mensions prior to installing equi inal position. means of access from equipment storage to f 2. Make shop drzwings and manufacturer's rough-in requirements available to trades involved. C. Verify that utility reqjirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate Work of various specification Sections for installation and final connection of equipment. 1 Verify that mcchanical,plumbing,and electrical rough-ins have been properly located. D. Coordinate space roquirements and installation of mechanical and electrical Work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits, as closely as practicable; make runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations,for maintenance,and for repairs. E. In finished areas, coriceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. 01310 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 � WAL-MART TAKEOVER _ REQUEST FOR INFORMATION )a((\ PROCESS £ (/§)} _ =,:2! Aft \ §§/) 3 -1 z< _ m � \ �Zj§ \\\(G )�\\% ()a§ =U.lu Z'Z' -* (\\«« ;)u § `§( �a©) � /:2»! ° /z-< - ( ° \)(§ Am /H a )(\\z§ �z§a/;2 am !oz!0 i °;U§z AVA -\zzzz (�(E:@ 8'.Z<0 ! AM (([! )(/! • /{m cli «\ |kk/ -±2( \/ \ \/ ) \})( / ( _ ])/° ;)/� )!° \/u 01255-4 Aft Wal-Mart&«c#2901 xo h m/A,dagm+c!!a March 10,200 0 A" 0 WAL-MART REQUEST FOR INFORMATION TAKEOVER w, DATE: RFI NO: TO: PERRY BUTCHER&ASSOCIATES PROJECT: FAX(501)631-69915 FROM: (General Contractor) Store# (City,State) SPECIFICATION SECTION: (Project Superintendent) DRAWING/DETAIL: (Job Site Phone Number) This request has been reviewed by the Wal-Mart Stores,Inc. (Job Site Fax Numt er) Construction Manager. ❑ YES ❑ NO INFORMATION REQUESTED: Requested By: Answered By: Date: REPLY: Architect's response shall not b considered as a Change Order or Change Directive,nor does it authorize changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.. F-, 01255-3 40 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 1.6 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM .r A. Submit requests for information on attached Request for Information form. Architect will not respond to requests for information unless this format is utilized and all appropriate information is provided. B. Where submittal form does not provide space needed for complete information,additional sheets may be attached. PART 2 -PRODUCTS r Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION .w rw .r •■4 .w Aft 01255-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 A UniSpec 11 123199 SECTION 01255 -REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requests for InfDrination(RFI)procedures. 1.2 DEFINITION A. Requests for InformatiDn: A formal process used during the construction phase to facilitate communication be- tween the Contractor,tae Wal-Mart Construction Manager,and the Architect with regard to requests for additional ation of the intent of the Contract Documents(Drawings and Specifications). information and clarific B. Do not use Request for Information form during bidding. For questions during bidding phase,refer to Invitation to Pk Bid issued by Contract Administrator. 1.3 PROCEDURE A. Conditions Requiring Clarification of the Contract Documents: ation and 1. Subcontractors, manufacturers, and suppliers shall submit request for additional inform clarification to Contractor. 2. Contractor shall contact Wal-Mart Construction Manager with requests for additional infon-nation or clarification. 'Wal-Mart Construction Manager will not accept requests for information or clarification submitted directly from subcontractors,manufacturers,or suppliers. 3. Wal-Mart Construction Manager will provide response to Contractor or he will direct Contractor to submit Request for InfDrmation to Architect/Team Wal-Mart. a. Generate Requests for Information by one source per project and number accordingly. b. Submit one request for information per form. ied ill be notif B. Architect will review formal requests from Contractor with reasonable promptness and Contractor w in writing of clecision,�made. or Change Directive, nor does it authorize I. Architect's response shall not be considered as a Change Order changes in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. C. Maintain log of Requosts for Information sent to,and responses from Team Wal-Mart. D. Scheduling,Costing, ind Owner Provided Equipment Coordination: Direct to the Owner's Construction Manager. E. Civil Engineering,Silework Coordination: Direct to Civil Engineer of Record. 1.4 PENALTY FOR FAILURE TO FOLLOW PROCEDURE A. A $250 administrati-ve cost will be assessed to the Contractor for each Request for Information submitted which does not follow the p7ocedure specified in"PROCEDURE" article above. 1.5 REIMBURSEMENT FOR ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING FEES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all administrative costs and professional fees incurred by Wal Mart for additional Architectural and Engineering services associated with the correction of completed Work which is not in accordance with the Contract Documents. See General Conditions of the Contract for Construction and Document 00800- Supplementary Conditions,Article 12 for provisions relating to correction of Work. 01255-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 C. Be responsible for maintaining the following conditions at all times during the construction period until possession .. date by Wal-Mart. 1. Maintain building weathertight and secure. 2. Maintain building security and fire alarm systems in operation. (In the event both systems should fail, the Fire Alarm System shall have priority over the Security System.) .. a. Contract with local alarm company to maintain service, and repair existing systems as required due to work relating to this Contract. b. Alarm Company: 1) Visit site and be familiar with existing conditions. so 2) Respond to service calls within 24 hours. C. Provide on-site guard services in the event the existing system is disabled for 8 hours or more. d. Coordinate security alarm with Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls. •n e. Contact Wal-Mart Alarm Central Control at (501) 273-4600 for additional information and coordination relating to work associated with existing alarm systems. 3. Maintain access and egress from the building. 1.6 WAL-MART OCCUPANCY A. Wal-Mart may occupy any completed or partially completed portions of the Work. B. Cooperate with Wal-Mart to minimize conflict,and schedule the Work to facilitate Wal-Mart's operations. �w C. Prior to Wal-Mart occupancy,ensure that the following conditions have been met: 1. Illuminated exit signs are installed and operational. 2. Exit doors are installed, including required panic hardware,and operational. 3. Lighted, enclosed walkways and other temporary safety measures are in place if required by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Fire sprinkler system is operational. 5. Doors required for Wal-Mart's security purposes are installed and operational. r.. D. After Wal-Mart occupancy: 1. Keep exit routes and exit doors free from obstructions. 2. Maintain exit signs and fire sprinkler system in operational condition. 3. Provide security for Wal-Mart's products,equipment,and operations. 4. Do not permit smoking in the building. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION ..w 01100-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 sow UniSpec II 092499 SECTION 01100- SUMMARY PART I -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY is A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions. 2. Work covered ty Contract Documents. 3. Work by Wal-Mart or Separate Contractors. 4. Contractor use of site and premises. 5. Wal-Mart occupancy. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to project site,ready for installation. B. Install: Unpack, assemble, set in final position, fasten in place, make final connections, clean, adjust, and leave ready for use. C. Provide: Furnish and install. D. Receive: Accepting a delivery. (Entity responsible for accepting a delivery.) E. Final Connections: Complete plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as required and recommended by manufacturer for optimum operation of equipment. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Work of this Contract comprises the general construction required for a Wal-Mart Store Takeover. 1.4 WORK BY WAL-MART OR SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Wal-Mart has its own forces who will perform certain Work on the project, items noted 'NIC' (Not In Contract) which will commence:as indicated on the Construction Schedule. B. Wal-Mart may award separate contracts for work at the Site, which will be executed concurrent with work of this Contract. Consult and cooperate with separate contractors to the full extent provided for in the Conditions of the Contract. I. Work defined as "Refrigeration" will not be contained within the contract for General Construction. Refer to Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions,for additional requirements. C. During setup of equipment by the Owner or separate contractors, make crane service available to hoist equipment directly from trucks to final position. Coordinate schedule with Wal-Mart's Construction Manager. 1.5 CONTRACTOR US E OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Limit use of site to a low for: 1. Wal-Mart occupancy. 2. Work by separate contractors and by Wal-Mart. 3. Use of site and premises by the public. B. Do not unreasonably encumber site with products or equipment. 01100-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northa pton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Mom Wk BLANK PAGE o+. Ow am ago Am M" u.. 00800-28 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 '""' 0 R AFFIDAVIT OF TOTAL RELEASE AND CERTIFICATION OF ALL BILLS PAID THE UNDERSIGNED hereby certifies that he(or she)has examined and is authorized and empowered to execute this Affidavit as the owner,partner,or officer as the case may be,of the contractor named below("the Contractor") 0 employed in connection with the construction project("the Project")mentioned below. In consideration for the full and final payment to the Contractor for all service in connection with the project,the 0 receipt and adequacy of which arc hereby acknowledged,the Contractor hereby releases and waives all liens and claims to liens which the Contractor may have on or affecting the Project or Project property as a result of the Contractor's contract(s) for the Project or for performing labor and/or furnishing materials that are in any way connected with any construction of any building(s)or improvement(s)for the Project whether or the Project property or elsewhere. The Contractor further 0 certifies and warrants that all sub(,ontractors of labor and/or materials supplied to, for,through or at the direct or indirect request of the Contractor and/or subcontractor. (Print or type the firm or individual name of the Contractor) 2. (Print or type the Contractor's address) 3. Print or type the name of the person signing for the Contractor) 4. (Print or type the position of the person signing for the Contractor) 5. Description of the Project(use an additional page, if necessary): 6. Date that the project was totally completed: The undersigned certifies that the foregoing information is true and correct and acknowledges that the owner of the Project has placed a material reliance on such information in directing final payment to the Contractor. EXECUTED this day of , 19 (To be signed by the person shown in Item 3 above) Subscribed and sworn before me this day of , 19 Notary Public: My Commission Expires: END OF AFFIDAVIT 1 00800-27 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 no Exhibit"B" Page 2 of 2 an The parties executing this Bond on behalf of Principal and Surety represent and warrant that they are duly authorized to bind the Principal and Surety respectively. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the above parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this No day of , 199 the name and corporate seal of each corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative,pursuant to authority of its A" governing body. PRINCIPAL: MM By: ,.b Title: (Principal's Address) Witness: Or Secretary's Attest �+* ISEAL] SURETY: By: Title: Witness: (Surety's Address) M Or Secretary's Attest am [SEAL] [Attach Power of Attorney if executed by attorney-in-fact on behalf of Surety] •r Am .w 00800-26 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am PAYMENTBOND Exhibit"B" Page I of 2 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,That (hereinafter called the"Principal"),as Principal and a corporation,duly authorized to do business in Arkansas,(hereinafter called the"Surety"),are held and firmly bound unto WAL-MART STORES,INC.(hereinafter called the"Obligee"), and its representatives,successors and assigns, in the sum of Dollars for the payment of which sum wc:11 and truly to be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their respective heirs,administrators,executors,E uccessors and assigns jointly and severally,firmly by these presents. WHEREAS,the Principal has be-n awarded a contract with Obligee for. corporated by express reference as if fully (hereinafter called the"Contract")and which Contract is hereby referred to and in set forth herein. NOW,THEREFORE,THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH,that if the Principal shall promptly make payment in full to all persons or -entities supplying labor,material,supplies,services,utilities and equipment in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract and any and all modifications of said Contract that may hereafter be made,and shall indemnify and sive harmless said Obligee of and from any and all loss,damage,and expense,including costs and attorneys'fees,which 1he said Obligee may sustain by reason of Principal's failure to do so,then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. ication of the The said Surety agrees that no cliange,extension of time,alteration,addition,omission,waiver,or other modif terms of either the said Contract or in the said work to be performed,or in the specifications,or in the plans,or in the contract documents,or any forb,,-arance on the part of either the Obligee or Principal to the other, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this Bond,and Surety does hereby waive notice of any such changes,extensions of time,alterations,additions, omissions,waivers,or other modifications. it of all persons or entities as supplying The said Principal and the said Surety agree that this Bond shall inure to the benef labor,material,supplies,servicc:s,utilities and equipment in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract,as well as to the Obligee, and that iny of such persons or entities may maintain independent actions upon this Bond in the name of the person or entities bringin,),,,any such action. 00800-25 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Exhibit"A" Page 2 of 2 The parties executing this Bond on behalf of Principal and Surety represent and warrant that they are duly authorized to bind the Principal and Surety respectively. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the above bounden parties have executed this instrument under their several seals this day of , 199 the name and corporate seal of each corporate seal of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents duly signed by its undersigned representative,pursuant to authority of its governing body. PRINCIPAL: By: Title: (Principal's Address) Witness: _ Or Secretary's Attest ISEAL] SURETY: By: Title: Witness: (Surety's Address) Or Secretary's Attest [SEAL] Attach Power of Attorney if executed by attorney-in-fact on behalf of Surety ..A 00800-24 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 """ PERFORMANCE BOND Exhibit"A" Page I of 2 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE P RESENTS,That OR (hereinafter called the"Principal"), as Principal and a corporation,duly authorized to do business in Arkansas,(hereinafter called the"Surety"),are held and firmly bound unto WAL-MART STORES,INC. (hereinafter called the"Obligee"),and its representatives,successors and assigns, in the sum of Dollars(S for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made the said Principal and Surety bind themselves,and their respective heirs,administrators,executors,saccessors and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS,the Principal has beon awarded a contract with Obligee for (hereinafter called the"Contract")and which contract is hereby referred to and incorporated by express reference as if fully set forth herein. NOW,THEREFORE,THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH,that if the above bounden Principal shall well and truly perform all the work,u,idertakings,covenants,terms,conditions,and agreements of said contract within the time provided therein and any extensions thereof that may be granted by Obligee,and during the life of any maintenance obligation,guaranty or warranty required under said Contract,and shall also well and truly perform all the undertakings, covenants,terms,conditions,an(L agreements of any and all modifications of said Contract that may hereafter be made,and shall indemnify and save harmle:,,s said Obligee of and from any and all loss,damage,and expense,including costs and attorneys'fees,which the said Obligee may sustain by reason of Principal's failure to do so,then this obligation shall be null and void;otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. The said surety agrees that no change,extension of time,alteration,addition,omission,waiver,or other modification of the terms of either the said Contract or in the said work to be performed,or in the specifications,or in the plans,or in the ®R ay affect said contract documents,or any forbearance on the part of either the Obligee or Surety to the other,shall in any w Surety's obligation on this Bond and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such changes,extensions of time, alterations,additions,omission& waivers,or other modifications. 00800-23 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .. .awl 0" .s ,w am .w a" BLANK PAGE am oft am Am oft .. 00800-22 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "` PRODUCTS MAnUf4c urer Model/Serial# Color/Sjyle(If Applicable) Door Closers: Panic Hardware: Auto.Doors: Ceiling Panels: Floor Tile: Rubber: VCT: Ceramic: R.R. Partition: Fire Pump: Jockey Pump: Exit Lights: Emergency Lights: Note: Include all information requested, including Owner Provided Parts. DNA: Does Not Apply END OF MAfNTENANCE DATA SHEET 00800-21 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 no Company Name Location Business Phone Emerg Phone AN Struct. Steel: Overhead Doors: Auto. Doors: Flooring: Landscaping: Irrigation: ■■ HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING EQUIPMENT GAS FIRED [ ] ELECTRIC HEAT [ ] Quantity _ Manufacturer Model No Heat/Cool(BTU's) Cool Only(BTU's) MISCELLANEOUS INFORMATION Quantity Manufacturer atalog/Model No Volts/Watts Parking Lot Lighting: Lighting Poles: Am Light Fixtures: Ballasts: Lamps: Ceiling Light Fixtures: High Bay: Ballasts: Lamps: Pendant Mount: Ballasts: Lamps: Fluorescent Mount: AM Ballasts: Lamps: .r 00800-20 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 am WAL-MART STORES,INC. MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET All Sections Must Be Complete Prior To Final Payment IM Location: Store/Club No.: Size: Possession Date: TYPE OF BUILDING CONSTRUCTION Walls: Roof(circle one): SBS BUR EPDM Metal Other(explain) Roofing Mfg. Warranty Infor. (years) STORE/CLUB TYPE(Check Those That Apply) Free Standing _ New Store Take-over Store Strip Center _ Relocation Stockroom Add'n. Mall _ Remodel Expansion Back Front L. Side R. Side Company N me Location Business Phone Emerg_Phone Developer: ` Gen. Contractor: Subcontractors. Electrical: Plumbing: Fire Protection: Roofing: Ht/Vent/Cool.: Paving: Painting: Storefront: Earthwork: Site Utility: Striping: Fencing: Concrete Ext.: Concrete Int.: Masonry: 00800-19 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS .r 13.5 Supplement Paragraph 13.5 in accordance with provisions of Section 01458. 13.6 INTEREST 13.6 Delete Paragraph 13.6 in its entirety. 13.8 HARMONY CLAUSE 13.8 Add the following Paragraph 13.8 to ARTICLE 13 13.8 HARMONY CLAUSE 13.8.1 The Contractor and all Subcontractors agree that no labor dispute of any kind involving any Contractor or Subcontractor,or their employees or agents shall be permitted to occur or be manifested on the Project and the Contractor and Subcontractors agree to that end to only employ persons on the Work who will work at all times in harmony with other persons employed on the Project. 13.8.2 The Contractor and all Subcontractors agree that their employees shall not participate in or accede to any work stoppage,slow down or any type of interference with the performance of work by other persons on the project which may occur as a result of any labor dispute involving their employees. 13.8.3 Should there be a work stoppage,slow down or any type of interference with the performance of „u work on the project involving the Contractor or his employees or a Subcontractor or his employees resulting from a labor dispute and which in the judgment of Wal-Mart will cause,or threatens to cause delay in the progress of construction,then upon twenty-four(24)hours written notice Wal-Mart shall have the right to declare the Contractor and/or Subcontractor in default under this Contract and take such steps as are necessary to finish the uncompleted portion of the Work. In such event Wal-Mart shall have the right to take possession of and use all of the Contractor's and/or Subcontractor's materials(exclusive of tools)intended for use on the Work. The cost of completion including all expenses,attorney's fees and costs incurred in resolving the labor dispute shall be charged against the Contractor and/or Subcontractor's remaining interest in the Contract amount. 13.8.4 Should the Contractor and/or Subcontractor(s)become involved in a labor dispute resulting in a work stoppage,slow down or any type of interference with progress of construction and resulting in an increase in interest charges to Wal-Mart,the Contractor and/or Subcontractor(s)shall be liable to Wal-Mart for this increased cost. If the Contractor and/or Subcontractor's remaining interest in the Contract amount .. exceeds cost of completion,the Contractor and/or Subcontractor(s)agree to pay Wal-Mart such excess within thirty(30)days after written demand for such excess has been made upon him by Wal-Mart. 13.8.5 Harmony clause provisions similar to the provisions of the immediately preceding paragraphs ■* shall be included in any of the Contractor and/or Subcontractor's subcontracts relating to the Work. 13.9 CRANE SERVICE Oft 13.9 Add the following Paragraph 13.9 to ARTICLE 13 13.9 CRANE SERVICE Aft 13.9.1 It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide crane service and/or coordinate crane operations to make best use of crane service and not delay operations of subcontractors requiring crane service. END OF DOCUMENT 00800-18 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .� government office in the county where the Project is located. The original receipt from the Recorder of Deeds(setting forth date,time, amount,and description of document iecorded),a copy of the bonds,and other required documents shall be submitted by the Contractor to Wal-Mart before the Contract will be executed by Wal-Mart. The recorded 0 Bonds with recordation/filing stamp affixed shall be submitted by the Contractor to Wal- Mart promptly after the Contractor receives the Bonds from the Recorder of Deeds. .5 Contractor shall promptly pay to Wal-Mart all dividends,rebates,or return of payments in any form of premiums paid for the Bonds. Payment shall be made in the form of a Cashier's or Certified Check. 11.6 [NSUFANCE AND BOND ISSUERS 11.6 Add the following Par;igraph 11.6 to Article 11: 11.6 INSUf LANCE AND BOND ISSUERS 11.6.1 All Insurance Policies,Performance Bonds and Labor and Material Payment Bonds must be issued by a comp,�ny(1)licensed to issue the type of insurance or bond by the insurance commissioner or comparable state agency in the state in which the Project is located and(2)acceptable to Owner,in its discretion. Issuer of Bonds must be listed in the Federal Register. ART)CLE 12-UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK 12.2.1 Add the following Ch�uses(.2 and.3)to Subparagraph 12.2.1: .2 Compensation for the Architect's services associated with correction of Work rejected or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents will be based on the additional service hourly rate established in the Master Agreement for Professional Consulting Services. .3 Adjustment in the Contract Sum will be made by Change Order as provided in Paragraph orm to the 7.2 for costs incurred by the Owner as a result of Work rejected or failing to conf requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 13-MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.2.1 Modify the second scntence of Subparagraph 13.2.1 as follows: Revise"Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2,neither..."to Except as provided in Subparagraph 13.2.2 or 13.2.3,neither..." 13.2.2 Modify Subparagraph 13.2.2 as follows: At the end of second sentence add"...as provided in such assignment." 13.2.3 Add the following subparagraph 13.2.3: 13.2.3 Owner may assign the contract to an entity which controls, is controlled by,or is under common control with owner. 00800-17 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 11.4.1 Modify the first sentence of Subparagraph 11.4.1 as follows: Delete"Unless otherwise provided,the Owner"and substitute"the Contractor." 11.4.1 Add the following sentences to Subparagraph 11.4.1: The form of policy for this coverage shall be Completed Value. If the Owner is damaged by the failure of the Contractor to maintain such insurance,then the Contractor shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. 11.4.1.2 Delete Clause 11.4.1.2 in its entirety. 11.4.1.3 Delete Clause 11.4.1.3 in its entirety. 11.4.2 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.2 as follows: Delete "The Owner shall purchase"and substitute"The Contractor shall purchase". 11.4.4 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.4 in its entirety. .•s 11.4.6 Delete Subparagraph 11.4.6 in its entirety. See Subparagraph 11.1.3 for instructions for proof of insurance coverage. 11.4.7 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.7 as follows: Substitute "Contractor" for"Owner"at the end of the first sentence. am 11.4.8 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.8 as follows: Substitute Contractor for Owner as fiduciary;except that at the first reference to Owner in the first sentence,the word"this" should be substituted for"Owner's". 11.4.9 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.9 as follows: •w Substitute"Contractor" for"Owner"each time the latter word appears. 11.4.10 Modify Subparagraph 11.4.10 as follows: " Substitute"Contractor"for"Owner"each time the latter word appears. 11.5 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 11.5.1 Add the following Clauses(.1, .2, .3, .4,and.5)to Subparagraph 11.5.1: 1 The Contractor shall provide Wal-Mart with an acceptable Performance Bond on the form attached as Exhibit"A",and an acceptable Labor and Material Payment Bond on the form attached as Exhibit"B",that complies with all statutory and administrative requirements governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. The Performance Bond shall stay in force for the two years after Substantial Completion. The Labor and Material Payment Bond shall stay in force for one year after Substantial Completion. A% .2 The Bonds described in paragraph 11.4.1.1 above shall each be for an amount not less than one hundred percent(100%)of the Contract amount. .3 Contractor shall provide a"copy"of a Bonds described in Paragraph 11.4.1.1 above to Wal-Mart Contract Administration Department before Contractor mobilization. .4 The Bonds described in paragraph 11.4.1.1 above shall each be filed prior to commencement of construction by the Contractor with the recorder of deeds or similar rw 00800-16 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "'" change of policy. Policy shall identify Wal-Mart Stores,Inc., its affiliates,and its subsidiaries et al as additional insured 3. .3 The Contractor shall protect,defend,hold harmless and indemnify Wal-Mart from and against any and all claims,actions,liabilities,fines or penalties,losses,costs and expenses,including attorneys'fees,even if such claims are groundless,fraudulent,or false,arising out of any actual or alleged spilling,dumping,release and/or disposal of hazardous waste materials,whether at or upon the construction site or at another 19 undetermined site pursuant to the performance of this Contract. It is expressly agreed and understood that such protection and indemnification shall apply and extend to claims made by federal,state,or local governmental entities or agencies. It is further expressly agreed and understood that such protection and indemnification shall apply to all claims arising out of such actual or alleged spilling,dumping,release 10 and/or disposal of hazardous waste materials even if such claim is not discovered or made until after the performance of the Work required or after conclusion of this agreement. As used in this agreement,the term "hazardous mater.als" shall mean any hazardous or toxic substances,materials or wastes,pollutants or contaminants,petroleum,or other materials as defined,listed or regulated by any federal,state or local law, regulation or order or by common law decision applicable to the property,including,without limitation,(i) trichloroethylene,tetrachloroethylene,perchloroethylene and other chlorinated solvents,(ii)petroleum products or byprc ducts,(iii)asbestos and(iv)polychlorinated biphenyls. .4 The Contractor shall protect,defend,hold harmless and indemnify Wal-Mart from and against any and all claims,actions, liabilities,fines or penalties,losses,costs and expenses,including attorneys'fees,even if such claims are groundless,fraudulent,or false,arising out of any actual or alleged pollution,contamination or adulteration of the waters of the United States or any particular state as a result of or arising out of the performance of this Contract. It is expressly agreed and understood that such protection and indemnification shall apply and e:ctend to claims made by federal,state,or local governmental entities or agencies. It is further expressly agreed and understood that such protection and indemnification shall apply to all claims arising out of such actual or alleged pollution,contamination or adulteration of the waters of the United States or any particular state thereof even if such claim is not discovered or made until after the performance of the work required or after conclusion of this agreement. 11.1.3 Add the following sentences to Subparagraph 11.1.3: The Certificate of Insurance,must be received by the Wal-Mart Contracts Administration Department before Wal-Mart will ex ecute the Contract or before any work is performed on the project,whichever is the earliest date. The certification must indicate that the limits listed are provided and that insurance will not be canceled or material change while the work specified is in progress without thirty(30)days prior written notice to ! Wal-Mart. Certi 6cate must reference the Project store number,city and state. Copies of Declaration pages and/or Policies of Insurance shall be furnished to the owner upon request.Failure to provide the proper Certificate of Insurance,Declaration pages or Policies as required above may result in the cancellation of the award of Contract. Wal-Mart shall be additional insureds on all policies of insurance. 11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 11.2.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 11.2.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance covering the Owner's contingent liability for claims whicl.may arise from operations under the Contract. This coverage can be afforded by adding Wal-Mart as additional insured on general liability. 11.3 Project Management Protective Liability Insurance 11.3 Delete Paragraph 113 in its entirety. 11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE .:: 00800-15 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 the form of insurance certificates must be submitted to Wal-Mart Stores,Inc. for approval before „ commencement of Work. Wal-Mart Stores,Inc. and its affiliates and its subsidiaries shall be listed as certificatible and,as their interests may appear,shall be additional insureds with cross liability endorsement with respect to commercial,general and automobile liability policies. All workers'compensation insurance contracts shall contain a Waiver of Subrogation,where permitted by law, in favor of Wal-Mart Stores, Inc. and its affiliates. Insurance coverage required by Subparagraph 11.1.l shall be written for not less than the following limits,or greater if required by law: �.. TYPE MINIMUM LIMIT Builders Risk Insurance All Risk including Earthquake and Flood Total Building Cost including Improvements and Betterments .. Worker's Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability Per Each Stop Gap Endorsement(monopolistic states) Occurrence $1,000,000 Waiver of Subrogation Where Permitted by Law .■ Commercial General Liability Including Contractual Liability for the specific Project or Blanket Contractual for all Agreements,Products,and Completed Operations for two year period following completion of the Work (covering liability assumed hereunder) with no exclusion for liability resulting from the hazards of explosion,collapse and underground property damage,personal injury liability,or fire legal. Contractor Per Each Occurrence $5,000,000 Subcontractor Per Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Business Auto Liability Including Hired&Non-Owned ' Contractor Per Each Occurrence $2,000,000 ..� Subcontractor Per Each Occurrence $1,000,000 .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for securing Certificates of Insurance from all Subcontractors for e insurance coverage limits not less than the limits indicated above and shall make such Certificates available to Wal-Mart upon request. Policy shall provide 30 days written notice prior to cancellation or material .w 00800-14 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am including drawing:;,instructions,or manuals supplied with equipment furnished by others and installed under this Contract. 9.11.6 Warranties And Bonds: Prior to Final Application for Payment,submit in Closeout Document R Book described in Paragraph 9.11.2 in this Document. .1 ,assemble documents from Subcontractors,suppliers,and manufacturers. .2 For equipment put into use with Owner's acceptance during construction, submit within ten days after first operation,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. .3 :7or items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion,provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance,listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. ARTICLE 10-PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.2.2 Add the following sentence to 10.2.2: The Contractor sL all include,but is not limited to,the latest federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration(C)SHA)safety standards. Costs related thereto shall be included in the Contract Sum. 10.2.3 Add the following Ch.use to Subparagraph 10.2.3: 10.2.3.1 The C�ntractor shall at all times protect all activities of his construction,excavations,fill areas, embankments,trc riches,structures,or building from damage resulting from rainwater,spring water,ground water,backing up of drains,sewers and all other water encountered during his operations. The Contractor shall provide pumps,equipment and enclosures,etc.necessary to provide adequate protection. 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.3.2 Delete Subparagraph 10.3.2 in its entirety and replace with the following 10.3.2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and,in the event such material or substance is found to be present,to verify that it has been rendered harmless.When the material or substance has been rendered harmless,Work in the affected area shall resume.The Contract Time and the Contract Sum shall be adjusted appropriately as .)rovided in Article 7. ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CON TRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.2 Add the following Causes(.1, .2, .3 and.4)to Subparagraph 11.1.2: 1 Contractors ar.d subcontractors doing work under contract for Wal-Mart shall carry the following insurance with the minimum limits set forth. Such insurance must be carried with insurance companies acceptable to Wal-Mart Store,,Inc. and contractors and subcontractors shall maintain such insurance in full force and effect until this agreement has been fully performed and all equipment,implements and machinery of + contractors and subcontractors have been removed from and all employees,agents,representatives and subcontractors c f contractor have left Wal-Mart Stores,Ine.'s premises. ' Certificates of Insurance shall stipulate that insurance will not be canceled or any material change made in the policies without thirty(30)days prior written notice to Wal-Mart Stores,Inc. Evidence of insurance in 00800-13 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 Submit completed Letter of Conformance for each product selected as indicated within each Section. Fill-in required information on form and sign in ink by person authorized to sign on behalf of the Contractor. No modifications to form permitted. Record Letters of Conformance are included,and can be found at the end of each applicable Specification Section. List of Record Letters of Conformance as follows: �* Section 07511 -Built-Up Asphalt Roofing Section 07550 -Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing Section 11160-Loading Dock Equiipment. r 9.11.3 Final Cleaning: Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection as follows. .1 Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view;remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances,polish transparent and glossy surfaces,vacuum carpeted and *� soft surfaces. .2 Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. .3 Clean or replace filters of operating equipment. .4 Clean debris from roofs,gutters,downspouts,and drainage systems. .5 Clean site; sweep paved areas,rake clean landscaped surfaces. .6 Remove waste and surplus materials,rubbish,and construction facilities from the site. rw 9.11.4 Project Record Documents: 1 Maintain on site,one set of the following record documents;record actual revisions to the Work. a) Contract Drawings. so b) Specifications. c) Addenda. d) Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. ■ , e) Reviewed shop drawings,product data,and samples. .2 Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. .3 Record information concurrent with construction progress. Do not permanently conceal work until required information has been recorded. Wk .4 Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed,including the following: a) Manufacturer's name and product model and number. aft b) Product substitutions or alternates utilized. c) Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. .5 Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: a) Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish floor datum. b) Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. c) Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. d) Field changes of dimension and detail. e) Details not on original Contract Drawings. f) Refrigeration closeout submittals per Section 15600. Prepare record documents for refrigeration system. Indicate actual pipe routing and corresponding circuits. Submit start-up records and installation and maintenance instructions in three-ring binder to Wal-Mart. .6 At Project completion,present to the Store Manager the Record Documents(including Record Drawings, Specifications,Addenda,and Change Orders)enclosed in a plastic pipe tube(fixed cap at one end and a threaded-cap on the other end)for storage in the Electrical Room. 9.11.5 Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit to Owner, 14 days prior to final inspection,three suitably bound sets of descriptive literature,maintenance and operation data, and parts lists for each item of equipment provided under this Contract that will require maintenance or special operating procedures, 00800-12 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �""+! 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.10.2 Add the following Clauses to Subparagraph 9.10.2: R 1 Consent of Surety to Final Payment is required to be submitted in the Closeout Document Book(Re 9.11.2). 9.11 CONT 2ACT CLOSEOUT 9.11 Add the following Paragraph 9.11 to ARTICLE 9: 9.11 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 9.11.1 Closeout Procedures: When Contractor considers Work to be Substantially Complete,submit written certification to Wal-Mart's Construction Manager as follows. 1 Contract Documents have been reviewed. .2 Work has been inspected. .3 Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents. .4 Work is ready for inspection. 9.11.2 Final Closeout Submittals: Before final application for payment will be approved,following submittals must b,-received and approved by Wal-Mart. If Contractor fails to provide a fully completed Closeout Document Book within ninety(90)days after Substantial Completion of the Work,then Contractor agrees to pay Ow:ier the sum of two hundred fifty dollars($250.00)per day,as liquidated damages and not as a penalty,until the fully completed Closeout Document Book is received by Owner. Bind closeout documents in a"Closeout Document Book"consisting of a black,three-ring binder with tabs for each category below. Submit only one set of Documents. For Warranties and Bonds refer to Paragraph 9.11.6 of this Document. 1 "Contractors Statement of Warranty." .2 Original Certificate of Occupancy. .3 Final list of Subcontractors used complete with telephone numbers,addresses,and after hours telephone numbers. .4 Final lien waivers from Contractor and all Subcontractors on the Wal-Mart form(Affidavit of Total Release and Certification of all Bills Paid);included at end of this Document. .5 Completed Operations Bond(copy of original Performance and Payment Bond). ,3 .6 Consent of Surety to Final Payment. .7 Substantial Completion punch list showing items completed and approved by Wal-Mart. .8 Original Roofing Guarantee; Section 07511 or 07550. .9 Special Concrete Finish Warranty; Section 03360. .10 Automatic Sliding Door Warranty; Section 08462. .11 Elastomeric Coatings Warranty; Section 09981. .12 Registration of Storage Tanks with State. .13 Landscape and Irrigation System Warranty; Section 02810. .14 Maintenance Data Sheet(3 pages);included at the end of this Document. .15 Project Record Documents(Placed in PVC storage tube near Electrical Room and witnessed by Store Manager,provide proof of delivery in Closeout Document Book). a) Drawings. b) Specifications. Op c) Shop Drawings. d) Operation and Maintenance Data. V .16 Contractor's Record Letters of Conformance: By submitting Letter of Conformance,the Contractor declares that the Product identified by manufacturer's name and model number is(one of)the product(s)specified and is suitable for the intended use as defined within the Contract Documents and has been provided and placed in operational condition in accordance with the manufacturer's published instructions and the Contract Documents. 00800-11 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.4 Delete Paragraph 9.4 in its entirety. A 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.6.2 Delete Paragraph 9.6.2 in its entirety and replace with the following: 9.6.2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor for such portion of the Work that Subcontractor is entitled. The Contractor shall,by appropriate agreement with each subcontractor,require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in similar manner. .1 Contractor agrees not to use "Pay When Paid"contracts with Subcontractors and Suppliers of equipment,material or services. Contractor shall require a similar provision in all Subcontractor and Sub-subcontractor contracts. 9.6.4 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 9.6.4: .1 At the Owner's sole discretion,the Owner may require all sums due under the Contract Documents to be paid ., pursuant to a joint check arrangement or through an escrow account for payment to the Contractor, subcontractors,or material suppliers. The Contractor agrees to sign such additional documents and take such action as the Owner shall deem necessary to carryout the intent of this subparagraph 9.6.4.1. 9.6.7 Delete subparagraph 9.6.7 in its entirety. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT ., 9.7 Delete Paragraph 9.7 in its entirety. 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.8.1 Add the following sentences and Clause to Subparagraph 9.8.1: Substantial Completion is further defined as the date when all construction indicated in the Contract Documents is 100%complete and accepted for possession by Wal-Mart with the exception of Wal-Mart furnished and/or installed items which must be connected or installed by the Contractor, for the purpose of installing fixtures,equipment and stocking merchandise. The date of Substantial Completion is indicated in the Construction Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. .1 A final audit will be performed by Wal-Mart following Substantial Completion. 9.8.5 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 9.8.5: 1 Consent of Surety for Reduction in Retainage is required to be submitted with the Pay Application that reduces the retainage. .. 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE Supplement in accordance with provisions of Section 01100. AM am 0. 00800-10 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 am ARTICLE 8-TIME 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.3 Delete Paragraph 8.3 in its entirety. ARTICLE 9-PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.2 Delete Paragraph 9.2 n its entirety and replace with the following: P 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.2.1 Within ten(10)days following the Notice of Award,the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a P schedule of values,along with other required documents,allocated to various portions of the Work,prepared on the Owner's"Subcontractors Listing and Project Budget Form" and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as th,-Owner may require. This schedule,shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for.?ayment. 9.2.2 The C wner will furnish to the Contractor an"Accounting Package"which includes the Subcontractors Listing and Project Budget Form,and other required documents,which must be received by the Owner beforc the Contract will be executed. 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.3.1.1 Modify Clause 9 3.1.1 as follows: Delete",or by irterim determinations of the Architect," 9.3.1 Add the following Clauses(.3, .4,and.5 )to Subparagraph 9.3.1: .3 The Owner shall determine the amount less ten percent(10%)retainage of each Application for Payment that is properly due and will issue payment for such amount not later than twenty(20)days after the first day of the next month following the period covered by the Application for Payment,provided the properly completed Application for Payment is in the Owner's possession not later than the first day of the month. .4 Contractor hereby waives its rights,pursuant to statute or otherwise,to require the deposit of the retainage in a separate escrow or other account in a bank or other entity and authorizes and directs Owner to hold and release the retainage in accordance with the terms of the Contract. .5 The Contractor is provided with accounting system forms by the Owner as part of the Contract Documents Package and the Contractor shall properly complete and submit the required forins with each Application for Payment. 9.3.3 Add the following C[auses(A and.2)to Subparagraph 9.3.3: I In the event the Owner received information that indicated a lien has been filed or that there exists a potential lien situation,the Contractor will be notified by the Owner and the Owner will expect the Contractor to immediately resolve the situation to the satisfaction of the Owner. .2 It is hereby agreed between the Owner and the Contractor that each properly executed "Application and Certificate for Payment" (Form C-1200 or Form C-12 10)is a valid lien release,as stated on the form,and the Contractor thereby agrees to defend and indemnify Wal-Mart against any and all claims resulting from a lien against the property. 00800-9 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 s .2 The Energy Management System Contractor will be bound by the conditions and terms of Wal-Mart Document#8017-01. .3 The Owner will award a separate contract for work defined as"Refrigeration." .4 The Refrigeration Contractor will be bound by the conditions and terms of Wal-Mart Document#8716-01. +■ 6.1.4 Add the following Clauses(.1, .2, .3, .4,and .5)to Subparagraph 6.1.4: 1 Contractors performing work under separate contracts shall be responsible for relating problems and anticipated problems which may impede the progress of the job. Contractors performing work under separate contracts shall abide by the site cleanliness and safety regulation policies of the Contractor. .. .2 Owner agrees to hold Contractor harmless for any and all losses and liabilities arising in any way out of or as a result of the performance of Contractors under separate contracts. .3 Contractor will receive a copy of specifications and drawings for work performed under separate contracts for coordination purposes. .4 Coordination of Energy Management System activities shall be through Wal-Mart Energy Management Department, (501)273-8670. .5 Coordination of all Refrigeration activities shall be through Wal-Mart's Regional Refrigeration Coordinator. Telephone Contract Administrator/Technical Services at(50 1) 273-8524 for coordination contact. 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY 6.2.1 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 6.2.1: 1 Material and equipment provided by the Owner shall be received,stored,and protected-in accordance with Paragraph 10.2.1.2 of the General Conditions. Incurred costs for receiving, storage,liability,and warranty labor shall be included in the Contract Sum. ARTICLE 7-CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.2 Add the following Subparagraphs to 7.2: 7.2.3 The Contractor is provided with Change Order forms as part of the Contract Documents Package. In the event a Change Order is necessary,the form shall indicate the cost of the Work and the cost of the Change Order fee which includes all overhead,profit and operational items such as taxes,bonds and insurance. No other itemized costs will be acceptable on the form provided. 7.2.4 The Contractor shall require a written provision under contract with the Subcontractor that the Subcontractor submit any changes in cost to adjust the subcontract amount by use of written Change Order. No adjustments will be accepted by the Contractor nor Wal-Mart from the Subcontractor except for those submitted on written Change Order. 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES ow 7.3.6.5 Delete Clause 7.3.6.5 in its entirety and replace with the following: 7.3.6.5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change shall .. be applicable only to Change Orders that change the Contract Time of the Project. 00800-8 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 "'*" 4.3.7.2 Delete Clause 4.3.7.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: 4.3.7.2 Claims for additional time due to adverse weather conditions will not be considered. 4.3.10 Delete subparagrz.ph 4.3.10 in its entirety. 4.5 MEDIATION 4.5 Delete Paragraph 4.5 in its entirety and replace with the following: 4.5 MEDIATION 4.5.1 Referc nces to mediation in Paragraph 4.5 or any other paragraph of the General Conditions is hereby deleted and rendered null and void,of no force or effect and not a part of the Contract. 4.6 ARBrrRATION 4.6 Delete Paragraph 4.6 n its entirety and replace with the following: 4.6 ARBrrRATION 4.6.1 Refercrices to arbitration in Paragraph 4.6 or any other paragraph of the General Conditions is hereby deleted ar.d rendered null and void,of no force or effect and not a part of the Contract. ARTICLE 5-SUBCONTRACTORS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.2.1 Add the following Cl;tuses(.I and.2)to Subparagraph 5.2.1: I The Contractor and all subcontractors are hereby notified that all Subcontractors and suppliers are subject to approval by the Owner prior to execution of a Contract on this Project. The list of names of persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work shall be completed and furnished to Wal-Mart,on form provided with Contract, within ten(10)days following notice of award and before a Contract is executed. .2 The Contractor is hereby notified that any subcontractor or supplier,including their principals or associated companies,that have previously been designated by Wal-Mart as unacceptable will be subject to approval review by Wal-Mart prior to execution of the Contract on this Project. ARTICLE 6-CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWINER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CON'rRACTS 6.1.2 Add the following Clauses(.1, .2, .3, and.4)to Subparagraph 6.1.2: I The Owner will award a separate contract for work defined as "Energy Management System." 0 -7 0800 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 ARTICLE 4-ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT 4.1.1 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 4.1.1: *+ 1 Except for subparagraphs 1.1.1, 1.1.2,1.6.1,2.1.1,2.4.1 (first reference to Architect's only), 3.12.4,3.12.5,3.12.8,3.12.9,3.12.10, 4.1.1,4.1.2 and 4.1.3,4.4.1 (...omission by the Architect...)and 7.3.1 in the General Conditions,wherever the term Architect is used in the General Conditions,it shall be replaced with and shall mean the Owner as described in Article 2 of the General Conditions. 4.2 ARCHITECT'S ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 4.2.1 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 4.2.1: 1 The Owner will inform the Contractor of the member of the Owner's organization who is authorized to make changes in the Work previously authorized or give such directions and approvals on the Owner's behalf as may be required under this Contract. The person so designated shall be identified as the Owner's Representative and such designation of authority may be supplemented or changed in writing only by either the Wal-Mart Vice .. President of Construction or Wal-Mart Director of Construction. 4.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES ., 4.3.2 Delete Subparagraph 4.3.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: 4.3.2 Time Limits on Claims. Notice of Claims by either party shall be made within seven(7)days after occurrence of .a the event giving rise to such Claim. Notice of Claim which is or may be more than$20,000.00 shall be made by written Notice to the Wal-Mart Contracts Administration Department. The party submitting the notice of Claim shall provide the other party with all particulars of the Claim including all supporting documentation within thirty (30)days after the Notice of Claim is made unless the other party agrees in writing to an extension of time. Failure to submit all particulars of the Claim including all supporting documentation within the time provided shall absolve the other party of all obligations therefor. An additional Claim made after the initial Claim which is based upon or arises out of the event will not be considered and is deemed waived. 4.3.4 Add the following sentence and Clauses(.1, .2,and.3)to Subparagraph 4.3.4: In the event"Rock Excavation"is required in the construction of this project,the following criteria shall apply: 1 "Rock Excavation"is described as igneous,metamorphic or sedimentary rock that cannot be removed by rippers or other mechanical methods and,therefore,requires drilling and blasting. .2 The excavation and disposal of all "Rock Excavation"that is indicated by the Soils Report shall be considered unclassified excavation and shall be included with site work grading as .., part of the lump sum base bid. .3 If"Rock Excavation"is required that is not indicated by the Soils Report,the Wal-Mart Construction Manager shall be notified prior to such rock excavation,and he must then visit the site and verify the necessity for excess"Rock Excavation,"determine an estimated quantity and provide the Contractor written approval to proceed. In the event the estimated quantity is exceeded,the Wal-Mart Construction Manager shall again be notified to establish a revised estimated quantity and authorize the Contractor to proceed. Payment for the authorized work shall be by a Change Order to the Contract. 00800-6 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 "" 3.9 SUPE"UNTENDENT 3.9 Add the following Subparagraph to 3.9: 3.9.2 The Superintendent(name previously submitted with bid)shall be approved by the Owner before the Contract will )e prepared for execution. The Superintendent shall devote total and full time attention to the requirements )f the Construction Documents and shall not work on any other project until final completion. 3.9.3 It is hereby agreed between Wal-Mart and the Contractor that the Contractor will perform any work that is directed by the Wal-Mart Construction Manager to meet the Wal-Mart contract completion date and will maintain the original management and supervision team to continue their office and job site duties on a full-time basis through contract completion date and/or any other time the Contractor has any work being performed on the project regardless of the date or condition of project completion. 3.10 CONT'RACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE 3.10.1 Modify the second sentence of Subparagraph 3.10.1 as follows: Revise"...The schedule shall..."to"...The progress chart shall...... 3.10.1 Add the following Cl iuse to 3.10.1: 1 Refer to Section 01320 for Contractor's Construction progress chart 3.12 SHOT'DRAWINGS,PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.12.4 Add the following se:itence to Subparagraph 3.12.4: Supplement in accordance with provisions of Section 01330- Submittal Procedures. 3.12.6 Add the following se atence to Subparagraph 3.12.6: Shop drawings and submittal data are considered"Not Approved"unless specifically stamped approved in accordance with Specifications Section 01330-Submittal Procedures. 3.12.8 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 3.12.8 .1 The Contractor may not make substitutions except with the written consent of the owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order. 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION I'M 3.18.1 Add the following C'4use to Subparagraph 3.18.1: 1 The indemnification,defense and hold harmless of Owner by Contractor and any other right of Owner against Contractor shall not be impaired or affected in any way by the failure of Owner to provide Contractor with a copy of a notice to Owner of mechanics lien or other information. Contractor shall require this language in any contract with all subcontractors. 00800-5 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 .2 Provide a 12 month warranty on workmanship and Contractor furnished materials. The Contractor agrees to correct any defects during construction and within one(1)year from .. the actual date of substantial completion. The Contractor shall make all necessary repairs at no expense to the Owner. The Contractor also agrees to repair,at his own expense,any Work that it may disturb when correcting such defects. The Contractor shall provide similar guarantees from those who furnish material and equipment. When correcting defects the Contractor must obtain Owner's approval, in writing,when replacing defective materials with materials that are different from those originally required to be installed. .3 Return for replacement,Wal-Mart and Owner furnished failed parts under warranty to the .� manufacturer. Record unit model and serial numbers in writing and forward to Wal-Mart. 3.6 TAXES 3.6 Add the following Subparagraph to 3.6: 3.6.2 In the event this project is constructed in an area where governmental jurisdiction requires income tax to be withheld,the Contractor shall comply with the requirements in a manner that will absolve the Owner of any withholding liability. 3.7 PERMITS,FEES,AND NOTICES 3.7.1 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 3.7.1: 1 Owner hereby appoints Contractor as Owner's agent for the limited purpose of applying for and obtaining in Owner's name any and all building permits and other permits,licenses,or approvals that may be required by governmental units or agencies for the Project. - Contractor hereby accepts the appointment to act as Owner's agent for the stated purpose. The Contractor is authorized to advance its own funds to pay all fees,impact fees,building permit fees, special utility extension fees,meter installation fees,entrance permit fees, special development, impact documents,and temporary easements. The Contractor shall provide Owner with proper verification of the actual cost thereof, and following receipt of oft proper verifications and approval,the Contractor will be reimbursed by Owner for the actual cost for the advances. The'Contractor Fee'for change orders will not apply to these items. Any single fee that is greater than$1000.00 shall be brought to the attention of the Wal-Mart Construction Manager for his review prior to payment by the Contractor. Parties "f agree that although Contractor is authorized to advance its own funds to pay the fees associated with such permits,licenses,and approvals,Contractor shall be entitled to no additional compensation for its services under this Subparagraph. Applications shall be made in the name of Wal-Mart,by agent!Name of Contractor 3.7.4 Modify Subparagraph 3.7.4 as follows: Delete"appropriate". 3.8 ALLOWANCES 3.8 Delete paragraph 3.8 in its entirety .w 0M 00800-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 3.1.4 The Contractor shall be licensed in the State where the project is located whether a resident of that State or not,and shall have appropriate certificates of licensure from that State's authorities having jurisdiction. 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.2.1 Add the following Clauses,(.1, .2,and.3) to Subparagraph 3.2.1: I The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of measurements,elevations, lines, and grades of the Work. Do not scale the drawings. If the Contractor chooses to measure 0 distances by scaling from the Drawings,it is totally at his risk and is not considered by Wal-Mart to be an accurate measurement. The Contractor shall do field work necessary to lay out and maintain the Work. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed due to scaling from the Drawings or differences between actual dimensions and the measurements indicated on the Drawings;differences which may be found shall be submitted to the Owner for his consideration before proceeding with the Work. .2 The Contractor shall be responsible for detennining the conditions of the existing site, including all existing improvements,paving,utilities,and construction, and shall have accounted for such conditions in the preparation of his bid and shall not be entitled to additional compensation as the result of not being familiar with the existing site conditions. .3 The Contractor is responsible for having a thorough knowledge of all Drawings, Specifications,General and Supplementary Conditions, Special Conditions,and other Contract Documents. Failure to acquaint himself with this knowledge does not relieve him of the responsibility for performing his work in a manner acceptable to the Owner. No P additional compensation will be allowed because of conditions that occur due to failure by the Contractor to familiarize himself and all workers with this knowledge. 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.3.3 Modify SubparagrapE 3.3.3 as follows: 3.3.3 Revisi.�"...already performed to determine..."to"...already performed(including,but not limited to the building pad)to determine..." 3.3 Add the following Subparagraph to 3.3: 3.3.4 The Contractor shall provide work that meets the requirements of the Owner's property insurance carrier. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.4.2 Delete subparagraph 3.4.2 in its entirety 3.5 WARRANTY 3.5.1 Add the following Clauses(.1, .2,and.3) to Subparagraph 3.5.1: I The Contractor shall provide a"Contractor's Statement of Warranty" as part of the requirements listed in 9.11.2 below. The "Contractor's Statement of Warranty" shall be on the Contractor's letterhead,signed by an officer of the company and shall state that the Work performed complies with 3.5.1 of the General Conditions and the warranty period extends one(1)year beyond the actual date of Substantial Completion as defined in Paragraph 9.8 below. 00800-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 2.1.2 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 2.1.2: 1 The indemnification,defense and hold harmless of Owner by Contractor and any other right of Owner against Contractor shall not be impaired or affected in any way by the failure of Owner to provide Contractor with a copy of a notice to Owner,notice of lien, .� mechanics lien,or other information. Contractor shall require this language in any contract with all Sub-Contractors. 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 2.2.1 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.1 in its entirety. 2.2.3 Modify the first sentence of Subparagraph 2.2.3 as follows: Revise"...limitations and utility locations... "to"...limitations and aproximate utility locations..." 2.2.3 Modify Subparagraph 2.2.3 as follows: Delete"The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the work." 2.2.3 Add the following Clause to Subparagraph 2.2.3 1 A soil investigation report has been made on this project and a log of borings prepared. This report was obtained only for use by the Architect/Engineer in design and is not a part of the Contract Documents. Soil investigation report is being furnished to the Contractor as general information only,and is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. Neither the - Owner,nor the Architect/Engineer assume responsibility for this report or log of borings. 2.2.4 Modify Subparagraph 2.2.4 as follows: Delete"Any other information or services relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work under the Owner's control shall be furnished by the Owner after reciept from the Contractor of a written request for such information or services. 2.2.5 Delete Subparagraph 2.2.5 in its entirety and substitute the following: .�. 2.2.5 The Contractor will be furnished,free of charge,25 copies of Drawings and Project Manuals for the building, and 10 sets of Site and Grading Drawings. Additional sets will be furnished at the cost of reproduction,postage and handling. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK ** 2.3.1 Modify Subparagraph 2.3.1 as follows: Delete"Persistently" w ARTICLE 3-CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.1 Add the following Subparagraph to 3.1: 00800-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �* UniSpec II: WM/DEV 1126999 SECTION 00800-SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS The following supplements modify,change,delete from or add to the General Conditions of The Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201 - Fifteenth Edition, 1997.Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions,the unaltered provisions of that Article,Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect. Any following Supplementary Conditions that modify, change,delete from or add to the Construction Contract between Owner and Contractor shall supersede the provisions in the Construction Contract. ARTICLE 1 -GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 1.2 Add the following Subparagraph to 1.2: 1.2.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the;standards of any technical society,organization or association,or to codes of local and state P authorities, shall mean the latest standard code,specification or tentative specification adopted and published as of the date of commencement of the Work as established in the Agreement,unless specifically stated otherwise. 1.5.2 Delete Subparagraph 1.5.2 and replace with the following: 1.5.2 The Contractor shall thoroughly examine all factors reasonably available to him,including but not limited to the Drawings, Specifications,soils report,site boundary and topography, site conditions,site history,local information, and seasonal weather conditions in the preparation of the Contract Sum. Soil report data are not considered all conclusive and it is the Contractor's responsibility to further investigate site conditions as he ietermines necessary. The Contractor shall be totally responsible for acceptance of the site and preparation cif the site to the proper grade and compaction requirements as indicated by the Drawings and Specifications. Any construction performed by the Contractor on the project will constitute acceptance of the site. Any constnuction performed by the Contractor on a building pad prepared by others will constitute ! acceptance of the,pad by the Contractor. IP ARTICLE 2-OWNER 2.1 GENERAL 2.1.1 Add the following Clauses(.1, .2,and3)to Subparagraph 2.1.1: 1 The Owner is Wal-Mart and is identified in the Agreement as Wal-Mart Stores,Inc., Bentonville,Arkansas. I .2 The term Wal-Mart is defined as Wal-Mart Stores,Inc.,Bentonville,Arkansas. The term Wal-Mart,is used throughout the Contract Documents where various set-up and installation crews will be interfacing with the Work of the Contractor or occupying substantially completed areas of the Work for the installation of Wal-Mart owned systems and equipment,as well as for the conduct of grand opening preparations. .3 The Owner's authorized representative is defined as the Wal-Mart Construction Manager. 00800-1 I Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 BLANK PAGE ..R 00700-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton, Massachusetts March 10,2000 """ ■ UniSpec II 102999 DOCUMENT 00700-GENERAL CONDITIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Conditions of tie Contract: General Conditions !� B. Related Documents: 1. AIA Document.A201-1997 2. Document 00800-Supplementary Conditions. 1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS A. The General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA Document A201-1997, is hereby made a part of these documents and oxcept as modified and supplemented by Document 00800 - Supplementary Conditions, are the General Conditions on which all agreements for this Work shall be based. B. One original document,AIA A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction,has been provided as ref- erence for use by the Contractor. 1.3 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1! A. Refer to Document OC 800 for amendments to these General Conditions. PART 2-EXECUTION Not Used PART 3 -PRODUCTS Not Used END OF DOCUMENT 00700-1 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL .. 16050 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods 16100 Wiring Methods 16121 Manufactured Wiring Systems 16128 Special Systems 16402 Low Volatage Service And Distribution 16500 Lighting 16525 Site Lighting(Included in Division 2.1) 16700 Communications 16925 HVAC Wiring END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS 00010-4 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 """ DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09250 Gypsum Board 09310 Ceramic Tile 09330 Quarry Tile 09511 Acoustical Pancl Ceilings 09650 Resilient Flooring 09651 Floor Treatment 09655 Resilient Base,knd Accessories 09720 Wall Covering, 09900 Paints And Coatings 09981 Elastomeric Coatings For Masonry DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIE 3 10170 Plastic Toilet Compartments 10260 Wall And Corner Guards 10810 Toilet Accessojies DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11160 Loading Dock Equipment 11400 Food Service Equipment DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Not Used DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13121 Fabric Structures 13810 Energy Monitc ring And Control 13812 Energy Manag.-ment System Wiring 13850 Detection And Alarm 13900 Fire Suppression DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS Not Used DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials And Methods 15100 Bulding Services Piping 15196 Natural Gas Piping 15410 Plumbing Fixtires 15480 Domestic Wat,;r Heaters 15600 Refrigeration]Equipment 15700 Heating,Ventilating,And Air Conditioning Equipment 15765 Infrared Heaters 15800 Air Distributicn 00010-3 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 All DIVISION 3 CONCRETE 03150 Concrete Accessories 03300 Cast-in-place Concrete 03360 Concrete Finishes 03480 Precast Concrete Specialties DIVISION 4 MASONRY 04060 Masonry Mortar(astm) 04220 Concrete Masonry Units(aci) DIVISION 5 METALS 05120 Structural Steel .., 05210 Steel Joists 05300 Metal Deck 05400 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05500 Metal Fabrications DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06100 Rough Carpentry 06200 Finish Carpentry 06400 Architectural Woodwork 06610 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07210 Building Insulation 07240 Exterior Insulation And Finish Systems 07411 Metal Roof Panels 07511 Built-up Asphalt Roofing 07550 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 07611 Sheet Metal Soffit 07620 Sheet Metal Flashing And Trim .� 07711 Gutters And Downspouts 07721 Manufactured Curbs 07722 Roof Hatches 07815 Mineral Fiber Fireproofing 07840 Firestopping 07900 Joint Sealers DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS 08110 Steel Doors And Frames 08311 Access Doors And Frames ..■ 08331 Coiling Counter Doors 08352 Accordion Folding Doors 08360 Overhead Doors 08383 Flexible Traffic Doors 08411 Aluminum Framed Storefronts 08462 Automatic Sliding Entrance Doors 08620 Unit Skylights 08710 Door Hardware 08800 Glazing 00010-2 Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 �* UniSpec II 102999 SECTION 00010-TABLE OF CONTENTS ivision Section Title INTRODUCTORY INFORMA rION 00001 Project Title Pa,;e 00010 Table of Contents BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Bidding Requirements (incuding Invitation to Bids, Instructions to Bidders, and Bid Forms) are issued by the Owner under separate cover and are not included in the Project Manual. CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00700 General Condit ions 00800 Supplementary Conditions III Other Contracting Requirements ;including Agreement,Bond,and Certificate Forms)are issued by the Owner under separate cover and are not included in the Project Manual. DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01100 Summary 01255 Request For In:.'ormation 01310 Construction Management And Coordination 01311 Progress Meeti ags 01320 Construction Progress Documentation 01330 Submittal Proca,-dures 01411 Mechanical Equipment Testing,Adjusting,And Balancing 01458 Laboratory Testing Services 01500 Temporary Facilities And Controls 01600 Product Requirements 01700 Execution Requirements 01731 Cutting And Patching DIVISION 2 SITE CONSTRUCTION 02023 Selective Site Demolition 02251 Shoring 02821 Chain Link Fences And Gates(building Related) F1 DIVISION 2.1 SITE CONSTRUCTION(ENGINEERING CONSULTANT DESIGN) The Sections within this Division and other Divisions listed within the Wal-Mart Sitework Specifications Table of Contents page are the responsibility of the Engineering Consultant , and not the responsibility of the Architect of Record. The Engineering Consultant,the seal and license number of the Professional Engineer registered in the State where the project is located,are also shown on the V6'al-Mart Sitework Specifications Table of Contents page. _. 00010-1 OR Wal-Mart Store#2901 Northampton,Massachusetts March 10,2000 PROJECT MANUAL WAL-MART TAKEOVER NORTHAMPTON,MASSACHUSETTS Store Number: 2901 Project Number: 99358 March 10,2000 For WAL-MART STORES,INC. Sam M.Walton Development Center 2001 S.E. 10th Street Bentonville,Arkansas 72712-6489 M PERRY L.BUTCHER&ASSOCIATES,ARCHITECTS 301 West Chestnut P.O.Box 2076 Rogers,Arkansas 72756 501-636-3545 1AAAA AA, NO!10506' ARKANGA 0 Wi � - o To M000/42 K(l �a a. 4M DEPT OF 8U =^ IFdSPECyT{�1� , r� �5 n, ti t z P E R R Y L B U T C H E R & A 5 5 0 C I A T E 5 A R C H l T E C T 5 O B O X 2 0 7 6 R O G E R S A R K A N S A S 7 2 7 5 7 A•1 •A